Drypix 6000 FM-DL 100 05e
Uploaded by
raj_meditechDrypix 6000 FM-DL 100 05e
Uploaded by
raj_meditechFUJI MEDICAL DRY LASER IMAGER
DRYPIX Smart
DRYPIX 6000
DRYPIX PRIMA
FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
Copyright © 2008-2012 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic, mechani-
cal, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Document No. 020-201-05E
First Edition Sep. 20, 2008
Revised Edition Dec. 10, 2012
Printed in Japan
0.1
1. HANDLING THIS SERVICE MANUAL 1.3 About Notation in the Manual
n Notation of Cautions, Warning, etc.
1.1 About This Service Manual The notation formats of "WARNING", "CAUTION", "INSTRUCTIONS", "NOTE",
"REMARKS" and "REFERENCE" are shown below.
n Scope
WARNING
This Service Manual applies to the Fuji Medical Dry Imager DRYPIX Smart (DRYPIX
6000) and DRYPIX PRIMA (FM-DL 100). Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in death or
Therefore, some of the descriptions in this manual contain version-specific information serious injuries.
on DRYPIX Smart and DRYPIX PRIMA.
n Notation of Unit Symbols CAUTION
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in light or
(SI) are used, as a rule. However, some metric units that are not allowed in the SI but moderate injuries, or serious malfunction (unrecoverable or difficult to recover)
are permitted under the Measurement Law are partially used. of the equipment.
1.2 Service Manual Appropriations <INSTRUCTIONS>
1. All rights are reserved by the FUJIFILM Corporation (FUJIFILM). Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in damage to
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service the equipment, or other problems.
personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore <NOTE>
proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.
Indicated where special attention is required during a work procedure.
4. FUJIFILM's prior consent is required in regard to the following.
- Manual copying in whole or in part. <REMARKS>
- Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
- Manual uses for purposes other than technical service. Indicated where description of the term used or supplementary explanation is given.
5. The contents of this manual are subject to changes for product improvement.
6. Accompanying documents were originally drafted in the English language.
n Indication of Refer To
The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below.
{MC:1_Cover}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.1
0.2
1.4 Servicing Instruments and Tools That ■ DRYPIX Smart
Require Inspection/Calibration For DRYPIX Smart, installing Modality Connection Software is not required to connect
to various modalities.
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and Therefore, no distinction is made for DRYPIX Smart between "multi modality
tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate. equipment" and "non-multi modality equipment".
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and
tools.
n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration
Name Inspection Calibration
Digital multimeter
Densitometer
Steel ruler (300 mm)
1.5 Machine Names Described in This Manual
Of the machines (modalities) that can be connected to DRYPIX PRIMA, CR-
IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL (PRIMA system), CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL (V4.1 or
later), and CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL (V5.0 or later) may be indicated as “settings-
changeable models” (models in which this equipment settings can be changed) in this
manual.
This means that the names of machines described as “settings-changeable models”
mean CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL (PRIMA system), CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL
(V4.1 or later), or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL (V5.0 or later).
1.6 Multi Modality Equipment
■ DRYPIX PRIMA
For DRYPIX PRIMA, Installing Modality Connection Software in this equipment
with main unit software version V2.0 or later (hereafter called V2.0) enables various
modalities to be connected,
Such equipment are called “multi modality equipment” in this manual.
On the other hand, equipment not connected to the various modalities are called “non-
multi modality equipment”.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.2
GENERAL CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTION 0.3
SAFETY PRECAUTION (DRYPIX 6000)
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION.............................................. 1
1.1 General Precautions.........................................................................1
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation...............................................3
2. LABELS..................................................................... 5
2.1 Laser Caution Labels.......................................................................5
2.2 Other Labels.....................................................................................7
2.3 Additional Protective Grounding Earth Mark..................................11
2.4 Power Cable Caution Label (USA Only).........................................11
3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR LASER RADIATION
EXPOSURE PREVENTION....................................... 12
4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS............................... 14
5. CLASSIFICATION.................................................... 15
6. CAUTIONS ON NETWORK....................................... 16
7. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves..................... 17
7.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).............................................17
7.2 Further Information for IEC60601-1-2 Ed2.1: 2004........................17
020-201-05E DRYPIX6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.3
GENERAL CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTION 0.4
SAFETY PRECAUTION (FM-DL 100)
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION.............................................. 1
1.1 General Precautions.........................................................................1
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation...............................................3
2. LABELS..................................................................... 5
2.1 Laser Caution Labels.......................................................................5
2.2 Other Labels.....................................................................................7
2.3 Additional Protective Grounding Earth Mark..................................10
2.4 Power Cable Caution Label............................................................10
3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR LASER RADIATION
EXPOSURE PREVENTION....................................... 11
4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS............................... 13
5. CLASSIFICATION.................................................... 14
6. CAUTIONS ON NETWORK....................................... 15
020-201-05E DRYPIX6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.4
GENERAL CONTENTS SPECIFICATIONS 0.5
SPECIFICATIONS (DRYPIX 6000)
1. SPECIFICATIONS...................................................... 1
1.1 Part Name........................................................................................1
1.2 List of Optional Parts........................................................................2
1.3 General Specifications.....................................................................2
1.4 Dimensions and Weight...................................................................5
1.5 Environmental Requirements...........................................................5
1.6 Electrical Requirements...................................................................6
1.7 Equipment Installation Space...........................................................7
1.7.1 Installation Space.........................................................................................7
1.7.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work.......................................................8
1.8 Disposing the Equipment.................................................................8
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.5
GENERAL CONTENTS SPECIFICATIONS 0.6
SPECIFICATIONS (FM-DL 100)
1. SPECIFICATIONS...................................................... 1
1.1 Part Name........................................................................................1
1.2 List of Optional Parts........................................................................2
1.3 General Specifications.....................................................................3
1.4 Dimensions and Weight...................................................................5
1.5 Environmental Requirements...........................................................6
1.6 Electrical Requirements...................................................................7
1.7 Equipment Installation Space...........................................................8
1.7.1 Installation Space.........................................................................................8
1.7.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work.......................................................8
1.8 Disposing the Equipment.................................................................8
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.6
GENERAL CONTENTS DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) 0.7
DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) (DRYPIX 6000)
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT................................... MD-1
1.1 Functions of Equipment.............................................................MD-1
1.2 System Configuration................................................................MD-1
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts................................MD-4
1.3.1 External View........................................................................................ MD-4
1.3.2 Operation Panel.................................................................................... MD-5
1.3.3 Layout of Units...................................................................................... MD-7
1.3.4 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions................................. MD-8
1.3.5 Layout of Boards................................................................................. MD-15
2. STARTING UP ENDING THE EQUIPMENT........ MD-17
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL OPERATIONS... MD-
18
4.DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL.......... MD-19
4.1 System Block Diagram............................................................MD-19
4.2 Interlock Control......................................................................MD-19
5. IMAGE PROCESSING........................................ MD-20
6. PRINTING FORMATS......................................... MD-21
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.7
GENERAL CONTENTS DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) 0.8
DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) (FM-DL 100)
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT................................... MD-1 3.2 Removal Unit...........................................................................MD-20
3.2.1 Suction Cup Arm Home Position......................................................... MD-20
1.1 Functions of Equipment.............................................................MD-1
3.2.2 Film Suction........................................................................................ MD-20
1.2 System Configuration.............................................................MD-1.1 3.2.3 Film Flapping Operations.................................................................... MD-21
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts................................MD-3 3.2.4 Film Release....................................................................................... MD-21
1.3.1 External View........................................................................................ MD-3 3.2.5 Removal Conveyance......................................................................... MD-22
1.3.2 Operation Panel.................................................................................... MD-4 3.2.6 Returning to Home Position................................................................ MD-22
1.3.3 Layout of Units...................................................................................... MD-5 3.3 Conveyor Unit..........................................................................MD-23
1.3.4 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions................................. MD-6 3.3.1 Conveyance........................................................................................ MD-23
1.3.5 Layout of Boards................................................................................. MD-13 3.3.2 Striking against Stopper...................................................................... MD-23
3.3.3 Gripping by Conveyor Unit Exit Roller................................................ MD-24
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING THE EQUIPMENT.MD-14 3.3.4 Film Edge Sensor................................................................................ MD-24
2.1 Power ON Operations.............................................................MD-14 3.3.5 Pre-recording Conveyance................................................................. MD-25
2.2 Error Processing......................................................................MD-15 3.4 Sub-scanning Unit...................................................................MD-26
3.4.1 Sub-scanning Conveyance................................................................. MD-26
2.3 Power OFF Operations...........................................................MD-16
3.4.2 Recording Conveyance....................................................................... MD-26
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL OPERATIONS... MD- 3.5 Scanning Optics Unit...............................................................MD-27
17 3.5.1 Scanner Unit....................................................................................... MD-27
3.1 Film Loading Unit....................................................................MD-17 3.5.2 Laser Exposure................................................................................... MD-27
3.5.3 Density Measurement Section............................................................ MD-28
3.1.1 Film Sizes............................................................................................ MD-17
3.5.4 Temperature Correction...................................................................... MD-28
3.1.2 Film Tray Detection/Film Size Identification........................................ MD-17
3.1.3 Film Pack/Shutter Detection............................................................... MD-18 3.6 Heat Development Unit...........................................................MD-29
3.1.4 Shutter Lock Mechanism.................................................................... MD-18 3.6.1 Heat Development.............................................................................. MD-29
3.1.5 Tray Detection/Tray Lock.................................................................... MD-19 3.6.2 Temperature Control........................................................................... MD-29
3.7 Film Release Unit....................................................................MD-30
3.7.1 Film Discharge.................................................................................... MD-30
3.7.2 High Speed Discharge........................................................................ MD-30
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.8
GENERAL CONTENTS DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) 0.9
4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL....... MD-31
4.1 System Block Diagram............................................................MD-31
4.2 Interlock Control......................................................................MD-32
4.3 Functions of Boards................................................................MD-34
4.3.1 CPU Board.......................................................................................... MD-34
4.3.2 PRN Board.......................................................................................... MD-35
4.3.3 SND Board.......................................................................................... MD-36
4.3.4 HTD Board.......................................................................................... MD-38
4.3.5 PSU27A (Power Supply Unit)............................................................. MD-38
4.3.6 PSU28B (Power Supply Unit)............................................................. MD-39
5. IMAGE PROCESSING........................................ MD-40
5.1 Image Input.............................................................................MD-40
5.1.1 Valid Services...................................................................................... MD-40
5.1.2 Service Availability.............................................................................. MD-40
5.1.3 Image Data Reception Availability....................................................... MD-40
5.1.4 DICOM Settings and Restrictions....................................................... MD-40
5.2 Image Spool Management Function.......................................MD-41
5.3 Image Processing (Multi Modality Equipment Only)................MD-43
5.3.1 Image Processing 1............................................................................ MD-43
5.3.2 Image Processing 2............................................................................ MD-44
5.3.3 Annotation........................................................................................... MD-45
6. PRINTING FORMATS......................................... MD-46
6.1 Reading the Format Name......................................................MD-46
6.2 Standard Formats....................................................................MD-46
6.3 Mixed Formats.........................................................................MD-47
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.9
GENERAL CONTENTS TROUBLESHOOTING (MT) 0.10
TROUBLESHOOTING (MT) (DRYPIX 6000)
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD........................... MT-1
2. ERROR CODE...................................................... MT-2
2.1 Checking Error Codes............................................................... MT-2
2.2 Format of Detailed Information................................................. MT-3
2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information.......................MT-3
2.2.2 DEN Related (Internal Densitometer) Errors Detailed Information........MT-6
2.2.3 ESN Related (Film Edge Sensor Related) Errors Detailed Information.MT-6
2.2.4 DEV Related (Temperature Control Related) Errors Detailed Information.....
MT-7
3. ERROR CODE TABLE........................................... MT-9
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.10
GENERAL CONTENTS TROUBLESHOOTING (MT) 0.11
TROUBLESHOOTING (MT) (FM-DL 100)
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD........................... MT-1
2. ERROR CODE................................................... MT-1.1
2.1 Checking Error Codes............................................................ MT-1.1
2.2 Format of Detailed Information.............................................. MT-1.2
2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information....................MT-1.2
2.2.2 DEN Related (Internal Densitometer) Errors Detailed Information.....MT-1.5
2.2.3 ESN Related (Film Edge Sensor Related) Errors Detailed Information...MT-
1.5
2.2.4 DEV Related (Temperature Control Related) Errors Detailed Information.....
MT-1.6
3. ERROR CODE TABLE........................................ MT-1.8
4. ACQUIRING ART-PC LOGS................................ MT-62
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.11
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.12
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) (DRYPIX 6000)
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, REPLACEMENTS, 3.7 Squeezing Roller.....................................................................MC-20
AND ADJUSTMENTS........................................... MC-1 3.8 Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor Assembly (SA11/SA21).MC-21
3.9 BCR Assembly (SA16)............................................................MC-22
1. COVERS............................................................... MC-2
3.10 BCR Assembly (SA26)............................................................MC-24
1.1 Upper Rear Cover.....................................................................MC-2
1.2 Lower Rear Cover.....................................................................MC-2 4. REMOVAL UNIT................................................. MC-26
1.3 Upper Left Cover.......................................................................MC-3 4.1 Removal Unit...........................................................................MC-26
1.4 Lower Left Cover.......................................................................MC-4 4.2 Suction Cup Arm.....................................................................MC-28
1.5 Upper Right Cover.....................................................................MC-4 4.3 Suction Cup.............................................................................MC-29
1.6 Lower Right Cover.....................................................................MC-5 4.4 Bellows....................................................................................MC-30
1.7 Upper Film Loading Unit Cover.................................................MC-5 4.5 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB12/SB22)..........................MC-32
1.8 Lower Film Loading Unit Cover.................................................MC-6 4.6 Film Removing Motor (MB11/MB21).......................................MC-33
1.9 Upper Cover..............................................................................MC-6 4.7 Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB12/MB22)....................MC-34
4.8 Removal Drive Cam (Front side).............................................MC-35
2. FRAME................................................................. MC-7
4.9 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor (SB11/SB21).............MC-40
2.1 Interlock Switch Assembly.........................................................MC-7
2.2 Interlock Switch (SK3) Assembly...............................................MC-9 5. CONVEYOR UNIT.............................................. MC-42
5.1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly..................................................MC-42
3. FILM LOADING UNIT......................................... MC-10
5.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly................................MC-44
3.1 Upper Film Tray.......................................................................MC-10
5.3 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)...........................................MC-45
3.2 Lower Film Tray....................................................................... MC-11
5.4 Stopper Assembly...................................................................MC-46
3.3 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit...........................................................MC-12
5.5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1)......................................................MC-47
3.4 Tray Interlock Switch Assembly (SA12/SA22).........................MC-14
5.6 Conveyor Unit Exit Roller (Lower)...........................................MC-48
3.5 Tray Lock Assembly................................................................MC-18
5.7 Film Edge Sensor (SD5).........................................................MC-49
3.6 Shutter Lock Mechanism.........................................................MC-19
5.8 Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide................................MC-50
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.12
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.13
5.9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller.......................................................MC-51 8.5 Heat Development Unit Conveyance Motor (MG1).................MC-79
5.10 Film Conveyance Motor (MD1)...............................................MC-52 8.6 Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide.................................MC-80
5.11 Conveyance Gear...................................................................MC-54
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT......................................... MC-81
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT....................................... MC-55 9.1 Film Release Unit....................................................................MC-81
6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit................................MC-55 9.2 LED28A Board.........................................................................MC-84
6.2 Flat belt (Front of the Machine)...............................................MC-59
10. CONTROLLER.................................................... MC-85
6.3 Sub-Scanning Unit Entrance Roller.........................................MC-61
10.1 PSU27A / PSU31B Board Assembly.......................................MC-85
6.4 Sub-Scanning Unit Exit Roller.................................................MC-63
10.2 PSU27A Board........................................................................MC-87
6.5 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1).....................................................MC-65
6.5.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-65 10.3 PSU31B Board........................................................................MC-88
6.5.2 Adjusting when Replacing Sub-Scanning Motor................................. MC-66 10.4 PRN28B Board........................................................................MC-89
6.6 Flat belt (Rear of the Machine)................................................MC-67 10.5 CPU32A Board........................................................................MC-91
6.7 Flywheel..................................................................................MC-68 10.6 DIMM.......................................................................................MC-94
6.8 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1)............................MC-69 10.7 CF (Compact Flash Memory)..................................................MC-95
10.8 SND28B Board........................................................................MC-96
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT........................................... MC-70
7.1 Scanner Unit............................................................................MC-70 11. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE....... MC-98
7.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-70 11.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing.........................................MC-99
7.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit.................................... MC-71 11.1.1 Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing.......................... MC-99
11.1.2 Upgrading the Version from the PC for Servicing............................. MC-100
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT.............................. MC-73 11.1.3 Full Installation from the PC for Servicing......................................... MC-101
8.1 Film Cooling Section...............................................................MC-73
8.2 Heat Development Rack Assembly.........................................MC-74 12. RESTORING THE COMPACT FLASH MEMORY (CF)....
MC-103
8.3 Heat Development Roller........................................................MC-76
12.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing.......MC-103
8.4 Thermal Protector....................................................................MC-77
12.2 Copying the Main Unit Software to the CF............................MC-104
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.13
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.14
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) (FM-DL 100)
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, REPLACEMENTS, 4. REMOVAL UNIT................................................. MC-22
AND ADJUSTMENTS........................................... MC-1 4.1 Removal Unit...........................................................................MC-22
CONTENTS................................................................ MC-2 4.2 Suction Cup Arm.....................................................................MC-24
4.3 Removal Drive Cam................................................................MC-25
1. COVERS............................................................... MC-4 4.4 Suction Cup.............................................................................MC-29
1.1 Covers which can be Removed Individually..............................MC-4 4.5 Bellows....................................................................................MC-30
1.1.1 Rear Cover............................................................................................ MC-4
4.6 Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB2).................................MC-32
1.1.2 Belt Cover............................................................................................. MC-4
4.7 Film Removing Motor (MB1)...................................................MC-33
1.2 Covers which Need to be Removed in Certain Order...............MC-5
1.2.1 Left Cover.............................................................................................. MC-5 4.8 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB2).....................................MC-34
1.2.2 Upper Cover.......................................................................................... MC-6 4.9 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor (SB1).........................MC-35
1.2.3 Film Release Unit Cover....................................................................... MC-6
1.2.4 Film Loading Unit Cover....................................................................... MC-7 5. CONVEYOR UNIT.............................................. MC-37
1.2.5 Lower Right Cover................................................................................ MC-7
5.1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly..................................................MC-37
1.2.6 Right Cover........................................................................................... MC-8
5.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly................................MC-39
2. FRAME................................................................. MC-9 5.3 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)...........................................MC-40
2.1 Interlock Switch Assembly.........................................................MC-9 5.4 Stopper Assembly...................................................................MC-41
5.5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1)......................................................MC-42
3. FILM LOADING UNIT......................................... MC-11
5.6 Conveyor Unit Exit Roller (Lower)...........................................MC-43
3.1 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit...........................................................MC-11
5.7 Film Edge Sensor (SD5).........................................................MC-44
3.2 Film Tray..................................................................................MC-13
5.8 Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide................................MC-45
3.3 Tray Detection Switch (SA2)...................................................MC-14
5.9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller.......................................................MC-46
3.4 Tray Lock Assembly................................................................MC-18
5.10 Film Conveyance Motor (MD1)...............................................MC-47
3.5 Shutter Lock Mechanism.........................................................MC-19
5.11 Conveyance Gear...................................................................MC-49
3.6 Squeezing Roller (Upper)........................................................MC-20
3.7 Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor (SA1).............................MC-21
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.14
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.15
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT....................................... MC-50 10. CONTROLLER.................................................... MC-79
6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit................................MC-50 10.1 PSU27A/PSU28B Board.........................................................MC-79
6.2 Sub-Scanning Unit Roller........................................................MC-53 10.2 PRN28A Board........................................................................MC-81
6.3 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1).....................................................MC-56 10.3 CPU28A Board........................................................................MC-83
6.3.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-56 10.4 DIMM.......................................................................................MC-84
6.3.2 Adjusting when Replacing Sub-Scanning Motor.............................. MC-57.1
10.5 CF (Compact Flash Memory)..................................................MC-85
6.4 Flywheel..................................................................................MC-58
6.5 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1)............................MC-61 11. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE....... MC-86
11.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing (or Settings-Changeable
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT........................................... MC-65 Models)....................................................................................MC-87
7.1 Scanner Unit............................................................................MC-65 11.1.1 Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing (or Settings-
7.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-65 Changeable Models)........................................................................... MC-87
7.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit.................................... MC-67 11.1.2 Upgrading the Version from the PC for Servicing............................... MC-88
7.1.3 Replacing the Scanner Unit (When Changing from 839Y0060 to 11.1.3 Full Installation from the PC for Servicing........................................... MC-89
839Y100057)................................................................................... MC-67.1
12. RESTORING THE COMPACT FLASH MEMORY (CF)....
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT.............................. MC-68 MC-91
8.1 Film Cooling Section...............................................................MC-68 12.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing.........MC-91
8.2 Heat Development Rack Assembly.........................................MC-69 12.2 Copying the Main Unit Software to the CF..............................MC-92
8.3 Heat Development Roller........................................................MC-71
13. C L E A N I N G T H E D U S T- P RO O F G L A S S O F T H E
8.4 Thermal Protector....................................................................MC-72 SCANNER UNIT (839Y100057 ONLY)............... MC-94
8.5 Heat Development Unit Conveyance Motor (MG1).................MC-74
8.6 Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide.................................MC-75
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT......................................... MC-76
9.1 Film Release Unit....................................................................MC-76
9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board (LED28A)...........MC-78
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.15
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.16
SERVICE MODE (MU)(DRYPIX 6000)
1. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY)................................MU-1 [1-1] Setting1.............................................................................. MU-36
[1-1-1] Check Version......................................................... MU-36
1.1 U-Utility Menu Tree....................................................................MU-1 [1-1-1a] Input Serial No........................................................ MU-36
[1-1-2] Set DICOM............................................................. MU-36
1.2 Starting and Ending the U-Utility...............................................MU-1
[1-1-2-1] AE Title.......................................................... MU-36
1.3 Details of U-Utility Commands..................................................MU-1 [1-1-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title........................................... MU-36
[U-1] Automatically Calibrating the Film Density..................................... MU-1 [1-1-2-3] Port No.......................................................... MU-37
[U-2] QC test pattern output.................................................................... MU-1 [1-1-3] Set Network............................................................ MU-37
[U-3] Resetting Film Remaining Counter................................................ MU-1 [1-1-3-1] IP Address..................................................... MU-37
[U-4] Setting Sensitive Material Correction Parameters......................... MU-1 [1-1-3-2] Subnet Mask................................................. MU-37
[U-5] Setting Date/Time.......................................................................... MU-1 [1-1-3-3] Gateway........................................................ MU-38
[U-6] Output the SMPTE pattern............................................................. MU-2 [1-1-3-4] Host Name.................................................... MU-38
[U-7] Mammography QC pattern output................................................. MU-2 [1-1-4] Display Mac Address.............................................. MU-38
[1-1-5] Registration service pc........................................... MU-38
2. PC-UTILITY.........................................................MU-3 [1-2] Setting2.............................................................................. MU-39
[1-2-1] Set Rem.Films........................................................ MU-39
2.1 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing..............................MU-3 [1-2-2] Set Trays................................................................. MU-39
2.1.1 Environment of PC for Servicing........................................................... MU-3 [1-2-3] Enable Film Size..................................................... MU-39
2.1.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing......................................... MU-4 [1-2-4] Enable QC.............................................................. MU-39
[1-2-5] Set Target Den........................................................ MU-39
2.1.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC............................................... MU-4
[1-2-6] Printing Dmax......................................................... MU-39
2.1.4 Setting Grouping Symbols.................................................................... MU-6
[1-2-7] Real Dmax on film.................................................. MU-40
2.1.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder......................................................... MU-8 [1-2-8] Adjust Dmax........................................................... MU-40
2.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing.. MU-9 [1-2-9] Enable ManmoQC.................................................. MU-40
2.1.7 Settings in the Use of Windows Vista PC for Servicing...................... MU-13 [1-2-10] Check Counters...................................................... MU-40
2.1.8 Settings in the Use of Windows 7 PC for Servicing............................ MU-19 [1-2-11] Clear Counters........................................................ MU-40
[1-2-12] Automated F.D.C.................................................... MU-40
2.2 Flow of PC-Utility Operations..................................................MU-24 [1-2-13] Set Film infomation................................................. MU-40
2.2.1 Connecting PC for Servicing to the Network....................................... MU-24 [1-2-14] Display indv. data.................................................... MU-40
2.2.2 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility).............................. MU-24 [1-3] Setting3.............................................................................. MU-41
2.2.3 PC-Utility Operations........................................................................... MU-26 [1-3-1] Set SMPTE............................................................. MU-41
[1-3-2] Set Date.................................................................. MU-41
2.2.4 Disconnecting the Equipment............................................................. MU-31
[1-3-3] Ele Save Mode....................................................... MU-41
2.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree...............................................................MU-32 [1-3-4] Set Alarm................................................................ MU-41
[1-3-5] Reboot.................................................................... MU-41
2.4 Details of PC-Utility Commands..............................................MU-36 [1-3-6] Film Characteristic ID............................................. MU-42
[1] System information and setup..................................................... MU-36 [1-3-7] Power Supply Voltage............................................. MU-42
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.16
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.17
[1-3-8] Recognize position on 8x10(20x25)....................... MU-43 [3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior.MU-56
[1-3-9] Recognize position on 10x12(25x30)..................... MU-43 [3-5-2-3] Magnification Type........................................ MU-57
[1-3-10] Recognize position on 10x14(26x36)..................... MU-43 [3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size.................................. MU-57
[1-3-11] Warning at system start.......................................... MU-43 [3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type............................ MU-57
[1-4] Initialize.............................................................................. MU-43 [3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type................................ MU-57
[1-4-1] Save Data............................................................... MU-43 [3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size...................... MU-58
[1-4-2] Initialize................................................................... MU-43 [3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior................... MU-58
[1-4-3] Recover.................................................................. MU-43 [3-5-2-9] Procedure...................................................... MU-58
[1-5] Log data............................................................................. MU-44 [3-5-2-10] Edge Detection.............................................. MU-58
[1-5-1] Display Error Log.................................................... MU-44 [3-5-2-11] Detection Level.............................................. MU-59
[1-5-2] Clear Error Log....................................................... MU-44 [3-5-2-12] Sharpness..................................................... MU-59
[1-5-3] Display DICOM Log................................................ MU-44 [3-5-2-13] Character Color............................................. MU-59
[1-5-4] Logging Mode......................................................... MU-45 [3-5-3] LUT Common.......................................................... MU-60
[2] Transfer Indv. Data....................................................................... MU-46 [3-5-3-1] Default LUT................................................... MU-60
[3] Client Configuration..................................................................... MU-46 [3-5-3-2] Illumination.................................................... MU-60
[3-1] Add Client.......................................................................... MU-46 [3-5-3-3] Ambient Light................................................ MU-60
[3-2] Delete Client...................................................................... MU-47 [3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)..... MU-60
[3-3] Change Client Name......................................................... MU-48 [3-5-3-5] Default Illumination........................................ MU-61
[3-4] Read CLTInfo..................................................................... MU-48 [3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light.................................... MU-61
[3-5] Clients................................................................................ MU-50 [3-5-3-7] Procedure...................................................... MU-61
[3-5-1] Protocol................................................................... MU-51 [3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8......................................................... MU-62
[3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)............... MU-51 [3-5-4-1] Max Density................................................... MU-62
[3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ....................................... MU-51 [3-5-4-2] Min Density.................................................... MU-62
[3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H Warning)....... [3-5-4-3] γ Table No..................................................... MU-62
MU-52 [3-5-4-4] Contrast......................................................... MU-62
[3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H [3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points............................... MU-63
Warning)........................................................ MU-52 [3-5-4-6] Density.......................................................... MU-63
[3-5-1-5] Change Film Size.......................................... MU-52 [3-5-4-7] Shift............................................................... MU-63
[3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout..................................... MU-53 [3-5-4-8] Contrast......................................................... MU-63
[3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT.......................................... MU-53 [3-5-5] Output Format......................................................... MU-64
[3-5-1-8] Use Max/Min Density.................................... MU-53 [3-5-5-1] Film Size........................................................ MU-64
[3-5-1-9] Extension Format ID...................................... MU-54 [3-5-5-2] Medium Type................................................. MU-64
[3-5-1-10] Use Default Annotation.................................. MU-54 [3-5-5-3] Film Orientation............................................. MU-64
[3-5-1-11] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F]).......... MU-54 [3-5-5-4] Border Density............................................... MU-64
[3-5-1-12] Define Film Size of 11x14.............................. MU-55 [3-5-5-5] Polarity.......................................................... MU-64
[3-5-2] Magnify................................................................... MU-55 [3-5-5-6] Trim............................................................... MU-65
[3-5-2-1] Smoothing Type............................................ MU-55 [3-5-5-7] Trim Width..................................................... MU-65
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.17
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.18
[3-5-5-8] Trim Density.................................................. MU-65 [5-1] Full Install........................................................................... MU-77
[3-5-5-9] Number of Copies......................................... MU-65 [5-2] Upgrading.......................................................................... MU-77
[3-5-5-10] Print Priority................................................... MU-65 [6] Output Film.................................................................................. MU-78
[3-5-5-11] Resolution..................................................... MU-66 [6-1] 24-Steps............................................................................ MU-78
[3-5-5-12] Default Number of Copies............................. MU-66 [6-2] 17-Steps............................................................................ MU-78
[3-5-5-13] Default Print Priority...................................... MU-66 [6-3] Cleaning Film..................................................................... MU-78
[3-5-5-14] Default Medium Type.................................... MU-66 [6-4] Flat pattern......................................................................... MU-78
[3-5-5-15] Default Film Orientation................................. MU-67 [6-5] Grid.................................................................................... MU-78
[3-5-5-16] Default Film Size........................................... MU-67 [6-6] Uniformity........................................................................... MU-78
[3-5-5-17] Default Border Density.................................. MU-67 [6-7] Low Density Check Pattern............................................... MU-79
[3-5-5-18] Default Trim................................................... MU-67 [6-8] Sharpness Pattern............................................................. MU-79
[3-5-5-19] Requested Resolution ID.............................. MU-68 [6-9] Sharpness Pattern [x2]...................................................... MU-79
[3-5-5-20] Default Polarity.............................................. MU-68 [6-10] Scanner Diag. Pattern....................................................... MU-79
[3-5-5-21] Mirror............................................................. MU-68 [6-11] Special Resolution............................................................. MU-79
[3-5-5-22] Margin Between Image................................. MU-68 [6-7] SMPTE.............................................................................. MU-79
[3-5-5-23] Image Layout................................................. MU-69 [7] F.D.C............................................................................................ MU-79
[3-5-5-24] Processing Type............................................ MU-69 [7-1] AUTO F.D.C....................................................................... MU-79
[3-5-6] Annotation............................................................... MU-70 [7-2] Check Density.................................................................... MU-80
[3-5-6-1] Annotation Font............................................. MU-70 [7-3] 24-Steps............................................................................ MU-80
[3-5-6-2] Annotation Extend......................................... MU-70 [7-4] Display 24-Steps................................................................ MU-80
[3-5-6-3] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/ [7-5] Manual F.D.C..................................................................... MU-80
Lower Center/Lower Right............................. MU-70 [7-6] Set Collect.T....................................................................... MU-80
[3-6] Common............................................................................ MU-71 [7-7] Clear Collect.T................................................................... MU-80
[3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout............................................ MU-71 [7-8] Uniformity........................................................................... MU-81
[3-6-2] Association Count................................................... MU-71 [7-8-1] Clear....................................................................... MU-81
[3-6-3] Logging DICOM...................................................... MU-71 [7-8-2] Manual Input........................................................... MU-81
[3-6-4] Model...................................................................... MU-72 [7-9] Check Internal densitometer.............................................. MU-81
[3-6-5] Manufacturer........................................................... MU-72 [7-10] DM Sensor Monitor............................................................ MU-81
[3-6-6] Default Client.......................................................... MU-72 [8] Check Scanner............................................................................ MU-82
[3-6-7] Requested Dmax less than 3.6............................... MU-73 [8-1] Adjusting Main Scanner..................................................... MU-82
[3-7] Sarmaker........................................................................... MU-73 [8-1-1] Scanning Width....................................................... MU-82
[4] File Transfer................................................................................. MU-76 [8-1-2] Scanning Position................................................... MU-83
[4-1] Single file .......................................................................... MU-76 [8-1-3] Initialize Scanner.................................................... MU-83
[4-2] Analysis Data..................................................................... MU-76 [8-2] Edge Sensor Monitor......................................................... MU-83
[4-3] G-curve Data..................................................................... MU-76 [8-3] Reset Scanner Data.......................................................... MU-83
[4-4] Operation Data.................................................................. MU-76 [8-4] Polygonal Motor................................................................. MU-84
[5] Upgrading.................................................................................... MU-77 [8-5] LD...................................................................................... MU-84
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.18
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.19
[8-6] Initial Check....................................................................... MU-84
[8-7] Prn Board Test................................................................... MU-84
[9] Heat-Developer............................................................................ MU-85
[9-1] Temperature....................................................................... MU-85
[9-2] Heating.............................................................................. MU-85
[9-3] Fan Operation.................................................................... MU-85
[9-4] Temp. Control.................................................................... MU-85
[9-5] Set Heater Temp. (on each unit)........................................ MU-85
[9-6] Set Heater Temp. (on both HG1/HG2)............................... MU-86
[10] Check Mechanism....................................................................... MU-86
[10-1] Film Removing................................................................... MU-86
[10-2] Motor Ope.......................................................................... MU-86
[10-3] Adjusting Sub Scanner...................................................... MU-87
[10-4] Grip.................................................................................... MU-87
[10-5] Other Actuator.................................................................... MU-87
[10-6] Sensor Monitor.................................................................. MU-87
[10-7] Convey............................................................................... MU-87
[10-8] Barcode Reader................................................................. MU-88
[10-9] Inter Lock Check................................................................ MU-89
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.19
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.20
SERVICE MODE (MU) (FM-DL 100)
1. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY)................................MU-1 2.4 Details of PC-Utility Commands..............................................MU-19
[1] System information and setup..................................................... MU-19
1.1 U-Utility Menu Tree....................................................................MU-1 [1-1] Setting1.............................................................................. MU-19
1.2 Starting and Ending the U-Utility...............................................MU-1 [1-1-1] Check Version......................................................... MU-19
[1-1-1a] Input Serial No........................................................ MU-19
1.3 Details of U-Utility Commands..................................................MU-1 [1-1-2] Set DICOM............................................................. MU-19
[U-1] Automatic Density Correction........................................................ MU-1 [1-1-2-1] AE Title.......................................................... MU-19
[U-2] Outputting QC Test Pattern............................................................ MU-1 [1-1-2-2] Port No.......................................................... MU-19
[U-3] Reset Film Counters...................................................................... MU-1 [1-1-3] Set Network............................................................ MU-20
[U-4] Setting the Sensitive Material Correction Parameter..................... MU-1 [1-1-3-1] IP Address..................................................... MU-20
[U-5] Setting the Date and Time............................................................. MU-1 [1-1-3-2] Subnet Mask................................................. MU-20
[U-6] SMPTE Pattern........................................................................... MU-1.1 [1-1-3-3] Gateway........................................................ MU-20
[1-1-3-4] Host Name.................................................... MU-20
2. PC-UTILITY.........................................................MU-2 [1-1-4] Mac Address........................................................... MU-21
[1-1-5] Registration service pc........................................... MU-21
2.1 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing..............................MU-2
[1-2] Setting2.............................................................................. MU-21
2.1.1 Environment of PC for Servicing........................................................... MU-2 [1-2-1] Set Rem.Films........................................................ MU-21
2.1.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing......................................... MU-3 [1-2-2] Set Trays................................................................. MU-21
2.1.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC............................................... MU-3 [1-2-3] Enable QC.............................................................. MU-21
2.1.4 Setting Grouping Symbols.................................................................... MU-5 [1-2-4] Set Target Den........................................................ MU-22
[1-2-5] Printing Dmax......................................................... MU-22
2.1.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder......................................................... MU-7
[1-2-6] Auto F.D.C.............................................................. MU-22
2.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing.. MU-8
[1-2-7] Set Film infomation................................................. MU-22
2.2 Flow of PC-Utility Operations..................................................MU-12 [1-2-8] Display indv. data.................................................... MU-22
2.2.1 Connecting PC for Servicing to the Network....................................... MU-12 [1-3] Setting3.............................................................................. MU-23
[1-3-1] Set SMPTE............................................................. MU-23
2.2.2 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility).............................. MU-12
[1-3-2] Set Date.................................................................. MU-23
2.2.3 PC-Utility Operations........................................................................... MU-14 [1-3-3] Ele Save Mode....................................................... MU-23
2.2.4 Disconnecting the Equipment............................................................. MU-16 [1-3-4] Set Alarm................................................................ MU-23
2.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree...............................................................MU-17 [1-3-5] Reboot.................................................................... MU-23
[1-3-6] Set Power Supply Synchronization......................... MU-24
[1-3-7] Film Characteristic ID............................................. MU-24
[1-3-8] Power Supply Voltage............................................. MU-24
[1-4] Initialize.............................................................................. MU-25
[1-4-1] Save Data............................................................... MU-25
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.20
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.21
[1-4-2] Initialize................................................................... MU-25 [3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior.MU-39
[1-4-3] Recover.................................................................. MU-25 [3-5-2-3] Magnification Type........................................ MU-40
[1-5] Log data............................................................................. MU-25 [3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size.................................. MU-40
[1-5-1] Display Error Log.................................................... MU-25 [3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type............................ MU-40
[1-5-2] Clear Error Log....................................................... MU-25 [3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type................................ MU-40
[1-5-3] Display DICOM Log................................................ MU-25 [3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size...................... MU-41
[1-5-4] Logging Mode......................................................... MU-26 [3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior................... MU-41
[2] Transfer Indv. Data....................................................................... MU-27 [3-5-2-9] Procedure...................................................... MU-41
[3] Client Configuration..................................................................... MU-28 [3-5-2-10] Edge Detection.............................................. MU-41
[3-1] Add Client.......................................................................... MU-28 [3-5-2-11] Detection Level.............................................. MU-42
[3-2] Delete Client...................................................................... MU-29 [3-5-2-12] Sharpness..................................................... MU-42
[3-3] Change Client Name......................................................... MU-30 [3-5-2-13] Character Color............................................. MU-42
[3-4] Read CLTInfo..................................................................... MU-31 [3-5-3] LUT Common.......................................................... MU-43
[3-5] Clients................................................................................ MU-33 [3-5-3-1] Default LUT................................................... MU-43
[3-5-1] Protocol................................................................... MU-34 [3-5-3-2] Illumination.................................................... MU-43
[3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)............... MU-34 [3-5-3-3] Ambient Light................................................ MU-43
[3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ....................................... MU-34 [3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)..... MU-43
[3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H Warning)....... [3-5-3-5] Default Illumination........................................ MU-44
MU-35 [3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light.................................... MU-44
[3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H [3-5-3-7] Procedure...................................................... MU-44
Warning)........................................................ MU-35 [3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8......................................................... MU-45
[3-5-1-5] Change Film Size.......................................... MU-35 [3-5-4-1] Max Density................................................... MU-45
[3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout..................................... MU-36 [3-5-4-2] Min Density.................................................... MU-45
[3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT.......................................... MU-36 [3-5-4-3] γ Table No..................................................... MU-45
[3-5-1-8] Precede Picking Up....................................... MU-36 [3-5-4-4] Contrast......................................................... MU-45
[3-5-1-9] Use Max/Min Density.................................... MU-36 [3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points............................... MU-46
[3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID...................................... MU-37 [3-5-4-6] Density.......................................................... MU-46
[3-5-1-11] Use Default Annotation.................................. MU-37 [3-5-4-7] Shift............................................................... MU-46
[3-5-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F]).......... MU-37 [3-5-4-8] Contrast......................................................... MU-46
[3-5-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14.............................. MU-38 [3-5-5] Output Format......................................................... MU-47
[3-5-2] Magnify................................................................... MU-38 [3-5-5-1] Film Size........................................................ MU-47
[3-5-2-1] Smoothing Type............................................ MU-38 [3-5-5-2] Medium Type................................................. MU-47
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.21
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.22
[3-5-5-3] Film Orientation............................................. MU-47 [4-3] G-curve Data..................................................................... MU-59
[3-5-5-4] Border Density............................................... MU-47 [4-4] Operation Data.................................................................. MU-59
[3-5-5-5] Polarity.......................................................... MU-47 [5] Upgrading.................................................................................... MU-60
[3-5-5-6] Trim............................................................... MU-48 [5-1] Full Install........................................................................... MU-60
[3-5-5-7] Trim Width..................................................... MU-48 [5-2] Upgrading.......................................................................... MU-60
[3-5-5-8] Trim Density.................................................. MU-48 [6] Output Film.................................................................................. MU-62
[3-5-5-9] Number of Copies......................................... MU-48 [6-1] 24-Steps............................................................................ MU-62
[3-5-5-10] Print Priority................................................... MU-48 [6-2] 17-Steps............................................................................ MU-62
[3-5-5-11] Default Number of Copies............................. MU-49 [6-3] Cleaning Film..................................................................... MU-62
[3-5-5-12] Default Print Priority...................................... MU-49 [6-4] Flat pattern......................................................................... MU-62
[3-5-5-13] Default Medium Type.................................... MU-49 [6-5] Grid.................................................................................... MU-62
[3-5-5-14] Default Film Orientation................................. MU-49 [6-6] Uniformity........................................................................... MU-62
[3-5-5-15] Default Film Size........................................... MU-50 [6-7] SMPTE.............................................................................. MU-62
[3-5-5-16] Default Border Density.................................. MU-50 [7] F.D.C............................................................................................ MU-63
[3-5-5-17] Default Trim................................................... MU-50 [7-1] AUTO F.D.C....................................................................... MU-63
[3-5-5-18] Default Polarity.............................................. MU-50 [7-2] Check Density.................................................................... MU-63
[3-5-5-19] Mirror............................................................. MU-51 [7-3] 24-Steps............................................................................ MU-64
[3-5-5-20] Margin Between Image................................. MU-51 [7-4] Display 24-Steps................................................................ MU-64
[3-5-5-21] Image Layout................................................. MU-51 [7-5] Manual F.D.C..................................................................... MU-64
[3-5-5-22] Processing Type............................................ MU-52 [7-6] Set Collect.T....................................................................... MU-64
[3-5-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area............................. MU-52 [7-7] Clear Collect.T................................................................... MU-64
[3-5-5-24] Image Crop Side Area................................... MU-52 [7-8] Uniformity........................................................................... MU-64
[3-5-6] Annotation............................................................... MU-53 [7-8-1] Clear....................................................................... MU-64
[3-5-6-1] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/ [7-8-2] Manual Input........................................................... MU-64
Lower Center/Lower Right............................. MU-53 [7-9] DM Sensor Monitor............................................................ MU-64
[3-6] Common............................................................................ MU-54 [8] Check Scanner............................................................................ MU-65
[3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout............................................ MU-54 [8-1] Adjusting Main Scanner..................................................... MU-65
[3-6-2] Association Count................................................... MU-54 [8-1-1] Scanning Width....................................................... MU-65
[3-6-3] Logging DICOM...................................................... MU-54 [8-1-2] Scanning Position................................................... MU-66
[3-6-4] Model...................................................................... MU-55 [8-1-3] Initialize Scanner.................................................... MU-67
[3-6-5] Manufacturer........................................................... MU-55 [8-2] Edge Sensor Monitor......................................................... MU-67
[3-6-6] Default Client.......................................................... MU-55 [8-3] Reset Scanner Data.......................................................... MU-67
[3-7] Sarmaker........................................................................... MU-56 [9] Heat-Developer............................................................................ MU-68
[4] File Transfer................................................................................. MU-59 [9-1] Temperature....................................................................... MU-68
[4-1] Single file .......................................................................... MU-59 [9-2] Set Heater Cond. Temp..................................................... MU-68
[4-2] Analysis Data..................................................................... MU-59
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.22
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.23
[10] Check Mechanism....................................................................... MU-69
[10-1] Adjusting Sub Scanner...................................................... MU-69
[10-2] Other Actuator.................................................................... MU-69
[10-3] Sensor Monitor.................................................................. MU-69
[10-4] Interlock Function.............................................................. MU-69
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.23
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) 0.24
SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) (DRYPIX 6000)
How to Use Service Parts List..................................SP-1 06A SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1....................................SP-17
01A COVER 1..............................................................SP-2 06B SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2....................................SP-18
01B COVER 2..............................................................SP-3 07 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT.................................SP-19
01C COVER 3..............................................................SP-4 08A HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1...........................SP-20
02A FRAME 1.............................................................SP-5 08B HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2...........................SP-21
02B FRAME 2.............................................................SP-6 08C HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3...........................SP-22
03A FILM LOADING UNIT 1........................................SP-7 08D HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4...........................SP-23
03B FILM LOADING UNIT 2........................................SP-8 09A FILM RELEASE UNIT 1.....................................SP-24
04A REMOVAL UNIT 1................................................SP-9 09B FILM RELEASE UNIT 2.....................................SP-25
04B REMOVAL UNIT 2..............................................SP-10 10 CONTROLLER....................................................SP-26
04C REMOVAL UNIT 3..............................................SP-11 11 JIG.....................................................................SP-27
05A CONVEYOR UNIT 1...........................................SP-12 12 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM............................................SP-28
05B CONVEYOR UNIT 2...........................................SP-13 13 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE............................SP-35
05C CONVEYOR UNIT 3...........................................SP-14 14 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring.SP-37
05D CONVEYOR UNIT 4...........................................SP-15
05E CONVEYOR UNIT 5...........................................SP-16
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.24
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) 0.25
SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) (FM-DL 100)
How to Use Service Parts List..................................SP-1 06A SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1....................................SP-17
INDEX.........................................................................SP-2 06B SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2....................................SP-18
01A COVER 1..............................................................SP-3 07 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT.................................SP-19
01B COVER 2..............................................................SP-4 08A HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1...........................SP-20
01C COVER 3..............................................................SP-5 08B HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2...........................SP-21
02A FRAME 1.............................................................SP-6 08C HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3...........................SP-22
02B FRAME 2.............................................................SP-7 08D HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4...........................SP-23
03A FILM LOADING UNIT 1........................................SP-8 09A FILM RELEASE UNIT 1.....................................SP-24
03B FILM LOADING UNIT 2........................................SP-9 09B FILM RELEASE UNIT 2.....................................SP-25
04A REMOVAL UNIT 1..............................................SP-10 10 CONTROLLER....................................................SP-26
04B REMOVAL UNIT 2..............................................SP-11 11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM............................................SP-27
04C REMOVAL UNIT 3..............................................SP-12 12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE............................SP-33
05A CONVEYOR UNIT 1...........................................SP-13 13 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring.SP-35
05B CONVEYOR UNIT 2...........................................SP-14
05C CONVEYOR UNIT 3...........................................SP-15
05D CONVEYOR UNIT 4...........................................SP-16
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.25
GENERAL CONTENTS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 0.26
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) (DRYPIX 6000)
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS................. PM-1 3.15 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding.......................... PM-20
1.1 How to Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume..................... PM-1 3.16 Replacing the Cutter................................................................ PM-21
1.2 Notation of Age.......................................................................... PM-1 3.17 Work Completion Report......................................................... PM-22
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List...................................... PM-2
1.3.1 Maintenance Program at the Age of 1, 2, 4, and 5 Years..................... PM-3
1.3.2 Maintenance Program at the Age of 3 Years........................................ PM-3
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW.................. PM-4
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE............................. PM-5
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs.............................. PM-5
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images.................... PM-6
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function................................................ PM-7
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation..................................................... PM-8
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery..................................................... PM-9
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller (Option), Removing the
Cover....................................................................................... PM-10
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter............................................. PM-11
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside the Equipment... PM-12
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, Cleaning Sub-scanning
Conveyance Roller.................................................................. PM-13
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section........................... PM-15
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit...................................... PM-16
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers.................................................. PM-17
3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images.............................. PM-18
3.14 Setting Date and Time............................................................. PM-19
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.26
GENERAL CONTENTS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 0.27
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) (FM-DL 100)
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS................. PM-1 3.17 Work Completion Report......................................................... PM-26
1.1 List of Preventive Maintenance Items....................................... PM-1
1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle................................................ PM-2
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW.................. PM-3
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE............................. PM-4
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs.............................. PM-4
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images.................... PM-5
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function................................................ PM-7
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation..................................................... PM-8
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery..................................................... PM-9
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller (Option), Removing the
Cover....................................................................................... PM-10
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter............................................. PM-11
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside the Equipment... PM-12
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, Cleaning Sub-scanning
Conveyance Roller.................................................................. PM-14
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section........................... PM-19
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit...................................... PM-20
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers.................................................. PM-21
3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images.............................. PM-22
3.14 Setting Date and Time............................................................. PM-23
3.15 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding.......................... PM-24
3.16 Replacing the Cutter................................................................ PM-25
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.27
GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN) 0.28
INSTALLATION (IN) (DRYPIX 6000)
1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS.............................. IN-1 5.2.6 Relocating the Barcode Reader (Barcode Reader for the Lower Film Tray).
IN-31
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW..................... IN-2 5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option).......................................IN-34
5.4 Installing the Covers and Inserting the Trays............................IN-34
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION........................... IN-5 5.5 Applying the Label (Class 3B Panel Label)...............................IN-35
3.1 Precautions on Installation..........................................................IN-5
3.2 Preparing the PC for Servicing....................................................IN-7 6. CONNECTING CABLES...................................... IN-36
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts..............................................................IN-8 6.1 Connecting the Network Cable..................................................IN-36
6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network.......................IN-37
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION............................... IN-9 6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance.....IN-38
4.1 Unpacking and Unloading...........................................................IN-9
4.2 Carrying.....................................................................................IN-12 7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT........................ IN-39
4.3 Unpacking and Unloading.........................................................IN-13 7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder.............................................IN-39
4.4 Checking Components..............................................................IN-14 7.2 Power ON..................................................................................IN-40
7.3 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)....................IN-41
5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND INSTALLING 7.4 System Settings........................................................................IN-42
OPTIONS............................................................ IN-16
7.4.1 Setting 1................................................................................................ IN-42
5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures.....................................................IN-16 7.4.2 Setting 2................................................................................................ IN-45
5.1.1 Removing the Tapes............................................................................. IN-16 7.4.3 Setting 3................................................................................................ IN-47
5.1.2 Removing the Shipping Fixture Bracket................................................ IN-18
7.5 Rebooting the Equipment..........................................................IN-48
5.2 Changing the Film Size.............................................................IN-20
7.6 Client Settings...........................................................................IN-49
5.2.1 Changing the Film Tray Size................................................................. IN-21
5.2.2 Setting the Tray Number....................................................................... IN-23
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS............. IN-53
5.2.3 Affixing the Film Size Label................................................................... IN-24
5.2.4 Changing the Suction Cup Arm . .......................................................... IN-25 8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance
Operations.................................................................................IN-53
5.2.5 Relocating the Barcode Reader (Barcode Reader for the Upper Film Tray)..
IN-30 8.2 Checking Density......................................................................IN-54
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.28
GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN) 0.29
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness APPENDIX 1. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE...
and Scratches...........................................................................IN-54 IN-63
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function................................................IN-55
8.4.1 Checking the Front Cover, Upper Right Cover and Lower Right Cover APPENDIX 2. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING...
Interlock ............................................................................................... IN-56 IN-64
8.4.2 Checking the Film Tray Interlock........................................................... IN-57
8.5 Checking Fan Operation...........................................................IN-57
8.5.1 Checking the Power Supply Unit Cooling Fan...................................... IN-57
8.5.2 Checking the Heat Development Unit Cooling Fan.............................. IN-57
8.6 Image QC Function...................................................................IN-58
8.7 Power OFF................................................................................IN-58
9. CHECKING CONNECTION.................................. IN-59
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment ..................................IN-59
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment...IN-
59
9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment..............................IN-59
10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT.......................... IN-60
10.1 Backing Up Individual Data.......................................................IN-60
10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at Installation......................IN-60
10.3 Installing the Equipment............................................................IN-61
10.3.1 Installing the Equipment on the Floor without Using Fall Prevention
Fixtures................................................................................................. IN-61
10.3.2 Installing the Equipment and Securing with Fall Prevention Fixtures... IN-61
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment............................................................IN-62
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.29
GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN) 0.30
INSTALLATION (IN) (FM-DL 100)
1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS.............................. IN-1 5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures.....................................................IN-19
1.1 Dimensions and Weight..............................................................IN-1 5.2 Setting Film Tray.......................................................................IN-21
5.2.1 Affixing the Film Size Label................................................................... IN-21
1.2 Environmental Requirements......................................................IN-2
5.2.2 Changing the Film Tray Size................................................................. IN-22
1.3 Electrical Requirements..............................................................IN-3 5.2.3 Setting the Tray Number....................................................................... IN-23
1.4 Other Specifications....................................................................IN-4 5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option).......................................IN-24
1.5 Equipment Installation Space......................................................IN-4 5.4 Installing the Cart (Option)........................................................IN-24
1.5.1 Installation Space.................................................................................... IN-4
1.5.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work.................................................. IN-4 6. CONNECTING CABLES...................................... IN-27
6.1 Connecting the Network Cable..................................................IN-27
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW..................... IN-5
6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing (or Settings-Changeable Models)
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION........................... IN-8 to the Network...........................................................................IN-28
3.1 Precautions on Installation..........................................................IN-8 6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance.....IN-29
3.2 Preparing the PC for Servicing..................................................IN-10 7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT........................ IN-30
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts............................................................ IN-11 7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder.............................................IN-30
3.4 Specifications of Installation Table............................................IN-12 7.1a FTP Server Settings (Only settings-changeable models).........IN-31
3.5 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves.........................................IN-12 7.2 DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART PC) Settings (When Connecting
3.5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)................................................... IN-12 CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL)...IN-
31.1
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION............................. IN-15 7.3 Setting the Firewall in CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW
4.1 Carrying.....................................................................................IN-15 674/CR-IR 355V CL (When using CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or
CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL)....................................................IN-32
4.2 Unpacking and Unloading.........................................................IN-15
4.2.1 Equipment Main Body........................................................................... IN-16 7.4 Power ON..................................................................................IN-34
4.3 Checking Components..............................................................IN-17 7.5 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)....................IN-35
7.6 System Settings........................................................................IN-36
5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND INSTALLING 7.6.1 Setting 1................................................................................................ IN-36
OPTIONS............................................................ IN-19 7.6.2 Setting 2................................................................................................ IN-38
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.30
GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN) 0.31
7.6.3 Setting 3................................................................................................ IN-39 10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT.......................... IN-47
7.7 Installing the Modality Connection Software (to Support Multi 10.1 Backing Up Individual Data.......................................................IN-47
Modalities)..............................................................................IN-39.2
10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at Installation......................IN-47
7.8 Rebooting the Equipment.......................................................IN-39.3
10.3 Installing the Equipment............................................................IN-48
7.9 Disconnecting the Equipment.................................................IN-39.4
10.3.1 Installing the Equipment on the Floor without Using Fixtures............... IN-48
7.10 Client Settings (Multi Modality Equipment Only)....................IN-39.5 10.3.2 Installing the Equipment on the Table and Securing with Fixtures........ IN-48
10.3.3 Securing the Cart with Fixtures............................................................. IN-49
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS............. IN-41
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment............................................................IN-50
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance
Operations.................................................................................IN-41 APPENDIX 1. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE...
8.2 Checking Density...................................................................IN-41.1 IN-51
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness
and Scratches...........................................................................IN-42 APPENDIX 2. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING...
IN-52
8.3a Check when Using Multiple Film Trays.....................................IN-42
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function................................................IN-43
8.4.1 Front Cover, Right Cover Interlock Check............................................ IN-43
8.4.2 Checking the Film Tray Interlock........................................................... IN-44
8.5 Checking Fan Operation...........................................................IN-44
8.6 Image QC Function...................................................................IN-45
8.7 Power OFF................................................................................IN-45
9. CHECKING CONNECTION.................................. IN-46
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment ..................................IN-46
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment...IN-
46
9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment..............................IN-46
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.31
GENERAL CONTENTS PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) 0.32
PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) (DRYPIX 6000)
INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX 6000 - Checklist.....PC-1
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.32
GENERAL CONTENTS PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) 0.33
PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) (FM-DL 100)
INSTALLATION OF THE FM-DL 100 - Checklist.........PC-1
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.33
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY PRECAUTION (DRYPIX 6000)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION Heavy Weights
• When installing or removing heavy weights, complete it with an assistant or a
To avoid accidents, observe the following precautions. hoisting or other appropriate device. Weights above 20 kg must be lifted by more
than two persons.
1.1 General Precautions • The weight of this equipment is approximately 104kg. Take the following precautions
when moving the equipment, etc.
WARNING • To prevent injuries resulting in back pain, pay attention to your posture during
the work.
No modification of this equipment is allowed. • Be careful not to drop the equipment as this may cause serious injuries.
Power Supply Optical Parts Handling Precautions
When handling any optical parts, observe the following precautions. Failure to observe
• Be sure to turn OFF the power of the main power switch and switch board before
these precautions may result in a deterioration in image quality.
starting operation. Starting operations with the power ON may result in electric
• Never touch the surfaces of optical parts.
shock, fire hazards, or machine malfunction. Some parts are not fully discharged
and other parts (e.g. heater) remain heated immediately after power OFF. Be • When removing dirt from optical parts, use the specified procedure only.
careful not to touch such parts. When performing steps (e.g. voltage measurement) • Scanning optics unit removal must be carried out in a clean environment. Also do
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, observe the instructions set forth in not remove the scanning optics unit protective housing.
this manual and operate with care to avoid electric shock and other hazards.
• When restarting the machine, turn OFF the power, wait for more than 10 seconds, Heat Development Unit Handling Precautions
and then turn it ON. If the interval from power OFF to ON is too short, the machine A heater is used for the rack. Touching it during operations may result in burns. Turn
may not be properly started. the power OFF and wait until the heater temperature drops before handling the unit.
• Do not connect any unspecified devide.
• In an emergency disconnect the power plug or the inlet Ensure sufficient space Grounding
around the power plug or the inlet.
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts with retaining
Ventilation of Installation Site screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
The ventilation of the equipment and film is accompanied by a slight smell. Be sure to servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon installation. After the
ventilate the room during and after operation. parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the
procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are
Drive Section Inspection securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
To avoid accidents, be sure to turn OFF the power before initiating inspection or
adjustment procedures. When performing an inspection or adjustment procedure
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, operate carefully while observing the
instructions set forth in this manual.
Safety Devices
Ensure that the accident prevention functions of fuses, interlock switches, panels,
covers, and other safety devices are always operative. Also refrain from introducing
such modifications which may impair the safety device functions.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
Other General Precautions Interlock Release Tool
• When servicing the board for maintenance, be sure to wear a wrist band to ground To operate the equipment with the front cover, upper right cover, or lower right cover
yourself. Failure to do so may result in damage of electronic components on the opened, use the special tool provided with this equipment to release the interlock. To
board due to static electricity from your body. avoid danger, do not touch rotating parts. Also take precautions against getting your
• Do not stain or peel off the product nameplates, labels of safety standards, or hands, feet, hair, and clothes caught by the equipment.
product No. indications attached on the machine, and do not attach other labels The equipment does not have an interlock release jig. Purchase the interlock release
over them. tool as a service part.
• After completion of operation, return the protective enclosure, fixing screws, and
other removed components to the original positions and fix fully.
jig jig jig
（for Front cover） （for Upper right cover） （for Lower right cover）
DRY60_B0001E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation Laser Output Circuit Interlock
As indicated in the Certification and Identification Label attached on the upper left An interlock function for preventing laser exposure is provided for this equipment. (The
cover of the machine, this is the machine of Class 1, which complies with the “Laser laser output is turned OFF when the front cover, upper right cover, or lower right cover
Products – Conformance with IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60601-2-22; Guidance for is opened.)
Industry and FDA staff (Laser Notice No. 50)” and “EN60825-1 (Amendment 2)”. Before turning ON the power switch with the front cover, upper right cover, or lower
The image recorder incorporates a laser (Class 3B, semiconductor laser wavelength right cover opened, be sure to release the interlock with the special tool provided.
of 658 nm, red visible light) with a maximum output of 70 mW, but you will not be To Open Front Cover and Upper Right Cover
exposed to any hazard if you perform tasks as instructed in the service manual.
How to Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure Front cover
To avoid laser radiation exposure, observe the following precautions.
Steps Requiring Precautions Against Laser Radiation Exposure
When performing the following procedures, thoroughly comply with the instructions set
forth in this manual to avoid laser radiation exposure.
• Removing the scanning optics unit and accomplishing its reassembly
• Replacing or cleaning the components of the conveyor unit , entrance of the heat
development unit or the sub scanning unit
After completion of the above procedures, restore the removed protective housing
jig jig
and retaining screws to their original states to prevent the laser beam from leaking out
from the equipment. Upper right cover DRY60_B0002E.ai
Periodical Maintenance for Keeping Equipment Conditions Compliant To Open Front Cover
with Standards
To keep the equipment compliant with the laser safety requirements, perform the
preventive maintenance programs at specified intervals (See “Preventive Maintenance Front cover
(PM)” Volume.)
Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure
When performing installation procedures, observe the following precautions to avoid
laser radiation exposure.
• Do not attempt to perform any steps other than those stated in this manual because
laser radiation exposure may result.
• Do not position a mirror or other reflective article in the laser beam optical path.
• Do not change the laser beam optical path.
jig
• Optical axis adjustments must not be made in the field. Although the semiconductor
laser beam is visible red light, no one is allowed to make optical axis adjustments in DRY60_B0003E ai
the field.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
To Open Upper Right Cover
jig
Upper right cover
DRY60_B0004E ai
To Open Lower Right Cover
jig
Lower right cover DRY60_B0027E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
2. LABELS
2.1 Laser Caution Labels
Locations of Laser Caution Labels
The following illustrates the locations of the protective housing and laser caution labels
specified in “Laser Products – Conformance with IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60601-2-22;
Guidance for Industry and FDA staff (Laser Notice No. 50)” and “EN60825-1
(Amendment 2)”.
HHS certification and
identification label
class 3B panel label #1 class 3B panel label #1 DRY60_B0006E.ai
class 3B panel label #2 DRY60_B0005E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
List of Laser Caution Labels Class 3B Panel Label #2
HHS Certification and Identification Label
DRY60_B0010 ai
DRY60_B0007.ai
This equipment is a Class 1 laser product (IEC 60825-1:2001 / EN60852-
1:2002).
Class 3B Panel Label #1
DRY60_B0008 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
SAFETY PRECAUTION-7
2.2 Other Labels Caution label
(other than North America)
Locations of Other Labels
Rating indication
label
Caution Label
Caution label
DRY60_B0012E ai
Caution label
(other than North America)
DRY60_B0009E.ai
High temperature
caution label
DRY60_B0011E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-7
SAFETY PRECAUTION-8
List of Labels
High-temperature
caution label Rating Information Label
100 VAC Specifications (North America)
Sample year of manufacture DRY60_B0015E_100V.ai
200 VAC Specifications (Other countries)
DRY60_B0014E.ai
Sample year of manufacture DRY60_B0015E_200V ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-8
SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
Caution Label (network cable connection and power cable l Power Cable
connection) CAUTION
<North America> • Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.
• Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an
• Coution Label (Inlet) electric shock or a fire.
DRY60_B0013E.ai m For U.S. and Canada
The power cord provided by our official dealer should be used.
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
Connect in accordance with the IEC 60601-1-1 when connecting.
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
• Coution Label (LAN connector) • Rated amperage: minimum 15 A
• Cable Type: SJT
• Cable length: 3 m or less
DRY60_B0013E.ai
Do not connect a telephone wire to the LAN connector. m For U.S. Only
Always use a LAN cable recommended under the IEC60950/UL60950 standard.
Connect in accordance with the IEC 60601-1-1 when connecting. • Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
<Other countries> • Hospital Grade Plug
• Coution Label (Inlet) m For Canada Only
• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
If hospital grade disassemble type – complying with CSA C22.2, No.42.
DRY60_B0017E.ai
The power cord provided by our official dealer should be used. • Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21.
Connect in accordance with the IEC 60601-1-1 when connecting.
m For Europe
• Coution Label (LAN connector) • Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
DRY60_B0017E.ai
Do not connect a telephone wire to the LAN connector. • Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
Always use a LAN cable recommended under the IEC60950/UL60950 standard. • Rated amperage: 6 A
Connect in accordance with the IEC 60601-1-1 when connecting. • Cable type: H05VV-F
• Cable length: 3 m or less
l LAN Connector
Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this equipment.
Only UTP type straight LAN cable of category 5E or more are suitable for
connection to this connector.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
SAFETY PRECAUTION-10
High Temperature Caution Label
Be aware that the temperature may be high in the area where the following label is
affixed.
DRY60_B0016.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-10
SAFETY PRECAUTION-11
2.3 Additional Protective Grounding Earth Mark 2.4 Power Cable Caution Label (USA Only)
Power Cable Caution Label (Only Hospital Grade Power Cable for U.S.A.)
Earth mark
Power cable
caution label DRY60_B0020E.ai
DRY60_B0018E.ai
Earth Mark (Imprint)
DRY60_B0019.ai
DRY60_B0021E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-11
SAFETY PRECAUTION-12
3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR
LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE
PREVENTION Upper rear cover
Even if the protective housing is removed for servicing purpose, the laser beam will
not possibly leak out of the equipment unless its optical path is intentionally changed.
However, if the optical path is inadvertently changed during optical system installation, Upper left cover
the service engineer or other persons near the equipment may be exposed to laser
radiation.
Optical system related installation procedures must be carefully performed while
observing the instructions set forth in this manual. After completion of installation,
thoroughly restore the removed protective housing to its original state.
Protective Housing of Equipment Lower left
cover
The following shows laser exposure protective housing parts of the equipment.
Upper cover
Lower rear cover DRY60_B0023E.ai
Upper right
cover
Lower right
Fornt cover cover
DRY60_B0022E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-12
SAFETY PRECAUTION-13
Protective Housing of Scanning Optics Unit
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Never remove the upper cover of scanning optics unit.
Upper cover
DRY60_B0024E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-13
SAFETY PRECAUTION-14
4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS
Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950 for data processing
equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations
shall comply with the system standard IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005
chapter16. Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part
or signal output part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that
the system complies with the requirements of IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-
1:2005 chapter16. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local
representative.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-14
SAFETY PRECAUTION-15
5. CLASSIFICATION
1) According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
2) According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
NO APPLIED PART
3) Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter
IP00
4) According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of
a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous
oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5) According to the mode of operation
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-15
SAFETY PRECAUTION-16
6. CAUTIONS ON NETWORK
• Before connecting this system to the network with other systems, confirm that the
other systems are not affected. If they are affected, take countermeasures such as
network separation.
• After modifying the network, confirm that this system is not affected. If it is affected,
take appropriate countermeasures including.
• Replacing connected devices
• Connecting additional devices
• Removing devices
• Updating devices
• Upgrading devices
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-16
SAFETY PRECAUTION-17
7. Cautions on Electromagnetic 7.2 Further Information for IEC60601-1-2 Ed2.1:
Waves 2004
• Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs
to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as
7.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) follows.
• Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical equipment.
devices to the IEC 60601-1-2 Ed2.1: 2004, Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC. • The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement
interference in a typical medical installation. parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not immunity of the DRYPIX6000.
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to other devices in the vicinity. List of Cables
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
FUJIFILM
installation. Name General specification
parts code
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to I/F Cable - UTP type straight LAN cable of
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: category 5E or more.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving device.
• Increase the separation between the equipment. • The DRYPIX 60000 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the equipment.
other device(s) are connected. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the DRYPIX 6000 should be observed to
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help. verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The DRYPIX 6000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the DRYPIX 6000 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions The DRYPIX 6000 uses RF energy only for its
CISPR 11 internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions
Group 1
are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions
Class A
CISPR 11
The DRYPIX 6000 is suitable for use in all
Harmonic emissions establishments other than domestic and those
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2 directly connected to the public low-voltage
power supply network that supplies buildings
Voltage fluctuations/ used for domestic purposes.
flicker emissions Complies
IEC 61000-3-3
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-17
SAFETY PRECAUTION-18
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The DRYPIX 6000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The The DRYPIX 6000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the DRYPIX 6000 should assure that it is used in such an environment. customer or the user of the DRYPIX 6000 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Immunity test IEC 60601test level Compliance level environment - test test level level
guidance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
Electrostatic discharge ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be IEC 61000-4-6 equipment should be used no closer to any
(ESD) ±4kV contact wood, concrete or ce- 150kHz to part of the DRYPIX 6000, including cables,
IEC 61000-4-2 ±8kV air ±6kV contact ramic tile. 80MHz than the recommended separation distance
If floors are covered calculated from the equation applicable to the
±2kV air with synthetic materi- frequency of the transmitter.
±4kV air al, the relative humid-
±8kV air ity should be at least Recommended separation distance
30%. Radiated RF
IEC 61000-4-3 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2
Electrical fast ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality
transient/burst lines lines should be that of a 80MHz to d = 1.2 80 MHz to 800 MHz
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial or 2.5GHz
lines lines hospital environment. d = 2.3 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Surge ±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality where P is the maximum output power rat-
IEC 61000-4-5 should be that of a ing of the transmitter in watts (W) according
±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
hospital environment. recommended separation distance in metres
(m).
Voltage dips, short < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) should be that of a
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
as determined by an electromagnetic site
power supply input hospital environment.
survey,a should be less than the compliance
lines 40 % UT 40 % UT If the user of the
level in each frequency range.b
IEC 61000-4-11 (60% dip in UT) (60% dip in UT) FM-DL 100 requires
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles continued operation
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
during power mains
equipment marked with the following symbol:
70 % UT 70 % UT interruptions, it is rec-
(30% dip inUT) (30% dip in UT) ommended that the
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles FM-DL 100 be pow-
ered from an uninter-
< 5 % UT < 5 % UT ruptible power supply NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) or a battery. NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
for 5 s for 5 s fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency mag- a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) tele-
(50/60 Hz) magnetic netic fields should be phones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broad-
field at levels characteristic cast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environ-
IEC 61000-4-8 of a typical location in ment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If
a typical commercial the measured field strength in the location in which the DRYPIX 6000 is used exceeds the
or hospital environ- applicable RF compliance, the DRYPIX 6000 should be observed to verify normal operation.
ment. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reori-
enting or relocating the DRYPIX 6000.
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level. b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-18
SAFETY PRECAUTION-19
Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment and the DRYPIX 6000
The DRYPIX 6000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the DRYPIX 6000 can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile
RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the DRYPIX 6000 as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
output power of m
transmitter
W 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MH to 2.5 GHz
d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separa-
tion distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency
of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range ap-
plies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-19
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
09.20.2008 00 New release for HHS (00 (0) Edition) (FM5418) All pages
11.25.2008 00 New release for UL (00 (1) Edition) (FM5451) All pages
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 05.20.2009
08.13.2009
01(1)
02
New release for the field (FM5546)
Revised (FM5585)
All pages
9
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 12
SERVICE MANUAL 10.07.2011
12.10.2012
04
05
Revised (Ed3)
Revised (FM6078)
1, 5-7, 9, 13-15
Cover
SAFETY PRECAUTION (FM-DL 100)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION Heavy Weights
• When installing or removing heavy weights, complete it with an assistant or a
To avoid accidents, observe the following precautions. hoisting or other appropriate device. Weights above 20 kg must be lifted by more
than two persons.
1.1 General Precautions • The weight of this equipment is approximately 85 kg. Take the following precautions
when moving the equipment, etc.
WARNING • To prevent injuries resulting in back pain, pay attention to your posture during
the work.
No modification of this equipment is allowed. • Be careful not to drop the equipment as this may cause serious injuries.
Power Supply Optical Parts Handling Precautions
When handling any optical parts, observe the following precautions. Failure to observe
• Be sure to turn OFF the power of the main power switch and switch board before
these precautions may result in a deterioration in image quality.
starting operation. Starting operations with the power ON may result in electric
• Never touch the surfaces of optical parts.
shock, fire hazards, or machine malfunction. Some parts are not fully discharged
and other parts (e.g. heater) remain heated immediately after power OFF. Be • When removing dirt from optical parts, use the specified procedure only.
careful not to touch such parts. When performing steps (e.g. voltage measurement) • Scanning optics unit removal must be carried out in a clean environment. Also do
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, observe the instructions set forth in not remove the scanning optics unit protective housing.
this manual and operate with care to avoid electric shock and other hazards.
• When restarting the machine, turn OFF the power, wait for more than 10 seconds, Heat Development Unit Handling Precautions
and then turn it ON. If the interval from power OFF to ON is too short, the machine A heater is used for the rack. Touching it during operations may result in burns. Turn
may not be properly started. the power OFF and wait until the heater temperature drops before handling the unit.
• Do not connect any unspecified devide.
• In an emergency disconnect the power plug or the inlet Ensure sufficient space Grounding
around the power plug or the inlet.
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts with retaining
Ventilation of Installation Site screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
The ventilation of the equipment and film is accompanied by a slight smell. Be sure to servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon installation. After the
ventilate the room during and after operation. parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the
procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are
Drive Section Inspection securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
To avoid accidents, be sure to turn OFF the power before initiating inspection or
adjustment procedures. When performing an inspection or adjustment procedure
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, operate carefully while observing the
instructions set forth in this manual.
Safety Devices
Ensure that the accident prevention functions of fuses, interlock switches, panels,
covers, and other safety devices are always operative. Also refrain from introducing
such modifications which may impair the safety device functions.
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
Other General Precautions
• When servicing the board for maintenance, be sure to wear a wrist band to ground
yourself. Failure to do so may result in damage of electronic components on the
board due to static electricity from your body.
• Do not stain or peel off the product nameplates, labels of safety standards, or
product No. indications attached on the machine, and do not attach other labels
over them.
• After completion of operation, return the protective enclosure, fixing screws, and
other removed components to the original positions and fix fully.
Interlock Release Tool
To operate the equipment with the front cover and right cover of the equipment
opened, use the special tool provided with this equipment to release the interlock. To
avoid danger, do not touch rotating parts. Also take precautions against getting your
hands, feet, hair, and clothes caught by the equipment.
After completing servicing return the tool back to its original position.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation Laser Output Circuit Interlock
As indicated in the Certification and Identification Label attached on the left cover of An interlock function is provided for this equipment for turning OFF the laser output
the machine, this is the machine of Class 1, which complies with the “Laser Products – circuit to prevent laser exposure when the front cover or right cover is opened.
Conformance with IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60601-2-22; Guidance for Industry and FDA Before turning ON the power with these covers open and performing services, be sure
staff (Laser Notice No. 50)” and “EN60825-1 (Amendment 2)”. The image recorder to release the interlock with the special tool provided. After completion of the service
incorporates a laser (Class 3B, semiconductor laser wavelength of 658 to 659 nm, red procedures, return the tool to the original position.
visible light) with a maximum output of 52.8 to 64.9 mW (maximum output of 143 mW To Open Front Cover and Right Cover
under fault conditions), but you will not be exposed to any hazard if you perform tasks
as instructed in the service manual.
How to Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure
To avoid laser radiation exposure, observe the following precautions.
Steps Requiring Precautions Against Laser Radiation Exposure
When performing the following procedures, thoroughly comply with the instructions set
forth in this manual to avoid laser radiation exposure.
• Removing the scanning optics unit and accomplishing its reassembly
• Replacing or cleaning the components of the conveyor unit , entrance of the heat
development unit or the sub scanning unit
After completion of the above procedures, restore the removed protective housing FPEI0106.AI
and retaining screws to their original states to prevent the laser beam from leaking out
from the equipment. To Open Front Cover
Periodical Maintenance for Keeping Equipment Conditions Compliant
with Standards
To keep the equipment compliant with the laser safety requirements, perform the
preventive maintenance programs at specified intervals (See “Preventive Maintenance
(PM)” Volume.)
Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure
When performing installation procedures, observe the following precautions to avoid
laser radiation exposure.
• Do not attempt to perform any steps other than those stated in this manual because
laser radiation exposure may result.
• Do not position a mirror or other reflective article in the laser beam optical path.
• Do not change the laser beam optical path.
• Optical axis adjustments must not be made in the field. Although the semiconductor
laser beam is visible red light, no one is allowed to make optical axis adjustments in
the field.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
To Open Right Cover
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
2. LABELS
2.1 Laser Caution Labels
Locations of Laser Caution Labels
The following illustrates the locations of the protective housing and laser caution labels
specified in “Laser Products – Conformance with IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60601-2-22;
Guidance for Industry and FDA staff (Laser Notice No. 50)” and “EN60825-1
(Amendment 2)”.
HHS certification and
identification label
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001 IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001
class 3B panel label #1 class 3B panel label #1
FPEI0103.AI
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001
class 3B panel label #2
(English and French) FPEI0104.AI
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
List of Laser Caution Labels IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001 Class 3B Panel Label #2
HHS Certification and Identification Label
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001 Class 3B Panel Label #1
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
SAFETY PRECAUTION-7
2.2 Other Labels <NOTE>
The illustration referred to the CAUTION Label for the specification IEC60601-
1:Ed3:2005.
Locations of Other Labels
Caution label
FPEI0110.AI
Caution label
FPEI0112 AI
<NOTE>
Always use a cable conforming to the specifications at a position with a caution
label applied.
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-7
SAFETY PRECAUTION-8
List of Labels
Rating Information Label
100 VAC Specifications
<REMARKS>
The mark “ ～ ” means AC power supply.
200 VAC Specifications
<REMARKS>
The mark “ ～ ” means AC power supply.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-8
SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
Caution Label l LAN Connector
For this equipment, 2 types of CAUTION Labels are respectively labeled Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this equipment.
corresponding to its specification. Only UTP type straight LAN cable of category 5E or more are suitable for
<IEC60601-1 : Ed3 : 2005> <IEC60601-1 : Ed2 : 2004> connection to this connector.
High Temperature Caution Label
Be aware that the temperature may be high in the area where the following label is
FPEI0156.ai
affixed.
l Power Cable
CAUTION
• Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.
• Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an
electric shock or a fire.
m For U.S. and Canada
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
• Rated amperage: minimum 15 A
• Cable Type: SJT
• Cable length: 3 m or less
m For U.S. Only
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
• Hospital Grade Plug
m For Canada Only
• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
If hospital grade disassemble type – complying with CSA C22.2, No.42.
• Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21.
m For Europe
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
• Rated amperage: 6 A
• Cable type: H05VV-F
• Cable length: 3 m or less
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
SAFETY PRECAUTION-10
2.3 Additional Protective Grounding Earth Mark 2.4 Power Cable Caution Label
Power Cable Caution Label (Only Hospital Grade Power Cable for
U.S.A.)
Earth Mark (Imprint)
FPCI0215.AI
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-10
SAFETY PRECAUTION-11
3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR
LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE
PREVENTION
Even if the protective housing is removed for servicing purpose, the laser beam will
not possibly leak out of the equipment unless its optical path is intentionally changed.
However, if the optical path is inadvertently changed during optical system installation,
the service engineer or other persons near the equipment may be exposed to laser
radiation.
Optical system related installation procedures must be carefully performed while
observing the instructions set forth in this manual. After completion of installation,
thoroughly restore the removed protective housing to its original state.
Protective Housing of Equipment
The following shows laser exposure protective housing parts of the equipment.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-11
SAFETY PRECAUTION-12
Protective Housing of Scanning Optics Unit
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Never remove the upper cover of scanning optics unit.
<REMARKS>
This equipment can be used 839Y100057 or 839Y0060 scanning optics unit.
l When Using 839Y100057
l When Using 839Y0060
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-12
SAFETY PRECAUTION-13
4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS
Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950 for data processing
equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations
shall comply with the system standard IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005
chapter16. Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part
or signal output part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that
the system complies with the requirements of IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-
1:2005 chapter16. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local
representative.
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-13
SAFETY PRECAUTION-14
5. CLASSIFICATION
1) According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
2) According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
NO APPLIED PART
3) Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter
IP00
4) According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of
a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous
oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5) According to the mode of operation
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-14
SAFETY PRECAUTION-15
6. CAUTIONS ON NETWORK
• Before connecting this system to the network with other systems, confirm that the
other systems are not affected. If they are affected, take countermeasures such as
network separation.
• After modifying the network, confirm that this system is not affected. If it is affected,
take appropriate countermeasures including.
• Replacing connected devices
• Connecting additional devices
• Removing devices
• Updating devices
• Upgrading devices
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-15
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
SPECIFICATIONS (DRYPIX 6000)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
SPECIFICATIONS-1
1. SPECIFICATIONS Product Code
DRYPIX SMART : CN E
Contents Remarks
Overseas specifications main
unit
1.1 Part Name Film tray Tray setting (Upper): 35 x 43
cm size
Product Code Contents Remarks Tray setting (Lower): 20 x 25
cm size
DRYPIX SMART 100V : E Overseas specifications main 100 VAC specifications
unit Individual data CD: 2
Film tray Tray setting (Upper): 35 x 43 Main unit software CD: 1
cm size Reference Guide CD: 1 Utility
Tray setting (Lower): 20 x 25
cm size Reference Guide CD: 1 Quality Control Function
Individual data CD: 2 Operation Manual: 1
Main unit software CD: 1 Quick Guide: 1
Reference Guide /Quality DRYPIX SMART 200V : == E Overseas specifications main 200 VAC specifications
Control Function /Quality Con- unit
trol for Mammography CD: 1 Film tray Tray setting (Upper): 35 x 43
Operation Manual: 1 cm size
Tray setting (Lower): 20 x 25
Quick Guide: 1 cm size
DRYPIX SMART 200V : E Overseas specifications main 200 VAC specifications Individual data CD: 2
unit
Main unit software CD: 1
Film tray Tray setting (Upper): 35 x 43
cm size Reference Guide /Quality
Tray setting (Lower): 20 x 25 Control Function /Quality Con-
cm size trol for Mammography CD: 1
Individual data CD: 2 Operation Manual: 1
Main unit software CD: 1 Quick Guide: 1
Reference Guide /Quality
Control Function /Quality Con-
trol for Mammography CD: 1
Operation Manual: 1
Quick Guide: 1
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-1
SPECIFICATIONS-2
1.2 List of Optional Parts 1.3 General Specifications
<NOTE>
Recording Method
The following List of Components enumerate items required for each
Laser exposure heat development method
configuration, so they do not correspond to units (quantities) of orders or
packages. Laser Light Source
Use the product codes (Product Code) indicated only as a reference for
unpacking and follow the order lists provided separately when placing orders. Red semiconductor source (Class 3B, Wavelength: 658 nm, Maximum output:
70mW) x1
List of Options for DRYPIX 6000 First Printing Time
Product Code Product Remarks Approximately 100 seconds (35 x 43 cm size, test printing)
DPX SMART TRAY : E Additional option tray - Processing Ability
DPX SMART TRAY : == E Additional option tray - 35 x 43 cm size: Approx. 80 films/hour
DPX PRIMA CLEANING Cleaning roller - 35 x 35 cm size: Approx. 85 films/hour
ROLLER E 26 x 36 cm size: Approx. 100 films/hour
25 x 30 cm size: Approx. 100 films/hour
DPX SMART FLOOR FIX KIT : E Fall prevention fixture kit For earthquake-proof fixing 20 x 25 cm size: Approx. 100 films/hour
DPX PRIMA AC CORD UL E Power cable -
(U.S.A. hospital grade) Start-up Time
DPX PRIMA AC CORD EU E Power cable (EU) - Approx. 15 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 ˚C)
Approx. 10 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 ˚C/ power saving mode)
DPX 2000 AC CORD UK E Power cable (U.K.) -
Image Quality
Exposure Resolution
14 bits
Maximum Density (Dmax)
DI-HL: 3.0
DI-ML: 4.0
MDI-HLJ: 3.0 (China oniy)
Recording Pixel Size
50 µm (508dpi) / 100 µm (254dpi)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-2
SPECIFICATIONS-3
Maximum Number of Recording Pixels Loading Method
When recorded in 100μ Daylight conditions loading
35 × 43cm (14"×17"):3520x4280 Maximum Ejected Film Capacity
35 × 35cm (14”×14”):3520x3520 50 films
26 × 36cm (10”×14”):2540x3600
25 × 30cm (10"×12"):2506x3016 Input I/F
20 × 25cm (8"×10"):2000x2510
DICOM Network input only
When recorded in 50μ
35 × 43cm (14"×17"):7040x8560 Network Connection Interface
35 × 35cm (14”×14”):7040x7040
26 × 36cm (10”×14”):7200x5080 - 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (Auto-Negotiation)
25 × 30cm (10"×12"):6032x5012 - Half duplex / Full duplex (Auto-Negotiation)
20 × 25cm (8"×10"):4000x5020
n Network Connection
Image Compression Rate
100 ±0.5% l DICOM Protocol
Curl After Processing Direct connection
Floating from Shaukasten below 20 mm l TOSHIBA Protocol
Film Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link
l FINP Protocol
Applicable Types Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link
DI-HL (Blue base/ 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm size)
DI-ML (Blue base/ 26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm size) n Modality Connection
MDI-HLJ (Blue base/ 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm size) (China
only) l A/D-I/F Connection (Analog/Digital)
Applicable Film Size/Number of Sheets in One Pack Connection via DRYPIX Link
Applicable equipment: Diagnostic devices such as CT/MRI
35 x 43, 35 x 35 cm sizes : 101 sheets (including one sheet for reducing
dusts) l E-I/F Connection
26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm sizes : 151 sheets (including one sheet for reducing
dusts) Network connection via DRYPIX Link
Applicable equipment: Image reader after FCR 7000, MF-300/MF-300S/MF-
Number of Supplies 300L, FN-PS551
• Two supplies
• Up to five film trays can be used (Changed by the user)
• Film tray size setting is service setting
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-3
SPECIFICATIONS-4
DICOM Connection Specifications n Image Processing
Supported DICOM Services l Interpolation
• Verification SOP Class SSM interpolation, A-VR interpolation (Can be switched automatically for each AE
• Basic GrayScale Print Management Meta SOP Class Title by Configuration settings)
• Print Job SOP Class l Tone Processing
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class
BAR method, SAR method (Can be switched automatically for each AE Title by
• Print Queue Management SOP Class Configuration settings)
• Presentation LUT SOP Class
l Format
l Number of Connectable Units
Maximum 64 (client) can be registered Standard Format (for all film sizes)
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40, 42, 48, 49, 54,
l Number of Simultaneous Connection Associations 56, 63, 64, 70, 72, 80
Maximum 10
Mixed Format
l Number of Allowable Film Boxes in One Session 35 x 43 cm size portrait mix: six types
32 35 x 35 cm size portrait mix: five types
26 x 36 cm size portrait mix: one type
l Maximum Input Image Size 26 x 36 cm size landscape mix: four types
Rows: 8800, Columns: 8800 25 x 30 cm size portrait mix: one type
25 x 30 cm size landscape mix: four types
20 x 25 cm size portrait mix: one type
20 x 25 cm size landscape mix: four types
Image Spooling
Received image data is spooled in the DRAM until completion of printing.
Image spool amount: Four images of B4 (Mammogram image)
Density Correction
Automatic density calibration function embedded
Annotation
Provided
Noise
Printing : 55dB or less (except singly sound)
Ready : 45dB or less
Earthquake Measures
Fall prevention fixture kit (Optional mounting accessory kit)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-4
SPECIFICATIONS-5
1.4 Dimensions and Weight 1.5 Environmental Requirements
Dimensions Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure
610 mm x 630 mm x 893 mm (W x D x H)
Operating
610
Temperature : 15 ˚C (40%RH) to 30 ˚C (70%RH)
Relative humidity : 15%RH (30 ˚C) to 70%RH (30 ˚C) (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 750 to 1060 hPa
[%]
70
Relative humidity
60
630
50
40
30
20
15
10
630
5 10 15 20 25 30 [˚C]
Temperature DRY60_C0001.ai
Non-operating (not including film)
Temperature : 0 to 45 ˚C
Relative humidity : 10 to 90%RH (No dew condensation)
893 Atmospheric pressure : 500 to 1060 hPa
Transit or Storage
880
Temperature/Relative humidity : -10 (10%RH) to 50 ˚C (90%RH)
(No freezing/No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 500 to 1060 hPa
Exhaust Air of Equipment
Maximum Exhaust Air in Standby State
31.3 m3/hour
(Unit : mm)
DRY60_C0002.ai Maximum Exhaust Air in Printing
Weight 63 m3/hour
Approx. 104 kg (Main unit only)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-5
SPECIFICATIONS-6
Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement 1.6 Electrical Requirements
Frequency : 10 to 55 Hz
Amplitude : 0.0075 mm or less Frequency
Floor Levelness 50-60 Hz
Acceptable variation: ±3%
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around
Line Voltage
Floor Flatness
10 mm or less <REMARKS>
The mark “ ～ ” means AC power supply.
● North America
100/110/120 V ～
Acceptable variation: ±10%
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines)
● Other countries
200/220/230/240 V ～
Acceptable variation: ±10%
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines)
Capacity
1.2 kVA
Rated Current
100/110/120 V ～ : 10.6 / 11.2 / 12 A
200/220/230/240 V ～ : 5.3 / 5.6 / 5.9 / 6 A
Power Consumption
Maximum 1.5 kW
Electric Energy
Printing : Approx. 350 Wh
Ready : Approx. 180 Wh
Power saving mode : Approx. 60 Wh
Maximum Heat Generation
Printing : Approx. 1300 kJ
Ready : Approx. 700 kJ
Grounding Resistance
Class D (100 Ω or less)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-6
SPECIFICATIONS-7
Overload Protection 1.7 Equipment Installation Space
100/110/120 V ～ : 15 A
200/220/230/240 V ～ : 10 A
1.7.1 Installation Space
n Power Cable
When Not Fixed with Fixtures
CAUTION
Front: More than 800 mm
• Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. Rear: More than 100 mm
• Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an Left: More than 50 mm
electric shock or a fire. Right: More than 200 mm
When Fixed with Fixtures
l For U.S. and Canada Front: More than 800 mm
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor Rear: More than 100 mm
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher Left: More than 250 mm
Right: More than 250 mm
• Rated amperage: minimum 15 A
• Cable Type: SJT
• Cable length: 3 m or less
l For U.S. Only
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
• Hospital Grade Plug
l For Canada Only
• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
If hospital grade disassemble type – complying with CSA C22.2, No.42.
• Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21.
l For Europe
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
• Rated amperage: 6 A
• Cable type: H05VV-F
• Cable length: 3 m or less
Network Cable
{IN:6.1_Connecting Network Cable}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-7
SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.7.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work 1.8 Disposing the Equipment
<REMARKS> When disposing the equipment, remove the CPU board first. Be sure to return the
To rotate the equipment, one side requires more than 1000 mm of space. removed CPU board to the Service Parts Center.
Front: More than 1000 mm
Rear: More than 600 mm
Left: More than 800 mm
Right: More than 800 mm
Top: More than 400 mm
Back Top
Left Right
Left Right
Front
DRY60_C0003.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-8
SPECIFICATIONS-9
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-9
SPECIFICATIONS-10
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-10
SPECIFICATIONS-11
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-11
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
11.25.2008 00 New release for UL (00 (1) Edition) (FM5451) All pages
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
05.20.2009 01(1) New release for the field (FM5546) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 06.30.2009
08.13.2009
02
02
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0
(supports multi modalities), etc) (FM5568)
Revised (FM5585)
1-3, 3.1, 3.2, 4
2
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 1-3, 3.1, 3.2, 7
SERVICE MANUAL 10.07.2011
12.10.2012
04
05
Revised (Ed3)
Revised (FM6078)
7
Cover
SPECIFICATIONS (FM-DL 100)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
SPECIFICATIONS-1
1. SPECIFICATIONS Product Code Contents Parts No. Remarks
DRYPIX PRIMA Overseas specifications 200 - 240 VAC specifications
200 STRNG PK main unit (Packaged in wooden crate)
1.1 Part Name =E
Film tray Tray setting: 35 x 43 cm size
Individual data CD: 1
Product Code Contents Parts No. Remarks
Main unit software CD: 1
DRYPIX PRIMA Overseas specifications 100 - 120 VAC specifications
100 = E main unit (Packaged in cardboard box) Operation Manual: 1
Film tray Tray setting: 35 x 43 cm size Quick Guide: 1
Individual data CD: 1 Reference Guide CD: 1
Main unit software CD: 1 DRYPIX PRIMA Overseas specifications 200 - 240 VAC specifications for
200 = CN E main unit China (Packaged in wooden crate)
Operation Manual: 1
Film tray Tray setting: 35 x 43 cm size
Quick Guide: 1
Individual data CD: 1
Reference Guide CD: 1
Main unit software CD: 1
DRYPIX PRIMA Overseas specifications 100 - 120 VAC specifications
100 STRNG PK main unit (Packaged in wooden crate) Operation Manual: 1
=E
Film tray Tray setting: 35 x 43 cm size Quick Guide: 1
Individual data CD: 1 Reference Guide CD: 1
Main unit software CD: 1
Operation Manual: 1
Quick Guide: 1
Reference Guide CD: 1
DRYPIX PRIMA Overseas specifications 200 - 240 VAC specifications
200 = E main unit (Packaged in cardboard box)
Film tray Tray setting: 35 x 43 cm size
Individual data CD: 1
Main unit software CD: 1
Operation Manual: 1
Quick Guide: 1
Reference Guide CD: 1
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-1
SPECIFICATIONS-2
1.2 List of Optional Parts
<NOTE>
The following List of Components enumerate items required for each
configuration, so they do not correspond to units (quantities) of orders or
packages.
Use the product codes (Product Code) indicated only as a reference for
unpacking and follow the order lists provided separately when placing orders.
List of Options for FM-DL 100
Product Code Product Parts No. Remarks
DPX PRIMA Additional option tray 898Y100546 -
TRAY = E
DPX PRIMA Cleaning roller 334Y0097 -
CLEANING
ROLLER E
DPX PRIMA Cart 888Y100004 -
CART = E
DPX PRIMA Fall prevention fixture kit 898Y100545 For securing equipment
FLOOT FIX KIT
=E
DPX PRIMA AC Power cable 136Y9138 -
CORD UL E (U.S.A. hospital grade)
DPX PRIMA AC Power cable (EU) 136N0449 -
CORD EU E
DPX 2000 AC Power cable (U.K.) 136N0450 -
CORD UK E
DPX PRM CT Modality connection software CD- 898Y100624 • CD-ROM for support-
MR CONNECT ROM ing multi modalities
KIT E • Supports V2.0 or later
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-2
SPECIFICATIONS-3
1.3 General Specifications Maximum Number of Recording Pixels
35 x 43 cm size : 3520 x 4280
35 x 35 cm size : 3520 x 3520
Recording Method 26 x 36 cm size : 2540 x 3600
Laser exposure heat development method 25 x 30 cm size : 2506 x 3016
20 x 25 cm size : 2000 x 2510
Laser Light Source
Image Compression Rate
Red semiconductor source (Class 3B, Wavelength: 658 to 659 nm, Maximum
output: 52.8 to 64.9 mW) x1 100 ±0.5%
Curl After Processing
First Printing Time
Floating from Shaukasten below 20 mm
Approximately 101 seconds (35 x 43 cm size, test printing)
Film
Processing Ability
35 x 43 cm size: Approx. 55 films/hour Applicable Types
35 x 35 cm size: Approx. 60 films/hour DI-HL (Blue base/ 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm size)
26 x 36 cm size: Approx. 70 films/hour MDI-HLJ (Blue base/ 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm size) (China
25 x 30 cm size: Approx. 70 films/hour only)
20 x 25 cm size: Approx. 70 films/hour
Applicable Film Size/Number of Sheets in One Pack
Start-up Time
35 x 43, 35 x 35 cm sizes : 101 sheets (including one sheet for reducing
Approx. 15 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 ˚C) dusts)
Approx. 10 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 ˚C/ power save mode) 26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm sizes : 151 sheets (including one sheet for reducing
dusts)
Image Quality
Number of Supplies
Exposure Resolution • One supply
14 bits • Up to five film trays can be used (Changed by the user)
• Film tray size setting is service setting
Maximum Density (Dmax)
3.0 Loading Method
Daylight conditions loading
Recording Pixel Size
100 µm Maximum Ejected Film Capacity
50 films
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-3
SPECIFICATIONS-3.1
Input I/F DICOM Connection Specifications
Non-Multi Modality Equipment Supported DICOM Services
DICOM Network input from CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR • Verification SOP Class
355V CL (V4.1 or later), CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL (V5.0 or later) only • Basic GrayScale Print Management Meta SOP Class
Multi Modality Equipment • Print Job SOP Class
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class
DICOM Network input only
• Print Queue Management SOP Class
Network Connection Interface • Presentation LUT SOP Class
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (automatic switching) l Number of Connectable Units (Multi Modality Equipment Only)
n Network Connection Maximum 64 (client) can be registered
l Number of Simultaneous Connection Associations (Multi Modality
l DICOM Protocol Equipment Only)
Direct connection
Maximum 10
l TOSHIBA Protocol l Number of Allowable Film Boxes in One Session (Multi Modality
Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link Equipment Only)
l FINP Protocol 32
Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link l Maximum Input Image Size
n Modality Connection Non-Multi Modality Equipment
l A/D-I/F Connection (Analog/Digital) Rows: 3520, Columns: 4280
Connection via DRYPIX Link Multi Modality Equipment
Applicable equipment: Diagnostic devices such as CT/MRI Rows: 7000, Columns: 7000
l E-I/F Connection
Network connection via DRYPIX Link
Applicable equipment: Image reader after FCR 7000, MF-300/MF-300S/MF-
300L, FN-PS551
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-3.1
SPECIFICATIONS-3.2
n Image Processing (Multi Modality Equipment Only) Earthquake Measures
Fall prevention fixture kit (Optional mounting accessory kit)
l Interpolation
SSM interpolation, A-VR interpolation (Can be switched automatically for each AE
Title by Configuration settings)
l Tone Processing
BAR method, SAR method (Can be switched automatically for each AE Title by
Configuration settings)
l Format
Standard Format (for all film sizes)
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40, 42, 48, 49, 54,
56, 63, 64, 70
Mixed Format
35 x 43 cm size portrait mix: six types
35 x 35 cm size portrait mix: five types
26 x 36 cm size portrait mix: one type
26 x 36 cm size landscape mix: four types
25 x 30 cm size portrait mix: one type
25 x 30 cm size landscape mix: four types
20 x 25 cm size portrait mix: one type
20 x 25 cm size landscape mix: four types
<REMARKS>
Equipments not supporting multi modalities only have the one frame format.
Image Spooling
Received image data is spooled in the DRAM until completion of printing.
Image spool amount: Equivalent to two images
Density Correction
Automatic density correction function (AUTO F. D. C.)
Annotation
Provided only in multi modality equipmets
Noise
Printing : Approx. 55 dB (excluding transient noises)
Stand-by : Approx. 45 dB
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-3.2
SPECIFICATIONS-4
BLANK PAGE
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-4
SPECIFICATIONS-5
1.4 Dimensions and Weight Weight
Main Unit Only
Dimensions
Approx. 85 kg
Main Unit Only Main Unit with Cart
610 mm x 630 mm x 620 mm (W x D x H) Approx. 110 kg
Main Unit with Cart
610 mm x 630 mm x 1080 mm (W x D x H)
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-5
SPECIFICATIONS-6
1.5 Environmental Requirements Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement
Frequency : 10 to 55 Hz
Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure Amplitude : 0.0075 mm or less
Floor Levelness
Operating
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around
Temperature : 15 ˚C (40%RH) to 30 ˚C (70%RH)
Relative humidity : 15%RH (30 ˚C) to 70%RH (30 ˚C) (No condensation) Floor Flatness
Atmospheric pressure : 750 to 1060 hPa
10 mm or less
Non-operating (not including film)
Temperature : 0 to 45 ˚C
Relative humidity : 10 to 90%RH (No dew condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 750 to 1060 hPa
Transit or Storage
Temperature/Relative humidity : -10 (10%RH) to 50 ˚C (90%RH)
(No freezing/No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 500 to 1060 hPa
Exhaust Air of Equipment
Maximum Exhaust Air in Standby State
31.3 m3/hour
Maximum Exhaust Air in Printing
63 m3/hour
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-6
SPECIFICATIONS-7
1.6 Electrical Requirements Overload Protection
100/110/120 V ～ : 15 A
Frequency 200/220/230/240 V ～ : 10 A
50-60 Hz n Power Cable
Acceptable variation: ±3%
CAUTION
Line Voltage
• Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.
100/110/120 V ～ • Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an
Acceptable variation: ±10% electric shock or a fire.
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines)
200/220/230/240 V ～
Acceptable variation: ±10% l For U.S. and Canada
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines)
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
<REMARKS>
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
The mark “ ～ ” means AC power supply. • Rated amperage: minimum 15 A
• Cable Type: SJT
Capacity • Cable length: 3 m or less
1.2 kVA l For U.S. Only
Rated Current • Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
100/110/120 V ～ : 12 A • Hospital Grade Plug
200/220/230/240 V ～ : 5.3 / 5.6 / 5.9 / 6 A
l For Canada Only
Power Consumption
• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
Maximum 1.5 kW If hospital grade disassemble type – complying with CSA C22.2, No.42.
Electric Energy • Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21.
Printing : Approx. 350 Wh l For Europe
Ready : Approx. 180 Wh
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
Power saving mode : Approx. 60 Wh
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
Maximum Heat Generation • Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
Printing : Approx. 1300 kJ • Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
Ready : Approx. 700 kJ • Rated amperage: 6 A
• Cable type: H05VV-F
Grounding Resistance • Cable length: 3 m or less
100 Ω or less
Network Cable
{IN:6.1_Connecting Network Cable}
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-7
SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.7 Equipment Installation Space 1.8 Disposing the Equipment
When disposing the equipment, remove the CPU board first. Be sure to return the
1.7.1 Installation Space removed CPU board to the Service Parts Center.
When Not Fixed with Fixtures
Front: More than 800 mm
Rear: More than 0 mm
Left: More than 50 mm
Right: More than 200 mm
When Fixed with Fixtures
Front: More than 800 mm
Rear: More than 50 mm
Left: More than 250 mm
Right: More than 250 mm
1.7.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work
<REMARKS>
To rotate the equipment, one side requires more than 1000 mm of space.
Front: More than 1000 mm
Rear: More than 600 mm
Left: More than 800 mm
Right: More than 800 mm
Top: More than 400 mm
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-8
SPECIFICATIONS-9
BLANK PAGE
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-9
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)
(DRYPIX 6000)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
MD-1
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT 1.2 System Configuration
This device use a compliant network with IEEE802.3 and adopts FPUP as a data
communication protocol.
1.1 Functions of Equipment <NOTE>
If the network is shut down due to a network device failure or any other cause , image
n Outline of Equipment data is no longer transferred to this device.
• This equipmet is a network printer dedicated to DICOM protocol, and adopts the
laser exposure heat development method.
n Without connecting to hospital network
• Film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 35 x 35 cm, 26 x 36 cm, 25 x 30 cm and 20 x 25 cm can be
used. HUB
• It has a processing ability of 80 sheets/hour for 35 x 43 cm size film, 85 sheets/hour CR-IR 391RU
for 35 x 35 cm size film, 100 sheets/hour for 26 x 36, 20 x 25 and 25 x 30 cm size
film.
DRYPIX 6000
• This equipment has one film tray insert slot which can recognize up to seven
different film trays. By replacing the film trays, various types of films can be used. CR-IR 355CL/
Data identified at each film tray include film size, number of remaining films, and CR-IR 355V CL
density correction data. DRY60_D0001.ai
• Films can be loaded with the film tray set in the equipment in a completely bright
room.
• The equipment has an automatic density measurement function which automatically
outputs image patterns required for density measurement and measures density.
• Power consumption of the equipment can be saved by setting the power saving
mode.
• The following DICOM protocols are supported.
• Verification SOP Class
• Basic Grayscale Print Management SOP Class
• Print Job SOP Class
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class
• Print Queue Management SOP Class
• Presentation LUT SOP Class
• Perform various settings of this equipment using the externally connected PC for
servicing.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-1
MD-2
n Connecting with DICOM Compatible Devices l System Configuration Example 3
Network inside hospital
l System Configuration Example 1
Network inside hospital
DRYPIX 6000
DRYPIX 6000
FCR5000 plus
FCR XG-1
Reader CR Console
(CR-IR348CL)
CR Console
(CR-IR348CL)
FCR9000 HI-C655QA
FCR XG-1
Reader
CT (DICOM)
CR Console
(CR-IR348CL) DRY60_D0004E.ai
DRY60_D0002E.ai
l System Configuration Example 2
Network inside hospital
DRYPIX 6000
FCR
VELOCITY U
CR Console
(CR-IR348CL)
FCR
Speedia CS
CR Console
(CR-IR348CL)
DRY60_D0003E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-2
MD-3
n Connecting with Non-DICOM Compatible Devices (Multi l System Configuration Example 5
Modality Equipment) Network inside hospital
l System Configuration Example 4 CT
(Digital) MF-300L
Network inside hospital
DRYPIX 6000
FCR5000 US
(FINP) (Analog)
DRYPIX 6000
CT MRI
(DICOM) (Digital video)
MRI
(TOSHIBA)
DRYPIX Link
DRYPIX Link
E-I/F
E-I/F FIX90A
FN-PS551 FIX90A
DRY60_D0006E.ai
DRY60_D0005E.ai
l System Configuration Example 6
Network inside hospital
DRYPIX 6000
DRYPIX Link
E-I/F
FCR9000 FIX90A
Remote
panel DRYPIX Link
HAV90A/B/E
DVI90A
CT/US/MRI DPI90A/B
AD-I/F
DRY60_D0007E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-3
MD-4
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts Film rerease unit cover
1.3.1 External View
Upper cover
Main power
Operation panel
switch
Front cover
Power inlet
Upper film loading Upper rear
unit cover cover
Shutter
Upper right
Upper film tray cover
Lower film loading LAN connector
unit cover
Shutter Lower rear Upper left cover
cover Lower left cover
Lower film tray DRY60_D0033E.ai
Lower right cover
Slot 1
Slot 2 DRY60_D0008E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-4
MD-5
1.3.2 Operation Panel No. Name Function
n Description of Functions 1 Utility button
(SW3)
• Pressing this button switches to U-Utility. U-Utility
can be set only when the equipment is in the ready
state.
• Allows to stop the pulsed buzzer (press when an
error or warning is raised).
• This button does not function when no film is load-
ed.
• Allows to resume from the power saving mode.
(Press during the power saving mode.)
2 Enter button • Allows to skip the temperature control at the initial-
ization. (Press during the system startup.)
• Allows to display the number of remaining films.
(Press during standby. Effective only while being
pressed.)
• Allows to unlock a tray provided with a shutter.
• Allows to unlock a tray in which no film is loaded.
1 2 3 4 5 DRY60_D0009.ai
• Allows to select a slot when loading an RFID card.
(Press during the RFID mode.)
• Confirms the menu selection during the U-Utility
mode.
• Allows to stop the pulsed buzzer. (Press when an
error or warning is raised.)
• Allows to resume from the power saving mode.
(Press during the power saving mode.)
3 Display panel • 7-segment LED indicating the status of the equip-
ment.
• Blinks when film jam occurs.
4 Pilot Lamp Lights up when the main power switch is ON and
goes off then the switch is turned OFF.
5 Stand-by switch • Turn ON/OFF the equipment power.
(SW1) • Press five seconds longer to turn OFF the equip-
ment power.
• Allows to stop the pulsed buzzer. (Press when an
error or warning is raised.)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-5
MD-6
n Example Display Indicates the number of the tray being selected.
The indicated number is the number of the tray.
Display Meaning DRY60_D0020.ai
Indicates that the equipment is currently starting up. (From Indicates that the tray or shutter is pulled out.
power ON to initialization)
DRY60_D0010 ai
DRY60_D0017.ai
Indicates that the equipment is currently initializin. The tray is in the fallback state.
(Blinks)
DRY60_D0011.ai
DRY60_D0023.ai
Indicates the time until the equipment starts up. Indicates that the equipment is currently being terminated.
DRY60_D0034.ai
DRY60_D0018.ai
Indicates the remaining number of film.
Normally, this is the remaining number of films in Tray 1.
To display the remaining number of films in Tray 2, press and
DRY60_D0012.ai
hold the Enter button (SW2).
Indicates the number of the tray containing no film.
The indicated number is the number of the tray.
DRY60_D0022.ai
Indicates that the film tray is open.
DRY60_D0013.ai
Error code.
(Blinks)
Error codes are indicated as numbers starting from 200.
DRY60_D0014 ai
(To make distinction from the remaining number of films.)
Indicates sleep state.
DRY60_D0015.ai
Indicates currently service utility mode.
DRY60_D0016.ai
Indicates currently user utility mode.
The indicated number is the number of the User-Utility.
DRY60_D0019.ai
Indicates that the User-Utility has been exited.
DRY60_D0021.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-6
MD-7
1.3.3 Layout of Units
Density measurement
Film cooling unit section
Heat development Film rerease unit (J)
unit (G)
Scanning
optics unit (S)
Sub-scanning Conveyor
unit (E) unit (D)
Vertical
conveyor
unit
Removal
unit (B1)
Controller
Film loading
unit (A1)
Vertical
conveyor
unit
Removal
Frame (K) unit (B2)
Film loading
unit (A2)
Front View DRY60_D0024E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-7
MD-8
1.3.4 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
n Film Loading Unit (A1, A2) Film load-
ing unit
SOLA11
SOLA21
Tray lock solenoid Solenoid Releases tray lock
(A1, A2)
SA11 Film pack/shutter detec- Sensor ON in presence of film
SA21 tion sensor pack/shutter
SA12 Tray interlock switch Switch Conduction state when
SA22 tray is loaded
SA13 Film size detection sen- Penetration type • Film tray detection
SA23 sor 1 sensor • Detection of film size
by combination of sen-
SA14 Film size detection sen- Penetration type sor state
SA24 sor 2 sensor
SA15 Film size detection sen- Penetration type
SA25 sor 3 sensor
SA16 Bar-code reader -
SA26
SOLA11
SA12
SA11
SA13 SA14 SA15
SA16
SOLA21
SA22
SA21
SA23 SA24 SA25
SA26
Front View DRY60_D0025 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-8
MD-9
n Removal Unit (B1, B2) Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Removal MB11 Film removing motor Motor Drives suction cup arm
unit MB21
(B1, B2)
MB12 Removal unit convey- Motor Film conveyance motor
MB22 ance motor at upper removal unit
SB11 Suction cup arm HP de- Penetration type ON when suction cup
SB21 tection sensor sensor arm is at home position.
SB12 Film surface detection Penetration type ON when suction cup
SB22 sensor sensor reaches on film/OFF
when detects film suc-
tion
MB11 SB11
SB12
MB12
MB21 SB21
SB22
MB22
Front View DRY60_D0026 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-9
MD-10
n Conveyor Unit (D) Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Conveyor MD1 Film conveyance motor Motor Drives conveyor unit
unit (D) rollers, and conveys film
MD2 Conveyor unit exit roller Motor Drives conveyor unit exit
gripping release motor grip roller up/down
SOLD1 Stopper solenoid Solenoid Ups/downs the stopper
SD1 Conveyor unit entrance Reflection type ON when film is at con-
sensor sensor veyor entrance
SD4 SD2 Conveyor unit exit sen- Reflection type ON when film is at con-
MD1 sor sensor veyor exit
SD2
MD2 SD3 Stopper release detec- Penetration type ON when stopper is at
SD5 tion sensor sensor release position
SD3 SD1
SD4 Grip roller position de- Penetration type ON when conveyor unit
SOLD1 tection sensor sensor exit grip roller is at grip-
ping position
SD5 Film edge sensor Photo-interru- Detects the left side
puter edge of the film from the
rotations of the rotary
encoder
Front View DRY60_D0027 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-10
MD-11
n Sub-scanning Unit (E) Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Sub-scan- ME1 Sub-scanning motor Motor Sub-scans and conveys
ning unit film
(E) ME1 driver board comes
as a set with ME1
SE1 Film leading edge detec- Laser detection Detects leading edge
tion sensor (SED28A) sensor and trailing edge of film
MS1 LD SYN
Board Assembly (ME1)
ME1
SE1
Front View DRY60_D0028 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-11
MD-12
n Heat Development Unit (G) Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
FANG1
Heat Devel- MG1 Heat development unit Motor Conveys film
2nd rack opment unit conveyance motor
HG4 / TPG4 (G)
THG5
FANG1 Cooling fan 1 Fan Ventilates and cools
THG4 near heat development
HG3 / TPG3 unit
THG3 HG1, HG2 Heater 1, Heater 2 Heater Heat 1st rack develop-
THG2 1st rack ment heat plate
HG3, HG4 Heater 3, Heater 4 Heater Heat 2nd rack develop-
HG2 / TPG2
ment heat plate
THG1
THG1, Heat development Thermistor Detects 1st rack tem-
HG1 / TPG1 THG2 thermistor 1, perature
Heat development
MG1 thermistor 2
THG3, Heat development Thermistor Detects 2nd rack tem-
THG4 thermistor 3, perature
Heat development
thermistor 4
TPG1
1st rack THG5 Film cooling section Thermistor Detects film cooling sec-
thermistor tion temperature
TPG2 TPG1, Thermal protector 1, Thermal Shuts off power supply
2nd rack TPG2 Thermal protector 2 Protector for heaters in overheat-
TPG3 ing of 1st rack heater
THG1
TPG3, Thermal protector 3, Thermal Shuts off power supply
TPG4 TPG4 Thermal protector 4 Protector for heaters in overheat-
THG2 ing of 2nd rack heater
HG1, HG2
THG3
THG4
HG3, HG4
Front View DRY60_D0029 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-12
MD-13
n Film Release Unit (J) Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Film re- SJ1 Film release unit en- Reflection type ON when film is at film
lease unit trance sensor sensor release unit entrance
SJ2
(J)
SJ1 SJ2 Film release sensor Reflection type ON when film is at film
LED
MJ1 sensor release unit exit
PDD
MJ1 Film Release Motor Conveys film
Conveyance Motor
Front View DRY60_D0030 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-13
MD-14
n Frame (K) Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Frame (K) SK1, SK2, Front cover / right cover Microswith 前カバーと右カバー、お
SK3 / lower right cover inter- よび右下カバーが閉じて
lock switch いるときに通電する。
THK1 Film recording seciton Thermistor Detects film recording
thermistor seciton temperature
THK1
FANK1 Cooling fan Fan Cools the inside of the
controller unit.
SK1
SK2
FANK1
SK3
Front View DRY60_D0031 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-14
MD-15
1.3.5 Layout of Boards Name Main function
LED28A PDD28A
LED28A (Density measure- Light is emitted for density measurement
ment section light-emitting
board)
LDD28A
Main power switch LDD28A (Laser drive board) Scanner laser drive
PDD28A (Density measure- Receives penetrating light for density measurement
ment section light-sensing
board)
CPU32A (CPU board) Overall control of equipment, network input, image pro-
cessing
PSU27A (Power supply unit) Converts the input AC power to +24VDC and supplies to
the PSU31B board
PSU31B (Power supply unit) Generates +5V and ±12V from the +24VDC power sup-
plied from the power supply unit and supplies to the SND
board
PSU27A
SND28B (Sensor driver Mechanical drive parts drive/control, I/O parts control, sig-
A board) nal counter of film edge sensor signal, thermistor signal/
density measurement section data AD conversion, inter-
lock control, heat development heater control, operation
panel control
Main power switch Supplies AC power to the power supply unit
CF (Compact flash memory) Main program storage, log writing (logs are not saved),
128 MB
DIMM (Memory) Main memory of CPU32A board, 512 MB
PRN28B (Print control board) DA converts processed image signals from CPU32A board
and sends to scanner, laser power strength control, expo-
PRN28B sure output timing control
HTD28A
HTD28A (Heater drive board) Drives heat development unit heaters based on the control
CPU32A signal from SND board.
PSU31B
DETAIL A SND28B
PRN28B
CPU32A
CF
DIMM DRY60_D0032E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-15
MD-16
n Fuse Information
l PSU31B Board
{MC:10.3_PSU31B Board}
l HTD28A Board
<Fuse Locations>
HTD28A
F1
F2
DRY60_D0035.ai
<Fuse Information>
Board Type Rated voltage Rated amperage
indications (V) (A)
F1 Vacuum Tube 48 2
F2 Vacuum Tube 48 5
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-16
MD-17
2. STARTING UP ENDING THE
EQUIPMENT
{MD (FM-DL 100):2._STATING UP AND ENDING THE EQUIPMENT}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-17
MD-18
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL
OPERATIONS
<REMARKS>
For this chapter, refer to the manual for FM-DL 100 that has the same film loading unit
as that of this equipment.
Note, however, that the I/O symbols of this equipment are different from those of
FM-DL 100. Therefore, replace the I/O symbols of FM-DL 100 with those of this
equipment.
For descriptions of the scanner unit, refer to the part number "839Y100057" that has
the same mechanism as that of this equipment.
{MD (FM-DL 100):3._DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL OPERATIONS}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-18
MD-19
4.DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL 4.2 Interlock Control
CONTROL When the interlock function operates, the power of the following load is cut off.
：Power cutoff load
SK1, TPG1-
Unit Symbol Name SK1 SA12 SA22
SK2 TPG4
4.1 System Block Diagram Film loading unit
SOLA11 Tray lock solenoid -
(Upper)
Bar-code reader MB11 Film removing motor -
+5V Removal unit (Upper) Removal unit conveyance
MB12 -
AC-DC DC-DC motor
AC100-120V / Film loading unit
AC200-240V PSU27A +24V PSU31B +12V CPU32A PRN28B +5V SOLA21 Tray lock solenoid -
Scanner unit (Lower)
MB21 Film removing motor -
Removal unit (Lower) Removal unit conveyance
MB22 -
+5V, motor
+12V MD1 Film conveyance motor -
+5V, Conveyor unit exit roller
+12V Conveyor unit MD2 -
+5Vsb, gripping release motor
+24V,
+12V +5Vsb Operation panel SOLD1 Stopper solenoid -
(7-segment LED, Sub-scanning unit ME1 Sub-scanning motor -
SW, buzzer)
Scanner unit LD LDA28E -
SND28B
+5V, +24V Heat development unit
MG1 -
conveyance motor
Senser, actuator Heat development unit
+24V
5 phase driver
+24V HG1-4 Heater - - - -
FANG1 Cooling fan -
Cover FANK1 Cooling fan -
AC100-120V / AC100-120V /
AC200-240V AC200-240V Heart development
HTD28A
heater
DRY60_D0036.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-19
MD-20
5. IMAGE PROCESSING
{MD (FM-DL 100):5._IMAGE PROCESSING}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-20
MD-21
6. PRINTING FORMATS
{MD (FM-DL 100):6._PRINTING FORMATS}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-21
MD-22
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-22
MD-23
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MD-23
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
11.25.2008 00 New release for UL (00 (1) Edition) (FM5451) All pages
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
05.20.2009 01(1) New release for the field (FM5546) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 06.30.2009 02
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0 (sup-
ports multi modalities), etc) (FM5568)
1, 1.1, 1.2, 2, 6, 13.1, 13.2, 15-17,
29, 31-47
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 1, 1.1, 2, 8, 13, 16, 42, 43, 45
SERVICE MANUAL
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 1, 1.1, 16, 27-29, 43, 47-49
10.07.2011 04 Revised (Ed3) 1.1
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) Cover, 46
DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)
(FM-DL 100)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
MD-1
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT n List of Functions by Connected Equipment
: Can use , -: Cannot use
Modality Equipment connected
1.1 Functions of Equipment connection
software
Function CR-IR 391CL/ CR-VW 674/ CR-IR 346CL/ Other
CR-IR 391V CR-IR 355V CL CR-IR 348CL manufacturer
CL (V4.1 or later) (V5.0 or later) equipment
n Outline of Equipment Uninstalled Film output *2 -
• This equipmet is a network printer dedicated to DICOM protocol, and adopts the Simultaneous power ON by WakeONLan *1 *1 *3 -
laser exposure heat development method. Use of ART-PC (Simultaneous power
• Film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 35 x 35 cm, 26 x 36 cm, 25 x 30 cm and 20 x 25 cm can be OFF, film size/error information display)
- -
used. Automatic log saving when equipment
*3 -
• It has a processing ability of 55 sheets/hour for 35 x 43 cm size film, 60 sheets/hour ends
for 35 x 35 cm size film, 70 sheets/hour for 26 x 36, 20 x 25 and 25 x 30 cm size Use of PC-Utility *3 -
film.
Software uninstallation/upgrade *3 -
• This equipment has one film tray insert slot which can recognize up to seven
different film trays. By replacing the film trays, various types of films can be used. Installed Film output
Data identified at each film tray include film size, number of remaining films, and Simultaneous power ON by WakeONLan *1 *1 *3 -
density correction data.
Use of ART-PC (Simultaneous power
• Films can be loaded with the film tray set in the equipment in a completely bright OFF, film size/error information display)
- -
room. Automatic log saving when equipment
• The equipment has an automatic density measurement function which automatically ends
*3 -
outputs image patterns required for density measurement and measures density. Use of PC-Utility *3 -
• Power consumption of the equipment can be saved by setting the power saving
mode. Software uninstallation/upgrade *3 -
• The following DICOM protocols are supported.
*1: WakeOnLan needs to be set using the installation CD provided with the equipment connected.
• Verification SOP Class (SCP)
*2: Supported by FM-DL 100 main unit software V2.0 or later.
• Basic Grayscale Print Management SOP Class (SCP)
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class (SCP) *3: Supported by FM-DL 100 main unit software V2.1 or later.
• Print Job SOP Class (SCP)
• Print Queue Management SOP Class (SCP)
• User Preference LUT SOP Class (SCP)
• Perform the various settings of this equipment on CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL,
CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL (V4.1 or later), or using the externally connected PC
for servicing.
• Installing the modality connection software in this equipment allows various
modalities to be connected. (This software is supported in V2.0 or later.)
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-1
MD-1.1
1.2 System Configuration n Connecting with DICOM Compatible Devices
This device use a compliant network with IEEE802.3 and adopts FPUP as a data l System Configuration Example 1
communication protocol.
<NOTE>
If the network is shut down due to a network device failure or any other cause , image
data is no longer transferred to this device.
n Connecting the PRIMA system (One to One Connection)
Without connecting to hospital network
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-1.1
MD-1.2
l System Configuration Example 2 n Connecting with Non-DICOM Compatible Devices (Multi
Modality Equipment)
l System Configuration Example 4
l System Configuration Example 3
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-1.2
MD-2
l System Configuration Example 5
l System Configuration Example 6
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-2
MD-3
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts
1.3.1 External View
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-3
MD-4
1.3.2 Operation Panel l Example Display
Display Meaning
Indicates that the equipment is currently starting up. (From
power ON to initialization)
Indicates that the equipment is currently initializing
Indicates the remaining number of film (61 sheets in this exam-
ple)
Indicates that the film tray is open.
Error code (203 in this example)
No. Name Function
Indicates sleep state
1 Utility button Pressing this button switches to U-Utility. U-Utility
can be set only when the equipment is in the ready
state. Indicates currently service utility mode.
2 Enter button • Pressing this button releases the tray lock.
• For executing the menu displayed. If a lower menu Indicates currently service utility mode.
exists, shifts to the next menu.
3 Display panel • 7-segment LED indicating the status of the equip- Indicates that the equipment is currently being terminated
ment.
(See “l Example Display” in the right table.)
• Blinks when film jam occurs.
Pilot Lamp Lights up when the main power switch is ON and
goes off then the switch is turned OFF.
4 Stand-by switch • Turn ON/OFF the equipment power.
• Press five seconds longer to turn OFF the equip-
ment power.
<REMARKS>
There is a buzzer at the back of the operation panel board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-4
MD-5
1.3.3 Layout of Units
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-5
MD-6
1.3.4 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
n Film Loading Unit Film load- SOLA1
ing unit (A)
Tray lock solenoid Linear solenoid Releases tray lock
SA1 Film pack/shutter detec- Reflection type ON in presence of film
tion sensor sensor pack/shutter
SA2 Tray detection switch Microswitch Conduction state when
tray is loaded
SA3 Film size detection sen- Penetration type • Film tray detection
sor 1 sensor • Detection of film size
(PI: 5mm) by combination of sen-
sor state
SA4 Film size detection sen- Penetration type
sor 2 sensor
(PI: 5mm)
SA5 Film size detection sen- Penetration type
sor 3 sensor
(PI: 5mm)
<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor : Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor : Film present/Detects actuator
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-6
MD-7
n Removal Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Removal MB1 Film removing motor 2-phase pulse Drives suction cup arm
unit (B) motor
MB2 Removal unit convey- 2-phase pulse Film conveyance motor
ance motor motor at upper removal unit
SB1 Suction cup arm HP de- Penetration type ON when suction cup
tection sensor sensor arm is at home position.
(PI: 5mm)
SB2 Film surface detection Penetration type ON when suction cup
sensor sensor reaches on film/OFF
(PI: 5mm) when detects film suc-
tion
<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor : Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor : Film present/Detects actuator
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-7
MD-8
n Conveyor Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Conveyor MD1 Film conveyance motor 2-phase pulse Drives conveyor unit
unit (D) motor rollers, and conveys film
MD2 Conveyor unit exit roller 2-phase pulse Drives conveyor unit exit
gripping release motor motor grip roller up/down
SOLD1 Stopper solenoid Linear solenoid Ups/downs the stopper
SD1 Conveyor unit entrance Reflection type ON when film is at con-
sensor sensor veyor entrance
SD2 Conveyor unit exit sen- Reflection type ON when film is at con-
sor sensor veyor exit
SD3 Stopper release detec- Penetration type ON when stopper is at
tion sensor sensor release position
(PI: 5mm)
SD4 Grip roller position de- Penetration type ON when conveyor unit
tection sensor sensor exit grip roller is at grip-
(PI: 5mm) ping position
SD5 Film edge sensor Photo-interru- Detects the left side
puter edge of the film from the
rotations of the rotary
encoder
<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor : Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor : Film present/Detects actuator
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-8
MD-9
n Sub-scanning Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Sub-scan- ME1 Sub-scanning motor 5-phase pulse Sub-scans and conveys
ning unit motor film
(E) ME1 driver board comes
as a set with ME1
SE1 Film leading edge detec- Laser detection Detects leading edge
tion sensor (SED28A) sensor and trailing edge of film
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-9
MD-10
n Heat Development Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Heat Devel- MG1 Heat development unit 2-phase pulse Heat develops and con-
opment unit conveyance motor motor veys film
(G)
FANG1 Cooling fan 1 DC fan Ventilates and cools
near heat development
unit
HG1, HG2 Heater 1, Heater 2 Silicon rubber Heat 1st rack develop-
heater ment heat plate
HG3, HG4 Heater 3, Heater 4 Silicon rubber Heat 2nd rack develop-
heater ment heat plate
THG1, Heat development Thermistor Detects 1st rack tem-
THG2 thermistor 1, perature
Heat development
thermistor 2
THG3, Heat development Thermistor Detects 2nd rack tem-
THG4 thermistor 3, perature
Heat development
thermistor 4
THG5 Film cooling section Thermistor Detects film cooling sec-
thermistor tion temperature
TPG1, Thermal protector 1, Manual recov- Shuts off power supply
TPG2 Thermal protector 2 ery type for heaters in overheat-
ing of 1st rack heater
TPG3, Thermal protector 3, Manual recov- Shuts off power supply
TPG4 Thermal protector 4 ery type for heaters in overheat-
ing of 2nd rack heater
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-10
MD-11
n Film Release Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Film re- SJ1 Film release unit en- Reflection type ON when film is at film
lease unit trance sensor sensor release unit entrance
(J)
SJ2 Film release sensor Reflection type ON when film is at film
sensor release unit exit
<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor : Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor : Film present/Detects actuator
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-11
MD-12
n Frame Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Frame (K) SK1, SK2 Front cover/right cover Microswith ON when upper front
interlock switch cover is opened
THK1 Film recording seciton Thermistor Detects film recording
thermistor seciton temperature
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-12
MD-13
1.3.5 Layout of Boards Name Main function
LED28A (Density measure- Light is emitted for density measurement
ment section light-emitting
board)
LDD28A (Laser drive board) Scanner laser drive
PDD28A (Density measure- Receives penetrating light for density measurement
ment section light-sensing
board)
CPU28A (CPU board) Overall control of equipment, network input, image pro-
cessing
PSU27A (Power supply unit) Converts the input AC power to +24VDC and supplies to
the PSU28B board
PSU28B (Power supply unit) Generates +5V and ±12V from the +24VDC power sup-
plied from the power supply unit and supplies to the SND
board
SND28A (Sensor driver Mechanical drive parts drive/control, I/O parts control, sig-
board) nal counter of film edge sensor signal, thermistor signal/
density measurement section data AD conversion, inter-
lock control, heat development heater control, operation
panel control
Main power switch Supplies AC power to the power supply unit
CF (Compact flash memory) Main program storage, log writing (logs are not saved),
128 MB
DIMM (Memory) Main memory of CPU28A board, 512 MB
PRN28A (Print control board) DA converts processed image signals from CPU28A board
and sends to scanner, laser power strength control, expo-
sure output timing control
HTD28A (Heater drive board) Drives heat development unit heaters based on the control
signal from SND board.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-13
MD-13.1
l Fuse Layout
SND28A PSU28B PRN28A HTD28A
No. Part No. Rating
113Y100327 113Y100328 113Y100330 113Y100331
1 137S1350 250V/10A F1, F2
2 137S1417 48V/1A F8 F1
3 137S1419 48V/1.6A F2
4 137S1420 48V/2A F6, F7 F5
5 137S1421 48V/3.2A F4, F8
6 137S1423 48V/5A F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 F6, F7, F9
7 137S1459 250V/8A F1
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-13.1
MD-13.2
BLANK PAGE
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-13.2
MD-14
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING THE
EQUIPMENT
2.1 Power ON Operations
The equipment starts up in the following conditions when the main power switch is
ON.
Method Conditions Remarks
Stand-by switch on the Press stand-by switch on the -
operation panel operation panel.
WakeOnLAN function Receive WakeOnLAN packet The network equipment needs
from network connected device to correspond to the WakeOn-
LAN function.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-14
MD-15
2.2 Error Processing n When Level 0 Errors Occur
When errors occur during initialization or in the routine mode, this equipment performs When level 0 errors occur, the equipment completes the current process as much as
the following processes. possible, stops temperature control, and the error display is shown.
The equipment then becomes system down and the power must be turned ON/OFF.
n When Films Run Out Level 0 errors consists of the following.
• Conveyance system fatal error
When the remaining number of films counter becomes 0, the equipment determines • Temperature control system fatal error
that films have run out and shows a display prompting replenishing of films.
• Scanner system fatal error
Information that films have run out will be sent to externally connected devices at the
point a printing request is made. • Image processing fatal error
The replenishing of films by the user is determined by the opening/closing of film • Fatal errors determined by the software
trays, and by the ON/OFF of the film pack/shutter detection sensor. • Failed in reading external files when equipment is started.
• Discovered contradiction of various software environment when equipment is
n When Level 1 Errors Occur started.
When level 1 errors occur, for errors which can be recovered by the user, displays on • Discovered contradiction in service settings when equipment is started.
user recovery operations are shown. Initialization was performed after recovery by the • Discovered malfunction of various electric parts when equipment is initialized.
user, and if printing is currently being performed printing will be continued.
If recovered by retry operations of the equipment, only error logs are performed. Error n Degeneration
logs are also only performed for reference information for design analysis.
When the density measurement section malfunction, this is taken as degeneration,
l Cover Open/Tray Open/Shutter Detection and operations are continued without using the function.
When these errors are detected, operations of the equipment are stopped, the error
notification screen appears on the operation panel, and operations of the equipment
are continued after errors have been removed by the user.
l When Films Jam
When films jam, printing of films ahead of the jammed position are completed, and the
film jam screen appears.
Images which have not been printed will be re-output automatically after recover.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-15
MD-16
2.3 Power OFF Operations
When the power of this equipment is ON, it can be ended in the following conditions.
Method Conditions Remarks
Stand-by switch on the Press the stand-by switch for -
operation panel five seconds on the operation
panel.
Main power switch Turn OFF the main power All power supplies are cut off
switch. regardless the state of the
equipment.
CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR Monitor Tool must be running When the equipment is ended,
391V CL or CR-VW on CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V the equipment log is transferred
674/CR-IR 355V CL CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V to CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V
power OFF CL CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V
CL
<REMARKS>
• Shut down the software before turning off the power when ending the equipment.
• The conditions for the equipment to shut down or not shut down when the power of
CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL is turned OFF are as
follows;
• Conditions for shutting down together
When the equipment is in the standby mode/when level 0 error has occurred
(V1.2 or later)/during the energy saving mode (V1.2 or later)
• Conditions for not shutting down together
When the equipment is currently printing/currently receiving images/when level
0 error has occurred/during use of the U-Utility/during use of the PC-Utility
• Whether to end the equipment at the same time the power of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR
391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL is turned OFF can be set using the PC-
Utility.
• As CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL is displayed full-screen, the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor
Tool cannot be displayed on the PC screen at the same time, and therefore cannot
be used together with it.
This also means that the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool cannot be turned off together
with CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL.
However, by setting the PC-Utility’s “Logging Mode” to “ON”, logs of the DRYPIX
PRIMA Monitor Tool will be saved in CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL automatically when
the equipment is shut down.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-16
MD-17
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL 3.1.2 Film Tray Detection/Film Size Identification
The presence of film tray is detected by the film size detection sensors (SA3/SA4/
OPERATIONS SA5).
When a film tray is inserted into the equipment, the actuator attached to the tray turn
ON the sensors to detect the tray. The attached position of this actuator can be varied
according to the film size. (service setting)
3.1 Film Loading Unit When a tray is inserted into the equipment, film size is identified from the combination
of the ON/OFF status of the three film size detection sensors.
3.1.1 Film Sizes
This equipment is compatible with film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 26 x 36 cm, 25 x 30 cm,
and 20 x 25 cm. The following figure shows the arrangement of guide pins and guide
plates for each film size.
The following procedures are required to change the film size.
• Change the position for attaching the guide pin and guide plate in the film tray Sensor
Film tray
• Change the film size at the configuration setting of the PC-Utility SA3 SA4 SA5
{IN:5.2_Setting Film Tray} No film tray is loaded OFF OFF OFF
35x43 cm size film ON OFF OFF
35x35 cm size film ON ON OFF
26x36 cm size film ON ON ON
25x30 cm size film OFF ON ON
20x25 cm size film OFF OFF ON
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-17
MD-18
3.1.3 Film Pack/Shutter Detection 3.1.4 Shutter Lock Mechanism
To prevent exposure of films in trays when trays are opened, this equipment is This equipment is provided with a shutter lock mechanism to prevent
provided with sensors to detect film packs in the trays or the shutter. The tray open exposure of film to light when the shutter is disconnected during film
operation via the operation panel can be received only when reflected light from tray removal to replace film.
the film pack or shutter is detected by the film pack/shutter detection sensor (SA1: A pin which moves up and down according to the insertion and removal movements
reflection type sensor). of the film tray is attached to the left back side of the film tray. This pin moves down
when the film tray is inserted and moves up when removed. When the pin enters the
hole on the shutter, it locks the shutter so that the shutter does not disconnect when
the film tray is removed.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-18
MD-19
3.1.5 Tray Detection/Tray Lock
Film tray detection is performed by the tray detection switch (SA2). When a film tray is
inserted, SA2 turns OFF, thereby detecting the film tray presence.
SA2 also serves as an interlock function, which cuts off the +24V power of the film
removing motor (MB1) and removal unit conveyance motor (MB2) when tray is
opening.
Tray lock is released by SOLA11. By the tray open operation via the operation panel,
SOLA1 turns ON and the tray lock is released.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-19
MD-20
3.2 Removal Unit 3.2.2 Film Suction
The film removing motor (MB1) rotates at high speed in the reverse direction (CCW)
by the removal enable signal, and the suction cup arm starts moving.
3.2.1 Suction Cup Arm Home Position The suction cup arm curves according to the groove on the removal unit frame and
In the standby state, the suction cup arm is positioned at the suction cup arm home passes the upper dead-point.
position. The suction cup arm home position is the position at which the suction cup
arm HP detection sensor (SB1) switches from ON to OFF. At this time, the removal
conveyance roller (upper) is not touching the removal unit conveyance roller (lower).
When the removal unit conveyance roller (upper) reaches the film surface turning ON
the film surface detection sensor (SB2), MB1 switches to low speed rotation.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-20
MD-21
After MB1 switches to low speed rotation, it continues to rotate in the reverse direction 3.2.4 Film Release
until SB2 goes OFF. At this time, the suction cup arm pushes the bellows in, and
generates negative pressure so that the film is suctioned to the suction cup. After flapping operations complete, MB1 rotates in the normal direction, and moves
the film to the removal conveyance roller (lower).
If SB1 turns ON while it is moving, MB1 switches to low speed, and continues rotating
in the normal direction for the specified number of pulses.
3.2.3 Film Flapping Operations
With the suction cup suctioning the film, MB1 rotates in the normal direction for the
specified pulse at low speed, the suction cup arm rises and stops once. From this
position, MB1 switches to middle speed, and performs flapping operations which
repeat rising/lowering of suction cup arm five times. After the film reaches the removal conveyance roller (lower), the bellows is pushed in
Flapping operations supply air to the trailing edge of the film by moving the leading even further, which pushes the air inside out. The film separates from the suction cup.
edge up and down, to prevent improper conveyance due to adherence of the trailing Upon release of film from the suction cup, the removal unit conveyance roller (upper)
edges of the films. In addition, the films stuck together due to static are separated falls by its own weight, and the film is gripped by the removal unit conveyance roller
while they are moving after fanning operations by fanning the lead edge of the film (upper) and removal unit conveyance roller (lower).
with the claw provided on the film loading unit.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-21
MD-22
3.2.5 Removal Conveyance 3.2.6 Returning to Home Position
After film separation, the removal unit conveyance motor (MB2) rotates, conveying the When SD1 detects the leading edge of the film via the conveyance operation, MB1
film until it stops at the conveyer unit entrance sensor (SD1). rotates in the normal and reverse direction, returning the suction cup arm to the home
At this time, if SD1 does not turn ON within the specified time, the film is detected as position, and waits for the next removal enable signal.
having been dropped or film jam occured, and an error code is displayed.
When the trailing edge of the preceding film passes the film leading edge detection
sensor (SE1), film conveyance resumes.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-22
MD-23
3.3 Conveyor Unit 3.3.2 Striking against Stopper
Upon the start of conveyance, the stopper solenoid (SOLD1) turns ON and raises the
stopper located at the conveyor unit exit. The stopper release detection sensor (SD3)
3.3.1 Conveyance detects whether the stopper is raised or lowered.
Upon receiving the conveyance start signal, conveyance into the conveyor unit starts.
The film conveyance motor (MD1) and removal unit conveyance motors (MB2) rotates
to feed the film until its leading edge is detected by the conveyor unit exit sensor (SD2).
The film that has been temporarily at rest after being detected at SD2 is conveyed at
low speed until it strikes against the stopper. Because the conveyance by the motor
<REMARKS> is still continued, the film gets arched to correct skew with respect to the conveyance
This equipment does not have a sensor for detecting cleaning roller. Therefore in the direction.
event users forget to reinstall back the cleaning roller after cleaning, film will not be
conveyed to the conveyor, resulting in film jamming at the removal unit.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-23
MD-24
3.3.3 Gripping by Conveyor Unit Exit Roller 3.3.4 Film Edge Sensor
When the predetermined time has passed since the film struck the stopper, MD1 and Film edge sensor (SD5) is provided in the conveyor unit exit to optimize the start
MB2 stop. position of main scanning/writing (the number of pixels to be skipped).
Then, the conveyor unit exit roller gripping release motor (MD2) rotates in the reverse When the film passes the conveyor unit exit, the edge sensor arm of the film edge
direction (CCW), allowing the conveyor unit exit roller to grip the film. The grip roller sensor assembly provided on the front side of the conveyor unit is pushed, thereby
position detection sensor (SD4) detects whether the conveyor unit exit roller is in the allowing the sector gear concentric to the edge sensor arm to rotate the encoder plate.
gripped or released state. The film edge sensor (SD5) measures the distance from the reference position to the
When the film is completely gripped, SOLD1 turns OFF and the stopper is lowered. film edge by counting the number of slits on this rotating encoder plate.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-24
MD-25
3.3.5 Pre-recording Conveyance
After transfer of image data to the print buffer in the formatter, film conveyance to the
sub-scanning unit is started (pre-recording conveyance).
In pre-recording conveyance, MD1 is rotated in the reverse direction (CCW) at high
speed for the specified number of pulses, and is switched to low speed in the reverse
direction in synchronization with the sub-scanning conveyance roller to send the film
to the sub-scanning unit.
After conveying the film for the specified time, MD1 is rotated in the normal direction
(CW) to disengage the conveyor gears in the rear of the conveyor unit to free the
conveyor unit exit roller, thereby preventing .
Thereafter, when image recording is started and SD2 goes OFF, the conveyor unit exit
grip roller is released.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-25
MD-26
3.4 Sub-scanning Unit 3.4.2 Recording Conveyance
When the leading edge of film is detected by the film leading edge detection sensor
(SE1), image recording by means of the laser light from the scanner unit starts.
3.4.1 Sub-scanning Conveyance After Image recording ends, and the film is conveyed for a distance according to the
Upon film conveyance from the conveyer unit, the sub-scanning motor (ME1) rotates film length, ME1 stops.
driving the sub-scanning conveyance roller via the flat belts (rear/front). <REMARKS>
When performing service, the sub-scanning motor shall be replaced as a set because
it consists of the pulse motor and ME1 driver board. The drive speed of ME1 is corrected according to the temperature measured by the
{MC:6.3_Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1)} recording unit thermistor (THK1) near the sub-scanning unit.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-26
MD-27
3.5 Scanning Optics Unit 3.5.2 Laser Exposure
Red laser of maximum power 52.8 to 64.9 mW/658 to 659 nm is radiated to the six-
face polygon mirror from the laser diode mounted to the laser unit of the scanner unit.
3.5.1 Scanner Unit The laser light scanned in the main scanning direction via the polygon mirror is
The scanning optics unit is composed of the LDD board (laser diode control board), synchronized by detecting the scan start timing at the main scanning sync sensor of
LDA board(laser diode emission board), SYN board (start-point detection board) of the the SYN board.
scanner unit, SED board of the sub-scanning unit (film leading edge detection sensor:
SE1), polygon motor, LED board and PDD board of the density measurement section.
The LDD board, LDA board, SYN board, and SED board are controlled by the PRN l When Using 839Y100057
board, while the polygon motor and density measurement section are controlled by the
SND board. These controls are synchronized with film conveyance to record images.
The digital data sent from the MTH board is D/A converted in the PRN board, and sent
to the LDD board as analog image signal.
<REMARKS>
This equipment can be used 839Y100057 or 839Y0060 scanning optics unit.
l When Using 839Y0060
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-27
MD-28
The laser light reflected from the polygon mirror passes through the scanning lens 3.5.3 Density Measurement Section
and is directed via the reflecting mirror to the surface of the film at the bottom of the
scanning optics unit. The exposed film is conveyed to the heat development unit and The density measurement section measures film density after development, and
is heat developed. compiles density correction tables to correct image density.
The film (17-steps pattern/24-steps pattern) printed via the density measurement
menu on the operation panel is read for the light penetration amount when it passes
l When Using 839Y100057 between the light-emitting side of the LED board and light-sensing side of the PDD
board of the film release unit to measure the density data.
l When Using 839Y0060
3.5.4 Temperature Correction
Film image density varies depending on the cooling temperature after heat
development and the temperature of the equipment. For this reason, the temperature
of the film cooling section and temperature near the sub-scanning unit are detected by
the thermistor, and based on this temperature data, image data before D/A conversion
are corrected.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-28
MD-29
3.6 Heat Development Unit 3.6.2 Temperature Control
Provided in the heat development unit are two heat development rack assemblies: 1st
rack and 2nd rack.
3.6.1 Heat Development Temperature control is performed by the temperature detection signal from the
The exposed image on the film conveyed from the sub-scanning unit is heat thermistors (THG) attached to the heat plate of each rack.
developed by passing through the heat plate and heat development roller of the heat In addition, thermal protectors (TPG) are attached to each heat plate as a protection
development unit. against overheating.
The heat development unit conveyance motor (MG1) starts rotating (CW) upon the
start of removal operation.
There is no sensor for detecting the conveyance state of the film at the heat
development unit, and it is determined as jam at the heat development unit when film
does not reach the ejection unit entrance sensor (SJ1).
The film that has undergone the heat development process is uncurled while being
gradually cooled down by the film cooling section, and conveyed to the film release
unit.
After the last film is released, MG1 stops.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-29
MD-30
3.7 Film Release Unit
3.7.1 Film Discharge
The film that has undergone the heat development is conveyed to the film release unit
and discharged outside the equipment.
When the film release unit entrance sensor (SJ1) turns OFF after the trailing edge
of film passes the film cooling section, the heat development unit conveyance motor
(MG1) swithces to high speed (CW).
When the film is discharged, MG1 stops concurrently upon expiry of the prescribed
time from the passage of film trailing edge through SJ1 to the exit of film trailing edge
from the equipment.
3.7.2 High Speed Discharge
When the trailing edge of film passes SJ1 and the following conditions are satisfied,
MG1 switches to high speed normal rotation to allow the film to be discharged at high
speed.
Conditions High speed shift
Normal film output (film cooling sec-
Shifted to high speed release upon SJ1-OFF
tion temperature is low)
Normal film output (film cooling sec-
tion temperature is high) Shifted to high speed release upon expiry of
the prescribed time after SJ1-OFF
Cleaning film output
Density measurement film output Not available
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-30
MD-31
4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL
CONTROL
4.1 System Block Diagram
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-31
MD-32
4.2 Interlock Control
The drive power supply cutoff by the interlock switch of this equipment is shown
below.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-32
MD-33
n Disconnection Detection by Photocoupler
The ON/OFF state of interlock switches, relays, and fuses are used for software
control after being converted ON/OFF signal by photocoupler.
n Disconnection Detection by Fuse
The ON/OFF state of fuses are used for software control.
n Stop Load by Interlock Switch
When the interlock function operates, the power of the following load is cut off.
：Power cutoff load
SK1, TPG1-
Unit Symbol Name SA2
SK2 TPG4
Film loading unit (A) SOLA1 Tray lock solenoid
MB1 Film removing motor
Removal unit (B) Removal unit conveyance
MB2
motor
MD1 Film conveyance motor
Conveyor unit exit roller
Conveyor unit (D) MD2
grippiing release motor
SOLD1 Stopper solenoid
Sub-scanning unit (E) ME1 Sub-scanning motor
Heat development unit
MG1
conveyor motor
Heat development
unit (G) HG1-HG4 Heater
FANG1 Cooling fan
Scanner unit LD LDA board v
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-33
MD-34
4.3 Functions of Boards
4.3.1 CPU Board
n Outline
The CPU board performs overall control of the equipment, network input, and image
Processing.
n Main Functions
l CPU
AMD Goede 500 MHz, LX800, cache 128KB
l Chip set
AMD CS5536
l Memory
DDR SDRAM 512MB
l LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T/1 ch
l PCI
1 slot (PCI 104)
l IDE
CF card slot/1 ch
l USB
None
l Lithium Battery
For RTC and backup RAM (CR2032) (Cannot remove/replace)
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-34
MD-35
4.3.2 PRN Board n Main Functions
n Outline l LBC block (Image data transfer)
The PRN board converts image data stored in the main memory on the CPU board Performs DMA transfer of image data via the PCI bus, and controls transfer to the
from digital to analog via the following blocks, and sends analog image data to the frame memory.
scanner unit using the coaxial cable.
l CTG block (Image data output)
Performs image data transfer from the frame memory to line memory, and
controls transfer to the DAC based on the start-point/leading edge detection
signal.
l DAC block (Image data analog output)
Converts image data from the line memory from digital to analog, and controls
the laser light power.
l Start-point/leading edge detection signal (Timing generation)
Takes in film leading edge detection sensor (SE1) outputs, and generates output
timing to the exposure area. To accurately obtain start-points in the scanning
direction, a PLL synthesizer is mounted.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-35
MD-36
4.3.3 SND Board n Main Functions
n Outline l Sensor I/F
The SND board performs I/O control of the equipment by controlling the CPU board.
Sensor input
• PI 5 mm GAP type............................................x 7
• PI reflection type...............................................x 5
• Interlock state detection....................................x 1
• Fuse disconnection detection...........................x 9
• Film edge sensor..............................................x 1
A/D conversion
• Thermistor........................................................x 6
• Density measurement photo diode...................x 1
Sensor control
• LED lighting control
(Reflection type, film edge sensor)...................x 4
• Density measurement LED lighting control......x 1
l Drive I/F
Control
• 2-phase pulse motor control.............................x 5
• 5-phase pulse motor control.............................x 1
• Solenoid control................................................x 2 (Power down is 1)
• Polygon motor control.......................................x 1
• Cooling fan control............................................x 1 (2 simultaneously controlled)
Drive
• 2-phase pulse motor drive................................x 5
• Solenoid drive...................................................x 2 (Power down is 1)
• Polygon motor drive..........................................x 1
• Cooling fan drive...............................................x 1 (2 simultaneously controlled)
l Interlock
Micoroswitch
• Cover................................................................x 1 (2 serially connected)
• Tray...................................................................x 1
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-36
MD-37
l Operation Panel I/F
• LED ON/OFF control........................................x 21 (7-segment x 3)
• Switch...............................................................x 1
• Buzzer..............................................................x 1
l Others
For Analysis
• Fuse disconnection detection circuit
• Board version information is controlled by the difference of pullup/down
resistance inplementation
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-37
MD-38
4.3.4 HTD Board 4.3.5 PSU27A (Power Supply Unit)
n Outline n Outline
The HTD board controls the heater of the heat development unit by control of the SND When the main power switch is turned ON, PSU27A (power supply unit) outputs
board. DC+24V based on the AC power input.
Input AC voltage
100-120 VAC ±10% (50-60Hz)
Output DC voltage
+24V
Rating current
10A
Overcurrent protection
Provided
Current leakage
0.22A or less
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-38
MD-39
4.3.6 PSU28B (Power Supply Unit) n Main Functions
n Outline Input DC voltage
The PSU28B board steps down the +24V power output from PSU27A to five types of +24 V/10 A
voltage and outputs them. To ensure laser safety, the ±12V output, which is the laser
power, is interlock-controlled by the relay. Output DC voltage 1 (Continuous output)
+5 VS (+5 V ±4%/0.5 A): Standby power
Output DC voltage 2 (Output control)
• +5 V ±4%/10 A : All control boards
• +3.3 V ±4%/4 A : All control boards
• ±12 V ±4%/0.5 A : Analog power (Image output, thermistor, density
measurement)
• +24 V ±4%/5 A : Drive power (Motor, solenoid, etc.)
<REMARKS>
Only +5 VS is output for the CPU board and operation panel when the main
power switch is turned ON.
Output AC voltage
100-240 VAC ±10%(Max. 10.3 A)
<REMARKS>
For the output AC voltage, the input AC power is output via the HTD board for the
heat development heater.
Laser protection interlock
The ±12 V output of the laser power supply is interlock controlled by relay.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-39
MD-40
5. IMAGE PROCESSING 5.1.2 Service Availability
The following shows the transition conditions for enabling/disabling reception of image
This equipment receives image data from devices connected by DICOM protocol from data.
the network, spools them on the SDRAM, and prints them after performing image
processing. This section describes DICOM services supported by this equipment,
l Transition Conditions for Reception Disabled→Reception Enabled
operation timing, and image processing. • After start, use of the communication function was enabled
• If the number of associations which can be accepted does not meet the upper limit
5.1 Image Input l Transition Conditions for Reception Enabled→Reception Disabled
• System end
5.1.1 Valid Services • System down error occurs
The following table shows the DICOM services supported. • The number of association simultaneous acceptances reaching the upper limit
No. Service Name Details <REMARKS>
1 Verification SOP Class Returns response for Echo request (C-Echo). If the service
has been started and response can be returned to the re- Receives image data during start of utility/power save mode. In this case, this
quest, Success is returned. equipment prints film when it returned to the routine status.
2 Basic Grayscale Print Consists of the following four services.
Management Meta 1) Basic Film Session SOP Class
SOP Class 2) Basic Film Box SOP Class 5.1.3 Image Data Reception Availability
3) Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class When request for printing of film size not loaded on the equipment is received,
4) Printer SOP Class processing is carried out according to the DICOM substitution specification. Error is
1 Basic Film Session Indicates the parameter common to all film sessions. returned when no corresponding film.
SOP Class For example, number of films, film destination, etc.
2 Basic Film Box Indicates common parameter for one film in the film session. 5.1.4 DICOM Settings and Restrictions
SOP Class Common for all images on one film. The following shows details and restrictions which can be set. (Multi modality
3 Basic Grayscale Indicates parameter applicable for single films in one film and equipment only)
Image Box SOP image pixel data. Item Details
Class
DICOM tag enable/disable Service can be set whether to adopt modality request/configu-
4 Printer SOP Class Exchanges data on printer status. ration setting value for the DICOM tag. Can be set for each
3 Basic Annotation Box Indicates film annotation (normally displays character string). client.
SOP Class Created according to the annotation display format ID (2010, Number of simultaneous The upper limit for associations which can be communi-
0030) value of the Basic Film Box SOP. connection associations cated with the client at the same time is 10. Settings can be
4 Print Job SOP Class Executes print process. Created by ACTION such as Basic changed using PC-Utility.
Film Session SOP, Basic Film Box SOP, etc. Deleted after Number of permitted film The number of permitted film boxes in one session is 32.
completion of output or output failure. boxes in session
5 Print Queue Manage- For performing status monitoring of print queue, deletion Maximum input image size The maximum input image size is 7000 (Rows) x 7000 (Col-
ment SOP Class of jobs for which job information in queue or owner ID are umns).*
known, change of priority.
Requested Decimate/Crop “FAIL” is specified for this tag, and if images which do not fit
6 Presentation LUT Prints using LUT information sent from client. Behavior tag (2020,0040) into the recordable image frame are sent, reception is denied.
SOP Class (Normally, LUT information is registered at this equipment)
Maximum number of con- 64
nection clients registered
*: 3520 (Rows) x 4280 (Columns) for equipments not supporting multi modalities.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-40
MD-41
5.2 Image Spool Management Function
The following four image spool functions are available.
• Manages print request of image data received.
• Ensures spool space in the space for two maximum size images.
• As it may not be possible to print due to reasons such as film empty, etc., the print
request is deleted after the completion of printing on film.
• If the tray is replaced, check if image data of the previous size is remaining as
print request. If remaining, the DICOM service is set to offline, and error is notified.
DICOM does not recover from offline until tray of the previous size is loaded.
<REMARKS>
Three levels of priority (HIGH/MEDIUM/LOW) can be set for the print request
managed as the priority of spooled images. Amongst images with the same priority,
those with older print request time have higher priority.
Though DICOM service is supported, it cannot be changed from this operation panel.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-41
MD-42
n Approximate Image Spool Amount
l Input Image Area
Image memory board Standard
- 512 MB
- 7000*7000
OS, image information 31 MB
Print buffer 88 MB
Image processing area 42 MB
Input image interpolation 94 MB
area
Log file, etc. 22 MB
Input image area 235 MB
(117 MW)
l Spool Amount
Standard
Data size (Maximum image size: 7000*7000)
Source Image size
(235 MB)
2 byte image 1 byte image 2 byte image 1 byte image
CR 35x43 cm size (3520*4280) 28.7 MB - 7 sheets -
(2 byte image) 26x36 cm size (3600*2540) 17.4 MB - 12 sheets -
7000*7000 93.5 MB 46.7 MB 1 frame 3 frames
5000*5000 47.7 MB 23.8 MB 3 frames 8 frames
Modality 2000*2000 7.6 MB 3.8 MB 29 frames 59 frames
(1 byte or 2 byte image) 1024*1024 2.0 MB 1.0 MB 114 frames 230 frames
512*512 0.5 MB 0.3 MB 462 frames 926 frames
640*512 0.6 MB 0.3 MB 369 frames 740 frames
(9 bits or more) (8 bit image)
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-42
MD-43
5.3 Image Processing (Multi Modality n Tone Processing
Equipment Only) This equipment corresponds to Dmax=3.0.
It supports two tone processing methods (BAR method/SAR method). Which method
This section describes image processing details and information added to film. is used depends on the Configuration information of each AE-Title. The default setting
5.3.1 Image Processing 1 is SAR method.
5.3.2 Image Processing 2 In the case of the SAR method, the Type 1/Type 2 density processing calculation
5.3.3 Annotation method can be selected. The default value is Type 2.
<REMARKS>
5.3.1 Image Processing 1 Type 1: Density calculation method implementing compensation for the measured
With image processing 1, compensation magnification/reduction processing, tone density
processing, and format processing are implemented. Type 2: Density processing calculation method with smoother tone expression than
Type 1. Tone continuity improves in low density areas below 0.4
n Compensation Magnification/Reduction Processing
Corresponds to the SSM and A-VR processes. The following table shows the n Format Processing
processing details.
Print format processing for arrangement in one film is performed. The maximum
Priority Evaluation conditions Processing details number of image frames is 70. Supports film annotation function for displaying the
High NONE is specified for Magnifica- Compensation magnification/reduction processing hospital name, etc.
tion Type (2010, 0060) using the is not performed Also supports the Extension Format of the following devices.
DICOM tag
DICOM output size specification Increases the magnification/reduction rate to 1/255- Manufacturer Model ID
(Reqested Image Size:2020,0030) 255/1 and processes in specified unit of 0.1 mm Siemens -- SM
↓
Configuration information available Processed according to the configuration Phillips EasyVision EV
(For AE-Title)
HITACHI Medico DR2000 Series HM
Configuration not available Processed according to the default configuration
Low (For AE-Title) Clavis View HM
Processing is carried out according to the following if recording of images larger than FUJIFILM HI-C655QA CR
the image frame is requested. HI-C655D CR
Priority Evaluation conditions Processing details CR-IR346CL CR
High When Requested Decimate/Crop DECIMATE: Reduced in size so that fits inside im- (Console for FCR XG-1)
Behavior tag is present age frame CR-IR348CL CR
CROP: Recordable area center is adjusted to (Console for FCR 5000)
the center of the specified image and
excess parts are cut off Synapse CR
FAIL: Reception is rejected. As rejection is
↓ returned during image input, no pro-
cessing is carried out
Configuration information available Processed according to the configuration
(For AE-Title)
Configuration not available Reduced until fits the image frame
Low (For AE-Title)
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-43
MD-44
5.3.2 Image Processing 2
In image processing 2, sharpness correction, density correction, and uniformity
correction are performed.
n Sharpness Correction
Secondary vagueness masking is performed on input images. The calculation
parameters are mask size (main scanning, sub-scanning directions), and emphasis
(main scanning, sub-scanning directions).
n Density Correction
Converts image data to output 12-bits according to the density correction table to set
the total density tone of the system to the designated tone characteristics. The density
correctable table is provided for each tray.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-44
MD-45
5.3.3 Annotation Item Details
This equipment supports the following functions for annotation. Macro support Supports macro. The following table shows the supported macro.
Macro Expanded data
Item Details
%YYYY% Year accepted
Character layout Six patterns can be specified for the character layout setting.
1) Only upper (lower) left is defined %MM% Month accepted
Characters are left-aligned and printed. The whole film printing area
width is used. %DD% Day accepted
2) Only upper (lower) right is defined %MON% Month accepted in English
Characters are right-aligned and printed. The whole film printing area
width is used. %TIME% Time accepted
3) Only upper (lower) center is defined
Characters are center-aligned and printed. The whole film printing %IPADDR% IP address
area width is used. %AET% AE title
4) The two layouts upper (lower) left and upper (lower) right are defined.
The printing area width is divided into two left and right, and printed. %ALIAS% Name by client
They are printed left-aligned and right-aligned. The respective two-byte displays are also supported except for “%AET%”
5) The two layouts upper (lower) left and upper (lower) center, or upper and “%ALIAS%”. This equipment outputs “%RESOLUTION%” by “STD”.
(lower) right and upper (lower) center are defined.
The printing area width is divided into three areas and printed. Image annotation By using the (2031, 1020) Annotation Image Sequence private tag (on
6) The three layouts upper (lower) left, upper (lower) right, and upper condition that it is used between FUJIFILM equipment), image data is ar-
(lower) center are defined. ranged on the film as annotation.
The printing area width is divided into three areas and printed.
Character code One-byte kana and two-byte kanji are support. The character code fol-
lows the tag specification (0008, 0005).
The following table shows the corresponding character set.
Character set Supported characters
Without tag/ISO_IR_6 Default repertory
ISO_IR100 Latin alphabet No. 1
ISO_IR13 One-byte kana
ISO 2022 OR13\ISO 2022 IR One-byte Kana+ Kanji. This is
87 the Japanese supported pattern.
Priority order of Synthesis is performed by the following priority order (high to low).
synthesis 1) Image data from client
2) Character data from client
3) Client setting default annotation
4) Default client setting default annotation
When set to “Use default annotation: No” using the extension format, this
equipment will operate as “No annotation output”.
Display area Annotation area which is twice/three times/four times the default can be
set by client in the height direction.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-45
MD-46
6. PRINTING FORMATS 6.2 Standard Formats
This equipment supports the following standard formats for all film sizes.
This chapter describes printing formats such as format names, standard formats, and No. of frames/film: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40,
mixed formats. 42, 48, 49, 54, 56, 60, 63, 64, 70
6.1 Reading the Format Name Portrait Landscape
In “STANDARD\c, r”, c and r indicate the following values. STANDARD\1,1 STANDARD\5,5 STANDARD\1,1 STANDARD\6,6
c (Column) : No. of frames in the horizontal direction STANDARD\1,2 STANDARD\5,6 STANDARD\1,2 STANDARD\7,4
r (Row) : No. of frames in the vertical direction
STANDARD\1,3 STANDARD\5,7 STANDARD\2,1 STANDARD\7,5
For example, they are as shown in the following for “STANDARD\3, 4”. STANDARD\2,1 STANDARD\5,8 STANDARD\2,2 STANDARD\7,6
STANDARD\2,2 STANDARD\6,6 STANDARD\3,1 STANDARD\7,7
STANDARD\2,3 STANDARD\6,7 STANDARD\3,2 STANDARD\8,4
STANDARD\2,4 STANDARD\6,8 STANDARD\3,3 STANDARD\8,5
STANDARD\3,3 STANDARD\6,9 STANDARD\4,2 STANDARD\8,6
STANDARD\3,4 STANDARD\6,10 STANDARD\4,3 STANDARD\8,7
STANDARD\3,5 STANDARD\7,7 STANDARD\4,4 STANDARD\8,8
STANDARD\3,6 STANDARD\7,8 STANDARD\5,3 STANDARD\9,6
STANDARD\4,4 STANDARD\7,9 STANDARD\5,4 STANDARD\9,7
STANDARD\4,5 STANDARD\7,10 STANDARD\5,5 STANDARD\10,6
STANDARD\4,6 STANDARD\8,8 STANDARD\6,3 STANDARD\10,7
STANDARD\4,7 STANDARD\6,4
STANDARD\4,8 STANDARD\6,5
020-201-05E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-46
MD-47
6.3 Mixed Formats l 10” x 14” (26 cm x 36 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT
The following shows the frame layout of the mixed formats of each film size supported
by this equipment.
l 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT
l 10” x 14” (26 cm x 36 cm) LANDSCAPE MIXED FORMAT
l 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) MIXED FORMAT l 10” x 12” (25 cm x 30 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-47
MD-48
l 10” x 12” (25 cm x 30 cm) LANDSCAPE MIXED FORMAT
l 8” x 10” (20 cm x 25 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT
l 8” x 10” (20 cm x 25 cm) LANDSCAPE MIXED FORMAT
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-48
MD-49
BLANK PAGE
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-49
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
(DRYPIX 6000)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
MT-1
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD
When malfunctions occur in the equipment, analyze them from error code and perform
the required corrections.
n Troubleshooting from Error Codes
When analyzing malfunctions from error codes, refer to “3. ERROR CODE TABLE”.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-1
MT-2
2. ERROR CODE
2.1 Checking Error Codes
For details on error codes, refer to “3. ERROR CODE TABLE” for the meaning of the
error which has occurred, suspected cause, and remedy.
When analyzing an error code, also refer to the detailed code provided.
To differentiate the place of error (printer or formatter), look up the name displayed
under “Component” on the error code table in the following table.
Component Error Type Place of Error
FLH Film conveyance related error
MFC Data setting/system related error
DEN Internal densitometer related error
Temperature control system related
DEV
error Printer error
POL Polygon motor control related error
PNL Panel control related error
SCN Scanner related error
ESN Film edge sensor related error
DICOM DICOM error
Spooler Spooler error
ImgPrc Image processing error
Output Output control error
JobMake Test pattern generation error
Main MAIN control error
Formatter error
File transfer error
PCUTL
(Using the PC Tool in normal state)
File transfer error
Satellite (Using the PC Tool during initializa-
tion error)
StartUp Initialization error
File transfer error (Using the PC
Installer
Tool at initialization
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-2
MT-3
2.2 Format of Detailed Information 2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information
Perform this check only for analyzing error codes of the printer. n 2-A (Sensor Related Errors)
In the usual troubleshooting, find the corresponding error code from the error code
tables, and refer to the suspected causes and remedy methods indicated to resolve Errors occurring in initialization self-diagnosis, removal, recording, constant
the problem. monitoring, etc. (Including mechanism, etc.)
However if the problem persists, or to investigate the problem in further detail, check Convert the hexadecimal 4-digit code to binary, compare the bit maps, and investigate
the following detailed information to analyze the problem. the input state corresponding to each bit.
1=ON (Close), 0=OFF (Open)
n Checking Detailed Information of Error Codes
(1) Check the corresponding error code and its detailed information at the
Detailed error code
(4-digit hexadecimal)
a b c d
error message display, or at [Display Error Log] of the PC-Utility. DRY60_E0002E.ai
(2) Check the detailed information format number at “3. ERROR CODE l 2-A-1 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S1))
TABLE” and refer to the corresponding format. Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
[Bit map]
(3) Find the format information from the 4-digit detailed information, and a b c d
analyze the problem.
P 0237 : 0030 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SB2 SB1 SA5 SA4 SA3 0 SA1
Error Code
3
Detailed Info.
Spare Cover Removal Tray
1 unit DRY60_E0003E.ai
LED Error Detailed
Display Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Information Component Error Message
l 2-A-4 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S4))
Malfunction of SB1 sensor or
MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
Attempted to deviate the
of the SB1 port of the SND [Bit map]
board, or malfunction of the MB1
removal arm from HP
Tray removal unit
(home position) in
controller.
Contact the Fujifilm a b c d
715 HPdeviation
initialization, but SB1
1. Using PC-Utility, check 0237 2-A-1 FLH
service personnel.
detection error sensors, motors, and perform
does not become OPEN.
mechanism adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists,
replace sensors/motors. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SJ2 SJ1 SG1 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1
3. If the problem still persists,
replace the SND board.
2 Conveyor unit/
2-A-1 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S1)) Sub-scanning unit/
Film release unit
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SB2 SB1 SA5 SA4 SA3 0 SA1 DRY60_E0004E.ai
0 0 3 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
DRY60_E0001E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-3
MT-4
l 2-A-5 (Electric Related Information (Type E)) n 2-B (File I/O Error)
Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
[Bit map] l 2-B-1 (Type F)
a b c d
Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the number
of the file causing the error and the causes.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F05 F12 F12 F24 F24 F24 F24 F24
VS VM VP VE VD VC VB VA
Detailed error code 2 0 X X
Reserved Power Supply Fuse
DRY60_E0005E.ai
File number Cause DRY60_E0006E.ai
File number
201: Conveyance timer file (For mechanism)
202: Conveyance timer file (For size)
203: Conveyance timer file (For M-Utility)
204: Conveyance counter file
205: PM control parameter file (For mechanism)
206: PM control parameter file (For size)
207: PM control parameter file (For M-Utility)
208: Timer file for PM time monitoring
Causes
1: Open error
2: Read error
3: Write error
4: Conversion error
5: Line specification error
6: Column specification error
7: Size specification error
8: External file data error
A: Data range error (Detected by application)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-4
MT-5
n 2-E (PC-Utility Operation Error) n 2-F (For Error Analysis)
l 2-E-1 (Type U) l 2-F-4
Displays the PC-Utility command number and parameter of errors which occur when Displays the temperature when an error occurs in subscanning speed correction
the removal operation of the PC-Utility was not executed as specified. calculation. (unit: 1°C)
However, if the temperature is minus (-1 to -99 °C), “F” will be displayed at the first
Detailed error code X X 0 Y digit.
Detailed error code
(When temperature is plus) 0 X X X
PC-Utility Parameter
command number number DRY60_E0007E.ai
Film Recording Section Temperature
PC-Utility command number DRY60_E0008E.ai
08: Unit Operation..................................................................... (1) Detailed error code
10: Grip (Action:MD2 only)........................................................ (2) (When temperature is minus) F 0 X X
Parameter number
When (1)
0: Home Positioning Film Recording Section Temperature
DRY60_E0009E.ai
1: Film Surface
2: Film Suction
3: Upper Limit
4: Film Fanning
5: Film Release
6: Film Convey
7: Removing
When (2)
0: Home Positioning
3: Grip
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-5
MT-6
2.2.2 DEN Related (Internal Densitometer) Errors Detailed 2.2.3 ESN Related (Film Edge Sensor Related) Errors
Information Detailed Information
n 4-A (File I/O Error) n 8-B (Outside Range Data)
Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes. Displays the error value when the edge sensor data value is abnormal (outside range).
Detailed error code 1 B X X Detailed error code
(4-digit hexadecimal)
X X X X
DRY60_E0012E.ai
n 8-C (No Acquired Data)
Fixed value Cause DRY60_E0010E.ai
Displays the file number during edge sensor related data file acquisition when the file
could not be created due to no data.
n 4-B (Insufficient Effective Density Measurement)
Displays the effective data acquired by AD data analysis in decimal 4-digits when the
number of effective AD data measured by the density measurement section is less
Detailed error code 3 9 0 X
than the minimum number of effective data (NOTE).
Detailed error code X X X X Fixed value File number
DRY60_E0013E.ai
DRY60_E0011E.ai
NOTE: The number of effective data is 90% of the number of data logically measured.
File number
The number of effective data required for 24-steps pattern is above 5613, that 0: Edge sensor data file
for 17-steps pattern is above 4158, and that for QC pattern is above 1300. 1: Nonvolatile memory edge sensor data file
2: Edge sensor monitoring data file
3: Edge sensor average value data file
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-6
MT-7
2.2.4 DEV Related (Temperature Control Related) Errors n 9-D (File I/O Error)
Detailed Information Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes.
n 9-A (Temperature Error) Detailed error code 1 B X X
Displays the temperature when the temperature is outside the specified range in
heater temperature control. (Unit: 1°C)
However, if the temperature is minus (-1 to -99°C), “F” will be displayed at the second
digit from the left. Fixed value Cause DRY60_E0018E.ai
Detailed error code
(When temperature is plus) X X X X n 9-E (Heater Control Task Start Error)
Displays the heater number when the heater temperature control task start ends in
error.
Heater number Temperature
DRY60_E0014E.ai Detailed error code 0 0 0 X
Detailed error code
(When temperature is minus) X F X X
Heater number
DRY60_E0019E.ai
Heater number Temperature
DRY60_E0015E.ai
n 9-F (General Error Details)
Displayed when no detailed information.
n 9-B (Heater Thermistor Disconnection Error)
Error which occurs when the heater thermistor is disconnected. Displays the heater
number and thermistor temperature (A/D value).
Detailed error code F F F F
DRY60_E0020E.ai
Detailed error code
(4-digit hexadecimal) X X X X
Heater number A/D value
DRY60_E0016E.ai
n 9-C (Film Cooling Section, Recording Section Thermistor
Disconnection Error)
Error which occurs when the thermistor of the film cooling section or recording section
is disconnected. Displays the thermistor temperature (A/D value).
Detailed error code
(4-digit hexadecimal) 0 X X X
A/D value DRY60_E0017E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-7
MT-8
n 9-H (Heat Development Control Parameter Value Error)
Displays the causes when heat development control parameter value errors are
detected.
Detailed error code X 0 0 X
Fan number Cause
DRY60_E0021E.ai
Code details
Cause
0001: Target temperature setting error
0003: Heater control TCYC1 value error
1004: A system fan control TCYC2 value error
1005: A system fan control DUTY value: fr1 error
1006: A system fan control DUTY value: fr2 error
1007: A system fan control DUTY value: fr3 error
1008: A system fan control DUTY value: fr4 error
0009: Heater control DUTY value error
000A: Photosensing material correction parameter SBC1 value error
000B: Photosensing material correction parameter KBC value error
000C: TRAY number error at photosensing material correction parameter setting
000D: Photosensing material correction parameter SBC4 value error
2004: B system fan control TCYC2 value error
2005: B system fan control DUTY value: fr1 error
2006: B system fan control DUTY value: fr2 error
2007: B system fan control DUTY value: fr3 error
2008: B system fan control DUTY value: fr4 error
000E: Voltage DUTY parameter value error
000F: Equipment voltage parameter value error
001F: Language information parameter value error
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-8
MT-9
3. ERROR CODE TABLE
<NOTE>
The error codes of this equipment are displayed in three digits on the 7-segment LED of the operation panel. Error logs are logged using error codes (four digits) and
details codes (four digits), and therefore need to be reread.
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
201 Front cover open The front cover is open. Close the front cover. 1212 2-A-4 FLH
203 Tray open error The tray was open in initialization and removal. Close the tray. 1225 2-A-1 FLH
Tray shutter present The shutter was inserted in the tray in
204 error initialization and removal.
Remove the shutter of the tray. 1227 2-A-1 FLH
The shutter is inserted (degenerated state).
The shutter is inserted in the tray (degenerated Or malfunction of the SA11 sensor or SA1 port of the SND board.
Tray shutter present state) at startup initialization by user 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
205 error at startup operations. Or all trays cannot be used due to adjustments.
02C0 2-A-1 FLH
the corresponding error. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Tray shutter uninserted Attempted to open the tray, but the shutter was
206 error not inserted.
After inserting the shutter, open the tray. 1233 2-A-1 FLH
Tray open error
207 (Lower)
The tray was open in initialization and removal. Close the tray. 1229 2-A-1 FLH
Tray shutter present The shutter was inserted in the tray in
208 error (Lower) initialization and removal.
Remove the shutter of the tray. 1231 2-A-1 FLH
The shutter is inserted (degenerated state).
The shutter is inserted in the tray (degenerated Or malfunction of the SA21 sensor or SA21 port of the SND board.
Tray shutter present state) at startup initialization by user 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
209 error at startup (Lower) operations. Or all trays cannot be used due to adjustments.
02C1 2-A-1 FLH
the corresponding error. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Tray shutter uninserted Attempted to open the tray, but the shutter was
210 error (Lower) not inserted.
After inserting the shutter, open the tray. 1235 2-A-1 FLH
Density measurement The automatically measured density value is Execute automatic density measurement again. If the error persists,
211 error incorrect. contact your dealer.
1801 None DEN
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-9
MT-10
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The measured density of the QC printed film is
212 QC failure
abnormal.
Execute QC output again. If the error persists, contact your dealer. 1802 None DEN
213 Laser lifespan notice The laser lifespan is about one month. Contact your dealer to replace the laser unit. 1803 FFFF SCN
214 Laser lifespan warning The laser lifespan has been exceeded. Contact your dealer to replace the laser unit. 1804 FFFF SCN
The size of the film on which received images
215 Film size differences are printed and that of the film in the currently Change to the tray loaded with 35x43 cm size film. 1811 None MAIN
set tray are different.
The size of the film on which received images
216 Film size differences are printed and that of the film in the currently Change to the tray loaded with 35x35 cm size film. 1812 None MAIN
set tray are different.
The size of the film on which received images
217 Film size differences are printed and that of the film in the currently Change to the tray loaded with 26x36 cm size film. 1813 None MAIN
set tray are different.
The size of the film on which received images
218 Film size differences are printed and that of the film in the currently Change to the tray loaded with 25x30 cm size film. 1814 None MAIN
set tray are different.
The size of the film on which received images
219 Film size differences are printed and that of the film in the currently Change to the tray loaded with 20x25 cm size film. 1815 None MAIN
set tray are different.
Unregistered tray
220 inserted
An unregistered tray has been inserted. Changed to a registered tray. 1819 None MAIN
Film dropped during removal.
Or malfunction of SD1 sensor or MB12 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 port of the SND board,
At completion of removal process, did not
or malfunction of the MB12 controller.
Tray removal unit jam detect normal SD1 CLOSE (film leading edge
221 error detection).
1. Check if film has dropped. 1291 2-A-1 FLH
2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
(Retryover)
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-10
MT-11
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The remainder is not discharged normally from the removal unit.
Or malfunction of the SD1 sensor, or MB12 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 ports of the SND board,
Tray removal unit Conveyed film to the conveyor unit by or malfunction of the MB12 controller.
222 jam error (Discharge discharge remainder, but did not detect SD1 1. Check if film has dropped. 12A9 2-A-1 FLH
remainder) CLOSE (film leading edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Film dropped during removal.
Or malfunction of SD1 sensor or MB22 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 port of the SND board,
At completion of removal process, did not
or malfunction of the MB22 controller.
Tray removal unit jam detect normal SD1 CLOSE (film leading edge
223 error (Lower) detection).
1. Check if film has dropped. 1293 2-A-1 FLH
2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
(Retryover)
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from the removal unit.
Or malfunction of the SD1 sensor, or MB22 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 ports of the SND board,
Tray removal unit Conveyed film to the conveyor unit by or malfunction of the MB22 controller.
224 jam error (Lower) discharge remainder, but did not detect SD1 1. Check if film has dropped. 12B0 2-A-1 FLH
(Discharge remainder) CLOSE (film leading edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Jam occurred during conveyance.
Open the right cover, and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, but did
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
Conveyor unit jam not detect SD2 CLOSE (film leading edge
225 error detection).
adjustments. 2294 2-A-4 FLH
SD2, MD1, MB12/MB22
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-11
MT-12
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Jam occurred during conveyance.
Open the right cover, and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, but did
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
Conveyor unit jam not detect SD2 CLOSE (film leading edge
226 error detection).
adjustments. 1295 2-A-4 FLH
SD2, MD1, MB12/MB22
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board
The remainder is not discharged normally from the conveyor unit.
Or malfunction of the SD2 sensor, or MD1, MB12/MB22 motors.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD2 port of the SND board,
Conveyor unit jam Conveyed film to the conveyor unit by or malfunction of the MD1, MB12/MB22 controller.
227 error discharge remainder, but did not detect SD2 1. Check if film has dropped. 12B1 2-A-4 FLH
(Discharge remainder) CLOSE (film leading edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Open the upper front cover, and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning unit, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
Sub-scanning unit jam
228 error
did not detect SE1 CLOSE (film leading edge adjustments. 1297 2-A-4 FLH
detection). SE1, MD1, ME1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from the sub-scanning unit.
Or malfunction of the SD2 sensor, or MD1, ME1 motors.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD2 port of the SND board,
Sub-scanning unit jam Conveyed film to the sub-scanning unit by or malfunction of the MD1, ME1 controller.
229 error discharge remainder, but did not detect SD2 1. Check if film has dropped. 12B2 2-A-4 FLH
(Discharge remainder) OPEN (film trailing edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-12
MT-13
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Jam occurred during heat development conveyance.
Open the front cover, and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the heat development unit,
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
Heat development unit but did not detect SJ1 CLOSE (film leading
230 jam error edge
adjustments. 1299 2-A-4 FLH
SJ1, ME1, MG1
detection).
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from the heat development
unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ1 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ1 port of the SND board, or
Heat development unit Conveyed film to the heat development unit by
malfunction of the MG1 controller.
231 jam error discharge remainder, but did not detect SJ1
1. Check if film has dropped.
12B5 2-A-4 FLH
(Discharge remainder) CLOSE (film leading edge detection).
2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Jam occurred during film release conveyance.
Open the front cover, and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
Film release unit jam
232 error
did not detect SJ1 OPEN (film trailing edge adjustments. 12A0 2-A-4 FLH
detection). SJ1, MG1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Jam occurred during film release conveyance.
Open the front cover, and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
Film release unit jam
233 error
did not detect SJ2 CLOSE (film leading edge adjustments. 12A1 2-A-4 FLH
detection). SJ2, MG1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Jam occurred during film release conveyance.
Open the front cover, and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
Film release unit jam
234 error
did not detect SJ2 OPEN (film trailing edge adjustments. 12A2 2-A-4 FLH
detection). SJ2, MG1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-13
MT-14
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The remainder is not discharged normally from the film release unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ1 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ1 port of the SND board, or
Film release unit jam Conveyed film to the film release unit by malfunction of the MG1 controller.
235 error discharge remainder, but did not detect SJ1 1. Check if film has dropped. 12B6 2-A-4 FLH
(Discharge remainder) OPEN (film trailing edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from the film release unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ2 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ2 port of the SND board, or
Film release unit jam Conveyed film to the film release unit by malfunction of the MG1 controller.
236 error discharge remainder, but did not detect SJ2 1. Check if film has dropped. 12B7 2-A-4 FLH
(Discharge remainder) CLOSE (film leading edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from the film release unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ2 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ2 port of the SND board, or
Film release unit jam Conveyed film to the film release unit by malfunction of the MG1 controller.
237 error discharge remainder, but did not detect SJ2 1. Check if film has dropped. 12B8 2-A-4 FLH
(Discharge remainder) OPEN (film trailing edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
A jam occurred during discharge conveyance.
Open the front cover and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
Film release unit
238 entrance jam error
did not detect SJ1 OPEN (film trailing edge adjustments. 22D6 2-A-4 FLH
detection). SJ1, MG1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-14
MT-15
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
A jam occurred during discharge conveyance.
Open the front cover and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
Film release unit exit
239 jam error
did not detect SJ2 CLOSE (film leading edge adjustments. 22D7 2-A-4 FLH
detection). SJ2, MG1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
A jam occurred during discharge conveyance.
Open the front cover and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
Film release unit exit
240 jam error
did not detect SJ2 OPEN (film trailing edge adjustments. 22D8 2-A-4 FLH
detection). SJ2, MG1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Jam occurred during front conveyance.
Although film was conveyed to the recording
Open the right covers and remove the film.
unit, failed to detect SD2 CLOSE (film leading
Conveyor unit jam 1. Using the PC-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, and
241 error
edge detection). (Currently retrying)
mechanism adjustments.
22E0 2-A-4 FLH
Error occurred again due to motor stop.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
(Maybe already stopped)
3. If the problem still persists, replace SND board.
Jam occurred during front conveyance.
Although film was conveyed to the recording
Open the right (upper and lower) covers and remove the film.
unit, failed to detect SD2 CLOSE (film leading
Conveyor unit jam 1. Using the PC-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, and
242 error
edge detection). (Retry-over)
mechanism adjustments.
12E1 2-A-4 FLH
Error occurred again due to motor stop.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
(Maybe already stopped)
3. If the problem still persists, replace SND board.
Failed in retrieving Failed in retrieving the magazine information.
Failed in retrieving the magazine management
243 management
information file.
1.Open and close the front cover. 12F1 None MAIN
information 2. If the problem still persists, reboot the system.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-15
MT-16
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Failed in retrieving Failed in retrieving the magazine information.
Failed in retrieving the magazine management
244 management
information file.
1. Open and close the front cover. 12F5 None MAIN
information 2. If the problem still persists, reboot the system.
Failed in decoding The barcode that has been interpreted is
245 barcode invalid or does not match the tray settings.
Use the correct barcode. 12F6 None MAIN
Wrong barcode base
246 color
A barcode in the wrong base color was read. Check the base color. 12F7 None MAIN
247 RFID connection error RFID is not connected. Check the connection with RFID. 12F8 None MAIN
Failed in decoding
248 RFID card
An invalid RFID card was decoded. Use the correct RFID card. 12F9 None MAIN
A tray of a size that is different from the settings
249 Wrong file size
was inserted.
Insert the tray of the correct film size. 12FA None MAIN
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-16
MT-17
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
1. Install the software.
250 Semaphore table initialization error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0001 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
251 Message ID acquisition error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0002 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
SND connection board
252 disconnected
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0003 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
253 Driver error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0004 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Folder generation error from
254 RAMDISK
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0005 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
255 File copy error to RAMDISK 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0006 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
256 ISC thread start error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0007 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
257 DBG thread start error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0008 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
258 MFC thread start error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0009 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Image processing memory
259 initialization error
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000A StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-17
MT-18
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
1. Install the software.
260 PNL thread error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000B StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
261 7-segment LED display error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000C StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
262 Message error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000D StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
263 Th2ONFLG deletion error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 000E StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
264 Unexpected message error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000F StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
265 Install processing error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0010 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
266 Disc flash error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 0011 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Occurred inconsistency in the file
267 system.
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0012 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
File open error during file open
268 checking
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 0013 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
269 Disc unmount error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 0014 StartUp
3. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-18
MT-19
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Failed in securing area for Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
300 communication processing. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0001 Main
Mounted memory does not satisfy Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
301 operating conditions of the system. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0002 Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
302 Invalid parameter was specified.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0003 Main
Failed in DICOM control execution Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
303 start request. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0004 Main
Failed in communication end Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
304 request to DICOM control. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0005 Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
305 Failed in calling GUI method.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0006 Main
Failed in JOB completion Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
306 communication processing. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0007 Main
Failed in calling the print request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
307 method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0008 Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
308 Failed in image initializing request.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0009 Main
Failed in calling image processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
309 request method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 000A Main
Failed in re-reading instruction of Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
310 density correction table. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 000B Main
Failed in calling JOB generation
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
311 request (SMPTE/execution)
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 000C Main
method.
Failed in calling JOB generation
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
312 request (scanner diagnosis)
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 000D Main
method.
Failed in calling JOB generation Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
313 request (flat pattern) method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 8000E Main
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-19
MT-20
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Failed in calling JOB generation Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
314 request (cleaning) method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 000F Main
Failed in calling JOB priority order Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
315 change completion method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0010 Main
Failed in initializing output control Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
316 unit. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0011 Main
Failed in calling utility request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
317 method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0012 Main
Failed in calling energy-saving Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
318 instruction method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0013 Main
Failed in calling print request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
319 method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0014 Main
Failed in calling transfer request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
320 method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0015 Main
Failed in calling output control end Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
321 instruction method the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0016 Main
Failed in calling removal permission Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
322 notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0017 Main
Failed in calling end request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
323 method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0018 Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
324 Failed in calling PC-Utility method.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0019 Main
Failed in calling image processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
325 completion setting request method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 001A Main
Failed in calling removal process Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
326 JOB acquisition request method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 001B Main
Failed in calling image processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
327 JOB acquisition request method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 001C Main
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-20
MT-21
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Failed in calling RAW data transfer Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
328 JOB acquisition request method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 001D Main
Failed in calling tray information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
329 renewal notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 001E Main
Failed in calling output processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
330 completion notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 001F Main
Failed in spooler control execution Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
331 start request. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0020 Main
Failed in spooler control transfer Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
332 completion notification. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0021 Main
Failed in calling JOB spool request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
333 method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0022 Main
Failed in calling unprocessed JOB Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
334 recovery request method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0023 Main
Failed in calling JOB priority order Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
335 change request method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0024 Main
Failed in calling deletion request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
336 method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0025 Main
Failed in calling initialization method Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
337 of output control. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0026 Main
Failed in calling Queue deletion Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
338 request results notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0027 Main
Failed in calling JOB start Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
339 notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0028 Main
Failed in calling preprint response Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
340 notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0029 Main
Failed in calling printer information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
341 request response method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 002A Main
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-21
MT-22
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Failed in calling image reception Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
342 completion notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 002B Main
Failed in calling system information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
343 printing method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 002C Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
344 Request in unexpected mode.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 002D Main
Failed in calling uniformity table re- Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
345 reading method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 002E Main
Failed in calling printer image Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
346 correction mode setting method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 002F Main
Failed in calling tray state change Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
347 notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0030 Main
Failed in calling delete all JOB Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
348 request method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0031 Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
355 Failed in reprint verification request.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0038 Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
356 Failed in reprint spool request.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0039 Main
Failed in calling QC test pattern Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
357 output method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 003A Main
Failed in calling printer state change Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
358 notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 003B Main
Failed in calling system information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
369 acquisition method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0046 Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
370 Failed in copying file.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0047 Main
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-22
MT-23
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
371 Failed in loading file.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0048 Main
Failed in calling resistance Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
372 correction reloading method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0049 Main
Failed in calling main scanning
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
373 image position adjustment
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 004A Main
parameter table reloading method.
Failed in calling resistance Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
374 correction reloading method the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 004B Main
Failed in calling setting method of
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
375 the number of films remaining in
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 004C Main
tray.
Failed in loading setting file of the Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
376 energy-saving. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 004D Main
Failed in calling direction method of Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
377 the energy-saving. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 004E Main
Failed in calling transferring request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
378 method of the energy-saving. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 004F Main
Failed in calling recovering request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
379 method of the energy-saving. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0050 Main
Failed in calling control notification Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
380 method of the status lamp. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0051 Main
Failed in renewing number of the Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
383 accumulated used films. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0054 Main
Failed in calling power off request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
384 method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0055 Main
Recheck the software to be installed and
385 Failed in copying installation data.
replace the CF.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0056 Main
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-23
MT-24
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Failed in creating the version up Recheck the software to be installed and
386 direction file. replace the CF.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0057 Main
Failed in creating the full installation Recheck the software to be installed and
387 direction file. replace the CF.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0058 Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
388 Failed in deleting log files.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0059 Main
Failed in creating normal completed Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
389 flag file. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 005A Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
390 Failed in starting up the Web task.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 005B Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
391 Notified unknown state.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 005C Main
Occurred inconsistency in the file Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
392 system. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 005D Main
393 Did not end normally the last time. Reboot the system and observe conditions. Place of occurrence in source code 0008 005E Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
394 Failed in deleting pas log.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 005F Main
Failed in acquiring log acquisition Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
395 mode. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0060 Main
Failed in creating initialization skip Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
396 flag file. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0061 Main
Failed in calling display information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
397 update notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0062 Main
Failed in calling PNL/ART Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
398 notification method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0063 Main
Failed in calling file transfer request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
399 method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0064 Main
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-24
MT-25
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Failed in calling equipment
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
400 termination notification request
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0065 Main
method.
Failed in calling termination Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
401 response method. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0066 Main
Print stop notification method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
402 error the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0067 Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
403 Options.txt read error
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0068 Main
Tray open request method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
404 error the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0069 Main
Tray open response method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
405 error the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 006A Main
Alert open response method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
406 error the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 006B Main
JOB in time request method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
407 error the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 006C Main
Tray constant monitoring start Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
408 instruction method calling error the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 006D Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
409 Failed in bc_sbc.txt file reading.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 006E Main
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
410 Failed in bc_sbc/txt file reading.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 006F Main
Failed in film_information.txt file Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
411 reading. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0008 0070 Main
Reboot the system and observe whether the
412 FTP transfer timed out
problem persists.
Place of occurrence in source code 2008 0071 Main
Rest the time using the utility.
413 Wrong date due to CPU board
Replace the CPU board.
None 2008 0072 Main
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-25
MT-26
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Failed in reading the MgznInfo.txt Reboot the system and observe whether the
414 file. problem persists.
None 2008 0073 Main
Reboot the system and the RFID reader, or the
Failed in connecting with the RFID
415 reader.
device, and then observe whether the problem None 0008 0074 Main
persists.
Replace the RFID reader and observe whether
416 Failed in reading RFID card.
the problem persists.
None 0008 0075 Main
Failed in starting DICOM main Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
420 thread. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0001 0001 DICOM
Save equipment individual data (requires
421 Invalid Dicom.dat contents
Dicom.dat analysis).
Tag number with error 0001 0002 DICOM
Failed in starting DICOM Save equipment individual data (requires
422 communication main thread. Netinf.prm analysis).
Port number 0001 0003 DICOM
1:No file
Save equipment individual data (requires
423 Invalid Netinf.prm contents
Netinf.prm analysis).
2:Non existing keyword 0001 0004 DICOM
3:Non existing value
1:No file
Save equipment individual data (requires
424 Invalid UserImageNum.txt
UserImageNum.txt).
2:Non existing keyword 0001 0005 DICOM
3:Non existing value
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
425 Insufficient virtual memory
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0001 FFFF DICOM
Failed in creating thread. (Internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
430 error) the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0001 Spooler
Failed in sending messages. Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
431 (Internal error) the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0002 Spooler
Failed in securing memory. (Internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
432 error) the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0003 Spooler
Failed in creating Print Job objects Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/
433 in recovering unprocessed JOBs. xxx.flm analysis).
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0004 Spooler
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-26
MT-27
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/
434 Failed in reading PrintJob files.
xxx.flm analysis).
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0005 Spooler
Failed in acquiring PrintJob and Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/
435 FILM object data. xxx.flm analysis).
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0007 Spooler
Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/
436 Failed in registering spooler queue.
xxx.flm analysis).
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0008 Spooler
Invalid film object, or insufficient Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/
437 data xxx.flm analysis).
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0009 Spooler
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
438 Invalid status
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code, status 0002 000B Spooler
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
439 Failed in accessing PrintJob.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 000C Spooler
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
440 Specified Film number is invalid.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 000D Spooler
Could not find Print Job deleted Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
441 when requesting queue deletion. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 000E Spooler
Specified change priority level is Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
442 invalid. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0010 Spooler
Failed in setting PrintJob and FILM Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/
443 object data. xxx.flm analysis).
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0011 Spooler
Save equipment individual data (requires log
444 Failed in opening and creating files.
analysis).
Place of occurrence in source code, file name 2002 0012 Spooler
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
445 Requested print ID is illegal.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0013 Spooler
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
446 Failed in moving file.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0014 Spooler
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
447 Unexpected case occurred.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0002 0015 Spooler
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-27
MT-28
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
450 Error occurred due to system call.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0003 0001 ImgPrc
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
451 Failed in acquiring memory.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0003 0002 ImgPrc
Failed in creating image processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
452 objects. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0003 0003 ImgPrc
Data to be acquired was not found Save equipment individual data (requires
453 in PrintJOB, FILM object, nor image imginf.prm analysis), acquire error job Place of occurrence in source code 2003 0004 ImgPrc
processing parameter. information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Save equipment individual data (requires
454 Failed in opening and creating files. imginf.prm analysis), acquire error job Place of occurrence in source code, file name 2003 0005 ImgPrc
information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Save equipment individual data (requires
Execution of image processing
455 resulted in error.
imginf.prm analysis), acquire error job Place of occurrence in source code 2003 0006 ImgPrc
information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm).
As the leading edge margin
Equipment individual data save (TOP_
456 parameter is outside the range, use
MARGIN.txt) analysis is required.
Type, outside range value 2003 0007 ImgPrc
the default value.
Save equipment individual data (requires
Re-executed format calculation
457 without annotation information
imginf.prm analysis), acquire error job Place of occurrence in source code 2003 0008 ImgPrc
information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Failed in starting output main Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
460 thread. the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0004 1EB1 Output
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
461 Level 0 error occurred in formatter.
the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0004 1F7C Output
Save equipment individual data (requires
Density correction calculation
462 results are abnormal.
log analysis), reboot system, and observe None 0004 1F84 Output
conditions.
Save equipment individual data (requires
Unable to continue operations due
463 to internal error.
log analysis), reboot system, and observe Detailed information 0004 1F85 Output
conditions.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-28
MT-29
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component
Display Code Code
Failed in creating thread (internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
470 error). the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0007 0001 JobMake
Failed in sending message (internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
471 error). the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code 0007 0002 JobMake
Failed in securing memory (internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake
472 error). the CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
Place of occurrence in source code, request size 0007 0003 JobMake
Save equipment individual data (requires
473 Failed in opening and creating files. log analysis), reboot system, and observe Place of occurrence in source code, file name 0007 000A JobMake
conditions.
Save equipment individual data (requires
474 Invalid status log analysis), reboot system, and observe Place of occurrence in source code, status 0007 000B JobMake
conditions.
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot
480 Failed in FTP data transfer.
the equipment, and observe conditions.
Name of file which failed transfer 200A 0001 PCUTL
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check
481 FTP port does not open. the path and user of the FTP directory of the None 200A 0002 PCUTL
PC for servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file but
482 did not exist.
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed transfer 200A 0003 PCUTL
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot
483 Failed in FTP data transfer.
the equipment, and observe conditions.
Name of file which failed transfer 200D 0001 Satellite
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check
484 FTP port does not open. the path and user of the FTP directory of the None 200D 0002 Satellite
PC for servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file but
485 did not exist.
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed transfer 200D 0003 Satellite
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot
486 Failed in FTP data transfer.
the equipment, and observe conditions.
Name of file which failed transfer 200B 0001 Installer
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check
487 FTP port does not open. the path and user of the FTP directory of the None 200B 0002 Installer
PC for servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file but
488 did not exist.
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed transfer 200B 0003 Installer
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-29
MT-30
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CPU board or
CF.
No response from FL-SS that it has completed
600 FLH-SS start timeout
start even after a certain period of time.
1. Re-install the software. 0332 FFFF MFC
2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CPU board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CPU board or
No response from SCN-SS that it has CF.
601 SCN-SS start timeout completed start even after a certain period of 1. Re-install the software. 0335 FFFF MFC
time. 2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CPU board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CPU board or
No response from DEV-SS that it has CF.
602 DEV-SS start timeout completed start even after a certain period of 1. Re-install the software. 0339 FFFF MFC
time. 2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CPU board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Heat development
Failed in reading the heat development control 1. Re-install the software.
610 control parameter file
parameter file when the system was started up. 2. Replace the CF.
0901 9-D DEV
reading error
3. Replace the CPU board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF or CAN
Failed in TMS driver (temperature communication error.
611 TMS driver setup error measurement task) setup when system was 1. Re-install the software. 0902 9-F DEV
started up. 2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CAN cable.
Heat development Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in reading the heat development control
612 calculation parameter
parameter file when the system was started up.
1. Re-install the software. 0903 9-D DEV
file reading error 2. Replace the CF.
Temperature Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in reading the temperature conversion
613 conversion table file
table file when the system was started up.
1. Re-install the software. 0904 9-D DEV
reading error 2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in starting the plate control task when
614 Plate setup error
the system was started up.
1. Re-install the software. 0905 9-E DEV
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-30
MT-31
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in starting the fan control task when the
615 Fan setup error
system was started up.
1. Re-install the software. 0906 9-E DEV
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Power voltage setting Failed in power voltage setting file reading
616 file reading error when starting the system.
1. Re-install the software. 0907 None DEV
2. Replace the CF.
Sensitivity correction Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in sensitivity correction (SBC) file
617 (SBC) file reading
reading when starting the system.
1. Re-install the software. 0908 None DEV
error 2. Replace the CF.
Sensitivity correction Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in sensitivity correction (KBC) file
618 (KBC) file reading
reading when starting the system.
1. Re-install the software. 0909 None DEV
error 2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Equipment individual Failed in equipment individual data file reading
619 data file reading error when starting the system.
1. Re-install the software. 0910 None DEV
2. Replace the CF.
Disconnection of the I/F cable between the SND board and
thermistor, or malfunction of the thermistor or thermistor port of the
SND board, or disconnection of the CAN cable.
Detected that the current temperature of a
1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable to the thermistor,
Plate thermistor heater dropped below -20°C for three times
620 disconnection error continuously (detection interval: 600 ms), and
and connector of the SND board are set correctly. 0911 9-B DEV
2. Replace the thermistor.
deter
3. Replace the SND board.
4. Replace the cable between the thermistor and SND board.
5. Replace the CAN cable.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-31
MT-32
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is abnormal.
Malfunction of the temperature detection thermistor, disconnection of
the heater or I/F cable between the heater and SND board, reset of
heater by the thermal protector, or malfunction of the heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
connector of the SND board are set correctly, and check that the
thermal protector reset has been cleared.
The temperature of all plates did not become
2. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
the appropriate temperature (within target Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
temperature ±1°C) even after the specified time If hot, the heater is OK.
from the start of initialization. The thermistor/CAN/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
If not hot, the heater/CAN/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to
Note: step 4.
1. Generally, as the low temperature error 3. Check the operations of the heat development unit fan using the
(2911) and heater disconnection error PC-Utility.
Initialization time
621 timeout
(0961), etc. occur before this error, the rate The FAN is OK if operations are normal. 0920 9-F DEV
of occurrence of this error is low. The film cooling section and recording section thermistors/CAN/
2. The target temperature (approx. 90°C SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
to 130°C) varies according to internal If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
conditions. Replace the connector and heat development unit fan.
4. Replace the heater.
<Specified time> 5. Replace the PRN board.
100 V model: 30 minutes 7. Replace the thermistor.
6. Replace the SND board.
200 V model: 25 minutes
8. Replace the cooling section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND board.
10. Replace the CAN cable.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-32
MT-33
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, temperature detection thermistor, heat
development unit fan, heater, or heater port.
1. Check if the CF is controlled properly according to the state LEDs,
etc. (hang up, bus error, etc.).
2. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
connector of the SND board are set correctly.
3. Check the operations of the heat development unit fan using the
PC-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
Replace the connector and heat development unit fan.
Detected that the current temperature of
4. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
622 Overheat 2 error a heater exceeded 138°C for three times
Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand. 0951 9-A DEV
continuously (detection interval: 600ms).
If not hot, the heater is OK.
The thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 7.
If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
5. Replace the heater.
6. Replace the CF.
7. Replace the thermistor.
8. Replace the SND board.
9. Replace the recording section thermistor.
10. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-33
MT-34
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is low.
Disconnection of the heater, malfunction of the temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the heater or I/F cables between the
heater and SND board, reset of heater by the thermal protector, or
malfunction of the heater port.
The temperature of a heater remained lower
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
than the target temperature even after the
connector of the SND board are set correctly, and check that the
specified time from the start of temperature
thermal protector reset has been cleared.
control (detection interval: 600ms, measured
2. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
2000 times continuously) and did not become
Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
the appropriate temperature.
If hot, the heater is OK.
Heater disconnection
623 error Note:
The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4. 0961 9-A DEV
If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to
1. The target temperature (approx. 90 °C to
step 3.
130 °C) varies according to internal conditions.
3. Replace the heater.
4. Replace the CF.
<Specified time>
5. Replace the thermistor.
100 V model: 20 minutes
6. Replace the SND board.
200 V model: 15 minutes
7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
Heat development Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Abnormal heat development control parameter
624 control parameter
was detected when the system was started up.
1. Re-install the software. 09A0 9-H DEV
value error 2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-34
MT-35
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Abnormal rise in the plate temperature.
Connector malfunction, temperature detection thermistor malfunction,
disconnection of the I/F cable between heaters or between the heater
and SND board, heater reset by the thermal protector, or malfunction
of the heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
connector of the SND board are correctly set, and the thermal
protector reset is cleared.
The average rising temperature of the plate 2. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
remained less than 10 °C even after 5 minutes Check the peripheral temperature of the each heater with the
from system start-up. hand.
Cold start timeout
625 error
If hot, the heater is OK. 09B0 9-F DEV
Note: The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
Error which occurs when heater control fails If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to 3.
due to electric malfunctions. 3. Replace the heater.
4. Replace the CF.
5. Replace the thermistor.
6. Replace the SND board.
7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-35
MT-36
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature measurement is abnormal.
Malfunction of plate temperature detection thermistor, disconnection
of the I/F cable between the thermistor and SND board.
1. Check that the connectors of the thermistor and SND board are
set properly.
2. Check the temperature of each thermistor using the PC-Utility.
At system start, the initial measured value
Check the temperature of each thermistor visually.
(average of four) of the temperature of a heater
Temperature Check if the temperature is a feasible value (about 0°C to 130°C).
626 measurement error
was outside the -15°C to 150°C
The thermistor/SND may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
2907 9-A DEV
range approximately 5 seconds after the setup
3. Replace the thermistor.
of the TMS driver
4. Replace the SND board.
5. Replace the I/F cable between the thermistor and SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-36
MT-37
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is low.
Disconnection of the heater, malfunction of the temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the heater or I/F cable between the
heater and SND board, reset of heater by the thermal protector, or
The temperature of a heater remained lower malfunction of the heater port.
than the target temperature even after the 1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
specified time from the start of temperature connectors of the SND board are set correctly, and check that the
control (detection interval: 600ms, measured thermal protector reset has been cleared.
1000 times continuously) and did not become 2. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
the appropriate temperature. Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
If hot, the heater is OK.
627 Low temperature error Note: The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4. 2911 9-A DEV
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to
to 130°C) varies according to internal step 3.
conditions. 3. Replace the heater.
4. Replace the CF.
<Specified time> 5. Replace the thermistor.
100 V model: 15 minutes 6. Replace the SND board.
200 V model: 10 minutes 7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
Disconnection of the I/F cable between the SND board and
thermistor, or malfunction of the thermistor or thermistor port of the
SND board.
Film cooling The film cooling section thermistor has
1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable to the thermistor,
628 section thermistor disconnected (Detected temperature dropped
and connector of the SND board are set correctly.
0918 9-C DEV
disconnection error below -20°C.).
2. Replace the thermistor.
3. Replace the SND board.
4. Replace the cable between the thermistor and SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-37
MT-38
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Disconnection of the I/F cable between the SND board and
thermistor, or malfunction of the thermistor or thermistor port of the
SND board.
Recording The recording section thermistor has
1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable to the thermistor,
629 section thermistor disconnected (Detected temperature dropped
and connector of the SND board are set correctly.
0919 9-C DEV
disconnection error below -20°C.).
2. Replace the thermistor.
3. Replace the SND board.
4. Replace the cable between the thermistor and SND board.
Disconnection of the heater, malfunction of the temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the heater or I/F cable between the
heater and SND board, reset of heater by the thermal protector, or
malfunction of the heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
During temperature control, the temperature connectors of the SND board are set correctly, and check that the
of a heater dropped below the appropriate thermal protector reset has been cleared.
temperature range (within target temperature 2. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
±1°C), and did not return to the appropriate Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
temperature even after 5 minutes (detection If hot, the heater is OK.
Temperature control interval 600ms, measured 500 times The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
630 abnormally low error continuously). If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to
2921 9-A DEV
step 3.
Note: 3. Replace the heater.
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C 4. Replace the CF.
to 130°C) varies according to internal 5. Replace the thermistor.
conditions. 6. Replace the SND board.
7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-38
MT-39
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is abnormal.
Disconnection of the plate temperature detection thermistor,
disconnection of the heater or I/F cable between the heater and SND
board, reset of heater by the thermal protector, or malfunction of the
heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
connectors of the SND board are set correctly, and check that the
thermal protector reset has been cleared.
The temperature of all plates did not become 2. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
the appropriate temperature (within target Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
temperature ±1°C) even after 20 minutes from If hot, the heater is OK.
the start of initialization. The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to
step 4.
Note:
3. Check the operations of the heat development unit fan using the
Temperature control 1. Generally, as the temperature control
631 timeout abnormally low error (2921) and heater
PC-Utility. 2930 9-F DEV
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
disconnection error (0961), etc. occur
The film cooling section and recording section thermistor/CF/SND
before this error, the rate of occurrence of board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
this error is low. If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
2. The target temperature (approx. 90°C Replace the connector and heat development unit fan.
to 130°C) varies according to internal 4. Replace the heater.
conditions. 5. Replace the CF.
6. Replace the thermistor.
7. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the film cooling section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-39
MT-40
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, heat development unit fan, temperature
detection thermistor, heater, or heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
connector of the SND board are set correctly.
2. Check the operations of the heat development unit fan using the
PC-Utility.
During temperature control, the temperature of The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
a heater exceeded the appropriate temperature The heater/thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
range (within target temperature ±1°C), and If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
did not return to the appropriate temperature Replace the connector and heat development unit fan.
even after 5 minutes (detection interval 600ms, 3. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
Temperature
632 abnormally high error
measured 500 times continuously). Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand. 2931 9-A DEV
If not hot, the heater is OK.
Note: The thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 6.
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
to 130°C) varies according to internal 4. Replace the heater.
conditions. 5. Replace the CF.
6. Replace the thermistor.
7. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the recording section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-40
MT-41
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, heat development unit fan, temperature
detection thermistor, heater, or heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
connector of the SND board are set correctly.
2. Check the operations of the heat development unit fan using the
PC-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
During temperature control, the temperature of Replace the connector and heat development unit fan.
a heater exceeded the appropriate temperature 3. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
Temperature control
range (within target temperature ±1°C), and did Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
633 abnormally high 2
not return to the appropriate temperature even If not hot, the heater is OK.
2932 9-A DEV
error
after 10 minutes (detection interval 600ms, The thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 6.
measured 1000 times continuously). If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
4. Replace the heater.
5. Replace the CF.
6. Replace the thermistor.
7. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the recording section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-41
MT-42
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, heat development unit fan, temperature
detection thermistor, heater, or heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
connector of the SND board are set correctly.
2. Check the operations of the heat development unit fan using the
PC-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The temperature of a heater remained higher
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
than the target temperature even after 5
If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
minutes from the start of temperature control
Replace the connector and heat development unit fan.
(detection interval: 600ms, measured 500
3. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
times continuously) and did not become the
Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
634 Overheat 1 error appropriate temperature.
If not hot, the heater is OK.
2941 9-A DEV
The thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 6.
Note:
If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C
4. Replace the heater.
to 130°C) varies according to internal
5. Replace the CF.
conditions.
6. Replace the thermistor.
7. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the recording section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-42
MT-43
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, heat development unit fan, temperature
detection thermistor, heater, or heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
connector of the SND board are set correctly.
2. Check the operations of the heat development unit fan using the
PC-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The temperature of a heater remained higher
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
than the target temperature even after 10
If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
minutes from the start of temperature control
Replace the connector and heat development unit fan.
(detection interval: 600ms, measured 1000
3. Check the operations of each heater using the PC-Utility.
times continuously) and did not become the
Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
635 Overheat 1-2 error appropriate temperature.
If not hot, the heater is OK.
2942 9-A DEV
The thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 6.
Note:
If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C
4. Replace the heater.
to 130°C) varies according to internal
5. Replace the CF.
conditions.
6. Replace the thermistor.
7. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the recording section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-43
MT-44
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
The plate temperature measurement is abnormal.
Malfunction of the plate temperature detection thermistor,
disconnection of the I/F cable with the SND board.
1. Check that the connectors of the thermistor and SND board are
set properly, and if the AD converter for temperature measurement
is affected by unidentifiable noise.
2. Check the temperature of each thermistor using the PC-Utility.
Check the temperature of each thermistor visually.
Temperature Difference between two continuous Check that the measured value becomes the feasible value
636 measurement noise temperature measurements (about 0°C to 130°C) and if there is a difference of 2°C within one 2971 9-A DEV
(Level 2) (detection interval: 600 ms) > 2°C second.
The thermistor/SND may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
3. Replace the thermistor.
4. Replace the SND board.
5. Replace the I/F cable between the thermistor and SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
The target temperature is abnormal or the film compensation
information parameter is abnormal, or malfunction of the barcode
reader.
1. If the target temperature is abnormal, set the target temperature
using the PC-Utility again.
Heat development The target temperature (individual data) or film 2. If the film compensation information parameter (SBC) is abnormal,
637 control parameter compensation information value obtained from enter the correct barcode. 29A0 9-H DEV
value error the barcode are abnormal. 3. If the barcode reader has malfunctioned, replace the barcode
reader.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-44
MT-45
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Failed in creating data file when acquiring
temperature data.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Temperature data
638 writing error
Note: 1. Re-install the software. 2991 9-D DEV
As “Acquiring temperature data” is a function 2. Replace the CF.
for design and evaluation (PC-Utility only), this
error does not occur in actual user operations.
Density drop Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in creating density drop prevention file
639 prevention file writing
when initialization completed.
1. Re-install the software. 2992 None DEV
error 2. Replace the CF.
Upper 2 bytes:
Fixed
Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Automatic notification of temperature from SND Lower 2 bytes:
640 CAN related error
board stopped.
1. Check the CAN cable. 09FD Returned value
DEV
2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
from motor
reset API.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
641 Software logic error Failed in software control sequence 1. Re-install the software. 09FE None DEV
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
642 Software logic error Failed in software control sequence 1. Re-install the software. 29FE None DEV
2. Replace the CF.
Upper
two bytes:
Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Processing
643 API/driver related error Return value from API is error. 1. Check the CAN cable. 09FF Lower two
DEV
2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
bytes: Return
value from API
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-45
MT-46
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Upper
two bytes:
Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Processing
644 API/driver related error Return value from API is error. 1. Check the CAN cable. 29FF Lower two
DEV
2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
bytes: Return
value from API
Due to the fault in the cooling fan, the internal
645 Cooling fan fault
temperature has risen (75C°or higher).
The fan is malfunctioning. 0950 9-A DEV
Density measurement Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in reading density measurement control
646 control parameter file
parameter files at system start.
1. Re-install the software. 0401 None DEN
read error 2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Density measurement Failed in software control sequence during
647 sequence error density measurement.
1. Re-install the software. 2402 None DEN
2. Replace the CF.
The density value measured by the density measurement section is
abnormal.
1. Check if the density measurement sections such as density
measurement LED, LED board, PDD board, connectors between
boards, density measurement sensor power fuse, etc. are normal.
Density measurement The density value measured by the density
648 data error measurement section is abnormal.
2. Check if the film sensitivity is normal. 2403 None DEN
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SND board or CF.
3. Re-install the software.
4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND board.
5. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Density measurement Failed in creating files when writing density
649 data write error measurement AD data.
1. Re-install the software. 2404 4-A DEN
2. Replace the CF.
No density measurement data as density measurement was not
No density No density measurement AD data in the DRAM
650 measurement data of the PRT.
performed. 2405 None DEN
After performing density measurement, acquire AD data.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-46
MT-47
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
1. Check if the density pattern of the film is normal.
2. Check if the film conveyance position and speed are correct.
Density measurement Failed to detect starting point of the density
651 staring point detection pattern from the number of effective AD data Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SND board or CF. 2406 None DEN
error measured by the density measurement section. 3. Re-install the software.
4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND board.
5. Replace the CF.
1. Check if the density pattern of the film is normal.
2. Check if the film conveyance position and speed are correct.
Density measurement Failed to detect the ending point of the density
652 ending point detection pattern from the number of effective AD data Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SND board or CF. 2407 None DEN
error measured by the density measurement section. 3. Re-install the software.
4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND board.
5. Replace the CF.
The number of effective AD data measured by the density
measurement section is less than the minimum number of effective
data (Note).
1. Check if the density of the film is normal.
2. Check if the film conveyance position and speed are correct.
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SND board or CF.
Insufficient number The number of effective density measurement
3. Re-install the software.
653 of effective density data measured by the density measurement
4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND board.
2408 4-B DEN
measurement data section is insufficient.
5. Replace the CF.
Note:
The number of effective data is 90% of the number of data logically
measured. The number of effective data required for 24-steps pattern
is above 3105, that for 17-steps pattern is above 2300, and that for
QC pattern is above 864.
Upper
two bytes:
Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Processing
654 API/driver related error Return value from API is error. 1. Check the CAN cable. 04FF Lower two
DEN
2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
bytes: Return
value from API
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-47
MT-48
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Upper
two bytes:
Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Processing
655 API/driver related error Return value from API is error. 1. Check the CAN cable. 24FF Lower two
DEN
2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
bytes: Return
value from API
Polygon control Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in reading the polygon control parameter
656 parameter file read
file during system start.
1. Re-install the software. 0502 FFFF POL
error 2. Replace the CF.
Malfunction of the scanner unit, PRN board, or LDD board
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-Utility, and if errors
are detected, perform the following.
Detected polygon rotation error for three times
Polygon error 1. Check and replace the wiring connector between the scanner unit,
657 (FATAL)
continuously during scanner initialization
LDD board, etc. and PRN board.
0510 FFFF POL
diagnosis.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
4. Replace the LDD board.
Malfunction of the scanner unit, PRN board, or LDD board
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-Utility, and if errors
are detected, perform the following.
Polygon error Detected polygon rotation error during scanner 1. Check and replace the wiring connector between the scanner unit, Number of
658 (WARNING) initialization diagnosis. LDD board, etc. and PRN board.
2510 diagnosis
POL
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
4. Replace the LDD board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Parameter file reading Failed in reading the film edge sensor control
660 failure parameter file during system startup.
1. Re-install the software. 0810 FFFF ESN
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-48
MT-49
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Film is not conveyed to the correct position, malfunction of the film
edge sensor LED, malfunction of the film edge sensor, malfunction of
the SND board.
1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor monitoring.
Edge sensor average The average value read by the film edge
661 value data error sensor is abnormal (outside range).
2. Replace the film edge sensor if operations are unstable in the 2811 8-B ESN
above.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
4. If the problem still persists, check the mechanism if film
conveyance is carried out properly.
Data file cannot be created because printing was not carried out once
No data or cannot create file when acquiring
662 No acquired data
film edge sensor related data files.
or there is no data acquired from the film edge sensor. 2812 8-C ESN
After printing, acquire the file.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in data write when creating film edge
663 Data write failure
sensor related data file.
1. Re-install the software. 2813 FFFF ESN
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
PLL initial value illegal Value of the PLL initial value data received
664 data acquisition from the SCN unit during system start was 0.
1. Re-install the software. 2814 0 ESN
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
PLL current value Value of the PLL current value data received
665 illegal data acquisition from the SCN unit during system start was 0.
1. Re-install the software. 2815 0 ESN
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Failed in opening the file when creating film
666 File open failure
edge sensor related data file.
1. Re-install the software. 2816 FFFF ESN
2. Replace the CF.
Film is not conveyed to the correct position, malfunction of the film
edge sensor LED, malfunction of the film edge sensor, malfunction of
the SND board.
Film edge sensor 1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor monitoring.
The film edge sensor read value (data) was
667 acquired value data
abnormal (outside range).
2. If operations are still unstable after the above, replace the film 2819 8-B ESN
error edge sensor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
4. If the problem still persists, check the mechanism if film
conveyance is carried out properly.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-49
MT-50
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Film edge sensor has not returned to home position.
Or malfunction of film edge sensor LED, film edge sensor, SND
Film edge sensor
Value was abnormal (outside range) in the board.
acquisition value data
668 error (Pre-reading
home position check before film edge sensor 1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor monitoring. 2820 8-B ESN
data reading. 2. If operations are still unstable after the above, replace the film
home position check)
edge sensor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Scanner control system related
external file access error
• File read error Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Scanner control
680 system file error
• File write error 1. Re-install the software. 0501 FFFF SCN
• File conversion error 2. Replace the CF.
• File line specification error
• File column specification error
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF.
Scanner control driver Failed in scanner control driver setup when
681 setup error system was started up.
1. Re-install the software. 0504 FFFF SCN
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the PRN board.
Detected frame memory error during memory
682 Frame memory error
diagnosis.
1. Re-install the software. 0505 FFFF SCN
2. Replace the PRN board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the PRN board.
Detected line memory error during memory
683 Line memory error
diagnosis.
1. Re-install the software. 0506 FFFF SCN
2. Replace the PRN board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-50
MT-51
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-Utility, and if errors
are detected, perform the following.
Detected LD error for three times continuously
684 LD error
during scanner initialization diagnosis.
1. Check and replace the wiring connector between the scanner unit 0512 FFFF SCN
and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-Utility, and if errors
Detected starting point detection error for three are detected, perform the following.
starting point detection
685 error
times continuously during scanner initialization 1. Check and replace the wiring connector between the scanner unit 0513 FFFF SCN
diagnosis. and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-Utility, and if errors
Detected leading edge detection error for three are detected, perform the following.
Leading edge
686 detection error
times continuously during scanner initialization 1. Check and replace the wiring connector between the scanner unit 0514 FFFF SCN
diagnosis. and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-51
MT-52
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Open the upper front cover, and remove the jammed film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
SD2, MD1, ME1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Leading edge Failed in detecting film leading edge during
687 detection timeout recording.
0515 FFFF SCN
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-Utility, and if errors
are detected, perform the following.
1. Check and replace the wiring connector between the scanner unit
and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Open the upper front cover, and remove the jammed film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
SD2, MD1, ME1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Image recording Failed in detecting image recording completion
688 completion timeout during recording.
0516 FFFF SCN
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-Utility, and if errors
are detected, perform the following.
1. Check and replace the wiring connector between the scanner unit
and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-52
MT-53
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-Utility, and if errors
are detected, perform the following.
Leading edge search Failed in setting of leading edge search power.
689 power setting error (Laser amount fault)
1. Check and replace the wiring connector between the scanner unit 0517 FFFF SCN
and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
Malfunction of the PRN board.
PRN board fuse
690 disconnection
PRN board fuse disconnection Perform the following. 0518 FFFF SCN
1. Check and replace the PRN board fuse.
Main scanning width
691 adjustment error
Input number of PLL value is illegal. Re-enter PLL value. 1521 FFFF SCN
Scanning position
692 adjustment error
Input number of start point pixels is illegal. Re-enter the start point pixels. 1523 FFFF SCN
If the recording is interrupted halfway due to a
Recording interruption jam or interlock release, the subsequent print
693 error will have an image quality problem. This is a
Turn the power OFF and then ON. 05F0 FFFF SCN
fatal error raised to prevent such a trouble.
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN28A board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-Utility, and if errors
are detected, perform the following.
Detected LD error for three times continuously
694 LD error
during scanner initialization diagnosis.
1. Check and replace the wiring connector between the scanner unit 2512 0000 SCN
and PRN28A board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN28A board.
PDM task panel driver Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the conditions. If no
695 initialization error
PDM task panel driver initialization error
improvements are seen, replace the CF.
0701 arbitrary value PNL
PNL task setting
Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the conditions. If no
696 information file read PNL task setting information file read error
improvements are seen, replace the CF.
2701 arbitrary value PNL
error
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-53
MT-54
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
PNL task setting
PNL task setting information file description Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the conditions. If no
697 information file
error improvements are seen, replace the CF.
2705 arbitrary value PNL
description error
Setup error of sensor driver, FPMC driver
Error caused by software bug and incorrect settings which essentially
700 Device set error • FPMC time monitoring setting error
does not occur.
02FF 2-D-1 FLH
• Message ID specification error
Conveyance system related external file
access error
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of the CF,
• File read error
Conveyance system inappropriate data, or insufficient data.
701 file error
• File write error
1. Re-install the software.
0201 2-B-1 FLH
• File conversion error
2. Replace the CF.
• File line specification error
• File column specification error
Error caused by software bug and incorrect control timing which
702 FPMC error (At start) FPMC motor drive failure
essentially does not occur.
3202 2-C-1 FLH
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F08).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Power supply fuse
703 (F08) disconnection
Disconnection of power supply fuse (F08). adjustments 0215 2-A-5 FLH
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F06).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Power supply fuse
704 (F06) disconnection
Disconnection of power supply fuse (F06). adjustments 2216 2-A-5 FLH
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F07).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Power supply fuse
705 (F07) disconnection
Disconnection of power supply fuse (F07). adjustments 2217 2-A-5 FLH
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-54
MT-55
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F015).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Power supply fuse
706 (F01) disconnection
Disconnection of power supply fuse (F01). adjustments 0219 2-A-5 FLH
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F02).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Power supply fuse
707 (F02) disconnection
Disconnection of power supply fuse (F02). adjustments 0220 2-A-5 FLH
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F03).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Power supply fuse
708 (F03) disconnection
Disconnection of power supply fuse (F03). adjustments 0221 2-A-5 FLH
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F04).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Power supply fuse
709 (F04) disconnection
Disconnection of power supply fuse (F04). adjustments 0222 2-A-5 FLH
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F05).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Power supply fuse
710 (F05) disconnection
Disconnection of power supply fuse (F05). adjustments 0223 2-A-5 FLH
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Malfunction of SA12 sensor or malfunction of SA12 port of SND
board.
Tray detection sensor Attempted to check the tray open/close state in 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
711 error initialization and removal, but failed. adjustments.
0224 2-A-1 FLH
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SA11 sensor or malfunction of SA11 port of SND
board.
Tray shutter detection Attempted to check whether the tray shutter is 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
712 sensor error present in initialization and removal, but failed. adjustments.
0226 2-A-1 FLH
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-55
MT-56
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of SA22 sensor or malfunction of SA22 port of SND
board.
Tray detection sensor Attempted to check the tray open/close state in 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
713 error (Lower) initialization and removal, but failed. adjustments.
0228 2-A-1 FLH
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SA21 sensor or malfunction of SA21 port of SND
board.
Tray shutter detection Attempted to check whether the tray shutter is 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
714 sensor error present in initialization and removal, but failed. adjustments.
0230 2-A-1 FLH
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SA13 sensor, or SOLA12 solenoid.
Or malfunction of the SA13 port of the SND board, or malfunction of
SOLA12.
Attempted to open the tray, but SA13 did not
715 Tray lock release error
become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0232 2-A-1 FLH
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SA23 sensor, or SOLA21 solenoid.
Or malfunction of the SA23 port of the SND board, or malfunction of
SOLA21.
Attempted to open the tray, but SA23 did not
716 Tray lock release error
become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0234
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board,
Attempted to deviate the removal arm from HP
Tray removal unit HP or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
(home position) in initialization, but SB11 does
717 deviation detection
not become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2236 2-A-1 FLH
error adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-56
MT-57
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Attempted to deviate the removal arm from HP Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board,
Tray removal unit HP (home position) in initialization, but SB11 does or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
718 deviation detection not become OPEN. 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0237 2-A-1 FLH
error (Retryover) adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board,
Attempted to return the removal arm to HP
or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Tray removal unit HP (home position) in initialization, but SB11 does
719 return detection error not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2238 2-A-1 FLH
adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board,
Attempted to return the removal arm to HP
or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Tray removal unit HP (home position) in initialization, but SB11 does
720 return detection error not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0239 2-A-1 FLH
adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Attempted to deviate the removal arm from HP Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SND board,
Tray removal unit HP (home position) in initialization, but SB21 does or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
721 deviation detection not become OPEN. 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2240 2-A-1 FLH
error (Lower) (Currently retrying) adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-57
MT-58
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Attempted to deviate the removal arm from HP Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SND board,
Tray removal unit HP (home position) in initialization, but SB21 does or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
722 deviation detection not become OPEN. 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0241 2-A-1 FLH
error (Lower) (Retryover) adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SND board,
Attempted to return the removal arm to HP
Tray removal unit HP or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
(home position) in initialization, but SB21 does
723 return detection error
not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2242 2-A-1 FLH
(Lower) adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SND board,
Attempted to return the removal arm to HP
Tray removal unit HP or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
(home position) in initialization, but SB21 does
724 return detection error
not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0243 2-A-1 FLH
(Lower) adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set grip roller to HP (home
or malfunction of the MD2 controller.
Grip HP detection position) in initialization, but SD4 does not
725 error become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2244 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-58
MT-59
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set grip roller to HP (home
or malfunction of the MD2 controller.
Grip HP detection position) in initialization, but SD4 does not
726 error become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0245 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set grip roller from HP (home
or malfunction of the MD2 controller.
position) to gripping position in initialization, but
727 Grip detection error
SD4 does not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2246 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set grip roller from HP (home
or malfunction of the MD2 controller.
position) to gripping position in initialization, but
728 Grip detection error
SD4 does not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0247 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set stopper plate from stop
or malfunction of the SOLD1.
Stopper plate release position to release position in initialization, but
729 detection error SD3 does not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2248 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-59
MT-60
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set stopper plate from stop
or malfunction of the SOLD1.
Stopper plate release position to release position in initialization, but
730 detection error SD3 does not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0249 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set stopper plate from release
or malfunction of the SOLD1.
Stopper plate position to stop position in initialization, but
731 detection error SD3 does not become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2250 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set stopper plate from release
or malfunction of the SOLD1.
Stopper plate position to stop position in initialization, but
732 detection error SD3 does not become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0251 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Set film trays or check files.
All film trays not-
733 mounted error
Error when all film trays were set as unmounted 1. Using the PC-Utility, check settings of film used. 0253 FFFF FLH
2. If no problem, check the files.
Malfunction of the SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Attempted to lower the removal arm from Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB12 port of the SND board,
upper dead point detection position to surface or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Tray film surface
734 detection error
detection position in removal, but SB12 does 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2258 2-A-1 FLH
not become CLOSE. adjustments.
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-60
MT-61
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Attempted to lower the removal arm from Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB12 port of the SND board,
upper dead point detection position to surface or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Tray film surface
735 detection error
detection position in removal, but SB12 does 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0259 2-A-1 FLH
not become CLOSE. adjustments.
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Attempted to lower the removal arm from Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB22 port of the SND board,
upper dead point detection position to surface or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
Tray film surface
736 detection error (Lower)
detection position in removal, but SB22 does 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2260 2-A-1 FLH
not become CLOSE. adjustments.
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Attempted to lower the removal arm from Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB22 port of the SND board,
upper dead point detection position to surface or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
Tray film surface
737 detection error (Lower)
detection position in removal, but SB22 does 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0261 2-A-1 FLH
not become CLOSE. adjustments.
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Attempted to lower the removal arm from Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB12 port of the SND board,
surface detection position to suction detection or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Tray film suction
738 detection error
position in removal, but SB12 does not become 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2262 2-A-1 FLH
OPEN. adjustments.
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Attempted to lower the removal arm from Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB12 port of the SND board,
surface detection position to suction detection or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Tray film suction
739 detection error
position in removal, but SB12 does not become 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0263 2-A-1 FLH
OPEN. adjustments.
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-61
MT-62
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Attempted to lower the removal arm from Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB22 port of the SND board,
surface detection position to suction detection or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
Tray film suction
740 detection error (Lower)
position in removal, but SB22 does not become 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2264 2-A-1 FLH
OPEN. adjustments.
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Attempted to lower the removal arm from Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB22 port of the SND board,
surface detection position to suction detection or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
Tray film suction
741 detection error
position in removal, but SB22 does not become 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0265 2-A-1 FLH
OPEN. adjustments.
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Attempted to rise the removal arm from upper Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board,
dead point detection position to HP (home or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Tray removal unit HP
742 rise detection error
position) in removal, but SB11 does not 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2270 2-A-1 FLH
become CLOSE. adjustments.
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Attempted to rise the removal arm from upper Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board,
dead point detection position to HP (home or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Tray removal unit HP
743 rise detection error
position) in removal, but SB11 does not 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0271 2-A-1 FLH
become CLOSE. adjustments.
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board,
Attempted to deviate the removal arm from HP
Tray removal unit HP or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
(home position) after removal operation, but
744 deviation detection
SB11 does not become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2274 2-A-1 FLH
error adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-62
MT-63
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board,
Attempted to deviate the removal arm from HP
Tray removal unit HP or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
(home position) after removal operation, but
745 deviation detection
SB11 does not become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0275 2-A-1 FLH
error adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board,
Attempted to return the removal arm to HP
or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Tray removal unit HP (home position) after removal operation, but
746 return detection error SB11 does not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2276 2-A-1 FLH
adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board,
Attempted to return the removal arm to HP
or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Tray removal unit HP (home position) after removal operation, but
747 return detection error SB11 does not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0277 2-A-1 FLH
adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Attempted to rise the removal arm from upper Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SND board,
Tray removal unit HP dead point detection position to HP (home or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
748 rise detection error position) in removal, but SB21 does not 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2272 2-A-1 FLH
(Lower) become CLOSE. adjustments.
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-63
MT-64
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Attempted to rise the removal arm from upper Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SND board,
Tray removal unit HP dead point detection position to HP (home or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
749 rise detection error position) in removal, but SB21 does not 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0273 2-A-1 FLH
(Lower) become CLOSE. adjustments.
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SND board,
Attempted to deviate the removal arm from HP
Tray removal unit HP or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
(home position) after removal operation, but
750 deviation detection
SB21 does not become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2278 2-A-1 FLH
error (Lower) adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SND board,
Attempted to deviate the removal arm from HP
Tray removal unit HP or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
(home position) after removal operation, but
751 deviation detection
SB21 does not become OPEN.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0279 2-A-1 FLH
error (Lower) adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SND board,
Attempted to return the removal arm to HP
Tray removal unit HP or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
(home position) after removal operation, but
752 return detection error
SB21 does not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2280 2-A-1 FLH
(Lower) adjustments.
(Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-64
MT-65
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SND board,
Attempted to return the removal arm to HP
Tray removal unit HP or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
(home position) after removal operation, but
753 return detection error
SB21 does not become CLOSE.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0281 2-A-1 FLH
(Lower) adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board,
or malfunction of the MD2 controller.
Although the grip roller is in the HP (home
754 Grip HP absent error
position) state, but SD4 is already closed.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2282 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board,
or malfunction of the MD2 controller.
Although the grip roller is in the gripping state,
755 Grip absent error
but SD4 is already open.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2283 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set grip roller to HP (home or malfunction of the MD2 controller.
Grip HP detection
756 error
position) in printing, but SD4 does not become 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2284 2-A-4 FLH
OPEN. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set grip roller to HP (home
or malfunction of the MD2 controller.
Grip HP detection position) while checking the gripping operation
757 error using PC-Utility, but SD4 does not become
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0285 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
OPEN.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-65
MT-66
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set grip roller from HP (home or malfunction of the MD2 controller.
758 Grip detection error position) to gripping position in printing, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2286 2-A-4 FLH
SD4 does not become CLOSE. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set grip roller from HP (home
or malfunction of the MD2 controller.
position) to gripping position while checking the
759 Grip detection error
grip-ping operation using PC-Utility, but SD4
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 0287 2-A-4 FLH
adjustments.
does not become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set stopper plate from stop or malfunction of the SOLD1.
Stopper plate release
760 detection error
position to release position in printing, but SD3 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2288 2-A-4 FLH
does not become CLOSE. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port of the SND board,
Attempted to set stopper plate from release or malfunction of the SOLD1.
Stopper plate
761 detection error
position to stop position in printing, but SD3 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2289 2-A-4 FLH
does not become OPEN. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Film dropped during removal.
Or malfunction of SD1 sensor or MB12 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 port of the SND board,
At completion of removal process, did not
Tray conveyor unit or malfunction of the MB12 controller.
detect normal SD1 CLOSE (film leading edge
762 entrance detection
detection).
1. Check if film has dropped. 2290 2-A-1 FLH
error 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensor, motor, and perform mechanism
(Currently retrying)
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-66
MT-67
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component
Display Code Information
Film dropped during removal.
Or malfunction of SD1 sensor or MB22 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 port of the SND board,
At completion of removal process, did not
Tray conveyor unit or malfunction of the MB22 controller.
detect normal SD1 CLOSE (film leading edge
763 entrance detection
detection).
1. Check if film has dropped. 2292 2-A-1 FLH
error 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensor, motor, and perform mechanism
(Currently retrying)
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
The thermistor in the recording section is not in stable operation.
A sub-scanning speed correction calculation
Sub-scanning speed Or the machine temperature fluctuates greatly.
was performed based on the film recording
764 correction calculation
section temperature before recording, but the
1. Check the recording section thermistor. 22D5 2-F-4 FLH
error 2. Collect the internal temperature data.
result is out of tolerance range of speed.
3. Review the correction calculation.
Malfunction of the SND board.
Tray removal unit Failed in driving motor due to muting of MB1 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
765 motor drive error with initialization of removal unit. adjustments.
22E2 2-A-4 FLH
2. If the problem still persists, replace SND board.
The barcode (SA16) is faulty.
Top barcode read An error occurred in reading the barcode
766 error (SA16).
1. Check the harness. 22C2 2-F-4 FLH
2. Replace the barcode reader or the SND board.
The barcode (SA26) is faulty.
Bottom barcode read An error occurred in reading the barcode
767 error (SA26).
1. Check the harness. 22C3 2-A-4 FLH
2. Replace the barcode reader or the SND board.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MT-67
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
11.25.2008 00 New release for UL (00 (1) Edition) (FM5451) All pages
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
05.20.2009 01(1) New release for the field (FM5546) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 06.30.2009 02
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0 (sup-
ports multi modalities), etc) (FM5568)
62, 63
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 1, 62
SERVICE MANUAL
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 1, 1.1-1.8, 62
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) Cover
TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
(FM-DL 100)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
MT-1
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD
When malfunctions occur in the equipment, analyze them from error code and perform
the required corrections.
n Troubleshooting from Error Codes
When an error code is displayed on the screen, analyze the malfunction from that
error code.
When no error codes are displayed, the malfunction can be analyzed if an error
message is logged in the error log.
When analyzing malfunctions from error codes, refer to “3. ERROR CODE TABLE”.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1
MT-1.1
2. ERROR CODE
2.1 Checking Error Codes
For details on error codes, refer to “3. ERROR CODE TABLE” for the meaning of the
error which has occurred, suspected cause, and remedy.
When analyzing an error code, also refer to the detailed code provided.
To differentiate the place of error (printer or formatter), look up the name displayed
under “Component” on the error code table in the following table.
Component Error Type Place of Error
FLH Film conveyance related error
MFC Data setting/system related error
DEN Internal densitometer related error
Temperature control system related
DEV
error Printer error
POL Polygon motor control related error
PNL Panel control related error
SCN Scanner related error
ESN Film edge sensor related error
DICOM DICOM error
Spooler Spooler error
ImgPrc Image processing error
Output Output control error
JobMake Test pattern generation error
Main MAIN control error
Formatter error
File transfer error
PCUTL
(Using the PC Tool in normal state)
File transfer error
Satellite (Using the PC Tool during initializa-
tion error)
StartUp Initialization error
File transfer error (Using the PC
Installer
Tool at initialization
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1.1
MT-1.2
2.2 Format of Detailed Information 2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information
Perform this check only for analyzing error codes of the printer. n 2-A (Sensor Related Errors)
In the usual troubleshooting, find the corresponding error code from the error code
tables, and refer to the suspected causes and remedy methods indicated to resolve Errors occurring in initialization self-diagnosis, removal, recording, constant
the problem. monitoring, etc. (Including mechanism, etc.)
However if the problem persists, or to investigate the problem in further detail, check Convert the hexadecimal 4-digit code to binary, compare the bit maps, and investigate
the following detailed information to analyze the problem. the input state corresponding to each bit.
1=ON (Close), 0=OFF (Open)
n Checking Detailed Information of Error Codes
1. Check the corresponding error code and its detailed information at
the error message display, or at [Display Error Log] of the PC-Utility.
2. Check the detailed information format number at “3. ERROR CODE l 2-A-1 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S1))
TABLE” and refer to the corresponding format. Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
3. Find the format information from the 4-digit detailed information, and
analyze the problem.
l 2-A-4 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S4))
Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1.2
MT-1.3
l 2-A-5 (Electric Related Information (Type E)) n 2-B (File I/O Error)
Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
l 2-B-1 (Type F)
Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the number
of the file causing the error and the causes.
File number
201: Conveyance timer file (For mechanism)
202: Conveyance timer file (For size)
203: Conveyance timer file (For M-Utility)
204: Conveyance counter file
205: PM control parameter file (For mechanism)
206: PM control parameter file (For size)
207: PM control parameter file (For M-Utility)
208: Timer file for PM time monitoring
Causes
1: Open error
2: Read error
3: Write error
4: Conversion error
5: Line specification error
6: Column specification error
7: Size specification error
8: External file data error
A: Data range error (Detected by application)
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1.3
MT-1.4
n 2-E (PC-Utility Operation Error) n 2-F (For Error Analysis)
l 2-E-1 (Type U) l 2-F-4
Displays the PC-Utility command number and parameter of errors which occur when Displays the temperature when an error occurs in subscanning speed correction
the removal operation of the PC-Utility was not executed as specified. calculation. (unit: 1°C)
However, if the temperature is minus (-1 to -99 °C), “F” will be displayed at the first
digit.
PC-Utility command number
08: Unit Operation..................................................................... (1)
10: Grip (Action:MD2 only)........................................................ (2)
Parameter number
When (1)
0: Home Positioning
1: Film Surface
2: Film Suction
3: Upper Limit
4: Film Fanning
5: Film Release
6: Film Convey
7: Removing
When (2)
0: Home Positioning
3: Grip
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1.4
MT-1.5
2.2.2 DEN Related (Internal Densitometer) Errors Detailed 2.2.3 ESN Related (Film Edge Sensor Related) Errors
Information Detailed Information
n 4-A (File I/O Error) n 8-B (Outside Range Data)
Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes. Displays the error value when the edge sensor data value is abnormal (outside range).
n 8-C (No Acquired Data)
Displays the file number during edge sensor related data file acquisition when the file
could not be created due to no data.
n 4-B (Insufficient Effective Density Measurement)
Displays the effective data acquired by AD data analysis in decimal 4-digits when the
number of effective AD data measured by the density measurement section is less
than the minimum number of effective data (NOTE).
NOTE: The number of effective data is 90% of the number of data logically measured. File number
The number of effective data required for 24-steps pattern is above 5613, that
for 17-steps pattern is above 4158, and that for QC pattern is above 1300. 0: Edge sensor data file
1: Nonvolatile memory edge sensor data file
2: Edge sensor monitoring data file
3: Edge sensor average value data file
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1.5
MT-1.6
2.2.4 DEV Related (Temperature Control Related) Errors n 9-C (Film Cooling Section, Recording Section Thermistor
Detailed Information Disconnection Error)
Error which occurs when the thermistor of the film cooling section or recording section
n 9-A (Temperature Error) is disconnected. Displays the thermistor temperature (A/D value).
Displays the temperature when the temperature is outside the specified range in
heater temperature control. (Unit: 1°C)
However, if the temperature is minus (-1 to -99°C), “F” will be displayed at the second
digit from the left.
n 9-D (File I/O Error)
Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes.
n 9-B (Heater Thermistor Disconnection Error) n 9-E (Heater Control Task Start Error)
Error which occurs when the heater thermistor is disconnected. Displays the heater Displays the heater number when the heater temperature control task start ends in
number and thermistor temperature (A/D value). error.
n 9-F (General Error Details)
Displayed when no detailed information.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1.6
MT-1.7
n 9-H (Heat Development Control Parameter Value Error)
Displays the causes when heat development control parameter value errors are
detected.
Code details
Cause
0001: Target temperature setting error
0003: Heater control TCYC1 value error
1004: A system fan control TCYC2 value error
1005: A system fan control DUTY value: fr1 error
1006: A system fan control DUTY value: fr2 error
1007: A system fan control DUTY value: fr3 error
1008: A system fan control DUTY value: fr4 error
0009: Heater control DUTY value error
000A: Photosensing material correction parameter SBC1 value error
000B: Photosensing material correction parameter KBC value error
000C: TRAY number error at photosensing material correction parameter setting
000D: Photosensing material correction parameter SBC4 value error
2004: B system fan control TCYC2 value error
2005: B system fan control DUTY value: fr1 error
2006: B system fan control DUTY value: fr2 error
2007: B system fan control DUTY value: fr3 error
2008: B system fan control DUTY value: fr4 error
000E: Voltage DUTY parameter value error
000F: Equipment voltage parameter value error
001F: Language information parameter value error
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1.7
MT-1.8
3. ERROR CODE TABLE
<NOTE>
The error codes of this equipment are displayed in three digits on the 7-segment LED of the operation panel. Error logs are logged using error codes (four digits) and
details codes (four digits), and therefore need to be reread.
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
201 Front cover open The front cover is open. Close the front cover. 1212 2-A-4 FLH Close the cover.
The tray was open in initialization 285RU: IP TRAPPED
203 Tray open error
and removal.
Close the tray. 1225 2-A-1 FLH
INSIDE READER.
Tray shutter present The shutter was inserted in the tray
204 error in initialization and removal.
Remove the shutter of the tray. 1227 2-A-1 FLH Pull out the shutter.
The shutter is inserted (degenerated state).
Or malfunction of the SA1 sensor or SA1 port of
The shutter is inserted in the tray the SND board.
(degenerated state) at startup 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Tray shutter present
205 error at startup
initialization by user operations. Or perform mechanism adjustments. 02C0 2-A-1 FLH Pull out the shutter.
all trays cannot be used due to the 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
corresponding error. motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Tray shutter uninserted Attempted to open the tray, but the Insert the shutter and open
206 error shutter was not inserted.
After inserting the shutter, open the tray. 1233 2-A-1 FLH
the film tray.
Density measurement The automatically measured Execute automatic density measurement again. If 290RU: IP TRAPPED
207 error density value is incorrect. the error persists, contact your dealer.
1801 None DEN
INSIDE READER.
The measured density of the QC Execute QC output again. If the error persists, 291RU: IP TRAPPED
208 QC failure
printed film is abnormal. contact your dealer.
1802 None DEN
INSIDE READER.
The laser lifespan is about one 292RU: IP TRAPPED
209 Laser lifespan notice
month.
Contact your dealer to replace the laser unit. 1803 FFFF SCN
INSIDE READER.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1.8
MT-2
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The laser lifespan has been 293RU: IP TRAPPED
210 Laser lifespan warning
exceeded.
Contact your dealer to replace the laser unit. 1804 FFFF SCN
INSIDE READER.
The size of the film on which
received images are printed and Change to the tray loaded with 35x43 cm size 289RU: IP TRAPPED
211 Film size differences
that of the film in the currently set film.
1811 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
tray are different.
The size of the film on which
received images are printed and Change to the tray loaded with 35x35 cm size 289RU: IP TRAPPED
212 Film size differences
that of the film in the currently set film.
1812 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
tray are different.
The size of the film on which
received images are printed and Change to the tray loaded with 26x36 cm size 289RU: IP TRAPPED
213 Film size differences
that of the film in the currently set film.
1813 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
tray are different.
The size of the film on which
received images are printed and Change to the tray loaded with 25x30 cm size 289RU: IP TRAPPED
214 Film size differences
that of the film in the currently set film.
1814 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
tray are different.
The size of the film on which
received images are printed and Change to the tray loaded with 20x25 cm size 289RU: IP TRAPPED
215 Film size differences
that of the film in the currently set film.
1815 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
tray are different.
Unregistered tray An unregistered tray has been 289RU: IP TRAPPED
219 inserted inserted.
Changed to a registered tray. 1819 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-2
MT-3
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Film dropped during removal.
Or malfunction of SD1 sensor or MB2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB2
At completion of removal process, controller.
Tray removal unit jam did not detect normal SD1 CLOSE 1. Check if film has dropped. A film jams in the removal
220 error (film leading edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
1291 2-A-1 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(Retryover) perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from
the removal unit.
Or malfunction of the SD1 sensor, or MB2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 ports
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB2
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit
Tray removal unit controller.
by discharge remainder, but did not A film jams in the removal
221 jam error (Discharge
detect SD1 CLOSE (film leading
1. Check if film has dropped. 12A9 2-A-1 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
remainder) 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
edge detection).
perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Jam occurred during conveyance.
Open the right cover, and remove the jammed
film.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyor unit jam but did not detect SD2 CLOSE (film perform mechanism adjustments. A film jams in the conveyor
222 error leading edge detection). SD2, MD1, MB2
2294 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-3
MT-4
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Jam occurred during conveyance.
Open the right cover, and remove the jammed
film.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyor unit jam but did not detect SD2 CLOSE (film perform mechanism adjustments. A film jams in the conveyor
223 error leading edge detection). SD2, MD1, MB2
1295 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board
The remainder is not discharged normally from
the conveyor unit.
Or malfunction of the SD2 sensor, or MD1, MB2
motors.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD2 port
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD1, MB2
Conveyor unit jam
by discharge remainder, but did not controller. A film jams in the conveyor
224 error
detect SD2 CLOSE (film leading 1. Check if film has dropped.
12B1 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(Discharge remainder)
edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Open the upper front cover, and remove the
jammed film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning A film jams in the sub-
Sub-scanning unit jam perform mechanism adjustments.
225 error
unit, but did not detect SD2 OPEN
SD2, MD1, ME1
1296 2-A-4 FLH scanning unit.Please
(film trailing edge detection). removing Film.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-4
MT-5
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Open the upper front cover, and remove the
jammed film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning A film jams in the sub-
Sub-scanning unit jam perform mechanism adjustments.
226 error
unit, but did not detect SG1 CLOSE
SG1, MD1, ME1
1297 2-A-4 FLH scanning unit.Please
(film leading edge detection). removing Film.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from
the sub-scanning unit.
Or malfunction of the SD2 sensor, or MD1, ME1
motors.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD2 port
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD1, ME1
Sub-scanning unit jam A film jams in the sub-
unit by discharge remainder, but controller.
227 error
did not detect SD2 OPEN (film 1. Check if film has dropped.
12B2 2-A-4 FLH scanning unit.Please
(Discharge remainder) removing Film.
trailing edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from
the sub-scanning unit.
Or malfunction of the SG1 sensor, or MD1, ME1
motors.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SG1 port
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD1, ME1
Sub-scanning unit jam A film jams in the sub-
unit by discharge remainder, but controller.
228 error
did not detect SG1 CLOSE (film 1. Check if film has dropped.
12B3 2-A-4 FLH scanning unit.Please
(Discharge remainder) removing Film.
leading edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-5
MT-6
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Jam occurred during heat development
conveyance.
Open the front cover, and remove the jammed
film.
Conveyed film to the heat
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and A film jams in the heat
Heat development unit development unit, but did not detect
229 jam error SJ1 CLOSE (film leading edge
perform mechanism adjustments. 1299 2-A-4 FLH development unit.Please
SJ1, ME1, MG1 removing Film.
detection).
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from
the heat development unit.
Or malfunction of the SG1 sensor, or ME1, MG1
motors.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SG1 port
Conveyed film to the heat of the SND board, or malfunction of the ME1,
Heat development unit A film jams in the heat
development unit by discharge MG1 controller.
230 jam error
remainder, but did not detect SG1 1. Check if film has dropped.
12B4 2-A-4 FLH development unit.Please
(Discharge remainder) removing Film.
OPEN (film trailing edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from
the heat development unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ1 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ1 port
Conveyed film to the heat of the SND board, or malfunction of the MG1
Heat development unit development unit by discharge controller. A film jams in the heat
231 jam error remainder, but did not detect 1. Check if film has dropped. 12B5 2-A-4 FLH development unit.Please
(Discharge remainder) SJ1 CLOSE (film leading edge 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and removing Film.
detection). perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-6
MT-7
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Jam occurred during film release conveyance.
Open the front cover, and remove the jammed
film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyed film to the film release
Film release unit jam perform mechanism adjustments. A film jams in the film release
232 error
unit, but did not detect SJ1 OPEN
SJ1, MG1
12A0 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(film trailing edge detection).
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Jam occurred during film release conveyance.
Open the front cover, and remove the jammed
film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyed film to the film release
Film release unit jam perform mechanism adjustments. A film jams in the film release
233 error
unit, but did not detect SJ2 CLOSE
SJ2, MG1
12A1 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(film leading edge detection).
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Jam occurred during film release conveyance.
Open the front cover, and remove the jammed
film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyed film to the film release
Film release unit jam perform mechanism adjustments. A film jams in the film release
234 error
unit, but did not detect SJ2 OPEN
SJ2, MG1
12A2 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(film trailing edge detection).
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-7
MT-8
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The remainder is not discharged normally from
the film release unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ1 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ1 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MG1
Conveyed film to the film release
Film release unit jam controller.
unit by discharge remainder, but A film jams in the film release
235 error
did not detect SJ1 OPEN (film
1. Check if film has dropped. 12B6 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(Discharge remainder) 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
trailing edge detection).
perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from
the film release unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ2 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ2 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MG1
Conveyed film to the film release
Film release unit jam controller.
unit by discharge remainder, but 310RU: IP TRAPPED
236 error
did not detect SJ2 CLOSE (film
1. Check if film has dropped. 12B7 2-A-4 FLH
INSIDE READER.
(Discharge remainder) 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
leading edge detection).
perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from
the film release unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ2 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ2 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MG1
Conveyed film to the film release
Film release unit jam controller.
unit by discharge remainder, but A film jams in the film release
237 error
did not detect SJ2 OPEN (film
1. Check if film has dropped. 12B8 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(Discharge remainder) 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
trailing edge detection).
perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-8
MT-9
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
A jam occurred during discharge conveyance.
Open the front cover and remove the jammed film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyed film to the film release perform mechanism adjustments.
Film release unit A film jams in the film release
238 entrance jam error
unit, but did not detect SJ1 OPEN SJ1, MG1 22D6 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(film trailing edge detection). 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
A jam occurred during discharge conveyance.
Open the front cover and remove the jammed film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyed film to the film release perform mechanism adjustments.
Film release unit exit A film jams in the film release
239 jam error
unit, but did not detect SJ2 CLOSE SJ2, MG1 22D7 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(film leading edge detection). 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
A jam occurred during discharge conveyance.
Open the front cover and remove the jammed film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyed film to the film release perform mechanism adjustments.
Film release unit exit A film jams in the film release
240 jam error
unit, but did not detect SJ2 OPEN SJ2, MG1 22D8 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(film trailing edge detection). 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Jam occurred during front conveyance.
Although film was conveyed to
Open the right covers and remove the film.
the recording unit, failed to detect
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform sensor check,
SD2 CLOSE (film leading edge
Conveyor unit jam motor check, and mechanism adjustments. A film jams in the conveyor
241 error
detection). (Currently retrying)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
22E0 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
Error occurred again due to motor
motors.
stop.
3. If the problem still persists, replace SND
(Maybe already stopped)
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-9
MT-10
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Jam occurred during front conveyance.
Although film was conveyed to Open the right (upper and lower) covers and
the recording unit, failed to detect remove the film.
SD2 CLOSE (film leading edge 1. Using the PC-Utility, perform sensor check,
Conveyor unit jam A film jams in the conveyor
242 error
detection). (Retry-over) motor check, and mechanism adjustments. 12E1 2-A-4 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
Error occurred again due to motor 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
stop. motors.
(Maybe already stopped) 3. If the problem still persists, replace SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-10
MT-11
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
250 Semaphore table initialization error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0001 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
251 Message ID acquisition error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0002 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
SND connection board Contact the Fujifilm service
252 disconnected
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0003 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
253 Driver error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0004 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Folder generation error from Contact the Fujifilm service
254 RAMDISK
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0005 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
255 File copy error to RAMDISK 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0006 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
256 ISC thread start error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0007 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
257 DBG thread start error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0008 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
258 MFC thread start error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0009 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Image processing memory Contact the Fujifilm service
259 initialization error
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000A StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-11
MT-12
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
260 PNL thread error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000B StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
261 7-segment LED display error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000C StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
262 Message error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000D StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
263 Th2ONFLG deletion error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 000E StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
264 Unexpected message error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000F StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
265 Install processing error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0010 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
266 Disc flash error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 0011 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Occurred inconsistency in the file Contact the Fujifilm service
267 system.
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0012 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
File open error during file open Contact the Fujifilm service
268 checking
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 0013 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
269 Disc unmount error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 0014 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-12
MT-13
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Failed in securing area for Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
300 communication processing. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0001 Main
personnel.
Mounted memory does not satisfy Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
301 operating conditions of the system. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0002 Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
302 Invalid parameter was specified.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0003 Main
personnel.
Failed in DICOM control execution Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
303 start request. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0004 Main
personnel.
Failed in communication end Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
304 request to DICOM control. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0005 Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
305 Failed in calling GUI method.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0006 Main
personnel.
Failed in JOB completion Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
306 communication processing. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0007 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling the print request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
307 method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0008 Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
308 Failed in image initializing request.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0009 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling image processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
309 request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 000A Main
personnel.
Failed in re-reading instruction of Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
310 density correction table. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 000B Main
personnel.
Failed in calling JOB generation
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
311 request (SMPTE/execution)
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 000C Main
personnel.
method.
Failed in calling JOB generation
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
312 request (scanner diagnosis)
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 000D Main
personnel.
method.
Failed in calling JOB generation Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
313 request (flat pattern) method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 8000E Main
personnel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-13
MT-14
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Failed in calling JOB generation Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
314 request (cleaning) method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 000F Main
personnel.
Failed in calling JOB priority order Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
315 change completion method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0010 Main
personnel.
Failed in initializing output control Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
316 unit. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0011 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling utility request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
317 method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0012 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling energy-saving Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
318 instruction method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0013 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling print request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
319 method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0014 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling transfer request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
320 method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0015 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling output control end Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
321 instruction method CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0016 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling removal permission Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
322 notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0017 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling end request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
323 method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0018 Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
324 Failed in calling PC-Utility method.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0019 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling image processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
325 completion setting request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 001A Main
personnel.
Failed in calling removal process Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
326 JOB acquisition request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 001B Main
personnel.
Failed in calling image processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
327 JOB acquisition request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 001C Main
personnel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-14
MT-15
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Failed in calling RAW data transfer Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
328 JOB acquisition request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 001D Main
personnel.
Failed in calling tray information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
329 renewal notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 001E Main
personnel.
Failed in calling output processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
330 completion notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 001F Main
personnel.
Failed in spooler control execution Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
331 start request. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0020 Main
personnel.
Failed in spooler control transfer Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
332 completion notification. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0021 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling JOB spool request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
333 method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0022 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling unprocessed JOB Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
334 recovery request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0023 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling JOB priority order Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
335 change request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0024 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling deletion request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
336 method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0025 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling initialization method Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
337 of output control. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0026 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling Queue deletion Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
338 request results notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0027 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling JOB start Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
339 notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0028 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling preprint response Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
340 notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0029 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling printer information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
341 request response method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002A Main
personnel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-15
MT-16
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Failed in calling image reception Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
342 completion notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002B Main
personnel.
Failed in calling system information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
343 printing method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002C Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
344 Request in unexpected mode.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002D Main
personnel.
Failed in calling uniformity table re- Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
345 reading method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002E Main
personnel.
Failed in calling printer image Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
346 correction mode setting method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002F Main
personnel.
Failed in calling tray state change Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
347 notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0030 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling delete all JOB Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
348 request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0031 Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
355 Failed in reprint verification request.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0038 Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
356 Failed in reprint spool request.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0039 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling QC test pattern Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
357 output method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 003A Main
personnel.
Failed in calling printer state change Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
358 notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 003B Main
personnel.
Failed in calling system information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
369 acquisition method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0046 Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
370 Failed in copying file.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0047 Main
personnel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-16
MT-17
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
371 Failed in loading file.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0048 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling resistance Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
372 correction reloading method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0049 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling main scanning
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
373 image position adjustment
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 004A Main
personnel.
parameter table reloading method.
Failed in calling resistance Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
374 correction reloading method CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 004B Main
personnel.
Failed in calling setting method of
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
375 the number of films remaining in
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 004C Main
personnel.
tray.
Failed in loading setting file of the Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
376 energy-saving. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 004D Main
personnel.
Failed in calling direction method of Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
377 the energy-saving. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 004E Main
personnel.
Failed in calling transferring request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
378 method of the energy-saving. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 004F Main
personnel.
Failed in calling recovering request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
379 method of the energy-saving. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0050 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling control notification Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
380 method of the status lamp. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0051 Main
personnel.
Failed in renewing number of the Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
383 accumulated used films. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0054 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling power off request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
384 method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0055 Main
personnel.
Recheck the software to be installed and replace Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
385 Failed in copying installation data.
the CF. source code
0008 0056 Main
personnel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-17
MT-18
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Failed in creating the version up Recheck the software to be installed and replace Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
386 direction file. the CF. source code
0008 0057 Main
personnel.
Failed in creating the full installation Recheck the software to be installed and replace Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
387 direction file. the CF. source code
0008 0058 Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
388 Failed in deleting log files.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0059 Main
personnel.
Failed in creating normal completed Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
389 flag file. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 005A Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
390 Failed in starting up the Web task.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 005B Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
391 Notified unknown state.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 005C Main
personnel.
Occurred inconsistency in the file Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
392 system. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 005D Main
personnel.
Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
393 Did not end normally the last time. Reboot the system and observe conditions.
source code
0008 005E Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
394 Failed in deleting pas log.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 005F Main
personnel.
Failed in acquiring log acquisition Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
395 mode. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0060 Main
personnel.
Failed in creating initialization skip Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
396 flag file. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0061 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling display information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
397 update notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0062 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling PNL/ART Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
398 notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0063 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling file transfer request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
399 method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0064 Main
personnel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-18
MT-19
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Failed in calling equipment
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
400 termination notification request
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0065 Main
personnel.
method.
Failed in calling termination Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
401 response method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0066 Main
personnel.
Print stop notification method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
402 error CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0067 Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
403 Options.txt read error
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0068 Main
personnel.
Tray open request method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
404 error CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0069 Main
personnel.
Tray open response method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
405 error CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 006A Main
personnel.
Alert open response method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
406 error CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 006B Main
personnel.
JOB in time request method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
407 error CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 006C Main
personnel.
Tray constant monitoring start Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
408 instruction method calling error CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 006D Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
409 Failed in bc_sbc.txt file reading.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 006E Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
410 Failed in bc_sbc/txt file reading.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 006F Main
personnel.
Failed in film_information.txt file Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
411 reading. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0070 Main
personnel.
Failed in starting DICOM main Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Contact the Fujifilm service
420 thread. CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0001 0001 DICOM
personnel.
Save equipment individual data (requires Dicom.dat Contact the Fujifilm service
421 Invalid Dicom.dat contents
analysis).
Tag number with error 0001 0002 DICOM
personnel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-19
MT-20
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Failed in starting DICOM Save equipment individual data (requires Netinf.prm Contact the Fujifilm service
422 communication main thread. analysis).
Port number 0001 0003 DICOM
personnel.
1:No file
Save equipment individual data (requires Netinf.prm Contact the Fujifilm service
423 Invalid Netinf.prm contents
analysis).
2:Non existing keyword 0001 0004 DICOM
personnel.
3:Non existing value
1:No file
Save equipment individual data (requires Contact the Fujifilm service
424 Invalid UserImageNum.txt
UserImageNum.txt).
2:Non existing keyword 0001 0005 DICOM
personnel.
3:Non existing value
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Contact the Fujifilm service
425 Insufficient virtual memory
CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0001 FFFF DICOM
personnel.
Failed in creating thread. (Internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
430 error) CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0001 Spooler
personnel.
Failed in sending messages. Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
431 (Internal error) CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0002 Spooler
personnel.
Failed in securing memory. (Internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
432 error) CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0003 Spooler
personnel.
Failed in creating Print Job objects Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
433 in recovering unprocessed JOBs. flm analysis). source code
0002 0004 Spooler
personnel.
Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
434 Failed in reading PrintJob files.
flm analysis). source code
0002 0005 Spooler
personnel.
Failed in acquiring PrintJob and Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
435 FILM object data. flm analysis). source code
0002 0007 Spooler
personnel.
Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
436 Failed in registering spooler queue.
flm analysis). source code
0002 0008 Spooler
personnel.
Invalid film object, or insufficient Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
437 data flm analysis). source code
0002 0009 Spooler
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
438 Invalid status
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code, status
0002 000B Spooler
personnel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-20
MT-21
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
439 Failed in accessing PrintJob.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 000C Spooler
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
440 Specified Film number is invalid.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 000D Spooler
personnel.
Could not find Print Job deleted Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
441 when requesting queue deletion. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 000E Spooler
personnel.
Specified change priority level is Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
442 invalid. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0010 Spooler
personnel.
Failed in setting PrintJob and FILM Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
443 object data. flm analysis). source code
0002 0011 Spooler
personnel.
Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
444 Failed in opening and creating files.
analysis). source code, file name
2002 0012 Spooler
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
445 Requested print ID is illegal.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0013 Spooler
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
446 Failed in moving file.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0014 Spooler
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
447 Unexpected case occurred.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0015 Spooler
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
450 Error occurred due to system call.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0003 0001 ImgPrc
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
451 Failed in acquiring memory.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0003 0002 ImgPrc
personnel.
Failed in creating image processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
452 objects. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0003 0003 ImgPrc
personnel.
Data to be acquired was not found Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.
Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
453 in PrintJOB, FILM object, nor image prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
source code
2003 0004 ImgPrc
personnel.
processing parameter. xxx.job/xxx.flm).
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-21
MT-22
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.
Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
454 Failed in opening and creating files. prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
source code, file name
2003 0005 ImgPrc
personnel.
xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.
Execution of image processing Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
455 resulted in error.
prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
source code
2003 0006 ImgPrc
personnel.
xxx.job/xxx.flm).
As the leading edge margin
Equipment individual data save (TOP_MARGIN.txt) Contact the Fujifilm service
456 parameter is outside the range, use
analysis is required.
Type, outside range value 2003 0007 ImgPrc
personnel.
the default value.
Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.
Re-executed format calculation Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
457 without annotation information
prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
source code
2003 0008 ImgPrc
personnel.
xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Failed in starting output main Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Contact the Fujifilm service
460 thread. CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0004 1EB1 Output
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Contact the Fujifilm service
461 Level 0 error occurred in formatter.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0004 1F7C Output
personnel.
Density correction calculation Save equipment individual data (requires log Contact the Fujifilm service
462 results are abnormal. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None 0004 1F84 Output
personnel.
Unable to continue operations due Save equipment individual data (requires log Contact the Fujifilm service
463 to internal error. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
Detailed information 0004 1F85 Output
personnel.
Failed in creating thread (internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
470 error). CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0007 0001 JobMake
personnel.
Failed in sending message (internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
471 error). CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0007 0002 JobMake
personnel.
Failed in securing memory (internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
472 error). CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code, request size
0007 0003 JobMake
personnel.
Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
473 Failed in opening and creating files.
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. source code, file name
0007 000A JobMake
personnel.
Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
474 Invalid status
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. source code, status
0007 000B JobMake
personnel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-22
MT-23
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the Name of file which failed Contact the Fujifilm service
480 Failed in FTP data transfer.
equipment, and observe conditions. transfer
200A 0001 PCUTL
personnel.
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the
Contact the Fujifilm service
481 FTP port does not open. path and user of the FTP directory of the PC for None 200A 0002 PCUTL
personnel.
servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file but Name of file which failed Contact the Fujifilm service
482 did not exist.
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again.
transfer
200A 0003 PCUTL
personnel.
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the Name of file which failed Contact the Fujifilm service
483 Failed in FTP data transfer.
equipment, and observe conditions. transfer
200D 0001 Satellite
personnel.
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the
Contact the Fujifilm service
484 FTP port does not open. path and user of the FTP directory of the PC for None 200D 0002 Satellite
personnel.
servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file but Name of file which failed Contact the Fujifilm service
485 did not exist.
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again.
transfer
200D 0003 Satellite
personnel.
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the Name of file which failed Contact the Fujifilm service
486 Failed in FTP data transfer.
equipment, and observe conditions. transfer
200B 0001 Installer
personnel.
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the
Contact the Fujifilm service
487 FTP port does not open. path and user of the FTP directory of the PC for None 200B 0002 Installer
personnel.
servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file but Name of file which failed Contact the Fujifilm service
488 did not exist.
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again.
transfer
200B 0003 Installer
personnel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-23
MT-24
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
No response from FL-SS that it has the CPU board or CF.
Contact the Fujifilm service
600 FLH-SS start timeout completed start even after a certain 1. Re-install the software. 0332 FFFF MFC
personnel.
period of time. 2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CPU board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
No response from SCN-SS that it the CPU board or CF.
Contact the Fujifilm service
601 SCN-SS start timeout has completed start even after a 1. Re-install the software. 0335 FFFF MFC
personnel.
certain period of time. 2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CPU board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
No response from DEV-SS that it the CPU board or CF.
Contact the Fujifilm service
602 DEV-SS start timeout has completed start even after a 1. Re-install the software. 0339 FFFF MFC
personnel.
certain period of time. 2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CPU board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Heat development Failed in reading the heat the CF.
Contact the Fujifilm service
610 control parameter file development control parameter file 1. Re-install the software. 0901 9-D DEV
personnel.
reading error when the system was started up. 2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CPU board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Failed in TMS driver (temperature the CF or CAN communication error.
Contact the Fujifilm service
611 TMS driver setup error measurement task) setup when 1. Re-install the software. 0902 9-F DEV
personnel.
system was started up. 2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CAN cable.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Heat development Failed in reading the heat
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
612 calculation parameter development control parameter file
1. Re-install the software.
0903 9-D DEV
personnel.
file reading error when the system was started up.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Temperature Failed in reading the temperature
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
613 conversion table file conversion table file when the
1. Re-install the software.
0904 9-D DEV
personnel.
reading error system was started up.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-24
MT-25
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Failed in starting the plate control
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
614 Plate setup error task when the system was started
1. Re-install the software.
0905 9-E DEV
personnel.
up.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Failed in starting the fan control
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
615 Fan setup error task when the system was started
1. Re-install the software.
0906 9-E DEV
personnel.
up.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Power voltage setting Failed in power voltage setting file the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
616 file reading error reading when starting the system. 1. Re-install the software.
0907 None DEV
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Sensitivity correction Failed in sensitivity correction
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
617 (SBC) file reading (SBC) file reading when starting
1. Re-install the software.
0908 None DEV
personnel.
error the system.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Sensitivity correction Failed in sensitivity correction
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
618 (KBC) file reading (KBC) file reading when starting
1. Re-install the software.
0909 None DEV
personnel.
error the system.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Failed in equipment individual
Equipment individual the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
619 data file reading error
data file reading when starting the
1. Re-install the software.
0910 None DEV
personnel.
system.
2. Replace the CF.
Disconnection of the I/F cable between the
SND board and thermistor, or malfunction of the
thermistor or thermistor port of the SND board, or
disconnection of the CAN cable.
Detected that the current
1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable
temperature of a heater dropped
Plate thermistor to the thermistor, and connector of the SND Contact the Fujifilm service
620 disconnection error
below -20°C for three times
board are set correctly.
0911 9-B DEV
personnel.
continuously (detection interval:
2. Replace the thermistor.
600 ms), and deter
3. Replace the SND board.
4. Replace the cable between the thermistor and
SND board.
5. Replace the CAN cable.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-25
MT-26
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is abnormal.
Malfunction of the temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the heater or I/F cable
between the heater and SND board, reset of
heater by the thermal protector, or malfunction of
the heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
the heater, and connector of the SND board
are set correctly, and check that the thermal
protector reset has been cleared.
The temperature of all plates 2. Check the operations of each heater using the
did not become the appropriate PC-Utility.
temperature (within target Check the peripheral temperature of each
temperature ±1°C) even after the heater with the hand.
specified time from the start of If hot, the heater is OK.
initialization. The thermistor/CAN/SND board may be faulty.
Proceed to step 5.
Note: If not hot, the heater/CAN/SND board may be
1. Generally, as the low faulty. Proceed to step 4.
3. Check the operations of the heat development
temperature error (2911) and
Initialization time unit fan using the PC-Utility. Contact the Fujifilm service
621 timeout
heater disconnection error
The FAN is OK if operations are normal. 0920 9-F DEV
personnel.
(0961), etc. occur before this
The film cooling section and recording section
error, the rate of occurrence of thermistors/CAN/SND board may be faulty.
this error is low. Proceed to step 5.
2. The target temperature (approx. If operations are abnormal, the connector or
90°C to 130°C) varies according fan is defective.
to internal conditions. Replace the connector and heat development
unit fan.
<Specified time> 4. Replace the heater.
100 V model: 30 minutes 5. Replace the PRN board.
200 V model: 25 minutes 7. Replace the thermistor.
6. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the cooling section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and
SND board.
10. Replace the CAN cable.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-26
MT-27
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, temperature detection
thermistor, heat development unit fan, heater, or
heater port.
1. Check if the CF is controlled properly
according to the state LEDs, etc. (hang up,
bus error, etc.).
2. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
the heater, and connector of the SND board
are set correctly.
3. Check the operations of the heat development
unit fan using the PC-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be
faulty. Proceed to step 4.
If operations are abnormal, the connector or
fan is defective.
Replace the connector and heat development
Detected that the current unit fan.
temperature of a heater exceeded 4. Check the operations of each heater using the Contact the Fujifilm service
622 Overheat 2 error
138°C for three times continuously PC-Utility. 0951 9-A DEV
personnel.
(detection interval: 600ms). Check the peripheral temperature of each
heater with the hand.
If not hot, the heater is OK.
The thermistor/SND board may be faulty.
Proceed to step 7.
If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty.
Proceed to step 5.
5. Replace the heater.
6. Replace the CF.
7. Replace the thermistor.
8. Replace the SND board.
9. Replace the recording section thermistor.
10. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and
SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-27
MT-28
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is low.
Disconnection of the heater, malfunction of the
temperature detection thermistor, disconnection
of the heater or I/F cables between the heater
and SND board, reset of heater by the thermal
protector, or malfunction of the heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
The temperature of a heater
the heater, and connector of the SND board
remained lower than the target
are set correctly, and check that the thermal
temperature even after the specified
protector reset has been cleared.
time from the start of temperature
2. Check the operations of each heater using the
control (detection interval: 600ms,
PC-Utility.
measured 2000 times continuously)
Check the peripheral temperature of each
and did not become the appropriate
heater with the hand.
temperature.
Heater disconnection If hot, the heater is OK. Contact the Fujifilm service
623 error The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty.
0961 9-A DEV
personnel.
Note:
Proceed to step 4.
1. The target temperature (approx.
If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be
90 °C to 130 °C) varies according
faulty. Proceed to step 3.
to internal conditions.
3. Replace the heater.
4. Replace the CF.
<Specified time>
5. Replace the thermistor.
100 V model: 20 minutes
6. Replace the SND board.
200 V model: 15 minutes
7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and
SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Heat development Abnormal heat development control
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
624 control parameter parameter was detected when the
1. Re-install the software.
09A0 9-H DEV
personnel.
value error system was started up.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-28
MT-29
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Abnormal rise in the plate temperature.
Connector malfunction, temperature detection
thermistor malfunction, disconnection of the I/F
cable between heaters or between the heater and
SND board, heater reset by the thermal protector,
or malfunction of the heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
the heater, and connector of the SND board
are correctly set, and the thermal protector
reset is cleared.
2. Check the operations of each heater using the
The average rising temperature of
PC-Utility.
the plate remained less than 10 °C
Check the peripheral temperature of the each
even after 5 minutes from system
heater with the hand.
start-up.
Cold start timeout If hot, the heater is OK. Contact the Fujifilm service
625 error The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty.
09B0 9-F DEV
personnel.
Note:
Proceed to step 4.
Error which occurs when heater
If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be
control fails due to electric
faulty. Proceed to 3.
malfunctions.
3. Replace the heater.
4. Replace the CF.
5. Replace the thermistor.
6. Replace the SND board.
7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and
SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-29
MT-30
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature measurement is abnormal.
Malfunction of plate temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the I/F cable between
the thermistor and SND board.
1. Check that the connectors of the thermistor
and SND board are set properly.
2. Check the temperature of each thermistor
using the PC-Utility.
Check the temperature of each thermistor
At system start, the initial
visually.
measured value (average of four)
Check if the temperature is a feasible value
Temperature of the temperature of a heater was Contact the Fujifilm service
626 measurement error outside the -15°C to 150°C
(about 0°C to 130°C). 2907 9-A DEV
personnel.
The thermistor/SND may be faulty. Proceed to
range approximately 5 seconds
step 3.
after the setup of the TMS driver
3. Replace the thermistor.
4. Replace the SND board.
5. Replace the I/F cable between the thermistor
and SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-30
MT-31
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is low.
Disconnection of the heater, malfunction of the
temperature detection thermistor, disconnection
of the heater or I/F cable between the heater
and SND board, reset of heater by the thermal
protector, or malfunction of the heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
The temperature of a heater
the heater, and connectors of the SND board
remained lower than the target
are set correctly, and check that the thermal
temperature even after the specified
protector reset has been cleared.
time from the start of temperature
2. Check the operations of each heater using the
control (detection interval: 600ms,
PC-Utility.
measured 1000 times continuously)
Check the peripheral temperature of each
and did not become the appropriate
heater with the hand.
temperature.
If hot, the heater is OK. Contact the Fujifilm service
627 Low temperature error
The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty.
2911 9-A DEV
personnel.
Note:
Proceed to step 4.
1. The target temperature (approx.
If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be
90°C to 130°C) varies according
faulty. Proceed to step 3.
to internal conditions.
3. Replace the heater.
4. Replace the CF.
<Specified time>
5. Replace the thermistor.
100 V model: 15 minutes
6. Replace the SND board.
200 V model: 10 minutes
7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and
SND.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-31
MT-32
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Disconnection of the I/F cable between the
SND board and thermistor, or malfunction of the
thermistor or thermistor port of the SND board.
The film cooling section thermistor 1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable
Film cooling
has disconnected (Detected to the thermistor, and connector of the SND Contact the Fujifilm service
628 section thermistor
temperature dropped below board are set correctly.
2918 9-C DEV
personnel.
disconnection error
-20°C.). 2. Replace the thermistor.
3. Replace the SND board.
4. Replace the cable between the thermistor and
SND board.
Disconnection of the I/F cable between the
SND board and thermistor, or malfunction of the
thermistor or thermistor port of the SND board.
The recording section thermistor 1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable
Recording
has disconnected (Detected to the thermistor, and connector of the SND Contact the Fujifilm service
629 section thermistor
temperature dropped below board are set correctly.
2919 9-C DEV
personnel.
disconnection error
-20°C.). 2. Replace the thermistor.
3. Replace the SND board.
4. Replace the cable between the thermistor and
SND board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-32
MT-33
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Disconnection of the heater, malfunction of the
temperature detection thermistor, disconnection
of the heater or I/F cable between the heater
and SND board, reset of heater by the thermal
protector, or malfunction of the heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
the heater, and connectors of the SND board
are set correctly, and check that the thermal
During temperature control, the
protector reset has been cleared.
temperature of a heater dropped
2. Check the operations of each heater using the
below the appropriate temperature
PC-Utility.
range (within target temperature
Check the peripheral temperature of each
±1°C), and did not return to the
heater with the hand.
appropriate temperature even
If hot, the heater is OK.
Temperature control after 5 minutes (detection interval Contact the Fujifilm service
630 abnormally low error 600ms, measured 500 times
The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty. 2921 9-A DEV
personnel.
Proceed to step 4.
continuously).
If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be
faulty. Proceed to step 3.
Note:
3. Replace the heater.
1. The target temperature (approx.
4. Replace the CF.
90°C to 130°C) varies according
5. Replace the thermistor.
to internal conditions.
6. Replace the SND board.
7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and
SND.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-33
MT-34
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is abnormal.
Disconnection of the plate temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the heater or I/F cable
between the heater and SND board, reset of
heater by the thermal protector, or malfunction of
the heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
the heater, and connectors of the SND board
are set correctly, and check that the thermal
protector reset has been cleared.
2. Check the operations of each heater using the
PC-Utility.
The temperature of all plates
Check the peripheral temperature of each
did not become the appropriate heater with the hand.
temperature (within target If hot, the heater is OK.
temperature ±1°C) even after The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty.
20 minutes from the start of Proceed to step 5.
initialization. If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be
faulty. Proceed to step 4.
Note: 3. Check the operations of the heat development
Temperature control Contact the Fujifilm service
631 timeout
1. Generally, as the temperature unit fan using the PC-Utility. 2930 9-F DEV
personnel.
control abnormally low error The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
(2921) and heater disconnection The film cooling section and recording section
error (0961), etc. occur before thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty.
this error, the rate of occurrence Proceed to step 5.
of this error is low. If operations are abnormal, the connector or
2. The target temperature (approx. fan is defective.
90°C to 130°C) varies according Replace the connector and heat development
unit fan.
to internal conditions.
4. Replace the heater.
5. Replace the CF.
6. Replace the thermistor.
7. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the film cooling section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and
SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-34
MT-35
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, heat development unit fan,
temperature detection thermistor, heater, or heater
port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
the heater, and connector of the SND board
are set correctly.
2. Check the operations of the heat development
unit fan using the PC-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be
During temperature control, the faulty. Proceed to step 3.
temperature of a heater exceeded If operations are abnormal, the connector or
the appropriate temperature fan is defective.
range (within target temperature Replace the connector and heat development
±1°C), and did not return to the unit fan.
appropriate temperature even 3. Check the operations of each heater using the
Temperature after 5 minutes (detection interval PC-Utility. Contact the Fujifilm service
632 abnormally high error 600ms, measured 500 times Check the peripheral temperature of each
2931 9-A DEV
personnel.
continuously). heater with the hand.
If not hot, the heater is OK.
Note: The thermistor/SND board may be faulty.
1. The target temperature (approx. Proceed to step 6.
90°C to 130°C) varies according If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty.
to internal conditions. Proceed to step 4.
4. Replace the heater.
5. Replace the CF.
6. Replace the thermistor.
7. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the recording section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater SND
board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-35
MT-36
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, heat development unit fan,
temperature detection thermistor, heater, or heater
port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
the heater, and connector of the SND board
are set correctly.
2. Check the operations of the heat development
unit fan using the PC-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be
faulty. Proceed to step 3.
If operations are abnormal, the connector or
fan is defective.
During temperature control, the Replace the connector and heat development
temperature of a heater exceeded unit fan.
the appropriate temperature 3. Check the operations of each heater using the
Temperature control range (within target temperature PC-Utility.
Contact the Fujifilm service
633 abnormally high 2 ±1°C), and did not return to the Check the peripheral temperature of each 2932 9-A DEV
personnel.
error appropriate temperature even heater with the hand.
after 10 minutes (detection interval If not hot, the heater is OK.
600ms, measured 1000 times The thermistor/SND board may be faulty.
continuously). Proceed to step 6.
If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty.
Proceed to step 4.
4. Replace the heater.
5. Replace the CF.
6. Replace the thermistor.
7. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the recording section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater SND
board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-36
MT-37
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, heat development unit fan,
temperature detection thermistor, heater, or heater
port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
the heater, and connector of the SND board
are set correctly.
2. Check the operations of the heat development
unit fan using the PC-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be
faulty. Proceed to step 3.
The temperature of a heater If operations are abnormal, the connector or
remained higher than the target fan is defective.
temperature even after 5 minutes Replace the connector and heat development
from the start of temperature unit fan.
control (detection interval: 600ms, 3. Check the operations of each heater using the
measured 500 times continuously) PC-Utility.
Contact the Fujifilm service
634 Overheat 1 error and did not become the appropriate Check the peripheral temperature of each 2941 9-A DEV
personnel.
temperature. heater with the hand.
If not hot, the heater is OK.
Note: The thermistor/SND board may be faulty.
1. The target temperature (approx. Proceed to step 6.
90°C to 130°C) varies according If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty.
to internal conditions. Proceed to step 4.
4. Replace the heater.
5. Replace the CF.
6. Replace the thermistor.
7. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the recording section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater SND
board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-37
MT-38
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, heat development unit fan,
temperature detection thermistor, heater, or heater
port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
the heater, and connector of the SND board
are set correctly.
2. Check the operations of the heat development
unit fan using the PC-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be
faulty. Proceed to step 3.
The temperature of a heater If operations are abnormal, the connector or
remained higher than the target fan is defective.
temperature even after 10 minutes Replace the connector and heat development
from the start of temperature unit fan.
control (detection interval: 600ms, 3. Check the operations of each heater using the
measured 1000 times continuously) PC-Utility.
Contact the Fujifilm service
635 Overheat 1-2 error and did not become the appropriate Check the peripheral temperature of each 2942 9-A DEV
personnel.
temperature. heater with the hand.
If not hot, the heater is OK.
Note: The thermistor/SND board may be faulty.
1. The target temperature (approx. Proceed to step 6.
90°C to 130°C) varies according If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty.
to internal conditions. Proceed to step 4.
4. Replace the heater.
5. Replace the CF.
6. Replace the thermistor.
7. Replace the SND board.
8. Replace the recording section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater SND
board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-38
MT-39
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The plate temperature measurement is abnormal.
Malfunction of the plate temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the I/F cable with the
SND board.
1. Check that the connectors of the thermistor
and SND board are set properly, and if the
AD converter for temperature measurement is
affected by unidentifiable noise.
2. Check the temperature of each thermistor
using the PC-Utility.
Check the temperature of each thermistor
visually.
Temperature Difference between two continuous
Check that the measured value becomes the Contact the Fujifilm service
636 measurement noise temperature measurements
feasible value (about 0°C to 130°C) and if
2971 9-A DEV
personnel.
(Level 2) (detection interval: 600 ms) > 2°C
there is a difference of 2°C within one second.
The thermistor/SND may be faulty. Proceed to
step 3.
3. Replace the thermistor.
4. Replace the SND board.
5. Replace the I/F cable between the thermistor
and SND board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-39
MT-40
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The target temperature is abnormal or the film
compensation information parameter is abnormal,
or malfunction of the barcode reader.
1. If the target temperature is abnormal, set the
target temperature using the PC-Utility again.
The target temperature (individual 2. If the film compensation information parameter
Heat development
data) or film compensation (SBC) is abnormal, enter the correct barcode. Contact the Fujifilm service
637 control parameter
information value obtained from the 3. If the barcode reader has malfunctioned,
29A0 9-H DEV
personnel.
value error
barcode are abnormal. replace the barcode reader.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF.
1. Re-install the software.
2. Replace the CF.
Failed in creating data file when
acquiring temperature data.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Temperature data Note: the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
638 writing error As “Acquiring temperature data” is 1. Re-install the software.
2991 9-D DEV
personnel.
a function for design and evaluation 2. Replace the CF.
(PC-Utility only), this error does not
occur in actual user operations.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Density drop Failed in creating density drop
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
639 prevention file writing prevention file when initialization
1. Re-install the software.
2992 None DEV
personnel.
error completed.
2. Replace the CF.
Upper 2 bytes:
Fixed
Automatic notification of Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Lower 2 bytes: Contact the Fujifilm service
640 CAN related error temperature from SND board 1. Check the CAN cable. 09FD Returned value
DEV
personnel.
stopped. 2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
from motor
reset API.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-40
MT-41
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
641 Software logic error Failed in software control sequence
1. Re-install the software.
09FE None DEV
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
642 Software logic error Failed in software control sequence
1. Re-install the software.
29FE None DEV
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
Upper
two bytes:
Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Processing Contact the Fujifilm service
643 API/driver related error Return value from API is error. 1. Check the CAN cable. 09FF Lower two
DEN
personnel.
2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
bytes: Return
value from API
Upper
two bytes:
Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Processing Contact the Fujifilm service
644 API/driver related error Return value from API is error. 1. Check the CAN cable. 29FF Lower two
DEN
personnel.
2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
bytes: Return
value from API
Density measurement Failed in reading density Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
645 control parameter file measurement control parameter
1. Re-install the software. 0401 None DEN
personnel.
read error files at system start. 2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Density measurement Failed in software control sequence the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
646 sequence error during density measurement. 1. Re-install the software. 2402 None DEN
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-41
MT-42
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
The density value measured by the density
measurement section is abnormal.
1. Check if the density measurement sections
such as density measurement LED, LED
board, PDD board, connectors between
boards, density measurement sensor power
The density value measured by the fuse, etc. are normal.
Density measurement Contact the Fujifilm service
647 data error
density measurement section is 2. Check if the film sensitivity is normal. 2403 None DEN
personnel.
abnormal.
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the
SND board or CF.
3. Re-install the software.
4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND
board.
5. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Density measurement Failed in creating files when writing the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
648 data write error density measurement AD data. 1. Re-install the software. 2404 4-A DEN
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
No density measurement data as density
No density No density measurement AD data measurement was not performed. Contact the Fujifilm service
649 measurement data in the DRAM of the PRT. After performing density measurement, acquire 2405 None DEN
personnel.
AD data.
1. Check if the density pattern of the film is
normal.
2. Check if the film conveyance position and
Failed to detect starting point of the speed are correct.
Density measurement
density pattern from the number of Contact the Fujifilm service
650 staring point detection
effective AD data measured by the
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the 2406 None DEN
personnel.
error SND board or CF.
density measurement section. 3. Re-install the software.
4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND
board.
5. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-42
MT-43
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
1. Check if the density pattern of the film is
normal.
2. Check if the film conveyance position and
speed are correct.
Failed to detect the ending point of
Density measurement
the density pattern from the number Contact the Fujifilm service
651 ending point detection
of effective AD data measured by
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the 2407 None DEN
personnel.
error SND board or CF.
the density measurement section.
3. Re-install the software.
4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND
board.
5. Replace the CF.
The number of effective AD data measured by
the density measurement section is less than the
minimum number of effective data (Note).
1. Check if the density of the film is normal.
2. Check if the film conveyance position and
speed are correct.
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the
The number of effective density SND board or CF.
Insufficient number
measurement data measured by 3. Re-install the software. Contact the Fujifilm service
652 of effective density
the density measurement section is 4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND
2408 4-B DEN
personnel.
measurement data
insufficient. board.
5. Replace the CF.
Note:
The number of effective data is 90% of the
number of data logically measured. The number
of effective data required for 24-steps pattern is
above 3105, that for 17-steps pattern is above
2300, and that for QC pattern is above 864.
Upper
two bytes:
Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Processing Contact the Fujifilm service
653 API/driver related error Return value from API is error. 1. Check the CAN cable. 04FF Lower two
DEN
personnel.
2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
bytes: Return
value from API
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-43
MT-44
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Upper
two bytes:
Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Processing Contact the Fujifilm service
654 API/driver related error Return value from API is error. 1. Check the CAN cable. 24FF Lower two
DEN
personnel.
2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
bytes: Return
value from API
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Polygon control
Failed in reading the polygon control the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
655 parameter file read
parameter file during system start. 1. Re-install the software.
0502 FFFF POL
personnel.
error
2. Replace the CF.
Malfunction of the scanner unit, PRN board, or
LDD board
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-
Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
Detected polygon rotation error for following.
Polygon error Contact the Fujifilm service
656 (FATAL)
three times continuously during 1. Check and replace the wiring connector 0510 FFFF POL
personnel.
scanner initialization diagnosis. between the scanner unit, LDD board, etc. and
PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
4. Replace the LDD board.
Malfunction of the scanner unit, PRN board, or
LDD board
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-
Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
Detected polygon rotation error following.
Polygon error Number of Contact the Fujifilm service
657 (WARNING)
during scanner initialization 1. Check and replace the wiring connector 2510 diagnosis
POL
personnel.
diagnosis. between the scanner unit, LDD board, etc. and
PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
4. Replace the LDD board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Failed in reading the film edge
Parameter file reading the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
660 failure
sensor control parameter file during
1. Re-install the software.
0810 FFFF ESN
personnel.
system startup.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-44
MT-45
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Film is not conveyed to the correct position,
malfunction of the film edge sensor LED,
malfunction of the film edge sensor, malfunction of
the SND board.
1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor
The average value read by the film monitoring.
Edge sensor average Contact the Fujifilm service
661 value data error
edge sensor is abnormal (outside 2. Replace the film edge sensor if operations are 2811 8-B ESN
personnel.
range). unstable in the above.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
4. If the problem still persists, check the
mechanism if film conveyance is carried out
properly.
Data file cannot be created because printing was
No data or cannot create file when
not carried out once or there is no data acquired Contact the Fujifilm service
662 No acquired data acquiring film edge sensor related
from the film edge sensor.
2812 8-C ESN
personnel.
data files.
After printing, acquire the file.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Failed in data write when creating the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
663 Data write failure
film edge sensor related data file. 1. Re-install the software.
2813 FFFF ESN
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Value of the PLL initial value data
PLL initial value illegal the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
664 data acquisition
received from the SCN unit during
1. Re-install the software.
2814 0 ESN
personnel.
system start was 0.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Value of the PLL current value data
PLL current value the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
665 illegal data acquisition
received from the SCN unit during
1. Re-install the software.
2815 0 ESN
personnel.
system start was 0.
2. Replace the CF.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Failed in opening the file when
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
666 File open failure creating film edge sensor related
1. Re-install the software.
2816 FFFF ESN
personnel.
data file.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-45
MT-46
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Film is not conveyed to the correct position,
malfunction of the film edge sensor LED,
malfunction of the film edge sensor, malfunction of
the SND board.
1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor
Film edge sensor The film edge sensor read value monitoring.
Contact the Fujifilm service
667 acquired value data (data) was abnormal (outside 2. If operations are still unstable after the above, 2819 8-B ESN
personnel.
error range). replace the film edge sensor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
4. If the problem still persists, check the
mechanism if film conveyance is carried out
properly.
Film edge sensor has not returned to home
position.
Or malfunction of film edge sensor LED, film edge
Film edge sensor Value was abnormal (outside sensor, SND board.
acquisition value data range) in the home position check 1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor Contact the Fujifilm service
668 error (Pre-reading before film edge sensor data monitoring.
2820 8-B ESN
personnel.
home position check) reading. 2. If operations are still unstable after the above,
replace the film edge sensor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Scanner control system related
external file access error
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
• File read error
Scanner control the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
680 system file error
• File write error
1. Re-install the software.
0501 FFFF SCN
personnel.
• File conversion error
2. Replace the CF.
• File line specification error
• File column specification error
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Scanner control driver Failed in scanner control driver the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
681 setup error setup when system was started up. 1. Re-install the software.
0504 FFFF SCN
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-46
MT-47
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Detected frame memory error the PRN board. Contact the Fujifilm service
682 Frame memory error
during memory diagnosis. 1. Re-install the software.
0505 FFFF SCN
personnel.
2. Replace the PRN board.
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
Detected line memory error during the PRN board. Contact the Fujifilm service
683 Line memory error
memory diagnosis. 1. Re-install the software.
0506 FFFF SCN
personnel.
2. Replace the PRN board.
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-
Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
Detected LD error for three times
following. Contact the Fujifilm service
684 LD error continuously during scanner
1. Check and replace the wiring connector
0512 FFFF SCN
personnel.
initialization diagnosis.
between the scanner unit and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-
Detected starting point detection Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
starting point detection error for three times continuously following. Contact the Fujifilm service
685 error during scanner initialization 1. Check and replace the wiring connector
0513 FFFF SCN
personnel.
diagnosis. between the scanner unit and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-
Detected leading edge detection Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
Leading edge error for three times continuously following. Contact the Fujifilm service
686 detection error during scanner initialization 1. Check and replace the wiring connector
0514 FFFF SCN
personnel.
diagnosis. between the scanner unit and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-47
MT-48
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Open the upper front cover, and remove the
jammed film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
perform mechanism adjustments.
SD2, MD1, ME1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
Leading edge Failed in detecting film leading Contact the Fujifilm service
687 detection timeout edge during recording.
board. 0515 FFFF SCN
personnel.
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-
Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
following.
1. Check and replace the wiring connector
between the scanner unit and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Open the upper front cover, and remove the
jammed film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
perform mechanism adjustments.
SD2, MD1, ME1
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
Image recording Failed in detecting image recording Contact the Fujifilm service
688 completion timeout completion during recording.
board. 0516 FFFF SCN
personnel.
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-
Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
following.
1. Check and replace the wiring connector
between the scanner unit and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-48
MT-49
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-
Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
Failed in setting of leading edge
Leading edge search following. Contact the Fujifilm service
689 power setting error
search power.
1. Check and replace the wiring connector
0517 FFFF SCN
personnel.
(Laser amount fault)
between the scanner unit and PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
Malfunction of the PRN board.
PRN board fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
690 disconnection
PRN board fuse disconnection Perform the following. 0518 FFFF SCN
personnel.
1. Check and replace the PRN board fuse.
Main scanning width Contact the Fujifilm service
691 adjustment error
Input number of PLL value is illegal. Re-enter PLL value. 1521 FFFF SCN
personnel.
Scanning position Input number of start point pixels is Contact the Fujifilm service
692 adjustment error illegal.
Re-enter the start point pixels. 1523 FFFF SCN
personnel.
Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the
PDM task panel driver PDM task panel driver initialization Contact the Fujifilm service
695 initialization error error
conditions. If no improvements are seen, replace 0701 arbitrary value PNL
personnel.
the CF.
PNL task setting Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the
PNL task setting information file Contact the Fujifilm service
696 information file read
read error
conditions. If no improvements are seen, replace 2701 arbitrary value PNL
personnel.
error the CF.
PNL task setting Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the
PNL task setting information file Contact the Fujifilm service
697 information file
description error
conditions. If no improvements are seen, replace 2705 arbitrary value PNL
personnel.
description error the CF.
Setup error of sensor driver, FPMC
driver
Error caused by software bug and incorrect Contact the Fujifilm service
700 Device set error • FPMC time monitoring setting
settings which essentially does not occur.
02FF 2-D-1 FLH
personnel.
error
• Message ID specification error
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-49
MT-50
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Conveyance system related
external file access error
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
• File read error
Conveyance system the CF, inappropriate data, or insufficient data. Contact the Fujifilm service
701 file error
• File write error
1. Re-install the software.
0201 2-B-1 FLH
personnel.
• File conversion error
2. Replace the CF.
• File line specification error
• File column specification error
Error caused by software bug and incorrect Contact the Fujifilm service
702 FPMC error (At start) FPMC motor drive failure
control timing which essentially does not occur.
3202 2-C-1 FLH
personnel.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F08).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and
Power supply fuse Disconnection of power supply fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
703 (F08) disconnection (F08).
mechanism adjustments 0215 2-A-5 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F06).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and
Power supply fuse Disconnection of power supply fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
704 (F06) disconnection (F06).
mechanism adjustments 2216 2-A-5 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F07).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and
Power supply fuse Disconnection of power supply fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
705 (F07) disconnection (F07).
mechanism adjustments 2217 2-A-5 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F015).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and
Power supply fuse Disconnection of power supply fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
706 (F01) disconnection (F01).
mechanism adjustments 0219 2-A-5 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F02).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and
Power supply fuse Disconnection of power supply fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
707 (F02) disconnection (F02).
mechanism adjustments 0220 2-A-5 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-50
MT-51
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F03).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and
Power supply fuse Disconnection of power supply fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
708 (F03) disconnection (F03).
mechanism adjustments 0221 2-A-5 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F04).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and
Power supply fuse Disconnection of power supply fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
709 (F04) disconnection (F04).
mechanism adjustments 0222 2-A-5 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F05).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and
Power supply fuse Disconnection of power supply fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
710 (F05) disconnection (F05).
mechanism adjustments 0223 2-A-5 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
Malfunction of SA2 sensor or malfunction of SA2
port of SND board.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Attempted to check the tray open/
Tray detection sensor perform mechanism adjustments. Contact the Fujifilm service
711 error
close state in initialization and
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
0224 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
removal, but failed.
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of SA1 sensor or malfunction of SA1
port of SND board.
Attempted to check whether 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Tray shutter detection the tray shutter is present in perform mechanism adjustments. Contact the Fujifilm service
712 sensor error initialization and removal, but 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
0226 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
failed. motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-51
MT-52
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SA3 sensor, or SOLA1
solenoid.
Or malfunction of the SA3 port of the SND board,
or malfunction of SOLA1.
Attempted to open the tray, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
713 Tray lock release error
SA3 did not become OPEN. perform mechanism adjustments.
0232 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
Attempted to deviate the removal
controller.
Tray removal unit HP arm from HP (home position) in
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
714 deviation detection initialization, but SB1 does not
perform mechanism adjustments.
2236 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
error become OPEN.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Currently retrying)
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
Attempted to deviate the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
arm from HP (home position) in controller.
Tray removal unit HP
initialization, but SB1 does not 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
715 deviation detection
become OPEN. perform mechanism adjustments. 0237 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
error
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-52
MT-53
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
Attempted to return the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
controller.
arm to HP (home position) in
Tray removal unit HP 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
716 return detection error
initialization, but SB11 does not
perform mechanism adjustments. 2238 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Currently retrying) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
Attempted to return the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
controller.
arm to HP (home position) in
Tray removal unit HP 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
717 return detection error
initialization, but SB11 does not
perform mechanism adjustments. 0239 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Retryover) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
Attempted to set grip roller to HP controller.
Grip HP detection (home position) in initialization, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
718 error SD4 does not become OPEN. perform mechanism adjustments. 2244 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
Attempted to set grip roller to HP controller.
Grip HP detection (home position) in initialization, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
719 error SD4 does not become OPEN. perform mechanism adjustments. 0245 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-53
MT-54
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port
Attempted to set grip roller from HP of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
controller.
(home position) to gripping position
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
720 Grip detection error in initialization, but SD4 does not
perform mechanism adjustments. 2246 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Currently retrying) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port
Attempted to set grip roller from HP of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
controller.
(home position) to gripping position
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
721 Grip detection error in initialization, but SD4 does not
perform mechanism adjustments. 0247 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Retryover) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port
Attempted to set stopper plate from of the SND board, or malfunction of the SOLD1.
stop position to release position 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Stopper plate release Contact the Fujifilm service
722 detection error
in initialization, but SD3 does not perform mechanism adjustments. 2248 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
become CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
(Currently retrying) solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port
Attempted to set stopper plate from of the SND board, or malfunction of the SOLD1.
stop position to release position 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Stopper plate release Contact the Fujifilm service
723 detection error
in initialization, but SD3 does not perform mechanism adjustments. 0249 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
become CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
(Retryover) solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-54
MT-55
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port
Attempted to set stopper plate from of the SND board, or malfunction of the SOLD1.
release position to stop position 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Stopper plate Contact the Fujifilm service
724 detection error
in initialization, but SD3 does not perform mechanism adjustments. 2250 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
become OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
(Currently retrying) solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port
Attempted to set stopper plate from of the SND board, or malfunction of the SOLD1.
release position to stop position 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Stopper plate Contact the Fujifilm service
725 detection error
in initialization, but SD3 does not perform mechanism adjustments. 0251 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
become OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
(Retryover) solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Set film trays or check files.
All film trays not- Error when all film trays were set 1. Using the PC-Utility, check settings of film Contact the Fujifilm service
726 mounted error as unmounted used. 0253 FFFF FLH
personnel.
2. If no problem, check the files.
Malfunction of the SB2 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB2 port
Attempted to lower the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
arm from upper dead point detection controller.
Tray film surface position to surface detection 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
727 detection error position in removal, but SB12 does perform mechanism adjustments. 2258 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
not become CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Currently retrying) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-55
MT-56
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SB2 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB2 port
Attempted to lower the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
arm from upper dead point detection controller.
Tray film surface position to surface detection 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
728 detection error position in removal, but SB12 does perform mechanism adjustments. 0259 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
not become CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Retryover) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SB2 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB2 port
Attempted to lower the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
arm from surface detection position controller.
Tray film suction to suction detection position in 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
729 detection error removal, but SB2 does not become perform mechanism adjustments. 2262 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Currently retrying) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SB2 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB2 port
Attempted to lower the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
arm from surface detection position controller.
Tray film suction to suction detection position in 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
730 detection error removal, but SB2 does not become perform mechanism adjustments. 0263 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Retryover) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
Attempted to rise the removal arm of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
from upper dead point detection controller.
Tray removal unit HP position to HP (home position) in 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
731 rise detection error removal, but SB1 does not become perform mechanism adjustments. 2270 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Currently retrying) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-56
MT-57
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
Attempted to rise the removal arm of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
from upper dead point detection controller.
Tray removal unit HP position to HP (home position) in 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
732 rise detection error removal, but SB1 does not become perform mechanism adjustments. 0271 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Retryover) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
Attempted to deviate the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
controller.
Tray removal unit HP arm from HP (home position) after
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
733 deviation detection removal operation, but SB11 does
perform mechanism adjustments. 2274 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
error not become OPEN.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Currently retrying) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
Attempted to deviate the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
controller.
Tray removal unit HP arm from HP (home position) after
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
734 deviation detection removal operation, but SB11 does
perform mechanism adjustments. 0275 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
error not become OPEN.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Retryover) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
Attempted to return the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
controller.
arm to HP (home position) after
Tray removal unit HP 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
735 return detection error
removal operation, but SB1 does
perform mechanism adjustments. 2276 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
not become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Currently retrying) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-57
MT-58
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
Attempted to return the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
controller.
arm to HP (home position) after
Tray removal unit HP 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
736 return detection error
removal operation, but SB1 does
perform mechanism adjustments. 0277 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
not become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Retryover) motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
controller.
Although the grip roller is in the HP
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
737 Grip HP absent error (home position) state, but SD4 is
perform mechanism adjustments. 2282 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
already closed.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
controller.
Although the grip roller is in the
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
738 Grip absent error gripping state, but SD4 is already
perform mechanism adjustments. 2283 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
open.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
controller.
Attempted to set grip roller to HP
Grip HP detection 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
739 error
(home position) in printing, but SD4
perform mechanism adjustments. 2284 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
does not become OPEN.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-58
MT-59
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
Attempted to set grip roller to HP controller.
Grip HP detection (home position) while checking the 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
740 error gripping operation using PC-Utility, perform mechanism adjustments.
0285 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
but SD4 does not become OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
Attempted to set grip roller from controller.
HP (home position) to gripping 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
741 Grip detection error
position in printing, but SD4 does perform mechanism adjustments.
2286 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
not become CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
Attempted to set grip roller from
controller.
HP (home position) to gripping
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
742 Grip detection error position while checking the grip-
perform mechanism adjustments.
0287 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
ping operation using PC-Utility, but
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
SD4 does not become CLOSE.
motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-59
MT-60
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the SOLD1.
Attempted to set stopper plate from
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Stopper plate release stop position to release position in Contact the Fujifilm service
743 detection error printing, but SD3 does not become
perform mechanism adjustments. 2288 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
CLOSE.
solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the SOLD1.
Attempted to set stopper plate from
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Stopper plate release position to stop position in Contact the Fujifilm service
744 detection error printing, but SD3 does not become
perform mechanism adjustments. 2289 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
OPEN.
solenoid.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Film dropped during removal.
Or malfunction of SD1 sensor or MB2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB2
At completion of removal process, controller.
Tray conveyor unit
did not detect normal SD1 CLOSE 1. Check if film has dropped. Contact the Fujifilm service
745 entrance detection
(film leading edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensor, motor, and
2290 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
error
(Currently retrying) perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
A sub-scanning speed correction The thermistor in the recording section is not in
calculation was performed based stable operation.
Sub-scanning speed
on the film recording section Or the machine temperature fluctuates greatly. Contact the Fujifilm service
746 correction calculation
temperature before recording, but 1. Check the recording section thermistor.
22D5 2-F-4 FLH
personnel.
error
the result is out of tolerance range 2. Collect the internal temperature data.
of speed. 3. Review the correction calculation.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-60
MT-61
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
Malfunction of the SND board.
Failed in driving motor due to 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Tray removal unit Contact the Fujifilm service
747 motor drive error
muting of MB1 with initialization of perform mechanism adjustments. 22E2 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
removal unit. 2. If the problem still persists, replace SND
board.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-61
MT-62
4. ACQUIRING ART-PC LOGS
When ART-PC related problems occur, acquire ART-PC logs.
<REMARKS>
The “ART-PC” folder is hidden.
1. Open Internet Explorer, enter the following path directly at the address
area, and press the [ENTER] key to open.
l Windows Vista
C:\ProgramData\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC
l Windows XP
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC
2. Acquire both “ART-PC.log” and “ART-PC_old.log”.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-62
MT-63
BLANK PAGE
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-63
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)
(DRYPIX 6000)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
MC-1
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, <INSTRUCTIONS>
• The screws painted in yellow must be adjusted after the installation of parts.
REPLACEMENTS, AND When installing parts, follow the check/adjustment procedure provided.
• When removing the covers, insert shutter into the film tray to prevent
ADJUSTMENTS exposure of film to light.
• Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power
This chapter does not describe parts which require no special note or adjustments in cable and additional protective ground wire connections and by securing
removal and installation. the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and
For details on the removal of these parts, refer to the Service Parts List. retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to the original
Also follow the precautions below when performing inspections, replacements, and states upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to
adjustments of parts. the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service
manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly
WARNING secure the parts.
To prevent electrical shocks, be sure to turn OFF the power of this equipment
before starting work. <INSTRUCTIONS>
The diagrams in this manual display the CHECK and FIT ON icons where
necessary.
WARNING/CAUTION When removing/reinstalling, following these icons.
Observe the warnings and cautions described in “SAFETY PRECAUTION”. • CHECK icon:
{SAFETY PRECAUTION}
CHECK
CAUTION When reinstalling removed parts, this is indicated if reinstalling positions must
be checked or adjusted.
When servicing this equipment, insert the shutter into the film tray as necessary.
This symbol is shown in illustrations of parts removal procedures. Whenever
Servicing with the shutter removed may cause stray light to expose the film,
resulting in an image quality problem. this is shown, be sure to refer to “n CHECK/Adjusting procedure”.
Before performing the following works, ensure that the shutter is inserted.
• Removing the tray • FIT ON icon:
• Removing the sub-scanning unit
• Removing the PSU27A/PSU31B board assembly
• Removing the vertical conveyor unit
When installing parts, this is indicated if alignment to the boss is required.
However, this is not indicated on bosses used for enhancing assembly and
CAUTION preventing assembly accidents.
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards and optical units. Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause
damage to electronic parts on the boards and optical units.
• Never remove the screws painted in red.
• Never remove the upper cover of the optical unit.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-1
MC-2
1. COVERS 1.2 Lower Rear Cover
Removing Procedure
n
1.1 Upper Rear Cover
(1) Remove the upper rear cover.
n Removing Procedure {MC:1.1_Upper Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the lower rear cover.
(1) Insert the shutter into the film tray.
(2) Remove the upper rear cover.
2-TP3x6
#2
2-TP3x6
Cover
DRY60_F0003E.ai #2 Cover
LAN Cable
n Reinstalling Procedure #1
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Clamp
DRY60_F0006E.ai
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-2
MC-3
1.3 Upper Left Cover (3) Remove the upper left cover.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the upper rear cover.
{MC:1.1_Upper Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the power cable.
DETAIL A #1
Screw
5-TP3x6
Cover
A #2 DRY60_F0005E.ai
Power cable
n Reinstalling Procedure
Additional protective Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
grounding cable
DRY60_F0004E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-3
MC-4
1.4 Lower Left Cover 1.5 Upper Right Cover
Removing Procedure
n Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the lower rear cover. (1) Insert the shutter into the film tray.
{MC:1.2_Lower Rear Cover} (2) Open the front cover.
(2) Remove the upper left cover. (3) Open the lower right cover.
{MC:1.3_Upper Left Cover}
(4) Remove the upper right cover.
(3) Remove the lower left cover.
#1
Special
screw
Upper right
cover
B
A
DETAIL A #2 DETAIL B #2
2-TP3x6 TP3x6 TP3x6
Cover
DRY60_F0007E.ai
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
DRY60_F0008E.ai
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-4
MC-5
1.6 Lower Right Cover 1.7 Upper Film Loading Unit Cover
Removing Procedure
n Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the lower rear cover. (1) Remove the upper film tray.
{MC:1.2_Lower Rear Cover} {MC:3.1_Upper Film Tray}
(2) Remove the lower right cover. (2) Open the front cover.
DETAIL A #2 (3) Remove the upper film loading unit cover.
2-TP3x6
Blacket
#1
Special
screw
Cover #1
Cover
3-TP3x6 DRY60_F0010E.ai
DRY60_F0009E.ai
n Reinstalling Procedure
n Reinstalling Procedure Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-5
MC-6
1.8 Lower Film Loading Unit Cover 1.9 Upper Cover
Removing Procedure
n Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the upper film loading unit cover. (1) Remove the upper left cover.
{MC:1.7_Upper Film Loading Unit Cover} {MC:1.3_Upper left Cover}
(2) Remove the lower film tray. (2) Open the front cover.
{MC:3.2_Lower Film Tray} (3) Open the upper right cover.
(3) Remove the lower film loading unit cover. (4) Remove the upper cover.
6-TP3x6 Cover
#1
Cover
3-TP3x6 DRY60_F0011E.ai
n Reinstalling Procedure DRY60_F0012E.ai
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-6
MC-7
2. FRAME <NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal), press in the unlocking latch
located on the connector as shown below.
2.1 Interlock Switch Assembly Unlocking latch
Faston terminal
Removing Procedure
n DRY60_F0040E.ai
(1) Remove the upper cover.
n Reinstalling Procedure
{MC:1.9_Upper Cover}
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
(2) Remove the interlock switch assembly (SK1/SK2).
<NOTE>
#1
2-TP3x6 If the interlock switch has been removed from the interlock switch assembly
Interlock switch assembly (SK1/SK2), refer to “n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure” and adjust the attaching
position.
{n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure}
#2
SK2-NC
#2
SK1-COM
DRY60_F0039E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-7
MC-8
n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure (2) Close the upper right cover and front cover.
(1) Temporarily secure the interlock switch assembly (SK1/SK2). (3) Adjust the attached position of the interlock switch assembly (SK1/
SK2).
<NOTE>
<NOTE>
Move the interlock switch assembly (SK1/SK2) to the very back and temporarily
secure it. • After confirming the “click” sound of the interlock switch, move it by another 1
mm towards the front of the equipment.
• When moving the interlock switch assembly (SK1/SK2) to the front at #2 in the
following figure, move it horizontally.
#3
[Sounds]
Click
1mm
#4
[Move by 1mm]
#1 #2 Interlock switch assembly
Interlock switch assembly 2-TP3x6 #2 #1
(SK1/SK2) [Move] [Loosen]
DRY60_F0041E ai
Interlock switch 2-TP3x6
assembly (SK1/SK2) #5
[Secure]
2-TP3x6
DRY60_F0042E.ai
(4) Open and close the front cover, and check that the interlock switch
turns ON/OFF from the sounds made.
(5) Using the PC Utility, check that the interlock function is working
normally.
{MU:2.4 [10-9]_Inter Lock Check}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-8
MC-9
2.2 Interlock Switch (SK3) Assembly <NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal), press in the unlocking latch
located on the connector as shown below.
Removing Procedure
n
Unlocking latch
(1) Remove the lower rear cover. Faston terminal
{MC:1.2_Lower Rear Cover} DRY60_F0040E.ai
(2) Open the lower right cover.
(3) Remove the interlock switch (SK3) assembly. n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
DETAIL A
#2 #1
2-TP3x6 Clamp
A SK3 assembly Cable
#3
SK3-COM
SK3 assembly
#4
SK3-NC DRY60_F0033E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-9
MC-10
3. FILM LOADING UNIT <NOTE>
The manual release arm can be operated with moderate force, and may damage
if pushed in too strongly or pushed with a screwdriver.
3.1 Upper Film Tray
DETAIL A
Removing Procedure
n
<NOTE>
When pulling out the film tray from the equipment, insert the shutter into the film tray
to prevent exposure of film to light.
(1) Insert the shutter into the upper film tray.
(2) Remove the upper left cover.
{MC:1.3_Upper Left Cover}
(3) Remove the film tray. #2
Arm
<REMARKS>
The length from the hole for inserting a screwdriver to the manual release arm is
#3
120 mm horizontally and 15 mm vertically. A Film tray
#1
Cap
120mm
DRY60_F0044E.ai
15mm Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removal.
Note that there is no need to move the manual release arm with a screwdriver, simply
DRY60_F0043.ai push in the film tray.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-10
MC-11
3.2 Lower Film Tray <NOTE>
The manual release arm can be operated with moderate force, and may damage
if pushed in too strongly or pushed with a screwdriver.
Removing Procedure
n
<NOTE> DETAIL A
When pulling out the film tray from the equipment, insert the shutter into the film tray
to prevent exposure of film to light.
(1) Insert the shutter into the lower film tray.
(2) Remove the lower left cover.
{MC:1.4_Lower Left Cover}
(3) Remove the film tray.
<REMARKS>
The length from the hole for inserting a screwdriver to the manual release arm is
120 mm horizontally and 15 mm vertically. #2
Arm
A
#3
Film tray
120mm
15mm
#1
Cap
DRY60_F0043.ai
DRY60_F0045E.ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removal.
Note that there is no need to move the manual release arm with a screwdriver, simply
push in the film tray.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-11
MC-12
3.3 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit (4) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
#1 #1
<REMARKS> CN3/CN13 CN11/CN21
Each of the upper and lower sections of this equipment has its own removal unit/film
loading unit.
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the
relevant procedure as necessary.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the film tray.
{MC:3.1_Upper Film Tray}
#1 #1
{MC:3.2_Lower Film Tray}
CN6/CN14 CN8/CN15
(2) Remove the film loading unit cover.
{MC:1.7_Upper Film Loading Unit Cover}
{MC:1.8_Lower Film Loading Unit Cover}
(3) Move the vertical conveyor unit drive transmission gear assembly.
#2
[Move]
Vertical conveyance #2
unit drive transmission 2-TP3x6
gear assembly
#1 Removal unit/Film loading unit
[Loosen] Fixing screw
#3
[Tighten] Fixing screw DRY60_F0047E.ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
DRY60_F0046E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-12
MC-13
Engagement Adjustment of Vertical Conveyance Unit Drive
n
Transmission Gear
When the bracket of the vertical conveyance unit drive transmission gear has been
removed or when the fixing screws have been loosened, follow the steps below to
adjust the engagement of the vertical conveyance unit drive transmission gear.
<REMARKS>
The fixing screws (TP3x6) of the bracket of the vertical conveyance unit drive
transmission gear are painted in yellow.
(1) Loosen the fixing screws of the vertical conveyance unit drive
transmission gear.
(2) Align the flanges of the vertical conveyance unit drive transmission
gear and vertical conveyance roller gear, and secure the fixing screws.
#2
[Align] Flange
Vertical conveyance
roller gear flange
Vertical conveyance
unit drive transmission
gear flange
#1
[Loosen] Fixing screw
#3
[Tighten] Fixing screw
DRY60_F0048E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-13
MC-14
3.4 Tray Interlock Switch Assembly (SA12/ Reinstalling Procedure
n
SA22) (1) Temporarily secure the tray interlock switch assembly (SA12/SA22).
<REMARKS> <NOTE>
Each of the upper and lower sections of this equipment has its own tray interlock Temporarily secure with the tray interlock switch assembly (SA12/SA22) moved
switch assembly (SA12/SA22). to the very end.
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names #2
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the [Tighten]
relevant procedure as necessary. BR3x8
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
(2) Remove the tray interlock switch assembly (SA12/SA22).
#1 #1
COM NC #2
BR3x8
#1
[Move]
Switch assembly Switch assembly
(SA12/SA22) (SA12/SA22)
DRY60_F0050E.ai
(2) Insert the film tray into the film loading unit.
<NOTE>
• If the switch clicks with a sound when pushing in the tray, perform steps (3) to (6).
• If it does not click with a sound, perform only step (8).
DRY60_F0049E.ai
<NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal), press in the unlocking latch
located on the connector as shown below.
Unlocking latch
Faston terminal
DRY60_F0040E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-14
MC-15
(3) At the point when the switch clicks with a sound, measure the length (5) Measure the length from the rear end of the film tray to the film loading
from the rear end of the film tray to the film loading unit frame (A). unit frame again (B).
[Measure] (A) [Measure] (B)
DRY60_F0051E.ai DRY60_F0052E.ai
(4) Push in the film tray and check that it locks, and then pull out the tray. (6) Perform one of the following procedure using the value obtained by
subtracting (B) from the measured value (A).
<REMARKS>
• When above 0mm : Step (7)
The film tray may shake slightly even when locked. To improve the precision of • When value is negative : Step (8)
attaching the tray interlock switch (SA12/SA22), pull out the film tray towards the
front of the equipment in the locked state, and then proceed to the next step.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-15
MC-16
(7) Push the tray interlock switch assembly (SA12/SA22) in the arrow (8) Push the tray interlock switch assembly (SA12/SA22) in the arrow
direction as shown in the following figure, and tighten the screw direction as shown in the following figure, and tighten the screw
firmly. firmly.
<NOTE> <NOTE>
If the value obtained by subtracting (B) from the measured value (A) in step (6) is Push the tray interlock switch in the arrow direction until a "click" sound is heard.
as follows, completely tighten the screw at the indicated position. Then, push it further by another 2 mm, and then tighten the screw.
• 0 mm :
Move the film detection switch by 2mm in the arrow direction, and #4
completely tighten the screw. [Tighten]
• +1 mm : BR3x8
Move the film detection switch by 1 mm in the arrow direction, and
completely tighten the screw. #2
Clicks [Sound]
• +2 mm :
Completely tighten the screw there. 2mm
#2
[Tighten]
BR3x8
#1
[Push]
Distance moved Switch assembly
(SA12/SA22)
#3
[Push in 2 mm]
DRY60_F0054E.ai
#1
[Push]
Switch assembly
(SA12/SA22)
DRY60_F0053E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-16
MC-17
n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
With the film tray locked, check that:
• There is still extra actuator stroke when the film tray is pushed.
• The switch does not "click" when the film tray is pulled.
<NOTE>
When connecting the connectors (faston terminal), ensure that they are facing as
shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminals will be hard to disconnect.
Faston terminal Unlocking latch NC
COM
Connect the faston terminals
with the unlocking latch facing forward. DRY60_F0055E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-17
MC-18
3.5 Tray Lock Assembly <NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal), press in the unlocking latch
<REMARKS> located on the connector as shown below.
Each of the removal units/film loading units for the upper and lower sections of this Unlocking latch
equipment has its own tray lock assembly. Faston terminal
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the
DRY60_F0040E.ai
relevant procedure as necessary.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Removing Procedure
n Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
(1) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
When connecting the connectors (faston terminal), ensure that they are facing as
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminals will be hard to disconnect.
(2) Remove the tray lock assembly.
#1
SOLA 1/2 #1
NC
#1
COM
Faston terminal Unlocking latch NC
Tray lock assembly
COM
#2
2-DT3x6
Connect the faston terminals
with the unlocking latch facing forward. DRY60_F0055E.ai
DRY60_F0056E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-18
MC-19
3.6 Shutter Lock Mechanism Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removal procedure.
Removing Procedure
n <REMARKS>
(1) Remove the relevant film tray. This shutter lock mechanism works to lock in the shutter when it is inserted to pull out
the tray by moving the pin into the hole on the shutter.
{MC:3.1_Upper Film Tray} Released state Locked state
{MC:3.2_Lower Film Tray} Stay Hole Shutter
(2) Remove the shutter lock mechanism.
Film tray
Pin
DRY60_F0058E.ai
#1
2-Ps3x8
Shutter lock mechanism
DRY60_F0057E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-19
MC-20
3.7 Squeezing Roller Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<REMARKS>
Each of the removal units/film loading units for the upper and lower sections of this
equipment has its own squeezing roller.
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the
relevant procedure as necessary.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
<NOTE>
When removing the squeezing roller, be sure to not drop or lose the roller.
(2) Remove the squeezing roller.
#2
Blacket
#1
DT3x6
Squeezing roller DRY60_F0059E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-20
MC-21
3.8 Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor (3) Remove the film pack/shutter detection sensor assembly (SA11/SA21).
Assembly (SA11/SA21)
<REMARKS>
Each of the removal units/film loading units for the upper and lower sections of this
equipment has its own film pack/shutter detection sensor assembly (SA11/SA21).
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the
relevant procedure as necessary.
Removing Procedure
n A
(1) Remove the film tray.
{MC:3.1_Upper Film Tray} A
{MC:3.2_Lower Film Tray}
(2) Remove the film loading unit cover.
{MC:1.7_Upper Film Loading Unit Cover} DETAIL A
{MC:1.8_Lower Film Loading Unit Cover}
#2
CN (SA11 / SA21)
Sensor assembly
#1
(SA11/SA21)
DT3x6
DRY60_F0060E ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-21
MC-22
3.9 BCR Assembly (SA16) (4) Remove the BCR Assembly (SA16).
#2
Removing Procedure
n TP3x6
(1) Remove the Lower rear cover.
{MC:1.4_Lower Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the upper removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
(3) Remove the lower removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
DETAIL A
#1
BCR1 DRY60_F0034.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-22
MC-23
<REMARKS>
Attaching position of BCR
<35x43/35x35 cm size> <26x36/25x30/20x25 cm size>
BCR Shield plate Shield plate BCR
DRY60_F0035E ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-23
MC-24
3.10 BCR Assembly (SA26) (3) Remove the Shield plate.
Removing Procedure
n
<REMARKS>
Attaching position of BCR
<35x43/35x35 cm size> <26x36/25x30/20x25 cm size>
Shield plate Shield plate
A
BCR
BCR
DETAIL A #1
2-TP3x6
Shield plate
DRY60_F0038E.ai
(1) Remove the Lower rear cover.
{MC:1.4_Lower Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the lower removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
DRY60_F0036E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-24
MC-25
(4) Remove the BCR Assembly (SA26). Reinstalling Procedure
n
#2 #1 Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
BCR2 Clamp
BCR
DETAIL A
#3
TP3x6
DRY60_F0037.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-25
MC-26
4. REMOVAL UNIT (3) Disconnect the connectors, and release the clamps.
<NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal), press in the unlocking latch
4.1 Removal Unit located on the connector as shown below.
Unlocking latch
<REMARKS> Faston terminal
Each of the upper and lower sections of this equipment has its own removal unit/film DRY60_F0040E.ai
loading unit.
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names #1 #1
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the SA2/ SA2NC/ #1
relevant procedure as necessary. NC
COM SOLA1/2
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
(2) Remove the removal exit cover.
Removal unit/Film loading unit
#1 #2
5-TP3x6 Clamp
#1
CN6-P
Cover DRY60_F0062E.ai
DRY60_F0061E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-26
MC-27
(4) Remove the removal unit. Reinstalling Procedure
n
<NOTE> Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
• Use caution not to deform the bottom of the removal unit when removing and <NOTE>
placing it on the table. • When reinstalling the removal unit, tighten the screws in the order shown below.
• When servicing the removal unit, ensure that it is placed on the film loading Tightening the screws in the wrong order may lead to troubles such as film jams.
unit. #2
Servicing the removal unit directly on the table may deform the bottom of the
removal unit.
Removai unit
#1
5-DT3x6
Film loading unit
#1 DRY60_F0064.ai
• When connecting the connectors (faston terminal), ensure that they are facing as
shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminals will be hard to disconnect.
DRY60_F0063E.ai
Faston terminal Unlocking latch NC
COM
Connect the faston terminals
with the unlocking latch facing forward. DRY60_F0055E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-27
MC-28
4.2 Suction Cup Arm (3) Remove the suction cup arm.
#1
<REMARKS> Clamp
Each of the removal units/film loading units for the upper and lower sections of this
equipment has its own suction cup arm. #2
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names SB12/SB22
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the
relevant procedure as necessary.
#3
4-DT3x6
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
(2) Move the suction cup arm. Suction cup arm
<REMARKS>
If the suction cup arm is at the home position, move it in the arrow direction. If
you attempt to remove the suction cup arm when it is at the home position, the
suction cup arm comes in contact with the auxiliary plate.
Suction cup arm
Auxiliary plate
DRY60_F0066E ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
DRY60_F0065E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-28
MC-29
4.3 Suction Cup Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the suction cup arm.
{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}
(2) Remove the suction cup.
#2
Suction cup
#1
Nozzle
DRY60_F0067E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-29
MC-30
4.4 Bellows (3) Remove the bellows.
Blacket
n Removing Procedure
(1) Remove the suction cup arm.
Bellows
{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}
(2) Remove the suction cup unit.
Seal
Spring
#1
2-E3
Plate
#2
2-E3
DRY60_F0069E ai
Suction cup unit
DRY60_F0068E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-30
MC-31
n Reinstalling Procedure nCHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Check for air leak by the following steps.
<INSTRUCTIONS> (1) Suction the film with the suction cup manually and check that the film
When reinstalling the bellows, follow the two precautions below: does not drop off for about 60 seconds.
• Insert the bracket into the second groove from the top of the bellows. (2) Press the suction cup arm against the film until the bottommost
• Leave a clearance of approximately 1.5 to 2.0 mm between the bellows and the position of the actuator for detection SB12/SB22 passes the SB12/
holder. SB22 detection point.
#1 #2
2nd groove [Lift]
[Press]
Bracket Suction cup arm Suction cup arm
Bellows
Clearance about 1.5 to 2.0 mm
Holder
DRY60_F0070E.ai
Film
Actuator Suction
16mm
Sense
point
SB12/SB22
DRY60_F0071E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-31
MC-32
4.5 Film Surface Detection Sensor Reinstalling Procedure
n
(SB12/SB22) Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<REMARKS>
Each of the removal units/film loading units for the upper and lower sections of this
equipment has its own film surface detection sensor (SB12/SB22).
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the
relevant procedure as necessary.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the suction cup arm.
{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}
(2) Remove the film surface detection sensor (SB12/SB22).
SB12/SB22
#1
DT3x6
DRY60_F0072.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-32
MC-33
4.6 Film Removing Motor (MB11/MB21) Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<REMARKS>
Each of the removal units/film loading units for the upper and lower sections of this
equipment has its own film removing motor (MB11/MB21).
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the
relevant procedure as necessary.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
(2) Remove the film removing motor (MB11/MB21).
MB11/MB21
#1
#2 MB11/MB21
3-TP4x8
DRY60_F0073 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-33
MC-34
4.7 Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB12/ Reinstalling Procedure
n
MB22) Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<REMARKS>
Each of the removal units/film loading units for the upper and lower sections of this
equipment has its own removal unit conveyance motor (MB12/MB22).
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the
relevant procedure as necessary.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
(2) Remove the removal unit conveyance motor (MB12/MB22).
MB12/MB22
#1
MB12/MB22
#2
2-TP3x6
DRY60_F0074.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-34
MC-35
4.8 Removal Drive Cam (Front side) (4) Remove the gear cover assembly (A).
<REMARKS>
Each of the removal units/film loading units for the upper and lower sections of this
equipment has its own removal drive cam.
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the
relevant procedure as necessary.
Removing Procedure
n #1
4-DT3x6
(1) Remove the removal unit.
{MC:4.1_Removal Unit}
(2) Move the suction cup arm to the home position.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Gear cover assembly (A)
Move the suction cup arm to the home position in advance. If the suction cup arm DRY60_F0075E ai
assembly is not at the home position during the work, a phase shift occurs.
(3) Remove the removal unit conveyance motor (MB12/MB22).
{MC:4.7_Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB12/MB22)}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-35
MC-36
(5) Remove the link gear and idle gear. (6) Remove the removal drive cam (front side) together with the crank.
Suction cup arm assembly
#1
#1 CN8-P/
CN3-P/ CN15-P
CN13-P
#1
CN11-P/
CN21-P
Idle gear
Removal drive cam Crank
(front side)
#5
5-DT3x6
Bearing #1
E3
#1 Crank
Link gear
#4 E3
#2
E6 Clamp Removal drive cam
(front side)
DRY60_F0077Ｅ.ai
Gear cover #3
assembly (B) Exit roller gear
E5 DRY60_F0076E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-36
MC-37
Reinstalling Procedure
n (4) Reinstall the link gear to the gear cover assembly (B).
<NOTE>
(1) Move the suction cup arm to the home position.
When reinstalling the link gear, ensure that the two holes on the link gear are
<REMARKS> aligned at the bottom of the peeping holes on the gear cover assembly (B) as
When moving the suction cup arm, rotate the shaft by a slotted screwdriver as shown below.
shown in the following figure. Link gear
Hole
Gear cover assembly (B)
DRY60_F0079.ai DRY60_F0078E.ai
(2) Reinstall the removal drive cam (front side) together with the crank.
(3) Reinstall the idle gear to the shaft.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-37
MC-38
(5) Insert the pins into the two holes on link gear, adjust the phase of the (6) Pull out the pin, and check that the link gear is attached correctly.
removal drive cam, and reinstall the gear cover assembly (B).
<NOTE>
<NOTE>
The two holes on link gear should be aligned to the holes on the removal drive
• Do not install the bearing of the idle gear at this time. cam.
• The pins to be used must not be extremely thin or easy to deform and should
fit the holes on the gear as closely as possible.
Gear cover assembly (B)
#2
5-DT3x6
long hole ( mark)
Link gear
#1
Pin
DRY60_F0080E.ai
Removal
drive cam
Hole position
DRY60_F0081E.ai
<REMARKS>
Any gear in position of the removal drive cam can be checked by visually
checking the mark on the cam from the long hole of the link gear.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-38
MC-39
(7) If with the phases of the front removal drive cam and that of the rear (8) Reinstall the bearing to the shaft of idle gear.
removal drive cam corresponding, disengage idle gear, align the rib
position of idle gear and that of link gear, and adjust the front and rear (9) Reinstall the exit roller gear.
phases. (10) Reinstall the gear cover assembly (A).
#2
(11) Reinstall the removal unit conveyance motor (MB12/MB22).
Idle gear
CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
#1
Shaft After reinstalling the removal drive cam, check that the suction cup arm moves
smoothly. Also visually check that the suction cup arm is horizontal.
#3
<NOTE>
Shaft
After checking the operation, move the suction cup arm to the home position.
Idle gear Link gear
Rib position
DRY60_F0150 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-39
MC-40
4.9 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection (3) Remove the suction cup arm HP detection sensor (SB11/SB21).
#1
Sensor (SB11/SB21) SB11/SB21 #2
SB11/SB21
<REMARKS>
Each of the upper and lower sections of this equipment has its own suction cup arm
HP detection sensor (SB11/SB21).
Although this section describes the procedure common to them, the part/unit names
and the procedures to be referred to may be different. In that case, refer to the
relevant procedure as necessary.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
(2) Move the suction cup arm from the home position.
<REMARKS>
If the suction cup arm is at the home position, move it in the arrow direction. If
you attempt to remove the suction cup arm when it is at the home position, the
suction cup arm comes in contact with the auxiliary plate.
Suction cup arm
Auxiliary plate DRY60_F0082 ai
DRY60_F0065E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-40
MC-41
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
If the cable in the removal unit is loose, pull it outside slightly without disconnecting
the connector, and secure with the clamp.
[Pull out]
Cable
DRY60_F0083E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-41
MC-42
5. CONVEYOR UNIT (2) Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly.
#1 #1
SOLD1 CN7-J
5.1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the upper rear cover.
{MC:1.1_Upper Rear Cover} Conveyor unit exit assembly
(2) Open the front cover.
(3) Remove the belt cover.
#1 #2
CN10-J Gear
Cover
#1
2-TP4x8
DRY60_F0084E.ai
#3 Blacket
2-DT3x6
DRY60_F0085E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-42
MC-43
Reinstalling Procedure
n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Check that the hook of the rear gear is hooked onto the groove of the shaft.
<NOTE>
• When reinstalling the conveyor unit exit assembly, fit the boss on the bottom of the
conveyor unit exit assembly into the slot on the slide guide.
DRY60_F0086 ai
• When reinstalling the second gear from the front, push in the shaft for ease of work.
Shaft
DRY60_F0087E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-43
MC-44
5.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly.
{MC:5.1_Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly}
(2) Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.
#1
2-DT3x6
Roller assembly
#3
Actuator
#2
2-Ps3x8
DRY60_F0088E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-44
MC-45
5.3 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower) Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.
{MC:5.2_Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly}
(2) Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
#1 #2
Guide (lower) 2-Ps3x8 Arm
#3
[Release]
DRY60_F0089E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-45
MC-46
5.4 Stopper Assembly Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
{MC:5.3_Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)}
(2) Remove the stopper assembly.
Stopper assembly
#2
Stopper assembly
protrusion
#1
Actuator
DRY60_F0090E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-46
MC-47
5.5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1) Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
{MC:5.3_Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)}
(2) Remove the stopper solenoid (SOLD1).
#1
Actuator
#2
Stopper assembly
protrusion
A
DETAIL A
#4 #3
Ps3x8 CN (SOLD1)
SOLD1
DRY60_F0091E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-47
MC-48
5.6 Conveyor Unit Exit Roller (Lower) Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the stopper assembly.
{MC:5.4_Stopper Assembly}
(2) Remove the conveyor unit exit roller (lower).
Roller
Bearing
Bearing
#2
E6
#1
Gear
DRY60_F0092E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-48
MC-49
5.7 Film Edge Sensor (SD5) Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the stopper assembly.
{MC:5.4_Stopper Assembly}
(2) Remove the film edge sensor (SD5).
#1
Ps3x8 #4
E3
SD5 Assembly Arm
Encoder
#2
#5
CN (SD5)
2-B2x6
SD5
Spring
DRY60_F0093E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-49
MC-50
5.8 Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n Engagement Adjustment of Conveyor Unit Drive Transmission
n
(1) Open the front cover. Gear
(2) Open the upper right cover. When the bracket of the conveyor unit drive transmission gear has been removed
or when the fixing screws have been loosened, follow the steps below to adjust the
(3) Remove the upper conveyor unit open/close guide. engagement of the conveyor unit drive transmission gear.
Cleaning roller (1) Remove the upper rear cover.
(2) Obtain an appropriate backlash (clearance) between the turn roller
gears and the conveyor unit drive transmission gear shown in the
figure.
Conveyance unit
#1 / #3 Turn roller gear drive transmission
Guide gear
#2[Secure]
Backlash
#2
Arm
DRY60_F0094E.ai #1[Loosen]
#3[Tighten]
Fixing screw
DRY60_F0095E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-50
MC-51
5.9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the upper conveyor unit open/close guide.
{MC:5.8_Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide}
(2) Remove the conveyor unit turn roller.
#1 Bearing
Gear
Roller
#2
2-DT3x6
Bearing
Guide plate #3
E6
DRY60_F0096E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-51
MC-52
5.10 Film Conveyance Motor (MD1) (3) Remove the base.
#2
4-TP4x8
Removing Procedure
n Base
(1) Remove the scanner unit.
{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
(2) Turn over the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.
CAUTION
• The sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit is very heavy.When handling it, be
careful not drop or otherwise damage it.
• When turning over the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit upside down,
be careful not to apply load to the upper conveyor unit open/close guide or
not to let the upper conveyor unit open/close guide contact the floor.
Guide
Sub-scanning unit/
upper conveyor unit
Guide
Guide
#1
TP4x6 Grounding wire
DRY60_F0098E ai
Front view DRY60_F0097E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-52
MC-53
(4) Remove the film conveyance motor (MD1). Reinstalling Procedure
n
#1
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
CN (MD1)
MD1
#2
2-BR4x8
DRY60_F0099E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-53
MC-54
5.11 Conveyance Gear (2) Remove the spacer.
Check than the spacer comes out easily.
n Engagement Adjustment of the Conveyer Unit Exit Gear <REMARKS>
When the bracket of the conveyer unit exit gear has been removed or when the If the spacer does not come out easily, the gear engagement may be too tight.
fixing screws have been loosened, follow the steps below to perform engagement
adjustment of the conveyer unit exit gear. (3) After attaching the removed parts, power on the equipment.
(1) Perform engagement adjustment by inserting a 0.5 mm-thick spacer (4) Output the flat pattern.
between the conveyor unit exit gear and the conveyor unit exit
assembly gear. {MU:2.4 [6-4]_Flat Pattern}
<NOTE> (5) Check that there is no horizontal streak unevenness in 55mm pitch on
the output film.
The spacer must be inserted between the flanges of both gears.
<NOTE>
<REMARKS> The unevenness above is caused by tight gear engagement. If the unevenness
appears, perform the adjustment again.
The thickness of a 150mm steel ruler is 0.5mm.
#1[Loosen] Conveyer unit exit gear
#3[tighten] Fixing screw
Flange
#2
[Insert] Spacer Flange
Conveyer unit exit assembly gear
DRY60_F0100E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-54
MC-55
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT (4) Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.
{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide}
(5) Remove the upper right cover.
6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit {MC:1.5_Upper Right Cover}
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the upper rear cover.
{MC:1.1_Upper Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the upper film loading unit cover.
{MC:1.7_Upper Film Loading Unit Cover}
(3) Remove the belt cover.
Cover
#1
2-TP4x8
DRY60_F0101E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-55
MC-56
(6) Remove the stay. (7) Disengage the cable connectors from the backside of the sub-
scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.
#1 #1 #1
CN5-J CN1-J CN7-J
DETAIL A
#1
3-TP3x6
#1 #1 #1
CN9-J SOLD1 CN10-J
Stay Rear Side DRY60_F0103 ai
#2
3-TP3x6
Stay DRY60_F0104E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-56
MC-57
(8) Disengage the cable connectors from the right side of the sub-
scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.
#2 #2 #2 #2
LDD16A-CN1 LDD16A-CN3 LDD16A-CN9 LDD16A-CN7
#1
2-BR3x12
Connector cover
DRY60_F0105E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-57
MC-58
(9) Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit. #2 #1
2-TP4x8 TP4x8
CAUTION Washer
The sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit is very heavy.When handling it, be
careful not drop or otherwise damage it.
<NOTE>
When removing the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit, hold the portions
shown in the following figure.
When lifting up
When pushing
When drawing/
When pushing
DRY60_F0106E ai
<REMARKS>
Sub-scanning unit/
When removing the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit, move it along the upper conveyor unit DRY60_F0108E.ai
guide slots.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Guide holes
DRY60_F0107E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-58
MC-59
6.2 Flat belt (Front of the Machine) (2) Remove the jam removing handle.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the belt cover.
#1 Handle
Cover 2-TP3x6
DRY60_F0109E.ai
#1
2-TP4x8
DRY60_F0101E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-59
MC-60
(3) Remove the flat belt located on the front side of the equipment. Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
The flat belt has a front and back side.
When attaching it to the pulley, place the marked side out.
With mark
#1
Spring
#2
2-TP3x6 Tension arm Belt
Belt
DRY60_F0110E.ai
DRY60_F0112E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-60
MC-61
6.3 Sub-Scanning Unit Entrance Roller (3) Remove the pulley (right).
<REMARKS>
(1) Remove the flat belt located on the front side of the equipment.
When removing the pulley, use the pulley removing tool.
{MC:6.2_Flat belt (Front of the Machine} {SP:11_JIG}
(2) Remove the heat development unit entrance guide. By rotating the TP4x8, the pulley removing tool and pulley can be removed
together.
{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide}
The pulley removing tool is not required when reinstalling the pulley.
Pully
(Left)
Pully
#2 #1/#3 (Right)
Jig TP4x8
DRY60_F0111E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-61
MC-62
(4) Romove the sub-scanning unit entrance roller. Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
Rotate the jam removing handle and check that the sub-scanning unit entrance roller
rotates smoothly. Also check that the flat belt is not disconnected from the pulley.
Waveform washer
#1
TP4x8
Sub-scanning unit entrance roller
DRY60_F0114E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-62
MC-63
6.4 Sub-Scanning Unit Exit Roller (3) Remove the pulley (left).
<REMARKS>
(1) Remove the flat belt located on the front side of the equipment.
When removing the pulley, use the pulley removing tool.
{MC:6.2_Flat belt (Front of the Machine} {SP:11_JIG}
(2) Remove the heat development unit entrance guide. By rotating the TP4x8, the pulley removing tool and pulley can be removed
together.
{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide}
The pulley removing tool is not required when reinstalling the pulley.
Pully
#2 #1/#3 (Right)
Jig TP4x8
Pully
(Left)
DRY60_F0115E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-63
MC-64
(4) Romove the sub-scanning unit exit roller. Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
Rotate the jam removing handle and check that the sub-scanning unit exit roller
rotates smoothly. Also check that the flat belt is not disconnected from the pulley.
Waveform washer
#1
TP4x8
Sub-scanning unit exit roller
DRY60_F0116E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-64
MC-65
6.5 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1) (3) Remove the ME1 driver board.
#1 #1 #1
6.5.1 Removal/Reinstallation CN3 CN2 CN1
Removing Procedure
n
<NOTE>
When replacing the sub-scanning motor (ME1), also replace the ME1 driver board at
the same time.
#2
(1) Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit. 2-BR3x8
{MC:6.1_Sub-Scanning unit/Upper Conveyor Unit}
(2) Remove the sub-scanning motor (ME1).
ME1 Board
#1
Clamp
#2
CN
(ME1) Rear Side
#3 DRY60_F0118 ai
WP3x6
ME1
ME1
#4 #5 Mount
2-BR3x8 2-TP3x6 DRY60_F0117E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-65
MC-66
Reinstalling Procedure
n 6.5.2 Adjusting when Replacing Sub-Scanning Motor
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. If the sub-scanning motor (ME1) has been replaced, check/adjust the film conveyance
amount as follows.
<NOTE>
(1) Print the grid pattern.
When reinstalling the sub-scanning motor, ensure that the WP3x6 faces the flat
surface of the motor shaft. {MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
ME1 (2) Measure and calculate “F” and “G” of the output film and check that it
is within the specified value.
{IN:APPENDIX1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
(3) If the measured value is out of the specified value, perform “Adjusting
Subscanner” of the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.4 [10-3]_Adjusting Subscanner}
WP3x6
Flat surface
DRY60_F0119E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-66
MC-67
6.6 Flat belt (Rear of the Machine) Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n <INSTRUCTIONS>
(1) Remove the upper rear cover. The flat belt has a front and back side.
When attaching it to the pulley, place the marked side out.
{MC:1.1_Upper Rear Cover} With mark
(2) Remove the flat belt located on the rear side of the equipment.
Tension arm
Belt
#1 Belt
Spring DRY60_F0123E.ai
#2 CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
2-TP3x6
Rotate the jam removing handle and check that the flywheel rotates smoothly.
Also check that the flat belt is not disconnected from the flywheel.
DRY60_F0124E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-67
MC-68
6.7 Flywheel (3) Remove the Flywheel.
<REMARKS>
Removing Procedure
n When removing the flywheel, use the pulley removing tool provided on the side of
the sub-scanning unit.
(1) Remove the flat belt located on the rear side of the equipment. By rotating the TP4x8, the pulley removing tool and flywheel can be removed
together.
{MC:6.6_Flat belt (Rear of the Machine)} The pulley removing tool is not required when reinstalling the flywheel.
(2) Remove the Pulley.
Flywheel
#1
jig
#2
TP4x8
DRY60_F0122E.ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
#1 Pulley
Flange #2
CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
2-TP3x6
Waveform washer WP3x6 Rotate the jam removing handle and check that the flywheel rotates smoothly.
DRY60_F0121E ai
Also check that the flat belt is not disconnected from the flywheel.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-68
MC-69
6.8 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1) Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Draw the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.
Draw the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit to the position where you can
access the film leading edge detection sensor (SE1) although the reference
destination below describes the removal of the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor
unit.
{MC:6.1_Sub-Scanning unit/Upper Conveyor Unit}
(2) Remove the film leading edge detection sensor (SE1).
Sub-scanning unit/Upper conveyor unit
#1
CN
(SE1)
SE1
#2
2-TP3x6 DRY60_F0125E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-69
MC-70
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT (2) Remove the scanner unit.
<NOTE>
As the positioning part shown below is mounted accurately by tool, never
7.1 Scanner Unit attempt to loosen the screws nor remove it even if not painted in red.
CAUTION Scanner unit #1
4-BR4x12
• The LD/IC may damage due to static electricity. When removing/reinstalling it,
take anti-static measures by wearing a wrist band, etc.
• Do not remove the upper cover of the scanner unit. CHECK
• Do not place your finger inside the laser beam window (at the bottom of the
scanner unit).
• Handle the optical unit gently, making sure not to subject it to shock.
7.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation
CHECK
Removing Procedure
CHECK
Positioning parts
(1) Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Sub-scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit}
DRY60_F0001E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-70
MC-71
Reinstalling Procedure 7.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure. If the scanner unit has been replaced, the data in the scanner unit data FD or CD-R
provided with the scanner unit needs to be sent to the equipment.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
(1) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
When pushing the scanner unit against the positioning parts, push gently
without subjecting it to shock. (2) Start the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.2_Flow of PC-Utility Operation}
#2 Scanner unit #1
[Push] [Secure (3) Backup the equipment data in the PC for servicing (or settings-
Scanner unit temporarily] changeable models).
4-BR4x12
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
#3
[Tinhten] (4) Load the scanner data FD or CD-R into the FD drive or CD-ROM drive
4-BR4x12 of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable model), and copy the
file in the FD or CD-R to the “Indv” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIX SMART\Printers\Establish name_Printer
Name\Indv).
(5) When using CD-R, as files copied from CD-R are for reading only,
right-click the “Indv” file, click Properties, and unselect the “Read-only”
attribute checkbox.
(6) Send the equipment data to the equipment.
#1
[Secure (7) After sending the equipment data, reboot the equipment and start the
temporarily] PC-Utility.
4-BR4x12 (8) Output the grid pattern using the PC-Utility.
#3 #2
[Tinhten] [Push] {MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
4-BR4x12 Scanner unit DRY60_F0002E.ai (9) Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
CHECK/Adjusting Procedure {IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALU FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
• Make sure that there is no gap between the scanner unit and the positioning parts. (10) If the measured value is out of the specified value, change the value of
• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly. “Scanning Width” of the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.4 [8-1-1]_Scanning Width}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-71
MC-72
(11) Measure “B” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALU FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
(12) If the measured value is out of the specified value, change the value of
“Scanning Position”.
{MU:2.4 [8-1-2]_Scanning Position}
(13) Perform automatic density correction.
{MU:2.4 [7-1]_Auto F.D.C.}
(14) Check the film density.
{MU:2.4 [7-2]_Check Density}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-72
MC-73
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
8.1 Film Cooling Section Engagement Adjustment of Film Cooling Section Drive
n
Transmission Gear
Removing Procedure
n When removing the bracket or when loosening the fixing screw for the film cooling
section drive transmission gear, perform the following steps to adjust the backlash
(1) Remove the upper cover. between the gears.
{MC:1.9_Upper Cover} (1) Loosen the fixing screws of the film cooling section drive transmission
gear.
(2) Remove the film cooling section.
(2) Obtain an appropriate backlash (clearance) between the film cooling
#4
section drive transmission gear and the heat development unit large
4-DT3x6
gear shown in the figure.
Heat development
Film cooling section unit large gear
#1
[Loosen]
#3
#2 [Tinghten]
Film cooling section Fixing screw
drive transmission gear [Secure]
Backlash
#2 #1
TP3x6 CN
(THG5)
DRY60_F0126E ai
DRY60_F0127E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-73
MC-74
8.2 Heat Development Rack Assembly (3) Remove the bracket for the harness of the heat development unit.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the film cooling section. Blacket
{MC:8.1_Film Cooling Section}
(2) Remove the heat development cover.
#4
4-TP3x6
#2
Clamp x7
Cover
#1
Connector
#1 #3
2-TP3x6 DRY60_F0128E.ai
Edge saddle DRY60_F0129E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-74
MC-75
(4) Remove the parts from the vicinity of the heat development unit rack (5) Remove the heat development rack assembly.
assembly.
<NOTE>
#5
When removing the heat development rack assembly, do not remove the pins
BR3x6
on the left and right sides inadvertently. Doing so separates the heater assembly
from the roller assembly.
Pin
#3
Connector
Blacket
Grounding wire
#2
2-TP3x6
Pin
DRY60_F0131E.ai
Rack assembly
Blacket
(2nd rack)
#4
BR3x6
Grounding wire
#1 Rack assembly
2-TP3x6 (1nd rack)
DRY60_F0132E.ai
Blacket Reinstalling Procedure
n
DRY60_F0130E.ai
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-75
MC-76
8.3 Heat Development Roller (2) Remove the heat development roller.
<NOTE>
Removing Procedure
n Removing the heat development roller should be performed on a flat surface
such as a desk top.
CAUTION When the diabatic cover and heater assembly are removed, tilting the roller
The heater assembly inside the heat development rack assembly is very hot assembly causes the roller and the bearings to fall off.
immediately after the equipment is powered off. When servicing the inside of
the heat development rack assembly, wait at least approximately 60 minutes (until <REMARKS>
the hot parts are sufficiently cooled down) before starting the work. If the backside (heat plate) of the heater assembly and the heat development
roller are soiled, clean them using a cloth moistened with absolute alcohol.
(1) Remove the heat development rack assembly.
{MC:8.2_Heat Development Rack Assembly} #1
Adiabatic cover
Heater assembly
#2
Pin (long)
#3
PK3x10
Gear
Bearing
#2
Pin (short)
Heat development roller
Roller assembly Bearing
DRY60_F0133E ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-76
MC-77
8.4 Thermal Protector (2) Remove the heater assembly.
<NOTE>
Removing Procedure
n The removed roller assembly should be placed temporarily on a flat surface such
as a desk top.
CAUTION When the diabatic cover and heater assembly are removed, tilting the roller
The heater assembly inside the heat development rack assembly is very hot assembly causes the roller and the bearings to fall off.
immediately after the equipment is powered off. When servicing the inside of
the heat development rack assembly, wait at least approximately 60 minutes (until <REMARKS>
the hot parts are sufficiently cooled down) before starting the work. If the backside (heat plate) of the heater assembly and the heat development
roller are soiled, clean them using a cloth moistened with absolute alcohol.
(1) Remove the heat development rack assembly.
#1
{MC:8.2_Heat Development Rack Assembly}
Adiabatic cover
Heater assembly
#2
Fixing pins (long)
#2
Fixing pins (short)
DRY60_F0134E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-77
MC-78
(3) Remove the thermal protector. Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
• When reinstalling the thermal protector, ensure that the screw tips are not protruding
#3 from the heat plate side (the side along which the film is conveyed).
2-M3x6 Installing screws of the wrong length may scratch the film.
#1 #2
Connector x2 Use the following as a reference value for the screw tightening torque:
Tie band
0.6Nm=6kgcm
Thermal protector
Heat plate side
Screw tip DRY60_F0136E.ai
• The orientation in which to reinstall the thermal protector varies between the heater
Thermal protector assembly for the 1st rack and that for the 2nd rack. When reinstalling the thermal
protector, refer to the following figure for the installing orientation.
<1st rack> <2nd rack>
DRY60_F0135E.ai
DRY60_F0137E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-78
MC-79
8.5 Heat Development Unit Conveyance Motor (4) Remove the heat development unit conveysnce motor (MG1).
(MG1) A DETAIL A #1
CN (MG1)
Removing Procedure
n
MG1
(1) Remove the Upper left cover.
{MC:1.3_Upper Left Cover}
(2) Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.
{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide}
(3) Move the HTD28A board assembly toward the inside of the equipment
until it comes to the position where the heat development unit
conveyance motor (MG1) can be removed.
DETAIL A
MG1 #2
2-DT3x6
Cover
HTD28A Board assembly
<Rear Side> #2
2-BR3x6 DRY60_F0140E.ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
#1
TP3x6
A #3
HTD28A board assembly
DRY60_D0139E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-79
MC-80
8.6 Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.
Cover Heat development unit
#1 #3 entrance guide
2-TP3x6 TP3x6 DRY60_F0138E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-80
MC-81
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT (3) Remove the operation panel.
#2 #2
Operation panel Clamp Edge saddle
9.1 Film Release Unit
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the upper cover.
{MC:1.9_Upper Cover}
(2) Remove the film pelease unit cover.
Cover
TP3x6
#1
2-TP3x6
DRY60_F0142E.ai
DRY60_F0141E ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-81
MC-82
(4) Remove the stay. (5) Remove the cables from the film release unit entrance sensor (SJ1),
the film release sensor (SJ2), and the LED28A board.
<REMARKS>
#1
The cable connector on the film release unit entrance sensor (SJ1) cannot be
TP3x6
disengaged unless the film release unit is raised. Therefore, perform the following
step to disengage the cable connector on the film release unit entrance sensor
(SJ1).
#2 #3 SJ2
TP3x6 CN (SJ2)
#1
CN85
LED28A Board
#2
4-TP3x6
Stay
#3
Clamp
DRY60_F0143E.ai
SJ1
Film release unit
Stay
DRY60_F0144E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-82
MC-83
(6) Remove the film release unit. Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION
When reinstalling the film release unit, ensure that slack is removed from the
cables routed on or around the LED28A board or the stay. Any slack of cable
may cause film jam or other troubles.
#1
5-TP3x6
#2
CN (SJ1) SJ1
Film release unit
DRY60_F0145.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-83
MC-84
9.2 LED28A Board (3) Remove the LED28A board.
CAUTION
Removing Procedure
n When servicing the LED28A board, do not apply excessive force on the screws
via the screwdriver. Pressing the screwdriver tip hard against the screws may
(1) Remove the upper cover. deform the stay, leading to scratches on the film.
{MC:1.9_Upper Cover}
#2
(2) Remove the film pelease unit cover. CN85 #1
2-TP3x6
Cover
Film release unit
LED28A
TP3x6
DRY60_F0146E.ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
DRY60_F0141E ai Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-84
MC-85
10. CONTROLLER (4) Disconnect the cable from the PSU31B board.
DETAIL A #1
PSU31B CN1, 2, CN4-8
10.1 PSU27A / PSU31B Board Assembly
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
A
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Insert the shutter into the film tray.
(2) Remove the upper left cover. #2
2-Clamp
{MC:1.3_Upper Left Cover} DRY60_F0014.ai
(3) Remove the left shield plate.
#2
[Remove]
6-TP3x6
Shield plate
#1
[Loosen]
2-TP3x6 DRY60_F0013E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-85
MC-86
(5) Disconnect the cable from the PSU27A board. (6) Remove the PSU27A / PSU31B board assembly.
CAUTION PSU27A / PSU31B
Assmbly
Do not remove the screw fixing the PSU27A/PSU31B board assembly. Removing
the screw may cause stray light to expose the film, resulting in an image quality
problem.
#2 PSU27A
CN51
PSU31B
#3
CN1
Additional
protective
grounding
DRY60_F0016.ai
cable Connector Locations
n
#4 PSU27A
CHECK Screw CN51
CN1
Additional
#1 protective
[Loosen] grounding
BR3x8 cable
Do not remove.
CN1
DRY60_F0015E.ai
PSU31B
CN7
CN6
CN4 CN2 CN5 DRY60_F0022E.ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
CHECK / Adjusting Procedure
n
Ensure that the additional protective grounding cable is securely connected.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-86
MC-87
10.2 PSU27A Board Connector Locations
n
{MC:10.1_PSU27A / PSU31B Board Assembly}
CAUTION
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of Reinstalling Procedure
n
boards. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
• The PSU27A Board is equipped with a rotary dial (VR51). The rotary dialis
designed for adjustment in the factory and must not be controlled on the
market.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the PSU27A / PSU31B board assembly.
{MC:10.1_PSU27A / PSU31B Board Assembly}
(2) Remove the PSU27A board.
5-TP3x6 PSU27A
DRY60_F0018.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-87
MC-88
10.3 PSU31B Board Connector / Fuse Locations
n
PSU31B
CAUTION CN5 CN2 CN4
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
F7 F2 F3 F4 F10 CN6
Removing Procedure
n F8 F9 F5
(1) Remove the PSU27A / PSU31B board assembly. CN7
{MC:10.1_PSU27A / PSU31B Board Assembly}
(2) Remove the PSU31B board. F1 F6
PSU31B CN1
5-TP3x6
DRY60_F0019.ai
Fuse Information
n
Board Type Rated voltage Rated amperage
indications (V) (A)
F1 LM 48 2
F2 LM 48 5
F3 LM 48 5
F4 LM 48 5
F5 LM 48 1
F6 LM 48 1
F7 LM 48 5
F8 LM 48 5
F9 LM 48 5
F10 LM 48 5
DRY60_F0017.ai
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-88
MC-89
10.4 PRN28B Board (3) Remove the PRN28B board.
<NOTE>
CAUTION
When removing the PRN28B board, use caution not to damage the connector
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of pins of CN7.
boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the upper rear cover.
{MC:1.1_Upper Rear Cover} #2
(2) Remove the rear shield plate. 5-TP3x6
#3
Na3
#4
CN7 PRN28B
#1
CN1-4, CN8 DRY60_F0021.ai
#2
[Remove]
5-TP3x6
#1
Shield plate [Loosen]
3-TP3x6 DRY60_F0020E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-89
MC-90
Connector Locations
n Reinstalling Procedure
n
CN1 Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
CN8 CN2
CN4
CN3
S1
1 O
2 N
CN7 3
4
S2
1 O
2 N
DRY60_F0023.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-90
MC-91
10.5 CPU32A Board (2) Remove CPU32A board.
#1
CAUTION J1, CN3, CN6, CON1, CN7, JP9 CPU28A
• Replace the CPU board if the lithium battery has worn out.
• Return the old CPU board to the Parts Center (factory).
• Improper replacement of the battery may result in explosion. Do not remove #2
or replace the lithium battery by itself.
Spacer
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
• Make sure to follow this procedure as there is a possibility of fire or explosion
unless the above procedure is followed.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the PRN28B board.
{MC:10.4_PRN28B Board}
#3
3-Special
screw
DRY60_F0025.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-91
MC-92
Connector Locations
n Reinstalling Procedure
n
J1 CN3 CN6 CON1 Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• The connectors of CN3 and CN6 have the same shape.When mating the connectors
of CN3 and CN6, ensure that the connector number marked on the board and the
connector number affixed on the cable match.
• The female connectors of CN3 and CN6 are larger than the male connectors.
Therefore, the connectors may be mated incorrectly. When engaging the connectors
of CN3 and CN6, align the connector pins correctly as shown below.
GOOD NO GOOD NO GOOD
DRY60_F0027.ai
• When mating the connectors of CN3, CN6, and JP9, check the pin numbers
inscribed on the connectors and avoid reversing the connector orientation.
CN7 < CN3, CN6 > < JP9 >
JP9 2 10 1 2
1 2
DRY60_F0024.ai
DRY60_F0026.ai
<NOTE>
When the CPU board of this equipment connected to CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V
CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL, or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL has been replaced,
there is a need to register the Mac address using the FFWakeOnLAN Utility of CR-IR
391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL, or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL.
{MU:2.4 [1-1-4] _Mac Address}
{CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL Service Manual (MC
Appendix)}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-92
MC-93
<REMARKS>
When replacing the CPU32A board, the following parts must be transferred to the new
board.
• Compact Flash Memory
• DIMM
• Spacers (3), Screws (3)
3-Screw
3-Spacer
CF DIMM
DRY60_F0028E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-93
MC-94
10.6 DIMM Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
Removing Procedure
n
(1) Remove the CPU32A board.
{MC:10.5_CPU32A Board}
(2) Remove the DIMM.
<REMARKS>
DIMM is attached to the back of the CPU board.
DIMM
#2 #1
#1
DRY60_F0029.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-94
MC-95
10.7 CF (Compact Flash Memory) n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
n Removing Procedure
(1) Remove the lower rear cover.
{MC:1.2_Lower Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the CF.
DETAIL A CF
#1 CPU32A
2-TP3x6 Blacket
DRY60_F0030E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-95
MC-96
10.8 SND28B Board (2) Remove the SND28B Board.
#1
CAUTION CN1~5,19~39
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
n Removing Procedure
(1) Remove the Upper rear cover.
{MC:1.1_Upper Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the rear shield plate.
#2
SND28B 8-TP3x6
DRY60_F0031.ai
#2
[Remove]
5-TP3x6
#1
Shield plate [Loosen]
3-TP3x6 DRY60_F0020E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-96
MC-97
Connector Locations
n n Reinstalling Procedure
CN34 CN35 Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
CN22 CN23 CN32 CN28 <INSTRUCTIONS>
The connectors of CN37 and CN38 have the same shape. When mating the
CN27 CN3 connectors of CN37 and CN38, ensure that the connector number marked on
CN36 the board and the connector number affixed on the cable match.
CN21
CN5 CN20 CN37
CN25
CN24 CN38
CN39
CN19
CN24
CN1 CN31
CN30
CN2
CN26
CN29 CN33 DRY60_F0032 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-97
MC-98
11. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT
SOFTWARE
The main unit software is provided on CD-R. The DPX SMART Copy Tool included in
this main unit software CD-R is required for installing the main unit software.
n Installing the Main Unit Software
Copy the main unit software in the main unit software CD-R to the FTP folder of the
PC for servicing, and install in the equipment via the network.
<REMARKS>
The main unit software can be installed from the PC for servicing connected to the
equipment.
n Types of Main Unit Software Installations
• Version upgrade:
The concerned files excluding individual data of the currently installed software are
overwritten.
• Full installation:
The concerned files including individual data of the currently installed software are
overwritten.
CAUTION
Do not perform settings, etc. of the equipment during the installation of the
main unit software.
<NOTE>
• As performing full installation will clear the individual data in the CF (Compact
Flash memory), the individual data needs to be installed after completing full
installation. Use the latest individual data for installation.
• In version upgrades, individual data will be preserved.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-98
MC-99
11.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing (3) Enter the drive name into [Input drive].
Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software using the PC for (4) Click [Copy] of [CD->PC (Installation data copy from CD.)].
servicing. Use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder in the PC for servicing #1
when performing full installation or version upgrading of the equipment.
<REMARKS>
To prepare for times when the PC for servicing does not have a CD drive or the main
unit software CD-R was not brought to the place where the equipment is installed, it is
recommended that “11.1.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for servicing” is
performed beforehand at the service center or service station beforehand, etc.
11.1.1 Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing
Insert the latest main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for servicing,
and copy the main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing.
(1) Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
(2) Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive.
→ “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX SMART Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
#2 DRY60_F0147E.ai
<NOTE> → The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (“Any drive letter”:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\DPXSMART). When completed, the
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive. [Success.] screen appears.
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on
the desktop, etc. (5) [OK]
(6) Click [EXIT] to close [DPX SMART Copy Tool] window.
(7) Unload the main unit software CD-R form the CD-ROM drive.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-99
MC-100
11.1.2 Upgrading the Version from the PC for Servicing (6) [Upgrading] → [Execute]
(1) Copy the latest main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing.
{MC:11.1.1_Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing}
(2) Check that the preparations of the PC for servicing have been
completed.
{MU:2.1_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}
(3) Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which
the equipment is connected.
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
(5) Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
{MU:2.2.2_Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)}
#1 #2 DRY60_F0148E ai
→ The main unit software is transferred (version upgrade) in the equipment.
When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-100
MC-101
(7) End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance 11.1.3 Full Installation from the PC for Servicing
tree.
(1) Copy the latest main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
servicing.
from the printer. Please close this page.].
<REMARKS> {MC:11.1.1_Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing}
If the PC-Utility is ended by clicking , unless the pop-up blocker setting of the (2) Check that the preparations of the PC for servicing have been
browser is canceled, the logout screen will not be displayed. completed.
{MU:2.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing} {MU:2.1_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}
(3) Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which
(8) Close the logout window. the equipment is connected.
(9) Reboot the equipment so that the software is upgraded. (4) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
(10) Check that the equipment whose software version has been upgraded (5) Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
starts and operates normally.
{MU:2.2.2_Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)}
(11) End the PC-Utility. (6) If the PC for servicing does not contain the latest individual data,
(12) Shutdown the PC for servicing. import the individual data from the equipment.
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
(13) Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
to which the equipment is connected.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-101
MC-102
(7) [Full Install] → [Execute] (11) Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
(12) Restore the individual data saved in the PC for servicing prior to the
full installation.
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
<REMARKS>
The individual data restored will become effective after the equipment is
rebooted.
(13) End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance
tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].
(14) Close the logout window.
(15) Reboot the equipment so that the individual data becomes effective.
(16) Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
(17) Execute [1-3-2.Set Date] of the PC-Utility to set the system date and
time.
{MU:2.4 [1-3-2]_Set Date}
(18) Execute [1-2-1.Set Rem.Films] of the PC-Utility to set the remaining
number of films.
#1 #2 DRY60_F0149E ai
{MU:2.4 [1-2-1]_Set Rem. Films}
→ The main unit software is transferred (full installation) in the equipment.
When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears. (19) Check that the equipment which has been fully installed starts and
operates normally.
(8) End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance
tree. (20) End the PC-Utility.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out (21) Shutdown the PC for servicing.
from the printer. Please close this page.].
<REMARKS> (22) Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
to which the equipment is connected.
If the PC-Utility is ended by clicking , unless the pop-up blocker setting of the
browser is canceled, the logout screen will not be displayed.
{MU:2.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
(9) Close the logout window.
(10) Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit
software become effective.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-102
MC-103
12. RESTORING THE COMPACT FLASH 12.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC
MEMORY (CF) for Servicing
When the CF becomes defective while the equipment is running, it can be restored by <NOTE>
writing the main unit software. If the PC for servicing does not have a CD-ROM drive or the CD-R containing
<NOTE> the main unit software is not available at the site of installation, perform this
procedure beforehand on the service center or service station, etc.
• The CF cannot be restored if it is physically damaged.
• As all settings are initialized after restoring, there is a need to restore the equipment (1) Connect the CF reader/writer to the PC for servicing.
individual data.
• Do no use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing. (2) Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
Instead copy from the CD-R containing the main unit software.
(3) Insert the CD-R with the main unit software into the CD-ROM drive.
→ The DPX PRIMA Copy Tool automatically starts, and the [DPX SMART Copy
l What to Prepare Tool] screen appears.
• CD-ROM drive (4) Click [EXIT] to quit the DPX SMART Copy Tool.
• CF reader/writer
(5) Open Windows Explorer of the PC for servicing.
(6) Create a new folder anywhere in the PC for servicing.
(7) Copy and paste “CFImage.zip” and “DDWin.exe” in the CD-R
containing the main unit software to this new folder.
(8) Double-click the “CFImage.zip” copied to decompress it.
→ The “CFImage.img” file is created.
(9) To enable use of “CFImage.img”, copy the “CFImage.img” file to the
desired folder.
(10) Remove the CD-R containing the main unit software from the PC for
servicing.
This ends the procedure for copying the software to the PC for servicing.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-103
MC-104
12.2 Copying the Main Unit Software to the CF (7) Select [All files] at [Files of type], and select [CFImage.img].
(8) Click [Open].
(1) Remove the CF from the equipment.
(2) Insert the CF into the CF reader/writer connected to the PC for
servicing.
(3) Double-click “DDWin.exe” in the PC for servicing to start DD for
Windows.
(9) Click [Restore].
(4) Click [Choose disk].
→ The [Choosing a disk] screen appears.
(5) Select the CF reader/writer disk, and click [OK].
(6) Click [Choose file].
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-104
MC-105
(10) Click [Yes] twice until writing starts. (13) Execute [Safely Remove Hardware] and remove the CF.
→ When writing ends, the following screen appears. (14) Reinstall the CF in the equipment.
(15) Start the equipment and then the PC-Utility.
(16) Restore the equipment data in the equipment.
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
(17) Reboot the equipment and check that it operates normally.
(11) Click [Verify].
(12) Click [Yes] twice until comparison starts.
→ When comparison ends, the following screen appears.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-105
MC-106
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-106
MC-107
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MC-107
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
11.25.2008 00 New release for UL (00 (1) Edition) (FM5451) All pages
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
05.20.2009 01(1) New release for the field (FM5546) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 06.30.2009 02
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0 (sup-
ports multi modalities), etc) (FM5568)
3, 10, 49, 57, 67, 67.1, 67.2, 86-93
3, 45, 49, 57, 57.1, 57.2, 66, 67,
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585)
SERVICE MANUAL
68, 78, 83-92
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 3, 65-67, 67.1, 67.2, 83, 87, 94, 95
10.07.2011 04 Revised (Ed3) 83, 83.1, 83.2
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) Cover
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)
(FM-DL 100)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
MC-1
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, <INSTRUCTIONS>
The diagrams in this manual display the CHECK and FIT ON icons where
REPLACEMENTS, AND ADJUSTMENTS necessary.
When removing/reinstalling, following these icons.
This chapter does not describe parts which require no special note or adjustments in • CHECK icon
: When reinstalling removed parts, this is indicated if
removal and installation. reinstalling positions must be checked or adjusted.
For details on the removal of these parts, refer to the Service Parts List. This symbol is shown in illustrations of parts removal
Also follow the precautions below when performing inspections, replacements, and procedures. Whenever this is shown, be sure to refer to “n
adjustments of parts. CHECK/Adjusting procedure”.
WARNING • FIT ON icon : When installing parts, this is indicated if alignment to the
boss is required. However, this is not indicated on bosses
To prevent electrical shocks, be sure to turn OFF the power of this equipment used for enhancing assembly and preventing assembly
before starting work. accidents.
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warnings and cautions described in “SAFETY PRECAUTION”.
{SAFETY PRECAUTION}
CAUTION
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards and optical units. Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause
damage to electronic parts on the boards and optical units.
• Never remove the screws painted in red.
• Never remove the upper cover of the optical unit.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• The screws painted in yellow must be adjusted after the installation of parts.
When installing parts, follow the check/adjustment procedure provided.
• When removing the covers, insert shutter into the film tray to prevent
exposure of film to light.
• Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power
cable and additional protective ground wire connections and by securing
the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and
retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to the original
states upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to
the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service
manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly
secure the parts.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-1
MC-2
CONTENTS 4. REMOVAL UNIT 4.
4.1
REMOVAL UNIT
Removal Unit
MC-22
MC-22
4.2 Suction Cup Arm MC-24
4.3 Removal Drive Cam MC-25
1. COVERS 1. COVERS MC-4 4.4 Suction Cup MC-29
1.1 Covers which can be Removed Individually MC-4 4.5 Bellows MC-30
1.2 Covers which Need to be Removed 4.6 Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB2) MC-32
in Certain Order MC-5 4.7 Film Removing Motor (MB1) MC-33
4.8 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB2) MC-34
4.9 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor (SB1) MC-35
FPEC004A.AI
5. CONVEYOR UNIT 5. CONVEYOR UNIT MC-37
FPEC001A.AI
5.1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly MC-37
5.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly MC-39
5.3 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower) MC-40
2. FRAME 2. FRAME MC-9 5.4 Stopper Assembly MC-41
2.1 Interlock Switch Assembly MC-9 5.5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1) MC-42
5.6 Conveyor Unit Exit Roller (Lower) MC-43
5.7 Film Edge Sensor (SD5) MC-44
5.8 Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide MC-45
5.9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller MC-46
5.10 Film Conveyance Motor (MD1) MC-47
5.11 Conveyance Gear MC-49
FPEC005A.AI
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT 6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT MC-50
FPEC002A.AI
6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit MC-50
6.2 Sub-Scanning Unit Roller MC-53
6.3 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1) MC-56
3. FILM LOADING UNIT 3. FILM LOADING UNIT MC-11 6.4 Flywheel MC-58
3.1 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit MC-11 6.5 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1) MC-61
3.2 Film Tray MC-13
3.3 Tray Detection Switch (SA2) MC-14
3.4 Tray Lock Assembly MC-18
3.5 Shutter Lock Mechanism MC-19
3.6 Squeezing Roller (Upper) MC-20
3.7 Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor (SA1) MC-21
FPEC006A.AI
FPEC003A.AI
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-2
MC-3
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT MC-65 10. CONTROLLER 10. CONTROLLER MC-79
7.1 Scanner Unit MC-65 10.1 PSU27A/PSU28B Board MC-79
10.2 PRN28A Board MC-81
10.3 CPU28A Board MC-83
10.4 DIMM MC-84
10.5 CF (Compact Flash Memory) MC-85
FPEC007A.AI FPEC010A.AI
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT MC-68 11. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT 11. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE MC-86
8.1 Film Cooling Section MC-68 SOFTWARE 11.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing
8.2 Heat Development Rack Assembly MC-69 (or Settings-Changeable Models) MC-87
8.3 Heat Development Roller MC-71
8.4 Thermal Protector MC-72
8.5 Heat Development Unit Conveyance Motor
(MG1) MC-74
8.6 Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide MC-75
12. RESTORING THE COMPACT 12. RESTORING THE COMPACT FLASH
FPEC008A.AI
FLASH MEMORY (CF) MEMORY (CF) MC-91
12.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for
Servicing MC-91
12.2 Copying the Main Unit Software to the CF MC-92
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT 9. FILM RELEASE UNIT MC-76
9.1 Film Release Unit MC-76
9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board
(LED28A) MC-78
13. C l e a n i n g t h e D u s t - P r o o f 13. CLEANING THE DUST-PROOF GLASS OF
Glass of the Scanner Unit THE SCANNER UNIT (839Y100057 ONLY) MC-94
(839Y100057 only)
FPEC009A.AI
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-3
MC-4
1. COVERS 1.1.2 Belt Cover
n Removing Procedure
1.1 Covers which can be Removed
1. Open the front cover.
Individually
2. Remove the belt cover.
1.1.1 Rear Cover
FPEC0110.AI
n Removing Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover.
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-4
MC-5
1.2 Covers which Need to be n Reinstalling Procedure
Removed in Certain Order Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
1.2.1 Left Cover
FPEC0111.AI
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the left cover.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-5
MC-6
1.2.2 Upper Cover 1.2.3 Film Release Unit Cover
Removing Procedure
n Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the rear cover. 1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the left cover. 2. Remove the left cover.
3. Open the front cover. 3. Open the front cover.
4. Open the right cover. 4. Open the right cover.
5. Remove the upper cover. 5. Remove the upper cover.
6. Remove the film release unit cover.
n Reinstalling Procedure n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-6
MC-7
1.2.4 Film Loading Unit Cover 1.2.5 Lower Right Cover
Removing Procedure
n Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the film tray. 1. Remove the film tray.
{MC:3.2_Film Tray} {MC:3.2_Film Tray}
2. Open the front cover. 2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the film loading unit cover. 3. Remove the film loading unit cover.
4. Remove the lower right cover.
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-7
MC-8
1.2.6 Right Cover
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the film tray.
{MC:3.2_Film Tray}
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the film loading unit cover.
4. Remove the lower right cover.
5. Remove the right cover.
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-8
MC-9
2. FRAME <NOTE>
To remove the interlock switch assembly, disconnect the connector (faston
terminal) by pressing in the unlocking latch located on the connector as
shown below.
2.1 Interlock Switch Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the following covers.
• Rear cover FPEC0210.AI
• Right cover
• Upper cover n Reinstalling Procedure
2. Remove the interlock switch assembly. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
If the interlock switch has been removed from the interlock switch assembly,
refer to “n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure” and adjust the attaching position.
{n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure}
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-9
MC-10
n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure 2. Close the right cover and front cover.
1. Temporarily secure the interlock switch assembly. 3. Adjust the attached position of the interlock switch assembly.
<NOTE> <NOTE>
Move the interlock switch assembly to the very back and temporarily • After confirming the “click” sound of the interlock switch, move it by
secure it. another 1 mm towards the front of the equipment.
• When moving the interlock switch assembly to the front at #2 in the
following figure, move it horizontally.
4. Open and close the front cover, and check that the interlock switch
turns ON/OFF from the sounds made.
5. Using the PC Utility, check that the interlock function is working
normally.
{MU:2.4 [10-4]_Interlock Function}
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-10
MC-11
3. FILM LOADING UNIT 4. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
3.1 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the film tray. FPEC0340.AI
{MC:3.2_Film Tray}
2. Remove the film loading unit cover.
3. Move the vertical conveyor unit drive transmission gear assembly.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-11
MC-12
Engagement Adjustment of Vertical Conveyance Unit Drive
n
Transmission Gear
When the bracket of the vertical conveyance unit drive transmission gear has been
removed or when the fixing screws have been loosened, follow the steps below to
adjust the engagement of the vertical conveyance unit drive transmission gear.
<REMARKS>
The fixing screws (TP3x6) of the bracket of the vertical conveyance unit drive
transmission gear are painted in yellow.
1. Loosen the fixing screws of the vertical conveyance unit drive
transmission gear.
2. Align the flanges of the vertical conveyance unit drive transmission
gear and vertical conveyance roller gear, and secure the fixing screws.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-12
MC-13
3.2 Film Tray <NOTE>
The manual release arm can be operated with moderate force, and may damage
if pushed in too strongly or pushed with a screwdriver.
Removing Procedure
n
<NOTE>
When pulling out the film tray from the equipment, insert the FPEC0341.AI
shutter into the film tray to prevent exposure of film to light.
1. Insert the shutter into the film tray.
2. Remove the following covers.
• Rear cover
• Left cover
3. Remove the film tray.
<REMARKS>
The length from the hole for inserting a screwdriver to the manual release arm is
120 mm horizontally and 15 mm vertically.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removal. Note that there is no need to move the
manual release arm with a screwdriver, simply push in the film tray.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-13
MC-14
3.3 Tray Detection Switch (SA2) Reinstalling Procedure
n
Removing Procedure
n 1. Temporarily secure the tray detection switch bracket.
<NOTE>
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit. FPEC0342.AI Temporarily secure with the tray detection switch bracket moved to the very
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit} end.
2. Remove the film tray detection switch (SA2).
<NOTE> 2. Insert the film tray into the film loading unit.
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, press in the <NOTE>
unlocking latch located on the connector as shown below.
• If the switch clicks with a sound when pushing in the tray, perform steps
3 to 6.
• If it does not click with a sound, perform only step 8.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-14
MC-15
3. At the point when the switch clicks with a sound, measure the length 5. Measure the length from the rear end of the film tray to the film loading
from the rear end of the film tray to the film loading unit frame (A). unit frame again (B).
4. Push in the film tray and check that it locks, and then pull out the tray. 6. Perform one of the following procedure using the value obtained by
subtracting (B) from the measured value (A).
<REMARKS>
• When above 0mm : Step 7
The film tray may shake slightly even when locked. To improve the precision of • When value is negative : Step 8
attaching the tray detection switch, pull out the film tray towards the front of the
equipment in the locked state, and then proceed to the next step.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-15
MC-16
7. Push the tray detection switch in the arrow direction as shown in the 8. Push the tray detection switch in the arrow direction as shown in the
following figure, and tighten the screw firmly. following figure, and tighten the screw firmly.
<NOTE> <NOTE>
If the value obtained by subtracting (B) from the measured value (A) in step Tighten the screw after pushing the tray detection switch by another 2 mm
6 is as follows, completely tighten the screw at the indicated position. after pushing it in the arrow direction and the actuator releases the switch
• 0 mm : Move the film detection switch by 2mm in the arrow direction, button with a click sound.
and completely tighten the screw.
• +1 mm : Move the film detection switch by 1 mm in the arrow direction,
and completely tighten the screw.
• +2 mm : Completely tighten the screw there.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-16
MC-17
n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
• Check that when the tray is pushed in the locked state, there is still extra actuator
stroke.
• Check that when the tray is pulled in the locked state, the switch does not make a
click sound.
<NOTE>
When connecting the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, ensure that they are
facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to disconnect
when performing periodic maintenance, etc.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-17
MC-18
3.4 Tray Lock Assembly Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n <NOTE>
When connecting the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, ensure that they are
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit. FPEC0343.AI
facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to disconnect
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit} when performing periodic maintenance, etc.
2. Remove the tray lock assembly.
<NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, press in the
unlocking latch located on the connector as shown below.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-18
MC-19
3.5 Shutter Lock Mechanism Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removal procedure.
Removing Procedure
n <REMARKS>
This shutter lock mechanism works to lock in the shutter when it is inserted to pull out
1. Remove the film tray. FPEC0344.AI
the tray by moving the pin into the hole on the shutter.
{MC:3.2_Film Tray}
2. Remove the shutter lock mechanism.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-19
MC-20
3.6 Squeezing Roller (Upper)
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit. FPEC0345.AI
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
<NOTE>
When removing the squeezing roller, be sure to not drop or lose the roller.
2. Remove the squeezing roller (upper).
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-20
MC-21
3.7 Film Pack/Shutter Detection
Sensor (SA1)
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0346.AI
1. Insert the shutter into the film tray.
2. Remove the film tray.
{MC:3.2_Film Tray}
3. Remove the film loading unit cover
4. Remove the film pack/shutter detection sensor (SA1).
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-21
MC-22
4. REMOVAL UNIT 3. Disconnect the connectors, and release the clamps.
<NOTE>
4.1 Removal Unit To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, press in the
unlocking latch located on the connector as shown below.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit. FPEC0440.AI
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
2. Remove the removal exit cover.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-22
MC-23
4. Remove the removal unit. Reinstalling Procedure
n
<NOTE> Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
When removing part and/or adjusting the removal unit removed, place it
on the film loading unit to prevent deformation of the bottom part of the • When reinstalling the removal unit, first attach the following circled screw.
removal unit.
• When connecting the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, ensure that they
are facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to
disconnect when performing periodic maintenance, etc.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-23
MC-24
4.2 Suction Cup Arm 3. Remove the suction cup arm.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit. FPEC0441.AI
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
2. Move the suction cup arm.
<NOTE>
When the suction cup arm is at its home position, as the auxiliary plate is
touching the suction cup arm and is therefore difficult to remove, move the
suction cup arm in the arrow direction.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-24
MC-25
4.3 Removal Drive Cam 5. Disconnect the connectors from the gear fixing cover (front inner).
Removing Procedure
n 6. Remove the gear fixing cover (front inner).
1. Remove the removal unit. FPEC0442.AI
{MC:4.1_Removal Unit}
2. Move the suction cup arm to the home position.
3. Remove the removal unit conveyance motor (MB2).
{MC:4.6_Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB2)}
4. Remove the gear fixing cover (front outer).
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-25
MC-26
7. Remove the removal drive cam (front) together with the crank. Reinstalling Procedure
n
<NOTE> <NOTE>
When removing the removal drive cam (front), be careful not to drop or lose • As the procedure for installing the removal drive cam is the same for the
the suction cup arm assembly bearing. front and rear, only the installing procedure for the front is described.
• When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm to
the home position.
1. Reinstall the removal drive cam to the removal unit together with the
crank.
2. Reinstall the idle gear to the shaft.
3. Reinstall the link gear to the gear fixing cover (front inner).
<NOTE>
At this time, the two holes on gear 1 should be at the following positions
(top).
8. Remove the removal drive cam (rear) in the same way as removal
drive came (front).
<NOTE>
If removing the front and rear removal drive cams together, it will be
necessary to adjust the phases of these cams.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-26
MC-27
4. Insert the pins into the two holes on link gear, adjust the phase of the 5. Pull out the pin, and check that the link gear is attached correctly.
removal drive cam, and reinstall the gear fixing cover (front inner).
<NOTE>
<NOTE>
The two holes on link gear should be aligned to the holes on the removal
• Do not install the bearing of the idle gear at this time. drive cam.
• The pins to be used must not be extremely thin or easy to deform and
should fit the holes on the gear as closely as possible.
<REMARKS>
Any gear in position of the removal drive cam can be checked by visually
checking the mark on the cam from the long hole of the link gear.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-27
MC-28
6. If with the phases of the front removal drive cam and that of the rear 9. Reinstall the gear fixing cover (front outer).
removal drive cam corresponding, disengage idle gear, align the rib
position of idle gear and that of link gear, and adjust the front and rear 10. Reinstall the removal unit conveyance motor (MB2).
phases.
CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
After reinstalling the removal drive cam, check that the suction cup arm moves
smoothly. Also visually check that the suction cup arm is horizontal.
<REMARKS>
When moving the suction cup arm, rotate the shaft by a slotted screwdriver as shown
in the following figure.
<NOTE>
After checking the operation, move the suction cup arm to the home position.
7. Reinstall the bearing to the shaft of idle gear.
8. Reinstall the exit roller gear.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-28
MC-29
4.4 Suction Cup
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the suction cup arm. FPEC0443.AI
{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}
2. Remove the suction cup.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-29
MC-30
4.5 Bellows 3. Remove the bellows.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
n Removing Procedure
When removing the bellows, be sure to not lose the springs.
1. Remove the suction cup arm. FPEC0444.AI
{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}
2. Remove the suction cup unit.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-30
MC-31
n Reinstalling Procedure nCHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Check for air leak by the following steps.
<INSTRUCTIONS> 1. Suction the film with the suction cup manually and check that the film
• When reinstalling, insert the second groove from the top of the bellows into does not drop off for about 60 seconds.
the plate.
• Leave a clearance of about 1.5 to 2.0 mm between the bellows anf holder. 2. Press the suction cup arm against the film until the bottommost
position of the actuator for detection SB2 passes the SB2 detection
point.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-31
MC-32
4.6 Removal Unit Conveyance Motor
(MB2)
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0445.AI
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
2. Remove the removal unit conveyance motor (MB2).
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-32
MC-33
4.7 Film Removing Motor (MB1)
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit. FPEC0446.AI
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
2. Remove the film removing motor (MB1).
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-33
MC-34
4.8 Film Surface Detection Sensor
(SB2)
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the suction cup arm.
FPEC0447.AI
{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}
2. Remove the film surface detection sensor (SB2).
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-34
MC-35
4.9 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection 3. Remove the suction cup arm HP detection sensor (SB1).
Sensor (SB1)
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0448.AI
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
2. Move the suction cup arm from the home position.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-35
MC-36
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
After installing the sensor, if the cable in the removal unit is loose, pull it outside
slightly without disconnecting the connector, and secure with the clamp.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-36
MC-37
5. CONVEYOR UNIT 2. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly.
5.1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the following covers. FPEC0530.AI
• Belt cover
• Rear cover
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-37
MC-38
Reinstalling Procedure
n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Check that the hook of the rear gear is hooked onto the groove of the shaft.
<NOTE>
• When installing the conveyor unit exit assembly to the sub-scanning unit/
upper conveyor unit, insert the protrusion on the conveyor unit exit assembly
base into the slide guide hole and slide to the end.
• Attach the rear gear while pressing the shaft shown below from the front of
the equipment.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-38
MC-39
5.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller
Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0531.AI
1. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly.
{MC:5.1_Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly}
2. Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-39
MC-40
5.3 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide
(Lower)
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0532.AI
1. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly.
{MC:5.1_Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly}
2. Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.
{MC:5.2_Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly}
3. Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-40
MC-41
5.4 Stopper Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly. FPEC0533.AI
{MC:5.1_Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly}
2. Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.
{MC:5.2_Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly}
3. Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
{MC:5.3_Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)}
4. Remove the stopper assembly.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-41
MC-42
5.5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1) 4. Remove the stopper solenoid (SOLD1).
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly. FPEC0534.AI
{MC:5.1_Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly}
2. Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.
{MC:5.2_Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly}
3. Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
{MC:5.3_Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)}
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-42
MC-43
5.6 Conveyor Unit Exit Roller Reinstalling Procedure
n
(Lower) Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0535.AI
1. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly.
{MC:5.1_Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly}
2. Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.
{MC:5.2_Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly}
3. Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
{MC:5.3_Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)}
4. Remove the stopper assembly.
{MC:5.4_Stopper Assembly}
5. Remove the conveyor unit exit roller (lower).
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-43
MC-44
5.7 Film Edge Sensor (SD5) 5. Remove the film edge sensor (SD5).
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly. FPEC0536.AI
{MC:5.1_Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly}
2. Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.
{MC:5.2_Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly}
3. Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
{MC:5.3_Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)}
4. Remove the stopper assembly.
{MC:5.4_Stopper Assembly}
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-44
MC-45
5.8 Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Engagement Adjustment of Conveyance Unit Drive
n
Transmission Gear
Guide
When the bracket of the conveyance unit drive transmission gear has been removed
or when the fixing screws have been loosened, follow the steps below to adjust the
Removing Procedure
n engagement of the conveyance unit drive transmission gear.
<REMARKS>
1. Open the front cover.
FPEC0537.AI
The fixing screws (TP3x6) of the bracket of the conveyance unit drive transmission
2. Open the right cover. gear are painted in yellow.
3. Remove the upper conveyor unit open/close guide. 1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Loosen the fixing screws.
3. While ensuring appropriate backlash (clearance) between the
conveyance unit drive transmission gear and turn roller gear shown in
the figure, secure the fixing screws.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-45
MC-46
5.9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the upper conveyor unit open/close guide. FPEC0538.AI
{MC:5.8_Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide}
2. Remove the conveyor unit turn roller.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-46
MC-47
5.10 Film Conveyance Motor (MD1) 4. Remove the plate of the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit. FPEC0540.AI
{MC:6.1_Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the scanner unit.
{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
3. Turn over the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.
<NOTE>
When turning over the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit, do so while
rotating it in the direction which does not add load on the upper conveyor
unit open/close guide.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-47
MC-48
5. Remove the film conveyance motor (MD1).
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-48
MC-49
5.11 Conveyance Gear
n Engagement Adjustment of the Conveyer Unit
Exit Gear
When the bracket of the conveyer unit exit gear has been
removed or when the fixing screws have been loosened, follow
FPEC0541.AI
the steps below to perform engagement adjustment of the
conveyer unit exit gear.
<REMARKS>
The fixing screws (TP3x6) for the bracket of the conveyer unit exit gear are painted in
yellow.
1. Loosen the fixing screws of the conveyer unit exit gear.
2. Insert a 0.5mm-thick spacer between the conveyer unit exit gear and
the conveyer unit exit assembly gear, and tighten the fixing screws.
<NOTE>
The spacer must be inserted between the flanges of both gears.
<REMARKS>
The thickness of a 150mm steel ruler is 0.5mm. 3. Remove the spacer. Check that the spacer comes out easily.
<REMARKS>
If the spacer does not come out easily, the gear engagement may be too tight.
4. After attaching the removed parts, power on the equipment.
5. After the equipment started up, output a flat pattern from the PC-
Utility.
{MU:2.4 [6-4]_Flat Pattern}
6. Check that there is no horizontal streak unevenness in 55mm pitch on
the output film.
<NOTE>
The unevenness above is caused by tight gear engagement. If the
unevenness appears, perform the adjustment again.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-49
MC-50
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT 4. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit fixing brackets.
6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper
Conveyor Unit
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the film tray.
FPEC0630.AI
{MC:3.2_Film Tray}
2. Remove the following covers.
• Rear cover
• Film loading unit cover
• Rear cover
3. Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.
{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide}
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-50
MC-51
5. Disconnect the connectors.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-51
MC-52
6. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit. WARNING
<REMARKS>
As the stopper has been removed, make sure that the sub-scanning unit/upper
Move the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit along the slide guide holes on conveyor unit does not fall while pulling it out.
the unit base by 37 mm to the front and by 57 mm to the heat development unit,
and remove it towards the front.
<NOTE>
When removing the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit, hold the
following areas with both hands.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-52
MC-53
6.2 Sub-Scanning Unit Roller 4. Remove the flat belt (front).
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the following covers. FPEC0631.AI
• Rear cover
• Belt cover
2. Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.
{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide}
3. Remove the jam removing handle.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-53
MC-54
5. Remove the pulleys (left/right). 6. Remove the sub-scanning unit entrance roller.
<NOTE>
• As the removal procedure of the pulleys is the same for the left and right
sides, only the procedure for the right side is described.
• By rotating the #5 TP4x8, the pulley removing tool and pulley can be
removed together.
• Use the tool only when removing the pulley. It is not required when
reinstalling.
7. Remove the sub-scanning unit exit roller.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-54
MC-55
Reinstalling Procedure
n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
1. After reinstalling, rotate the jam removing handle four or five times
and check that the sub-scanning unit rollers rotate smoothly, and the
The flat belt has a front and back side. When attaching it to the pulley, place the flat belt does not disconnect from the pulley.
marked side out.
<NOTE>
• When attaching the sub-scanning unit roller, be careful not to forget to attach
the waveform washer.
• The pulley has a front and back side. Make sure that the tapered side of the
pulley coincides with the tapered side of the shaft attaching portion.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-55
MC-56
6.3 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1) 2. Remove the sub-scanning motor (ME1).
6.3.1 Removal/Reinstallation
Removing Procedure
n FPEC0632.AI
<NOTE>
When replacing the sub-scanning motor (ME1), also replace the ME1 driver
board at the same time.
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.
{MC:6.5_Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1) steps 1 to 6}
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-56
MC-57
3. Remove the ME1 driver board. Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
Reinstall the sub-scanning motor so that the WP3x6 is at the D cut side of the
motor shaft.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-57
MC-57.1
6.3.2 Adjusting when Replacing Sub-Scanning Motor
If the sub-scanning motor (ME1) has been replaced, check/adjust the film conveyance
amount as follows.
1. Print the grid pattern.
{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
2. Measure and calculate “F” and “G” of the output film and check that it
is within the specified value.
{IN:APPENDIX1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
3. If the measured value is out of the specified value, perform “Adjusting
Subscanner” of the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.4 [10-1]_Adjusting Subscanner}
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-57.1
MC-57.2
BLANK PAGE
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-57.2
MC-58
6.4 Flywheel
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the following covers. FPEC0633.AI
• Rear cover
• Belt cover
2. Remove the flat belt (rear).
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-58
MC-59
3. Remove the flywheel. Reinstalling Procedure
n
<NOTE> Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• By rotating the #5 TP4x8, the pulley removing tool and flywheel can be
removed together. The flat belt has a front and back side. When attaching it to the flywheel, place
• Use the tool only when removing the flywheel. It is not required when the marked side out.
reinstalling.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-59
MC-60
<NOTE>
The flywheel has a front and back side. Make sure that the tapered side of the
flywheel coincides with the tapered side of the shaft attaching portion.
CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
1. After reinstalling, rotate the jam removing handle four or five times
and check that the flat belt does not disconnect from the flywheel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-60
MC-61
6.5 Film Leading Edge Detection 4. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit fixing brackets.
Sensor (SE1)
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the film tray.
FPEC0634.AI
{MC:3.2_Film Tray}
2. Remove the following covers.
• Rear cover
• Film loading unit cover
• Rear cover
3. Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.
{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide}
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-61
MC-62
5. Disconnect the connectors.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-62
MC-63
6. Draw the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit.
<REMARKS>
Move the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit along the slide guide holes on
the unit base by 37 mm to the front and by 57 mm to the heat development unit,
and draw it towards the front.
<NOTE>
When moving the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit, hold the
following areas with both hands.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-63
MC-64
7. Remove the film leading edge detection sensor (SE1).
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-64
MC-65
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 2. Remove the scanner unit.
<NOTE>
7.1 Scanner Unit As the positioning part shown below is mounted accurately by tool, never
attempt to loosen the screws nor remove it even if not painted in red.
CAUTION l When Using 839Y100057
• The LD/IC may damage due to static electricity. When
removing/reinstalling it, take anti-static measures by
wearing a wrist band, etc. FPEC0710.AI
• Do not remove the upper cover of the scanner unit.
• Do not place your finger inside the laser beam window (at the bottom of the
scanner unit).
• Handle the optical unit gently, making sure not to subject it to shock.
<REMARKS>
This equipment can be used 839Y100057 or 839Y0060 scanner unit.
7.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When changing the 839Y0060 scanner unit to the 839Y100057 scanner unit,
refer to “7.1.3 Replacing the Scanner Unit (When Changing from 839Y0060 to
839Y100057)”.
{MC:7.1.3_Replacing the Scanner Unit (When changing from 839Y0060 to
839Y100057)}
Removing Procedure
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Sub-scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit}
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-65
MC-66
l When Using 839Y0060 Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure. However perform the
following when installing the scanner unit to the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor
unit.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When pushing the scanner unit against the positioning plate, push gently
without subjecting it to shock.
1. Align the scanner unit to the reinstalling position of the sub-scanning
unit/upper conveyor unit, and secure temporarily with the screws.
2. Push the two positioning brackets and protruded part on the scanner
unit against the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit at the
positions shown in the following figure.
3. Secure the scanner unit with the screws.
l When Using 839Y100057
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-66
MC-67
l When Using 839Y0060 7.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit
If the scanner unit has been replaced, the data in the scanner unit data FD or CD-R
provided with the scanner unit needs to be sent to the equipment.
1. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
2. Start the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.2_Flow of PC-Utility Operations}
3. Backup the equipment data in the PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models).
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
4. Load the scanner data FD or CD-R into the FD drive or CD-ROM drive
of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable model), and copy the
file in the FD or CD-R to the “Indv” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPMIMA\Printers\Establish name_Printer
Name\Indv).
5. When using CD-R, as files copied from CD-R are for reading only,
right-click the “Indv” file, click Properties, and unselect the “Read-only”
attribute checkbox.
6. Send the equipment data to the equipment.
CHECK/Adjusting Procedure 7. After sending the equipment data, reboot the equipment and start the
PC-Utility.
• Make sure that there is no gap between the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit
positioning plate and scanner unit positioning parts. 8. Output the grid pattern using the PC-Utility.
• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.
{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
9. Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALU FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
10. If the measured value is out of the specified value, change the value of
“Scanning Width” of the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.4 [8-1-1]_Scanning Width}
11. Measure “B” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALU FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-67
MC-67.1
12. If the measured value is out of the specified value, change the value of 7.1.3 Replacing the Scanner Unit (When Changing from
“Scanning Position”. 839Y0060 to 839Y100057)
{MU:2.4 [8-1-2]_Scanning Position} If the 839Y0060 scanner unit of an equipment malfunctions, order a 839Y100057
scanner unit and replace the current scanner unit with it.
13. Perform automatic density correction. In this case, there will be a need to attach a ferrite core to the internal wiring cable, so
{MU:2.4 [7-1]_Auto F.D.C.} the kit for attaching the ferrite core together with the scanner unit will be needed.
14. Check the film density. n Parts that Need to be Ordered
{MU:2.4 [7-2]_Check Density} • Scanner unit (839Y100057) (Includes scanner data CD-R)
• Scanner cable kit (898Y100667) (Includes ferrite core, washer, cable)
{SP:7_SCANNING OPTICS UNIT}
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-67.1
MC-67.2
n Replacing Procedure 3. Connect the coaxial cable for 839Y100057 provided in the kit. At this
time, secure the new coaxial cable using the tie band, at the position
1. Replace with the 839Y100057 scanner unit. where the tie band was cut at #3 in step 2.
{MC:7.1.1_Removal/Reinstallation}
4. Attach the ferrite core to the cable from CN2, CN3, and CN4 from the
<NOTE> PRN board at the positions shown in the figure.
At this time, secure the scanner unit to the sub-scanning unit with the two
washers (W6) provided in the scanner cable kit.
2. Remove the coaxial cable for 839Y0060 from the equipment.
5. Install the new scanner data.
{MC:7.1.2_Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit}
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-67.2
MC-68
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
8.1 Film Cooling Section Engagement Adjustment of Film Cooling Section Drive
n
Transmission Gear
Removing Procedure
n When the bracket of the film cooling section drive transmission gear has been
removed or when the fixing screws have been loosened, follow the steps below to
adjust the engagement of the film cooling section drive transmission gear.
1. Remove the following covers. <REMARKS>
• Rear cover FPEC0820.AI
• Left cover The fixing screws (TP3x6) of the bracket of the film cooling section drive transmission
• Upper cover gear are painted in yellow.
2. Remove the film cooling section. 1. Loosen the fixing screws of the film cooling section drive transmission
gear.
2. 2. While ensuring appropriate backlash (clearance) between the film
cooling section drive transmission gear and heat development unit
large gear shown in the figure, secure the fixing screws.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-68
MC-69
8.2 Heat Development Rack 3. Remove the heat development harness bracket.
Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the film cooling section.
FPEC0821.AI
{MC:8.1_Film Cooling Section}
2. Remove the heat development cover.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-69
MC-70
4. Remove the heat development rack assembly.
<NOTE>
When removing the heat development rack assembly, removing the front
and rear fixing pins will separate the heater assembly and roller assembly.
Therefore do not remove these pins.
<NOTE>
Place the removed heat development rack assembly in the direction shown
below.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-70
MC-71
8.3 Heat Development Roller Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the heat development rack assembly. FPEC0822.AI
{MC:8.2_Heat Development Rack Assembly}
2. Remove the heat development roller.
<NOTE>
• Heat development rollers and bearings may drop if the heat development
rack assembly is tilted with the heater assembly removed.
• Do not touch the rubber portion of the removed heat development rollers
and heater side of the heater assembly with bare hand.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-71
MC-72
8.4 Thermal Protector 3. Remove the thermal protector.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the heat development rack assembly. FPEC0825.AI
{MC:8.2_Heat Development Rack Assembly}
2. Remove the heater assembly.
<NOTE>
• Heat development rollers and bearings may drop if the heat development
rack assembly is tilted with the heater assembly removed.
• Do not touch the rubber portion of the removed heat development rollers
and heater side of the heater assembly with bare hand.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-72
MC-73
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
• When attaching the thermal protector, visually check that the tip of the screw
is not protruding out to the film conveyance side. (Reference screw tightening
torque: 0.6Nm = 6kgcm)
• Take note that the attaching direction of the thermal protector connectors
differ between 1st rack assembly and 2nd rack assembly.
• For 1st rack assembly, attach so that the connectors line up in a straight
line.
• For 2nd rack assembly, attach so that connectors line up diagonally.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-73
MC-74
8.5 Heat Development Unit
Conveyance Motor (MG1)
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the following covers.
FPEC0823.AI
• Rear cover
• Left cover
2. Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.
{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide}
3. Remove the heat development unit conveyance motor (MG1).
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-74
MC-75
8.6 Heat Development Unit
Entrance Guide
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.
FPEC0824.AI
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-75
MC-76
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT 3. Remove the stay.
9.1 Film Release Unit
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the covers.
• Rear cover FPEC0910.AI
• Left cover
• Upper cover
• Film release unit cover
2. Remove the operation panel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-76
MC-77
4. Remove the film release unit.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
Secure the table to the clamp so that the table does not slack around the
density measurement light-emitting board and on the stay when reinstalling the
removal unit.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-77
MC-78
9.2 Density Measurement Light- Reinstalling Procedure
n
Emitting Board (LED28A) Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the covers.
FPEC0911.AI
• Rear cover
• Left cover
• Upper cover
• Film release unit cover
2. Remove the density measurement light-emitting board (LED28A).
CAUTION
When removing/attaching the LED28A board, do not apply strong force to the
metal stay.
Loosening/tightening the screw while pushing it with the screwdriver can
deform the metal stay, which may cause film scratches.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-78
MC-79
10. CONTROLLER 4. Remove the PSU27A/PSU28B board assembly.
10.1 PSU27A/PSU28B Board
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing
maintenance of boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to FPEC1020.AI
electronic parts on the boards.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Insert the shutter into the film tray.
2. Remove the following covers.
• Rear cover
• Left cover
3. Remove the left shield plate.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-79
MC-80
5. Remove the PSU27A board and PSU28B board.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-80
MC-81
10.2 PRN28A Board 4. Remove the PRN28A board assembly.
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing
maintenance of boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to FPEC1021.AI
electronic parts on the boards.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Insert the shutter into the film tray.
2. Remove the rear cover.
3. Remove the rear shield plate.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-81
MC-82
<NOTE>
The PRN28A board is connected to the CPU28A board by the CN7
connector. When disconnecting the CN7 connector, be careful not to
damage the board.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-82
MC-83
10.3 CPU28A Board 2. Remove CPU28A board.
CAUTION
• Replace the CPU board if the lithium battery has worn out.
• Return the old CPU board to the Parts Center (factory).
FPEC1022.AI
• Improper replacement of the battery may result in
explosion. Do not remove or replace the lithium battery by
itself.
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
• Make sure to follow this procedure as there is a possibility of fire or explosion
unless the above procedure is followed.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the PRN28A board.
{MC:10.2_PRN28A Board}
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-83
MC-83.1
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<REMARKS>
The connecting position of the CPU-J33 connector is as follows.
<NOTE>
When the CPU board of this equipment connected to CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V
CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL, or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL has been replaced,
there is a need to register the Mac address using the FFWakeOnLAN Utility of
CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL, or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR
348CL.
MU:2.4 [1-1-4]_Mac Address}
{CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL Service Manual (MC
Appendix)}
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-83.1
MC-83.2
BLANK PAGE
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-83.2
MC-84
10.4 DIMM
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing
maintenance of boards and optical units. FPEC1023.AI
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage
to electronic parts on the boards and optical units.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the CPU28A board.
{MC:10.3_CPU28A board}
2. Remove the DIMM.
<REMARKS>
DIMM is attached to the back of the CPU board.
Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-84
MC-85
10.5 CF (Compact Flash Memory)
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing
maintenance of boards. FPEC1024.AI
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage
to electronic parts on the boards.
n Removing Procedure
1. Remove the CPU28A board.
{MC:10.3_CPU28A board}
2. Remove the CF.
<REMARKS>
CF is attached to the back of the CPU board.
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-85
MC-86
11. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT
SOFTWARE
The main unit software is provided on CD-R. The DPX PRIMA Copy Tool included in
this main unit software CD-R is required for installing the main unit software.
n Installing the Main Unit Software
Copy the main unit software in the main unit software CD-R to the FTP folder of the
PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models), and install in the equipment via
the network.
<REMARKS>
The main unit software can be installed from the PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models) connected to the equipment.
{MD:1.1_Functions of Equipment}
n Types of Main Unit Software Installations
• Version upgrade:
The concerned files excluding individual data of the currently installed software are
overwritten.
• Full installation:
The concerned files including individual data of the currently installed software are
overwritten.
CAUTION
Do not perform settings, etc. of the equipment during the installation of the
main unit software.
<NOTE>
• As performing full installation will clear the individual data in the CF (Compact
Flash memory), the individual data needs to be installed after completing full
installation. Use the latest individual data for installation.
• In version upgrades, individual data will be preserved.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-86
MC-87
11.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing (or 3. Enter the drive name into [Input drive].
Settings-Changeable Models) 4. Click [Copy] of [CD->PC (Installation data copy from CD.)].
Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software using the PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable models). Use the main unit software copied to the
FTP folder in the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) when performing
full installation or version upgrading of the equipment.
<REMARKS>
To prepare for times when the PC for servicing does not have a CD drive or the main
unit software CD-R was not brought to the place where the equipment is installed, it is
recommended that “11.1.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for servicing (or
settings-changeable models)” is performed beforehand at the service center or service
station beforehand, etc.
11.1.1 Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing (or
Settings-Changeable Models)
Insert the latest main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for servicing (or
settings-changeable models), and copy the main unit software to the FTP folder of the
PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models).
1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable
model).
2. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive.
→ “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool] → The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (“Any drive letter”:\
window is displayed. Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA). When completed, the
[Success.] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R 5. [OK]
and start it.
6. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool] window.
<NOTE>
7. Unload the main unit software CD-R form the CD-ROM drive.
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive.
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on
the desktop, etc.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-87
MC-88
11.1.2 Upgrading the Version from the PC for Servicing 6. [Upgrading] → [Execute]
1. Copy the latest main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable models).
{MC:11.1.1_Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing (or
Settings-Changeable Models)}
2. Check that the preparations of the PC for servicing have been
completed. (Only when using the PC for servicing)
{MU:2.1_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}
3. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which
the equipment is connected. (Only when using the PC for servicing)
4. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
5. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models) to the equipment.
{MU:2.2.2_Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)}
→ The main unit software is transferred (version upgrade) in the equipment.
When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears.
7. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance
tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].
<REMARKS>
If the PC-Utility is ended by clicking , unless the pop-up blocker setting of
the browser is canceled, the logout screen will not be displayed.
{MU:2.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-88
MC-89
8. Close the logout window. 11.1.3 Full Installation from the PC for Servicing
9. Reboot the equipment so that the software is upgraded. 1. Copy the latest main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable models).
10. Check that the equipment whose software version has been upgraded {MC:11.1.1_Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing (or
starts and operates normally. Settings-Changeable Models)}
11. End the PC-Utility. 2. Check that the preparations of the PC for servicing have been
completed. (Only when using the PC for servicing)
12. Shutdown the PC for servicing. (Only when using the PC for servicing) {MU:2.1_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}
13. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network 3. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which
to which the equipment is connected. (Only when using the PC for the equipment is connected. (Only when using the PC for servicing)
servicing)
4. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
5. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models) to the equipment.
{MU:2.2.2_Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)}
6. If the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) does not
contain the latest individual data, import the individual data from the
equipment.
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-89
MC-90
7. [Full Install] → [Execute] 11. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models) to the equipment.
12. Restore the individual data saved in the PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models) prior to the full installation.
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
<REMARKS>
The individual data restored will become effective after the equipment is
rebooted.
13. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance
tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].
14. Close the logout window.
15. Reboot the equipment so that the individual data becomes effective.
16. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models) to the equipment.
17. Execute [1-3-2.Set Date] of the PC-Utility to set the system date and
time.
{MU:2.4 [1-3-2]_Set Date}
→ The main unit software is transferred (full installation) in the equipment.
When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears. 18. Execute [1-2-1.Set Rem.Films] of the PC-Utility to set the remaining
number of films.
8. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance {MU:2.4 [1-2-1]_Set Rem. Films}
tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out 19. Check that the equipment which has been fully installed starts and
from the printer. Please close this page.]. operates normally.
<REMARKS>
20. End the PC-Utility.
If the PC-Utility is ended by clicking , unless the pop-up blocker setting of
the browser is canceled, the logout screen will not be displayed. 21. Shutdown the PC for servicing. (Only when using the PC for servicing)
{MU:2.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
22. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
to which the equipment is connected. (Only when using the PC for
9. Close the logout window. servicing)
10. Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit
software become effective.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-90
MC-91
12. RESTORING THE COMPACT FLASH 12.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC
MEMORY (CF) for Servicing
When the CF becomes defective while the equipment is running, it can be restored by <NOTE>
writing the main unit software. If the PC for servicing does not have a CD-ROM drive or the CD-R containing
<NOTE> the main unit software is not available at the site of installation, perform this
procedure beforehand on the service center or service station, etc.
• The CF cannot be restored if it is physically damaged.
• As all settings are initialized after restoring, there is a need to restore the
equipment individual data. 1. Connect the CF reader/writer to the PC for servicing.
• Do no use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing. Instead copy from the CD-R containing the main unit software. 2. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
3. Insert the CD-R with the main unit software into the CD-ROM drive.
l What to Prepare → The DPX PRIMA Copy Tool automatically starts, and the [DPX PRIMA Copy
• CD-ROM drive Tool] screen appears.
• CF reader/writer
4. Click [EXIT] to quit the DPX PRIMA Copy Tool.
5. Open Windows Explorer of the PC for servicing.
6. Create a new folder anywhere in the PC for servicing.
7. Copy and paste “CFImage.zip” and “DDWin.exe” in the CD-R
containing the main unit software to this new folder.
8. Double-click the “CFImage.zip” copied to decompress it.
→ The “CFImage.img” file is created.
9. To enable use of “CFImage.img”, copy the “CFImage.img” file to the
desired folder.
10. Remove the CD-R containing the main unit software from the PC for
servicing.
This ends the procedure for copying the software to the PC for servicing.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-91
MC-92
12.2 Copying the Main Unit Software to the CF 8. Click [Open].
1. Remove the CF from the equipment.
2. Insert the CF into the CF reader/writer connected to the PC for
servicing.
3. Double-click “DDWin.exe” in the PC for servicing to start DD for
Windows.
9. Click [Restore].
4. Click [Choose disk].
→ The [Choosing a disk] screen appears.
5. Select the CF reader/writer disk, and click [OK].
6. Click [Choose file].
7. Select [All files] at [Files of type], and select [CFImage.img].
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-92
MC-93
10. Click [Yes] twice until writing starts.
→ When writing ends, the following screen appears.
11. Click [Verify].
12. Click [Yes] twice until comparison starts.
→ When comparison ends, the following screen appears.
13. Execute [Safely Remove Hardware] and remove the CF.
14. Reinstall the CF in the equipment.
15. Start the equipment and then the PC-Utility.
16. Restore the equipment data in the equipment.
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
17. Reboot the equipment and check that it operates normally.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-93
MC-94
13. CLEANING THE DUST-PROOF
GLASS OF THE SCANNER UNIT
(839Y100057 ONLY)
<NOTE>
The dust-proof glass should not be cleaned inside the equipment. Remove the
scanner unit from the equipment first, and clean it outside the equipment.
If cleaned inside the equipment, dust and dirt will disperse inside the equipment,
causing other problems.
1. Remove the scanner unit from the sub-scanning unit.
{MC:7.1.1_Removal/Reinstallation}
2. Use the airblow to remove the dirt (dusts) on the dust-proof glass
attached to the laser irradiation opening.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-94
MC-95
BLANK PAGE
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-95
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE MODE (MU)(DRYPIX 6000)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
MU-1
1. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY) 1.3 Details of U-Utility Commands
The U-Utility functions are intended for both the user and service engineer. [U-1] Automatically Calibrating the Film Density
<NOTE>
Menus which can be executed differ according to the state before transition. <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Outputs the 24-steps density pattern and performs automatic density correction.
1.1 U-Utility Menu Tree [U-2] QC test pattern output
U-Utility
[U-1] Automatically Calibrating the Film Density <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
[U-2] QC test pattern output Outputs the QC test pattern and performs density measurement for image evaluation
[U-3] Resetting Film Remaining Counter of this equipment.
[U-4] Setting Sensitive Material Correction Parameters
[U-3] Resetting Film Remaining Counter
[U-5] Setting Date/Time
[U-6] Output the SMPTE pattern
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
[U-7] Mammography QC pattern output
Command for clearing the number of remaining films in the tray to zero.
<REMARKS> Use this function to replace films which have been accidentally exposed during tray
exchange, etc. (The total number of films used will not be reset.)
Every time the [Utility] button is pressed, the display changes to the next menu.
Pressing the Utility button while [U-6] is being displayed exits the Utility menu and sets
the idling state. (The number of films remaining will be displayed.) [U-4] Setting Sensitive Material Correction Parameters
1.2 Starting and Ending the U-Utility <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Used for setting the sensitivity information of film. If this setting has been changed,
the changes made will not be valid unless "[U-1] automatic density correction” is
n Starting the U-Utility executed. If the execution timing of automatic density correction is set to “Every film
In the stand-by mode, press the [Utility] button on the operation panel. pack”, perform this setting with no films on the tray. If this setting is performed after
executing automatic density correction after replacing film, there will be a need to
n Ending the U-Utility execute automatic density correction again.
U-Utility ends when its execution is completed.
[U-5] Setting Date/Time
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Set the date and time of this equipment. As this equipment does not have an
automatic summer time setting function, change the time accordingly when using in
countries with summer time.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-1
MU-2
[U-6] Output the SMPTE pattern
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for outputting SMPTE test patterns.
<OPERATIONS>
Select the SMPTE pattern output pattern number to be output.
<REMARKS>
The output parameters must be set using the PC-Utility beforehand.
{MU:2.4 [1-3-1]_Set SMPTE}
[U-7] Mammography QC pattern output
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for outputting the Mammography QC Pattern.
<REMARKS>
This function can be selected when the MammoQC function is enabled via the PC-
Utility.
The test pattern to be output is a MammoQC pattern that conforms to the NEMA/
EUREF specifications.
Use it as necessary.
{MU:2.4 [1-2-9]_Enable ManmoQC}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-2
MU-3
2. PC-UTILITY 2.1.1 Environment of PC for Servicing
PC-Utility is used for changing the settings of the equipment by directly accessing
OS
l
setup files in the equipment and editing them using FTP communication as interface. Microsoft Windows 2000(SP4)/ Windows XP Professional (SP2/SP3)/ Windows Vista
Edit this setup file on the browser of the PC for servicing . (32bit)/ Windows 7 (32bit)
{MD:1.1_Functions of Equipment} <REMARKS>
• Edition for Windows VISTA
2.1 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing Professional/ Ultimate
In order to use the PC-Utility, the Service Center or Service Station, etc. must first set • Edition for Windows 7
the directory of the FTP site. Professional/ Ultimatel
<NOTE>
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T straight cable is required for Accessories
l
connecting the PC for servicing. CD-ROM drive
<REMARKS> Network Interface
l
This manual describes the procedure for connecting the PC for servicing to this Ethernet port should be usable.
equipment via the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for External Connecting Device
l
servicing to this equipment using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T crossing
cable. CD-ROM drive
Browser
l
Internet Explorer 6/7/8/9 should be installed.
<NOTE>
When any pop-up blocker tool such as Google Toolbar is installed, the pop-up
blocker feature must be disabled.
Others
l
The FTP of the Internet Information Service should be operating.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-3
MU-4
2.1.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing 2.1.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
To perform transmission and reception of various data with the equipment, there is a
l Setting a Windows Account for the PC for Servicing need to set the FTP site directory of the PC for servicing.
The userrname and password should be registered. Described here is the setting method for an example of Windows 2000.
• User: dryprinter Settings are performed in the same way basically for Windows XP, however
• Password: fujifilm precautionary items and addition setup items may be provided.
• Access permission: Administrator {MU:2.1.6_Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing}
<REMARKS> <NOTE>
To set the FTP site directory of the PC, Internet Information Services (IIS)
The above are already set and need not be set for PCs for servicing using DI Tools for
function (one of the Windows 2000 components) is required.
FUJIFILM imager equipment other than this equipment.
This Internet Information Services (IIS) will not be installed in the standard
installation of Windows 2000. If not installed in the PC used, install it as follows.
l Setting the FTP Site Directory
The FTP site directory should be set as follows Installing the Internet Information Services (IIS)
n
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\fujifilm\DRYPIX”
{MU:2.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].
2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
4. Select the checkbox of [Internet Information Services (IIS)] from the
[Components:] list, and click [Next].
5. Follow the instructions of the [Windows Components Wizard] dialog
to install the Internet Information Services (IIS).
If the message [Insert Disk] appears halfway through to prompt for the
“Windows 2000 CD-ROM” to be inserted, insert the CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive and click [OK].
<REMARKS>
If the [Microsoft Windows 2000 CD] window appears upon inserting the “Windows
2000 CD-ROM”, click [Exit] to close the window.
6. After completing installation, click [Finish].
7. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-4
MU-5
Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
n 9. Set the directory of the FTP site (“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX) at [Local Path:] , and select the checkboxes of [Read],
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control [Write], and [Log visits].
Panel].
<NOTE>
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon. If the directory of the FTP site is not set to ““Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX”, the PC-Utility will not operate properly. If using
3. Double-click the [Internet Services Manager] icon. other applications on the same PC, after using the PC-Utility, return to the
settings noted down at step 8.
4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer] In addition, “C:\inetpub\ftproot” is the default value of Windows 2000 and
list. can be changed.
5. Check that [Default FTP Site] is set to [Running]. If set to [Stopped] or
[Pause], right-click [Default FTP Site] and select [Start].
6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and click [Properties] from the pop-up
menu.
7. Click the [Home Directory] tab.
8. Note down the path set at [Local Path:].
<NOTE>
As Windows 2000 has only one home directory for all accounts, if another
directory (folder name) has already been specified for [Local Path:], other
applications may be using it.
DRY60_G0001.ai
10. Click [OK].
11. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-5
MU-6
2.1.4 Setting Grouping Symbols 5. Click the [Time] tab.
When the [Regional Options] of the PC for servicing is not English, check the setting
of the grouping symbol, and change it if different from below. 6. Check that [Time separator] is “ : ” (colon).
n Checking Procedure
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].
2. Double-click the [Regional Options] icon.
3. Click the [Numbers] tab.
4. Check that [Decimal symbol] is “ . ” (period).
<NOTE>
If as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for [Digit
grouping symbol] and [Decimal symbol], change the symbol for [Digit
grouping symbol].
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-6
MU-7
7. Click the [Date] tab.
8. Check that [Date separator] is “ / ” (slash).
9. Click [OK].
10. Close the [Control Panel] window.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-7
MU-8
2.1.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder 4. [Make]
Create the storage folder for various data of the equipment. #1
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing.
→ The “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX SMART Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
2. Enter the FTP site root directory at [Input drive of FTP-Home].
{MU:2.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
3. Enter [Establish name] and [Printer host name].
#3 #2 #4
DRY60_G0002 ai
→ Data strage folder is created and the [Success.] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
• Data strage folder:
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXSMART\Printers\
Establish name_Printer name
• The data storage folder contains the following three empty folders:
• “Indv” folder: Location for storing individual data
• “Log” folder: Location for storing log data
• “Operation” folder: Location for storing equipment operation data
5. [OK]
6. Close all windows, and unload the main unit software CD-R.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-8
MU-9
2.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC n Windows Firewall Settings
for Servicing Like the Windows 2000 PC for servicing, implement FTP site directory settings,
When using the Windows XP (SP2) PC for servicing, the following precautions and Windows XP will also require additional setting of the TCP Port number used by the
additional settings are required for operating the service tool software. [Default FTP Site] to the Windows Firewall Exceptions. Set as follows.
n Precautions on Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) 1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] →[Control
Panel].
If IIS has not been installed in the Windows XP PC for servicing to be used, perform
the additional install in the same way.
Also, during the installing procedure, check the following.
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
1. Select the checkmark in the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] 3. Double-click the [Internet Information Services] icon.
checkbox from the [Components:] list at [Add/Remove Windows
Components], and click [Details...]. 4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer]
list.
2. Check that the checkmark is selected in the [File Transfer Protocol 5. Double-click the [FTP Sites] folder from the [Name] list.
(FTP) Service] checkbox from the [Subcomponents of Internet
Information Services (IIS):] list. If not selected, select the checkmark,
and click [OK]. 6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and select [Properties].
<NOTE> 7. At the [FTP Site] tab, note down the number displayed at [TCP Port:]
If [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service] is not selected at the of [Identification] (“21” in the following screen example).
[Subcomponents of Internet Information Services (IIS):] list, [Default FTP
Site] will be disabled, disabling directory settings of the FTP site hereafter.
DRY60_G0003.ai
3. Proceed with the installation procedure according to the instructions
displayed. DRY60_G0004.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-9
MU-10
8. Click [Cancel]. 14. Enter “FTP” in [Name:], and enter the number noted down at step 7. in
[Port number:] (“21” in the following screen example).
9. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
10. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].
11. Double-click the [Windows Firewall] icon.
12. Click the [Exceptions] tab.
DRY60_G0006.ai
15. Click [OK].
DRY60_G0005.ai
13. Click [Add Port...].
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-10
MU-11
16. Check that the checkmark of the [FTP] checkbox has been added in 17. Click the [Advanced] tab.
the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab.
<REMARKS>
18. Click [Settings] of [Network Connection Settings].
The contents of the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab of
the Windows Firewall shown below are just an example, and actual contents
displayed will differ according to the state of use of the PC for servicing (different
programs and service names may be registered).
DRY60_G0008.ai
DRY60_G0007.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-11
MU-12
19. Select the checkbox of [FTP Server] of [Advanced Settings] window. 21. Click [OK] of the [Advance Settings] window.
DRY60_G0009.ai DRY60_G0011.ai
→ This will display the [Service Settings] window.
22. Click [OK].
20. Check that host name is entered at [Name or IP address (for example
192.168.0.12) of the computer hosting this service on your network:] 23. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
then click [OK].
n Disabling Browser’s Pop-up Blocker
When the PC for servicing runs Windows XP (SP2 or later), the browser’s pop-up
blocker must be disabled.
DRY60_G0010.ai
→ Returns to the [Advanced Settings] window.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-12
MU-13
2.1.7 Settings in the Use of Windows Vista PC for Servicing 2. Select [System and Maintenance] on the [Control Panel] window.
When using the Windows Vista PC for servicing, the following precautions and
additional settings are required for operating the service tool software.
n Checking installation of IIS
Ensure that [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager] is installed on the [Control
Panel] [Administrative Tools] window.
1. Select [Control Pane] from [Start button].
DRY60_G0045E.ai
3. Select [Administrative Tools] on the [System and Maintenance]
window.
DRY60_G0044E.ai
DRY60_G0046E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-13
MU-14
4. Check if [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager] is displayed n Installing IIS
on the [Administrative Tools] window. Install IIS from [Programs and Features] of [Control Panel].
If [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is not displayed,
{MU:2.1.7_Settings in the Use of Windows Vista PC for Servicing/■Installing 1. Select [Programs] from [Control Panel].
IIS}
If [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is displayed,
{MU:2.1.7_Settings in the Use of Windows Vista PC for Servicing/■Setting
IIS}
DRY60_G0048E.ai
2. Select [Programs and Features] from [Programs].
DRY60_G0047E.ai
DRY60_G0049E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-14
MU-15
3. Select [Turn Windows features on or off] on the [Programs and 5. On the "Windows Features"screen, select the check boxes of "FTP
Features] window. Server" and "IIS Management Console".
Click the plus sign next to [Internet Information Services] to expand the sub
items, click [FTP Server] under [FTP Publishing Service], click [IIS Management
Console] under [Web Management Tools], and then click the [OK] button.
DRY60_G0050E.ai
4. As the [User Account Control] window is displayed, click [Continue].
DRY60_G0051E.ai
Wait for a few moments.
DRY60_G0052E.ai
6. After the window above disappears, perform [2.1.7 Settings in the Use
of Windows Vista PC for Servicing/■Checking installation of IIS] to
ensure that IIS is installed correctly.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-15
MU-16
n Setting IIS 3. Right click [Default FTP Site] on the [Internet Information Services (IIS)
Specify the Home directly for FTP on [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager] 6.0 Manager] window and select [Properties].
of [Administrative Tools].
1. Double click [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager] on the
[Control Panel] window.
DRY60_G0054E.ai
DRY60_G0053E.ai
2. As the [User Account Control] window is displayed, click [Continue].
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-16
MU-17
4. Open the [Home Directory] tab from the [Default FTP Site Properties] n Setting Firewall
window and set the items as follows and then click [OK].
1. Select [Security]] on the [Control Panel] window.
Tick these three items.
DRY60_G0056E.ai
DRY60_G0055E.ai
2. Select [Windows Firewall] on the [Security] window.
DRY60_G0057E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-17
MU-18
3. Select [Allow a program through Windows Firewall] on the [Windows 4. Tick the following items on the [Exceptions] tab and click [OK].
Firewall] window. - Core Networking
- File and Printer Sharing
- FTP(Port:21)
- Network Discovery
DRY60_G0058E.ai
DRY60_G0059E.ai
DRY60_G0060E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-18
MU-19
2.1.8 Settings in the Use of Windows 7 PC for Servicing 3. Select [Administrative Tools] on the [System and Security] window.
When using the Windows 7 PC for servicing, the following precautions and additional [Administrative Tools].
settings are required for operating the service tool software.
n Checking installation of IIS
Ensure that [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is installed by checking
[Administrative Tools] of [Control Panel].
1. Select [Control Panel] from [Start Button].
DRY60_G0063E.ai
DRY60_G0061E.ai
2. Select [System and Security] on the [Control Panel] window.
DRY60_G0062E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-19
MU-20
4. Check if [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is displayed on n Installing IIS
the [Administrative Tools] window. Install IIS from [Programs] of [Control Panel].
{MU:2.1.8_Settings in the Use of Windows 7 PC for Servicing/■Installing
IIS} 1. Select [Programs] from the [Control Panel] window.
If [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is displayed,
{MU:2.1.8_Settings in the Use of Windows 7 PC for Servicing/■Setting IIS}
DRY60_G0065E.ai
2. Select [Turn Windows features on or off] in [Programs and Features]
on the [Programs] window.
DRY60_G0064E.ai
DRY60_G0066E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-20
MU-21
3. Tick [FTP Service] on the [Windows Features] window. n Setting IIS
Specify the home directory for the FTP on [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager]
of [Administrative Tools].
1. Select [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] on the
[Administrative Tools] window.
DRY60_G0067E.ai
Wait a few moments.
DRY60_G0069E.ai
DRY60_G0068E.ai
2. Right click the connected PC name on the [Internet Information
4. After the window above disappears, perform [2.1.8 Settings in the Use Service (IIS) Manager] window and select [Add FTP Site...].
of Windows 7 PC for Servicing/■Checking installation of IIS] to ensure
that IIS is installed correctly.
DRY60_G0070E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-21
MU-22
3. Set [FTP site name] and [Physical path] on [Site Information] of the [Add 4. Select [No SSL]] on [Binding and SSL Settings] of the [Add FTP Site]
FTP Site] window and the click [Next]. window and click [Next].
<NOTE>
Select the drive in which DI Tool is installed.
e.g.) C:\Prgram Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX
D:\Prgram Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX etc.
Enter “dryprinter”
5. Tick [Basic] of [Authentication] on the [Add FTP Site] window and
select [Specified users] of [Allow access to:]. After entering [dryprinter],
elect [Read] and [Write] of [Permissions] and click [Finish].
DRY60_G0071E.ai
DRY60_G0073E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-22
MU-23
n Setting Firewall 3. Right click [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)] and select
[Enable Rule].
1. Start [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security] from [Administrative
Tools].
DRY60_G0076E.ai
4. Restart the PC.
DRY60_G0074E.ai
2. Select [Inbound Rules] from left click menu on the [Windows Firewall
with Advanced Security] window and right click [FTP Server (FTP
Traffic-In)] to select [Enable Rule].
DRY60_G0075E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-23
MU-24
2.2 Flow of PC-Utility Operations 2.2.2 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)
Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
2.2.1 Connecting PC for Servicing to the Network 1. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
Connect PC for servicing to the network. (When using the PC for servicing)
2. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.
1. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which
the equipment is connected. 3. Enter the following address in the address bar, and then press the
<ENTER> key on the key board.
http://“default IP address of this equipment:”20051/USER/Login.htm
<NOTE>
When entering the address, discriminate between upper and lower cases.
<REMARKS>
When the IP address is the factory default value, the URL is as follows:
http://172.16.1.30:20051/USER/Login.htm
→ The login screen is displayed.
DRY60_G0012.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-24
MU-25
3. Enter the following username and password, select the language
(English) and click [Login].
Login: dryprinter
Password: fujifilm
DRY60_G0013.ai
→ The PC-Utility starts and the maintenance tree is displayed.
<REMARKS>
• Starting the PC-Utility displays the "oFL" on the operation panel.
DRY60_G0041.ai
• Entering an incorrect user name or password displays “Login failure (Illegal login
name)” or “(Login failure (Illegal password)”.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-25
MU-26
2.2.3 PC-Utility Operations n Executing Command
Select PC-Utility menu, and perform equipment settings, etc.
l To Change the Equipment Settings
n Selecting Menu Command
1. To change the equipment settings, select/enter the setting values in
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the the command execution window, and click [Execute].
command name.
<REMARKS>
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3] is selected, scroll the command
execution window until the command is visible.
#1
[Select/Enter]
Command name Command execution window DRY60_G0015.ai
→ The command execution window appears in the upper right frame of the
window.
<REMARKS>
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3] is selected, the setting values already #2
set for the equipment are displayed in the command execution window. [Click] DRY60_G0016.ai
→ When the equipment settings have been changed successfully, [Command
completed.] is displayed.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-26
MU-27
l To Operate the Equipment l To Register A New Client
1. To check the operation of the equipment, select/enter the operation <REMARKS>
conditions, etc. in the command execution window, and click [Execute]. By using the copy function of the client setting, client values already set can be copied
→ The equipment operates according to the operation conditions. When the and reused for other client settings.
Client lists can also be edited collectively.
operation has completed successfully, [Command completed.] is displayed.
{MU:2.4 [3-4]_Read CLTInfo}
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add
Client].
2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title].
SMART
SMART
#1 #2
[Click] [Enter]
Command name
DRY60_G0017.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-27
MU-28
3. Select [Add] to create clients based on default settings. l To Delete the Client
To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title]. [Delete Client].
<NOTE>
2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].
• When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied
client for the new client. 3. [Execute]
• ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied. SMART
SMART
SMART
SMART
#1
[Select] #3
Add/Copy [Click]
#2
#1 [Select]
[Click]
#2 Command name
[Select]
Client name
DRY60_G0019.ai
→ If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed,
FPEU0211.AI
and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.
4. [Execute]
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
tree.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-28
MU-29
l To Change the Client Name l To Change the Client Settings
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Change Client Name]. name of the client whose settings is to be changed.
2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title]. 2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].
3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title]. 3. [Execute]
4. [Execute]
SMART
SMART SMART
SMART
#2
[Select]
#1
[Click] #3 #2
#1 #4 #3 Client name [Click] [Select]
[Click] [Click] [Enter]
Command name Client name
DRY60_G0021.ai
DRY60_G0020.ai
→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-29
MU-30
→ The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
4. Change the client settings.
SMART
5. [Execute]
SMART
SMART
SMART
DRY60_G0022.ai
#1 #2
[Change] [Click] DRY60_G0023.ai
→ The client settings is changed.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-30
MU-31
2.2.4 Disconnecting the Equipment 2. Close the logout window after the logout screen shows “It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.”
1. After completing settings, click [Logout] button of the maintenance SMART
tree.
SMART
[Click]
DRY60_G0024.ai
→ The equipment performs reinitialization and [oFL] disappears.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [Now logging
out from the printer. Please wait.].
<REMARKS>
If the PC-Utility was ended by clicking , the logout screen will not be
displayed unless the pop-up blocked setting of the browser is canceled.
{MU:2.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
SMART
SMART
DRY60_G0026 ai
DRY60_G0025.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-31
MU-32
2.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree A B C
PC-Utility
[1-2-13] Set Film infomation
[1] System information and setup
[1-2-14] Display indv. data
[1-1] Setting1
[1-3] Setting3
[1-1-1] Check Version
[1-3-1] Set SMPTE
[1-1-1a] Input Serial No.
[1-3-2] Set Date
[1-1-2] Set DICOM
[1-3-3] Ele Save Mode
[1-1-2-1] AE Title
[1-3-4] Set Alarm
[1-1-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title
[1-3-5] Reboot
[1-1-2-3] Port No.
[1-3-6] Film Characteristic ID
[1-1-3] Set Network
[1-3-7] Power Supply Voltage
[1-1-3-1] IP Address
[1-3-8] Recognize position on 8x10(20x25)
[1-1-3-2] Subnet Mask
[1-3-9] Recognize position on 10x12(25x30)
[1-1-3-3] Gateway
[1-3-10] Recognize position on 10x14(26x36)
[1-1-3-4] Host Name
[1-3-11] Warning at system start
[1-1-4] Display Mac address
[1-4] Initialize
[1-1-5] Registration service pc
[1-4-1] Save Data
[1-2] Setting2
[1-4-2] Initialize
[1-2-1] Set Rem. Films
[1-4-3] Recover
[1-2-2] Set Tray
[1-5] Log data
[1-2-3] Enable Film Size
[1-5-1] Display Error Log
[1-2-4] Enable QC
[1-5-2] Clear Error Log
[1-2-5] Set Target Den.
[1-5-3] Display DICOM Log
[1-2-6] Printing Dmax
[1-5-4] Logging Mode
[1-2-7] Real Dmax on film
[2] Transfer Indv. Data
[1-2-8] Adjust Dmax
[3] Client Configuration
[1-2-9] Enable ManmoQC
[3-1] Add Client
[1-2-10] Check Counters
[3-2] Delete Client
[1-2-11] Clear Counters
[3-3] Change Client Name
[1-2-12] Automated F.D.C
[3-4] Read CLTInfo
A B C D E
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-32
MU-33
D E F G H
[3-5] Clients [3-5-2] Magnify
[3-5-1] Protocol [3-5-2-1] Smoothing Type
[3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning) [3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/
[3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ Crop Behavior
[3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range [3-5-2-3] Magnification Type
(0116H Warning) [3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size
[3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox [3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type
(B604H Warning)
[3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type
[3-5-1-5] Change Film Size
[3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size
[3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout
[3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior
[3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT
[3-5-2-9] Procedure
[3-5-1-8] Use Max/Min Density
[3-5-2-10] Edge Detection
[3-5-1-9] Extension Format ID
[3-5-2-11] Detection Level
[3-5-1-10] Use Default Annotation
[3-5-2-12] Sharpness
[3-5-1-11] Change Base Color (Disable 110H[F])
[3-5-2-13] Character Color
[3-5-1-12] Define Film Size of 11x14
[3-5-3] LUT Common
[3-5-3-1] Default LUT
[3-5-3-2] Illumination
[3-5-3-3] Ambient Light
[3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)
[3-5-3-5] Default Illumination
[3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light
[3-5-3-7] Procedure
F G H I J K
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-33
MU-34
I J K L M N O
[3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8 [3-5-5-18] Default Trim
[3-5-4-1] Max Density [3-5-5-19] Requested Resolution ID
[3-5-4-2] Min Density [3-5-5-20] Default Polarity
[3-5-4-3] γTable No [3-5-5-21] Mirror
[3-5-4-4] Contrast [3-5-5-22] Margin Between Image
[3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points [3-5-5-23] Image Layout
[3-5-4-6] Density [3-5-5-24] Processing Type
[3-5-4-7] Shift [3-5-6] Annotation
[3-5-4-8] Contrast [3-5-6-1] Annotation Font
[3-5-5] Output Format [3-5-6-2] Annotation Extend
[3-5-5-1] Film Size [3-5-6-3] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/
[3-5-5-2] Medium Type Lower Left/Lower Center/Lower Right
[3-5-5-3] Film Orientation [3-6] Common
[3-5-5-4] Border Density [3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout
[3-5-5-5] Polarity [3-6-2] Association Count
[3-5-5-6] Trim [3-6-3] Logging DICOM
[3-5-5-7] Trim Width [3-6-4] Model
[3-5-5-8] Trim Density [3-6-5] Manufacturer
[3-5-5-9] Number of Copies [3-6-6] Default Client
[3-5-5-10] Print Priority [3-6-7] Requested Dmax less than 3.6
[3-5-5-11] Resolution [3-7] Sarmaker
[3-5-5-12] Default Number of Copies [4] File Transfer
[3-5-5-13] Default Print Priority [4-1] Single File
[3-5-5-14] Default Medium Type [4-2] Analysis Data
[3-5-5-15] Default Film Orientation [4-3] G-curve Data
[3-5-5-16] Default Film Size [4-4] Operation Data
[3-5-5-17] Default Border Density [5] Upgrading
[5-1] Full Install
[5-2] Upgrading
L M N O P
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-34
MU-35
P Q
[6] Output Film [8] Check Scanner
[6-1] 24-Steps [8-1] Adjusting Main Scanner
[6-2] 17-Steps [8-1-1] Scanning Width
[6-3] Cleaning Film [8-1-2] Scanning Position
[6-4] Flat pattern [8-1-3] Initialize Scanner
[6-5] Grid [8-2] Edge Sensor Monitor
[6-6] Uniformity [8-3] Reset Scanner Data
[6-7] Low Density Check Pattern [8-4] Polygonal Motor
[6-8] Sharpness Pattern [8-5] LD
[6-9] Sharpness Pattern [x2] [8-6] Initial Check
[6-10] Scanner Diag. Pattern [8-7] Prn Board Test
[6-11] Special Resolution [9] Heat- Developer
[6-12] SMPTE [9-1] Temperature
[7] F.D.C. [9-2] Heating
[7-1] Auto F.D.C. [9-3] Fan Operation
[7-2] Check Density [9-4] Temp. Control
[7-3] 24-Steps [9-5] Set Heater Temp. (on each unit)
[7-4] Display 24-Steps [9-6] Set Heater Temp. (on both HG1/HG2)
[7-5] Manual F.D.C. [10] Check Mechanism
[7-6] Set Collect.T. [10-1] Film Removing
[7-7] Clear Collect.T. [10-2] Motor Ope.
[7-8] Uniformity [10-3] Adjusting Sub Scanner
[7-8-1] Clear [10-4] Grip
[7-8-2] Manual Input [10-5] Other Actuators
[7-9] Check Internal densitometer [10-6] Sensor Monitor
[7-10] DM Sensor Monitor [10-7] Convey
[10-8] Barcode Reader
[10-9] Inter Lock Check
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-35
MU-36
2.4 Details of PC-Utility Commands [1-1-2] Set DICOM
[1] System information and setup [1-1-2-1] AE Title
<FUNCTION>
[1-1] Setting1 Command for setting the AE Title of the printer.
<INSTRUCTIONS> <DEFAULT>
Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network “DRYPIX”
administrator of the installation site.
<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the 1-byte
[1-1-1] Check Version code table.
• If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the
<FUNCTION> remaining number of digits.
Command for displaying various versions of the equipment. • The following are not accepted.
• All spaces
[1-1-1a] Input Serial No. • Space for the first digit
• First character is a number
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the serial number of the equipment and scanner unit.
[1-1-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title
<NOTE>
Do not change the values set. <FUNCTION>
Set the name of the printer for 20 pix/mm recording used in the DICOM protocol.
<DEFAULT>
“DRYPIXHIGH”
<REMARKS>
- Select the type of characters to change the screen.
- If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the
remaining number of digits.
- Characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh in
the 1-byte code table.
- The following are not accepted.
- All spaces
- Space for the first digit
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-36
MU-37
[1-1-2-3] Port No. [1-1-3] Set Network
<FUNCTION> [1-1-3-1] IP Address
Command for setting the port number used on the network.
<FUNCTION>
<DEFAULT> Command for setting the IP address used on the network.
“17238”
<DEFAULT>
<NOTE>
“172.16.1.30”
Do not set the following port numbers as they are reserved.
• 23 : Telnet port <REMARKS>
• 135, 445, 5000 : OS port • Input range: 0 to 255
• 20051, 20052 : PC-Utility port • The following are not accepted.
• “0.0.0.0”
<REMARKS> • “255.255.255.255”
Input range: 0 to 65535 • No value is entered.
[1-1-3-2] Subnet Mask
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the subnet mask used on the network.
<DEFAULT>
“255.255.0.0”
<OPERATIONS>
1. Enter the subnet mask (decimal).
<REMARKS>
• Input range: 0 to 255
• Out of input range if no value is input.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-37
MU-38
[1-1-3-3] Gateway [1-1-4] Display Mac Address
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the gateway address used on the network. The MAC address of the CPU board is displayed.
<DEFAULT> [1-1-5] Registration service pc
“0.0.0.0”
<FUNCTION>
<REMARKS>
Command for registering the PC for servicing to enable file transfer. Any unregistered
• Input range: 000 to 255 PC for servicing are limited in function and does not support “Transfer Indv. Data” and
• Invalid input: “255.255.255.255” “File Transfer” of PC-Utility.
• If no value is entered or “0.0.0.0” is entered, it will be taken as incomplete setting. <REMARKS>
Only one PC for servicing can be registered. Only the one registered last supports file
[1-1-3-4] Host Name transfer.
<FUNCTION> <DEFAULT>
Command for setting the host name used on the network. - Establish Name: “Hospital Name”
<DEFAULT> - Service PC IP Address: “172.16.1.20”
“fujiprinter”
<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower cases),
numbers, and hyphen “-”.
• The following are unaccepted.
• Space
• Less than 2 characters
• First character is a number.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-38
MU-39
[1-2] Setting2 [1-2-5] Set Target Den.
[1-2-1] Set Rem.Films <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the density of each step wedge and tolerance used when
<FUNCTION> printing the image QC pattern of U-Utility.
Command for changing the number of films remaining in each film tray. <NOTE>
[1-2-2] Set Trays The density step to be set is the middle wedge (1 to 3).
"Density 4” (Dmax) and “Density 0” (Fog) cannot be set.
<FUNCTION>
<REMARKS>
Command for setting whether film trays mounted on the equipment are used or not.
• [Density 1] : Density of the first step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 2))
<DEFAULT> • [Density 2] : Density of the second step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 3))
• [Density 3] : Density of the third step (Range: 192 to 250)]
All “ON”
[1-2-3] Enable Film Size
<DEFAULT>
<FUNCTION> “Density 0: 17±8, Density 1: 48±10, Density 2: 120±20, Density 3: 192±25, Density 4:
300±25”
Set the film size to be used on each slot.
[1-2-6] Printing Dmax
<DEFAULT>
- Slot1:[14x17/14x14] <FUNCTION>
- Slot2:[8x10] Command for setting whether to enable/disable the “density 4” step wedge for density
measurement in the QC test pattern of U–Utility.
[1-2-4] Enable QC
<NOTE>
<FUNCTION> “Density4” means the uppermost wedge (density=Dmax).
If set to disable, the guide number (4) is not shown and the density is Fog.
Command for enabling/disabling the image QC function of the U-Utility.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“ON” “OFF”
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-39
MU-40
[1-2-7] Real Dmax on film [1-2-10] Check Counters
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
When [Blue base /ML] is selected for the film base color of any tray, select of whether Command for displaying the accumulated number of film sheets used on a tray-by-
to print based on the tone type (Dmax) of the incoming image. tray basis.
<REMARKS>
[1-2-11] Clear Counters
When the setting value has been changed, perform the automatic density correction.
<FUNCTION>
<DEFAULT> Command for clearing the accumulated number of film sheets used on a tray-by-tray
basis.
“3.6”
[1-2-12] Automated F.D.C.
[1-2-8] Adjust Dmax
Use of this function is prohibited. <FUNCTION>
[1-2-9] Enable ManmoQC Command for setting the automatic execution timing of automatic density correction.
<FUNCTION> <DEFAULT>
Command for enabling/disabling the MammoQC test pattern output function of the “By each film lot No.”
User-Utility.
[1-2-13] Set Film infomation
<DEFAULT>
<FUNCTION>
“OFF” (U-7 is not displayed on the User-Utility.)
Command for setting the printing position of film information.
<REMARKS>
The test pattern to be output is a MammoQC pattern that conforms to the NEMA/ <DEFAULT>
EUREF specifications. “Upper Left”
Use it as necessary.
[1-2-14] Display indv. data
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying system file list.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-40
MU-41
[1-3] Setting3 [1-3-3] Ele Save Mode
[1-3-1] Set SMPTE <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the timer value when this equipment shifts into the power save
<FUNCTION> mode.
Command for setting parameters for printing SMPTE test patterns using U-Utility. <REMARKS>
<OPERATIONS> • This software stops the following loads in the running state.
• Heat development section temperature decrease
1. Select the setting number. • Motor excitation OFF
• Polygon motor OFF
[1]/[2]/[3]/[4]/[5]
• Under the following conditions, the equipment recovers from the power consumption
2. Select [AE Title]. mode and sets into the standby state.
• Image transfer from external equipment
3. Select [Image Matrix]. • When level 1 error occurs
[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
4. Select [LUT Number]. <DEFAULT>
[LUT1]/[LUT2]/[LUT3]/[LUT4]/[LUT5]/[LUT6]/[LUT7]/[LUT8] “0”
5. Select [Interpolation type]. [1-3-4] Set Alarm
[SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH]
<FUNCTION>
6. Select [Interpolation algorithm method]. Command for setting the ON/OFF of the operation panel alarm.
[CUBIC]/[NONE]
<DEFAULT>
[1-3-2] Set Date “ON”
<FUNCTION> [1-3-5] Reboot
Command for setting the system date and time.
<FUNCTION>
If the equipment needs to be rebooted after completing command settings, execute
this menu and reboot or shut down the equipment.
Even if the “Abnormal Operations” errors occurred, execute this menu and reboot the
equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-41
MU-42
[1-3-6] Film Characteristic ID [1-3-7] Power Supply Voltage
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting film sensivity correction value. Command for setting the power voltage of the heater.
<NOTE>
<DEFAULT>
• As 100V models are equipped with a different heater from 200V models, even
Film size Correction Correction Correction Correction if 200V/220V/230V/240V is set, there is no risk of overheating of the heater.
information 1 information 2 information 3 information 4
• If the wrong voltage is set, the equipment may set into the stand-by state
14x17 2 2 0 2 earlier or later than expected, resulting in change in recording density for the
14x14 2 2 0 2 first few films immediately after Ready.
10x14 2 2 0 2
10x12 2 2 0 2 <REMARKS>
8x10 2 2 0 2
This equipment performs heat development control by changing the pulse width of the
heater ON time according to the voltage selected.
CAUTION
Do not change the settings until instructed by the Servicing Department. <DEFAULT>
<REMARKS> “100V”
<REMARKS>
- When a DI-ML film is loaded, this setting value is automatically changed according
to the barcode information read from the film. The default value of the 200V model is “200V”.
- This setting value is changed automatically when [Blue/ML] is selected as the base
color in [Set Tray].
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-42
MU-43
[1-3-8] Recognize position on 8x10(20x25) [1-4] Initialize
<FUNCTION> [1-4-1] Save Data
Command for enabling/disabling the left/right recognize function of the 20x25 cm size
film image (8x10). <FUNCTION>
Command for saving various configuration settings (system state after installation).
<DEFAULT>
<NOTE>
“Disable”
Do not select [Manufact].
[1-3-9] Recognize position on 10x12(25x30)
<REMARKS>
<FUNCTION> The various configuration settings saved on this menu can be returned to the state
Command for enabling/disabling the left/right recognize function of the 25x30 cm size when saved, using “[1-4-3] Recover”.
film image (10x12).
<DEFAULT> [1-4-2] Initialize
“Disable”
<FUNCTION>
[1-3-10] Recognize position on 10x14(26x36) Command for executing initialization of various setting information and returning
default values set at shipment.
<FUNCTION> <NOTE>
Command for enabling/disabling the left/right recognize function of the 26x36 cm size Executing this menu initializes the following data other than the data initialized
film image (10x14). using “[1-4-3] Recover”.
• Various configuration data
<DEFAULT>
• Data on whether I/O tracer is executed
“Disable”
[1-3-11] Warning at system start [1-4-3] Recover
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Set whether to sound an alarm when the equipment is started with the shutter Command for returning configuration settings to their saved state when [Service] of
inserted. “[1-4-1] Save Data”is selected. Also initializes some data managed by the system.
<DEFAULT> <NOTE>
“Enable”(Sound an alarm at system start) • To execute this menu, save the various configuration settings beforehand
using “[1-4-1] Save Data”.
• The initialized data are as follows.
• Remaining film count
• User counter
• Error log
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-43
MU-44
[1-5] Log data
[1-5-1] Display Error Log
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying error log list.
[1-5-2] Clear Error Log
<FUNCTION>
Command for deleting error logs.
[1-5-3] Display DICOM Log
<FUNCTION>
Monitors the operating state of the software on the equipment in DICOM
communication (communication between software tasks, calculation results, etc.) saved
in the PC for servicing.
<REMARKS>
• The data for analysis which will be displayed.
• Error logs and text files of various setting information
• Communication logs (external input/formatter/formatter to printer/printer ISC)
• The time stamp of the analysis data is not guaranteed, but is of the date of
execution.
• The I/O tracer is also saved when jams occur in addition to when this menu is
executed.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-44
MU-45
[1-5-4] Logging Mode <REMARKS>
• If there is a need to acquire logs for analysis of problems, set this setting to [ON],
<FUNCTION> reproduce the phenomenon, and acquire the required log.
Command for setting whether to save log data for equipment analysis in the PC for • This setting differs according to the time the equipment was ended (End display).
servicing during termination of the equipment. When function is [ON]: Within 35 seconds
: Log to be seved, -: Log not to be saved When function is [OFF]: Within 15 seconds
Log acquisi- Non-log acqui-
Log type Details
tion mode sition mode
Records equipment failures. Cover open <DEFAULT>
Error log is also recorded as error. Magazine “OFF”
open is not taken as error.
Records ON/OFF state of sensors and
IOT motors in timechart format. Special
viewer is required for referencing.
Operation data log
Records reception of messages be-
ISC tween tasks of conveyance and print
functions.
Records control of ON/OFF of sensors
Mechanism log
and motors, etc.
Edge sensor log Records edge sensor reading values.
Records message transmission/recep-
PFIF log
tion between the formatter and printer.
Collects logs related to jams when jams
Jam log
occur.
DICOM communication log with con-
DICOM log -
nected part. Log volume is heavy.
Log on control of all applications. Re-
Main log - cords start and termination time, control
transition time with each subsystem, etc.
Analysis log
Records progress to printing after image
Output log -
processing completes.
PCUTL log - PC-Utility function processing trace.
Records results of printing request. Also
Spooler log - records information such as remaining
films when printing is requested.
Records start state between sub-sys-
Trace log -
tems on chart.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-45
MU-46
[2] Transfer Indv. Data [3] Client Configuration
<FUNCTION> [3-1] Add Client
Command for transferring individual data files. <REMARKS>
The files to be transferred are the files in the “Indv” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXSMART\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Indv). By using the copy function of the client setting, client values already set can be copied
<NOTE> and reused for other client settings.
Client lists can also be edited collectively.
To perform File Transfer, there is a need to perform “[1-1-5] Registration service {MU:2.4 [3-4]_Read CLTInfo}
pc”.
<REMARKS> 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add
Client].
Executing [PC<-Printer] transfers the file “CLTInfo.csv” in the “Indv” folder of the PC
for serving. This file is written in the format in which the setup information of each
client is partitioned by a comma like “Setting item name, setting value”.
2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title].
SMART
SMART
#1 #2
[Click] [Enter]
Command name
DRY60_G0027.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-46
MU-47
3. Select [Add] to create clients based on default settings. [3-2] Delete Client
To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title]. [Delete Client].
<NOTE>
2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].
• When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied
client for the new client. 3. [Execute]
• ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied. SMART
SMART SMART
SMART
#1
[Select] #3
Add/Copy [Click]
#2
#1 [Select]
[Click]
#2 Command name
[Select]
Client name
DRY60_G0029.ai
→ If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed,
DRY60_G0028.ai and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.
4. [Execute]
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
tree.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-47
MU-48
[3-3] Change Client Name [3-4] Read CLTInfo
Using Microsoft Excel, the “CLTinfo.csv” created when equipment data is saved can
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the be edited, and client settings can be added/revised/deleted in lists.
[Change Client Name]. This function is convenient for setting the same clients for multiple DRYPIX 6000
units.
2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title]. <NOTE>
3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title]. • Observe the following precautions when editing with software other than
Microsoft Excel.
4. [Execute] • Do not change the filename (“CLTInfo.csv”) and file format (partitioned using
SMART
comma).
• Do not use double quotations ( “ ) and commas ( , ) for annotations.
SMART • Do not delete the initially registered clients (“default”, “FCR-CSL”,
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST”).
• When adding clients, make sure none of the parameter values are insufficient.
• Make sure that parameter values are within the range prescribed in the DICOM
Confirm Statement.
#2
• Up to 64 clients can be registered.
[Select]
• Renaming a client using the editing function will register the client as the very
last one and displays it at the bottommost level of the maintenance tree.
• If the extension format has been specified, the annotation cannot be set.
n Procedure for Collectively Editing Client Settings
#1 #4 #3
[Click] [Enter] Use the “CLTInfo.csv” in the “Indv” folder loaded in the PC for servicing.
[Click]
Command name Client name
1. Save the equipment individual data of the printer.
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
DRY60_G0030.ai
→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-48
MU-49
2. Open the “Indv” folder, and open “CLTInfo.csv” located in the 4. Save the data by [Save] in the CSV format in the folder where “CLTInfo.
equipment individual data using Microsoft Excel. csv” was located.
Setting item Client name
5. Select [Read CLTInfo] of PC-Utility.
6. Select the folder storing the edited “CLTInfo.csv”.
[Service PC]
7. [Execute]
→ “CLTInfo.csv” is sent to the equipment.
8. Reboot the equipment.
DRY60_G0031.ai
3. Add/correct/delete client settings.
<REMARKS>
In the following example, “FCR-CSL” is copied and a client called “FCR-CSL2” is
added.
(1) Copy the “FCR-CSL” column.
(2) Paste the copied column to the blank column.
(3) Change the client name to “FCR-CSL2”.
(4) Change the client settings.
DRY60_G0032.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-49
MU-50
[3-5] Clients → The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
Command for setting the various parameters for the client (image output device).
SMART
<REMARKS>
The parameters related to the image processing of each client set here apply when SMART
image processing parameters are not set for the image data sent by the client.
n To Change the Client Settings
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
name of the client whose settings is to be changed.
2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].
3. [Execute]
SMART
SMART
DRY60_G0034.ai
#1
[Click] #3 #2
Client name [Click] [Select]
FPEU0214.AI
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-50
MU-51
4. Change the client settings. [3-5-1] Protocol
5. [Execute] [3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)
<FUNCTION>
SMART
SMART
Command for setting how unexpected data received should be treated.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [1: indicate] : Send error message
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how N Event Report Requests (report of events to clients)
should be treated.
<OPERATIONS>
#1
[Change]
#2
[Click]
1. Select the value to be set.
DRY60_G0035.ai
• [0: disable] : No report sent
→ The client settings is changed.
• [1: enable] : Send report
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-51
MU-52
[3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H Warning) [3-5-1-5] Change Film Size
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting how data out of range should be treated. If the film size/specified by the client differ from that of the printer, set whether to
change film.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
1. Select one of the following.
• [1: indicate] : Send error message • [0: 0116H (W)]
Enables film to be changed. Details of errors which occur when the film is
2. [Execute] changed can be set whether to send to the client or not by setting [Attribute
List error (0107H Warning)], [Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H
3. Reboot the equipment. Warning)], [Image Size is Larger than Imagebox (B604H Warning)].
• [272: 0110H (F)]
[3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H Warning) Details of errors are sent to the client, without changing the film.
• [21317: 5345H (F)]
<FUNCTION> Details of errors (unique values for FUJIFILM systems) are sent to the client,
In the BIB N-SET mode (when image data is received in frames), images are reduced without changing the film.
if they are too large to fit the image frame. Select whether to notify that the image has <REMARKS>
been reduced.
Set the following according to the client system.
<OPERATIONS>
QA-WS771 • For QA-WS771 software version A05 or later: [21317:5345H
(F)]
1. Select the value to be set. • For QA-WS771 software version A04 or earlier: [272:0110H
(F)]
• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [1: indicate] : Send error message HI-C655D • For HI-C655D software version A08/B00 or later:
[21317:5345H (F)]
2. [Execute] • For HI-C655D software version A07 or earlier: [272:0110H (F)]
CR-IR346CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
3. Reboot the equipment. for FCR XG-1)
CR-IR348CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
for FCR5000 series)
Synapse [0:0116H (W)]
Other modalities Set according to operating environment of installation site.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-52
MU-53
[3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout [3-5-1-8] Use Max/Min Density
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
If problems occur when the association of clients which are continuously connected is Command for setting whether to use the minimum density value and maximum density
disconnected at the timeout value set at the printer, set to ignore timeout. value of the equipment or client.
For details, refer to “Modality Connection List”.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Select the value to be set. • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [0: No] : Ignore timeout • [1: Modality] : Client side
• [1: Yes] : Enable timeout
<NOTE>
2. [Execute]
Select [0: No] (ignore timeout) for equipment resulting in problems. 3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use LUT information sent from the client.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: No] : LUT sent from the client is not used.
• [1: Yes] : LUT sent from the client is used.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-53
MU-54
[3-5-1-9] Extension Format ID [3-5-1-10] Use Default Annotation
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Enter the ID to differentiate the extension format used by the specific client. Select whether to use “Annotation” set at “3-5-6] Annotation”.
<NOTE> {MU:2.4 [3-5-6]_Annotation}
If the extension format is set even though annotation has been set, the following <OPERATIONS>
error message will be displayed.
“ERROR: Both ‘Extension Format ID’ and ‘Annotation’ are set.”
{MU:2.4 [3-5-6]_Annotation}
1. Select the value to be set.
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS> Select [0:No] if “CR” is set for “[3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID”.
1. Selected the ID referring to the table below. • [0: No] : Not used
• [1: Yes] : Use
Manufacturer Model ID Use Default Annotation
Siemens - SM If user requires annotation output
2. [Execute]
set by this setting, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No]. 3. Reboot the equipment.
Philips Easy Vision EV No
[3-5-1-11] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F])
HITACHI Medico DR2000 Series HM No
Clavis View HM If user requires annotation output <FUNCTION>
set by this setting, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No]. Command for enabling/disabling base color change function.
FUJIFILM QA-WS771 CR No
<OPERATIONS>
HI-C655D CR No
CR-IR346CL
(Console for FCR XG-1)
CR No 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: disable] : Disables the base color change function
CR-IR348CL CR No
(Console for FCR 5000 • [1: enable] : Enables the base color change function
series)
Synapse CR No
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-54
MU-55
[3-5-1-12] Define Film Size of 11x14 [3-5-2] Magnify
Command for setting the default value for enlargement/reduction processing.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-2-1] Smoothing Type
Command for setting whether to define 11x14” size as 25.7x36.4 cm or 27.9x35.6 cm.
<NOTE> <FUNCTION>
27.9x35.6 cm is currently not available. Command for setting the default smoothing type.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.
[1: Sharp]/[2: Medium]/[3: Smooth]
• [0: 27.9x35.6 cm]
• [1: 25.7x36.4 cm] 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-55
MU-56
[3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior n Enlargement/Reduction Processing
<FUNCTION> Setting Processing Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
Command for setting the default values if the client does not send the Requested Response status 0000H(S) B60AH(W) *1 0116H(W)
Decimate/Crop Behavior tag (image reduction treatment). Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Taking Ignoring (2020,
duction interpolation (CUBIC (2010,0060)=CUBIC, 0030), enlarges/
<OPERATIONS> DECI- interpolation). reduces image by reduces image to
MATE interpolation (CUBIC fit into image box. If
interpolation ). reducing, reduces
1. Select the required settings. image by interpola-
tion (CUBIC interpo-
• [1: DECIMATE] : Reduces images by interpolation to fit into the image box. lation).
• [2: CROP] : Cuts away the outer perimeter taking the image center as
Response status 0000H(S) B609H(W) *1 B609H(W) *1
the origin.
• [3: FAIL] : Rejects reception because the image does not fit into the Enlargement/re- Cuts away unneces- Cuts away unneces- Centers image en-
duction sary parts after cen- sary parts after cen- larged/reduced (CU-
image box. tering the specified tering the specified BIC interpolation) at
CROP
2. [Execute] image and image
box.
image and image
box.
the size specified by
(2020,0030) with the
image box, and cuts
3. Reboot the equipment. away unnecessary
parts.
Response status 0000H(S) C603H(F) C603H(F)
FAIL Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Images are not re- Images are not re-
duction interpolation (CUBIC ceived. ceived.
interpolation).
However, conditions are as follows.
• Condition 1: (2010,0060)=CUBIC. When image is larger than the image box, and
image is reduced.
• Condition 2: (2010, 0060)=NONE. When image is larger than the image box.
• Condition 3: When size specified by (2020,0030) is larger than the image box.
The meanings of response status are as follows.
B609H(W) : Image size is larger than the Image Box size. The Image has been
cropped to fit.
B60AH(W) : Image size or Combined Print Image size is larger than the Image Box
size.
Image or Combined Print Image has been decimated to fit.
*1: If B604H(W) is ignored at Protocol setting, 0000H (S) is returned.
{MU:2.4 [3-5-1-4]_Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H Warning)}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-56
MU-57
[3-5-2-3] Magnification Type [3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the magnification type. Command for setting whether to use the magnification type of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: NONE] : No magnification is implemented
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: CUBIC] : Magnification is implemented • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size
[3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type
<FUNCTION>
Command for specifying the length of the image line printed in one image frame.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use smoothing type of the equipment or the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the length. (Range: 0 to 7000)
1. Select the value to be set.
2. [Execute] • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-57
MU-58
[3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size [3-5-2-9] Procedure
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the Requested Image Size of the equipment or Command for setting the enlargement/reduction processing.
the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Select the value to be set. [0: A-VR]/[1: SSM]
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment. [3-5-2-10] Edge Detection
[3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the edge enlargement/reduction processing.
<FUNCTION> If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
Command for setting whether to use the Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior of the and [Smooth].
equipment or the client if the client does not send the Requested Decimate/Crop
Behavior tag (image reduction treatment). <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: OFF] : Edge enlargement/reduction processing is not performed.
1. Select the value to be set. • [1: ON] : Edge enlargement/reduction processing is performed.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-58
MU-59
[3-5-2-11] Detection Level [3-5-2-13] Character Color
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the edge detection level value. Command for setting the continuous emphasis density settings flag (the color
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium], specified for characters).
and [Smooth]. If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
and [Smooth].
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the edge detection level value. (Range: 1 to 1023.)
1. Select the value to be set.
2. [Execute] [0: White]/[1: Black]
3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]
[3-5-2-12] Sharpness 3. Reboot the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the sharpness adjustment parameter.
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
and [Smooth].
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the sharpness adjustment parameter. (Range: -70 to 300.)
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-59
MU-60
[3-5-3] LUT Common [3-5-3-3] Ambient Light
Set the common settings for the tone correction processing parameters.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-3-1] Default LUT
Command for setting ambient light.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for setting the default LUT number.
1. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535)
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
1. Select the LUT number. The total of the “[3-5-3-3] Ambient Light” and “[3-5-3-2] Illumination” values
should be less than 4000.
[1] to [8]
2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-3-2] Illumination [3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting illumination. Command for setting whether to use the LUT number of the equipment or the client.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535) 1. Select the value to be set.
<NOTE> • [0: Printer] : Printer side
The total of the “[3-5-3-2] Illumination” and “[3-5-3-3] Ambient Light” values • [1: Modality] : Client side
should be less than 4000.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-60
MU-61
[3-5-3-5] Default Illumination [3-5-3-7] Procedure
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the illumination settings of the equipment or the Command for setting the tone correction processing method.
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the tone correction processing method.
1. Select the value to be set. [0: SAR]/[1: BAR]
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the ambient light of the equipment or the client.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-61
MU-62
[3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8 [3-5-4-3] γ Table No
Set the default values for the tone correction processing parameters for each LUT
number (LUT1 to LUT8). <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the γ table number.
[3-5-4-1] Max Density
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the maximum density. 1. Set the γ table number.
• For SAR: 11 to 99
<OPERATIONS>
• For BAR: 1 to 20 (set within 1 to 10)
1. Set the maximum density value. 2. [Execute]
• For SAR, set the maximum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range:
0 to 360) 3. Reboot the equipment.
• For BAR, set the maximum density by percentage. (Range: 0 to 100)
[3-5-4-4] Contrast
2. [Execute]
<FUNCTION>
3. Reboot the equipment.
Command for setting the contrastr.
[3-5-4-2] Min Density
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
1. Set the contrast value.
Command for setting the minimum density.
• For SAR, set the contrast in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 10 to 400)
<OPERATIONS> • For BAR, this contrast setting does not exist for the SAR method.
1. Set the minimum density value. 2. [Execute]
• For SAR, set the minimum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (The 3. Reboot the equipment.
value of the minimum density must be lower than that of the maximum
density.) (Range: 0 to 360)
• For BAR, Min Density setting is not required.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-62
MU-63
[3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points [3-5-4-7] Shift
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of the tuning points. Command for setting the shift density.
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
used). used).
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Set the number of tuning points (Range: 0 to 5) 1. Set the shift density in multiples of 100. (Range: -100 to 100)
The [Density], [Shift], [Contrast] values must be set for each tuning point when Follow the rule of Min Density<Density ± Shift<Max Density.
the number of tuning points is set to 1 or more.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-4-8] Contrast
[3-5-4-6] Density
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting the contrast at the tuning point.
Command for setting the tuning density. For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if used).
used).
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the contrast at the tuning point in multiples of 100. (Range: 10 to
1. Set the tuning density in multiples of 100. (Range: 1 to 360) 400)
Follow the rule of Min Density<Density<Max Density.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-63
MU-64
[3-5-5] Output Format [3-5-5-3] Film Orientation
Command for setting the client-dependent default settings for the output format.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-5-1] Film Size
Set the film orientation.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for setting the default film size.
1. Select the film orientation.
<OPERATIONS> [1: PORTRAIT]/[2: LANDSCAPE]
1. Select the film size. 2. [Execute]
[1: 8x10]/[2: 10x14]/[3: 14x14]/[4: 14x17]/[5: 10x12]
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
[3-5-5-4] Border Density
3. Reboot the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-5-2] Medium Type
Command for setting the border density.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Set the default film base color.
1. Set the border density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0 to
<OPERATIONS> 300)
1. Select the film base color. 2. [Execute]
[1: Blue]/[2: Clear]
3. Reboot the equipment.
<NOTE>
Select the [1: Blue]. [3-5-5-5] Polarity
<FUNCTION>
2. [Execute]
Command for setting whether to reverse the black/white of the image.
3. Reboot the equipment. <OPERATIONS>
1. Select whether to reverse the black/white of the image.
• [1: Normal] : Black/white reversal off
• [2: Reverse] : Black/white reversal on
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-64
MU-65
[3-5-5-6] Trim [3-5-5-8] Trim Density
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to print trimming. Command for setting the image trim density.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select whether to print trimming. 1. Set the image trim density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0
• [0: OFF] : Without trim to 300)
• [1: ON] : With trim
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-5-9] Number of Copies
[3-5-5-7] Trim Width
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting the default number of print copies.
Command for setting the trim width.
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
If the setting of the “[3-5-5-6] Trim” is [OFF] the value set for the “[3-5-5-7] Trim 1. Set number of print copies. (Range: 1 to 99)
Width” will be invalid.
2. [Execute]
<OPERATIONS> 3. Reboot the equipment.
1. Set the width of the trim in pixels. (Range: 1 to 9) [3-5-5-10] Print Priority
2. [Execute] <FUNCTION>
3. Reboot the equipment. Command for setting the print priority level.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: HIGH]
• [2: MEDIUM]
• [3: LOW]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-65
MU-66
[3-5-5-11] Resolution [3-5-5-13] Default Print Priority
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the resolution (whether high density or not). Command for setting whether to use the print priority setting of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Standard] : Standard (10 pix/mm recording)
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: High] : High density (20 pix/mm recording) • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-5-12] Default Number of Copies
[3-5-5-14] Default Medium Type
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the number of copies setting of the equipment or
<FUNCTION>
the client. Command for setting the film base color priority level setting of equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-66
MU-67
[3-5-5-15] Default Film Orientation [3-5-5-17] Default Border Density
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the film orientation setting of the equipment or Command for setting whether to use the border density setting of the equipment or
the client. the client.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-5-16] Default Film Size [3-5-5-18] Default Trim
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the film size priority level setting of equipment or the client. Command for setting whether to use the print trimming setting of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-67
MU-68
[3-5-5-19] Requested Resolution ID [3-5-5-21] Mirror
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for selecting either the resolution (high or not) set on the equipment or the Command for setting film surface/back.
resolution set on the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Select the value to be set. • [0: OFF(Normal)] : Glossy side to back
• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [1: ON(Mirror)] : Glossy side to front
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-5-22] Margin Between Image
[3-5-5-20] Default Polarity
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting the margin between image frames on the film.
Command for setting whether to use reverse the black/white setting of the equipment <NOTE>
or the client.
Normally, the default value for the margin between image frames should be
<OPERATIONS> used. Do not change the default setting unless requested by a user because of
layout problems.
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side <OPERATIONS>
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute] 1. Set the margin between image frames on the film in the range of 0 to
50. (unit: pixel)
3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-68
MU-69
[3-5-5-23] Image Layout [3-5-5-24] Processing Type
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting how image frames are arranged. Command for setting the density processing calculation method.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select how image frames are arranged. 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: concentration]: • [0: Type1]
Sets the image frames in the center of the film (secures the setting value of • [1: Type2]
[Margin Between Image]). <REMARKS>
• [1: spread]:
Type 1: Density processing calculation method which interpolates the measured
Sets the image frames in the center within each of the remaining image blocks
density.
that are secured by the setting value of [Margin Between Image].
Type 2: Density processing calculation method with smoother tonal representation
<NOTE> than Type1. Tonal conversion continuity is better in low density areas
For [concentration], all images on the film must be of the same size. In below density of 0.4.
the following cases, images will be arranged by [spread] even if set to
[concentration] because image sizes vary.
• When images of different sizes are included on one film.
2. [Execute]
• When the output image size (width of image) on the film is specified
(Requested Image Size) in the image data sent from the client.
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-69
MU-70
[3-5-6] Annotation [3-5-6-3] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/Lower Center/
Set and enter the character string of the annotation to be printed on film. Lower Right
<NOTE>
<FUNCTION>
If annotation is set even though the extension format has been set, the following
error message will be displayed. Select the place for entering the annotation text, and enter the annotation text
“Because ‘Extension Format ID’ is set, ‘Annotation’ cannot be set.” character.
{MU:2.4 [3-5-1-10]_Extension Format ID} <OPERATIONS>
[3-5-6-1] Annotation Font 1. Select the place for entering the annotation text.
• [Upper Left] : Character string printed on the upper left corner of the film
<FUNCTION> • [Upper Center] : Character string printed on the top of the film in the center
Command for setting the font type of the annotation. • [Upper Right] : Character string printed on the upper right corner of the film
• [Lower Left] : Character string printed on the lower left corner of the film
<OPERATIONS> • [Lower Center] : Character string printed on the bottom of the film in the center
• [Lower Right] : Character string printed on the lower right corner of the film
1. Select the font.
• [0: Japanese] <NOTE>
• [1: Western]
• If annotations are set, the image area will be smaller than when
2. [Execute] annotations are not set, and image will be printed in reduced size.
• Though annotations can be printed anywhere (upper/lower, left/ center/
3. Reboot the equipment. right of the film), they may be missing at some locations. Therefore when
printing annotations at several locations, check that none is missing
[3-5-6-2] Annotation Extend during printing.
Use of this function is prohibited.
2. Enter the annotation text character in the [Value] string.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 64 one-byte size characters can be entered.
• In addition to standard characters, macros are also available.
• If the annotation character string becomes long after macro conversion, make
sure that no characters are missing.
3. [Execute]
4. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-70
MU-71
[3-6] Common [3-6-3] Logging DICOM
[3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to save the record of communication with the client as
<FUNCTION> log information, and the communication record level.
Command for setting the timeout value for network communication.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Enter the timeout value. (Unit: seconds) • [0: none] : No logging of communication record
<REMARKS> • [1: normal] : Normal log information
• [2: detail] : Detailed log information (default)
• The timeout value is the maximum time limit for the printer to wait for data to
arrive. If data does not arrive within the set time, a timeout occurs. 2. [Execute]
• Normally, use the default timeout. If this default value does not work properly
for the connected DICOM client, set the value given by the DICOM client. 3. Reboot the equipment.
• Setting range: 30 to 3600 (default value: 300)
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-6-2] Association Count
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of associations to be established together for
DICOM connection.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set according to the installation environment.
[1] to [10] (default value: 10)
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-71
MU-72
[3-6-4] Model [3-6-6] Default Client
[3-6-5] Manufacturer <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to apply parameters set at [default] for unregistered clients.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the <OPERATIONS>
printer.
1. Select the value to be set.
<OPERATIONS> • [0: Yes] : Applies the [default] settings. (default)
• [1: No] : The [default] settings will not be applied.
1. Enter the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the
printer. 2. [Execute]
<NOTE>
3. Reboot the equipment.
• Both the [Model] (manufacturing model name) and [Manufacturer]
(manufacturer name) must be no more than 64 characters long.
• This name is used by the client to acquire the name of the printer on the
network.
• Normally the default for the model and manufacturer names should be
used (Model: DRYPIX, Manufacturer: FUJIFILM Corporation respectively).
Where multiple printers are installed at a single location, each must be
identified by a unique name determined in consultation with the users.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-72
MU-73
[3-6-7] Requested Dmax less than 3.6 [3-7] Sarmaker
Perform this procedure when adjusting LUT using SAR MAKER.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use DI-ML film in equipment loaded with DI-ML film
1. In the maintenance tree, click [Sarmaker].
when printing requests below Dmax3.6 are received and at the same time DI-HL film has
run out. 2. [Execute]
{MU:2.4[1-2-7]_Real Dmax on film} → The message [Please use Sarmaker] is displayed in the lower right frame of
the PC-Utility window.
<REMARKS>
This setting cannot be made for individual trays; the setting applies to all trays. 3. Click the [Copy File Path] button.
→ The SAR MAKER directory will be copied to the Windows clipboard.
<OPERATIONS> 4. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.
1. Select the value to be set. 5. Paste the address copied to the Windows clipboard to the address bar
• [0: Accept] : Uses DI-ML film and press the <ENTER> key on the keyboard.
• [1: Reject] : DI-ML film not used (default) → The SAR MAKER directory will be displayed.
2. [Execute] <REMARKS>
Location of “ocsarmk.exe”:
3. Reboot the equipment. “Any drive letter”:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPXSMART\ocsarmk.exe
(FTP site directory\DPXSMART\ocsarmk.exe)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-73
MU-74
6. Double-click “ocsarmk.exe”. 10. Select [GAMMA No.].
→ The SAR MAKER window appears. → The tone curve (gamma curve) is drawn. (Dark red)
DRY60_G0038.ai
DRY60_G0036.ai
7. In the menu bar, click [Mode]. 11. Select the number of tuning points from [tuning point].
→ The [Mode] window appears. 12. Enter [DMAX] (maximum density) and [DMIN] (minimum density).
13. Enter [density] (density fine adjustment value), [shift] (shift density),
and [contrast] for each tuning point.
DRY60_G0037 ai
8. Select [Density] (maximum density).
9. [OK]
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-74
MU-75
14. [Adjust] 20. Close the logout window.
→ Another tone curve is drawn reflecting the entered data. (Bright red) <REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{MU:2.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
DRY60_G0039.ai
15. Go back to PC-Utility and open the client settings window. Open the
LUT settings window for the relevant client and enter the value set via
Sarmaker.
16. [Save]
→ The [save complete] window appears and the converted LUT data is saved
as “sar_savedata.txt”. The save destination is the folder “Any drive letter”:\
Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPXSMART (the same hierarchical level as
“ocsarmk.exe”).No operation is required for this file.
17. [OK]
18. Click to close SAR MAKER.
19. Click the [Logout] button in the maintenance tree to end the PC-Utility.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-75
MU-76
[4] File Transfer [4-3] G-curve Data
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for transferring gamma curve data file.
Transfer data files between the equipment and PC for servicing.
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
To perform file transfer, “[1-1-5] Registration service pc” must have been
performed in advance.
1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered.
{MU:2.4 [1-1-5]_Registration service pc}
[4-1] Single file 2. Select transfer direction.
• [PC <- Printer] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
<FUNCTION> • [PC -> Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment
Command for transferring manually selected data file to the equipment. 3. [Execute]
<REMARKS> → File transfer starts.
Files which can be sent to the equipment include parameter files and program files. When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.
[4-2] Analysis Data [4-4] Operation Data
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for transferring analysis data files from the equipment. Command for transferring operation data files from the equipment.
A log file for analysis is transferred to the “Log” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program A CSV format file is transferred to the “Operation” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXSMART\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Log) of Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXSMART\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\
the PC for servicing. Operation) of the PC for servicing.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-76
MU-77
[5] Upgrading 2. Enter the drive name into [Input drive].
Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software. 3. Click [Copy] of [Please specify the drive of FTP-Home].
Use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder in the PC for servicing when 1
performing full installation or version upgrading of the equipment.
For details on version upgrading or full installation procedure using the PC for
servicing, refer to “REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)”.
{MC:11_INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE}
<NOTE>
Before starting this procedure, the individual data should be backed up because
it will be initialized by [Full Install].
[5-1] Full Install
[5-2] Upgrading
n Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing
<OPERATIONS>
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing. 2 DRY60_G0040 ai
→ “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX SMART Copy Tool] → The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (“Any drive letter”:\
window is displayed. Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXSMART\CD-Image).
<REMARKS> → When completed, the [Success.] screen appears.
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R 4. [OK]
and start it.
5. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX SMART Copy Tool] window.
<NOTE>
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive.
6. Unload the main unit software CD-R from the CD-ROM drive.
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on
the desktop, etc.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-77
MU-78
n Transferring the Main Unit Software to the Equipment (Full [6] Output Film
Install/Upgrading)
<OPERATIONS> [6-1] 24-Steps
1. Start the PC-Utility. <FUNCTION>
Command for printing the 24-steps pattern.
2. When performing full installation, save individual data first.
[6-2] 17-Steps
3. [Full Install] or [Upgrading] → [Execute]
→ The main unit software is transferred (version upgrade or full installation) in <FUNCTION>
the equipment. Command for printing the 17-steps pattern.
When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears.
[6-3] Cleaning Film
4. Select [Reboot] of the PC-Utility menu.
Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit software <FUNCTION>
become effective.
Command for printing the cleaning film.
5. [Reboot] → [Execute]
→ [End] is displayed on the operation panel. [End] means termination processing
[6-4] Flat pattern
is currently being carried out.
The equipment will reboot after about 75 seconds. <FUNCTION>
→ “System off. Please close this page.” is displayed on the PC Utility. Command for printing the flat pattern.
6. Close the PC-Utility window. [6-5] Grid
7. If full installation has been performed, perform the following procedure <FUNCTION>
as well.
• Restoring the individual data Command for printing the grid pattern.
• Reboot the equipment
[6-6] Uniformity
• Setting the system date and time
• Setting the number of remaining films <FUNCTION>
Command for printing the uniformity measurement pattern.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-78
MU-79
[6-7] Low Density Check Pattern [7] F.D.C.
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the Low Density Check Pattern. [7-1] AUTO F.D.C.
[6-8] Sharpness Pattern <FUNCTION>
Command for printing 24-steps patterns and calculating the 24-steps density
<FUNCTION> correction value from the density data measured by the density measurement section.
Command for printing the Sharpness Pattern. <REMARKS>
The number of prints is fixed at 1.
[6-9] Sharpness Pattern [x2]
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the Sharpness Pattern [x2].
[6-10] Scanner Diag. Pattern
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the Scanner Diag. Pattern.
[6-11] Special Resolution
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the Special Resolution.
[6-7] SMPTE
<FUNCTION>
Command for selecting the number set at “[1-3-1] Set SMPTE”, and outputting
SMPTE patterns.
{MU:2.4 [1-3-1]_Set SMPTE}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-79
MU-80
[7-2] Check Density [7-3] 24-Steps
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for printing 17-steps pattern, and displaying 17-steps data measured by the Command for outputting the 24-steps pattern using the current setting value.
density measurement section.
<REMARKS> [7-4] Display 24-Steps
The number of prints is fixed at 1.
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the 24-steps density data measured by “[7-1] AUTO F.D.C.”.
l Specified Values
<NOTE>
When Dmax setting is set to “4.0 enable”,ensure that the density of the 17th step is 4.0
or higher using the external densitometer. If the equipment is rebooted after executing “[7-1] AUTO F.D.C.”, this density
Step Dmax 3.0 Dmax 3.6
data will be deleted.
1 fog fog
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3. [7-5] Manual F.D.C.
3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
<FUNCTION>
4 0.30±0.07 0.30±0.07
Command for entering the 24-steps density value measured using the external
5 0.48±0.07 0.48±0.07
densitometer, and creating density correction information.
6 0.66±0.07 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07 0.84±0.07 [7-6] Set Collect.T.
8 1.02±0.07 1.02±0.07
<FUNCTION>
9 1.20±0.07 1.20±0.07
Command for creating densitometer calibration tables for calibrating the built-in
10 1.38±0.07 1.38±0.07
densitometer.
11 1.56±0.07 1.56±0.07
<NOTE>
12 1.74±0.07 1.74±0.07
To execute this menu, “[7-3] 24-Steps” needs to be executed first.
13 1.92±0.07 1.92±0.07
14 2.10±0.09 2.10±0.09
[7-7] Clear Collect.T.
15 2.40±0.09 2.43±0.10
16 2.70±0.11 2.95±0.11 <FUNCTION>
17 3.00±0.11 3.60±0.25
Command for initializing densitometer calibration tables.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-80
MU-81
[7-8] Uniformity [7-10] DM Sensor Monitor
[7-8-1] Clear <FUNCTION>
Command for monitoring whether the density measurement sensor of the internal
<FUNCTION> densitometer is operating normally or not.
Command for returning the uniformity correction data to the state at shipment (?default <NOTE>
value) or clearing the data to zero for all specified film sizes or all sizes.
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the
l Clear Type equipment. If communication is not ended, it may not be possible to execute
other menus.
[Single]/[All]
l Clear data type
[Manufacture] : Returns to state at shipment
[Zero] : Clears to zero.
l Film Size (When “Single” is selected at “Clear Type”)
[14x17]/[14x14]/[10x14]/[10x12]/[8x10]
[7-8-2] Manual Input
<FUNCTION>
Measure the uniformity measurement pattern output at “[6-6] Uniformity” using an
external densitometer, and repeatedly enter the required number of measurement
data.
(Number=Low Density/High Density: 15 each)
<NOTE>
Correction is carried out on the film size set on the equipment.
Make sure that the film size to be measured and film size set on the equipment
are the same before executing this command.
[7-9] Check Internal densitometer
Use of this function is prohibited.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-81
MU-82
[8] Check Scanner l Example of Input
Scanning adjusting value = XXXX Adjusting direction
Enter the value. Film conveyance
[8-1] Adjusting Main Scanner direction
If minus, enter “–”. Reduction
[8-1-1] Scanning Width Enlargement
For C=300 Reference
<FUNCTION> Value entered Changes
±10 ±0.8 mm
Command for setting the main scanning width (compression rate in the main scanning
±20 ±1.6 mm
direction).
±30 ±2.4 mm
±40 ±3.2 mm
<OPERATIONS> ±50 ±4.0 mm
±60 ±4.8 mm
1. Output grid pattern using “[6-5] Grid”.
{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
2. Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
3. If out of the specified value, enter the main scanning width adjustment
value. (0 to ±120) DRY60_G0042.ai
<REMARKS>
• As the main scanning length value displayed is subject to rounding, it may not
always be the previously entered value.
• Enter the adjusting values in units of 0.1 mm.
• Entering a negative value reduces the image from the reference position.
• The changes in the value entered can be calculated by: (Value entered) x C x
10 ÷ 37000 (mm)
4. Output and check the grid pattern again.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-82
MU-83
[8-1-2] Scanning Position [8-1-3] Initialize Scanner
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the scanning position in the main scanning direction. Command for initializing the scanning width adjusting values and scanning position
adjusting values.
<OPERATIONS>
[8-2] Edge Sensor Monitor
1. Output grid pattern using “[6-5] Grid”.
{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid} <FUNCTION>
2. Measure “B” of the output film and check that it is within the specified Command for monitoring changes in the film edge sensor (SD5) used in the
correction of the scanning position. This monitoring of changes allows checking of the
value. quantitative film tilt degree during printing, and checking of the film edge sensor alone.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE} <REMARKS>
3. If out of the specified value, enter the scanning position adjustment The following are displayed:
value. (0 to ±120) • Current value (pixel value and counter value, average value during printing)
• Maximum value (pixel value and counter value: maximum value during monitoring,
<REMARKS> value only during printing)
Enter the adjusting values in units of 0.1 mm. • Minimum value (pixel value and counter value: minimum value during monitoring,
value only during printing)
4. Output and check the grid pattern again. • Starting Position (Reference value)
• Start position adjustment value (Reference value)
l Example of Input
Adjusting direction <NOTE>
Start point = XXXX
Film conveyance
direction
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the
XX.Xmm (+) equipment. If communication is not ended, it may not be possible to execute
(-)
other menus.
If minus, enter “–”.
When entered as "50": Enlarges by +5mm [8-3] Reset Scanner Data
When entered as "-50": Reduces by -5mm
<FUNCTION>
Command for resetting the total running time of the scanner unit to “0”.
Reset the time at this menu when replacing the scanner unit.
DRY60_G0043.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-83
MU-84
[8-4] Polygonal Motor [8-6] Initial Check
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for turning ON/OFF the polygon motor. Command for performing self-diagnosis of the scanner unit.
<REMARKS>
[8-5] LD
Execution time: Approx. 30 seconds.
<FUNCTION>
Command for turning ON/OFF the LD.
● Diagnosis Flow
START
<OPERATIONS>
Error
1. Select the value to be set. Polygon diagnosis Fatal error termination
• Fixed data Normal
• ON
• Low Error
LD diagnosis Fatal error termination
2. [Execute] Normal
Error
Start point
detection diagnosis Fatal error termination
Normal
Error
Leading edge
detection diagnosis Fatal error termination
Normal
Diagnosis end processing
END DRY60_G0077E.AI
[8-7] Prn Board Test
<FUNCTION>
Command for executing initialization diagnosis of the PRN board, and fuse and
memory check.
<REMARKS>
Execution time: Approx. 60 seconds.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-84
MU-85
[9] Heat-Developer [9-5] Set Heater Temp. (on each unit)
<FUNCTION>
[9-1] Temperature Command for setting the default of the targeted temperature of each heater.
<REMARKS>
<FUNCTION>
The displayed temperature is ten times the value and can be displayed to the first
Command for performing temperature monitoring of each thermistor. decimal point.
<REMARKS>
The displayed temperature is ten times the value and can be displayed to the first
decimal point.
<NOTE>
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the
equipment. If communication is not ended, it may not be possible to execute
other menus.
[9-2] Heating
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing the ON/OFF of each heater.
[9-3] Fan Operation
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing the ON/OFF operations of the cooling fan.
[9-4] Temp. Control
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing ON/OFF control of temperature.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-85
MU-86
[9-6] Set Heater Temp. (on both HG1/HG2) [10] Check Mechanism
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the target heater temperatures for HG1 and HG2 collectively. [10-1] Film Removing
- Standard: Default temperature
- Level(-1): Default value - 1 C <FUNCTION>
- Level(-2): Default value - 2 C Command for checking the operations of the removal mechanism.
<NOTE>
[10-2] Motor Ope.
If the heater target temperatures are set as follows, the option button for this function
cannot be selected.
- The temperatures set for HG1 and HG2 are different.
<FUNCTION>
- The set temperature does not match the value defined for each of "Standard", Command for performing individual operations of the conveyor motor.
"Level(-1)", and "Level(-2)".
<REMARKS>
If the nonuniformity shown in the figure below appears on a print output immediately
after the equipment is started, lowering the setting value using this function may
improve the print result.
Film conveyance direction
DRY60_G0079E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-86
MU-87
[10-3] Adjusting Sub Scanner [10-4] Grip
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for adjusting the film conveyance speed of the sub-scanning unit. Command for performing individual operations of the grip motor.
<REMARKS>
<OPERATIONS>
The grip state will continue unless the [Home Position] operation or re-initialization is
1. Print the grid pattern. performed.
{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
[10-5] Other Actuator
2. Select the image printed.
[Grid] <FUNCTION>
3. Select the printed film size. Command for performing individual operations of the tray lock solenoid (SOLA1).
Perform this command to release tray lock.
[14x17 (35x43cm)]/[14x14(35x35cm)]/[10x14(26x36cm)]/[10x12(25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)] <NOTE>
4. Enter the four digit average (1/10 mm unit) of “F” and “G”. To end, execute [OFF] and to turn OFF the solenoid.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
[10-6] Sensor Monitor
<REMARKS>
• Enter a value which is 10 times the average value. <FUNCTION>
• The adjustment value will be initialized when “0” is entered.
Command for performing sensor monitoring.
<NOTE>
5. [Execute] After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the
6. Print the grid pattern and check again. equipment.
[10-7] Convey
Use of this function is prohibited.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-87
MU-88
[10-8] Barcode Reader <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> ● When setting barcode in the film tray to perform reading tests
Command for executing the barcode reader reading test and checking operations of This procedure describes the case of the upper film tray as an example. When
the barcode reader when reading errors of the barcode reader occur. performing a read test for the lower film tray, replace "SOLA1" with "SOLA2" and
There are two barcode reader reading tests; one by setting the barcode in the film tray "Tray1" with "Tray2".
and reading barcodes through the filter, and the other is reading barcodes directly by
pressing the barcode against the reading area. 1. [Check Mechanism]→ [Other Actuators]→ [SOLA1]→ [ON]→ [Execute]
<INSTRUCTIONS>
2. Pull out the film tray, and set the barcode to be tested on the film tray.
For reading tests, use the barcodes pasted on the film pack for this equipment. Set a used film pack or a new one.
<REMARKS> 3. Insert the tray.
Executing the barcode reading test reads the following barcode values.
Barcode (Example)
4. [Barcode Reader]→ [Tray1]→ [Execute]
After reading, check that the value displayed on the operation panel and the
barcode value used for the reading test are the same.
● When performing reading test on the barcode reader alone
This procedure describes the case of the upper film tray as an example. When
performing a read test for the lower film tray, replace "upper film tray" with "lower film
45569840858521533691
tray", "SOLA1" with "SOLA2", and "Tray1" with "Tray2".
Barcode value (20 digits) is displayed
1. Insert the shutter into the upper film tray.
on the operation panel.
DRY60_G0078E.ai
2. [Check Mechanism]→ [Other Actuators]→ [SOLA1]→ [ON]→ [Execute]
3. Remove the upper film tray.
4. Press the barcode to be used for the reading test against the reading
area of the barcode reader.
Press the barcode of a used film pack or a new one.
5. [Barcode Reader]→ [Tray1]→ [Execute]
After reading, check that the value displayed on the operation panel and the
barcode value used for the reading test are the same.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-88
MU-89
[10-9] Inter Lock Check
<FUNCTION>
Command for checking the interlock function during installation and periodic
maintenance and inspection.
<NOTE>
Executing this menu starts the rotation of the conveyance motor (MG1) of the
heat development unit.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-89
MU-90
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-90
MU-91
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual MU-91
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
11.25.2008 00 New release for UL (00 (1) Edition) (FM5451) All pages
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
05.20.2009 01(1) New release for the field (FM5546) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 06.30.2009 02
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0 (sup-
ports multi modalities), etc) (FM5568)
1, 1.1, 1.2, 2, 7, 12, 15, 15.1-
15.4,17, 17.1, 17.2, 18, 21-69
1, 2-4, 7, 12, 21, 24-27, 56, 57,
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585)
SERVICE MANUAL
59, 60
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 1, 7, 21, 60
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) Cover
SERVICE MODE (MU)(FM-DL 100)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
MU-1
1. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY) 1.3 Details of U-Utility Commands
The U-Utility functions are intended for both the user and service engineer. [U-1] Automatic Density Correction
<NOTE>
Menus which can be executed differ according to the state before transition. <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Outputs the 24-steps density pattern and performs automatic density correction.
1.1 U-Utility Menu Tree [U-2] Outputting QC Test Pattern
U-Utility
[U-1] Automatic Density Correction <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
[U-2] Outputting a QC Test Pattern Outputs the QC test pattern and performs density measurement for image evaluation
[U-3] Reset Film Counters of this equipment.
[U-4] Setting the Sensitive Material Correction Parameter
[U-3] Reset Film Counters
[U-5] Setting the Date and Time
[U-6] SMPTE Pattern (V2.0 or later)
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
<REMARKS>
Resets the number of films remaining on the tray to the default value (number of films
Every time the [Utility] button is pressed, the display changes to the next menu. in the film pack).
Pressing the Utility button while [U-6] is being displayed exits the Utility menu and sets Use this function to replace films which have been accidentally exposed during tray
the idling state. (The number of films remaining will be displayed.) exchange, etc. (The total number of films used will not be reset.)
[U-4] Setting the Sensitive Material Correction Parameter
1.2 Starting and Ending the U-Utility
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
n Starting the U-Utility
Used for setting the sensitivity information of film. If this setting has been changed,
In the stand-by mode, press the [Utility] button on the operation panel. the changes made will not be valid unless "[U-1] automatic density correction” is
executed. If the execution timing of automatic density correction is set to “Every film
n Ending the U-Utility pack”, perform this setting with no films on the tray. If this setting is performed after
U-Utility ends when its execution is completed. executing automatic density correction after replacing film, there will be a need to
execute automatic density correction again.
[U-5] Setting the Date and Time
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Set the date and time of this equipment. As this equipment does not have an
automatic summer time setting function, change the time accordingly when using in
countries with summer time.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-1
MU-1.1
[U-6] SMPTE Pattern
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for outputting SMPTE test patterns.
<REMARKS>
This function is available in main unit software version V2.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
Select the SMPTE pattern output pattern number to be output.
<REMARKS>
The output parameters must be set using the PC-Utility beforehand.
{MU:2.4 [1-3-1]_Set SMPTE}
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-1.1
MU-1.2
BLANK PAGE
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-1.2
MU-2
2. PC-UTILITY 2.1.1 Environment of PC for Servicing
PC-Utility is used for changing the settings of the equipment by directly accessing
OS
l
setup files in the equipment and editing them using FTP communication as interface. Microsoft Windows 2000 (SP4), Windows XP Professional (SP2), or Windows Vista
Edit this setup file on the browser of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable Business SP1
models).
{MD:1.1_Functions of Equipment}
Accessories
l
CD-ROM drive
<NOTE>
This chapter describes only an outline of the PC-Utility. Network Interface
l
For details on the functions of the PC-Utility, refer to the separate “CR-IR 391CL/ Ethernet port should be usable.
CR-IR 391V CL Service Manual”.
External Connecting Device
l
CD-ROM drive
2.1 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing Browser
l
In order to use the PC-Utility, the Service Center or Service Station, etc. must first set Internet Explorer version 6 or 7 should be installed.
the directory of the FTP site.
<NOTE>
<NOTE>
When any pop-up blocker tool such as Google Toolbar is installed, the pop-up
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T straight cable is required for blocker feature must be disabled.
connecting the PC for servicing.
<REMARKS>
Others
l
The FTP of the Internet Information Service should be operating.
This manual describes the procedure for connecting the PC for servicing to this
equipment via the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for
servicing to this equipment using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T crossing
cable.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-2
MU-3
2.1.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing 2.1.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
To perform transmission and reception of various data with the equipment, there is a
l Setting a Windows Account for the PC for Servicing need to set the FTP site directory of the PC for servicing.
The userrname and password should be registered. Described here is the setting method for an example of Windows 2000.
• User: dryprinter Settings are performed in the same way basically for Windows XP, however
• Password: fujifilm precautionary items and addition setup items may be provided.
• Access permission: Administrator {MU:2.1.6_Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing}
<REMARKS> <NOTE>
To set the FTP site directory of the PC, Internet Information Services (IIS)
The above are already set and need not be set for PCs for servicing using DI Tools for
function (one of the Windows 2000 components) is required.
FUJIFILM imager equipment other than this equipment.
This Internet Information Services (IIS) will not be installed in the standard
installation of Windows 2000. If not installed in the PC used, install it as follows.
l Setting the FTP Site Directory
The FTP site directory should be set as follows Installing the Internet Information Services (IIS)
n
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\fujifilm\DRYPIX”
{MU:2.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].
2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
4. Select the checkbox of [Internet Information Services (IIS)] from the
[Components:] list, and click [Next].
5. Follow the instructions of the [Windows Components Wizard] dialog
to install the Internet Information Services (IIS).
If the message [Insert Disk] appears halfway through to prompt for the
“Windows 2000 CD-ROM” to be inserted, insert the CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive and click [OK].
<REMARKS>
If the [Microsoft Windows 2000 CD] window appears upon inserting the “Windows
2000 CD-ROM”, click [Exit] to close the window.
6. After completing installation, click [Finish].
7. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-3
MU-4
Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
n 9. Set the directory of the FTP site (“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX) at [Local Path:] , and select the checkboxes of [Read],
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control [Write], and [Log visits].
Panel].
<NOTE>
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon. If the directory of the FTP site is not set to ““Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX”, the PC-Utility will not operate properly. If using
3. Double-click the [Internet Services Manager] icon. other applications on the same PC, after using the PC-Utility, return to the
settings noted down at step 8.
4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer] In addition, “C:\inetpub\ftproot” is the default value of Windows 2000 and
list. can be changed.
5. Check that [Default FTP Site] is set to [Running]. If set to [Stopped] or
[Pause], right-click [Default FTP Site] and select [Start].
6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and click [Properties] from the pop-up
menu.
7. Click the [Home Directory] tab.
8. Note down the path set at [Local Path:].
<NOTE>
As Windows 2000 has only one home directory for all accounts, if another
directory (folder name) has already been specified for [Local Path:], other
applications may be using it.
10. Click [OK].
11. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-4
MU-5
2.1.4 Setting Grouping Symbols 5. Click the [Time] tab.
When the [Regional Options] of the PC for servicing is not English, check the setting
of the grouping symbol, and change it if different from below. 6. Check that [Time separator] is “ : ” (colon).
n Checking Procedure
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].
2. Double-click the [Regional Options] icon.
3. Click the [Numbers] tab.
4. Check that [Decimal symbol] is “ . ” (period).
<NOTE>
If as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for [Digit
grouping symbol] and [Decimal symbol], change the symbol for [Digit
grouping symbol].
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-5
MU-6
7. Click the [Date] tab.
8. Check that [Date separator] is “ / ” (slash).
9. Click [OK].
10. Close the [Control Panel] window.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-6
MU-7
2.1.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder 4. [Make]
Create the storage folder for various data of the equipment.
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable model).
→ The “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
→ Data strage folder is created and the [Success.] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
• Data strage folder:
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers\
Establish name_Printer name
2. Enter the FTP site root directory at [Input drive of FTP-Home]. • The data storage folder contains the following three empty folders:
{MU:2.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC} • “Indv” folder: Location for storing individual data
• “Log” folder: Location for storing log data
3. Enter [Establish name] and [Printer host name]. • “Operation” folder: Location for storing equipment operation data
5. [OK]
6. Close all windows, and unload the main unit software CD-R.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-7
MU-8
2.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC n Windows Firewall Settings
for Servicing Like the Windows 2000 PC for servicing, implement FTP site directory settings,
When using the Windows XP (SP2) PC for servicing, the following precautions and Windows XP will also require additional setting of the TCP Port number used by the
additional settings are required for operating the service tool software. [Default FTP Site] to the Windows Firewall Exceptions. Set as follows.
n Precautions on Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) 1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] →[Control
Panel].
If IIS has not been installed in the Windows XP PC for servicing to be used, perform
the additional install in the same way.
Also, during the installing procedure, check the following.
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
1. Select the checkmark in the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] 3. Double-click the [Internet Information Services] icon.
checkbox from the [Components:] list at [Add/Remove Windows
Components], and click [Details...]. 4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer]
list.
2. Check that the checkmark is selected in the [File Transfer Protocol 5. Double-click the [FTP Sites] folder from the [Name] list.
(FTP) Service] checkbox from the [Subcomponents of Internet
Information Services (IIS):] list. If not selected, select the checkmark,
and click [OK]. 6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and select [Properties].
<NOTE> 7. At the [FTP Site] tab, note down the number displayed at [TCP Port:]
If [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service] is not selected at the of [Identification] (“21” in the following screen example).
[Subcomponents of Internet Information Services (IIS):] list, [Default FTP
Site] will be disabled, disabling directory settings of the FTP site hereafter.
3. Proceed with the installation procedure according to the instructions
displayed.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-8
MU-9
8. Click [Cancel]. 14. Enter “FTP” in [Name:], and enter the number noted down at step 7. in
[Port number:] (“21” in the following screen example).
9. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
10. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].
11. Double-click the [Windows Firewall] icon.
12. Click the [Exceptions] tab.
15. Click [OK].
13. Click [Add Port...].
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-9
MU-10
16. Check that the checkmark of the [FTP] checkbox has been added in 17. Click the [Advanced] tab.
the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab.
<REMARKS>
18. Click [Settings] of [Network Connection Settings].
The contents of the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab of
the Windows Firewall shown below are just an example, and actual contents
displayed will differ according to the state of use of the PC for servicing (different
programs and service names may be registered).
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-10
MU-11
19. Select the checkbox of [FTP Server] of [Advanced Settings] window. 21. Click [OK] of the [Advance Settings] window.
→ This will display the [Service Settings] window.
22. Click [OK].
20. Check that host name is entered at [Name or IP address (for example
192.168.0.12) of the computer hosting this service on your network:] 23. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
then click [OK].
n Disabling Browser’s Pop-up Blocker
When the PC for servicing runs Windows XP (SP2 or later), the browser’s pop-up
blocker must be disabled.
→ Returns to the [Advanced Settings] window.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-11
MU-12
2.2 Flow of PC-Utility Operations 2.2.2 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)
Connect the communication of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models)
to the equipment.
2.2.1 Connecting PC for Servicing to the Network
Connect PC for servicing to the network. (When using the PC for servicing) 1. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
1. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which 2. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable
the equipment is connected. models).
3. Enter the following address in the address bar, and then press the
<ENTER> key on the key board.
http://“default IP address of this equipment:”20051/USER/Login.htm
<NOTE>
When entering the address, discriminate between upper and lower cases.
→ The login screen is displayed.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-12
MU-13
3. Enter the following username and password, select the language <REMARKS>
(English) and click [Login]. • Starting the PC-Utility displays the "oFL" on the operation panel.
Login: dryprinter
Password: fujifilm
• Entering an incorrect user name or password displays “Login failure (Illegal login
name)” or “(Login failure (Illegal password)”.
→ The PC-Utility starts and the maintenance tree is displayed.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-13
MU-14
2.2.3 PC-Utility Operations n Executing Command
Select PC-Utility menu, and perform equipment settings, etc.
l To Change the Equipment Settings
n Selecting Menu Command
1. To change the equipment settings, select/enter the setting values in
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the the command execution window, and click [Execute].
command name.
<REMARKS>
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3] is selected, scroll the command
execution window until the command is visible.
→ The command execution window appears in the upper right frame of the
window. → When the equipment settings have been changed successfully, [Command
<REMARKS> completed.] is displayed.
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3] is selected, the setting values already
set for the equipment are displayed in the command execution window.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-14
MU-15
l To Operate the Equipment l To Register A New Client
1. To check the operation of the equipment, select/enter the operation <REMARKS>
conditions, etc. in the command execution window, and click [Execute]. By using the copy function of the client setting, client values already set can be copied
and reused for other client settings.
Client lists can also be edited collectively.
{MU:2.4 [3-4]_Read CLTInfo}
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add
Client].
2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title].
→ The equipment operates according to the operation conditions. When the
operation has completed successfully, [Command completed.] is displayed.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-15
MU-15.1
3. Select [Add] to create clients based on default settings. l To Delete the Client
To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title]. [Delete Client].
<NOTE>
2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].
• When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied
client for the new client. 3. [Execute]
• ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied.
→ If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed,
and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.
4. [Execute]
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
tree.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-15.1
MU-15.2
l To Change the Client Name l To Change the Client Settings
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Change Client Name]. name of the client whose settings is to be changed.
2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title]. 2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].
3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title]. 3. [Execute]
4. [Execute]
→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-15.2
MU-15.3
→ The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
4. Change the client settings.
5. [Execute]
→ The client settings is changed.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-15.3
MU-15.4
BLANK PAGE
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-15.4
MU-16
2.2.4 Disconnecting the Equipment 2. Close the logout window after the logout screen shows “It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.”
1. After completing settings, click [Logout] button of the maintenance
tree.
→ The equipment performs reinitialization and [oFL] disappears.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [Now logging
out from the printer. Please wait.].
<REMARKS>
If the PC-Utility was ended by clicking , the logout screen will not be
displayed unless the pop-up blocked setting of the browser is canceled.
{MU:2.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-16
MU-17
2.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree A B
PC-Utility
[1-3] Setting3
[1] System information and setup
[1-3-1] Set SMPTE (V2.0 or later)
[1-1] Setting1
[1-3-2] Set Date
[1-1-1] Check Version
[1-3-3] Ele Save Mode
[1-1-1a] Input Serial No.
[1-3-4] Set Alarm
[1-1-2] Set DICOM
[1-3-5] Reboot
[1-1-2-1] AE Title
[1-3-6] Set Power Supply Synchronization (V2.0 or later)
[1-1-2-2] Port No.
[1-3-7] Film Characteristic ID
[1-1-3] Set Network
[1-3-8] Power Supply Voltage
[1-1-3-1] IP Address
[1-4] Log data
[1-1-3-2] Subnet Mask
[1-4-1] Display Error Log
[1-1-3-3] Gateway
[1-4-2] Clear Error Log
[1-1-3-4] Host Name
[1-4-3] Display DICOM Log
[1-1-4] Display Mac address
[1-4-4] Logging Mode
[1-1-5] Registration service pc
[1-5] Initialize
[1-2] Setting2
[1-5-1] Save Data
[1-2-1] Set Rem. Films
[1-5-2] Initialize
[1-2-2] Set Tray
[1-5-3] Recover
[1-2-3] Enable QC
[2] Transfer Indv. Data
[1-2-4] Set Target Den.
[3] Client Configuration (V2.0 or later)
[1-2-5] Printing Dmax
[3-1] Add Client
[1-2-6] Auto F.D.C.
[3-2] Delete Client
[1-2-7] Set Film infomation
[3-3] Change Client Name
[1-2-8] Display indv. data
[3-4] Read CLTInfo
A B C D
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-17
MU-17.1
C D E F G
[3-5] Clients [3-5-2] Magnify
[3-5-1] Protocol [3-5-2-1] Smoothing Type
[3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning) [3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/
[3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ Crop Behavior
[3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range [3-5-2-3] Magnification Type
(0116H Warning) [3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size
[3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox [3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type
(B604H Warning)
[3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type
[3-5-1-5] Change Film Size
[3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size
[3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout
[3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior
[3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT
[3-5-2-9] Procedure
[3-5-1-8] Precede Picking Up
[3-5-2-10] Edge Detection
[3-5-1-9] Use Max/Min Density
[3-5-2-11] Detection Level
[3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID
[3-5-2-12] Sharpness
[3-5-1-11] Use Default Annotation
[3-5-2-13] Character Color
[3-5-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable 110H[F])
[3-5-3] LUT Common
[3-5-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14
[3-5-3-1] Default LUT
[3-5-3-2] Illumination
[3-5-3-3] Ambient Light
[3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)
[3-5-3-5] Default Illumination
[3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light
[3-5-3-7] Procedure
E F G H I J
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-17.1
MU-17.2
H I J K L M N
[3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8 [3-5-5-18] Default Polarity
[3-5-4-1] Max Density [3-5-5-19] Mirror
[3-5-4-2] Min Density [3-5-5-20] Margin Between Image
[3-5-4-3] γTable No [3-5-5-21] Image Layout
[3-5-4-4] Contrast [3-5-5-22] Processing Type
[3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points [3-5-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area
[3-5-4-6] Density [3-5-5-24] Image Crop Side Area
[3-5-4-7] Shift [3-5-6] Annotation
[3-5-4-8] Contrast [3-5-6-1] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/
[3-5-5] Output Format Lower Left/Lower Center/Lower Right
[3-5-5-1] Film Size [3-6] Common
[3-5-5-2] Medium Type [3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout
[3-5-5-3] Film Orientation [3-6-2] Association Count
[3-5-5-4] Border Density [3-6-3] Logging DICOM
[3-5-5-5] Polarity [3-6-4] Model
[3-5-5-6] Trim [3-6-5] Manufacturer
[3-5-5-7] Trim Width [3-6-6] Default Client
[3-5-5-8] Trim Density [3-7] Sarmaker
[3-5-5-9] Number of Copies [4] File Transfer
[3-5-5-10] Print Priority [4-1] Single File
[3-5-5-11] Default Number of Copies [4-2] Analysis Data
[3-5-5-12] Default Print Priority [4-3] G-curve Data (V2.0 or later)
[3-5-5-13] Default Medium Type [4-4] Operation Data
[3-5-5-14] Default Film Orientation [5] Upgrading
[3-5-5-15] Default Film Size [5-1] Full Install
[3-5-5-16] Default Border Density [5-2] Upgrading
[3-5-5-17] Default Trim
K L M N O
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-17.2
MU-18
O P
[6] Output Film [10] Check Mechanism
[6-1] 24-Steps [10-1] Adjusting Sub Scanner
[6-2] 17-Steps [10-2] Other Actuators
[6-3] Cleaning Film [10-3] Sensor Monitor
[6-4] Flat pattern [10-4] Inter Lock Check
[6-5] Grid
[6-6] Uniformity
[6-7] SMPTE (V2.0 or later)
[7] F.D.C.
[7-1] Auto F.D.C.
[7-2] Check Density
[7-3] 24-Steps
[7-4] Display 24-Steps
[7-5] Manual F.D.C.
[7-6] Set Collect.T.
[7-7] Clear Collect.T.
[7-8] Uniformity
[7-8-1] Clear
[7-8-2] Manual Input
[7-9] DM Sensor Monitor
[8] Check Scanner
[8-1] Adjusting Main Scanner
[8-2] Film Characteristic ID
[8-3] Edge Sensor Monitor
[8-4] Reset Scanner Data
[9] Heat- Developer
[9-1] Temperature
[9-2] Set Heater Cond. Temp.
[9-3] Power Supply Voltage
P
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-18
MU-19
2.4 Details of PC-Utility Commands [1-1-2] Set DICOM
[1] System information and setup [1-1-2-1] AE Title
<FUNCTION>
[1-1] Setting1 Command for setting the AE Title of the printer.
<INSTRUCTIONS> <DEFAULT>
Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network “DRYPIX”
administrator of the installation site.
<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the 1-byte
[1-1-1] Check Version code table.
• If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the
<FUNCTION> remaining number of digits.
Command for displaying various versions of the equipment. • The following are not accepted.
• All spaces
[1-1-1a] Input Serial No. • Space for the first digit
• First character is a number
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the serial number of the equipment and scanner unit.
[1-1-2-2] Port No.
<NOTE>
Do not change the values set. <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the port number used on the network.
<DEFAULT>
“17238”
<NOTE>
Do not set the following port numbers as they are reserved.
• 23 : Telnet port
• 135, 445, 5000 : OS port
• 20051, 20052 : PC-Utility port
<REMARKS>
Input range: 0 to 65535
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-19
MU-20
[1-1-3] Set Network [1-1-3-3] Gateway
[1-1-3-1] IP Address <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the gateway address used on the network.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the IP address used on the network. <DEFAULT>
“0.0.0.0”
<DEFAULT>
<REMARKS>
“172.16.1.30”
• Input range: 000 to 255
<REMARKS> • Invalid input: “255.255.255.255”
• Input range: 0 to 255 • If no value is entered or “0.0.0.0” is entered, it will be taken as incomplete setting.
• The following are not accepted.
• “0.0.0.0”
• “255.255.255.255” [1-1-3-4] Host Name
• No value is entered.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the host name used on the network.
[1-1-3-2] Subnet Mask
<DEFAULT>
<FUNCTION> “fujiprinter”
Command for setting the subnet mask used on the network. <REMARKS>
<DEFAULT> • The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower cases),
numbers, and hyphen “-”.
“255.255.0.0” • The following are unaccepted.
<OPERATIONS> • Space
• Less than 2 characters
1. Enter the subnet mask (decimal). • First character is a number.
<REMARKS>
• Input range: 0 to 255
• Out of input range if no value is input.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-20
MU-21
[1-1-4] Mac Address [1-2] Setting2
<FUNCTION> [1-2-1] Set Rem.Films
The MAC address of the CPU board is displayed.
<FUNCTION>
[1-1-5] Registration service pc
Command for changing the number of films remaining in each film tray.
<FUNCTION> [1-2-2] Set Trays
Command for registering the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) to
enable file transfer. Any unregistered PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) <FUNCTION>
are limited in function and does not support “Transfer Indv. Data” and “File Transfer” of Command for setting whether film trays mounted on the equipment are used or not.
PC-Utility.
<REMARKS> <DEFAULT>
Only one PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) can be registered. Only the All “ON”
one registered last supports file transfer.
[1-2-3] Enable QC
<DEFAULT> <FUNCTION>
“172.16.1.20” Command for enabling/disabling the image QC function of the U-Utility.
<REMARKS>
<DEFAULT>
Default IP address of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL/CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL/CR-
IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL: “172.16.1.20” “ON”
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-21
MU-22
[1-2-4] Set Target Den. [1-2-7] Set Film infomation
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the density of each step wedge and tolerance used when Command for setting the printing position of film information.
printing the image QC pattern of U-Utility.
<NOTE>
<DEFAULT>
“Upper Left”
The density step to be set is the middle wedge (1 to 3).
"Density 4” (Dmax) and “Density 0” (Fog) cannot be set.
[1-2-8] Display indv. data
<REMARKS> <FUNCTION>
• [Density 1] : Density of the first step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 2)) Command for displaying system file list.
• [Density 2] : Density of the second step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 3))
• [Density 3] : Density of the third step (Range: 192 to 250)]
<DEFAULT>
“Density 1: 48, Density 2: 120, Density 3: 192”
[1-2-5] Printing Dmax
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to enable/disable the “density 4” step wedge for density
measurement in the QC test pattern of U–Utility.
<NOTE>
“Density4” means the uppermost wedge (density=Dmax).
If set to disable, the guide number (4) is not shown and the density is Fog.
<DEFAULT>
“OFF”
[1-2-6] Auto F.D.C.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the automatic execution timing of automatic density correction.
<DEFAULT>
“every pack”
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-22
MU-23
[1-3] Setting3 [1-3-3] Ele Save Mode
[1-3-1] Set SMPTE <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the timer value when this equipment shifts into the power save
<FUNCTION> mode.
Command for setting parameters for printing SMPTE test patterns using U-Utility. <REMARKS>
<REMARKS> • This software stops the following loads in the running state.
This function is available in main unit software version V2.0 or later. • Heat development section temperature decrease
• Motor excitation OFF
• Polygon motor OFF
<OPERATIONS> • Under the following conditions, the equipment recovers from the power consumption
mode and sets into the standby state.
1. Select the setting number. • Image transfer from external equipment
[1]/[2]/[3]/[4]/[5] • When level 1 error occurs
2. Select [AE Title].
<DEFAULT>
3. Select [Image Matrix]. “15”
[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
[1-3-4] Set Alarm
4. Select [LUT Number].
[LUT1]/[LUT2]/[LUT3]/[LUT4]/[LUT5]/[LUT6]/[LUT7]/[LUT8] <FUNCTION>
5. Select [Interpolation type]. Command for setting the ON/OFF of the operation panel alarm.
[SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH] <DEFAULT>
6. Select [Interpolation algorithm method]. “ON”
[CUBIC]/[NONE] [1-3-5] Reboot
[1-3-2] Set Date
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> If the equipment needs to be rebooted after completing command settings, execute
this menu and reboot or shut down the equipment.
Command for setting the system date and time. Even if the “Abnormal Operations” errors occurred, execute this menu and reboot the
equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-23
MU-24
[1-3-6] Set Power Supply Synchronization [1-3-8] Power Supply Voltage
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Normally, this equipment is set to shutdown at the same time CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR Command for setting the power voltage of the heater.
391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL is shutdown. <NOTE>
However, if the equipment is not to be shutdown together with CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR
391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL when multiple modalities are connected, set • As 100V models are equipped with a different heater from 200V models, even
this function to “OFF”. if 200V/220V/230V/240V is set, there is no risk of overheating of the heater.
<REMARKS> • If the wrong voltage is set, the equipment may set into the stand-by state
earlier or later than expected, resulting in change in recording density for the
This function is available in main unit software version V2.0 or later. first few films immediately after Ready.
[1-3-7] Film Characteristic ID <REMARKS>
This equipment performs heat development control by changing the pulse width of the
<FUNCTION> heater ON time according to the voltage selected.
Command for setting film sensivity correction value.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“100V”
Film size Correction Correction Correction Correction
information 1 information 2 information 3 information 4 <REMARKS>
14x17 2 2 0 2 The default value of the 200V model is “200V”.
14x14 2 2 0 2
10x14 2 2 2 2
10x12 2 2 2 2
8x10 2 2 2 2
CAUTION
Do not change the settings until instructed by the Servicing Department.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-24
MU-25
[1-4] Initialize [1-5] Log data
[1-4-1] Save Data [1-5-1] Display Error Log
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for saving various configuration settings (system state after installation). Command for displaying error log list.
<NOTE>
[1-5-2] Clear Error Log
Do not select [Manufact].
<FUNCTION>
<REMARKS>
Command for deleting error logs.
The various configuration settings saved on this menu can be returned to the state
when saved, using “[1-4-3] Recover”. [1-5-3] Display DICOM Log
<FUNCTION>
[1-4-2] Initialize
Monitors the operating state of the software on the equipment in DICOM
<FUNCTION> communication (communication between software tasks, calculation results, etc.) saved
in the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models).
Command for executing initialization of various setting information and returning <REMARKS>
default values set at shipment.
<NOTE> • The data for analysis which will be displayed.
• Error logs and text files of various setting information
Executing this menu initializes the following data other than the data initialized • Communication logs (external input/formatter/formatter to printer/printer ISC)
using “[1-4-3] Recover”.
• Various configuration data • The time stamp of the analysis data is not guaranteed, but is of the date of
execution.
• Data on whether I/O tracer is executed
• The I/O tracer is also saved when jams occur in addition to when this menu is
executed.
[1-4-3] Recover
<FUNCTION>
Command for returning configuration settings to their saved state when [Service] of
“[1-4-1] Save Data”is selected. Also initializes some data managed by the system.
<NOTE>
• To execute this menu, save the various configuration settings beforehand
using “[1-4-1] Save Data”.
• The initialized data are as follows.
• Remaining film count
• User counter
• Error log
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-25
MU-26
[1-5-4] Logging Mode <REMARKS>
• If there is a need to acquire logs for analysis of problems, set this setting to [ON],
<FUNCTION> reproduce the phenomenon, and acquire the required log.
Command for setting whether to save log data for equipment analysis in the PC for • This setting differs according to the time the equipment was ended (End display).
servicing (or settings-changeable models) during termination of the equipment. When function is [ON]: Within 35 seconds
: Log to be seved, -: Log not to be saved When function is [OFF]: Within 5 seconds
Log acquisi- Non-log acqui-
Log type Details
tion mode sition mode
Records equipment failures. Cover open
Error log is also recorded as error. Magazine
open is not taken as error.
Records ON/OFF state of sensors and
IOT motors in timechart format. Special
viewer is required for referencing.
Operation data log
Records reception of messages be-
ISC tween tasks of conveyance and print
functions.
Records control of ON/OFF of sensors
Mechanism log
and motors, etc.
Edge sensor log Records edge sensor reading values.
Records message transmission/recep-
PFIF log
tion between the formatter and printer.
Collects logs related to jams when jams
Jam log
occur.
DICOM communication log with con-
DICOM log -
nected part. Log volume is heavy.
Log on control of all applications. Re-
Main log - cords start and termination time, control
transition time with each subsystem, etc.
Analysis log
Records progress to printing after image
Output log -
processing completes.
PCUTL log - PC-Utility function processing trace.
Records results of printing request. Also
Spooler log - records information such as remaining
films when printing is requested.
Records start state between sub-sys-
Trace log -
tems on chart.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-26
MU-27
[2] Transfer Indv. Data
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring individual data files.
The files to be transferred are the files in the “Indv” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Indv).
<NOTE>
To perform File Transfer, there is a need to perform “[1-1-5] Registration service
pc”.
<REMARKS>
Executing [PC->Printer] transfers the file “CLTInfo.csv” in the “Indv” folder of the PC
for serving (or settings-changeable models). This file is written in the format in which
the setup information of each client is partitioned by a comma like “Setting item name,
setting value”.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-27
MU-28
[3] Client Configuration 3. Select [Add] to create clients based on default settings.
To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the
<REMARKS> client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title].
[Client Configuration] is a function available in main unit software version V2.0 or later. <NOTE>
• When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied
[3-1] Add Client client for the new client.
• ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied.
<REMARKS>
By using the copy function of the client setting, client values already set can be copied
and reused for other client settings.
Client lists can also be edited collectively.
{MU:2.4 [3-4]_Read CLTInfo}
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add
Client].
2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title].
4. [Execute]
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
tree.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-28
MU-29
[3-2] Delete Client
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Delete Client].
2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].
3. [Execute]
→ If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed,
and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-29
MU-30
[3-3] Change Client Name
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Change Client Name].
2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title].
3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title].
4. [Execute]
→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-30
MU-31
[3-4] Read CLTInfo 2. Open the “Indv” folder, and open “CLTInfo.csv” located in the
Using Microsoft Excel, the “CLTinfo.csv” created when equipment data is saved can equipment individual data using Microsoft Excel.
be edited, and client settings can be added/revised/deleted in lists.
This function is convenient for setting the same clients for multiple FM-DL 100 units.
<NOTE>
• Observe the following precautions when editing with software other than
Microsoft Excel.
• Do not change the filename (“CLTInfo.csv”) and file format (partitioned using
comma).
• Do not use double quotations ( “ ) and commas ( , ) for annotations.
• Do not delete the initially registered clients (“default”, “FCR-CSL”,
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST”).
• When adding clients, make sure none of the parameter values are insufficient.
• Make sure that parameter values are within the range prescribed in the DICOM
Confirm Statement.
• Up to 64 clients can be registered.
• Renaming a client using the editing function will register the client as the very
last one and displays it at the bottommost level of the maintenance tree.
• If the extension format has been specified, the annotation cannot be set.
3. Add/correct/delete client settings.
n Procedure for Collectively Editing Client Settings <REMARKS>
Use the “CLTInfo.csv” in the “Indv” folder loaded in the PC for servicing. In the following example, “FCR-CSL” is copied and a client called “FCR-CSL2” is
added.
1. Save the equipment individual data of the printer. (1) Copy the “FCR-CSL” column.
(2) Paste the copied column to the blank column.
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data} (3) Change the client name to “FCR-CSL2”.
(4) Change the client settings.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-31
MU-32
4. Save the data by [Save] in the CSV format in the folder where “CLTInfo.
csv” was located.
5. Select [Read CLTInfo] of PC-Utility.
6. Select the folder storing the edited “CLTInfo.csv”.
[Service PC]
7. [Execute]
→ “CLTInfo.csv” is sent to the equipment.
8. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-32
MU-33
[3-5] Clients → The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
Command for setting the various parameters for the client (image output device).
<REMARKS>
The parameters related to the image processing of each client set here apply when
image processing parameters are not set for the image data sent by the client.
n To Change the Client Settings
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
name of the client whose settings is to be changed.
2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].
3. [Execute]
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-33
MU-34
4. Change the client settings. [3-5-1] Protocol
5. [Execute] [3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how unexpected data received should be treated.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [1: indicate] : Send error message
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how N Event Report Requests (report of events to clients)
should be treated.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: disable] : No report sent
→ The client settings is changed. • [1: enable] : Send report
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-34
MU-35
[3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H Warning) [3-5-1-5] Change Film Size
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting how data out of range should be treated. If the film size/specified by the client differ from that of the printer, set whether to
change film.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
1. Select one of the following.
• [1: indicate] : Send error message • [0: 0116H (W)]
Enables film to be changed. Details of errors which occur when the film is
2. [Execute] changed can be set whether to send to the client or not by setting [Attribute
List error (0107H Warning)], [Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H
3. Reboot the equipment. Warning)], [Image Size is Larger than Imagebox (B604H Warning)].
• [272: 0110H (F)]
[3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H Warning) Details of errors are sent to the client, without changing the film.
• [21317: 5345H (F)]
<FUNCTION> Details of errors (unique values for FUJIFILM systems) are sent to the client,
In the BIB N-SET mode (when image data is received in frames), images are reduced without changing the film.
if they are too large to fit the image frame. Select whether to notify that the image has <REMARKS>
been reduced.
Set the following according to the client system.
<OPERATIONS>
QA-WS771 • For QA-WS771 software version A05 or later: [21317:5345H
(F)]
1. Select the value to be set. • For QA-WS771 software version A04 or earlier: [272:0110H
(F)]
• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [1: indicate] : Send error message HI-C655D • For HI-C655D software version A08/B00 or later:
[21317:5345H (F)]
2. [Execute] • For HI-C655D software version A07 or earlier: [272:0110H (F)]
CR-IR346CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
3. Reboot the equipment. for FCR XG-1)
CR-IR348CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
for FCR5000 series)
Synapse [0:0116H (W)]
Other modalities Set according to operating environment of installation site.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-35
MU-36
[3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout [3-5-1-8] Precede Picking Up
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
If problems occur when the association of clients which are continuously connected is Command for setting whether to use the pre-removal function for starting removal
disconnected at the timeout value set at the printer, set to ignore timeout. operations immediately after receiving the output request to increase the printing
For details, refer to “Modality Connection List”. speed.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: No] : Ignore timeout • [0: No] : The pre-removal function is not used.
• [1: Yes] : Enable timeout • [1: Yes] : The pre-removal function is used.
<NOTE> 2. [Execute]
Select [0: No] (ignore timeout) for equipment resulting in problems.
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute] [3-5-1-9] Use Max/Min Density
3. Reboot the equipment. <FUNCTION>
[3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT Command for setting whether to use the minimum density value and maximum density
value of the equipment or client.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for setting whether to use LUT information sent from the client.
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
1. Select the value to be set. • [1: Modality] : Client side
• [0: No] : LUT sent from the client is not used. 2. [Execute]
• [1: Yes] : LUT sent from the client is used.
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-36
MU-37
[3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID [3-5-1-11] Use Default Annotation
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Enter the ID to differentiate the extension format used by the specific client. Select whether to use “Annotation” set at “3-5-6] Annotation”.
<NOTE> {MU:2.4 [3-5-6]_Annotation}
If the extension format is set even though annotation has been set, the following <OPERATIONS>
error message will be displayed.
“ERROR: Both ‘Extension Format ID’ and ‘Annotation’ are set.”
{MU:2.4 [3-5-6]_Annotation}
1. Select the value to be set.
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS> Select [0:No] if “CR” is set for “[3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID”.
1. Selected the ID referring to the table below. • [0: No] : Not used
• [1: Yes] : Use
Manufacturer Model ID Use Default Annotation
Siemens - SM If user requires annotation output
2. [Execute]
set by this setting, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No]. 3. Reboot the equipment.
Philips Easy Vision EV No
[3-5-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F])
HITACHI Medico DR2000 Series HM No
Clavis View HM If user requires annotation output <FUNCTION>
set by this setting, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No]. Command for enabling/disabling base color change function.
FUJIFILM QA-WS771 CR No
<OPERATIONS>
HI-C655D CR No
CR-IR346CL
(Console for FCR XG-1)
CR No 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: disable] : Disables the base color change function
CR-IR348CL CR No
(Console for FCR 5000 • [1: enable] : Enables the base color change function
series)
Synapse CR No
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-37
MU-38
[3-5-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14 [3-5-2] Magnify
Command for setting the default value for enlargement/reduction processing.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-2-1] Smoothing Type
Command for setting whether to define 11x14” size as 25.7x36.4 cm or 27.9x35.6 cm.
<NOTE> <FUNCTION>
27.9x35.6 cm is currently not available. Command for setting the default smoothing type.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.
[1: Sharp]/[2: Medium]/[3: Smooth]
• [0: 27.9x35.6 cm]
• [1: 25.7x36.4 cm] 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-38
MU-39
[3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior n Enlargement/Reduction Processing
<FUNCTION> Setting Processing Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
Command for setting the default values if the client does not send the Requested Response status 0000H(S) B60AH(W) *1 0116H(W)
Decimate/Crop Behavior tag (image reduction treatment). Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Taking Ignoring (2020,
duction interpolation (CUBIC (2010,0060)=CUBIC, 0030), enlarges/
<OPERATIONS> DECI- interpolation). reduces image by reduces image to
MATE interpolation (CUBIC fit into image box. If
interpolation ). reducing, reduces
1. Select the required settings. image by interpola-
tion (CUBIC interpo-
• [1: DECIMATE] : Reduces images by interpolation to fit into the image box. lation).
• [2: CROP] : Cuts away the outer perimeter taking the image center as
Response status 0000H(S) B609H(W) *1 B609H(W) *1
the origin.
• [3: FAIL] : Rejects reception because the image does not fit into the Enlargement/re- Cuts away unneces- Cuts away unneces- Centers image en-
duction sary parts after cen- sary parts after cen- larged/reduced (CU-
image box. tering the specified tering the specified BIC interpolation) at
CROP
2. [Execute] image and image
box.
image and image
box.
the size specified by
(2020,0030) with the
image box, and cuts
3. Reboot the equipment. away unnecessary
parts.
Response status 0000H(S) C603H(F) C603H(F)
FAIL Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Images are not re- Images are not re-
duction interpolation (CUBIC ceived. ceived.
interpolation).
However, conditions are as follows.
• Condition 1: (2010,0060)=CUBIC. When image is larger than the image box, and
image is reduced.
• Condition 2: (2010, 0060)=NONE. When image is larger than the image box.
• Condition 3: When size specified by (2020,0030) is larger than the image box.
The meanings of response status are as follows.
B609H(W) : Image size is larger than the Image Box size. The Image has been
cropped to fit.
B60AH(W) : Image size or Combined Print Image size is larger than the Image Box
size.
Image or Combined Print Image has been decimated to fit.
*1: If B604H(W) is ignored at Protocol setting, 0000H (S) is returned.
{MU:2.4 [3-5-1-4]_Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H Warning)}
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-39
MU-40
[3-5-2-3] Magnification Type [3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the magnification type. Command for setting whether to use the magnification type of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: NONE] : No magnification is implemented
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: CUBIC] : Magnification is implemented • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size
[3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type
<FUNCTION>
Command for specifying the length of the image line printed in one image frame.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use smoothing type of the equipment or the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the length. (Range: 0 to 7000)
1. Select the value to be set.
2. [Execute] • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-40
MU-41
[3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size [3-5-2-9] Procedure
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the Requested Image Size of the equipment or Command for setting the enlargement/reduction processing.
the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Select the value to be set. [0: A-VR]/[1: SSM]
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment. [3-5-2-10] Edge Detection
[3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the edge enlargement/reduction processing.
<FUNCTION> If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
Command for setting whether to use the Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior of the and [Smooth].
equipment or the client if the client does not send the Requested Decimate/Crop
Behavior tag (image reduction treatment). <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: OFF] : Edge enlargement/reduction processing is not performed.
1. Select the value to be set. • [1: ON] : Edge enlargement/reduction processing is performed.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-41
MU-42
[3-5-2-11] Detection Level [3-5-2-13] Character Color
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the edge detection level value. Command for setting the continuous emphasis density settings flag (the color
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium], specified for characters).
and [Smooth]. If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
and [Smooth].
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the edge detection level value. (Range: 1 to 1023.)
1. Select the value to be set.
2. [Execute] [0: White]/[1: Black]
3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]
[3-5-2-12] Sharpness 3. Reboot the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the sharpness adjustment parameter.
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
and [Smooth].
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the sharpness adjustment parameter. (Range: -70 to 300.)
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-42
MU-43
[3-5-3] LUT Common [3-5-3-3] Ambient Light
Set the common settings for the tone correction processing parameters.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-3-1] Default LUT
Command for setting ambient light.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for setting the default LUT number.
1. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535)
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
1. Select the LUT number. The total of the “[3-5-3-3] Ambient Light” and “[3-5-3-2] Illumination” values
should be less than 4000.
[1] to [8]
2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-3-2] Illumination [3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting illumination. Command for setting whether to use the LUT number of the equipment or the client.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535) 1. Select the value to be set.
<NOTE> • [0: Printer] : Printer side
The total of the “[3-5-3-2] Illumination” and “[3-5-3-3] Ambient Light” values • [1: Modality] : Client side
should be less than 4000.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-43
MU-44
[3-5-3-5] Default Illumination [3-5-3-7] Procedure
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the illumination settings of the equipment or the Command for setting the tone correction processing method.
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the tone correction processing method.
1. Select the value to be set. [0: SAR]/[1: BAR]
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the ambient light of the equipment or the client.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-44
MU-45
[3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8 [3-5-4-3] γ Table No
Set the default values for the tone correction processing parameters for each LUT
number (LUT1 to LUT8). <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the γ table number.
[3-5-4-1] Max Density
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the maximum density. 1. Set the γ table number.
• For SAR: 11 to 99
<OPERATIONS>
• For BAR: 1 to 20 (set within 1 to 10)
1. Set the maximum density value. 2. [Execute]
• For SAR, set the maximum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range:
0 to 300) 3. Reboot the equipment.
• For BAR, set the maximum density by percentage. (Range: 0 to 100)
[3-5-4-4] Contrast
2. [Execute]
<FUNCTION>
3. Reboot the equipment.
Command for setting the contrastr.
[3-5-4-2] Min Density
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
1. Set the contrast value.
Command for setting the minimum density.
• For SAR, set the contrast in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 10 to 400)
<OPERATIONS> • For BAR, this contrast setting does not exist for the SAR method.
1. Set the minimum density value. 2. [Execute]
• For SAR, set the minimum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (The 3. Reboot the equipment.
value of the minimum density must be lower than that of the maximum
density.) (Range: 0 to 300)
• For BAR, Min Density setting is not required.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-45
MU-46
[3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points [3-5-4-7] Shift
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of the tuning points. Command for setting the shift density.
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
used). used).
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Set the number of tuning points (Range: 0 to 5) 1. Set the shift density in multiples of 100. (Range: -100 to 100)
The [Density], [Shift], [Contrast] values must be set for each tuning point when Follow the rule of Min Density<Density ± Shift<Max Density.
the number of tuning points is set to 1 or more.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-4-8] Contrast
[3-5-4-6] Density
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting the contrast at the tuning point.
Command for setting the tuning density. For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if used).
used).
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the contrast at the tuning point in multiples of 100. (Range: 10 to
1. Set the tuning density in multiples of 100. (Range: 1 to 300) 400)
Follow the rule of Min Density<Density<Max Density.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-46
MU-47
[3-5-5] Output Format [3-5-5-3] Film Orientation
Command for setting the client-dependent default settings for the output format.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-5-1] Film Size
Set the film orientation.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for setting the default film size.
1. Select the film orientation.
<OPERATIONS> [1: PORTRAIT]/[2: LANDSCAPE]
1. Select the film size. 2. [Execute]
[1: 8x10]/[2: 10x14]/[4: 14x17]/[5: 10x12]
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
[3-5-5-4] Border Density
3. Reboot the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-5-2] Medium Type
Command for setting the border density.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Set the default film base color.
1. Set the border density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0 to
<OPERATIONS> 300)
1. Select the film base color. 2. [Execute]
[1: Blue]/[2: Clear]
3. Reboot the equipment.
<NOTE>
Select the [1: Blue]. [3-5-5-5] Polarity
<FUNCTION>
2. [Execute]
Command for setting whether to reverse the black/white of the image.
3. Reboot the equipment. <OPERATIONS>
1. Select whether to reverse the black/white of the image.
• [1: Normal] : Black/white reversal off
• [2: Reverse] : Black/white reversal on
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-47
MU-48
[3-5-5-6] Trim [3-5-5-8] Trim Density
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to print trimming. Command for setting the image trim density.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select whether to print trimming. 1. Set the image trim density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0
• [0: OFF] : Without trim to 300)
• [1: ON] : With trim
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-5-9] Number of Copies
[3-5-5-7] Trim Width
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting the default number of print copies.
Command for setting the trim width.
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
If the setting of the “[3-5-5-6] Trim” is [OFF] the value set for the “[3-5-5-7] Trim 1. Set number of print copies. (Range: 1 to 99)
Width” will be invalid.
2. [Execute]
<OPERATIONS> 3. Reboot the equipment.
1. Set the width of the trim in pixels. (Range: 1 to 9) [3-5-5-10] Print Priority
2. [Execute] <FUNCTION>
3. Reboot the equipment. Command for setting the print priority level.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: HIGH]
• [2: MEDIUM]
• [3: LOW]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-48
MU-49
[3-5-5-11] Default Number of Copies [3-5-5-13] Default Medium Type
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the number of copies setting of the equipment or Command for setting the film base color priority level setting of equipment or the
the client. client.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-5-12] Default Print Priority [3-5-5-14] Default Film Orientation
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the print priority setting of the equipment or the Command for setting whether to use the film orientation setting of the equipment or
client. the client.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-49
MU-50
[3-5-5-15] Default Film Size [3-5-5-17] Default Trim
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the film size priority level setting of equipment or the client. Command for setting whether to use the print trimming setting of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-5-16] Default Border Density
[3-5-5-18] Default Polarity
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the border density setting of the equipment or
<FUNCTION>
the client. Command for setting whether to use reverse the black/white setting of the equipment
or the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-50
MU-51
[3-5-5-19] Mirror [3-5-5-21] Image Layout
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting film surface/back. Command for setting how image frames are arranged.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select how image frames are arranged.
• [0: OFF(Normal)] : Glossy side to back • [0: concentration]:
• [1: ON(Mirror)] : Glossy side to front Sets the image frames in the center of the film (secures the setting value of
[Margin Between Image]).
2. [Execute] • [1: spread]:
3. Reboot the equipment. Sets the image frames in the center within each of the remaining image blocks
that are secured by the setting value of [Margin Between Image].
[3-5-5-20] Margin Between Image <NOTE>
For [concentration], all images on the film must be of the same size. In
<FUNCTION> the following cases, images will be arranged by [spread] even if set to
[concentration] because image sizes vary.
Command for setting the margin between image frames on the film.
• When images of different sizes are included on one film.
<NOTE> • When the output image size (width of image) on the film is specified
Normally, the default value for the margin between image frames should be (Requested Image Size) in the image data sent from the client.
used. Do not change the default setting unless requested by a user because of
layout problems.
2. [Execute]
<OPERATIONS> 3. Reboot the equipment.
1. Set the margin between image frames on the film in the range of 0 to
50. (unit: pixel)
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-51
MU-52
[3-5-5-22] Processing Type [3-5-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the density processing calculation method. Command for setting whether the top or bottom is to be trimmed from CR image that
is larger than the image box.
<OPERATIONS> <REMARKS>
1. Select the value to be set. The applicable film sizes are 8x10 (20x25 cm), 10x14 (26x36 cm), 14x17 (35x43 cm).
• [0: Type1]
• [1: Type2] <OPERATIONS>
<REMARKS>
1. Select the value to be set.
Type 1: Density processing calculation method which interpolates the measured
density. [0: Upper]/[1: Lower]/[2: Both]
Type 2: Density processing calculation method with smoother tonal representation
than Type1. Tonal conversion continuity is better in low density areas
2. [Execute]
below density of 0.4.
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute] [3-5-5-24] Image Crop Side Area
3. Reboot the equipment. <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether the left or right is to be trimmed from CR image that is
larger than the image box.
<REMARKS>
The applicable film sizes are 8x10 (20x25 cm), 10x14 (26x36 cm).
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
[0: Left]/[1: Right]/[2: Both]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-52
MU-53
[3-5-6] Annotation [3-5-6-1] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/Lower Center/
Set and enter the character string of the annotation to be printed on film. Lower Right
<NOTE>
<FUNCTION>
If annotation is set even though the extension format has been set, the following
error message will be displayed. Select the place for entering the annotation text, and enter the annotation text
“Because ‘Extension Format ID’ is set, ‘Annotation’ cannot be set.” character.
{MU:2.4 [3-5-1-10]_Extension Format ID} <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the place for entering the annotation text.
• [Upper Left] : Character string printed on the upper left corner of the film
• [Upper Center] : Character string printed on the top of the film in the center
• [Upper Right] : Character string printed on the upper right corner of the film
• [Lower Left] : Character string printed on the lower left corner of the film
• [Lower Center] : Character string printed on the bottom of the film in the center
• [Lower Right] : Character string printed on the lower right corner of the film
<NOTE>
• If annotations are set, the image area will be smaller than when
annotations are not set, and image will be printed in reduced size.
• Though annotations can be printed anywhere (upper/lower, left/ center/
right of the film), they may be missing at some locations. Therefore when
printing annotations at several locations, check that none is missing
during printing.
2. Enter the annotation text character in the [Value] string.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 64 one-byte size characters can be entered.
• In addition to standard characters, macros are also available.
• If the annotation character string becomes long after macro conversion, make
sure that no characters are missing.
3. [Execute]
4. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-53
MU-54
[3-6] Common [3-6-3] Logging DICOM
[3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to save the record of communication with the client as
<FUNCTION> log information, and the communication record level.
Command for setting the timeout value for network communication.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Enter the timeout value. (Unit: seconds) • [0: none] : No logging of communication record
<REMARKS> • [1: normal] : Normal log information
• [2: detail] : Detailed log information (default)
• The timeout value is the maximum time limit for the printer to wait for data to
arrive. If data does not arrive within the set time, a timeout occurs. 2. [Execute]
• Normally, use the default timeout. If this default value does not work properly
for the connected DICOM client, set the value given by the DICOM client. 3. Reboot the equipment.
• Setting range: 30 to 3600 (default value: 300)
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-6-2] Association Count
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of associations to be established together for
DICOM connection.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set according to the installation environment.
[1] to [10] (default value: 10)
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-54
MU-55
[3-6-4] Model [3-6-6] Default Client
[3-6-5] Manufacturer <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to apply parameters set at [default] for unregistered clients.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the <OPERATIONS>
printer.
1. Select the value to be set.
<OPERATIONS> • [0: Yes] : Applies the [default] settings. (default)
• [1: No] : The [default] settings will not be applied.
1. Enter the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the
printer. 2. [Execute]
<NOTE>
3. Reboot the equipment.
• Both the [Model] (manufacturing model name) and [Manufacturer]
(manufacturer name) must be no more than 64 characters long.
• This name is used by the client to acquire the name of the printer on the
network.
• Normally the default for the model and manufacturer names should be
used (Model: DRYPIX, Manufacturer: FUJIFILM Corporation respectively).
Where multiple printers are installed at a single location, each must be
identified by a unique name determined in consultation with the users.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-55
MU-56
[3-7] Sarmaker 6. Double-click “ocsarmk.exe”.
Perform this procedure when adjusting LUT using SAR MAKER. → The SAR MAKER window appears.
1. In the maintenance tree, click [Sarmaker].
2. [Execute]
→ The message [Please use Sarmaker] is displayed in the lower right frame of
the PC-Utility window.
3. Click the [Copy File Path] button.
→ The SAR MAKER directory will be copied to the Windows clipboard.
4. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.
5. Paste the address copied to the Windows clipboard to the address bar
and press the <ENTER> key on the keyboard.
→ The SAR MAKER directory will be displayed.
<REMARKS>
Location of “ocsarmk.exe”:
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPXPRIMA\ocsarmk.exe
(FTP site directory\DPXPRIMA\ocsarmk.exe)
7. In the menu bar, click [Mode].
→ The [Mode] window appears.
8. Select [Density] (maximum density).
9. [OK]
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-56
MU-57
10. Select [GAMMA No.]. 14. [Adjust]
→ The tone curve (gamma curve) is drawn. (Dark red) → Another tone curve is drawn reflecting the entered data. (Bright red)
11. Select the number of tuning points from [tuning point]. 15. Go back to PC-Utility and open the client settings window. Open the
LUT settings window for the relevant client and enter the value set via
12. Enter [DMAX] (maximum density) and [DMIN] (minimum density). Sarmaker.
13. Enter [density] (density fine adjustment value), [shift] (shift density), 16. [Save]
and [contrast] for each tuning point. → The [save complete] window appears and the converted LUT data is saved
as “sar_savedata.txt”. The save destination is the folder “Any drive letter”:\
Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPXPRIMA (the same hierarchical level as
“ocsarmk.exe”).No operation is required for this file.
17. [OK]
18. Click to close SAR MAKER.
19. Click the [Logout] button in the maintenance tree to end the PC-Utility.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-57
MU-58
20. Close the logout window.
<REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{MU:2.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-58
MU-59
[4] File Transfer [4-3] G-curve Data
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for transferring gamma curve data file.
Transfer data files between the equipment and PC for servicing (or settings- <REMARKS>
changeable models).
This function is available in main unit software version V2.0 or later.
<NOTE>
To perform file transfer, “[1-1-5] Registration service pc” must have been
performed in advance. <OPERATIONS>
1. Check that the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) is
[4-1] Single file registered.
{MU:2.4 [1-1-5]_Registration service pc}
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring manually selected data file to the equipment. 2. Select transfer direction.
<REMARKS> • [PC <- Printer] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
• [PC -> Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment
Files which can be sent to the equipment include parameter files and program files.
3. [Execute]
[4-2] Analysis Data → File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
<FUNCTION> file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.
Command for transferring analysis data files from the equipment. [4-4] Operation Data
A log file for analysis is transferred to the “Log” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Log) of
the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models). <FUNCTION>
Command for transferring operation data files from the equipment.
A CSV format file is transferred to the “Operation” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\
Operation) of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models).
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-59
MU-60
[5] Upgrading 2. Enter the drive name into [Input drive].
Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software. 3. Click [Copy] of [Please specify the drive of FTP-Home].
Use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder in the PC for servicing (or
settings-changeable models) when performing full installation or version upgrading of
the equipment.
For details on version upgrading or full installation procedure using the PC for
servicing, refer to “REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)”.
{MC:11_INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE}
<NOTE>
Before starting this procedure, the individual data should be backed up because
it will be initialized by [Full Install].
[5-1] Full Install
[5-2] Upgrading
n Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing (or
settings-changeable models)
<OPERATIONS>
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable model). → The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (“Any drive letter”:\
→ “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool] Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA\CD-Image).
window is displayed. → When completed, the [Success.] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
4. [OK]
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it. 5. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool] window.
<NOTE> 6. Unload the main unit software CD-R from the CD-ROM drive.
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive.
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on
the desktop, etc.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-60
MU-61
n Transferring the Main Unit Software to the Equipment (Full
Install/Upgrading)
<OPERATIONS>
1. Start the PC-Utility.
2. When performing full installation, save individual data first.
3. [Full Install] or [Upgrading] → [Execute]
→ The main unit software is transferred (version upgrade or full installation) in
the equipment.
When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears.
4. Select [Reboot] of the PC-Utility menu.
Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit software
become effective.
5. [Reboot] → [Execute]
→ [End] is displayed on the operation panel. [End] means termination processing
is currently being carried out.
The equipment will reboot after about 75 seconds.
→ “System off. Please close this page.” is displayed on the PC Utility.
6. Close the PC-Utility window.
7. If full installation has been performed, perform the following procedure
as well.
• Restoring the individual data
• Reboot the equipment
• Setting the system date and time
• Setting the number of remaining films
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-61
MU-62
[6] Output Film [6-7] SMPTE
<FUNCTION>
[6-1] 24-Steps Command for selecting the number set at “[1-3-1] Set SMPTE”, and outputting
SMPTE patterns.
<FUNCTION> {MU:2.4 [1-3-1]_Set SMPTE}
Command for printing the 24-steps pattern. <REMARKS>
This function is available in main unit software version V2.0 or later.
[6-2] 17-Steps
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the 17-steps pattern.
[6-3] Cleaning Film
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the cleaning film.
[6-4] Flat pattern
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the flat pattern.
[6-5] Grid
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the grid pattern.
[6-6] Uniformity
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the uniformity measurement pattern.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-62
MU-63
[7] F.D.C. [7-2] Check Density
<FUNCTION>
[7-1] AUTO F.D.C. Command for printing 17-steps pattern, and displaying 17-steps data measured by the
density measurement section.
<FUNCTION> <REMARKS>
Command for printing 24-steps patterns and calculating the 24-steps density The number of prints is fixed at 1.
correction value from the density data measured by the density measurement section.
<REMARKS>
l Specified Values
The number of prints is fixed at 1.
Step Dmax 3.0
1 fog
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30±0.07
5 0.48±0.07
6 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07
8 1.02±0.07
9 1.20±0.07
10 1.38±0.07
11 1.56±0.07
12 1.74±0.07
13 1.92±0.07
14 2.10±0.09
15 2.40±0.09
16 2.70±0.11
17 3.00±0.11
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-63
MU-64
[7-3] 24-Steps [7-8] Uniformity
<FUNCTION> [7-8-1] Clear
Command for outputting the 24-steps pattern using the current setting value.
<FUNCTION>
[7-4] Display 24-Steps Command for returning the uniformity correction data to the state at shipment (?default
value) or clearing the data to zero for all specified film sizes or all sizes.
<FUNCTION>
l Clear Type
Command for displaying the 24-steps density data measured by “[7-1] AUTO F.D.C.”. [Single]/[All]
<NOTE>
l Clear data type
If the equipment is rebooted after executing “[7-1] AUTO F.D.C.”, this density
[Manufacture] : Returns to state at shipment
data will be deleted.
[Zero] : Clears to zero.
l Film Size (When “Single” is selected at “Clear Type”)
[7-5] Manual F.D.C.
[14x17]/[14x14]/[10x14]/[10x12]/[8x10]
<FUNCTION> [7-8-2] Manual Input
Command for entering the 24-steps density value measured using the external
densitometer, and creating density correction information. <FUNCTION>
Measure the uniformity measurement pattern output at “[6-6] Uniformity” using an
[7-6] Set Collect.T. external densitometer, and repeatedly enter the required number of measurement
data.
<FUNCTION> (Number=Low Density/High Density: 15 each)
Command for creating densitometer calibration tables for calibrating the built-in <NOTE>
densitometer. Correction is carried out on the film size set on the equipment.
<NOTE> Make sure that the film size to be measured and film size set on the equipment
are the same before executing this command.
To execute this menu, “[7-3] 24-Steps” needs to be executed first.
[7-9] DM Sensor Monitor
[7-7] Clear Collect.T.
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for monitoring whether the density measurement sensor of the internal
Command for initializing densitometer calibration tables.
densitometer is operating normally or not.
<NOTE>
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the
equipment. If communication is not ended, it may not be possible to execute
other menus.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-64
MU-65
[8] Check Scanner l Example of Input
[8-1] Adjusting Main Scanner
[8-1-1] Scanning Width
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the main scanning width (compression rate in the main scanning
direction).
<OPERATIONS>
1. Output grid pattern using “[6-5] Grid”.
{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
2. Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
3. If out of the specified value, enter the main scanning width adjustment
value. (0 to ±120)
<REMARKS>
• As the main scanning length value displayed is subject to rounding, it may not
always be the previously entered value.
• Enter the adjusting values in units of 0.1 mm.
• Entering a negative value reduces the image from the reference position.
• The changes in the value entered can be calculated by: (Value entered) x C x
10 ÷ 37000 (mm)
4. Output and check the grid pattern again.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-65
MU-66
[8-1-2] Scanning Position l Example of Input
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the scanning position in the main scanning direction.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Output grid pattern using “[6-5] Grid”.
{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
2. Measure “B” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
3. If out of the specified value, enter the scanning position adjustment
value. (0 to ±120)
<REMARKS>
Enter the adjusting values in units of 0.1 mm.
4. Output and check the grid pattern again.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-66
MU-67
[8-1-3] Initialize Scanner [8-2] Edge Sensor Monitor
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for initializing the scanning width adjusting values and scanning position Command for monitoring changes in the film edge sensor (SD5) used in the
adjusting values. correction of the scanning position. This monitoring of changes allows checking of the
quantitative film tilt degree during printing, and checking of the film edge sensor alone.
<REMARKS>
The following are displayed:
• Current value (pixel value and counter value, average value during printing)
• Maximum value (pixel value and counter value: maximum value during monitoring,
value only during printing)
• Minimum value (pixel value and counter value: minimum value during monitoring,
value only during printing)
• Starting Position (Reference value)
• Start position adjustment value (Reference value)
<NOTE>
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the
equipment. If communication is not ended, it may not be possible to execute
other menus.
[8-3] Reset Scanner Data
<FUNCTION>
Command for resetting the total running time of the scanner unit to “0”.
Reset the time at this menu when replacing the scanner unit.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-67
MU-68
[9] Heat-Developer
[9-1] Temperature
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing temperature monitoring of each thermistor.
<REMARKS>
The displayed temperature is ten times the value and can be displayed to the first
decimal point.
<NOTE>
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the
equipment. If communication is not ended, it may not be possible to execute
other menus.
[9-2] Set Heater Cond. Temp.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default of the targeted temperature of each heater.
<REMARKS>
The displayed temperature is ten times the value and can be displayed to the first
decimal point.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-68
MU-69
[10] Check Mechanism [10-2] Other Actuator
<FUNCTION>
[10-1] Adjusting Sub Scanner Command for performing individual operations of the tray lock solenoid (SOLA1).
Perform this command to release tray lock.
<FUNCTION> <NOTE>
Command for adjusting the film conveyance speed of the sub-scanning unit. To end, execute [OFF] and to turn OFF the solenoid.
<OPERATIONS>
[10-3] Sensor Monitor
1. Print the grid pattern.
{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid} <FUNCTION>
2. Select the image printed. Command for performing sensor monitoring.
<NOTE>
[Grid]
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the
3. Select the printed film size. equipment.
[14x17 (35x43cm)]/[14x14(35x35cm)]/[10x14(26x36cm)]/[10x12(25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)]
[10-4] Interlock Function
4. Enter the four digit average (1/10 mm unit) of “F” and “G”.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE} <FUNCTION>
<REMARKS> Command for checking the interlock function during installation and periodic
maintenance and inspection.
• Enter a value which is 10 times the average value.
<NOTE>
• The adjustment value will be initialized when “0” is entered.
Executing this menu starts the rotation of the conveyance motor (MG1) of the
heat development unit.
5. [Execute]
6. Print the grid pattern and check again.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-69
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)
(DRYPIX 6000)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
SP-1
How to Use Character Significance The alphabet denotes a difference in
the specifications. Parts differing in
RECOMMENDED QUANTITIES
Consumable parts or parts OF SPARE PARTS
Service Parts List A that will be replaced at short inter-
vals.
the suffix are not compatible with each
other. Version number is omitted in the It is recommended as a rough guide to
Parts that may become faulty ac- list. keep in stock a certain quantity of parts
B cidentally and have a according to the rank (A, B, C, D, E)
RANK relatively high failure rate. PART NAME assigned to the parts, as follows. For
Parts that have a sufficiently long periodically replaced parts, keep them
PART NAME represents a general name
Handling RANK characters C MTBF, but are expected to have a
in stock separately. Adjust the stock
relatively high failure rate. of a part.
(Parts that are handled in a special quantity of service parts depending on
Parts that have a sufficiently long
manner during parts management, such D MTBF, but are expected to be- QTY. the number of working units (N).
as replacement) come faulty. Quantity used in a single system : Q
QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty Parts that are necessary for fault N=1
analysis, or parts that may be in each unit.
R
Must be
Repairable A part whose quantity is suffixed with Rank A = 1 + Q × 0.3
returned. E needed in case of unexpected
accidents such as man-induced -S represents a small part that is Rank C = 1 + Q × 0.05
Must be Rank D = 1 + Q × 0.02
returned.
damage. shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a
Q
(We use for
Not repairable part is ordered in quantity of 1, a pack 2 ≤ N ≤ 10
<The RANK guide> containing 50 pieces of that part is
analysis.)
The Fault RANK characters, Handling Rank A = 2 + N × Q × 0.3
Must not be supplied.) Rank C = 2 + N × Q × 0.05
returned. RANK characters, and Export
Rank D = 1 + N × Q × 0.02
(Consumable regulation-applicable character are REMARKS
T part. Not Not repairable assigned in that order. 11 ≤ N ≤ 300
applicable to Thus, at least one character or up to The REMARKS column indicates a Rank A = 3 + N × Q × 0.3
free-of-charge three characters are assigned in the unique name or relevant information of Rank C = 3 + N × Q × 0.05
warranty.) RANK column. each part. Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
without Must not be
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned. REF. NO. SERIAL NUMBER PRECAUTIONS TO BE
Export regulation-applicable REF. NO. is a part number indicated in The units may contain different parts OBSERVED WHEN RETURNING
the Service Parts Exploded Views. For depending on their shipment control PARTS FOR REPAIR
character number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates
parts having different functions, they are
(Parts with the following character are clearly distinguished in the REMARKS the shipment control number to which When returning a component for repair,
controlled by Export regulation.) and SERIAL NUMBER columns. the relevant parts are applicable. If the pack it in the same manner as for the
Character Significance SERIAL NUMBER column is blank, the supplied substitute, using the substitute
+
Parts applicable to export PART NUMBER parts are applicable to all the relevant packing materials.
regulations. units. The shipment control number is The use of different packing materials or
PART NUMBER is a code number that represented by lower five digits of eight- packing methods may incur damage to
Fault RANK characters is unique to each part. An alphabetic digit number indicated on the rating packed component during transit.
letter at the rightmost position of the indication label.
(Which provide reference for code number has the following meaning.
determining the recommended stock
quantity) For hardware REFER TO
All parts are assigned with one of The alphabet denotes the version The "REFER TO" column shows
characters A through E. number of a part. If parts have different reference sections concerning the part.
version numbers, they are upward- Clicking the reference section in the
compatible. “REFER TO” column jumps to the top
page of the reference section where the
For software related information is in.
020-201-04E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-1
SP-2
01A
カバー 1
COVER 1
カバー 1
COVER 1 01A
DETAIL A RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 398N100015C カバー Cover 1
D 2 388N100593 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 4
3 4 D 3 350N102749A カバー Cover 1
D 4 309N100065 プラワッシャ Plastic Washer 4
A 5 393N100002D 刃物 Cutter 1
DETAIL B 5
D 6 - カバー Cover 2
D 7 382N100323 テープ Sponge 4
D 8 398Y100032 シャッタ Shutter 2
D 9 - カバー Cover 1
D 10 350N102747 カバー Cover 1
D 11 405N103044 銘板 Label 1
D 12 314N100058A 蝶番 Hinge 2
2 D 13 314Y100018B 蝶番 Hinge 2
D 14 366N100039 ガイド Guide 1
1
12
11 2-TP3x6
10 TP3x6
12 13
TP3x6
14 2-TP3x6
B
13
2-Ps3x8
2-Ps3x8
3-TP3x6 A
8 7
7
7
6
7 6
8
DRY60_H0001.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-2
SP-3
01B
カバー 2
COVER 2
カバー 2
COVER 2 01B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 - カバー Cover 1
D 2 350N102748A カバー Cover 1
D 3 314Y100019B 蝶番 Hinge 2
DETAIL A DETAIL B D 4 314N100059B 蝶番 Hinge 2
1 2 7 D 5 316N100293A 止め具 Stopper 2
5
6 8 D 6 308S0517 特殊ねじ Spcial Screw 2
2-Ps3x8 D 7 - カバー Cover 1
D 8 350N102720B カバー Cover 1
2-Ps3x8 D 9 356N107511 ブラケット Bracket 2
2-Ps3x8
6 9
3
2-TP3x6 2-Ps3x8
5
4 9
3
2-TP3x6
2-TP3x6
2-TP3x6 DRY60_H0002.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-3
SP-4
01C
カバー 3
COVER 3
カバー 3
COVER 3 01C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350N102792A カバー Cover 1
D 2 350N102795A カバー Cover 1
D 3 350N102751 カバー Cover 1
D 4 350N102572B カバー Cover 1
1 D 5 350N102753A カバー Cover 1
D 6 350N102750A カバー Cover 1
6-TP3x6
TP3x6
2-TP3x6
5-TP3x6
6
3
2-TP3x6 4
2-TP3x6
5 DRY60_H0003.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-4
SP-5
02A
フレーム 1
FRAME 1
フレーム 1
FRAME 1 02A
DETAIL A DETAIL B RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
2-BR3x32 D 1 376N100044 エアフィルタ Air Filter 1
8 D 2 367S2066 脚 Foot 2
6 D 3 367S1109A キャスタ Caster 2
D 4 310N100213 ピン Pin 4
7 D 5 363N100769B ガイド Guide 2
D 6 366S0006 アクチュエータ Actuator 2
6 7 D 7 128S0987 マイクロスイッチ Micro-Switch 3 SK1, SK2, SK3
D 8 363N2368A ガイド Guide 1
7 9 D 9 388N100972C 板ばね Leafe Spring 1
D 10 852N0025J 読取部 Reader Unit 2 SA16,SA26
2-BR3x16
2-TP3x6
A
2-TP3x6
5-TP3x6
10 TP3x8 5
2-TP3x6
4
TP3x8 TP3x8
4
4 B
4-TP3x6 2-TP3x6 C
C
D TP3x8
3 4
2
3-BR5x12
3 2
10
D 3-BR5x12
DRY60_H0004.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-5
SP-6
02B
フレーム 2
FRAME 2
フレーム 2
FRAME 2 02B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 345N100656A 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 2 386S1115 緩衝機材 Rubber 2
D 3 367S1109A キャスタ Caster 2
D 4 345N100655A 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 5 356N103818B ブラケット Bracket 1
D 6 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1 THK1
5 TP3x6
8-TP3x6
4 1
3-BR5x12 8-TP3x6
3-BR5x12 DRY60_H0005.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-6
SP-7
03A
装填部 1
FILM LOADING UNIT 1
装填部 1
FILM LOADING UNIT 1 03A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 128S0987 マイクロスイッチ Micro-Switch 1 SA12,SA22
BR3x8 D 2 366S0011 アクチュエータ Actuator 1
1 D 3 388N100575 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1
2-DT3x6 2 SOLA11,
D 4 107Y100017 ソレノイド Solenoid 1
2-TP3x6 SOLA21
SA13, SA14,
2-BR3x16 D 5 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 SA15, SA23,
SA24, SA25
D 6 362N100327 受 Guide 4
D 7 334N100384 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 10
6 3 D 8 146N0010A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SA11, SA21
4 D 9 363N100798 ガイド Guide 2
2-DT3x6
TP3x6
Ps3x8
5
A
B
6
DT3x6
6 9
8
2-BR3x12
DT3x6
DT3x6 9 Ps3x8
TP3x6
7 6
A
B 7
DRY60_H0006 ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-7
SP-8
03B
装填部 2
FILM LOADING UNIT 2
装填部 2
FILM LOADING UNIT 2 03B
DETAIL A RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 363N100779A ガイド Guide 4
D 2 363N101320 ガイド Guide 1
D 3 363N101319 ガイド Guide 1
D 4 363N101321 ガイド Guide 2
D 5 317N100055 キャップ Cap 13
D 6 405N103130 銘板 Label 1
D 7 340N100315 つまみ Knob 1
10 D 8 363Y100447 ガイド Guide 1
2-Ps3x8 11 D 9 - ローラ Roller 1
D 10 345N100699A 仕切り板 Plate 1
E3 D 11 343N100059A フック Hook 1
Ps3x8 12
13 E3 D 12 316Y100073 止め具 Stopper 1
BR3x10
D 13 388N100585A ねじりコイルばね Spring 1
2-Ps3x8
1 D 14 342N100055 レバー Lever 1
2-Ps3x8 BR3x10
14
BR3x10
1 See IN 5.2.1
Ps3x8 1
See IN 5.2.1 BR3x10
Ps3x8
1 See IN 5.2.1
Ps3x8
Ps3x8 See IN 5.2.1
4 2
2-BR3x10
9 5
3
A
8 4
3-Ps3x8
Na3
7 2-Ps3x8
6
2-Ps3x8
DRY60_H0007.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-8
SP-9
04A
枚葉部 1
REMOVAL UNIT 1
枚葉部 1
REMOVAL UNIT 1 04A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
B
D 1 345N100683A 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 2 356Y100873C アーム Arm 2
D 3 335N100043A フランジ Flange 2
D 4 322SP201 軸受け Bearing 2
1 D 5 334N100202 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 6 334N100203 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 7 322N100244A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4
5-TP3x6
D 8 388N100598 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 2
DETAIL A D 9 322N100241A 軸受 Bearing 4
A
19 2 D 10 341N100289A アーム Arm 4
18 D 11 327N100344A 歯車 Gear 3
17
D 12 327N100345A 歯車 Gear 1
16
3 D 13 335N100046 フランジ Flange 1
15 4 D 14 327N100346A 平歯車 Spur Gear 5
5-DT3x6 D 15 118SX208A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB12, MB22
E3 D 16 327N100327 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
E3
D 17 327N100312A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
5 D 18 341N100290A アーム Arm 4
E6 6 D 19 319Y100089 軸 Shaft 1
2-TP3x6 D 20 334N100201B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
9 7
14 D 21 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB11, MB21
E6 E6
E4 D 22 327N100352 歯車 Gear 1
E6
8
9 D 23 327N100321A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
E4
E4 D 24 327N100322A 歯車 Gear 1
E4 10
E4 D 25 327N100320 歯車 Gear 1
4-DT3x6
2
11 20
E5
12 3
4
TP3x6
11
7
13 8
23
24
18
17
E6
E3
E3
E5
2-TP4x8
E3 21
E5
4-DT3x6 9
23
25
16
9
22
E6 10
DETAIL B
DRY60_H0008.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-9
SP-10
04B
枚葉部 2
REMOVAL UNIT 2
枚葉部 2
REMOVAL UNIT 2 04B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SB12, SB22
13 1 TP3x6 D 2 356N103803 ブラケット Bracket 1
2 D 3 402N0020A ベローズ Bellows 2
D 4 375N0095 シール Seal 2
D 5 316Y100071 止め具 Holder 2
2-Ps3x8
D 6 392N100001 吸着盤 Suction Cup 2
12 D 7 371N100090 ノズル Nozzle 2
D 8 388N100573 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 4
E3 11 D 9 334N100224 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 10 316Y100075B 止め具 Holder 1
E3
D 11 322N100018B 軸受け Bearing 8
E3
D 12 322N100017B 軸受け Bearing 8
E3 D 13 341Y100336A アーム Arm 1
11
12
11 12
12
11
12
11
10
3
8
7
5
6 DRY60_H0009.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-10
SP-11
04C
枚葉部 3
REMOVAL UNIT 3
枚葉部 3
REMOVAL UNIT 3 04C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SB11, SB21
D 2 346N100527B 補助板 Support Plate 3
D 3 347S0281A スペーサ Spacer 4
D 4 332N100180A ストッパ Stopper 4
D 5 328N100016A 爪 Claw 2
2
DT3x6
1
DT3x6
DETAIL A
5
3 TP3x6
TP3x6 4
TP3x6
TP3x6
TP3x6
TP3x6
DRY60_H0010.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-11
SP-12
05A
搬送部 1
CONVEYOR UNIT 1
搬送部 1
CONVEYOR UNIT 1 05A
TP3x6 RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
3 2 D 1 327N100315A 歯車 Gear 2
4 D 2 388Y100007 板ばね Leaf Spring 2
1 D 3 322N100251 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1
2-Ps3x8 D 4 322SP213 軸受 Bearing 4
D 5 362N100320A 受 Support 2
D 6 388N100588 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 2
D 7 322N100247A 軸受 Bearing 2
5 D 8 334Y100147 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 9 322N100246A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1
D 10 313Y100027 ステー Stay 1
DT3x6 D 11 363N100783 ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
10 D 12 322N100245A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2
4 6
9 7 D 13 327N100338A 歯車 Gear 1
2-Ps3x8 D 14 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SD3, SD4
TP3x6
D 15 341N100288 アーム Arm 1
2 D 16 107Y0185C ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLD1
2-DT3x6 8 11 D 17 388N100574 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 1
D 18 118SX202B パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD2
D 19 327N100316A 歯車 Gear 1
1 5 12 D 20 356Y100865 ブラケット Bracket 1
7 D 21 327N100317A 歯車 Gear 1
DT3x6 BR3x6
6 D 22 356Y100882 エッジセンサ Assy Edge Sensor Assy 1 SD5
D 23 332Y100036 ストッパ Stopper 1
D 24 334N100198 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
14 13
4 D 25 388N100576A 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1
24 D 26 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD2
BR3x6
26 23
12 Ps3x8
Ps3x8 BR3x16
22
25 17
15
4 14
21 16
2-TP3x6
2-TP3x6 Ps3x8 Ps3x8
2-DT3x6
4-Ps3x8 18
19
20 DRY60_H0011 ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-12
SP-13
05B
搬送部 2
CONVEYOR UNIT 2
搬送部 2
CONVEYOR UNIT 2 05B
DT3x6 RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
2 D 1 363N100752 ガイド Guide 1
E6 D 2 322N100241A 軸受 Bearing 4
1 D 3 334N100200 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
E6
D 4 327N100340 歯車 Gear 2
2-Ps3x8 D 5 363N101322 ガイド Guide 4
D 6 388N100564 ばね Spring 2
D 7 363N101323 ガイド Guide 4
D 8 334N100196 ローラ Roller 4
D 9 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD1
DT3x6 D 10 - 取手 Handle 1
5 D 11 355N100698A フレーム Frame 1
2 D 12 327N100318A 歯車 Gear 2
3 7
6 D 13 327N100324A 歯車 Gear 4
8
D 14 - 歯車 Gear 2
D 15 341N100287 アーム Arm 1
2-Ps3x8 D 16 - 歯車 Gear 1
4 D 17 360N100219A ハウジング Housing 1
11
2-Ps3x8
10
17
13 2-TP4x8
12
14 TP3x6
16
15
3-DT3x6 DT3x6
13 12
TP3x6 13
13
14
DRY60_H0012.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-13
SP-14
05C
搬送部 3
CONVEYOR UNIT 3
搬送部 3
CONVEYOR UNIT 3 05C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 342N100054A レバー Lever 2
D 2 363N100757 ガイド Guide 1
D 3 363N100773 ガイド Guide 4
D 4 363N100772 ガイド Guide 4
D 5 341N100295 アーム Arm 1
A 6 334Y100166 ローラ Roller 1
D 7 341N100294 アーム Arm 1
1 D 8 334N100196 ローラ Roller 8
D 9 363N101326 ガイド Guide 4
DT3x6 2 D 10 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD1
D 11 363N100756 ガイド Guide 1
1 4
10
DT3x6 DT3x6 9
8
5
11
6
DRY60_H0013.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-14
SP-15
05D
搬送部 4
CONVEYOR UNIT 4
搬送部 4
CONVEYOR UNIT 4 05D
1 E5 RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 322N100241A 軸受 Bearing 4
2-DT3x6 D 2 348N100289C ブラケット Bracket 2
10 2 D 3 345N100684 遮板 Shield Plate 2
12 3 D 4 334N100196 ローラ Roller 24
4 D 5 363N100763 ガイド Guide 8
D 6 313N100304C ステー Stay 4
1
2-DT3x6 D 7 363N100775 ガイド Guide 8
13 D 8 363N100764 ガイド Guide 8
14 11 5 Ps3x8
6 D 9 363N101280C ガイド Guide 4
E5 DT3x6 D 10 334N100204A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
E4 7 D 11 350N101326 カバー Cover 2
5-DT3x6 D 12 348N100288C ブラケット Bracket 2
6 D 13 327N100342 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 14 335N100047 フランジ Flange 2
3-DT3x6 8
4
3-DT3x6
DT3x6
7
2
6
1
8
2-DT3x6
3-DT3x6 4
3-DT3x6
10
1
13 2-DT3x6
3
14 E5 DT3x6
4
E4 12 11
Ps3x8
5-DT3x6 DRY60_H0014.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-15
SP-16
05E
搬送部 5
CONVEYOR UNIT 5
搬送部 5
CONVEYOR UNIT 5 05E
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
A D 1 388N100997 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 4
DETAIL A D
D
2
3
309N100134A
308S0517
ワッシャ
特殊ねじ
Washer
Special Screw
4
4
D 4 363N101341B ガイド Guide 8
D 5 334N100196 ローラ Roller 8
D 6 388N100584A 板ばね Leaf Spring 8
D 7 363N100776 ガイド Guide 8
DT3x6
2-Ps3x8
Ps3x8
DT3x6
2
7 6 1
Ps3x8 5 3
1
DT3x6
Ps3x8
2
DT3x6 DETAIL B
2-Ps3x8 4
2-Ps3x8
Ps3x8
2
Ps3x8 6 1
Ps3x8
5
7
3
2-Ps3x8
1
Ps3x8
2 4
DT3x6
3
DRY60_H0025.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-16
SP-17
06A
副走査部 1
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1
副走査部 1
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1 06A
DETAIL B RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350N101325A カバー Cover 1
D 2 - 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 16
D 3 350N101316A カバー Cover 1
D 4 332N100182A ストッパ Stopper 3
2 D 5 386N100280A 防振ゴム Shock Absorber 4
2 B D 6 345N100682 遮光布 Shading Cloth 1
3
1
2-BR3x8
2-TP4x8 2
2-TP3x6
2
2-TP4x8 2-TP4x8
2-TP3x6
8-TP4x8 6 TP4x8
5 A 4 2-TP4x8
2-TP4x8
TP4x8
2
TP4x8
2-TP3x6
4 TP4x8
2 4 DETAIL A
2
TP4x8
TP3x6
2 6
1mm以下
1 mm or
2mm以下 less
2 mm or
less
DRY60_H0015.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-17
SP-18
06B
副走査部 2
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2
副走査部 2
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2 06B
1 RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
B D 1 309S0075 座金 Washer 2
D 2 334Y100146 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
2 D 3 334N100199 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 4 323N1264B 平ベルト Belt 1
D 5 - 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 2
A D 6 339N100012A ハンドル Handle 1
21
D 7 388N100590 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 2
D 8 322N100241A 軸受 Bearing 4
D 9 322SP213 軸受 Bearing 4
D 10 324N100110A 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 2
3 D 11 388N100589 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 2
D 12 308N100136 特殊ねじ Special Screw 2
21 D 13 319Y100086B 軸 Shaft 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 14 113Y100333A 1 SE1
SED28A SED28A
パルスモータアセンブ Stepping Motor
12 D 15 118YA184A
リ Assembly
1 ME1
4
B D 16 324Y100040 平ベルト車 Wheel 1
5 2-TP4x8 D 17 309S0127 座金 Washer 1
6 TP4x8 D 18 - 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 1
7
D 19 323N1265A 平ベルト Belt 1
TP4x8
D 20 401N100124 押え板 Pressure Plate 1
8
8 D 21 322SF227 軸受 Bearing 2
2-TP3x6
E6
2-TP3x6
9
10 DETAIL A
E6 9
11
13
14
2-TP4x8
2-TP3x6
TP4x8 20
18 15
2-TP3x6
19 8
TP4x8 4-BR3x8
8
7
E6 2-BR3x8
9 WP3x6
10 16
9 2-TP3x6
17
2-TP3x6 E6
11
DRY60_H0016 ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-18
SP-19
07
光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 07
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 839Y100089 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1
DRY60_H0017.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-19
SP-20
08A
熱現像部 1
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1
熱現像部 1
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 08A
DETAIL A RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118SX202B パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MG1
D 2 310S9042516 平行ピン Straight Pin 1
D 3 327N100341 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 4 322SP214 すべり軸受 Bushing 2
D 5 327N100314A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
WP4x6
D 6 327Y100033A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
BR3x6 D 7 319N101353 軸 Shaft 1
1 D 8 363N100768B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
2 D 9 347N100422 スペーサ Spacer 1
3
2-TP3x6 5 D 10 363N100767B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
4 D 11 322N100248 すべり軸受 Bushing 1
2-BR3x6 D 12 347N100418 スペーサ Spacer 1
E5 E5 D 13 339N100013A ハンドル Handle 1
4
D 14 347S0829 スペーサ Spacer 1
3-TP3x6
D 15 405N101307 銘板 Label 1
D 16 119S0096 電動ファン Fan 1 FANG1
2-BR3x32
16
4-TP3x6
6
A
E8
8
7
2-TP3x6
2-TP3x6 9
TP3x6
BR3x10 TP3x6
15
14
TP3x6
E5
11
12
10
13 2-TP3x6
DRY60_H0018.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-20
SP-21
08B
熱現像部 2
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2
熱現像部 2
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2 08B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1
D 2 356N103818B ブラケット Bracket 1
D 3 334Y100154B ローラ Roller 9
D 4 327N100333A 歯車 Gear 9
DETAIL A D 5 327N100332 歯車 Gear 1
D 6 327N100597C 歯車 Gear 1
D 7 327N100599C 歯車 Gear 2
D 8 327N100598C 歯車 Gear 1
7
4 7
E6
6 8
5 E3
2-TP3x6
A
2
BR3x6
4
DRY60_H0019.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-21
SP-22
08C
熱現像部 3
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3
熱現像部 3
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3 08C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 - カバー Cover 1
D 2.1 117Y100033B ヒータ（100V 第 1） Heater 1 100-120VAC
D 2.2 117Y100035B ヒータ（200V 第 1） Heater 1 200-240VAC
D 3 334N100197 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4
D 4 310Y100010A ピン Pin 2
D 5 327N100319 歯車 Gear 4
1 D 6 348N100158B 側板 Side Plate 1
D 7 322NF006 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 8
D 8 348N100157B 側板 Side Plate 1
D 9 310Y100009A ピン Pin 2
D 10 115N100002A 感熱スイッチ Thermal Protector 2
11 現像ラック部
D 11.1 - Rack Unit 1 100-120VAC
（100V 第 1）
現像ラック部
D 11.2 - Rack Unit 1 200-240VAC
2 （200V 第 1）
4-3x6 10
4
5
6
E5
7
8
E5 DETAIL A
PK3x10
9
4-BR3x6
DRY60_H0020.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-22
SP-23
08D
熱現像部 4
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4
熱現像部 4
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 08D
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 - カバー Cover 1
11 D 2.1 117Y100034B ヒータ（100V 第 2） Heater 1 100-120VAC
D 2.2 117Y100036B ヒータ（200V 第 2） Heater 1 200-240VAC
D 3 334N100197 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 6
D 4 310Y100010A ピン Pin 2
1 D 5 327N100319 歯車 Gear 6
D 6 348N100156C 側板 Side Plate 1
D 7 322NF006 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 12
D 8 348N100155C 側板 Side Plate 1
D 9 310Y100009A ピン Pin 2
D 10 115N100002A 感熱スイッチ Thermal Protector 2
現像ラック部
D 11.1 - Rack Unit 1 100-120VAC
（100V 第 2）
現像ラック部
D 11.2 - Rack Unit 1 200-240VAC
（200V 第 2）
2
4-3x6 10
5
6
E5
7
3
7
8 E5
DETAIL A
PK3x10
4-BR3x6
DRY60_H0021.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-23
SP-24
09A
排出部 1
FILM RELEASE UNIT 1
排出部 1
FILM RELEASE UNIT 1 09A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N100334 平歯車 Spur Gear 4
D 2 305S0134 ナット Nut 1
D 3 309S0131 プラワッシャ Washer 1
DETAIL A D 4 327N1121615A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 5 118SX209A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MJ1
D 6 322NY156 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 4
1 D 7 327N1122006 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 8 322N100240A 軸受け Bearing 8
D 9 327N100286A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 10 388N2081 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 2
D 11 334N100208 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 12 334N100386B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
DT3x6 D 13 334N100209 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
D 14 334N100210 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
2 3 1 D 15 334N100385B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
4
3-TP3x6
2-TP3x6
5
3-DT3x6
7
6 E6 E6 9 9
E6
8 4
E6 E6
E6 E6
TP3x6 E6
E6
8 10
14 TP3x6
13 15
11
6 8 12
E6
E6
E6
TP3x6
E6 8 TP3x6
E6 10 DRY60_H0022.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-24
SP-25
09B
排出部 2
FILM RELEASE UNIT 2
排出部 2
FILM RELEASE UNIT 2 09B
1 RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 2 113Y100334A 1
TP3x6 LED28A LED28A
D 3 313N100175C ステー Stay 1
2 2-TP3x6
D 4 350N101318B カバー Cover 1
D 5 363N100736A ガイド Guide 3
D 6 363N100753C ガイド Guide 1
D 7 387N100031 帯電防止材 Antistatic Material 1
3 D 8 363N100727 ガイド Guide 5
D 9 334N100196 ローラ Roller 15
4 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
DT3x6 D 10 113Y100335A 1
PDD28A PDD28A
2-TP3x6 5
2-TP3x6 6 7
2-TP3x6
TP3x6
9
8
2-TP3x6
10 9 9
4-DT3x6
DRY60_H0023.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-25
SP-26
10
制御部
CONTROLLER
制御部
CONTROLLER 10
DETAIL A RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 1 113Y100329C 1
2-TP3x6 1 PNL28A PNL28A
D 2 128S1102 スイッチ Switch 1
D 3 119S0096 電動ファン Fan 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 4 113Y100567D 1
PSU31B PSU31B
Board Assembly
ボードアセンブリ
C 5 125N100032B PSU27A (Power 1
PSU27A（電源）
Supply)
D 6 350N101334A カバー Cover 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 7 113Y100331C 1
HTD28A HTD28A
A C 8 113Y100917A
ボードアセンブリ
SND28B
Board Assembly
SND28B
1
C 9 102N100037 メモリボード Memory Board 1 1GB DIMM
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 10 113Y100699A 1
CPU32A CPU32A
メモリカード（コンパ
C 11 114Y2298010A Memory Card (CF Card) 1
クトフラッシュカード）
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 12 113Y100916A 1
PRN28B PRN28B
D 13 347S0971 スペーサ Spacer 3
D 14 347S0996 スペーサ Spacer 1
2-DT3x6 D 15 347S0998 スペーサ Spacer 1
7,16 250V/10A for
A 16 137S1350 ヒューズ FUSE 2
3-TP3x6 HTD28A F1,F2
48V/1A for
A 17 137S1417 ヒューズ FUSE 2 PSU31B F5,
2
F6
48V/2A for
15 6 A 18 137S1420 ヒューズ FUSE 1
PSU31B F1
14 48V/5A for
5-TP3x6
3-TP3x6 5 3 PSU31B
5-TP3x6 A 19 137S1423 ヒューズ FUSE 7
F2,F3,F4,F7,
F8,F9,F10
13
2-BR3x22
Na3
5-TP3x6
13 9
12
3-TP3x6 10 8 4,17,18,19
11
8-TP3x6
DRY60_H0024.ai
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-26
SP-27
11
治具
JIG
治具
JIG 11
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
インターロック解除治 前カバー用
D 1 - Interlock Release Tool 1
具 for Front cover
右上カバー用
インターロック解除治
D 2 - Interlock Release Tool 1 for Upper right
具
cover
右下カバー用
インターロック解除治
D 3 - Interlock Release Tool 1 for Lower right
具
cover
プーリおよび
1 2 3 4 フライホイー
ル取外し治具
D 4 343N100061 フック Hook 1
DRY60_H0024.ai
Pulley and
Flywheel
removing tool
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-27
SP-28
12
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
136Y104303
LDSIG
PRN-CN8 1 1 LDD-CN7
PRN28B基板 GND LDD28A
2
LDDON 136Y104280 113Y100322
A 113Y100916 1 1 A
2
LDDONb 2
LDD-CN3
GND 136Y104282
PRN-CN4 3 3 LDD-CN9 VCC_+12V_LDD
LDDOK 1
4 4 GND_A
LDDOKb 2
5 5 VCC_-12V_LDD
GND 3
6 6 GND_A
7
SS 7
4
200V用Breaker 8
SSb 8
Matsushita PSU31B基板 9
GND 9
BAM210032 10A
+5VF
113Y100567 10 10
B B
128S0933A CN1-J CN1-P
136Y104276 SED-CN24
PRN-CN2 +5VF +5VF
1
GND
1 1
GND
1
SED28A
INLET Breaker 136Y104262 PSUB-CN1 2
SED
2 2
SED
2
113Y100333
PSUA-CN51 3 3 3 3
136Y102014 GND
LINE1 LOAD1 1 1
IN-L 1 1 1 136Y104257 PSUA-CN1 GND 136Y104277
AC(L)1 2 2
PSU27A 3
GND 3 1
136Y102064 LINE2 LOAD2 GND
IN-N 1 1 1 AC(N)3
2
電源 4 4 PRN-CN3 2
+24V
4 125N100032 5
+24V
5 3
C 6 6 4 C
IN-G 1
15A 5
7
+24V 7
136Y102065 8
+24V 8
Matsushita
BAM215031
1
128S1102 SND28B基板
113Y100917
1
FG1
NICOON FG
NC-176-F6.35-1.65 閉端
120S5272 TB1-OUT1-1
D
TB1-IN1-1 1
D
1 TB1-OUT1-2 1
PNL-CN2
閉端 1
TB1-IN2-1 TB1-OUT2-1 1
2
1
TB1-OUT2-2 1
136Y102016
PNL28A基板
FANK1 136Y104301 PSUB-CN8 113Y100329
E +24 1 136Y104266 E
4 1 SND-CN4 D0 PNL-CN1
NC 2 PSUB-CN5
1 1
3 2
1 GND D1
FANK1 ALARM 3 2 2
2
2 GND D2
GND 4 3 3
1
3 136Y104258 4
D3 4
119S0096 D4
4 5 5
5 6
D5 6
中継用アダプタ 6
SND-CN3 D6
7 7
AC(L) HTD-CN1 292254-4が必要 D7
1 7 1 8 8
AC(N) 2 8 2 9
DIG1 9
9 +24V 3 10
DIG2 10
F F
10 +24V 4 11
DIG3 11
12
5VSB 12
HTD28A基板 13
BUZZER-P 13
GND
HG1 136Y102017 113Y100331 14 14
15
1
SND-CN5
HEATER 5 HOTCON1 1 ENTER 16
HTD-CN3 136Y104285 SND-CN34 2 GND 17
2 1 HOTCON2 1
6 3 PWBN 18
2 2
HEART(N) HTD-CN2 N.C 4 ULT_BTN
3 1 3 HOTCON3 N.C 3
G HEART1 5 G
7 7 4 HOTCON4 4
4
HEART(N) 2 5 5
HEART2 N.C SND-CN19
8 8 6 VCC N.C 6 1
N.C 3 GND 7 2 GND 136Y104265
N.C 9 8 3 CAN+
HG3 1
HEART(N) 4 HTD-CN4 CAN-
1 4
4
HEART3 10 2
2
HEART(N) 5 SND-CN27
1
5
HEART4 11 2
機種 2298 ユニット <ユニット>
3 N.C N.C 6 3
H 6 N.C N.C 12 4 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 5500 H
コード Z22N2298000_ Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 2
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-28
SP-29
12
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
136Y8554
B LDD-CN8 1
LDON 1
LDA-CN4 B
2
AGND 2
3
LDSIGH 3
4
AGND 4
LDIOP
5
AGND
5
LDA28A基板
LDD28E基板 6
7
P8V
6
7 113Y100323
113Y100954 8
AGND 8
9
M8V 9
10
AGND 10
C 11
PVLD 11 C
12
AGND 12
13
MVLD 13
14
AGND 14
15
PVLD 15
16
P8V2 16
17
LDKTD 17
18
LDH2 18 DF1B-18DS-2.5RC
DF1B-2428SCA
D D
136Y8555
LDD-CN4 1
SSH 1
SYN-CN1
SSL
2
GND
2
SYN28A基板
3
VCC
3
113Y100324
4 4
DF13-4S-1.25C
DF13-2630SCFA
E E
136Y8961
LDD-CN2 READY PCK-CN1
1 1 PCK-CN2 136Y8962
STARTL
2 2 CLOCK POL-CN1
GND 1 1
3 3
PCK28A基板 READY
GND 2 2
4 4 STARTL ポリゴン基板
24V 113Y100325 3 3
5 5 GND
GND 4 4
6 6 24V
7
GND 7
5 5
8
24V 8 179228-8
F 179518-1 F
G G
機種 2298 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 5500 H
コード Z22N2298000_ Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 3
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-29
SP-30
12
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
SND28B基板 136Y104278
113Y100917 SND-CN21 1
VCC_SENS 1
SJ1 SJ1
2
SJ1V 2 排出入口センサ
GND
3
VCC_SENS
3
GP2A230LRSAF
4
5
SJ2V
6
GND
7 N.C SJ2
B SJ2 B
8 N.C 1
9 N.C 2 排出出口センサ
10 N.C 3
GP2A230LRSAF
DRV-CN1
SND-CN28 1 VCC_+24V_C 136Y104290
1
C 2 GND_D 2 C
N.C 3
SND-CN22 VCC_SENS 136Y104291 DRV-CN3
1 1 DRV-CN2
ME1CLKC 136Y104268
2 2 ME1 ME1
3
VCC_SENS 3
1 1
4
ME1CWB 4 ME1-DRV 2 2
副走査モータ
VCC_SENS 3 3
5
ME1EN
5
５相ﾓｰﾀﾄﾞﾗｲﾊﾞ 4 4 CFK543BP2-A1
6 6
D 5 5 D
N.C 7
N.C 8
N.C 9
N.C 10
FG 136Y9080 FG
1 1
SND-CN39 SK3
1
136Y104288 1
SK3-COM SK3-NO 1
E 2 E
AM5160C731N
136Y102054
SND-CN36 136Y104293
CN2-P CN2-J 136Y102052
SK1 SK2
SK1-COM SK1-NC SK2-COM SK2-NC
VCC_+24V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LDインターロック
2 2 2
AM5160C731N AM5160C731N
F F
SND-CN37 136Y104294
CN3-J CN3-P 136Y104289
SA12
1 1 1 1
SA2-COM SA2-NC 1
2 2 2 トレーインターロック１
3 N.C AM5160C731N
G G
SND-CN38 136Y104286
CN13-J1 CN13-P1 136Y104287
SA22
1 1 1 1
SA2-COM SA2-NC 1
2 2 2 トレーインターロック２
3 N.C AM5160C731N
機種 2298 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 5500 H
コード Z22N2298000_ Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 4
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-30
SP-31
12
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
136Y104292
CN6-J CN6-P 136Y104260
SND-CN23 1
VCC_SENS51 1 1
VCC_SENS51 1
SA11 SA11
SA1V SA1V
2
GND
2 2
GND
2 ﾌｨﾙﾑﾊﾟｯｸ／ｼｬｯﾀｰ検出
A 3
VCC_SENS
3 3
VCC_SENS
3
OH-FP04-05 A
SND28B基板 4
5
SA3V
4
5
4
5
SA3V
113Y100917 6
GND 6 6
GND
1
SA13 SA13
VCC_SENS VCC_SENS
7
SA4V
7 7
SA4V
2 ﾌｨﾙﾑｻｲｽﾞ検出
8 8 8
9
GND 9 9
GND
3
GP1A73A
10
VCC_SENS 10 10
VCC_SENS
SA5V SA5V SA14
11
GND
11 11
GND
1 SA14
12
VCC_SENS
12 12 2
ﾌｨﾙﾑｻｲｽﾞ検出
13
B
14
SB1V
3
GP1A73A B
15
GND
VCC_SENS
CN5-P CN5-J
16
SB2V
1 SA15 SA15
SD1 SD1 VCC_SENS7
136Y104272 136Y104271 17
GND
2
ﾌｨﾙﾑｻｲｽﾞ検出
18
搬送入口ｾﾝｻ
1
SD1V
1 1 3
GP1A73A
2 2 2 19 N.C
GP2A230LRSAF 3
GND 3 3 20 N.C CN8-J CN8-P 136Y104296
VCC_SENS SB11
N.C 4 4 N.C 21 N.C 1 1
SB1V
1
SB11
N.C 5 5 N.C 22 N.C 2 2 2
枚葉ｱ-ﾑHP検知
23 N.C GND
N.C 6 6 N.C 3 3 3
C
136Y104273 24 N.C VCC_SENS GP1A73A C
SD2 SD2 1
VCC_SENS4
4
5
4
5
SB2V
搬送出口ｾﾝｻ 2
SD2V 6 6
GND 1
SB12 SB12
GP2A230LRSAF 3
GND 2 ﾌｲﾙﾑ表面検出
3
GP1A73A
SD3 SD3 1
VCC_SENS
ｽﾄｯﾊﾟ位置ｾﾝｻ 2
SD3V
D D
GP1A73A 3
GND VCC_SENS7 1
SND-CN24
SD1V 2 136Y104300
CN14-J CN14-P 136Y104260
CN7-P CN7-J GND 3
SND-CN29 1
VCC_SENS51 1 1
VCC_SENS51 1
SA21 SA21
VCC_SENS4 SA1V SA1V
1 1
SD2V
4 2
GND
2 2
GND
2 ﾌｨﾙﾑﾊﾟｯｸ／ｼｬｯﾀｰ検出
SD4 SD4 VCC_SENS
2 2
GND
5 3
VCC_SENS
3 3
VCC_SENS
3
OH-FP04-05
1 3 3 6 4 4 4
ﾆｯﾌﾟｾﾝｻ 2
SD4V 4 4
VCC_SENS 7 5
SA3V 5 5
SA3V
GP1A73A 3
GND 5 5
SD3V 8 6
GND 6 6
GND
1
SA23 SA23
GND VCC_SENS VCC_SENS
6 6
VCC_SENS
9 7
SA4V
7 7
SA4V
2 ﾌｨﾙﾑｻｲｽﾞ検出
7 7 10 8 8 8
E
8 8
SD4V 11 9
GND 9 9
GND
3
GP1A73A E
GND VCC_SENS VCC_SENS
SD5 SD5 SD5_LEDA
9 9
SD5_LEDA
12 10
SA5V
10 10
SA5V SA24
ｴｯｼﾞｾﾝｻ
1
VCC_SENS
10 10
VCC_SENS
13 11
GND
11 11
GND
1 SA24
2 11 11 14 12
VCC_SENS
12 12 2
ﾌｨﾙﾑｻｲｽﾞ検出
PIS28A基板 3
GND 12 12
GND 15 13 3
GP1A73A
SD5A SD5A SB1V
113Y100332 4
SD5B
13 13
SD5B
16 14
GND
5 14 14 17 15
VCC_SENS
N.C 15 15 N.C N.C 18 16
SB2V
1 SA25 SA25
N.C 16 16 N.C N.C 19 17
GND
2
ﾌｨﾙﾑｻｲｽﾞ検出
N.C 20 18 3
GP1A73A
F F
N.C 21 19 N.C
N.C CN15-J CN15-P
N.C 22 20 136Y104296
VCC_SENS SB21
21 N.C 1 1
SB1V
1
SB21
22 N.C 2 2 2
枚葉ｱ-ﾑHP検知
23 N.C 3 3
GND 3
24 N.C 4 4
VCC_SENS GP1A73A
5 5
SB2V
6 6
GND 1
SB22 SB22
2 ﾌｲﾙﾑ表面検出
G
3
GP1A73A G
機種 2298 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 5500 H
コード Z22N2298000_ Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 5
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-31
SP-32
12
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
136Y104279
SND-CN25 1
THG1H THG1H 1
THG1 THG1-2
GND_A GND_A
2
THG2H THG2H
2
サーミスタ１／２
SND28B基板 3
4
GND_A GND_A
3
4 PTP-F-F5
113Y100917 5
THG3H
N.C 5
GND_A
6 N.C 6
7
THG4H
8
GND_A
9
THG5H
B
10
GND_A B
11
THK1H THG3H 1
THG3 THG3-4
GND_A GND_A
12
THG4H
2
サーミスタ３／４
3
GND_A 4 PTP-F-F5
SND-CN20 1
VCC_SENS 136Y104283
N.C 5
2
GND N.C 6
3
LED_ON_Cb
4
VCC_+12V_PDD
5
GND_A
C VCC_-12V_PDD C
6
LOGOUT THG5H 1
THG5 THG5
7
GND_A 2 徐冷部サーミスタ
PTP-F-F5
THK1H THK1 THK1
GND_A
1
記録部サーミスタ
2
PTP-F-F5
D D
136Y104247
CN9-J CN9-P 136Y104275
SND-CN31 1
MD1AB 1 1
MD1AB 1
MD1 MD1
2
MD1_ACOM(24V_D) 2 2
MD1_ACOM 2
VCC_SENS 1
LED-CN85
3
MD1A 3 3
MD1A 3 搬送ﾓｰﾀ GND 2 LED28A基板
MD1BB MD1BB LED_ON_Cb
4
MD1_BCOM(24V_D)
4 4
MD1_BCOM
4
118SX210 3
113Y100334
5 5 5 5
6
MD1B 6 6
MD1B 6
7
MG1AB
8
MG1_ACOM(24V_B)
9
MG1BB VCC_+12V_PDD 1
PDD-CN87
E E
MG1A GND_A
10
11
MG1_BCOM(24V_B) 1
MG1 VCC_-12V_PDD
2
3
PDD28A基板
12
MG1B 2 MG1 LOGOUT 4 113Y100335
MD2AB
13
14
MD2BB
3
4
熱現像搬送ﾓｰﾀ
15
MD2_COM(24V_B) 5 118SX208A
16
MD2A 6
17
MD2B
18
MD2_COM(24V_B)
F F
CN10-J CN10-P 136Y102044
1 1
MD2AB 1
MD2
2 2
MD2_COM 2 MD2
MD2BB
3
4
3
4
MD2A
3
4
ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除ﾓｰﾀ
5 5
MD2_COM 5 118SX208A
6 6
MD2B 6
G G
SND-CN26 136Y104267
1
VCC_+24V_E 1
SOLD1 SOLD1
2
SOLDCb 2 ｽﾄｯﾊﾟ解除
3 N.C ｿﾚﾉｲﾄﾞ
4 N.C
SDC-1031(40Ω)
機種 2298 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 5500 H
コード Z22N2298000_ Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 6
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-32
SP-33
12
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
136Y104284
CN11-J CN11-P 136Y104264
MB11
SND-CN32 MB1AB MB1AB
A SND28B基板 1
2
MB1_ACOM(24V_A)
1
2
MB1_ACOM
1
2 MB11 A
113Y100917 MB1A MB1A
3
4
MB1BB
3
4
MB1BB
3
4
枚葉ﾓｰﾀ
MB1_BCOM(24V_A) MB1_BCOM 118SX210
5 5 5
MB1B MB1B
6 6 6
MB2A MB2A
7 7
MB2_ACOM(24V_C) MB2_ACOM
8 8
MB2B MB2B
9 9
MB2AB MB2AB
10
11
MB2BB
10
11
MB2BB 1
MB12 MB12
MB2_BCOM(24V_C)
B 12
VCC+24V_E
12
MB2_BCOM 2 搬送ﾓｰﾀ B
+24V_A
13
14
SOLA1HCb
13
14
SOLA1HCb
3
4
(ﾌﾟﾚﾌｨｰﾄﾞ用)
15 N.C N.C 15 N.C 5 118SX208A
SOLA1LCb SOLA1LCb
16 16 6
1
SOLA1 SOLA1
C 2 ﾄﾚｲﾛｯｸ C
3
SDC-1260
136Y104259
CN21-J CN21-P 136Y104264
MB21
SND-CN33 MB1AB MB1AB
1 1 1
MB1_ACOM(24V_A) MB1_ACOM
2
MB1A
2 2 MB21
MB1A
3
4
MB1BB
3
4
MB1BB
3
4
枚葉ﾓｰﾀ
MB1_BCOM(24V_A) MB1_BCOM 118SX210
D 5 5 5 D
MB1B MB1B
6 6 6
MB2A MB2A
7 7
MB2_ACOM(24V_C) MB2_ACOM
8 8
MB2B MB2B
9 9
MB2AB MB2AB
10
11
MB2BB
10
11
MB2BB 1
MB22 MB22
MB2_BCOM(24V_C) MB2_BCOM
12
VCC+24V_E
12 2 搬送ﾓｰﾀ
+24V_A
13
14
SOLA1HCb
13
14
SOLA1HCb
3
4
(ﾌﾟﾚﾌｨｰﾄﾞ用)
E
15 N.C N.C 15 N.C 5 118SX208A E
SOLA1LCb SOLA1LCb
16 16 6
136Y102057
SND-CN35 1
READYB 1
LDD-CN1
MS1STCB
2
GND_D
2
1
SOLA2 SOLA2
3
4
GND_D
3
4
LDD28A基板 2 ﾄﾚｲﾛｯｸ
VCC_+24V_E
5
GND_D
5 3
SDC-1260
6 6
7
GND_D 7
F F
8
VCC_+24V_E 8
9
VCC_+24V_E DF1B-8S-2.5R
10
FANG1CB DF1B-2022SCA
11 N.C FAN2
12 N.C 1 +24
4
3
2 NC
2
3 ALARM FAN2
1
4 GND
119Y100028B
G G
SND-CN30 AB 136Y104263
1 1 MJ1-CN1
2 COM 2
BB
3
4 A
3
4
MJ1
5 COM 5
6 B 6
機種 2298 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 5500 H
コード Z22N2298000_ Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 7
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-33
SP-34
12
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PSU31B基板 SND28B基板 PRN28B基板
113Y100567 113Y100916
113Y100917
A 136Y104255 A
PSUB-CN2 1
SND-CN2 GND PRN-CN1
1 1
2
2 +5V 2
3
3 GND_A 3
4
136Y104258 4 +12V 4
5
GND 1
SND-CN1 GND_A
5 5
6
5V 7 6 -12V 6
7
PSONb 8 7 GND
8
GND 2 8 GND
9
GND 3 9 +12VD
10
B +12VD 9 10 +12VD B
11
+5Vsb 10 11 POWSW
12
GND 4 12 GND
13
+12V 11 13
14
GND_A 5 14
15
-12V 12
16
17
6 CPU-CON1
18 1
19 2
20 3 CPU28A
C C
4 基板
PSUB-CN4 113Y100326
1
2 2
CPU-JP9
3 1
CPU-CN6 1 RXD1 136Y104256
BCR1
4 2
3 TXD1 1
CPU-CN8
5
6 4 2
7
SYSFAN 1
CPU-CN? 5 3
8 GND 2 6 4
D 9 3 7 RTS 5 D
10 4 8 CTS 6
11 9 7
12 10 8
13
14
CPU-CN7 1
15
16 2
閉端
17 3 GND
18 4 5V
E
閉端 E
PSUB-CN6 CPU-CN3 1
BCR2
1
2 1
CPU-CN9
2
3 3 2
4 4 3
5 5 4
6 6 5
7 6
8 7
PSUB-CN7 1 9 8
F F
2 10
3
4
5
6
7
8
G G
機種 2298 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 5500 H
コード Z22N2298000_ Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 8
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-34
SP-35
13
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No. Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No. Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No. Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No. Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No. Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No.
102N100037 10-9 146S0086 05C-10 322N100251 05A-3 328N100016A 04C-5 343N100059A 03B-11 356Y100882 05A-22
107Y0185C 05A-16 146S0086 09B-1 322NF006 08C-7 332N100180A 04C-4 343N100061 11-4 360N100219A 05B-17
107Y100017 03A-4 305S0134 09A-2 322NF006 08D-7 332N100182A 06A-4 345N100655A 02B-4 362N100320A 05A-5
113Y100329C 10-1 308N100136 06B-12 322NY156 09A-6 332Y100036 05A-23 345N100656A 02B-1 362N100327 03A-6
113Y100331C 10-7 308S0517 01B-6 322SF227 06B-21 334N100196 05B-8 345N100682 06A-6 363N100727 09B-8
113Y100333A 06B-14 308S0517 05E-3 322SP201 04A-4 334N100196 05C-8 345N100683A 04A-1 363N100736A 09B-5
113Y100334A 09B-2 309N100065 01A-4 322SP213 05A-4 334N100196 05D-4 345N100684 05D-3 363N100752 05B-1
113Y100335A 09B-10 309N100134A 05E-2 322SP213 06B-9 334N100196 05E-5 345N100699A 03B-10 363N100753C 09B-6
113Y100567D 10-4 309S0075 06B-1 322SP214 08A-4 334N100196 09B-9 346N100527B 04C-2 363N100756 05C-11
113Y100699A 10-10 309S0127 06B-17 323N1264B 06B-4 334N100197 08C-3 347N100418 08A-12 363N100757 05C-2
113Y100916A 10-12 309S0131 09A-3 323N1265A 06B-19 334N100197 08D-3 347N100422 08A-9 363N100763 05D-5
113Y100917A 10-8 310N100213 02A-4 324N100110A 06B-10 334N100198 05A-24 347S0281A 04C-3 363N100764 05D-8
114Y2298010A 10-11 310S9042516 08A-2 324Y100040 06B-16 334N100199 06B-3 347S0829 08A-14 363N100767B 08A-10
115N100002A 08C-10 310Y100009A 08C-9 327N100286A 09A-9 334N100200 05B-3 347S0971 10-13 363N100768B 08A-8
115N100002A 08D-10 310Y100009A 08D-9 327N100312A 04A-17 334N100201B 04A-20 347S0996 10-14 363N100769B 02A-5
115Y0041A 02B-6 310Y100010A 08C-4 327N100314A 08A-5 334N100202 04A-5 347S0998 10-15 363N100772 05C-4
115Y0041A 08B-1 310Y100010A 08D-4 327N100315A 05A-1 334N100203 04A-6 348N100155C 08D-8 363N100773 05C-3
117Y100033B 08C-2.1 313N100175C 09B-3 327N100316A 05A-19 334N100204A 05D-10 348N100156C 08D-6 363N100775 05D-7
117Y100034B 08D-2.1 313N100304C 05D-6 327N100317A 05A-21 334N100208 09A-11 348N100157B 08C-8 363N100776 05E-7
117Y100035B 08C-2.2 313Y100027 05A-10 327N100318A 05B-12 334N100209 09A-13 348N100158B 08C-6 363N100779A 03B-1
117Y100036B 08D-2.2 314N100058A 01A-12 327N100319 08C-5 334N100210 09A-14 348N100288C 05D-12 363N100783 05A-11
118SX202B 05A-18 314N100059B 01B-4 327N100319 08D-5 334N100224 04B-9 348N100289C 05D-2 363N100798 03A-9
118SX202B 08A-1 314Y100018B 01A-13 327N100320 04A-25 334N100384 03A-7 350N101316A 06A-3 363N101280C 05D-9
118SX208A 04A-15 314Y100019B 01B-3 327N100321A 04A-23 334N100385B 09A-15 350N101318B 09B-4 363N101319 03B-3
118SX209A 09A-5 316N100293A 01B-5 327N100322A 04A-24 334N100386B 09A-12 350N101325A 06A-1 363N101320 03B-2
118SX210 04A-21 316Y100071 04B-5 327N100324A 05B-13 334Y100146 06B-2 350N101326 05D-11 363N101321 03B-4
118SX210 05B-9 316Y100073 03B-12 327N100327 04A-16 334Y100147 05A-8 350N101334A 10-6 363N101322 05B-5
118YA184A 06B-15 316Y100075B 04B-10 327N100332 08B-5 334Y100154B 08B-3 350N102572B 01C-4 363N101323 05B-7
119S0096 08A-16 317N100055 03B-5 327N100333A 08B-4 334Y100166 05C-6 350N102720B 01B-8 363N101326 05C-9
119S0096 10-3 319N101353 08A-7 327N100334 09A-1 335N100043A 04A-3 350N102747 01A-10 363N101341B 05E-4
125N100032B 10-5 319Y100086B 06B-13 327N100338A 05A-13 335N100046 04A-13 350N102748A 01B-2 363N2368A 02A-8
128S0987 02A-7 319Y100089 04A-19 327N100340 05B-4 335N100047 05D-14 350N102749A 01A-3 363Y100447 03B-8
128S0987 03A-1 322N100017B 04B-12 327N100341 08A-3 339N100012A 06B-6 350N102750A 01C-6 366N100039 01A-14
128S1102 10-2 322N100018B 04B-11 327N100342 05D-13 339N100013A 08A-13 350N102751 01C-3 366S0006 02A-6
137S1350 10-16 322N100240A 09A-8 327N100344A 04A-11 340N100315 03B-7 350N102753A 01C-5 366S0011 03A-2
137S1417 10-17 322N100241A 04A-9 327N100345A 04A-12 341N100287 05B-15 350N102792A 01C-1 367S1109A 02A-3
137S1420 10-18 322N100241A 05B-2 327N100346A 04A-14 341N100288 05A-15 350N102795A 01C-2 367S1109A 02B-3
137S1423 10-19 322N100241A 05D-1 327N100352 04A-22 341N100289A 04A-10 355N100698A 05B-11 367S2066 02A-2
146N0010A 03A-8 322N100241A 06B-8 327N100597C 08B-6 341N100290A 04A-18 356N103803 04B-2 371N100090 04B-7
146S0029A 03A-5 322N100244A 04A-7 327N100598C 08B-8 341N100294 05C-7 356N103818B 02B-5 375N0095 04B-4
146S0029A 04B-1 322N100245A 05A-12 327N100599C 08B-7 341N100295 05C-5 356N103818B 08B-2 376N100044 02A-1
146S0029A 04C-1 322N100246A 05A-9 327N1121615A 09A-4 341Y100336A 04B-13 356N107511 01B-9 382N100323 01A-7
146S0029A 05A-14 322N100247A 05A-7 327N1122006 09A-7 342N100054A 05C-1 356Y100865 05A-20 386N100280A 06A-5
146S0086 05A-26 322N100248 08A-11 327Y100033A 08A-6 342N100055 03B-14 356Y100873C 04A-2 386S1115 02B-2
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-35
SP-36
13
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No. Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No. Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No. Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No. Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No. Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No.
387N100031 09B-7
388N100564 05B-6
388N100573 04B-8
388N100574 05A-17
388N100575 03A-3
388N100576A 05A-25
388N100584A 05E-6
388N100585A 03B-13
388N100588 05A-6
388N100589 06B-11
388N100590 06B-7
388N100593 01A-2
388N100598 04A-8
388N100972C 02A-9
388N100997 05E-1
388N2081 09A-10
388Y100007 05A-2
392N100001 04B-6
393N100002D 01A-5
398N100015C 01A-1
398Y100032 01A-8
401N100124 06B-20
402N0020A 04B-3
405N101307 08A-15
405N103044 01A-11
405N103130 03B-6
839Y100089 07-1
852N0025J 02A-10
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-36
SP-37
14
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. 締結用および配線用のサービス部品について 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
■ ねじ・止め輪・座金・ナット・配線用部品の中で、使用個数の多い部品はサー Screws, stopper rings, washers, nuts, wiring parts, etc. used in a large number
ビス部品として用意されている。 are provided as service parts.
■ 発注の際は部品コードと発注数量を明記すること。発注数量は 100 個単位 Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service parts.
とする。 Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.
■ サービス部品の納入時、部品コードをサービスマニュアルで使用されてい The table in “5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table” is provided for
る記号に読替えるための表が「5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表」に用意 converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used in the
されている。 service manual.
{SP14_5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表 } {SP:14_5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table}
2. ねじ類 2. Screws
■ 鉄系のねじの処理はクロメート処理から亜鉛めっき + 白色３価クロメート Iron screw treatment has been changed from chromate treatment to zinc plating/
処理に変更された。 white trivalent chromate treatment.
■ 新規機種においては、クロメート処理のねじの供給はなくなる。ただし、
Chromate treated screws will be no longer provided for new models. However,
出荷済の一部の機種においては、引き続きクロメート処理のねじは供給さ
in some models already shipped, chromate treated screws will continue to be
れる。クロメート処理以外のねじの処理は従来とおりである。
supplied. Other screw treatments will be as usual.
■ サービス部品一覧表の中のねじの記載方法の例を以下に示す。この記載方
The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are
法はサービスマニュアル内の記載方法と同じである。
described. This description method is the same as that in this Service Manual.
A2 .6x16 A 2 .6 x 1 6
長さ
Length
ね じ の 呼び
N omi nal di ameter
ね じ の 種 類 を あらわす文字
C haracter i ndi cati ng screw type
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-37
SP-38
14
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
参考情報 参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information 記号 部品コード Reference information
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
A2.6x16 BR3x6 308S0401
鋼
A3x4 ばね座金組込みな BR3x8 308S0402
亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
べ小ねじ
A3x6 ロメート BR3x10
A3x8 色：うすい白色 BR3x12 308S0404
Cross recessed
A3x15 pan head screw BR3x16 308S0405 鋼
Steel
with spring 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
A4x8 Zinc plating/White BR3x32
washer ロメート
A4x10 trivalent chromating BR3x35
Color: Light white 色：うすい白色
A4x40 BR4x6
ばね座金・平座金
B2x5 BR4x8 308S0406 Steel
組込み十字穴付六
Zinc plating/White
B2.5x5 BR4x10 308S0407 角ボルト
trivalent chromating
B3x4 BR4x12 308S0408 Color: Light white
Cross recessed
B3x6 BR4x15 hexagon head
B3x8 BR4x16 screw with spring
and plain washers
B3x10 鋼 BR4x20
B3x12 ばね座金・平座金 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク BR4x25
組込みなべ小ねじ ロメート
B3x16 色：うすい白色 BR4x30
B3x18 Cross recessed BR4x35 308S9420435 鋼
B3x20 pan head screw Steel BR4x40 308S9420440 クロメート
with spring and Zinc plating/White
B3x30 plain washers trivalent chromating BR5x10 308S9420510 Steel
B3x35 Color: Light white BR5x12 308S9420512 Chromating
B4x8 BR6x12 308S9420612
B4x10 六角頭デルタイト 鋼
DT3x6 306S0101 ネジ 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
B4x30
ロメート
B4x35 Hexagon head 色：うすい白色
DT3x8
B4x45 deltight screw
Steel
DT4x8
Zinc plating/White
trivalent chromating
DT4x12 Color: Light white
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-38
SP-39
14
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
参考情報 参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information 記号 部品コード Reference information
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
*N2x4 301S2000204 十字穴付さら小ね ステンレス
*S3x5 じ 不動態化処理
*N2x10 301S2000210 十字穴付なべ小ね ステンレス
*N3x6 301S2000306 じ 不動態化処理
Cross recessed Stainless steel
*S3x10
*N3x8 Cross recessed Stainless steel flat head screw Passive state treatment
*N3x10 pan head screw Passive state treatment *T3x4 301S3000304
*N4x10 301S2000410 *T3x6
PK2.5x3 六角穴付止めねじ *T3x8 301S3000308
鋼
PK3x10 （くぼみ先） *T4x4 301S3000404
黒色酸化処理
PK4x16 Hexagon socket *T4x5 十字穴付トラス小 ステンレス
Steel ねじ 不動態化処理
set screw with *T4x6
PK6x5 Black oxide treatment
cup point *T4x8 Cross recessed Stainless steel
鋼 *T4x10 truss head screw Passive state treatment
亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
Ps3x6 306S0151 六角頭樹脂用タッ *T4x12
ロメート
ピングねじ
色：うすい白色 *T4x16 301S3000416
Hexagon head *T4x25
Steel
tapping screw *T4x35 301S3000435
Ps3x8 306S0152 Zinc plating/White
with cup point
trivalent chromating 鋼
Color: Light white TP3x6 308S0414 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
Q3x10 六角頭 TP ねじ ロメート
色：うすい白色
Q3x12
TP4x6 308S0416 Cross recessed
Q4x6 hexagon head TP Steel
Q4x8 Screw Zinc plating/White
鋼 trivalent chromating
Q4x10 六角穴付ボルト TP4x8 308S0424
黒色酸化処理 Color: Light white
Q4x12
Hexagon socket ステンレス
Q4x14 Steel
head bolt *V3x6 301S4000306 バインド小ねじ 不動態化処理
Black oxide treatment
Q4x30
Q6x12 Bind screw Stainless steel
*V3x10
Passive state treatment
Q6x25
Q8x20
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-39
SP-40
14
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
WP3x3 303S0101
WP3x4 303S0102
WP3x5 303S0103
WP3x6 303S0104
WP3x8 303S0105
WP3x10 303S0106
WP4x4 303S0107
WP4x5 303S0108 六角穴付き止めネ 鋼
WP4x6 303S0109 ジ 亜鉛めっき／リン酸塩処
WP4x8 303S0110 (W ポイント） 理
WP4x10 303S0111 Hexagon socket Steel
WP4x12 303S0112 head set screw Zinc plating/Phosphate
WP4x16 303S0113 (double -point) treatment
WP5x5 303S0114
WP5x6 303S0115
WP5x8 303S0116
WP5x10 303S0117
WP6x6 303S0118
WP6x8 303S0119
WP6x10 303S0120
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-40
SP-41
14
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
3. 止め輪、座金、ナット類 参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information
3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information 鋼
W3
Symbol Part code 亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
ロメート
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
W4 色：うすい白色
E3 鋼 平座金
E4 亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク Steel
W5
ロメート Plain washer Zinc plating/White trivalent
色：うすい白色 chromating
W12 Color: Lingh white
E6 Steel
E 形止め輪 Zinc plating/White trivalent *W5 309S0120005 SUS304
chromating
E ring 鋼
Color: Lingh white
亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
*E3 315S3050030 ステンレス ロメート
不動態化処理 六角ナット 色：うすい白色
*E4 315S3050040 Na3
Stainless steel Hexagon nut Steel
*E6 315S3050060 Passive state treatment Zinc plating/White trivalent
chromating
鋼
Color: Lingh white
亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
KL4 ロメート
K-CL リング 色：うすい白色
K-CL ring Steel
KL6 Zinc plating/White trivalent
chromating
Color: Lingh white
鋼
SW3 亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
ロメート
ばね座金 色：うすい白色
SW4
Spring washer Steel
Zinc plating/White trivalent
SW12 chromating
Color: Lingh white
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-41
SP-42
14
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
4. 配線用部品 参考情報
Reference information
記号 部品コード
4. Wiring Parts 概略外形寸法など（mm）
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称
Approx. external
参考情報 Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc.
Reference information
記号 部品コード
Symbol Part code 概略外形寸法など（mm） コードクランプ
形状 部品名称
Approx. external KGES-4 11x20x10 (WxHxD)
Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc. Cord clamp
コードクランプ
コードクランプ
EDS-0607U 14x9x4 (WxHxD)
LAMS-05 9x23x5 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp
Cord clamp
LWS-3S VO 316S1242 13x10x29 (WxHxD)
EDS-17L 55x26x5 (WxHxD) LWS-3S-2W
コードクランプ 15x13x2 (WxHxD)
VO コードクランプ
Cord clamp LWS-5S-2W
EDS-25L 316S2028 75x32x5 (WxHxD) 318S1130 Cord clamp 15x18x2 (WxHxD)
VO
LWS-8S-
318S1195 15x25x3 (WxHxD)
コードクランプ 2.5W VO
EDS-2 20x10x5 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp コードクランプ
PCB-3S 316S0268 15x13x7 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp
コードクランプ
FGC-8 10x10x25 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp SB-2718 318S1032 35x26x6 (WxHxD)
コードクランプ
ケーブルクランプ Cord clamp
KFCS-3002 316S1244 53x10x15 (WxHxD) SB-4025 316S0029 48x33x6 (WxHxD)
Cable clamp
ホースクランプ
SNP-1-HSO 12x12x4 (WxHxD)
Hose clamp
T18R 316S1001 束線部品 100x2.5 (LxW)
T30R 316S1002 152x3.5 (LxW)
Cable tie
T50R 316S1003 202x4.7 (LxW)
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-42
SP-43
14
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
5. ［部品コード］→［記号］読替表 ■ ねじ類
この表は、サービス部品納入時、サービス部品の部品コードをサービスマニュアル記載
の記号に読替えるときに使用すること。 Scurews
部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table
301S2000204 *N2x4 303S0105 WP3x8 Q4x14
Use this table for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols 301S2000210 *N2x10 303S0106 WP3x10 Q4x30
used in this Service Manual. 301S2000306 *N3x6 303S0107 WP4x4 Q6x12
*N3x8 303S0108 WP4x5 Q6x25
*N3x10 303S0109 WP4x6 Q8x20
301S2000410 *N4x10 303S0110 WP4x8 306S0101 DT3x6
301S3000304 *T3x4 303S0111 WP4x10 DT3x8
*T3x6 303S0112 WP4x12 DT4x8
301S3000308 *T3x8 303S0113 WP4x16 DT4x12
301S3000404 *T4x4 303S0114 WP5x5 306S0151 Ps3x6
*T4x5 303S0115 WP5x6 306S0152 Ps3x8
*T4x6 303S0116 WP5x8 308S0401 BR3x6
*T4x8 303S0117 WP5x10 308S0402 BR3X8
*T4x10 303S0118 WP6x6 BR3x10
*T4x12 303S0119 WP6x8 308S0404 BR3x12
301S3000416 *T4x16 303S0120 WP6x10 308S0405 BR3x16
*T4x25 PK3x10 308S0406 BR4x8
301S3000435 *T4x35 PK4x16 308S0407 BR4x10
301S4000306 *V3x6 PK6x5 308S0408 BR4x12
*V3x10 PK2.5x3 BR4x16
*S3x5 Q3x10 BR4x20
*S3x10 Q3x12 BR4x25
303S0101 WP3x3 Q4x6 308S0414 TP3x6
303S0102 WP3x4 Q4x8 308S0416 TP4x6
303S0103 WP3x5 Q4x10 308S0424 TP4x8
303S0104 WP3x6 Q4x12 A3x4
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-43
SP-44
14
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 ■ 止め輪、座金、ナット類
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
A3x6 308S9420440 BR4x40 Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts
A3x8 308S9420510 BR5x10 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号
A3x15 308S9420512 BR5x12 Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
A4x8 308S9420612 BR6x12 Na3 SW3 315S3050040 *E4
A4x10 BR3x32 309S0120005 *W5 SW4 315S3050060 *E6
A4x40 BR3x35 W3 SW12 E3
A2.6x16 BR4x6 W4 KL4 E4
B2x5 BR4x15 W5 KL6 E6
B3x4 W12 315S3050030 *E3
B3x6
■ 配線用部品
B3x8
B3x10
Wiring Parts
B3x12
部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号
B3x16
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
B3x18
316S0029 SB-4025 FGC-8 EDS-17L
B3x20
KGES-4 316S1242 LWS-3S VO 318S1130 LWS-5S-2W VO
B3x30
316S0268 PCB-3S 316S1244 KFCS-3002 LAMS-05
B3x35
316S1001 T18R EDS-0607U LWS-3S-2W VO
B4x8
LW S - 8 S - 2 . 5 W
B4x10 316S1002 T30R 316S2028 EDS-25L 318S1195
VO
B4x30 316S1003 T50R SNP-1-HSO
B4x35 EDS-2 318S1032 SB-2718
B4x45
B2.5x5
BR4x30
308S9420435 BR4x35
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-44
SP-45
BLANK PAGE
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-45
SP-46
BLANK PAGE
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-46
SP-47
BLANK PAGE
020-201-04C DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual SP-47
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
11.25.2008 00 New release for UL (00 (1) Edition) (FM5451) All pages
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
05.20.2009 01(1) New release for the field (FM5546) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0 3, 4, 6, 7, 10-14, 18-23, 25, 26, 33,
06.30.2009 02
(supports multi modalities), etc) (FM5568) 34
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 26
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 3, 9, 15, 19, 20, 22, 23, 26, 33, 34
SERVICE MANUAL 12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) Cover
SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)
(FM-DL 100)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
SP-1
How to Use Service Character Significance The alphabet denotes a difference in
the specifications. Parts differing in
RECOMMENDED QUANTITIES
Consumable parts or parts OF SPARE PARTS
Parts List A that will be replaced at short inter-
vals.
the suffix are not compatible with each
other. Version number is omitted in the It is recommended as a rough guide to
Parts that may become faulty ac- list. keep in stock a certain quantity of parts
B cidentally and have a according to the rank (A, B, C, D, E)
RANK relatively high failure rate. PART NAME assigned to the parts, as follows. For
Parts that have a sufficiently long periodically replaced parts, keep them
PART NAME represents a general name
Handling RANK characters C MTBF, but are expected to have a
in stock separately. Adjust the stock
relatively high failure rate. of a part.
(Parts that are handled in a special quantity of service parts depending on
Parts that have a sufficiently long
manner during parts management, such D MTBF, but are expected to be- QTY. the number of working units (N).
as replacement) come faulty. Quantity used in a single system : Q
QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty Parts that are necessary for fault N=1
analysis, or parts that may be in each unit.
R
Must be
Repairable A part whose quantity is suffixed with Rank A = 1 + Q × 0.3
returned. E needed in case of unexpected
accidents such as man-induced -S represents a small part that is Rank C = 1 + Q × 0.05
Must be Rank D = 1 + Q × 0.02
returned.
damage. shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a
Q
(We use for
Not repairable part is ordered in quantity of 1, a pack 2 ≤ N ≤ 10
<The RANK guide> containing 50 pieces of that part is
analysis.)
The Fault RANK characters, Handling Rank A = 2 + N × Q × 0.3
Must not be supplied.) Rank C = 2 + N × Q × 0.05
returned. RANK characters, and Export
Rank D = 1 + N × Q × 0.02
(Consumable regulation-applicable character are REMARKS
T part. Not Not repairable assigned in that order. 11 ≤ N ≤ 300
applicable to Thus, at least one character or up to The REMARKS column indicates a Rank A = 3 + N × Q × 0.3
free-of-charge three characters are assigned in the unique name or relevant information of Rank C = 3 + N × Q × 0.05
warranty.) RANK column. each part. Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
without Must not be
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned. REF. NO. SERIAL NUMBER PRECAUTIONS TO BE
Export regulation-applicable REF. NO. is a part number indicated in The units may contain different parts OBSERVED WHEN RETURNING
the Service Parts Exploded Views. For depending on their shipment control PARTS FOR REPAIR
character number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates
parts having different functions, they are
(Parts with the following character are clearly distinguished in the REMARKS the shipment control number to which When returning a component for repair,
controlled by Export regulation.) and SERIAL NUMBER columns. the relevant parts are applicable. If the pack it in the same manner as for the
Character Significance SERIAL NUMBER column is blank, the supplied substitute, using the substitute
+
Parts applicable to export PART NUMBER parts are applicable to all the relevant packing materials.
regulations. units. The shipment control number is The use of different packing materials or
PART NUMBER is a code number that represented by lower five digits of eight- packing methods may incur damage to
Fault RANK characters is unique to each part. An alphabetic digit number indicated on the rating packed component during transit.
letter at the rightmost position of the indication label.
(Which provide reference for code number has the following meaning.
determining the recommended stock
quantity) For hardware REFER TO
All parts are assigned with one of The alphabet denotes the version The "REFER TO" column shows
characters A through E. number of a part. If parts have different reference sections concerning the part.
version numbers, they are upward- Clicking the reference section in the
compatible. “REFER TO” column jumps to the top
page of the reference section where the
For software related information is in.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-1
SP-2
INDEX
INDEX 01 INDEX 02 INDEX 03 INDEX 10 INDEX 11 INDEX 12
● カバー ● フレーム ● 装填部 ● 制御部 ● 回路図 ● 部品番号検索表
COVER FRAME FILM LOADING UNIT CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM PARTS NOS. SEARCH
TABLE
FPEZ001A.AI FPEZ002A.AI FPEZ003A AI FPEZ010A AI
INDEX 04 INDEX 05 INDEX 06 INDEX 13
● 枚葉部 ● 搬送部 ● 副走査部 ● 締結用および配線用の
REMOVAL UNIT CONVEYOR UNIT SUB-SCANNING UNIT サービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for
Securing and Wiring
FPEZ004A.AI FPEZ005A.AI FPEZ006A AI
INDEX 07 INDEX 08 INDEX 09
●光学部 ● 熱現像部 ● 排出部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT FILM RELEASE UNIT
FPEZ007A.AI FPEZ008A.AI FPEZ009A AI
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-2
SP-3
01A
カバー 1
COVER 1
カバー 1
COVER 1 01A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350Y101032 カバー Cover 1
D 2 350N101291C カバー Cover 1
D 3 405N101308 銘板 Label 1
FPEZ0111.AI D 4 314N100058A 蝶番 Hinge 2
D 5 314Y100018B 蝶番 Hinge 2
D 6 366N100039 ガイド Guide 1
D 7 398Y100017 シャッタ Shutter 1
D 8 382N100323 テープ Sponge 2
D 9 350Y101033 カバー Cover 1
D 10 350N101292D カバー Cover 1
D 11 388N100593 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 4
D 12 398N100015B カバー Cover 1
A 13 393N100002D 刃物 Cutter 1
D 14 309N100065 プラワッシャ Plastic Washer 4
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-3
SP-4
01B
カバー 2
COVER 2
カバー 2
COVER 2 01B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350N101294A カバー Cover 1
D 2 350Y101034 カバー Cover 1
D 3 350N101293B カバー Cover 1
FPEZ0112.AI D 4 314Y100019B 蝶番 Hinge 2
D 5 314N100059B 蝶番 Hinge 2
D 6 316N100152 止め具 Stopper 1
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-4
SP-5
01C
カバー 3
COVER 3
カバー 3
COVER 3 01C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350N101287B カバー Cover 1
D 2 350N101290A カバー Cover 1
D 3 350N101295C カバー Cover 1
FPEZ0113.AI D 4 350N101296B カバー Cover 1
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-5
SP-6
02A
フレーム 1
FRAME 1
フレーム 1
FRAME 1 02A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 363N100769B ガイド Guide 2
D 2 367S0135 ゴム足 Rubber Foot 2
D 3 386S1115 緩衝機材 Rubber 3
FPEZ0211.AI D 4 366S0006 アクチュエータ Actuator 2
D 5 128S0987 マイクロスイッチ Micro-Switch 2 SK1, SK2
D 6 376N100044 エアフィルタ Air Filter 1
インターロック解除
D 7 899Y100501 Interlock Releasing Tool 1
ツール
インターロック解除
D 8 899Y100502 Interlock Releasing Tool 1
ツール
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-6
SP-7
02B
フレーム 2
FRAME 2
フレーム 2
FRAME 2 02B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 345N100656A 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 2 386S1115 緩衝機材 Rubber 1
D 3 367S0135 ゴム足 Rubber Foot 2
FPEZ0212.AI D 4 345N100655A 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 5 310N100213 ストッパ Stopper 4
D 6 356N103818B ブラケット Bracket 1
D 7 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1 THK1
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-7
SP-8
03A
装填部 1
FILM LOADING UNIT 1
装填部 1
FILM LOADING UNIT 1 03A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 128S0971 マイクロスイッチ Micro-Switch 1 SA2
D 2 366S0011 アクチュエータ Actuator 1
D 3 388N100575 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1
FPEZ0311.AI D 4 107Y100017 ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLA1
D 5 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 SA3, SA4, SA5
D 6 362N100327 受 Guide 4
D 7 334N100216A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 10
D 8 146N0010A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SA1
D 9 363N100798 ガイド Guide 2
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-8
SP-9
03B
装填部 2
FILM LOADING UNIT 2
装填部 2
FILM LOADING UNIT 2 03B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 363N100779A ガイド Guide 4
D 2 363N100761 ガイド Guide 1
D 3 363N100781A ガイド Guide 1
FPEZ0312.AI D 4 363N100762 ガイド Guide 2
D 5 317N100055 キャップ Cap 13
D 6 405N101447 銘板 Label 1
D 7 340N100101A つまみ Knob 1
D 8 363Y100253 ガイド Guide 1
D 9 334N100216A ローラ Roller 1
D 10 345N100699 仕切り板 Plate 1
D 11 343N100059A フック Hook 1
D 12 316Y100073 止め具 Stopper 1
D 13 388N100585A ねじりコイルばね Spring 1
D 14 342N100055 レバー Lever 1
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-9
SP-10
04A
枚葉部 1
REMOVAL UNIT 1
枚葉部 1
REMOVAL UNIT 1 04A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 345N100683A 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 2 356Y100873C アーム Arm 2
D 3 335N100043A フランジ Flange 2
FPEZ0411.AI D 4 322SP201 軸受け Bearing 2
D 5 334N100202 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 6 334N100203 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 7 322N100244A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4
D 8 388N100598 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 2
D 9 322N100241A 軸受 Bearing 4
D 10 341N100289A アーム Arm 4
D 11 327N100344A 歯車 Gear 3
D 12 327N100345A 歯車 Gear 1
D 13 335N100046 フランジ Flange 1
D 14 327N100346A 平歯車 Spur Gear 5
D 15 118SX208A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB2
D 16 327N100327 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 17 327N100312A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 18 341N100290A アーム Arm 4
D 19 319Y100089 軸 Shaft 1
D 20 334N100201B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 21 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB1
D 22 327N100352 歯車 Gear 1
D 23 327N100321A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 24 327N100322A 歯車 Gear 1
D 25 327N100320 歯車 Gear 1
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-10
SP-11
04B
枚葉部 2
REMOVAL UNIT 2
枚葉部 2
REMOVAL UNIT 2 04B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 341Y100104 アーム Arm 1
D 2 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SB2
D 3 356N103803 ブラケット Bracket 1
FPEZ0412.AI D 4 322SY223 軸受け Bearing 26
D 5 388N100573 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 6
D 6 402N0020A ベローズ Bellows 3
D 7 375N100126 シール Seal 3
D 8 316Y100071 止め具 Holder 3
D 9 392N100001 吸着盤 Suction Cup 3
D 10 371N100090 ノズル Nozzle 3
D 11 316Y100075B 止め具 Holder 2
D 12 334N100224 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-11
SP-12
04C
枚葉部 3
REMOVAL UNIT 3
枚葉部 3
REMOVAL UNIT 3 04C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SB1
D 2 346N100527B 補助板 Support Plate 3
D 3 347S0281A スペーサ Spacer 4
FPEZ0413.AI D 4 332N100180A ストッパ Stopper 4
D 5 328N100016A 爪 Claw 2
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-12
SP-13
05A
搬送部 1
CONVEYOR UNIT 1
搬送部 1
CONVEYOR UNIT 1 05A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N100315A 歯車 Gear 2
D 2 388Y100007 板ばね Leaf Spring 2
D 3 322N100251 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1
FPEZ0511.AI D 4 322SP213 軸受 Bearing 4
D 5 362N100320A 受 Support 2
D 6 388N100588 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 2
D 7 322N100247A 軸受 Bearing 2
D 8 334Y100147 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 9 322N100246A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1
D 10 313Y100027 ステー Stay 1
D 11 363N100783 ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 12 322N100245A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2
D 13 327N100338A 歯車 Gear 1
D 14 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SD3, SD4
D 15 -- -- -- --
D 16 341N100288 アーム Arm 1
D 17 107Y0185C ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLD1
D 18 388N100574 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 1
D 19 118SX202B パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD2
D 20 327N100316A 歯車 Gear 1
D 21 356Y100865 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 22 327N100317A 歯車 Gear 1
D 23 356Y100882 エッジセンサ Assy Edge Sensor Assy 1 SD5
D 24 332Y100036 ストッパ Stopper 1
D 25 334N100198 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 26 388N100576A 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1
D 27 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD2
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-13
SP-14
05B
搬送部 2
CONVEYOR UNIT 2
搬送部 2
CONVEYOR UNIT 2 05B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 363N100752 ガイド Guide 1
D 2 322N100241A 軸受 Bearing 4
D 3 334N100200 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
FPEZ0512.AI D 4 327N100340 歯車 Gear 2
D 5 363N100749 ガイド Guide 4
D 6 388N100564 ばね Spring 2
D 7 363N100754 ガイド Guide 4
D 8 334N100196 ローラ Roller 4
D 9 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD1
D 10 340N100098 取手 Handle 1
D 11 355N100698A フレーム Frame 1
D 12 327N100318A 歯車 Gear 1
D 13 327N100324A 歯車 Gear 4
D 14 327N100323A 歯車 Gear 2
D 15 341N100287 アーム Arm 1
D 16 327N100326A 歯車 Gear 1
D 17 327N100318A 歯車 Gear 1
D 18 360N100219A ハウジング Housing 1
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-14
SP-15
05C
搬送部 3
CONVEYOR UNIT 3
搬送部 3
CONVEYOR UNIT 3 05C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 342N100054A レバー Lever 2
D 2 363N100757 ガイド Guide 1
D 3 363N100773 ガイド Guide 4
FPEZ0513.AI D 4 363N100772 ガイド Guide 4
D 5 341N100295 アーム Arm 1
A 6 334Y100166 ローラ Roller 1
D 7 341N100294 アーム Arm 1
D 8 334N100196 ローラ Roller 8
D 9 363N100758 ガイド Guide 1
D 10 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD1
D 11 363N100756 ガイド Guide 1
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-15
SP-16
05D
搬送部 4
CONVEYOR UNIT 4
搬送部 4
CONVEYOR UNIT 4 05D
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 322N100241A 軸受 Bearing 2
D 2 363N100775 ガイド Guide 4
D 3 363N100764 ガイド Guide 1
FPEZ0514.AI D 4 334N100196 ローラ Roller 16
D 5 345N100684 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 6 363N100763 ガイド Guide 4
D 7 363N100776 ガイド Guide 4
D 8 363N100777 ガイド Guide 4
D 9 388N100584A 板ばね Leaf Spring 4
D 10 350N101326 カバー Cover 1
D 11 327N100342 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 12 334N100204A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-16
SP-17
06A
副走査部 1
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1
副走査部 1
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1 06A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350N101325A カバー Cover 1
D 2 386N100282 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 16
D 3 350N101316A カバー Cover 1
FPEZ0611.AI D 4 332N100182A ストッパ Stopper 1
D 5 386N100280A 防振ゴム Shock Absorber 1
D 6 345N100682 遮光布 Shading Cloth 1
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-17
SP-18
06B
副走査部 2
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2
副走査部 2
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2 06B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 309S0075 座金 Washer 2
D 2 334Y100146 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
D 3 334N100199 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
FPEZ0612.AI D 4 343N100061 フック Hook 1
D 5 323N1264B 平ベルト Belt 1
D 6 324N1036D 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 2
D 7 339N100012A ハンドル Handle 1
D 8 388N100590 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 2
D 9 322N100241A 軸受 Bearing 2
D 10 322SP213 軸受 Bearing 4
D 11 324N100110A 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 2
D 12 388N100589 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 2
D 13 308N100136 特殊ねじ Special Screw 2
D 14 319Y100086B 軸 Shaft 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 15 113Y100333A 1 SE1
SED28A SED28A
D 16 118YA184A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 ME1
D 17 324Y100040 平ベルト車 Wheel 1
D 18 309S0127 座金 Washer 1
D 19 324N1038C 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 1
D 20 323N1265A 平ベルト Belt 1
D 21 401N100124 押え板 Pressure Plate 1
D 22 322SF227 軸受 Bearing 2
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-18
SP-19
07
光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 07
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
DR 1 839Y100057 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1
D 2 898Y100667A キット Kit 1
FPEZ0711.AI
◇参 考◇
・ 本装置は 839Y100057 または 839Y0060 のスキャナユニットを使用することができる。
ただし、サービスパーツとして供給されるのは 839Y100057 のみである。
・ スキャナユニットを 839Y0060 から 839Y100057 へ交換する場合は、REF.2 も同時にオー
ダーすること
<REMARKS>
・ This equipment can be used 839Y100057 or 839Y0060 scanner unit. However, only
839Y100057 is provided as a service part.
・ When replacing the scanner unit from 839Y0060 to 839Y100057, also order REF. 2 at
the same time.
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-19
SP-20
08A
熱現像部 1
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1
熱現像部 1
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 08A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118SX208A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MG1
D 2 310S9042516 平行ピン Straight Pin 1
D 3 327N100341 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
FPEZ0811.AI D 4 322SP214 すべり軸受 Bushing 2
D 5 327N100314A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 6 327Y100033A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 7 319N101353 軸 Shaft 1
D 8 363N100768B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 9 347N100422 スペーサ Spacer 1
D 10 363N100767B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 11 322N100248 すべり軸受 Bushing 1
D 12 347N100418 スペーサ Spacer 1
D 13 339N100013A ハンドル Handle 1
D 14 347S0829 スペーサ Spacer 1
D 15 405N101307 銘板 Label 1
D 16 119Y100047 電動ファン Fan 1
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-20
SP-21
08B
熱現像部 2
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2
熱現像部 2
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2 08B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N100332 歯車 Gear 1
D 2 327N100331 歯車 Gear 1
D 3 327N100333A 歯車 Gear 9
FPEZ0812.AI D 4 327N100329A 歯車 Gear 1
D 5 327N100330 歯車 Gear 1
D 6 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1
D 7 356N103818B ブラケット Bracket 1
D 8 334Y100154 ローラ Roller 9
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-21
SP-22
08C
熱現像部 3
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3
熱現像部 3
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3 08C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350Y100854B カバー Cover 1
D 2.1 117Y100019A ヒータ（100V 第 1） Heater 1 100-120VAC
D 2.2 117Y100021A ヒータ（200V 第 1） Heater 1 200-240VAC
FPEZ0813.AI D 3 334N100197 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4
D 4 310Y100010A ピン Pin 2
D 5 327N100319 歯車 Gear 4
D 6 348N100158B 側板 Side Plate 1
D 7 322NF006 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 8
D 8 348N100157B 側板 Side Plate 1
D 9 310Y100009A ピン Pin 2
D 10 115N100002A 感熱スイッチ Thermal Protector 2
現像ラック部
D 11.1 802Y100031 Rack Unit 1 100-120VAC
（100V 第 1）
現像ラック部
D 11.2 802Y100033 Rack Unit 1 200-240VAC
（200V 第 1）
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-22
SP-23
08D
熱現像部 4
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4
熱現像部 4
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 08D
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350Y100855B カバー Cover 1
D 2.1 117Y100020A ヒータ（100V 第 2） Heater 1 100-120VAC
D 2.2 117Y100022A ヒータ（200V 第 2） Heater 1 200-240VAC
FPEZ0814.AI D 3 334N100197 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 6
D 4 310Y100010A ピン Pin 2
D 5 327N100319 歯車 Gear 6
D 6 348N100156C 側板 Side Plate 1
D 7 322NF006 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 12
D 8 348N100155C 側板 Side Plate 1
D 9 310Y100009A ピン Pin 2
D 10 115N100002A 感熱スイッチ Thermal Protector 2
現像ラック部
D 11.1 802Y100032 Rack Unit 1 100-120VAC
（100V 第 2）
現像ラック部
D 11.2 802Y100034 Rack Unit 1 200-240VAC
（200V 第 2）
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-23
SP-24
09A
排出部 1
FILM RELEASE UNIT 1
排出部 1
FILM RELEASE UNIT 1 09A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N100334 平歯車 Spur Gear 4
D 2 327N100328 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 3 322NY156 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 4
FPEZ0911.AI D 4 322N100240A 軸受け Bearing 8
D 5 327N100311A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 6 388N2081 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 2
D 7 334N100214 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1
D 8 334N100210 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 9 334N100206 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 10 334N100208 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 11 334N100207 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 12 334N100209 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-24
SP-25
09B
排出部 2
FILM RELEASE UNIT 2
排出部 2
FILM RELEASE UNIT 2 09B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 2 113Y100334A 1
LED28A LED28A
FPEZ0912.AI D 3 313N100175C ステー Stay 1
D 4 350N101318B カバー Cover 1
D 5 363N100736A ガイド Guide 3
D 6 363N100753B ガイド Guide 1
D 7 387N0165 帯電防止材 Antistatic Material 1
D 8 363N100727 ガイド Guide 5
D 9 334N100196 ローラ Roller 15
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 10 113Y100335A 1
PDD28A PDD28A
020-201-02C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-25
SP-26
10
制御部
CONTROLLER
制御部
CONTROLLER 10
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 1 113Y100329C 1
PNL28A PNL28A
D 2 128S1102 スイッチ Switch 1
FPEZ1011.AI D 3 119S0096 電動ファン Fan 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 4 113Y100328E 1
PSU28B PSU28B
Board Assembly
125N100032A/ ボードアセンブリ
C 5 PSU27A (Power 1
B PSU27A（電源）
Supply)
D 6 350N101334A カバー Cover 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 7 113Y100331C 1
HTD28A HTD28A
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
CR 8 113Y100327C 1
SND28A SND28A
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
CR 9 113Y100330D 1
PRN28A PRN28A
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
CR 10 113Y100326D/E 1
CPU28A CPU28A
D 11 347S0911 スペーサ Spacer 1
D 12 308S2760308 ネジ Screw 3
C 13 102N100022 メモリボード Memory Board 1 512MB DIMM
メモリカード（コンパ
C 14 114Y2108300A Memory Card (CF Card) 1
クトフラッシュカード）
250V/10A for
A 15 137S1350 ヒューズ FUSE 2
HTD28A F1,F2
48V/1A for
A 16 137S1417 ヒューズ FUSE 2 SND28A F8,
for PRN28A F1
48V/1.6A for
A 17 137S1419 ヒューズ FUSE 1
PSU28B F2
48V/2A for
SND28A
A 18 137S1420 ヒューズ FUSE 3
F6,F7, for
PSU28B F5
48V/3.2A for
A 19 137S1421 ヒューズ FUSE 2
PSU28B F4,F8
48V/5A for
SND28A F1,
A 20 137S1423 ヒューズ FUSE 8 F2,F3,F4,F5,
for PSU28B
F6,F7,F9
250V/8A for
A 21 137S1459 ヒューズ FUSE 1
PSU28B F1
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-26
SP-27
11
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
136Y102055
LDSIG UL1553-SB1.5D-2V 850mm
PRN-CN6 1 1 LDD-CN7
PRN28A基板 SML001 GND SML001
LDD28A
2
113Y100322
A 113Y100330 1
LDDON 136Y102056 UL1007-AWG26灰
1 A
2
LDDONb 1010mm 2
LDD-CN3
GND 136Y102058
PRN-CN4 3 3 LDD-CN9 VCC_+12V_LDD UL1007-AWG20橙
LDDOK 1
4 4 GND_A
LDDOKb 2 710mm
5 5 VCC_-12V_LDD
GND DF1E-4S-2.5C
3
6 6 GND_A
7
SS 7 DF1B-2022SCA
4
200V用Breaker 8
SSb 8
Matsushita PSU28B基板 9
GND 9
BAM210032 10A
DF1B-10S-2.5R +5VF DF1B-10S-2.5R
113Y100328 DF1B-2428SCA
10 10
DF1B-2428SCA
B B
128S0933A 136Y102023
UL1007-AWG20橙 CN1-J CN1-P
PSUB-CN5 +5V 810mm PRN-CN1 136Y102045 SED-CN24
1 1 PRN-CN2 +5VF UL1061-AWG26灰 +5VF
4
GND_A GND 2
1
GND
1 1
GND
1
SED28A
Breaker +12V 2 2 2 2
113Y100333
INLET 136Y102014
136Y102015
UL1015-AWG16黒
136Y102019 PSUA-CN51
136Y102020
UL1007-AWG20橙 PSUB-CN2
2
-12V
3 DF1E-3S-2.5C
DF1B-2428SCA
3
SED 3 3
SED 3
UL1015-AWG14黒 UL1015-AWG18黒
GND 5 4
UL1061-AWG26灰 DF13-3S-1.25C
LINE1 LOAD1 1 8 985mm DF1B-3EP-2.5RC DF1B-3ES-2.5RC 136Y102046 DF13-2630SCFA
IN-L 1 1 1 PSUA-CN1 GND 3 5
DF1B-6S-2.5R
600mm
SPS-61T-250
145mm SPS-61T-250 SPS-61T-250
70mm AC(L)1 2 7 GND_A
DS-250PU DS-250PU DS-250PU 305mm PSU27A 3
GND 6 IPBD-03-D
6 6
DF1B-2022SCA 1
DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA
IN-N 1 UL1015-AWG14白
1
LINE2 LOAD2 1
2
AC(N)3 電源 4
GND 5 CC69R-2024-01-T-SP PRN-CN3 2
130mm 60mm +24V
SPS-61T-250
DS-250PU
SPS-61T-250
DS-250PU
SPS-61T-250
DS-250PU
300mm 4 125N100032 5
+24V
4 3
C 6 3 DF1E-4S-2.5C 4 C
IN-G
SPS-61T-250
1
15A 5
VHR-5N
SVH-41T-P1.1
7
+24V 2
VHR-8N
DF1B-2428SCA
DS-250PU 8
+24V 1 SVH-21T-P1.1
UL1015-AWG14緑/黄 VHR-8N
75mm Matsushita 140mm SVH-21T-P1.1 185mm 136Y102059
BAM215031
1
KB-STP-01K
128S1102 UL1015-AWG18緑/黄 PSUB-CN4
136Y102022
UL1007-AWG22橙
CPU28A LAN
-LAN
1
FG1 UL1015-AWG16白 1
+5VSB 880mm 1
CPU-J31 1000mm
NICOON
FV2-4
FG
2
GND 2 CPU28A
NC-176-F6.35-1.65 TB1 FV1.25-3
IPBD-03-S
3
/PS-ON 3
XHP-3
BXH-001T-P0.6
基板 MISUMI
120S5272 TB1-OUT1-1 NWSI-C5E-SH
D
TB1-IN1-1 FV1 25-4
1 CC69R-2024-01-T-SP
136Y102021 113Y100326 120S5273 D
1 TB1-OUT1-2 PSUB-CN3 UL1015-AWG18橙 CPU-J30
FV2-4 1 1 N.C N.C 6
FV2-4 UL1015-AWG18白 GND 890mm CPU-J33
2 5 136Y102028 PNL-CN2
PWBN_P UL1007-AWG26灰
Yoshida 3
GND 4 1
1475mm 1
JTP20-2 GND GND DF1E-2S-2.5C
TB1-IN2-1 TB1-OUT2-1 4 3 2 2
135S0856 1 FV1.25-4
1
5
+5V 2 3
15mm DF1B-2428SCA
FV2-4 TB1-OUT2-2 +5V 20mm
FV2-4
1
IPBD-06-S
6 1 4 熱収縮チューブ
136Y102016
CC69R-1620-01-T-SP VHR-6N DF1B-4S-2.5R
SVH-21T-P1.1 DF1B-2428SCA
PNL28A基板
UL1015-AWG16黒 FAN1 136Y102048 PSUB-CN8 113Y100329
UL1007-AWG24灰 136Y102024
E UL1015-AWG16白 +24 1 UL1007-AWG16橙 136Y102027 E
4 1 PSUB-CN6 3.3V 1000mm SND-CN2 SND-CN4 D0 UL1007-AWG26灰 1430mm PNL-CN1
NC 2 1 1 1 1
3 2 GND D1
FAN1 ALARM 3 6 6 2 2
GND 4
2
PBD-02-S
CC69R-2024-01-T-SP
2
5V 2 SND28A基板 3
D2 3
1 GND D3
119S0096 240mm
7
+12V
7
113Y100327 4
D4
4
179228-4 3 3 5 5
179518-1 GND D5
8 8 6 6
中継用アダプタ 4
-12V 4 7
D6 7
115mm AC(L) HTD-CN1 292254-4が必要 GND D7
1 9 9 8 8
AC(N) 2 5
5VSB 5 9
DIG1 9
105mm GND IPBD-05-D DIG2
F 1-179958-2 10 10 10 10 F
316040-2 IPBD-05-D CC69R-1620-01-T-SP DIG3
11 11
CC69R-1620-01-T-SP 136Y102025 5VSB
UL1007-AWG16橙 12 12
HTD28A基板 PSUB-CN7 1
+24V 280mm 1
SND-CN1 13
BUZZER-P 13
GND GND
HG1 136Y102017 113Y100331 IPBD-02-S
2 2 IPBD-02-S 14
ENTER
14
UL1330-AWG18白 CC69R-1620-01-T-SP 15 15
1 CC69R-1620-01-T-SP GND
HEATER 5 260mm HTD-CN3 1
136Y102018
UL1007-AWG26灰 600mm HOTCON1 1
SND-CN34
16
17
PWBN
16
17
2 HOTCON2 ULT_BTN DF1B-18DS-2.5RC
2 2 DF1B-18DS-2.5RC 18 18
6 DF1B-2428SCA
HEART(N) HTD-CN2 3 N.C N.C 3 DF1B-2428SCA
3 1 HOTCON3
G HEART1 4 4
G
7 7 HOTCON4
4
HEART(N) 2
5 5 SND-CN19 1 136Y102026
HEART2 6 N.C N.C 6 GND UL1007-AWG26灰 280mm
8 8 DF1B-6S-2.5R UL1007-AWG24橙 630mm VCC 2
5559-08P DF1B-2428SCA 7 DF1B-8DS-2.5RC CAN+
5558PBTL N.C 3 GND DF1B-2428SCA 3
8 CAN-
N.C 9 HTD-CN4 DF1E-4S-2.5C
4
HG3 1
430mm HEART(N) 4
1
DF1B-2428SCA
HEART3 DF1E-2S-2.5C
2
4 10
DF1B-2428SCA
SND-CN27
2
HEART(N) 5
1
5
HEART4 11
2
3 機種 2108 ユニット <ユニット>
3 N.C N.C 6 DF1B-4DS-2.5RC
4
H 6 N.C N.C 12 DF1B-2022SCA 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 i-BASE H
5559-06P 5557-12R
5558PBTL 5556PBTL
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _
頁
2
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-27
SP-28
11
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
136Y8554
UL1007-AWG26灰 90mm
B LDD-CN8 1
LDON 1
LDA-CN4 B
2
AGND 2
3
LDSIGH 3
4
AGND 4
LDIOP
5
AGND
5
LDA28A基板
LDD28A基板 6
7
P8V
6
7 113Y100323
113Y100322 8
AGND 8
9
M8V 9
10
AGND 10
C 11
PVLD 11 C
12
AGND 12
13
MVLD 13
14
AGND 14
15
PVLD 15
16
P8V2 16
17
LDKTD 17
DF1B-18DS-2.5RC 18
LDH2 18 DF1B-18DS-2.5RC
DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-2428SCA
D D
136Y8555
LDD-CN4 SSH UL1061-AWG26灰 700mm SYN-CN1
1 1
SSL
2
GND
2
SYN28A基板
3
VCC
3
113Y100324
DF13-4S-1.25C 4 4
DF13-4S-1.25C
DF13-2630SCFA
DF13-2630SCFA
E E
136Y8961
LDD-CN2 READY UL1061-AWG22青 305mm PCK-CN1
1 1 PCK-CN2 136Y8962
STARTL UL1061-AWG22青
2 2 CLOCK 55mm POL-CN1
GND 1 1
3
GND
3
PCK28A基板 2
READY 2
4
24V
4
113Y100325 3
STARTL 3 ポリゴン基板
5 5 GND
GND 4 4
6 6
179228-5
24V 179228-5
7
GND 7
5 5
24V 179518-1 179518-1
DF1B-8S-2.5R 8 8 179228-8
F DF1B-2022SCA 179518-1 F
G G
機種 2108 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 i-BASE H
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _
頁
3
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-28
SP-29
11
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
SND28A基板 136Y102047
113Y100327 SND-CN21 1
VCC_SENS UL1007-AWG26灰 1770mm 1
SJ1 SJ1
2
SJ1V 2 排出入口センサ
GND 179228-3
3
VCC_SENS
3
GP2A230LRSAF
4 179518-1
5
SJ2V
6
GND
B
7 N.C
1570mm SJ2 SJ2 B
8 N.C 1
9 N.C 2 排出出口センサ
DF1B-10DS-2.5RC N.C 179228-3
10 3
GP2A230LRSAF
DF1B-2428SCA 179518-1
DRV-CN1
405mm 1
C 2 C
N.C 3 171822-3
136Y102030
SND-CN22 VCC_+24V_C UL1007-AWG22青 170204-2
1
2
GND_D
VCC_SENS KVC-36SB_0.3sq×3P
480mm DRV-CN3
3 1 DRV-CN2 136Y102031
ME1CLKC KVC-36SB_0.3sq×3P UL1007-AWG22青
4
5
VCC_SENS KVC-36SB_0.3sq×3P
2
3
1
300mm 1
ME1 ME1
6
ME1CWB KVC-36SB_0.3sq×3P 4 ME1-DRV 2 2
副走査モータ
VCC_SENS KVC-36SB_0.3sq×3P
3 3
XADRP-08V
7
8
ME1EN KVC-36SB_0.3sq×3P
5
6
５相ﾓｰﾀﾄﾞﾗｲﾊﾞ 4 4 CFK543BP2-A1
D 5 5 XARR-05V D
SXA-001T-P0.6 N.C 7
SXAM-001T-P0.6
N.C 8 171822-5
170204-2
N.C 9
1-171822-0
N.C 10
170204-2
FG 136Y9080 FG
TBC3.5SQ(0.12) 95mm
1 1
FV5.5-4 FV5.5-4
副走査GND線Ruby品を使用（H20.11変更）
E E
SND-CN36 136Y102051
CN2-P CN2-J 136Y102052
SK1 136Y102054
UL1007-AWG18青
SK2
UL1007-AWG18青 1255mm1 UL1007-AWG18青 180mm SK1-COM SK1-NC 60mm SK2-COM SK2-NC
VCC_+24V 1
2 2
1
2
1
DS-187PU DS-187PU
1 1
DS-187PU DS-187PU
1
LDインターロック
SPS-51T-187 SPS-51T-187 SPS-51T-187 SPS-51T-187
VHR-2N 5559-02P 5557-02R AM5160C731N AM5160C731N
F SVH-21T-P1.1 F
5558PBTL 5556PBTL 180mm
SND-CN37 136Y102035
CN3-J CN3-P 136Y102036
SA2
UL1007-AWG18青 940mm UL1007-AWG18青 570mm SA2-COM SA2-NC
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 DS-187PU
SPS-51T-187
DS-187PU
SPS-51T-187
トレーインターロック
3 N.C 5557-02R 5559-02P AM50010C531
VHR-3N 5556PBTL 5558PBTL
SVH-21T-P1.1
G G
570mm
136Y102053（インターロック）
SND基板改版により、削除 機種 2108 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 i-BASE H
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _
頁
4
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-29
SP-30
11
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
136Y102032
CN6-J CN6-P 136Y102033
SND-CN23 1
VCC_SENS51 UL1007-AWG26灰 870mm 1 1
VCC_SENS51 UL1007-AWG26灰 205mm1 SA1 SA1
2
SA1V 2 2
SA1V 2 ﾌｨﾙﾑﾊﾟｯｸ／ｼｬｯﾀｰ検出
GND GND
3
VCC_SENS
3 3
VCC_SENS
3
179228-3 OH-FP04-05
SND28A基板 4
5
SA3V
4
5
4
5
SA3V 179518-1
113Y100327 6
GND 6 6
GND
B VCC_SENS VCC_SENS B
7
8
SA4V
7
8
7
8
SA4V 560mm1 SA3 SA3
9
GND 9 9
GND 2 ﾌｨﾙﾑｻｲｽﾞ検出
VCC_SENS VCC_SENS
CN5-P CN5-J 10 10 10 3
GP1A73A
SD1 SD1 VCC_SENS7
136Y102040
UL1007-AWG26灰 305mm
136Y102039
UL1007-AWG26灰 875mm 11
SA5V 11 11
SA5V 179228-3
179518-1
1 1 1 GND GND
搬送入口ｾﾝｻ SD1V 12 12 12
2 2 2 VCC_SENS
GP2A230LRSAF 3
GND 3 3
13
SB1V XADRP-12V XADR-12V
179228-3
179518-1
N.C 4 4 N.C
14
15
GND SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6 605mm1 SA4 SA4
N.C 5 5 N.C 16
VCC_SENS 2 ﾌｨﾙﾑｻｲｽﾞ検出
C N.C 6 6 N.C SB2V 179228-3 C
17 3
GP1A73A
SD2 SD2 1
VCC_SENS4 295mm
136Y102041
UL1007-AWG26灰 DF1B-6ES-2.5RC DF1B-6EP-2.5RC 18
GND 179518-1
SD2V DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
搬送出口ｾﾝｻ 2
19 N.C
GP2A230LRSAF 3
GND 20 N.C
179228-3
179518-1
21 N.C
625mm SA5
22 N.C 1 SA5
23 N.C 2 ﾌｨﾙﾑｻｲｽﾞ検出
DF1B-24DS-2.5RC
N.C 179228-3
24 3
GP1A73A
SD3 SD3 1
VCC_SENS 170mm SND28A基板
DF1B-2428SCA
179518-1
ｽﾄｯﾊﾟ位置ｾﾝｻ 2
SD3V
D GND D
GP1A73A 3
VCC_SENS7 1
SND-CN24
CN8-J CN8-P
179228-3 136Y102034
179518-1
SD1V 2 865mm VCC_SENS UL1007-AWG26灰 505mm SB1 SB1
CN7-P CN7-J GND 1 1 1
3 SB1V 枚葉ｱ-ﾑHP検知
880mm VCC_SENS4 2 2 2
1 1 4 GND 179228-3
SD2V 3 3 3
GP1A73A
SD4 SD4 VCC_SENS 135mm
2 2
GND
5
4 4
VCC_SENS EXT-2_3C×24AWG 179518-1
1 3 3 6 SB2V
ﾆｯﾌﾟｾﾝｻ 2
SD4V 4 4
VCC_SENS 7
5 5
GND
GP1A73A 3
GND 5 5
SD3V 8
6 6
179228-3
179518-1
6 6
GND 9 XAP-06V-1 XARR-06V 420mm SB2 SB2
VCC_SENS SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6
1
E
7 7
SD4V
10
2 ﾌｲﾙﾑ表面検出 E
8 8 11
GND 179228-3
3
GP1A73A
SD5 SD5 1
SD5_LEDA UL1061-AWG26灰
9
10
9
10
SD5_LEDA
12
13
179518-1
ｴｯｼﾞｾﾝｻ 2
VCC_SENS 380mm 11 11
VCC_SENS 14
PIS28A基板 3
GND 12 12
GND 15
SD5A SD5A
113Y100332 4
SD5B
13 13
SD5B
16
5 14 14 17
DF13-5S-1.25C N.C 15 15 N.C N.C 18
DF13-2630SCFA
N.C 16 16 N.C N.C 19
DF1B-16DES-2.5RC DF1B-16DEP-2.5RC
N.C 20
F F
DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
N.C 21
N.C 22 DF1B-22DS-2.5RC
DF1B-2428SCA
G G
機種 2108 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 i-BASE H
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _
頁
5
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-30
SP-31
11
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
136Y102049
SND-CN25 1
THG1H UL1007-AWG26灰 THG1H 650mm 1
THG1 THG1-2
GND_A GND_A
2
THG2H THG2H
2
サーミスタ１／２
SND28A基板 3
4
GND_A GND_A
3
4 PTP-F-F5
113Y100327 5
THG3H
N.C 5
GND_A DF1B-6ES-2.5RC
6 N.C 6
7
THG4H DF1B-2428SCA
8
GND_A
9
THG5H
B
10
GND_A B
11
THK1H THG3H 710mm 1
THG3 THG3-4
GND_A GND_A
12
VCC_SENS THG4H
2
サーミスタ３／４
13 3
14
GND GND_A 4 PTP-F-F5
LED_ON_Cb
15 N.C 5
VCC_+12V_PDD DF1B-6ES-2.5RC
16 N.C 6
17
GND_A DF1B-2428SCA
18
VCC_-12V_PDD
19
LOGOUT
C DF1B-20DS-2.5RC C
DF1B-2428SCA
20 N.C
THG5H 755mm 1
THG5 THG5
GND_A 2 DF1B-2ES-2.5RC 徐冷部サーミスタ
DF1B-2428SCA PTP-F-F5
THK1H 440mm THK1 THK1
GND_A
1
記録部サーミスタ
2 DF1B-2ES-2.5RC
DF1B-2428SCA PTP-F-F5
D D
136Y102042
CN9-J CN9-P 136Y102043
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青
SND-CN31 1
MD1AB 640mm 1 1
MD1AB 80mm 1
MD1 MD1
2
MD1_ACOM(24V_D) 2 2
MD1_ACOM 2
VCC_SENS 1475mm1 LED-CN85
3
MD1A 3 3
MD1A 3 搬送ﾓｰﾀ GND 2 LED28A基板
MD1BB MD1BB LED_ON_Cb
4
MD1_BCOM(24V_D)
4 4
MD1_BCOM
4
118SX210 3 DF13-3S-1.25C 113Y100334
5 5 5 5 DF13-2630SCFA
6
MD1B 6 6
MD1B 6 XAP-06V-1
7
MG1AB SXA-001T-P0.6
MG1_ACOM(24V_B) XAP-06V-1 XARR-06V 1105mm
8
MG1BB SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6 VCC_+12V_PDD PDD-CN87
E 9 1 E
MG1A UL1007-AWG24青
GND_A
10
11
MG1_BCOM(24V_B) 295mm 1
MG1 VCC_-12V_PDD
2
3
PDD28A基板
12
MG1B 2 MG1 LOGOUT 4 DF13-4S-1.25C 113Y100335
MD2AB
13
14
MD2BB
3
4
熱現像搬送ﾓｰﾀ DF13-2630SCFA
15
MD2_COM(24V_B) 5 118SX208A
16
MD2A 6 PHR-6
17
MD2B SPH-002T-P0.5S
XADRP-18V 18
MD2_COM(24V_B)
F SXA-001T-P0.6 F
CN10-J CN10-P 136Y102044
UL1007-AWG24青 550mm MD2AB UL1007-AWG24青 395mm MD2
1 1 1
2 2
MD2_COM 2 MD2
MD2BB
3
4
3
4
MD2A
3
4
ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除ﾓｰﾀ
5 5
MD2_COM 5 118SX208A
6 6
MD2B 6 PHR-6
SPH-002T-P0.5S
XAP-06V-1 XARR-06V
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6
G G
SND-CN26 136Y102029
1
VCC_+24V_E UL1007-AWG22青 675mm 1
SOLD1 SOLD1
XAP-02V-1 ｽﾄｯﾊﾟ解除
2
SOLDCb 2
3 N.C SXA-001T-P0.6 ｿﾚﾉｲﾄﾞ
XAP-04V-1 4 N.C
SXA-001T-P0.6 SDC-1031(40Ω)
機種 2108 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 i-BASE H
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _
頁
6
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-31
SP-32
11
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
136Y102037
CN11-J CN11-P 136Y102038
MB1
SND-CN32 MB1AB UL1007-AWG22青 1010mm MB1AB UL1007-AWG22青 450mm
SND28A基板 1
2
MB1_ACOM(24V_A)
1
2
MB1_ACOM
1
2 MB1
113Y100327 MB1A MB1A
B
3
4
MB1BB
3
4
MB1BB
3
4
枚葉ﾓｰﾀ B
5
MB1_BCOM(24V_A) 5
MB1_BCOM 5 118SX210
6
MB1B 6
MB1B 6
7
MB2A 7
MB2A
MB2_ACOM(24V_C) MB2_ACOM XAP-06V-1
8 8 SXA-001T-P0 6
9
MB2B 9
MB2B
MB2AB MB2AB UL1007-AWG24青
10
11
MB2BB
10
11
MB2BB 1
MB2 MB2
12
MB2_BCOM(24V_C) 12
MB2_BCOM 70mm 2 搬送ﾓｰﾀ
VCC+24V_E +24V_A
C
13
14
SOLA1HCb
13
14
SOLA1HCb
3
4
(ﾌﾟﾚﾌｨｰﾄﾞ用) C
15 N.C N.C 15 N.C 5 118SX208A
16
SOLA1LCb 16
SOLA1LCb 6 PHR-6
XADRP-16V
SPH-002T-P0.5S
SXA-001T-P0.6 XADRP-16V XADR-16V
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6
UL1007-AWG22青
1
SOLA1 SOLA1
540mm 2 ﾄﾚｲﾛｯｸ
172337-1
3
SDC-1260
D 170364-1 D
136Y102057
SND-CN35 READYB UL1007-AWG22青 1100mm LDD-CN1
1 1
2
MS1STCB 2
E GND_D E
3
4
GND_D
3
4
LDD28A基板
5
VCC_+24V_E 5
6
GND_D 6
7
GND_D 7
8
VCC_+24V_E 8
VCC_+24V_E DF1B-8S-2.5R
9
FANG1CB DF1B-2022SCA
10
11 N.C
XADRP-12V
12 N.C
F F
SXA-001T-P0.6
FAN2
605mm
4
1 +24
3
2 NC
2
3 ALARM FAN2
1
4 GND
119Y100028B
179228-4
179518-1
G G
機種 2108 ユニット <ユニット>
H 名称 装置回路図 補助名称 i-BASE H
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _
頁
7
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-32
SP-33
12
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
102N100022 10-13 146S0029A 05A-14 322SF227 06B-22 327Y100033A 08A-6 342N100055 03B-14 360N100219A 05B-18
107Y0185C 05A-17 146S0086 05A-27 322SP201 04A-4 328N100016A 04C-5 343N100059A 03B-11 362N100320A 05A-5
107Y100017 03A-4 146S0086 05C-10 322SP213 05A-4 332N100180A 04C-4 343N100061 06B-4 362N100327 03A-6
113Y100326D/E 10-10 146S0086 09B-1 322SP213 06B-10 332N100182A 06A-4 345N100655A 02B-4 363N100727 09B-8
113Y100327C 10-8 308N100136 06B-13 322SP214 08A-4 332Y100036 05A-24 345N100656A 02B-1 363N100736A 09B-5
113Y100328E 10-4 308S2760308 10-12 322SY223 04B-4 334N100196 05B-8 345N100682 06A-6 363N100749 05B-5
113Y100329C 10-1 309N100065 01A-14 323N1264B 06B-5 334N100196 05C-8 345N100683A 04A-1 363N100752 05B-1
113Y100330D 10-9 309S0075 06B-1 323N1265A 06B-20 334N100196 05D-4 345N100684 05D-5 363N100753B 09B-6
113Y100331C 10-7 309S0127 06B-18 324N100110A 06B-11 334N100196 09B-9 345N100699 03B-10 363N100754 05B-7
113Y100333A 06B-15 310N100213 02B-5 324N1036D 06B-6 334N100197 08C-3 346N100527B 04C-2 363N100756 05C-11
113Y100334A 09B-2 310S9042516 08A-2 324N1038C 06B-19 334N100197 08D-3 347N100418 08A-12 363N100757 05C-2
113Y100335A 09B-10 310Y100009A 08C-9 324Y100040 06B-17 334N100198 05A-25 347N100422 08A-9 363N100758 05C-9
114Y2108300A 10-14 310Y100009A 08D-9 327N100311A 09A-5 334N100199 06B-3 347S0281A 04C-3 363N100761 03B-2
115N100002A 08C-10 310Y100010A 08C-4 327N100312A 04A-17 334N100200 05B-3 347S0829 08A-14 363N100762 03B-4
115N100002A 08D-10 310Y100010A 08D-4 327N100314A 08A-5 334N100201B 04A-20 347S0911 10-11 363N100763 05D-6
115Y0041A 02B-7 313N100175C 09B-3 327N100315A 05A-1 334N100202 04A-5 348N100155C 08D-8 363N100764 05D-3
115Y0041A 08B-6 313Y100027 05A-10 327N100316A 05A-20 334N100203 04A-6 348N100156C 08D-6 363N100767B 08A-10
117Y100019A 08C-2.1 314N100058A 01A-4 327N100317A 05A-22 334N100204A 05D-12 348N100157B 08C-8 363N100768B 08A-8
117Y100020A 08D-2.1 314N100059B 01B-5 327N100318A 05B-12 334N100206 09A-9 348N100158B 08C-6 363N100769B 02A-1
117Y100021A 08C-2.2 314Y100018B 01A-5 327N100318A 05B-17 334N100207 09A-11 350N101287B 01C-1 363N100772 05C-4
117Y100022A 08D-2.2 314Y100019B 01B-4 327N100319 08C-5 334N100208 09A-10 350N101290A 01C-2 363N100773 05C-3
118SX202B 05A-19 316N100152 01B-6 327N100319 08D-5 334N100209 09A-12 350N101291C 01A-2 363N100775 05D-2
118SX208A 04A-15 316Y100071 04B-8 327N100320 04A-25 334N100210 09A-8 350N101292D 01A-10 363N100776 05D-7
118SX208A 08A-1 316Y100073 03B-12 327N100321A 04A-23 334N100214 09A-7 350N101293B 01B-3 363N100777 05D-8
118SX210 04A-21 316Y100075B 04B-11 327N100322A 04A-24 334N100216A 03A-7 350N101294A 01B-1 363N100779A 03B-1
118SX210 05B-9 317N100055 03B-5 327N100323A 05B-14 334N100216A 03B-9 350N101295C 01C-3 363N100781A 03B-3
118YA184A 06B-16 319N101336 08B-8 327N100324A 05B-13 334N100224 04B-12 350N101296B 01C-4 363N100783 05A-11
119S0096 10-3 319N101353 08A-7 327N100326A 05B-16 334Y100146 06B-2 350N101316A 06A-3 363N100798 03A-9
119Y100047 08A-16 319Y100086B 06B-14 327N100327 04A-16 334Y100147 05A-8 350N101318B 09B-4 363Y100253 03B-8
125N100032A/B 10-5 319Y100089 04A-19 327N100328 09A-2 334Y100166 05C-6 350N101325A 06A-1 366N100039 01A-6
128S0971 03A-1 322N100240A 09A-4 327N100329A 08B-4 335N100043A 04A-3 350N101326 05D-10 366S0006 02A-4
128S0987 02A-5 322N100241A 04A-9 327N100330 08B-5 335N100046 04A-13 350N101334A 10-6 366S0011 03A-2
128S1102 10-2 322N100241A 05B-2 327N100331 08B-2 339N100012A 06B-7 350Y100854B 08C-1 367S0135 02A-2
137S1350 10-15 322N100241A 05D-1 327N100332 08B-1 339N100013A 08A-13 350Y100855B 08D-1 367S0135 02B-3
137S1417 10-16 322N100241A 06B-9 327N100333A 08B-3 340N100098 05B-10 350Y101032 01A-1 371N100090 04B-10
137S1419 10-17 322N100244A 04A-7 327N100334 09A-1 340N100101A 03B-7 350Y101033 01A-9 375N100126 04B-7
137S1420 10-18 322N100245A 05A-12 327N100338A 05A-13 341N100287 05B-15 350Y101034 01B-2 376N100044 02A-6
137S1421 10-19 322N100246A 05A-9 327N100340 05B-4 341N100288 05A-16 355N100698A 05B-11 382N100323 01A-8
137S1423 10-20 322N100247A 05A-7 327N100341 08A-3 341N100289A 04A-10 356N103803 04B-3 386N100280A 06A-5
137S1459 10-21 322N100248 08A-11 327N100342 05D-11 341N100290A 04A-18 356N103818B 02B-6 386N100282 06A-2
146N0010A 03A-8 322N100251 05A-3 327N100344A 04A-11 341N100294 05C-7 356N103818B 08B-7 386S1115 02A-3
146S0029A 03A-5 322NF006 08C-7 327N100345A 04A-12 341N100295 05C-5 356Y100865 05A-21 386S1115 02B-2
146S0029A 04B-2 322NF006 08D-7 327N100346A 04A-14 341Y100104 04B-1 356Y100873C 04A-2 387N0165 09B-7
146S0029A 04C-1 322NY156 09A-3 327N100352 04A-22 342N100054A 05C-1 356Y100882 05A-23 388N100564 05B-6
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-33
SP-34
12
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
388N100573 04B-5
388N100574 05A-18
388N100575 03A-3
388N100576A 05A-26
388N100584A 05D-9
388N100585A 03B-13
388N100588 05A-6
388N100589 06B-12
388N100590 06B-8
388N100593 01A-11
388N100598 04A-8
388N2081 09A-6
388Y100007 05A-2
392N100001 04B-9
393N100002D 01A-13
398N100015B 01A-12
398Y100017 01A-7
401N100124 06B-21
402N0020A 04B-6
405N101307 08A-15
405N101308 01A-3
405N101447 03B-6
802Y100031 08C-11.1
802Y100032 08D-11.1
802Y100033 08C-11.2
802Y100034 08D-11.2
839Y100057 07-1
898Y100667A 07-2
899Y100501 02A-7
899Y100502 02A-8
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-34
SP-35
13
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring Reference information
Symbol Parts code
l Screws, stopper rings, washers, nuts, wiring parts, etc. used in a large Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
number are provided as service parts. A2.6x16 Cross recessed Steel
pan head screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
A3x4
with spring washer chromating
l Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service A3x6 Color: Light white
parts. Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.
A3x8
l The table in “5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table” is provided for A3x15
converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used A4x8
in the service manual. A4x10
{SP:13_5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table} A4x40
B2x5 Cross recessed Steel
2. Screws B2.5x5
pan head screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
with spring and chromating
B3x4 plain washers Color: Light white
l Iron screw treatment has been changed from chromate treatment to zinc
plating/white trivalent chromate treatment. B3x6
B3x8
l Chromate treated screws will be no longer provided for new models. B3x10
However, in some models already shipped, chromate treated screws will B3x12
continue to be supplied. Other screw treatments will be as usual.
B3x16
l The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are B3x18
described. This description method is the same as that in this Service B3x20
Manual. B3x30
B3x35
B4x8
B4x10
B4x30
B4x35
B4x45
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-35
SP-36
13
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
Reference information Reference information
Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
BR3x6 308S0401 Cross recessed Steel *N2x4 301S2000204 Cross recessed Stainless steel
hexagon head Zinc plating/White trivalent pan head screw Passive state treatment
BR3x8 308S0402 *N2x10 301S2000210
screw with spring chromating
BR3x10 and plain washers Color: Light white *N3x6 301S2000306
BR3x12 308S0404 *N3x8
BR3x16 308S0405 *N3x10
BR3x32 *N4x10 301S2000410
BR3x35 PK2.5x3 Hexagon socket Steel
BR4x6 set screw with cup Black oxide treatment
PK3x10
point
BR4x8 308S0406 PK4x16
BR4x10 308S0407 PK6x5
BR4x12 308S0408 Ps3x6 306S0151 Hexagon head Steel
BR4x15 tapping screw for Zinc plating/White trivalent
resin chromating
BR4x16 Ps3x8 306S0152 Color: Light white
BR4x20
BR4x25 Q3x10 Hexagon socket Steel
head bolt Black oxide treatment
BR4x30 Steel Q3x12
Chromating Q4x6
BR4x35 308S9420435
BR4x40 308S9420440 Q4x8
BR5x10 308S9420510 Q4x10
BR5x12 308S9420512 Q4x12
BR6x12 308S9420612 Q4x14
DT3x6 306S0101 Hexagon head Steel Q4x30
deltight screw Zinc plating/White trivalent Q6x12
DT3x8
chromating
DT4x8 Color: Light white Q6x25
DT4x12 Q8x20
*S3x5 Cross recessed Stainless steel
flat head screw Passive state treatment
*S3x10
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-36
SP-37
13
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
Reference information Reference information
Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
*T3x4 301S3000304 Cross recessed Stainless steel WP3x3 303S0101 Hexagon socket Steel
truss head screw Passive state treatment head set screw Zinc plating/Phosphate
*T3x6 WP3x4 303S0102
(double -point) treatment
*T3x8 301S3000308 WP3x5 303S0103
*T4x4 301S3000404 WP3x6 303S0104
*T4x5 WP3x8 303S0105
*T4x6 WP3x10 303S0106
*T4x8 WP4x4 303S0107
*T4x10 WP4x5 303S0108
*T4x12 WP4x6 303S0109
*T4x16 301S3000416 WP4x8 303S0110
*T4x25 WP4x10 303S0111
*T4x35 301S3000435 WP4x12 303S0112
TP3x6 308S0414 Cross recessed Steel WP4x16 303S0113
hexagon head TP Zinc plating/White trivalent
TP4x6 308S0416 WP5x5 303S0114
screw chromating
TP4x8 308S0424 Color: Light white WP5x6 303S0115
*V3x6 301S4000306 Bind screw Stainless steel WP5x8 303S0116
Passive state treatment
WP5x10 303S0117
*V3x10
WP6x6 303S0118
WP6x8 303S0119
WP6x10 303S0120
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-37
SP-38
13
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts
Reference information
Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
E3 E ring Steel
Zinc plating/White trivalent
E4
chromating
E6 Color: Light white
*E3 315S3050030 Stainless steel
Passive state treatment
*E4 315S3050040
*E6 315S3050060
KL4 K-CL ring Steel
Zinc plating/White trivalent
chromating
KL6
Color: Light white
SW3 Spring washer Steel
Zinc plating/White trivalent
SW4 chromating
SW12 Color: Light white
W3 Plain washer Steel
Zinc plating/White trivalent
W4
chromating
W5 Color: Light white
W12
*W5 309S0120005 SUS304
Na3 Hexagon nut Steel
Zinc plating/White trivalent
chromating
Color: Light white
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-38
SP-39
13
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
4. Wiring Parts
Reference information Reference information
Symbol Parts code Approx. external Symbol Parts code Approx. external
Shape Parts name Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc. dimensions (mm), etc.
EDS-0607U Cord clamp 14x9x4 (WxHxD) LAMS-05 Cord clamp 9x23x5 (WxHxD)
LWS-3S VO 316S1242 Cord clamp 13x10x29 (WxHxD)
LWS-3S-2W 15x13x2 (WxHxD)
EDS-17L Cord clamp 55x26x5 (WxHxD) VO
LWS-5S-2W 318S1130 15x18x2 (WxHxD)
VO
EDS-25L 316S2028 75x32x5 (WxHxD)
LWS-8S- 318S1195 15x25x3 (WxHxD)
2.5W VO
EDS-2 Cord clamp 20x10x5 (WxHxD) PCB-3S 316S0268 Cord clamp 15x13x7 (WxHxD)
FGC-8 Cord clamp 10x10x25 (WxHxD) SB-2718 318S1032 Cord clamp 35x26x6 (WxHxD)
SB-4025 316S0029 48x33x6 (WxHxD)
KFCS-3002 316S1244 Cable clamp 53x10x15 (WxHxD)
SNP-1-HSO Hose clamp 12x12x4 (WxHxD)
KGES-4 Cord clamp 11x20x10 (WxHxD)
T18R 316S1001 Cable tie 100x2.5 (LxW)
T30R 316S1002 152x3.5 (LxW)
T50R 316S1003 202x4.7 (LxW)
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-39
SP-40
13
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table
Use this table for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols
used in this Service Manual.
n Screws
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
301S2000204 *N2x4 303S0105 WP3x8 Q4x14 A3x6 308S9420440 BR4x40
301S2000210 *N2x10 303S0106 WP3x10 Q4x30 A3x8 308S9420510 BR5x10
301S2000306 *N3x6 303S0107 WP4x4 Q6x12 A3x15 308S9420512 BR5x12
*N3x8 303S0108 WP4x5 Q6x25 A4x8 308S9420612 BR6x12
*N3x10 303S0109 WP4x6 Q8x20 A4x10 BR3x32
301S2000410 *N4x10 303S0110 WP4x8 306S0101 DT3x6 A4x40 BR3x35
301S3000304 *T3x4 303S0111 WP4x10 DT3x8 A2.6x16 BR4x6
*T3x6 303S0112 WP4x12 DT4x8 B2x5 BR4x15
301S3000308 *T3x8 303S0113 WP4x16 DT4x12 B3x4
301S3000404 *T4x4 303S0114 WP5x5 306S0151 Ps3x6 B3x6
*T4x5 303S0115 WP5x6 306S0152 Ps3x8 B3x8
*T4x6 303S0116 WP5x8 308S0401 BR3x6 B3x10
*T4x8 303S0117 WP5x10 308S0402 BR3X8 B3x12
*T4x10 303S0118 WP6x6 BR3x10 B3x16
*T4x12 303S0119 WP6x8 308S0404 BR3x12 B3x18
301S3000416 *T4x16 303S0120 WP6x10 308S0405 BR3x16 B3x20
*T4x25 PK3x10 308S0406 BR4x8 B3x30
301S3000435 *T4x35 PK4x16 308S0407 BR4x10 B3x35
301S4000306 *V3x6 PK6x5 308S0408 BR4x12 B4x8
*V3x10 PK2.5x3 BR4x16 B4x10
*S3x5 Q3x10 BR4x20 B4x30
*S3x10 Q3x12 BR4x25 B4x35
303S0101 WP3x3 Q4x6 308S0414 TP3x6 B4x45
303S0102 WP3x4 Q4x8 308S0416 TP4x6 B2.5x5
303S0103 WP3x5 Q4x10 308S0424 TP4x8 BR4x30
303S0104 WP3x6 Q4x12 A3x4 308S9420435 BR4x35
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-40
SP-41
13
締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
n Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts n Wiring Parts
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
Na3 SW3 315S3050040 *E4 316S0029 SB-4025 FGC-8 EDS-17L
309S0120005 *W5 SW4 315S3050060 *E6 KGES-4 316S1242 LWS-3S VO 318S1130 LWS-5S-2W VO
W3 SW12 E3 316S0268 PCB-3S 316S1244 KFCS-3002 LAMS-05
W4 KL4 E4 316S1001 T18R EDS-0607U LWS-3S-2W VO
W5 KL6 E6 316S1002 T30R 316S2028 EDS-25L 318S1195 LWS-8S-2.5W
VO
W12 315S3050030 *E3
316S1003 T50R SNP-1-HSO
EDS-2 318S1032 SB-2718
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-41
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
(DRYPIX 6000)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
PM-1
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 1.2 Notation of Age
ITEMS The following notations are mentioned for the respective maintenance programs.
Check what the notation means before starting the task.
1Y : Procedure performed at an age of 1 year.
2Y : Procedure performed at an age of 2 years.
1.1 How to Use the Preventive Maintenance 3Y : Procedure performed at an age of 3 years.
4Y : Procedure performed at an age of 4 years.
Volume 5Y : Procedure performed at an age of 5 years.
- Perform the corresponding maintenance programs according to the notations of age
( 1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y ).
- The preventive maintenance program list is prepared for the respective ages of 1, 2,
3, 4, and 5 years. As the tasks to be performed depend on the age of service, follow
the list in carrying out the preventive maintenance program.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-1
PM-2
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List
The preventive maintenance program is defined in terms of the age of the machine.When the age of the machine reaches the specified value, take each action of the preventive
maintenance program corresponding to the age. Take the action referring to the list, as the program differs depending on the age of the machine.
<INSTRUCTION>
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws.
To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are
restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
■ Preventive Maintenance Program List
Cycle Time
Maintenance program requirements Replacement Parts Tools and Instruments Used
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y (min)
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs 5
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images 10
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 10
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation 5
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery 5
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller (Option) 5 Cleaning roller (replace every 3 years)
3.7 Cleaning the Air Filter 5
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside the Equipment - - - - 15 Absolute ethanol
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, Cleaning the Sub-scan-
10 Absolute ethanol
ning Conveyance Roller
Absolute ethanol
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section 10
Cleaning cloth
Absolute ethanol
3.11 Cleaning the Heat development Unit - - - - 60
Vacuum cleaner
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers 3 Absolute ethanol
3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images 15
3.14 Setting Date and Time 1
3.15 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding 5
3.16 Replacing the Cutter 1 Film Cutter (replace every 1 years)
3.17 Work Completion Report -
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-2
PM-3
1.3.1 Maintenance Program at the Age of 1, 2, 4, and 5 1.3.2 Maintenance Program at the Age of 3 Years
Years Maintenance program at the age of 3 years ( 3Y )
Maintenance program at the age of 1, 2, 4 and 5 years ( 1Y , 2Y , 4Y , 5Y ) Time To o l s a n d
Maintenance program requirements Replacement Parts I n s t r u m e n t s
Time To o l s a n d (min) Used
Maintenance program requirements Replacement Parts I n s t r u m e n t s
(min) Used 3.1 Checking, Saving, and Delet-
5
ing Error Logs
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Delet-
5 3.2 Printing/Checking Convey-
ing Error Logs 10
ance/Checking Images
3.2 Printing/Checking Convey-
10 3.3 Checking the Interlock Func-
ance/Checking Images 10
tion
3.3 Checking the Interlock Func-
10 3.4 Checking the Fan Operation 5
tion
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation 5 3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery 5
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery 5 3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Clean- Cleaning roller (re-
5
ing Roller (Option) place every 3 years)
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Clean- Cleaning roller (re-
5 3.7 Cleaning the Air Filter 5
ing Roller (Option) place every 3 years)
3.7 Cleaning the Air Filter 5 3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit,
15 Absolute ethanol
Cleaning Inside the Equipment
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber
Belt, Cleaning the Sub-scanning 10 Absolute ethanol 3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber
Conveyance Roller Belt, Cleaning the Sub-scanning 10 Absolute ethanol
Conveyance Roller
3.10 Cleaning the Density Mea- Absolute ethanol
10 3.10 Cleaning the Density Mea- Absolute ethanol
surement Section Cleaning cloth 10
surement Section Cleaning cloth
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers 3 Absolute ethanol
3.11 Cleaning the Heat develop- Absolute ethanol
3.13 Final Operation Checks/ 60
15 ment Unit Vacuum cleaner
Checking Images
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers 3 Absolute ethanol
3.14 Setting Date and Time 1
3.13 Final Operation Checks/
3.15 Checking for Improper Pro- 15
5 Checking Images
tective Grounding
3.14 Setting Date and Time 1
Film Cutter (replace
3.16 Replacing the Cutter 1 3.15 Checking for Improper Pro-
every 1 years) 5
tective Grounding
3.17 Work Completion Report -
Film Cutter (replace
3.16 Replacing the Cutter 1
every 1 years)
3.17 Work Completion Report -
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-3
PM-4
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW A
3.15 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding
START
3.16 Replacing the Cutter
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs
3.17 Work Completion Report
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images
END
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller (Option)
3.7 Cleaning the Air Filter
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside the Equipment
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, Cleaning the Sub-scanning
Conveyance Roller
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section
3.11 Cleaning the Heat development Unit
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers
3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images
3.14 Setting Date and Time
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-4
PM-5
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Check whether errors have occurred using the PC-Utility of the PC for servicing. If
errors have occurred, correct them appropriately. If necessary, save the error logs as
a file, and delete those error logs.
n Procedure
l Checking Error Logs
(1) Turn ON the power of the equipment, and PC for servicing.
(2) Start the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.2_Flow of PC-Utility Operations}
(3) [Log data] → [Display Error Log]
(4) Refer to each error code displayed to confirm if serious errors have
occurred.
l Deleting Error Logs
(1) [Log data] → [Clear Error Log]
(2) [Execute]
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-5
PM-6
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking
Images
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Print from each film tray using the PC-Utility (grid pattern, 17-steps pattern), and check
the recorded image format, density correction function, and there are no unevenness
on the images and scratches. Also check that the mechanism and conveyor system
are operating normally during film conveyance.
n Procedure
l Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and
Scratches
{IN:8.3_Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and
Scratches}
l Checking Density
{IN:8.2_Checking Density}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-6
PM-7
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Interlocks are provided at the front cover / upper right cover / lower right cover (SK1,
SK2, SK3), and film loading unit (SA12, SA22).
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening a cover while
executing the PC-Utility.
{IN:8.4_Checking the Interlock Function}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-7
PM-8
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Check the operation of the power supply unit cooling fan and of the power supply unit
cooling fan.
{IN:8.5_Checking Fan Operation}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-8
PM-9
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Check the traylock and traylock mechanism.
Procedure
(1) Click [Logout] button to end the PC-Utility.
(2) Insert the shutter into the film tray.
(3) Check that when the film tray is locked, it cannot be pulled out to the
front. With the film tray locked, pull the film tray forward and check
that the film tray interlock functions so that it cannot be pulled out,
and no error codes are displayed.
→Perform this check for both of the upper and lower film trays.
(4) Insert the shutter into the upper film tray.
(5) Press the [ENTER] button on the operation panel and pull out the
upper film tray.
(6) Insert the upper film tray into the equipment, and then remove the
shutter.
(7) Insert the shutter into the lower film tray.
<REMARKS>
If the shutter is inserted into both the upper and lower film trays, only the upper
film tray can be pulled out, and the lower film tray cannot be pulled out.
If the lower film tray needs to be pulled out, do not insert the shutter into the
upper film tray.
(8) Press the [ENTER] button on the operation panel and pull out the
lower film tray.
(9) Insert the lower film tray into the machine, and then remove the
shutter.
(10) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-9
PM-10
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller (2) Wash the cleaning roller removed using water or warm water.
(Option), Removing the Cover (3) Wipe the cleaning roller dry with a dry cloth.
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
(4) Clean the cleaning roller with a cloth moistened adequately with
absolute ethanol.
Inspect the cleaning roller (option), wash away dirt with water, and clean with absolute Wiping with absolute ethanol helps vaporize the water remaining on the cleaning
ethanol. roller.
<NOTE> (5) Leave the cleaning roller to dry until the completion of maintenance
• The cleaning roller is an option. Take note that roller provided as standard is work.
not cleaning rollers, and should not be cleaned with water.
(6) Close the upper conveyance unit open/close guide.
• Replace the cleaning roller every three years.
<REMARKS>
The standard rubber roller and cleaning roller have different colors.
• Standard rubber roller: Dark grey like other rubber rollers.
• Cleaning roller: Black
Procedure
(1) Remove the cleaning roller.
#3
#1 [Remove]
[Open] Upper right cover Cleaning roller
#2
[Open]
Upper Conveyor Unit
Open/Close Guide
DRY60_I0002.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-10
PM-11
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Clean the air filter.
Procedure
(1) Open the front cover, then open the upper right cover.
(2) Remove the air filter.
DRY60_I0003.ai
(3) Clean the air filter using a vacuum cleaner.
(4) Reinstall the air filter.
(5) Close the upper right cover and lower right cover.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-11
PM-12
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside l Cleaning Inside the Equipment
the Equipment (1) Remove the dusts and dirt in the equipment such as frame,
mechanism unit, and inside the controller section, etc. with a cleaning
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y cloth or vacuum cleaner, etc.
Clean the suction cup and rubber roller of the removal unit, and clean inside the (2) Check the inside of the mechanism unit visually, and clean if dirty.
equipment.
Ensure that cleanings are performed for both the upper removal section and for the (3) Reinstall the removal unit/film loading unit.
lower removal section.
(4) Reinstall film loading unit cover, then insert the film tray to its original
Procedure position.
l Cleaning the Removal Unit
Clean the removal unit after removing the removal unit/film loading unit.
(1) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
(2) Clean the suction cup and removal conveyance rollers (upper/lower)
with a cloth moistened with water.
Removal conveyance rollers (upper)
Suction cup
Removal conveyance
rollers (lower)
DRY60_I0004.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-12
PM-13
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, (2) Clean the rubber belt with a cloth moistened with water.
Cleaning Sub-scanning Conveyance Roller
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Check and clean the rubber belt, and clean the sub-scanning conveyance rollers.
CAUTION
Ensure that the shutter is inserted into the film tray before starting the work.
Removing the sub-scanning section/upper conveyor unit with the shutter
removed may cause stray light to expose the film, resulting in an image quality
problem.
Procedure [Rotate]
Handle Belt
l Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt
DRY60_I0006.ai
(1) Remove the belt cover of the sub-scanning unit. (3) Clean the rubber belt at the rear side of the sub-scanning unit with a
cloth moistened with water.
Belt cover
2-TP4x6
[Rotate] Belt
Flywheel DRY60_ 0007 ai
DRY60_I0005.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-13
PM-14
l Cleaning the Sub-scanning Unit Conveyance Roller
(1) Draw the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit.
{IN:6.1_Sub-scanning Unit/Upper Conveyance Unit}
(2) Clean the sub-scanning unit conveyance rollers with a cloth
moistened with ethanol.
Sub-scanning unit
conveyance roller
DRY60_I0015.ai
(3) Return the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit to its original
position.
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-14
PM-15
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section (3) Clean the light-receiving surface of the PDD board with a cotton swab
moistened with absolute ethanol.
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Light-receiving
Clean the density measurement section light-receiving surface. surface
Procedure
(1) Remove the film release unit cover.
(2) Remove the film release unit upper guide bracket.
Film release unit cover
film release unit upper
guide bracket
#1 DRY60_ 0017 ai
[Remove]
TP3x6 (4) Reinstall the film release unit upper guide bracket, and ejection cover.
#2
[Remove]
DT3x6
DRY60_ 0016 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-15
PM-16
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit (3) Clean the periphery of the heat development unit of this equipment
with a vacuum cleaner.
3Y
(4) Assemble the heat development rack assembly.
Clean the heat development unit heat plate and rubber roller.
CAUTION <NOTE>
When installing the adiabatic cover, make sure that the cables do not get caught.
The heater assembly inside the heat development rack assembly is very hot
immediately after the equipment is powered off. When servicing the inside of
the heat development rack assembly, wait at least approximately 60 minutes (until (5) Reinstall the heat development rack assembly to the heat development
the hot parts are sufficiently cooled down) before starting the work. unit.
<NOTE>
Procedure Make sure that the thermistor cable is not damaged by the screw with grounding.
(1) Remove the heat development roller from the heat development rack
assembly.
{MC:8.3_Heat Development Roller}
(2) Clean the heat plate and rubber roller with a cloth moistened with
ethanol.
Heater assembly
[Clean] Pins (long)
Heat plate
[Clean]
Pins (short) Rubber roller
DRY60_I0018.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-16
PM-17
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Wipe covers with a moist cloth. Inspect the covers for missing screws and gaps with
the equipment.
Procedure
(1) Reinstall all covers.
(2) Reinstall the cleaning roller.
(3) Wipe the covers with a moistened cloth.
(4) Check that no cover screws are missing and that there are no spaces
between the cover and equipment.
(5) Insert the film tray into the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-17
PM-18
3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Perform final operation check after completing preventive maintenance by printing the
grid pattern and 17-steps pattern, and perform automatic density correction, and re-
check the format of the recorded image, density correction function, and check that
there are no unevenness on the image and scratches. Also check that the mechanism
and conveyor system are operating normally during film conveyance.
{PM:3.2_Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-18
PM-19
3.14 Setting Date and Time
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Check the date and time, and reset the date and time if incorrect.
Procedure
(1) [System information and setup] → [Setting3] → [Set Date]
→ The current system date and time are displayed.
(2) If the date and time are wrong, change the date and time.
(3) End the PC-Utility, and turn OFF the power of the equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-19
PM-20
3.15 Checking for Improper Protective
Grounding
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
(1) Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire
connections are established in the same manner as for installation.
(2) Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are
secured and connected in the same manner as for installation.
(3) Check that the removed screws are properly tightened.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-20
PM-21
3.16 Replacing the Cutter
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Replace the cutter.
<NOTE>
Replace the cutter every year.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-21
PM-22
3.17 Work Completion Report
After completing preventive maintenance, notify the user that the density tone curve
has changed because density correction was carried out.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-22
PM-23
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PM-23
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
09.20.2008 00 New release for HHS (00 (0) Edition) (FM5418) All pages
11.25.2008 00 New release for UL (00 (1) Edition) (FM5451) All pages
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
05.20.2009 01(1) New release for the field (FM5546) All pages
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0 (supports
06.30.2009 02 4, 7, 22
multi modalities), etc) (FM5568)
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 4, 22
SERVICE MANUAL 10.26.2009
12.10.2012
03
05
Revised (FM5606)
Revised (FM6078)
1, 3, 6, 10, 14
Cover
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
(FM-DL 100)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
PM-1
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Refer
to
Maintenance Work Intervals
Work time
(Min.)
Remarks
ITEMS 3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Clean-
ing Inside the Equipment
1Y 10 Wet cloth, cleaning cloth,
vacuum cleaner
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, 1Y 5 Clean with ethanol
<INSTRUCTIONS> Cleaning the Sub-scanning Con-
veyance Roller
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable
and additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts 3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement 1Y 3 Clean with ethanol using
Section cotton swab
with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining
screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon 3.11 Cleaning the Heat development 3Y 60 –
Unit
installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-
mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify • Heat plate Clean with ethanol
that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts. • Rubber roller Clean with ethanol
• Heat development unit periphery Vacuum cleaner
Installing the heat development 20 –
1.1 List of Preventive Maintenance Items rack assembly
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers 1Y 5 –
Refer Work time
Maintenance Work Intervals Remarks • Reinstalling covers –
to (Min.)
Power ON 15 Stand-by switch • Reinstalling the cleaning roller Only equipment provided
with the optional cleaning
Starting the PC-Utility – Start during initialization roller.
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Er- 1Y 5 – • Cleaning covers Wet cloth
ror Logs
Power ON – –
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/ 1Y 5 –
Checking Images Starting the PC-Utility – –
• Grid pattern 3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking 1Y 15 –
Images
• Check density
• Grid pattern
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 1Y 10 –
• AUTO F. D. C.
• Front cover/Right cover
• Check Density
• Film tray
3.14 Setting Date and Time 1Y 1 –
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation 1Y 5 –
Power OFF – –
Ending the PC-Utility – –
3.15 Checking for Improper Protective 1Y 5 –
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery 1Y 5 – Grounding
• Checking the traylock Check lock state 3.16 Replacing the Cutter 1Y 1 –
• Checking the traylock mechanism Check for shaking 3.17 Work Completion Report – –
Power OFF – –
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Clean- 1Y (3Y) 5 Only equipment provided
ing Roller (Option), Removing the with the optional cleaning
Cover roller.
Clean with ethanol after
washing. Replace every
three years.
3.7 Cleaning the Air Filter 1Y (2Y) 5 Vacuum cleaner
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-1
PM-2
1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle
In this chapter, the following symbols are indicated for every maintenance item. Before
beginning the respective maintenance work, be sure to confirm the cycle indicated by
the symbols.
: Maintenance to be performed every year.
: Maintenance to be performed every three years.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-2
PM-3
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW
START A
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs 3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images 3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 3.14 Setting Date and Time
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation 3.15 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery 3.16 Replacing the Cutter
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller (Option), 3.17 Work Completion Report
Removing the Cover
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter END
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside the
Equipment
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, Cleaning the Sub-
scanning Conveyance Roller
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-3
PM-4
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs
Check whether errors have occurred using the PC-Utility of the PC for servicing (or
settings-changeable models). If errors have occurred, correct them appropriately. If
necessary, save the error logs as a file, and delete those error logs.
<REMARKS>
Although all errors which have occurred in the past are saved in the PC for servicing
(or settings-changeable models), check the log of errors which occurred after the
previous error log was deleted here.
n Procedure
l Checking Error Logs
1. Turn ON the power of the FM-DL 100, and PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models).
2. Start the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.2_Flow of PC-Utility Operations}
3. [Log data] → [Display Error Log]
→ The error log window appears.
4. Refer to each error code displayed to confirm if serious errors have
occurred.
l Deleting Error Logs
1. [Log data] → [Clear Error Log]
2. [Execute]
→ Clears all log data.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-4
PM-5
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking l 17-steps Pattern
Images The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is
displayed on the PC-Utility. Check from this data that the density value is within the
specification.
Print from each film tray using the PC-Utility (grid pattern, 17-steps pattern), and check 1. [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [Execute]
the recorded image format, density correction function, and there are no unevenness → The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
on the images and scratches. Also check that the mechanism and conveyor system displayed on the PC-Utility.
are operating normally during film conveyance.
n Procedure 2. Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown
below.
l Printing Grid Pattern
3. If several trays are used, check the density of all trays.
Print grid pattern from each film tray, and check the operations of the mechanism
system and conveyor system, recorded image format, and also check for unevenness Step Dmax 3.0
and scratches on the images.
1 fog
1. Check that the equipment is in the standby state.
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
2. Insert the maximum size film tray. 3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30±0.07
3. [Output Film] → [Grid] 5 0.48±0.07
4. [Number of copies]: “1” → [Execute] 6 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07
→ The grid pattern is printed.
8 1.02±0.07
5. Check the following. 9 1.20±0.07
• If there are abnormal sounds and smell from the equipment.
10 1.38±0.07
• If film jam has occurred.
11 1.56±0.07
• If the format of the recorded image is correct.
• If there are unevenness on the images and scratches. 12 1.74±0.07
{l Specified Values for Each Film Size (Grid Pattern)} 13 1.92±0.07
6. If using several film sizes, check the format for all film sizes. 14
15
2.10±0.09
2.40±0.09
16 2.70±0.11
17 3.00±0.11
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-5
PM-6
l Specified Values for Each Film Size (Grid Pattern)
(Unit: mm)
Position 35 x 43 cm size 35 x 35 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
B 27.0 ±1.5 27.0 ±1.5 32.3 ±1.5 51.1 ±1.5 25.5 ±1.5
C 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 150.0 ±1.2
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 26.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0
| D–E | ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0 ±1.2 325.2 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-6
PM-7
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 1. [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check]
2. [ON] → [Execute]
Interlocks are provided at the front cover/right cover (SK1, SK2), and film loading unit → MG1 of the heat development unit drives.
(SA2).
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening a cover while 3. Open the front cover.
executing the PC-Utility.
Check that the operating sound of the MG1 stops.
{MU:2.4 [10-4]_Interlock Function}
4. Close the front cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MG1 can be heard.
5. Return to the PC-Utility, open the film tray.
[Check Mechanism] → [Other Actuators]
6. [ON] → [Execute]
→ Film tray lock is released.
Check that the operating sound of the MG1 stops.
7. Turn OFF the tray lock solenoid.
[OFF] → [Execute]
8. Push the film tray into the equipment.
Check that the operating sound of the MG1 can be heard.
9. [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check]
10. [OFF] → [Execute]
→ MG1 stops.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-7
PM-8
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation
Altogether operations of two fans need to be checked.
Check the operation and wind direction of the fans.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-8
PM-9
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery
Check the traylock and traylock mechanism.
Procedure
1. Click [Logout] button to end the PC-Utility
{MU:2.2.4_Disconnecting the Equipment}
2. Insert the shutter into the film tray.
3. Check that when the film tray is locked, it cannot be pulled out to the
front. With the film tray locked, pull the film tray forward and check
that the film tray interlock functions so that it cannot be pulled out,
and no error codes are displayed.
4. Release the tray lock, and remove the film tray.
5. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-9
PM-10
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 2. Wash the cleaning roller removed using water or warm water.
(Option), Removing the Cover 3. Wipe the cleaning roller dry with a dry cloth.
4. Clean the cleaning roller with a cloth moistened adequately with
Inspect the cleaning roller (option), wash away dirt with water, and clean with absolute absolute ethanol.
ethanol.
Wiping with absolute ethanol helps vaporize the water remaining on the
<NOTE> cleaning roller.
• The cleaning roller is an option. Take note that roller provided as standard is
not cleaning rollers, and should not be cleaned with water.
5. Leave the cleaning roller to dry until the completion of maintenance
work.
• Replace the cleaning roller every three years.
6. Close the upper conveyance unit open/close guide.
<REMARKS>
The standard rubber roller and cleaning roller have different colors. 7. Remove the rear cover, left cover, upper cover, and film loading unit
• Standard rubber roller: Dark grey like other rubber rollers. cover.
• Cleaning roller: Black
Procedure
1. Remove the cleaning roller.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-10
PM-11
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter
Clean the air filter.
<NOTE>
Replace the cleaning roller every three years.
Procedure
1. Remove the air filter attached to the lower right side of the equipment.
2. Clean the air filter using a vacuum cleaner.
3. Reinstall the air filter.
4. Close the right cover.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-11
PM-12
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside 2. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
the Equipment
Clean the suction cup and rubber roller of the removal unit, and clean inside the
equipment.
Procedure
l Cleaning the Removal Unit
Clean the removal unit after removing the removal unit/film loading unit.
1. Move the gear assembly.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-12
PM-13
3. Clean the suction cup and removal conveyance rollers (upper/lower)
with a cloth moistened with water.
l Cleaning Inside the Equipment
1. Remove the dusts and dirt in the equipment such as frame,
mechanism unit, and inside the controller section, etc. with a cleaning
cloth or vacuum cleaner, etc.
2. Check the inside of the mechanism unit visually, and clean if dirty.
3. Reinstall the removal unit/film loading unit.
4. Reinstall film loading unit cover, then insert the film tray to its original
position.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-13
PM-14
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, 2. Clean the rubber belt with a cloth moistened with water.
Cleaning Sub-scanning Conveyance Roller
Check and clean the rubber belt, and clean the sub-scanning conveyance rollers.
Procedure
l Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt
1. Remove the belt cover of the sub-scanning unit.
3. Clean the rubber belt at the rear side of the sub-scanning unit with a
cloth moistened with water.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-14
PM-15
l Cleaning the Sub-scanning Unit Conveyance Roller 2. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit fixing bracket.
1. Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-15
PM-16
3. Disconnect the connectors.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-16
PM-17
4. Draw the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit.
<REMARKS>
Move the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit along the slide guide holes on
the unit base by 37 mm to the front and by 57 mm to the heat development unit,
and draw it towards the front.
<NOTE>
When moving the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit, hold the
following areas with both hands.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-17
PM-18
5. Clean the sub-scanning unit conveyance rollers with a cloth
moistened with ethanol.
6. Return the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit to its original
position.
7. Reinstall the fixing bracket of heat development rack assembly (lower)
and heat development unit entrance guide.
8. Reinstall the belt cover.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-18
PM-19
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section 3. Clean the light-receiving surface of the PDD board with a cotton swab
moistened with absolute ethanol.
Clean the density measurement section light-receiving surface.
Procedure
1. Remove the film release unit cover.
2. Remove the film release unit upper guide bracket.
4. Reinstall the film release unit upper guide bracket, and ejection cover.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-19
PM-20
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit 3. Clean the heat plate and rubber roller with a cloth moistened with
ethanol.
Clean the heat development unit heat plate and rubber roller.
CAUTION
Because the heat plate inside the heat development rack assembly is very hot,
wait more than 60 minutes after turning OFF the power of the equipment before
cleaning to allow the heat plate to cool down completely.
Procedure
1. Remove the heat development rack assembly.
[MC:8.2_Heat Development Rack Assembly}
2. Remove the adiabatic cover and heater assembly from the heat
development rack assembly.
[MC:8.3_Heat Development Roller}
<NOTE>
Rubber rollers and bearings may drop if the heat development rack
assembly is tilted with the heater assembly removed.
4. Assemble the heat development rack assembly.
<NOTE>
When installing the adiabatic cover, make sure that the cables do not get
caught.
5. Clean the periphery of the heat development unit of this equipment
with a vacuum cleaner.
6. Reinstall the heat development rack assembly to the heat development
unit.
<NOTE>
Make sure that the thermistor cable is not damaged by the screw with
grounding.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-20
PM-21
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers
Wipe covers with a moist cloth. Inspect the covers for missing screws and gaps with
the equipment.
Procedure
1. Reinstall all covers.
2. Reinstall the cleaning roller.
3. Wipe the covers with a moistened cloth.
4. Check that no cover screws are missing and that there are no spaces
between the cover and equipment.
5. Insert the film tray into the equipment.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-21
PM-22
3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images l 17-steps Pattern
Print 17-steps patterns from each film tray, and check the density according to tone
type (Dmax.).
Perform final operation check after completing preventive maintenance by printing the
grid pattern and 17-steps pattern, and perform automatic density correction, and re-
1. [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [Execute]
check the format of the recorded image, density correction function, and check that → The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
there are no unevenness on the image and scratches. Also check that the mechanism displayed on the operation panel.
and conveyor system are operating normally during film conveyance.
{PM:3.2_Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images} 2. Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown
below.
Procedure
3. If several trays are used, check the density of all trays.
l Printing Grid Pattern
Step Dmax 3.0
1. Turn ON the power of the FM-DL 100, and PC for servicing (or settings- 1 fog
changeable models).
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
2. Start the PC-Utility after the equipment is in the standby state. 3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30±0.07
3. [Output Film] → [Grid] 5 0.48±0.07
4. [Copies]: “1” → [Execute] 6 0.66±0.07
→ The grid pattern is printed. 7 0.84±0.07
5. Check the following. 8
9
1.02±0.07
1.20±0.07
• If there are abnormal sounds and smell from the equipment.
10 1.38±0.07
• If film jam has occurred.
• If the format of the recorded image is correct. 11 1.56±0.07
• If there are unevenness on the images and scratches. 12 1.74±0.07
{l Specified Values for Each Film Size (Grid Pattern)} 13 1.92±0.07
l Density Correction 14 2.10±0.09
15 2.40±0.09
1. [F.D.C.] → [AUTO F.D.C.]→ [Execute] 16 2.70±0.11
→ The 24-steps pattern is printed, and automatic density correction is performed. 17 3.00±0.11
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-22
PM-23
3.14 Setting Date and Time
Check the system date and time, and reset the date and time if incorrect.
Procedure
1. [System information and setup] → [Setting3] → [Set Date]
→ The current system date and time are displayed.
2. If the date and time are wrong, change the date and time.
3. End the PC-Utility, and turn OFF the power of the equipment.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-23
PM-24
3.15 Checking for Improper Protective
Grounding
1. Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire
connections are established in the same manner as for installation.
2. Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are
secured and connected in the same manner as for installation.
3. Check that the removed screws are properly tightened.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-24
PM-25
3.16 Replacing the Cutter
Replace the cutter.
<NOTE>
Replace the cutter every year.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-25
PM-26
3.17 Work Completion Report
After completing preventive maintenance, notify the user that the density tone curve
has changed because density correction was carried out.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-26
PM-27
BLANK PAGE
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-27
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
INSTALLATION (IN) (DRYPIX 6000)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
IN-1
1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS
For details on the installation requirements, refer to "SPECIFICATIONS".
{SPECIFICATIONS:1._SPECIFICATIONS}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-1
IN-2
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW
START
A
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION 5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND INSTALLING OPTIONS
3.1 Precautions on Installation 5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures
3.2 Preparing the PC for Servicing 5.1.1 Removing the Tapes
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts 5.1.2 Removing the Shipping Fixture Bracket
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION 5.2 Changing the Film Size
4.1 Unpacking and Unloading 5.2.1 Changing the Film Tray Size
4.2 Carrying 5.2.2 Setting the Tray Number
5.2.3 Affixing the Film Size Label
4.3 Temporary Placement
5.2.4 Changing the Suction Cup Arm
4.4 Checking Components
5.2.5 Relocating the Barcode Reader
(Barcode Reader for the Upper Film Tray)
5.2.6 Relocating the Barcode Reader
(Barcode Reader for the Lower Film Tray)
5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option)
5.4 Installing the Covers and Inserting the Film Trays
5.5 Applying the Label (Class 3B Panel Label)
A B
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-2
IN-3
B C
6. CONNECTING CABLES 8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
6.1 Connecting the Network Cable 8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network 8.2 Checking Density
6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance 8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness
and Scratches
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function
7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder
8.4.1 Checking the Front Cover, Upper Right Cover
7.2 Power ON and Lower Right Cover Interlock
7.3 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility) 8.4.2 Checking the Film Tray Interlock
7.4 System Settings 8.5 Checking Fan Operation
7.4.1 Setting 1 8.5.2 Checking the Power Supply Unit Cooling Fan
7.4.2 Setting 2 8.5.2 Checking the Heat Development Unit Cooling Fan
7.4.3 Setting 3 8.6 Image QC Function
7.5 Rebooting the Equipment 8.7 Power OFF
7.6 Client Settings
9. CHECKING CONNECTION
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
C D
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-3
IN-4
10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT
10.1 Backing Up Individual Data
10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
10.3 Installing the Equipment
10.3.1 Installing the Equipment on the Floor without Using Fixtures
10.3.2 Installing the Equipment and Securing with Fixtures
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment
END
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-4
IN-5
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION n Prevention of Condensation
When transporting an equipment to a hospital from outdoors where the temperature
is low such as cold regions, condensation may occur inside the equipment. Take
3.1 Precautions on Installation precautions against the following to prevent this condensation.
• Transport the equipment indoors without removing the vinyl packaging wrapping the
The machine installation site must satisfy the “n Installation Site Requirements” below. equipment body. However, the cardboard boxes can be removed outdoors as this
Also be sure to complete procedures beforehand for necessary construction work, will not cause condensation.
electrical utility, and air-conditioning system installation. • After transporting indoors, refer to the following table and wait until the equipment
Note that UL/TÜV is not effective when used as mobile type because usage of this settles to the indoor temperature, and then remove the vinyl.
equipment as mobile type has not been applied for with UL/TÜV-PS. • Install the equipment, touch the metal portions such as guide plates, etc. and check
that no condensation has occurred, and then turn ON the power.
n Installation Site Requirements • If the vinyl is accidentally removed outdoors, wrap the equipment up in the vinyl
Avoid the following installation sites. tightly again before transporting indoors.
• Places where the temperature drastically changes.
<REMARKS>
• Places near heat sources such as heaters.
• Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur. The following table shows the approximate time to wait before removing the vinyl after
transporting the equipment into a room with 50% humidity.
• Places where the equipment may be exposed to any corrosive gas.
Extend the waiting time shown if the indoor humidity is high. If humidity is low, the
• Dusty places. waiting time can be shortened.
• Places where the equipment is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock.
Example: Humidity 70%→Increase waiting time by 40%
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight. Humidity 30%→Decrease waiting time by 30%
• Install this device in the place that a patient does not touch.
External temperature
Indoor
temperature
10ºC 5ºC 0ºC -5ºC -10ºC -15ºC -20ºC
30 70 110 140
10ºC - - -
minute minute minute minute
30 70 110 140 175
15ºC - -
minute minute minute minute minute
30 65 100 135 170 205
20ºC -
minute minute minute minute minute minute
30 60 100 130 170 200 240
25ºC
minute minute minute minute minute minute minute
60 100 130 165 200 235 270
30ºC
minute minute minute minute minute minute minute
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-5
IN-6
n Power Cable n Additional Protective Grounding
CAUTION Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. This
• Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle electrical
• Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an facility construction.
electric shock or a fire. Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used
room” are given below.
l For U.S. and Canada l Patient Environment
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
• Rated amperage: minimum 15 A It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
• Cable Type: SJT
• Cable length: 3 m or less
l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
l For U.S. Only grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1 grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable used room.
• Hospital Grade Plug Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l For Canada Only l Non-Medically Used Room
• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21. Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
If hospital grade disassemble type - complying with CSA C22.2, No.42.
• Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21. n Network Connection
As the equipment needs to be connected to the network, prepare network materials
l For Europe and parts and complete constructions beforehand.
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1 Prepare the network materials and accessories according to the place of installation
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed as they are not designated parts.
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor n Board and Optical Unit Handling Precautions
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of boards
• Rated amperage: 6 A
and optical unit.
• Cable type: H05VV-F Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
• Cable length: 3 m or less boards and optical unit.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-6
IN-7
3.2 Preparing the PC for Servicing
The various settings and operations of this equipment are performed using PC-Utility.
The PC-Utility can be executed on the screen of the browser (Internet Explorer) of the
PC for servicing connected via the network to the equipment.
To execute the PC-Utility using the PC for servicing, prepare the PC for servicing
beforehand.
{MU:2.1_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}
■ Outline of Connection
CR-IR 391RU
Network inside hospital
PC for servicing
(PC-Utility)
DRYPIX 6000
DRY60_J0002.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-7
IN-8
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts l Drilling Holes for Embedding Anchor Nuts
To secure the equipment or cart on the floor with fixtures, embed the anchor nuts
beforehand.
n Position of the Anchor Nuts to Be Enbedded
Drill bit diameter: 18 mm
Depth: 50 mm
DRY60_J0004.ai
160 mm
l Embedding Anchor Nuts
<NOTE>
• Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes.
230 mm
• Push in to a depth where the top of the anchor nut does not protrude out.
619 mm DRY60_J0003.ai
n Example of Embedding Procedure
CAUTION 18mm
Wear a protective goggle when using a drill.
50mm
<NOTE>
Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.
DRY60_J0005.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-8
IN-9
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION (1) Move down the machine main body together with the crate from the
platform of the truck.
(2) Remove the front panel.
4.1 Unpacking and Unloading <REMARKS>
CAUTION The front panel is used as a slope for moving down the machine from the carrier
pallet.
- When unloading the machine, two or more persons should always cooperate
to do so.
- Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route.
- Do not hold the machine by the recesses on the cover shown in the figure
below.
M6x50(x9)
Front panel
DRY60_J0053.ai
Do NOT hold here!
DRY60_J0071.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-9
IN-10
(3) Remove the screws that fix the crate. (5) Remove the accessories.
(6) Remove the equipment from the vinyl.
<NOTE>
To prevent condensation, leave the equipment covered with the vinyl film until
the temperature difference between the equipment and the room air is sufficiently
reduced.
Crate {IN:3.1_Precautions on Installation_Prevention of Condensation}
M6x50(x3) Accessories
M6x50(x3) DRY60_J0054.ai
(4) Remove the crate.
Vinyl
Crate
DRY60_J0056.ai
DRY60_J0055.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-10
IN-11
(7) Lower the adjustable foot of the equipment to secure the equipment. (9) Raise the adjustable foot of the equipment.
Equipment
Equipment
[Rotate] Nut
[Rotate] Nut Caster
Caster
Adjustable foot DRY60_J0058.ai
(10) Put the front panel removed in step (2) on the carrier pallet by means
Adjustable foot DRY60_J0033.ai of the PP band packed in the crate.
(8) Remove the shock absorbers from the bottom of the equipment.
PP band
Pallet Front panel
PP band
DRY60_J0059.ai
Shock absorbers(x4)
DRY60_J0057.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-11
IN-12
(11) Unload the equipment from the carrier pallet. 4.2 Carrying
Equipment CAUTION
• When delivering the equipment by means of its two-wheel casters, raise the
adjustable feet all the way up.
• When carrying the equipment, support it so that it does not turn over.
Pallet • When moving the equipment over any bumps, move it slowly to avoid shock.
(1) Clear the delivery path of the equipment and carry the equipment to
the installation site.
To ensure that the equipment can be carried out safely to the installation
site, move any obstacle out of the way at the delivery entrance, in corridors
and corners. Also make sure that the elevator is made available to move the
equipment.
DRY60_J0060.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-12
IN-13
4.3 Unpacking and Unloading
(1) Ensure sufficient work space for installation.
{SPEC:1.7_Equipment Installation Space}
(2) Lower the adjustable foot of the equipment to secure the equipment.
Equipment
[Rotate] Nut
Caster
Adjustable foot DRY60_J0033.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-13
IN-14
4.4 Checking Components n Options
Product Code Product Code Remarks
n Equipment Main Body DPX SMART TRAY : E Additional option tray
Name Qty. Remarks DPX SMART TRAY : == E Additional option tray
Equipment main body 1 - DPX PRIMA CLEANING Cleaning roller -
ROLLER E
n Accessories DPX SMART FLOOR FIX Fall prevention fixture kit For earthquake-proof fixing
KIT : E
No. Name Qty. Remarks
DPX PRIMA AC CORD UL E Power cable for U.S.A. U.S.A. hospital grade
1 Cutter 1 -
2 Guide pin 2 - DPX PRIMA AC CORD EU E Power cable for EU -
3 Cap 4 - DPX 2000 AC CORD UK E Power cable for U.K. -
4 Fuse 1 1A
l Additional Option Tray
5 Fuse 1 5A
6 Fuse 1 10A No. Name Qty. Remarks
7 Screw (BR3x10) 4 - 1 Film tray 1 Film size setting: 35x43 cm size
8 Nut (Na3) 4 - 2 Screw 2 -
9 Cable tie 1 For securing LAN cables 3 Nut 2 -
10 Operation manual 1 - 4 Cap 4 -
11 CD 2 Individual data CD 5 Guide pin 2 -
12 CD 1 Main unit software CD 6 Shutter 1 -
13 Label 1 class 3B panel label #2 7 Label 1 Film size label for HL
14 Label 1 Film size label for HL 8 Label 1 Film size label for ML
15 Label 1 Film size label for ML 9 Label 1 Film size label for ML (large)
16 Label 1 Film size label for ML (large)
17 Quick Guide 1
18 Reference Guide /Quality control 1 CD
guide /Quality Control for Mam-
mography
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-14
IN-15
l Cleaning Roller
No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Cleaning roller 1 -
l Fall Prevention Fixture Kit
No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Fixture 2 Same for left and right
2 Bolt (BQ6x16) 4 -
3 Hexagonal bolt (M12x25) 4 -
4 Anchor nut (M12) 4 -
5 Washer (W12) 4 -
6 Spring washer (SW12) 4 -
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-15
IN-16
5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES (3) Pull out the upper film tray and lower film tray.
<REMARKS>
AND INSTALLING OPTIONS The length from the hole for inserting a screwdriver to the manual release arm is
120 mm horizontally and 15 mm vertically.
5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures
5.1.1 Removing the Tapes
(1) Remove the upper rear cover, lower rear cover, upper left cover and
lower left cover.
(2) Release the tray lock using slotted screwdriver.
<NOTE> 120mm
When manually unlocking the traylock, because the plate inside the rear
cover cannot be removed, the inside of the equipment will not be visible as
shown in the figure. Press the manual release arm as shown in the figure.
The manual release arm can be unlocked just by moving the tip of the 15mm
screwdriver lightly.
DRY60_J0034.ai
<NOTE>
The manual release arm can be operated with moderate force, and may damage
if pushed in too strongly or pushed with a screwdriver.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-16
IN-17
(4) Remove the tape securing the shutter, and pull out the shutter.
DETAIL A
#1
Tape
#2
Manual release
arm #2 Shutter lock
DRY60_J0061.ai
(5) Remove the tape securing the lower squeezing roller.
Tape
A
#3
Upper
film tray
A
#1
Caps #3
Lower DRY_J0009.ai
film tray
(6) Insert the cap.
DRY60_J0072.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-17
IN-18
(7) Remove the tapes and open the upper right cover and lower right 5.1.2 Removing the Shipping Fixture Bracket
cover.
(1) Remove the belt cover.
(8) Remove the tape securing the magnet catch (four locations).
(9) Remove the tape securing the upper conveyor unit open/close guide.
#1
Tape
#2
Tape
Upper conveyor
unit open/close
guide
Equipment Cover
#1
Upper right cover TP4x8(x2)
DRY60_J0063.ai
Lower right cover
#1
Tape
DRY60_J0062.ai
(10) Close the upper right cover and lower right cover.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-18
IN-19
(2) Remove the shipping fixture bracket securing the sub-scanning unit/ (3) Reinstall all the screws removed in Step (2).
upper conveyor unit.
CAUTION
To prevent the light leakage to the film, ensure that the screws are fastened.
Sub-scanning unit/
upper conveyor unit
Sub-scanning unit/
upper conveyor unit
A
B A
DETAIL A DETAIL B
#1 #1
B
TP3x6(x2) Bracket Bracket TP3x6(x2)
DETAIL A DETAIL B
#1 #1
TP3x6(x2) TP3x6
DRY60_J0064.ai
DRY60_J0065.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-19
IN-20
(4) Remove the shipping fixture bracket on the rear side of the sub- 5.2 Changing the Film Size
scanning/upper conveyor unit.
This equipment can only be inserted with two film trays. By using spare film trays, up
to five film sizes can be used.
Sub-scanning unit/ Refer to the following tables to find what is to be done to the film size used.
upper conveyor unit
<REMARKS>
The following are the default settings of the film trays provided with the equipment.
- Upper film tray : 35 x 43
- Lower film tray : 20 x 25
B
A <Upper Film Tray>
35 x 43 35 x 35 26 x 36 25 x 30 20 x 25
DETAIL A DETAIL B Changing the Film Tray Size - ○ ○ ○ ○
#1 #1 #1 #1 Changing the Film Tray Size - ○ ○ ○ ○
TP4x8 TP3x6(x2) TP4x8 TP3x6(x2)
Affixing the Film Size Label ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Changing the Suction Cup Arm - - - - ○
Relocating the Barcode Reader - - ○ ○ ○
○: Work required
-: Work NOT required
<Lower Film Tray>
35 x 43 35 x 35 26 x 36 25 x 30 20 x 25
Changing the Film Tray Size ○ ○ ○ ○ -
Bracket Bracket
Changing the Film Tray Size ○ ○ ○ ○ -
DRY60_J0066.ai
Affixing the Film Size Label ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Changing the Suction Cup Arm ○ ○ ○ ○ -
Relocating the Barcode Reader ○ ○ - - -
○: Work required
-: Work NOT required
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-20
IN-21
<Additional Option Tray> 5.2.1 Changing the Film Tray Size
35 x 43 35 x 35 26 x 36 25 x 30 20 x 25 To change the film size set at shipment, the attaching position of the guide plate and
guide pin in the film tray.
Changing the Film Tray Size - ○ ○ ○ ○
(1) Change the installed position of the guide plate and guide pin in the
Changing the Film Tray Size ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ film tray according to the film size used.
Affixing the Film Size Label ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
<NOTE>
Changing the Suction Cup Arm (*) - - - - -
The guide plate and guide pin are secured with the nut (Na3) from the bottom of
Relocating the Barcode Reader (*) - - - - - the film tray.
Attaching positions of guide plate and guide pin.
○: Work required
-: Work NOT required
*: Depend on the settings for the upper or lower film tray.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-21
IN-22
l Removing/Reinstalling the Guide Plate l Attaching Positions of Guide Plate and Guide Pin
BR3x10(x2) Guide plate 35x43 35x35 26x36
25x30 20x25 Guide plate
Guide pin
Film tray
Na3(x2) DRY60_J0011.ai DRY60_J0011 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-22
IN-23
5.2.2 Setting the Tray Number n Tray Number Corresponded to Actuator Installing Position
Tray number represents a tray-specific number registered on the equipment. This
number is determined based on the position of the actuator installed on the tray (Tray1 TRAY1
(a) (b) (c)
through Tray5).
Based on the actuator position detected by the film size detection sensors (three
locations) on the main unit, the equipment identifies the tray number.
<NOTE>
When using the same film size in multiple trays, set different tray numbers for the
trays.
TRAY2
(a) (b) (c)
■ Factory Default Tray Settings
Tray number Film size (cm)
Upper film tray Tray1 35x43
Lower film tray Tray2 20x25
TRAY3
■ Film Sizes and Film Types for the Trays (default settings on the (a) (b) (c)
main unit software)
- Tray1: 14 x 17 Blue/HL
- Tray2: 14 x 14 Blue/HL
- Tray3: 10 x 14 Blue/HL
- Tray4: 10 x 12 Blue/HL
- Tray5: 8 x 10 Blue/HL TRAY4
(a) (b) (c)
TRAY5
(a) (b) (c)
DRY60_J0014.ai
(a) (b) (c)
Upper film tray SA15 SA14 SA13
Lower film tray SA25 SA24 SA23
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-23
IN-24
(1) Set the tray number by changing the installed position of the tray 5.2.3 Affixing the Film Size Label
identification actuator.
(1) Affix the label of the film size used on the film tray.
ML film label (*)
Actuator
DRY60_J0013.ai
Film size label
DRY60_J0010.ai
*:To be applied only when ML film is used.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-24
IN-25
5.2.4 Changing the Suction Cup Arm (3) Remove the suction cup unit.
If using the following film sizes for the film trays, change the installed position of the #1 Plate
suction cup arm.
2-E3
- Using the upper film tray for 20 x 35
- Using the lower film tray for 35 x 43 , 35 x 35 , 26 x 36 or 25 x 30
This section describes the parts replacement procedure for a case where the lower
#2
film tray is used for 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 26 x 36, or 25 x 30.
2-E3
(1) Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
(2) Remove the suction cup arm assembly from the removal unit/film
loading unit.
#3
TP3x6 (x4)
Suction cup unit
DRY60_J0076E.ai
Section cup arm assembly
#1 #2
Clamp Connector
Removal unit/Film loading unit
DRY60_J0042E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-25
IN-26
(4) Reattach the bearings to the position for the large size. (5) Reattach the suction cup unit to the position for the large size.
<NOTE> #2 Plate
2-E3
There are two types (circular hole type and oblong hole type) of bearings, each of
which has its own installing position.
#1
DETAIL A 2-E3
A
B DETAIL B Suction cup unit
Circular hole Oblong hole
DRY60_J0073E.ai
DRY60_J0074E.ai
#1 #2
[Remove] [Put]
Bearing(x4) Bearing(x4)
DRY60_J0075E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-26
IN-27
(6) Remove the removal conveyance roller assembly. (7) Reattach the sensor assembly to the position for the large size.
DETAIL A Removal conveyance roller assembly
#1
[Remove]
TP3x6
Sensor assembly
A
#2
[Retain]
TP3x6 Sensor assembly
DRY60_J0040E.ai
PS3x8 (x2)
DRY60_J0041E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-27
IN-28
(8) Reattach the bearings to the position for the large size. (9) Attach the removal conveyance roller assembly for large size.
<NOTE> DETAIL A #1
There are two types (circular hole type and oblong hole type) of bearings, each of Removal conveyance roller assembly
which has its own installing position.
DETAIL A Circular hole
Oblong hole
A
DETAIL B Circular hole
Oblong hole
B
#2
DRY60_J0039E.ai PS3x8 (x2)
DRY60_J0037E.ai
#1
[Remove]
Bearing
#2
[Put]
Bearing
DRY60_J0038E.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-28
IN-29
(10) Attach the stopper for large size. (11) Attach the section cup arm assembly.
#3
TP3x6 (x4)
#2
#1 [Retain]
[Remove] Stopper
Stopper TP3x6
TP3x6
Section cup arm assembly
#2 #1
Clamp Connector
DRY60_J0077E.ai
Removal unit/Film loading unit
DRY60_J0036.ai
(12) Attach the removal unit/film loading unit.
{MC:3.3_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-29
IN-30
5.2.5 Relocating the Barcode Reader (Barcode Reader for (2) Relocate the barcode reader (BCR) to the position for the 6 x 36 cm, 25
the Upper Film Tray) x 30 cm, or 20 x 25 cm size.
Perform this procedure when using the upper film tray for the 26 x 36 cm, 25 x 30 cm, <REMARKS>
or 20 x 25 cm size. Attaching position of BCR
(1) Remove the BCR assembly from the main unit frame. <35x43/35x35 cm size> <26x36/25x30/20x25 cm size>
#3
TP3x6
BCR Shield plate Shield plate BCR
DRY60_J0045.ai
DETAIL A
#1 #2
Clamp BCR1
DRY60_J0070.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-30
IN-31
(3) Install the BCR assembly to the main unit frame. 5.2.6 Relocating the Barcode Reader (Barcode Reader for
#1
the Lower Film Tray)
TP3x6 Perform this procedure when using the lower film tray for the 35 x 43 cm or 35 x 35
cm size.
(1) Remove the shield plate.
DETAIL A
A
DETAIL A #1
TP3x6(x2)
Shield plate
#3 #2
Clamp BCR1
DRY60_J0047.ai
DRY60_J0048.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-31
IN-32
(2) Remove the BCR assembly from the main unit frame. (3) Relocate the barcode reader (BCR) to the position for the 35 x 43 cm
or 35 x 35 cm size.
#2 #3
BCR2 Clamp <REMARKS>
Attaching position of BCR
<35x43/35x35 cm size> <26x36/25x30/20x25 cm size>
BCR
Shield plate Shield plate
BCR
A BCR
DETAIL A
#1
TP3x6
DRY60_F0038E.ai
DRY60_J0052.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-32
IN-33
(4) Install the BCR assembly to the main unit frame. (5) Attach the shield plate.
BCR2 #2 #1
Clamp BCR2
A A
DETAIL A DETAIL A
#1
#3 Shield plate
2-TP3x6
TP3x6
DRY60_J0068.ai
DRY60_J0069.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-33
IN-34
5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option) 5.4 Installing the Covers and Inserting the
(1) Open the front cover, then open the upper right cover.
Trays
(2) Open the upper conveyance unit open/close cover, install the optional (1) Install the lower left cover, upper left cover, lower rear cover and upper
cleaning roller. rear cover.
<REMARKS> (2) Insert the upper film tray and lower film tray into the equipment.
At shipment, the equipment will be attached with a rubber roller instead of a
cleaning roller.
The rubber of the cleaning roller is black and that of the rubber roller is gray.
#3
[Remove]
Ruber roller
#4
#1 [Install]
[Open] Upper right cover Cleaning roller
#2
[Open]
Upper Conveyor Unit
Open/Close Guide
DRY60_J0015 ai
(3) Close the upper conveyance unit open/close cover, upper right cover,
and front cover.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-34
IN-35
5.5 Applying the Label (Class 3B Panel Label)
Apply the class 3B panel label for each local language as necessary.
This procedure is applicable for Japan and other non-English speaking countries.
(1) Open the front cover, then open the right cover.
(2) Apply the label.
CAUTION
The class 3B panel label for the local language must be applied next to the class
3B panel label in English.
Never do the following because doing so fails to meet the HHS specifications.
- Applying the class 3B panel label for the local language on the class 3B panel
label in English
- Removing the class 3B panel label in English
#1 Label
DRY60_J0067.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-35
IN-36
6. CONNECTING CABLES (2) Connect the network cable to the network cable connector.
<NOTE>
Use the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T cable (UTP: Unshielded type)
6.1 Connecting the Network Cable for the network cable.
CAUTION
Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this
DETAIL A
equipment.
<NOTE>
For the I/F cable, only UTP type straight LAN cable of category 5E or more should be
used.
(1) Check that the main power switch of the equipment is at OFF position #1
(O). Network cable
#2
Clamp
<Supplied
accessory>
DRY60_J0017 ai
(3) Connect the network cable of the equipment to the network in the
Main power switch hospital.
DRY60_J0016 ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-36
IN-37
6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the
Network
(1) Connect the network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to
which the equipment is connected.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-37
IN-38
6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking CAUTION
the Resistance If the eqiupment is to be installed in the patient environment, see “APPENDIX 1
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING”
n Power Cable Information {IN:APPENDIX 2_ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING}
CAUTION (1) Connect the power cable to the equipment.
If the power cable is not packed together with the equipment, be sure to use a
CAUTION
power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.
Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an Do not connect the power plug to the outlet at this point.
electric shock or a fire.
(2) Secure the power cable with the clamp.
n Power Cable (3) Set the main power switch of the equipment to ON ( I ).
Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. (4) Using the tester, measure the resistance between the terminals of the
l For U.S. and Canada power plug or power cable.
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor (U.S.A., Canada, etc.) (Germany, France, (U.K., etc.)
Spain, Sweden, etc.)
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
E
• Rated amperage: minimum 15 A E
• Cable Type: SJT E L
• Cable length: 3 m or less L
L N
N
l For U.S. Only N
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1 DRY60_J0018.ai
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable Terminal L-N L-E N-E
• Hospital Grade Plug Resistance 10 kΩ or more ∞Ω ∞Ω
l For Canada Only (5) Set the main power switch of the equipment to OFF (O).
• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
If hospital grade disassemble type – complying with CSA C22.2, No.42.
• Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21.
l For Europe
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
• Rated amperage: 6 A
• Cable type: H05VV-F
• Cable length: 3 m or less
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-38
IN-39
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT (4) [Make]
#1
7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder
Create the storage folder for various data of the equipment.
(1) Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing.
→ The “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX SMART Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
(2) Enter the FTP site root directory at [Input drive].
{MU:2.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
(3) Enter [Establish name] and [Printer host name].
#3 #2 #4
DRY60_J0020.ai
→ Data strage folder is created and the [Success.] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
• Data strage folder:
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXSMART\Printers\
Establish name_Printer name
• The data storage folder contains the following three empty folders:
• “Indv” folder: Location for storing individual data
• “Log” folder: Location for storing log data
• “Operation” folder: Location for storing equipment operation data
(5) [OK]
(6) Close all windows, and unload the main unit software CD-R.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-39
IN-40
7.2 Power ON (3) Press the stand-by switch on the operation panel.
Start the equipment.
(1) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
(2) Set the main power switch on the equipment to ON position ( I ).
Pilot lamp DRY60_J0021.ai
→ “888” appears on the operatoin panel.
DRY60_J0023.ai
→ When startup completes, the number of films remaining is displayed on the
operatoin panel.
Main power switch
DRY60_J0016 ai
→ The pilot lamp on the operation panel lights up. The equipment will not have
started up at this point.
Pilot lamp DRY60_J0021.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-40
IN-41
7.3 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC- (3) Enter the following username and password, select the language and
click [Login].
Utility) Login: dryprinter
Password: fujifilm
Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
<REMARKS>
- Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing:
{MU:2.1_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}
- Operation of the PC-Utility:
{MU:2.2_Flow of PC-Utility Operations} DRY60_J0029.ai
→ The PC-Utility starts and the maintenance tree is displayed.
(1) Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.
(2) Enter the following address in the address bar, and then press the
<ENTER> key on the key board.
http://172.16.1.30 (default IP address of this equipment):20051/USER/Login.htm
<NOTE>
When entering the address, discriminate between upper and lower cases.
→ The login screen is displayed.
DRY60_J0030.ai
→ When PC-Utility starts, [oFL] is displayed on the operation panel of the
equipment.
DRY60_J0028.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-41
IN-42
7.4 System Settings 7.4.1 Setting 1
Using the PC-Utility, perform the following system settings of the equipment. Skip <INSTRUCTIONS>
items which can be left at their default values when operating the equipment. Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network
*DRYPIX SMART administrator of the installation site.
┣ +System information and setup
┃ ┣ Setting1
┃ ┃ ┣ Check Version n AE Title
┃ ┃ ┣ Input Serial No.
┃ ┃ ┣ Set DICOM Set the name of the printer (fixed at 16 digits) used in the DICOM protocol.
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Network <DEFAULT>
┃ ┃ ┣ Display Mac address
┃ ┃ ┣ Registration service pc “DRYPIX”
┃ ┣ Setting2 <REMARKS>
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Rem.Films
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Tray • If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the
┃ ┃ ┣ Enable Film Size remaining number of digits.
┃ ┃ ┣ Enable QC • Characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh in
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Target Den. the 1-byte code table.
┃ ┃ ┣ Printing Dmax • The following are not accepted.
┃ ┃ ┣ Real Dmax on film • All spaces
┃ ┃ ┣ Enable ManmoQC
• Space for the first digit
┃ ┃ ┣ Check Counters
┃ ┃ ┣ Clear Counters
┃ ┃ ┣ Automated F.D.C.
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Film infomation
n Fine PRT AE-title
┃ ┃ ┣ Display indv. data Set the name of the printer for 20 pix/mm recording used in the DICOM protocol.
┃ ┣ Setting3
┃ ┃ ┣ Set SMPTE <DEFAULT>
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Date “DRYPIXHIGH”
┃ ┃ ┣ Ele Save Mode
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Alarm <REMARKS>
┃ ┃ ┣ Reboot - Select the type of characters to change the screen.
┃ ┃ ┣ Film Characteristic ID - If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the
┃ ┃ ┣ Power Supply Voltage remaining number of digits.
┃ ┃ ┣ Recognize position on 8x10(20x25)
- Characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh in
┃ ┃ ┣ Recognize position on 10x12(25x30)
the 1-byte code table.
┃ ┃ ┣ Recognize position on 10x14(26x36)
┃ ┃ ┣ Warning at system start - The following are not accepted.
- All spaces
- Space for the first digit
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-42
IN-43
n Port No. n Subnet Mask
Set the port number (decimal/5 digits) used for the network. Set the subnet mask (decimal) used for the network.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“17238” “255.255.0.0”
<NOTE> <REMARKS>
Do not set the following port numbers as they are reserved. • Input range: 000 to 255
• 23 : Telnet port • If no value is entered, it will be unaccepted.
• 135, 445, 5000 : OS port
• 20051, 20052 : PC-Utilityport
n Gateway
<REMARKS> Set the gateway address (decimal) used for the network.
Input range: 0 to 65535 <DEFAULT>
“0.0.0.0”
n IP Address <REMARKS>
Set the IP address (decimal) used for the network. • Input range: 000 to 255
• Invalid input: “255.255.255.255”
<DEFAULT>
• If no value is entered or “000.000.000.000” is entered, it will be taken as incomplete
“172.16.1.30” setting.
<REMARKS>
• Input range: 000 to 255
• Values cannot be entered in the following way.
• “000.000.000.000”
• “255.255.255.255”
• No value is entered.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-43
IN-44
n Host Name n Registering the PC for Servicing
Set the host name (maximum 16 digits) used for the network. Register the PC for servicing to enable file transfer. Any unregistered PC for servicing
<NOTE> is limited in function and does not support “Transfer Indv. Data” and “File Transfer” of
PC-Utility.
Set the host name entered at “7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder” of the <REMARKS>
Installation (IN) section.
{IN:7.1_Creating the Data Storage Folder} Only one PC for servicing can be registered. Only the one registered last supports file
transfer.
<DEFAULT> (1) Select [Registation service pc] in the maintenance tree.
“fujiprinter”
(2) In [Establish Name], enter the establish name entered in “7.1 Creating
<REMARKS>
the Data Storage Folder”.
• Characters which can be entered for the host name include alphabets (upper and
lower case), numerals, and hyphen “-”. <DEFAULT>
• The following are unaccepted. “Hospital Name”
• Space {IN:7.1_Creating the Data Storage Folder}
• Less than 2 characters <NOTE>
• First character is a number
Use one-byte alphanumeric when entering establish name.
n Display Mac address (3) In [Service PC IP Address], enter the IP address of the current PC for
The MAC address of the CPU board is displayed. servicing.
<DEFAULT>
“172.16.1.20”
(4) [Execute]
→ The PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) is registered with the
equipment.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-44
IN-45
7.4.2 Setting 2 n Enable QC
Set whether to enable/disable the image QC function. In order to use the image QC
n Set Tray function using U-Utility, this setting must be set to “Enable”.
Set which film size tray is used. <Parameter>
<REMARKS>
[ON]/[OFF]
- As all film sizes can be used in the default setting, set the unused film size to “OFF”.
<DEFAULT>
- Changing the settings of [Blue/HL] or [Blue/ML] also changes the setting values of
the film compensation information automatically. [ON]
n Set Target Den.
<Parameter>
Set the density of each step wedge used when recording the image QC pattern of
- [14x17]/[14x14]/[10x14]/[10x12]/[8x10] U-Utility.
- [ON]/[OFF]
<DEFAULT>
- [Blue/HL]/[Blue/ML]
[Density 0: 17±8, Density 1: 48±10, Density 2: 120±20, Density 3: 192±25, Density 4:
<DEFAULT> 300±25]
All [ON]
n Enable Film Size
Set the film size to be used on each slot.
<Parameter>
- Slot1:[14x17/14x14]/[10x14/10x12]/[8x10]
- Slot2:[14x17/14x14]/[10x14/10x12]/[8x10]
<DEFAULT>
- Slot1:[14x17/14x14]
- Slot2:[8x10]
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-45
IN-46
n Printing Dmax n Automated F.D.C.
Set whether to enable/disable the “density 4” step wedge for density measurement in Select the timing for executing automatic density correction.
the QC test pattern of U-Utility.
<Parameter>
<Parameter> [off]/ [every pack]
[ON]/[OFF]
<DEFAULT>
<DEFAULT> [every pack]
[OFF]
n Set Film information
n Real Dmax on film Set the position of the information to be printed on the film.
When [Blue base /ML] is selected for the film base color of any tray, select of whether
to print based on the tone type (Dmax) of the incoming image. <Parameter>
<REMARKS> [Upper Left]/ [Upper Right]/ [Lower Left]/ [Lower Right]
This setting cannot be made for individual trays; the setting applies to all trays. <DEFAULT>
[Upper Left]
<Parameter>
[3.6]/[4.0]
<DEFAULT>
[3.6]
n Enable ManmoQC
Set whether to enable/disable the MammoQC function.
<Parameter>
[ON]/[OFF]
<DEFAULT>
[OFF]
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-46
IN-47
7.4.3 Setting 3 n Power Supply Voltage
Set the voltage of the power to which the equipment is connected.
■ Set SMPTE
<Parameter>
Command for setting parameters for outputting SMPTE test patterns using U-Utility.
[ON]/ [110V]/ [120V]/ [200V]/ [220V]/ [230V]/ [240V]
<Parameter>
<DEFAULT>
No. : [1] to [5]
AE Title [100V]
Image Matrix : [1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12] <REMARKS>
LUT Number : [LUT 1] to [LUT 8]
Interpolation type : [SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH] The default value of the 200V model is “200V”.
Interpolation algorithm/method : [NONE]/[CUBIC]
<DEFAULT> n Recognize position on 8x10(20x25)
1 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC Command for enabling/disabling the left/right recognize function of the 20x25 cm size
2 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC film image (8x10).
3 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
4 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC <Parameter>
5 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC [Disable]/[Enable]
n Set Date <DEFAULT>
Set the system date and time. [Disable]
n Ele Save Mode n Recognize position on 10x12(25x30)
Set the timer value when this equipment shifts into the sleep mode.(unit: minute) Command for enabling/disabling the left/right recognize function of the 25x30 cm size
film image (10x12).
<Parameter>
<Parameter>
[0]/ [15]/ [30]/ [45]
[Disable]/[Enable]
<DEFAULT>
<DEFAULT>
[0] (Does not shifts into the power save mode.)
[Disable]
n Set Alarm
Set whether to enable/disable the operation panel beep.
<Parameter>
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
[ON]
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-47
IN-48
n Recognize position on 10x14(26x36) 7.5 Rebooting the Equipment
Command for enabling/disabling the left/right recognize function of the 26x36 cm size Rebooting the equipment enables various system settings changed.
film image (10x14).
(1) Select [Reboot] on the PC-Utility.
<Parameter> *DRYPIX SMART
[Disable]/[Enable] ┣ +System information and setup
┃ ┣ Setting1
<DEFAULT> ┃ ┣ Setting2
[Disable] ┃ ┣ Setting3
┃ ┃ ┣ Set SMPTE
n Warning at system start ┃ ┃ ┣ Set Date
┃ ┃ ┣ Ele Save Mode
Set whether to sound an alarm when the equipment is started with the shutter ┃ ┃ ┣ Set Alarm
inserted. ┃ ┃ ┣ Reboot
<Parameter> ┃ ┃ ┣ Film Characteristic ID
┃ ┃ ┣ Power Supply Voltage
[Enable]/[ignored] ┃ ┃ ┣ Recognize position on 8x10(20x25)
<DEFAULT> ┃ ┃ ┣ Recognize position on 10x12(25x30)
┃ ┃ ┣ Recognize position on 10x14(26x36)
[Enable] ┃ ┃ ┣ Warning at system start
(2) [Reboot] → [Execute]
→ After “System off. Please close this page” appears in the PC-Utility window,
close the window.
The equipment will reboot after about 60 seconds.
DRY60_J0031.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-48
IN-49
7.6 Client Settings n Protocol
Bold: Default
Set parameters for the connected client using PC-Utility. Item Function Value
Set the items according to the corresponding client settings in “Modality Connection
List”. Attribute list error Send error message for unexpect- 0: not indicate
(0107H Warning) ed data received or ignore warn- 1: indicate
<NOTE> ing
The default values for client parameters listed below are the values for a newly N Event Report RQ Send event report or not 0: disable
registered client and differ from the default values set for “default”, “FCR-CSL”, 1: enable
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, “QC-TEST” and “MammoQCTEST”. Attribute Value Out Of Send error message for out-of- 0: not indicate
Range (0116H Warning) range data received or ignore 1: indicate
warning
(1) Start the PC-Utility.
Image Size Is Larger Than Notify that images have been 0: not indicate
(2) Newly register the client according to the installation environment. imagebox reduced if too large to fit image 1: indicate
(B604H Warning) frame, or ignore warning
DRYPIX PRIMA
Change Film Size Change film or not
┣ +System information and setup
┣ +Transfer Indv. Data Enables film change. Can set 0: 0116H[W]
whether to send details of error
┣ +Client Configuration
Details of errors are sent to the 272: 0110H[F]
┃ ┣ Add Client client, without changing film
┃ ┣ Delete Client
Details of errors (unique values 21317: 5345H[F]
┃ ┣ Change Client Name for FUJIFILM systems) are sent to
┃ ┣ Read CLTInfo the client,without changing the
film
┃ ┣ +Clients
┃ ┃ ┣ default Use System Timeout Set timeout of reception from cli- 0: No
ent or not 1: Yes
┃ ┃ ┣ FCR-CSL
Presentation LUT Use LUT information sent from cli- 0: No
┃ ┃ ┣ WatchDRYPIXLink ent or not 1: Yes
┃ ┃ ┣ QC-TEST
Use Max/Min Density Which minimum density/maximum 0: Printer
┃ ┃ ┣ MammoQCTEST density value is to be used. 1: Modality
┃ ┃ ┗ NEW Extension Format ID Select ID for differentiating when CR (XG-1/CR-Console)
┃ ┣ Common extension format is used CR (Synapse)
┃ ┗ Sarmaker EV (Philips Easy Vision)
HM (Hitachi DR2000/Clavis
(3) Set the various parameters according to the client setting list shown view)
below.For details of each feature, refer to “Service Mode (MU) 4.4 PC- SM (Siemens)
Utility Command Details [PC3] Client Configration”. Use Default Annotation Use Annotation or not 0: No
1: Yes
{MU:2.4 [3]_Client Configration}
Change Base Color Change base color or not 0: disable
(Disable:110H[F]) 1: enable
Define Film Size of 11x14 Whether to interpret 11x14 size 0: 27.9x35.6
description as 25.7x36.4 cm or as 1: 25.7x36.4
27.9 x 35.6 cm
(The latter size is not used cur-
rently)
n Magnify
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-49
IN-50
Bold: Default n LUT Common
Item Function Value Bold: Default
Smoothing Type Selection of smoothing type 1: Sharp Item Function Value
2: Medium
3: Smooth Default LUT Selection of LUT number used as 1 - 8 (1)
default
Default Requested Magnification/reduction setting if 1: DECIMATE
Decimate/Crop Behavior client does not send information 2: CROP Illumination Lighting 0 - 65535 (2000) *1
when images are reduced 3: FAIL Ambient Light Reflected peripheral light 0 - 65535 (10) *1
Magnification Type Set the image enlargement/reduc- 0: NONE Configuration Information Which LUT number is to be used 0: Printer
tion processing type 1: CUBIC (Default LUT#) 1: Modality
Requested Image Size Specify the length of line to be 0 - 7000 (0) Default Illumination Which lighting setting is to be 0: Printer
printed on the image for one used 1: Modality
frame
Default Ambient Light Which reflected peripheral light is 0: Printer
Default Magnification Type Which enlargement/reduction pro- 0: Printer to be used 1: Modality
cessing type is to be used 1: Modality
Procedure Selection of tone correction pro- 0: SAR
Default Smoothing Type Which smoothing type is to be 0: Printer cessing method 1: BAR
used 1: Modality
Default Requested Image Which Requested Image Size is 0: Printer *1: The Illumination and Reflective Ambient Light setting value total must be less than 4000.
Size to be used 1: Modality
Default Decimate/Crop Which Decimate/Crop Behavior is 0: Printer n LUT1 to LUT8
Behavior to be used 1: Modality Bold: Default
Procedure Selection of enlargement/reduc- 0: A-VR Item Function Value
tion processing method 1: SSM Max Density Maximum density value (x100 for 0 - 360
Edge Detection Perform enlargement/reduction 0: OFF SAR, BAR is % value) (BAR: 0 - 100) *2
processing for edge or not 1: ON Min Density Minimum density value (x100 for 0 - 360 *2
Detection Level Edge detection level setting 1 - 1023 (600/800/600) SAR, No setting for BAR)
Sharpness Sharpness adjustment parameter -70 - 300 (130/30/80) γTable No Selection of γ table number of 11 - 99 (BAR: 1 - 10)
setting LUT *2, *3
Character Color Character color setting 0: White Contrast Contrast setting (x100, No setting (BAR: 10 - 400) (100)
1: Black for SAR)
Number of Tuning Points No. of fine adjustment points for 0 - 5 (0)
SAR
Density Setting of x100 of density value to 1 - 300 (120)
be finely adjusted
Shift Setting of x100 value of move- -100 - 100 (0)
ment density value
Contrast Setting of x 100 of contrast of 10 - 400 (100)
points to be finely adjusted
*2: The default value differs in LUT1 to LUT8.
*3: Up to 20 can be entered for BAR but enter between 1 and 10.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-50
IN-51
n Output Format Item Function Value
Bold: Default Defalut Polarity Which Polarity setting is to be 0: Printer
Item Function Value used 1: Modality
Film Size Setting of default film size 1: 8x10 Mirror Setting of film back/front 0: OFF (Normal)
2: 10x14 1: ON (Mirror)
3: 14x14 Margin between Image Setting of image frame intervals 0 - 50 (20)
4: 14x17 (Unit: pixel)
5: 10x12
Image Layout Setting of image layout method
Medium Type Setting of default film base color 1: Blue
0: Clear Positioning to film center 0: concentration
Film Orientation Setting of film orientation 1: PORTRAIT Center of remaining segment set 1: spread
2: LANDSCAPE with frame interval value
Border Density Background density (x100 of ac- 0 - 300 (300) Processing Type Setting of density processing cal- 0: Type1
tual value) culation method 1: Type2
Polarity Reverse the black/white of the im- 1: Normal
age 2: Reverse n Annotation
Trim Whether there is image trim 0: OFF Bold: Default
1: ON Item Function Value
Trim Width Width of the trim (pixels) 1 - 9 (1) Annotation Font Setting the font type of the anno- 0: Japanese
Trim Density Image trim density (x100 of actual 0 - 300 (0) tation 1: Western
value) Annotation Extend Use of this function is prohibited
Number of Copies Default number of print copies 1 - 99 (1) Upper Left/Upper Center/Up- Setting of annotation position, and
Print Priority Setting of print priority 1: HIGH per Right/Lower Left/Lower entering
2: MEDIUM Center/Lower Right
3: LOW
Resolution Command for setting the resolu- 0: Standard
tion (whether high density or not) 1: High
Default Number of Copies Which number of printed film is to 0: Printer
be used 1: Modality
Default Print Priority Which Print Priority is to be used 0: Printer
1: Modality
Default Medium Type Film base color priority 0: Printer
1: Modality
Default Film Orientation Film orientation priority 0: Printer
1: Modality
Default Film Size Film size priority 0: Printer
1: Modality
Default Border Density Which background density is to be 0: Printer
used 1: Modality
Default Trim Which Trim setting is to be used 0: Printer
1: Modality
Requested Resolution ID Selecting either the resolution 0: Printer
(high or not) set on the equipment 1: Modality
or the resolution set on the client
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-51
IN-52
n Common
Bold: Default
Item Function Value
Data Transfer Timeout Standby time setting when data is 30 - 3600 (300)
suspended
(Becomes error when setting time
is exceeded)
Association Count Maximum number of accesses to 1 - 10 (10)
the equipment at the same time
by DICOM communication
Logging DICOM DICOM communication log level 0: none
setting 1: normal
2: detail
Model Printer manufacture model name DRYPIX6000
Manufacturer Printer manufacturer name FUJIFILM Corporation
Requested Dmax less than Whether to accept density Dmax 0: Accept
3.6 3.6 or below 1: Reject
Default Client Whether to use or not the [default] 0: Yes
setting of the [Client:] list for un- 1: No
registered clients
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-52
IN-53
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT (4) Return the film tray back into the equipment.
<NOTE>
OPERATIONS Do not push in until the film tray locks.
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction (5) Load the film, push in the film tray, and pull out the film pack.
→ The 24-steps pattern is printing on film, and automatic density correction is
and Conveyance Operations performed.
Output the 24-steps pattern for each film tray, and perform automatic density <INSTRUCTIONS>
correction for each film tray according to the density data measured by the density
At the same time, check that film conveyance operations are normal.
measurement section.
At the same time, check that there are no problems in film conveyance from each film
tray. (6) Perform Steps (1) through (5) for all the trays (Trays 1 through 5) to be
used.
(1) Check that the equipment is in the standby state, and insert the
shutter into the film tray.
(2) Press the [ENTER] button on the operation panel and pull out the film
tray.
<REMARKS>
If the shutter is inserted into both the upper and lower film trays, only the upper
film tray can be pulled out, and the lower film tray cannot be pulled out.
If the lower film tray needs to be pulled out, do not insert the shutter into the
upper film tray.
(3) Release the shutter lock and pull out the shutter.
[Release] Shutter lock
DRY60_J0032.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-53
IN-54
8.2 Checking Density 8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for
The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is Image Unevenness and Scratches
displayed on the PC-Utility. Check from this data that the density value is within the
specification. Print grid patterns from each film tray, and check that the recording image format is
When Dmax setting is set to “4.0 enable”,ensure that the density of the 17th step is 4.0 within the specifications shown in the following figure. Also check that there are no
or higher using the external densitometer. unevenness and scratches on the output film.
(1) [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [3.0]/[3.6] → [Execute] (1) [Output Film] → [Grid] → [Tray1]/[Tray2] → [Number of copies]: “1” →
[Execute]
(2) Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown
→ The grid pattern is printed.
below.
(2) Measure the recording image format of the film.
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
displayed on the PC-Utility. {IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
<NOTE> <REMARKS>
If the Dmax value is out of the specification, adjust by changing the value of [Adjust If the recording image format is out of the specifications, perform “Adjusting Main
Dmax]. Scanner”.
{MU:2.4 [8-1]_Adjusting Main Scanner}
Step Dmax 3.0 Dmax 3.6
1 fog (3) Check that there are no problems in the output film image.
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
(4) Perform Steps (1) through (5) for all the trays (Trays 1 through 3) to be
3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4. used.
4 0.30±0.07 0.30±0.07
5 0.48±0.07 0.48±0.07
6 0.66±0.07 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07 0.84±0.07
8 1.02±0.07 1.02±0.07
9 1.20±0.07 1.20±0.07
10 1.38±0.07 1.38±0.07
11 1.56±0.07 1.56±0.07
12 1.74±0.07 1.74±0.07
13 1.92±0.07 1.92±0.07
14 2.10±0.09 2.10±0.09
15 2.40±0.09 2.43±0.10
16 2.70±0.11 2.95±0.11
17 3.00±0.11 3.60±0.25
(3) Perform Steps (1) through (5) for all the trays (Trays 1 through 2) to be
used.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-54
IN-55
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function
To check the interlock function of this equipment, use the PC-Utility.
Note that the interlock switches of this equipment are provided on the frame (SK1,
SK2, SK3) and on the film loading unit (SA12, SA22).
- SK1, SK2: For Front cover and Upper right cover
- SK3: For Lower right cover
- SA12: For Upper film tray SK1
- SA22: For Lower film tray SK2
SA12
SK3
SA22
DRY60_J0001.ai
Front View
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-55
IN-56
8.4.1 Checking the Front Cover, Upper Right Cover and ■ Checking the Upper Right Cover Interlock
Lower Right Cover Interlock This equipment has a mechanism that prevents the front cover from being closed
Executing [Inter Lock Check] of the PC-Utility starts MG1 drive and scanner test. while the upper right cover is open. Check that the front cover cannot be closed with
Open the front cover during the MG1 drive and scanner test at this point to make sure the upper right cover open, and then you can determine that the interlock function of
MG1 and the LD being scanner tested stop, which indicates that the interlock function the upper right cover is normal.
is working. (1) Open the front cover.
■ Checking the Front Cover and Lower Right Cover Interlock (2) Open the upper right cover.
(1) [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check] (3) Close the front cover.
Check that the front cover cannot be closed.
(2) [Execute]
→ MG1 drive and scanner test start.
(3) After drive starts, open the front cover within 10 seconds.
l Driving System
Check that the MG1 drive sound stops.
l Scanner System
Check that the following error messages are displayed on the PC-Utility.
Command incompleted.
Error Code : 5xx
Error Detail : 0
<REMARKS>
• Error code “5xx” occurs when the front cover is opened while scanner test is
being executed.
It means that when the cover is opened, the interlock operates normally, and
the scanner stops,
• If the front cover is opened more than 10 seconds after MG1 drive starts,
“Command completed.” will be displayed as scanner test has been completed.
(4) Close the front cover.
(5) Perform Steps (1) through (4) for the lower right cover.
Here, replace "front cover" with "lower right cover".
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-56
IN-57
8.4.2 Checking the Film Tray Interlock 8.5 Checking Fan Operation
(1) Insert the shutter into the upper film tray. The fans whose operations need to be checked are heat development unit cooling fan
and power supply unit cooling fan.
(2) [Check Mechanism] → [Other Actuators] → [SOLA1] Check that the fan is operating and that the fan direction is appropriate.
(3) [ON] → [Execute] Heat development unit cooling fan
(4) Pull the upper film tray.
(5) [SOLA1] → [OFF] → [Execute]
(6) [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check]
(7) [Execute]
Check that no operating sound of the MG1 can be heard.
(8) Push the upper film tray.
(9) [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check] Power supply unit
→Check that the MG1 drive sound stops. cooling fan
<REMARKS>
The interlock check operation stops in 30 seconds.
(10) Pull out the shutter.
(11) Perform Steps (1) through (10) for the lower film tray.
Here, replace "upper film tray" with "lower film tray"and "SOLA1" with "SOLA2".
DRY60_J0025.ai
8.5.1 Checking the Power Supply Unit Cooling Fan
(1) Check the power supply unit cooling fan for proper operation.
8.5.2 Checking the Heat Development Unit Cooling Fan
(1) [Heat- Developer] → [Fan Operation]
(2) [ON] → [Execute]
→Check the heat development unit cooling fan for proper operation.
(3) [OFF] → [Execute]
(4) [intermittent] → [Execute]
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-57
IN-58
8.6 Image QC Function 8.7 Power OFF
If the image QC function is set to “enable”, and if additional film tray is installed or the Shut down the equipment once.
film tray size is changed, enter the format baseline value of the image QC function. (1) Select [Reboot] on the PC-Utility.
{“DRYPIX PRIMA Reference Guide”}
<REMARKS>
(2) [Shutdown] → [Execute]
→ [End] is displayed on the operation panel. [End] means termination processing
Format baseline values by film size (Allowable range: 5%) is currently being carried out.
35 x 43 cm: Format A; 304.0 mm, Format B; 406.0 mm
→ “System off. Please close this page.” is displayed on the PC Utility.
26 x 36 cm: Format A; 304.0 mm, Format B; 202.0 mm
25 x 30 cm: Format A; 202.0 mm, Format B; 202.0 mm (3) Close the PC-Utility.
20 x 25 cm: Format A; 156.0 mm, Format B; 202.0 mm
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-58
IN-59
9. CHECKING CONNECTION 9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
(1) Press the standby switch of this equipment for five seconds.
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment (2) Check that the equipment starts termination operations and its power
goes OFF.
(1) Press the standby switch on this equipment.
(2) Check that the equipment starts up.
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from
Connected Equipment
(1) Output images from a divice on the network connected to this
equipment, and check that films are output normally.
Check the following.
• Images are output without errors.
• Images are normal.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-59
IN-60
10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT 10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at
Installation
10.1 Backing Up Individual Data Check if errors have occurred during installation using the PC-Utility, then save the
errors in the PC for servicing as necessary, and delete then error logs.
Save individual data as backup data immediately after installation in the PC for <REMARKS>
servicing.
Data strage folder: FTP root directory\DRYPIXSMART\Printers/Establish name_
<REMARKS>
Printer name\Log
Data strage folder: FTP root directory\DRYPIXSMART\Printers/Establish name_
Printer name\Indv *DRYPIX PRIMA
┣ +System information and setup
┃ ┣ Setting1
*DRYPIX SMART
┣ +System information and setup ┃ ┣ Setting2
┣ +Transfer Indv. Data ┃ ┣ Setting3
┃ ┣ +Initialize
┃ ┗ +Log data
┃ ┣ Display Error Log
┃ ┣ Clear Error Log
┃ ┣ Display DICOM Log
┃ ┗ Logging Mode
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-60
IN-61
10.3 Installing the Equipment (4) Rotate the upper nut of the adjustable foot and push against the
equipment to secure.
Move the equipment to the place of installation to enable use by the user.
<NOTE>
Connect a protective grounding if this equipment is to be installed in the patient Equipment
environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used.
{IN:APPENDIX 2._ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING}
10.3.1 Installing the Equipment on the Floor without Using
[Rotate] Nut
Fall Prevention Fixtures
[Rotate] Nut
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Ensure that the equipment is secured using the adjustable foot. Caster
If the equipment is not secured using the adjustable foot, nonuniformity may appear
on the image due to vibration.
Adjustable foot
(1) Ensure the required installation space around the equipment. DRY60_J0035.ai
(2) Rotate the two adjustable foots of the equipment with the hand and 10.3.2 Installing the Equipment and Securing with Fall
ground to the floor. Prevention Fixtures
(3) Rotate the lower nut of the adjustable foot with a spanner and adjust (1) Secure the equipment with fall prevention fixtures and bolts.
the height.
Rotate the two nuts equally. Adjust the amount the nut is adjusted so that even
load is applied to the adjustable foot.
<NOTE>
Lift the equipment until the casters rise above ground.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-61
IN-62
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment
(1) Clean all covers with a moist cloth.
CAUTION
Ensure cloth is free of residual water and water does not enter the device.
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-62
IN-63
APPENDIX 1. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE
35 x 43 cm size 35 x 35 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
Film conveyance direction Film conveyance direction Film conveyance direction Film conveyance direction Film conveyance direction
20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2
B D C E B D C E B D C E B D C E B D C E
257.5±1.0 252.0±1.0 252.0±1.0
F G F G F G F G F G
354.0±1.0
430.0±1.0
364.5±1.0 303.0±1.0 201.0±1.0
354.0±1.0
354.0±1.0 DRY60_J0026.ai
(Unit: mm)
Position 35 x 43 cm size 35 x 35 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
B 27.0 ±1.5 27.0 ±1.5 32.3 ±1.5 51.1 ±1.5 25.5 ±1.5
C 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 150.0 ±1.2
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 26.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0
| D–E | ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0 ±1.2 325.2 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-63
IN-64
APPENDIX 2. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE n Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective
Grounding of the Equipment and Clamp Locations
GROUNDING
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. additional protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical
Refer to Medical System Standard, IEC60601-1-1. standard of the country to which the equipment is to be installed.
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and
isolated supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>
for additional protective grounding” on the next page. 1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle connection of additional protective grounding.
electrical facility construction. 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile, move
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used the connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has hospital
room” are given below. grade earth terminal.
l Patient Environment 3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply
from the connected device will be separated from the main power supply.
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body. Earth mark
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use Additional protective
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective grounding cable
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective (More than 16 AWG)
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room. Power
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment. cable
Clamp
l Non-Medically Used Room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
DRY60_J0027.ai
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-64
IN-65
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-65
IN-66
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-66
IN-67
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual IN-67
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
09.20.2008 00 New release for HHS (00 (0) Edition) (FM5418) All pages
11.25.2008 00 New release for UL (00 (1) Edition) (FM5451) All pages
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
05.20.2009 01(1) New release for the field (FM5546) All pages
5, 6, 10, 17, 28, 30-32, 35-39, 39.1-
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0 (supports
06.30.2009 02 39.6, 40, 41, 41.1, 41.2, 42, 43, 46,
multi modalities), etc) (FM5568)
47
SERVICE MANUAL 08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585)
5, 6, 10, 17, 28-31, 31.1, 31.2, 32,35,
37, 38, 39.1, 39.2, 39.4, 41, 46, 47
3, 6, 10, 16, 17, 20, 29-31, 31.1,31.2,
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606)
37, 38, 39.1, 39.2, 46, 51
10.07.2011 04 Revised (Ed3) 3, 8, 9, 13, 27, 29, 50
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) Cover
INSTALLATION (IN) (FM-DL 100)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
IN-1
1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS Weight
Main Unit Only
1.1 Dimensions and Weight Approx. 85 kg
Main Unit with Cart
Dimensions Approx. 110 kg
Main Unit Only
610 mm x 630 mm x 620 mm (W x D x H)
Main Unit with Cart
610 mm x 630 mm x 1080 mm (W x D x H)
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-1
IN-2
1.2 Environmental Requirements Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement
Frequency : 10 to 55 Hz
Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure Amplitude : 0.0075 mm or less
Floor Levelness
Operating
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around
Temperature : 15 ˚C (40%RH) to 30 ˚C (70%RH)
Relative humidity : 15%RH (30 ˚C) to 70%RH (30 ˚C) (No condensation) Floor Flatness
Atmospheric pressure : 750 to 1060 hPa
10 mm or less
Non-operating (not including film)
Temperature : 0 to 45 ˚C
Relative humidity : 10 to 90%RH (No dew condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 750 to 1060 hPa
Transit or Storage
Temperature/Relative humidity : -10 (10%RH) to 50 ˚C (90%RH)
(No freezing/No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 500 to 1060 hPa
Exhaust Air of Equipment
Maximum Exhaust Air in Standby State
31.3 m3/hour
Maximum Exhaust Air in Printing
63 m3/hour
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-2
IN-3
1.3 Electrical Requirements Overload Protection
100/110/120 V ～ : 15 A
Frequency 200/220/230/240 V ～ : 10 A
50-60 Hz n Power Cable
Acceptable variation: ±3%
CAUTION
Line Voltage
• Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.
100/110/120 V ～ • Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an
Acceptable variation: ±10% electric shock or a fire.
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines)
200/220/230/240 V ～
Acceptable variation: ±10% l For U.S. and Canada
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines)
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
<REMARKS>
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
The mark “ ～ ” means AC power supply. • Rated amperage: minimum 15 A
• Cable Type: SJT
Capacity • Cable length: 3 m or less
1.2 kVA l For U.S. Only
Rated Current • Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
100/110/120 V ～ : 12 A • Hospital Grade Plug
200/220/230/240 V ～ : 5.3 / 5.6 / 5.9 / 6 A
l For Canada Only
Power Consumption
• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
Maximum 1.5 kW If hospital grade disassemble type – complying with CSA C22.2, No.42.
Electric Energy • Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21.
Printing : Approx. 350 Wh l For Europe
Ready : Approx. 180 Wh
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
Power saving mode : Approx. 60 Wh
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
Maximum Heat Generation • Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
Printing : Approx. 1300 kJ • Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
Ready : Approx. 700 kJ • Rated amperage: 6 A
• Cable type: H05VV-F
Grounding Resistance • Cable length: 3 m or less
100 Ω or less
Network Cable
{IN:6.1_Connecting the Network Cable}
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-3
IN-4
1.4 Other Specifications 1.5 Equipment Installation Space
Noise 1.5.1 Installation Space
Printing : Approx. 50 dB (excluding transient noises)
Ready : Approx. 45 dB When Not Fixed with Fixtures
Start-up Time Front: More than 800 mm
Rear: More than 0 mm
Approx. 15 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 ˚C) Left: More than 50 mm
Right: More than 200 mm
When Fixed with Fixtures
Front: More than 800 mm
Rear: More than 50 mm
Left: More than 250 mm
Right: More than 250 mm
1.5.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work
<REMARKS>
To rotate the equipment, one side requires more than 1000 mm of space.
Front: More than 1000 mm
Rear: More than 600 mm
Left: More than 800 mm
Right: More than 800 mm
Top: More than 400 mm
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-4
IN-5
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW
START
A
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION 5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND INSTALLING OPTIONS
3.1 Precautions on Installation 5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures
3.2 Preparing the PC for Servicing 5.2 Setting Film Tray
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts 5.2.1 Affixing the Film Size Label
3.4 Specifications of Installation Table 5.2.2 Changing the Film Tray Size
3.5 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves 5.2.3 Setting the Tray Number
3.5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option)
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION 5.4 Installing the Cart (Option)
4.1 Carrying 6. CONNECTING CABLES
4.2 Unpacking and Unloading 6.1 Connecting the Network Cable
4.2.1 Equipment Main Body 6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing (or
Settings-Changeable Models) to the Network
4.3 Checking Components
6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance
A B
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-5
IN-6
B C
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT 8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder 8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
7.1a FTP Server Settings (Only settings-changeable models) 8.2 Checking Density
7.2 DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART-PC) Settings (When Connecting 8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness
CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL) and Scratches
7.3 Setting the Firewall in CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 8.3a Check when Using Multiple Film Trays
674/CR-IR 355V CL (When using CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or
CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL) 8.4 Checking the Interlock Function
7.4 Power ON 8.4.1 Checking the Front Cover/Right Cover Interlock
7.5 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility) 8.4.2 Checking the Film Tray Interlock
7.6 System Settings 8.5 Checking Fan Operation
7.6.1 Setting 1 8.6 Image QC Function
7.6.2 Setting 2 8.7 Power OFF
7.6.3 Setting 3 9. CHECKING CONNECTION
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment
7.7 Installing the Modality Connection Software
(to Support Multi Modalities)
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
7.8 Rebooting the Equipment
9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
7.9 Disconnecting the Equipment
7.10 Client Settings (Multi Modality Equipment Only)
C D
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-6
IN-7
10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT
10.1 Backing Up Individual Data
10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
10.3 Installing the Equipment
10.3.1 Installing the Equipment on the Floor without Using Fixtures
10.3.2 Installing the Equipment on the Table and Securing with Fixtures
10.3.3 Securing the Cart with Fixtures
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment
END
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-7
IN-8
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION n Prevention of Condensation
When transporting an equipment to a hospital from outdoors where the temperature
is low such as cold regions, condensation may occur inside the equipment. Take
3.1 Precautions on Installation precautions against the following to prevent this condensation.
• Transport the equipment indoors without removing the vinyl packaging wrapping the
The machine installation site must satisfy the “n Installation Site Requirements” below. equipment body. However, the cardboard boxes can be removed outdoors as this
Also be sure to complete procedures beforehand for necessary construction work, will not cause condensation.
electrical utility, and air-conditioning system installation. • After transporting indoors, refer to the following table and wait until the equipment
Note that UL/TÜV is not effective when used as mobile type because usage of this settles to the indoor temperature, and then remove the vinyl.
equipment as mobile type has not been applied for with UL/TÜV-PS. • Install the equipment, touch the metal portions such as guide plates, etc. and check
that no condensation has occurred, and then turn ON the power.
n Installation Site Requirements • If the vinyl is accidentally removed outdoors, wrap the equipment up in the vinyl
Avoid the following installation sites. tightly again before transporting indoors.
• Places where the temperature drastically changes.
<REMARKS>
• Places near heat sources such as heaters.
• Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur. The following table shows the approximate time to wait before removing the vinyl after
transporting the equipment into a room with 50% humidity.
• Places where the equipment may be exposed to any corrosive gas.
Extend the waiting time shown if the indoor humidity is high. If humidity is low, the
• Dusty places. waiting time can be shortened.
• Places where the equipment is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock.
Example: Humidity 70%→Increase waiting time by 40%
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight. Humidity 30%→Decrease waiting time by 30%
• Install this device in the place that a patient does not touch.
External temperature
Indoor
temperature
10ºC 5ºC 0ºC -5ºC -10ºC -15ºC -20ºC
30 70 110 140
10ºC - - -
minute minute minute minute
30 70 110 140 175
15ºC - -
minute minute minute minute minute
30 65 100 135 170 205
20ºC -
minute minute minute minute minute minute
30 60 100 130 170 200 240
25ºC
minute minute minute minute minute minute minute
60 100 130 165 200 235 270
30ºC
minute minute minute minute minute minute minute
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-8
IN-9
n Power Cable n Additional Protective Grounding
CAUTION Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. This
• Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle electrical
• Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an facility construction.
electric shock or a fire. Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used
room” are given below.
l For U.S. and Canada l Patient Environment
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
• Rated amperage: minimum 15 A It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
• Cable Type: SJT
• Cable length: 3 m or less
l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
l For U.S. Only grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1 grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable used room.
• Hospital Grade Plug Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l For Canada Only l Non-Medically Used Room
• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21. Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
If hospital grade disassemble type - complying with CSA C22.2, No.42.
• Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21. n Network Connection
As the equipment needs to be connected to the network, prepare network materials
l For Europe and parts and complete constructions beforehand.
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1 Prepare the network materials and accessories according to the place of installation
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed as they are not designated parts.
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor n Board and Optical Unit Handling Precautions
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of boards
• Rated amperage: 6 A
and optical unit.
• Cable type: H05VV-F Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
• Cable length: 3 m or less boards and optical unit.
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-9
IN-10
3.2 Preparing the PC for Servicing
The various settings and operations of this equipment are performed using PC-Utility.
The PC-Utility can be executed on the screen of the browser (Internet Explorer) of the
PC for servicing or settings-changeable models (CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-
VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL, or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL (FM-DL 100 with main unit
software version V2.1 or later only)) connected via the network to the equipment.
To execute the PC-Utility using the PC for servicing, prepare the PC for servicing
beforehand.
{MU:2.1_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}
To execute the PC-Utility on settings-changeable models without using the PC for
servicing, there is a need to complete setup of settings-changeable models before
installing the equipment.
■ Outline of Connection
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-10
IN-11
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts l Drilling Holes for Embedding Anchor Nuts
To secure the equipment or cart on the floor with fixtures, embed the anchor nuts
beforehand.
n Position of the Anchor Nuts to Be Enbedded
l Position of the Cart Fixture Bracket (Two positions)
l Embedding Anchor Nuts
<NOTE>
• Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes.
• Push in to a depth where the top of the anchor nut does not protrude out.
n Example of Embedding Procedure
CAUTION
Wear a protective goggle when using a drill.
<NOTE>
Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.
<REMARKS>
Before drilling a hole, move the cart to the place of installation, and mark the locations
to be drilled.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-11
IN-12
3.4 Specifications of Installation Table 3.5 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves
When placing the equipment on the table, check that the table satisfies the following
questions. 3.5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
• Weight tolerance of table: Above 255kg This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical
• Specified torque of screws for installing: M5 (27 kgcm or 2.65 Nm) devices to the IEC 60601-1-2 Ed2.1: 2004, Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
M10 (220 kgcm or 21.6 Nm) These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a typical medical installation.
l Hole Positions when Securing Equipment to the Table using Fall This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
Prevention Fixtures (Four Positions)
to other devices in the vicinity.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving device.
• Increase the separation between the equipment.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
other device(s) are connected.
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-12
IN-13
n Further Information for IEC60601-1-2 Ed2.1: 2004 Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity
• Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs The FM-DL 100 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as customer or the user of the FM-DL 100 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
follows.
• Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical Electromagnetic
Immunity test IEC 60601test level Compliance level environment -
equipment. guidance
• The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement Electrostatic discharge ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be
parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased (ESD) ±4kV contact wood, concrete or ce-
IEC 61000-4-2 ±8kV air ±6kV contact ramic tile.
immunity of the FM-DL 100. If floors are covered
±2kV air with synthetic materi-
List of Cables ±4kV air al, the relative humid-
FUJIFILM ±8kV air ity should be at least
Name General specification 30%.
parts code
I/F Cable - UTP type straight LAN cable of Electrical fast ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality
category 5E or more. transient/burst lines lines should be that of a
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial or
lines lines hospital environment.
• The FM-DL 100 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
Surge ±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality
If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the FM-DL 100 should be observed to verify IEC 61000-4-5 should be that of a
normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used. ±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or
hospital environment.
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions Voltage dips, short < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) should be that of a
The FM-DL 100 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
customer or the user of the FM-DL 100 should assure that it is used in such an environment. power supply input hospital environment.
lines 40 % UT 40 % UT If the user of the
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance IEC 61000-4-11 (60% dip in UT) (60% dip in UT) FM-DL 100 requires
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles continued operation
RF emissions The FM-DL 100 uses RF energy only for its during power mains
CISPR 11 internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions 70 % UT 70 % UT interruptions, it is rec-
Group 1
are very low and are not likely to cause any (30% dip inUT) (30% dip in UT) ommended that the
interference in nearby electronic equipment. for 25 cycles for 25 cycles FM-DL 100 be pow-
RF emissions ered from an uninter-
Class A < 5 % UT < 5 % UT ruptible power supply
CISPR 11
The FM-DL 100 is suitable for use in all es- (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) or a battery.
Harmonic emissions tablishments other than domestic and those for 5 s for 5 s
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2 directly connected to the public low-voltage
power supply network that supplies buildings Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency mag-
Voltage fluctuations/ used for domestic purposes. (50/60 Hz) magnetic netic fields should be
flicker emissions Complies field at levels characteristic
IEC 61000-3-3 IEC 61000-4-8 of a typical location in
a typical commercial
or hospital environ-
ment.
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-13
IN-14
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment and the FM-DL 100
The FM-DL 100 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the FM-DL 100 should assure that it is used in such an environment. The FM-DL 100 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the FM-DL 100 can help prevent elec-
Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance tromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
test test level level communications equipment (transmitters) and the FM-DL 100 as recommended below, accord-
ing to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
IEC 61000-4-6 equipment should be used no closer to any Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
150kHz to part of the FM-DL 100, including cables, than output power of m
80MHz the recommended separation distance cal- transmitter
culated from the equation applicable to the W 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MH to 2.5 GHz
frequency of the transmitter. d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3
Recommended separation distance 0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
Radiated RF
IEC 61000-4-3 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2 0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
80MHz to 1 1.2 1.2 2.3
d = 1.2 80 MHz to 800 MHz
2.5GHz 10 3.8 3.8 7.3
d = 2.3 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
100 12 12 23
where P is the maximum output power rat-
ing of the transmitter in watts (W) according For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separa-
to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the tion distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency
recommended separation distance in metres of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
(m). according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range ap-
as determined by an electromagnetic site plies.
survey,a should be less than the compliance NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
level in each frequency range.b fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) tele-
phones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broad-
cast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environ-
ment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If
the measured field strength in the location in which the FM-DL 100 is used exceeds the appli-
cable RF compliance, the FM-DL 100 should be observed to verify normal operation. If ab-
normal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting
or relocating the FM-DL 100.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-14
IN-15
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION 4.2 Unpacking and Unloading
CAUTION
4.1 Carrying The weight of this equipment is approximately 85 kg. Take the following
precautions when moving the equipment, etc.
CAUTION • To prevent injuries resulting in back pain, pay attention to your posture during
the work.
When moving the equipment over any bumps, move it slowly to avoid shock. • Be careful not to drop the equipment as this may cause serious injuries.
• When lifting up the equipment, lift at the position shown in the following
1. Clear the delivery path of the equipment and carry the equipment to figure, hook fingers to the equipment firmly and then lift.
the installation site.
To ensure that the equipment can be carried out safely to the installation
site, move any obstacle out of the way at the delivery entrance, in corridors
and corners. Also make sure that the elevator is made available to move the
equipment.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-15
IN-16
4.2.1 Equipment Main Body 3. Remove the separately packaged items.
1. Cut the band and remove the cardboard box.
2. Remove the protective material covering the equipment main body.
4. Remove the equipment from the vinyl.
<REMARKS>
Remove the vinyl after checking that the equipment has adapted to room
temperature.
{IN:3.1_Precautions on Installation n Prevention of Condensation}
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-16
IN-17
4.3 Checking Components n Options
No. Product Code Parts No. Remarks
n Equipment Main Body DPX PRIMA TRAY = E Film tray 898Y100546 Initial setting:
35x43 cm size
Name Qty. Remarks
DPX PRIMA CLEAN- Cleaning roller 334Y0097 -
Equipment main body 1 - ING ROLLER E
DPX PRIMA CART = E Cart 888Y100004 -
n Accessories
DPX PRIMA FLOOR Fall prevention fixture kit 898Y100545 For earthquake-proof
No. Name Qty. Remarks FIX KIT = E fixing
1 Cutter 1 - DPX PRIMA AC CORD Power cable for U.S.A. 136Y9138 -
2 Guide pin 1 - UL E
3 Cap 1 - DPX PRIMA AC CORD Power cable for EU 136N0449 -
EU E
4 Fuse 1 1A
DPX 2000 AC CORD Power cable for U.K. 136N0450 -
5 Fuse 1 1.6A
UK E
6 Fuse 1 -
DPX PRM CT MR Modality Connection Soft- 898Y100624 CD-ROM
7 Fuse 1 2A CONNECT KIT E ware
8 Fuse 1 3.2A
9 Fuse 1 5A
l Additional Film Tray
10 Fuse 1 10A No. Name Qty. Remarks
11 Screw (BR3x10) 2 - 1 Film tray 1 Film size setting: 35x43 cm size
12 Nut (Na3) 2 - 2 Screw 2 -
13 Operation manual 1 - 3 Nut 2 -
14 CD 1 Individual data CD 4 Cap 2 -
15 CD 1 Main unit software CD 5 Guide pin 2 -
16 Label 2 EC60825-1:2001/EN60825-1:2002 6 Shutter 1 -
class 3B panel label #2 7 Label 1 Film size label
17 Label 1 Film size label
18 Reference Guide 1 CD l Cleaning Roller
19 Quick Guide 1 No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Cleaning roller 1 -
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-17
IN-18
l Cart
No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Cart 1 -
2 Fixture 2 For securing the equipment
3 Screw (B5x12) 8 -
4 Fixture 2 Fall prevention fixture
5 Grip anchor 2 -
6 Hexagonal hole bolt (M8x20) 2 -
7 Washer (W8) 2 -
8 Spring washer (SW8) 2 -
9 Tie band 8 Spare x1
l Fall Prevention Fixture Kit
No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Fixture 2 Same for left and right
2 Bolt (BQ5x16) 4 -
3 Hexagonal bolt (M10x30) 4 -
4 Nut (Na10) 4 -
5 Washer (W10) 4 -
6 Spring washer (SW10) 4 -
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-18
IN-19
5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES
AND INSTALLING OPTIONS
5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures
1. Remove the rear cover and left cover.
2. Release the tray lock using slotted screwdriver.
<NOTE>
When manually unlocking the traylock, because the plate inside the rear
cover cannot be removed, the inside of the equipment will not be visible as
shown in the figure. Press the manual release arm as shown in the figure.
The manual release arm can be unlocked just by moving the tip of the
screwdriver lightly.
3. Pull out the film tray.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-19
IN-20
4. Remove the tape securing the shutter, and pull out the shutter. 8. Remove the tape and open the right cover.
<REMARKS>
Insert the removed shutter into the base of the equipment.
5. Remove the tape securing the lower squeezing roller.
9. Remove the tape securing the magnet catch (two locations).
6. Insert the cap.
7. Install the left cover and rear cover.
10. Close the right cover.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-20
IN-21
5.2 Setting Film Tray
This equipment can only be inserted with one film tray. By using spare film trays, up to
five film sizes can be used.
<REMARKS>
The optional film tray packaged with the equipment at shipment is set to 35 x 43 cm.
5.2.1 Affixing the Film Size Label
1. Affix the label of the film size used on the film tray.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-21
IN-22
5.2.2 Changing the Film Tray Size l Attaching Positions of Guide Plate and Guide Pin
To change the film size set at shipment (35 x 43 cm size), the attaching position of the
guide plate and guide pin in the tray.
1. Change the installed position of the guide plate and guide pin in the
film tray according to the film size used.
<NOTE>
The guide plate and guide pin are secured with the nut (Na3) from the bottom of
the tray.
Attaching positions of guide plate and guide pin
l Removing/Reinstalling the Guide Plate
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-22
IN-23
5.2.3 Setting the Tray Number n Film Sizes Corresponded to Actuator Installing Position
The size detection actuator detects the size of films loaded on the film tray as a result
of the film size detection sensors (SA3 to SA5) attached to the equipment detecting
the attached position of the actuator.
<NOTE>
Do not attach the actuator at the same position for several film trays, as this
means that several same size trays exist, disabling the remaining number of
films from being displayed correctly.
1. Change the attached position of the tray detection actuator according
to the film size used.
2. Insert the film tray into the equipment.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-23
IN-24
5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option) 5.4 Installing the Cart (Option)
1. Open the front cover, then open the right cover. 1. Open the card board box, remove the cart and accessory box.
2. Open the upper conveyance unit open/close cover, install the optional
cleaning roller.
<REMARKS>
At shipment, the equipment will be attached with a rubber roller instead of a
cleaning roller.
The rubber of the cleaning roller is black and that of the rubber roller is gray.
3. Close the upper conveyance unit open/close cover, right cover, and
front cover.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-24
IN-25
2. Place the equipment on the cart. 4. Adjust the position of the equipment so that the screw hole on the cart
bracket meets the screw hole on the cart top cabinet.
3. Temporarily secure brackets to the left and right sides of the <REMARKS>
equipment.
Align the left, right and rear covers of the equipment to the left , right and rear
sides of the top plate of the cart.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-25
IN-26
5. Secure the equipment with screws.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-26
IN-27
6. CONNECTING CABLES 2. Connect the network cable to the network cable connector.
<NOTE>
6.1 Connecting the Network Cable Use the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T cable (UTP: Unshielded type)
for the network cable.
CAUTION
Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this
equipment.
<NOTE>
For the I/F cable, only UTP type straight LAN cable of category 5E or more should be
used.
1. Check that the main power switch of the equipment is at OFF position
(O).
3. Connect the network cable of the equipment to the network in the
hospital.
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-27
IN-28
6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing (or
Settings-Changeable Models) to the
Network
1. When using the PC for servicing, connect the network cable of the PC
for servicing to the network to which the equipment is connected.
2. If not using the PC for servicing, check that settings-changeable
models is connected to the network to which the equipment is
connected.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-28
IN-29
6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking CAUTION
the Resistance If the eqiupment is to be installed in the patient environment, see “APPENDIX 1
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING”
n Power Cable Information {IN:APPENDIX 2_ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING}
CAUTION
1. Connect the power cable to the equipment.
If the power cable is not packed together with the equipment, be sure to use a
power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. CAUTION
Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an Do not connect the power plug to the outlet at this point.
electric shock or a fire.
n Power Cable
2. Secure the power cable with the clamp.
Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. 3. Set the main power switch of the equipment to ON ( I ).
l For U.S. and Canada 4. Using the tester, measure the resistance between the terminals of the
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor power plug or power cable.
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
• Rated amperage: minimum 15 A
• Cable Type: SJT
• Cable length: 3 m or less
l For U.S. Only
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
• Hospital Grade Plug
l For Canada Only
• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21. Terminal L-N L-E N-E
If hospital grade disassemble type – complying with CSA C22.2, No.42. Resistance 10 kΩ or more ∞Ω ∞Ω
• Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21.
l For Europe 5. Set the main power switch of the equipment to OFF (O).
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
• Rated amperage: 6 A
• Cable type: H05VV-F
• Cable length: 3 m or less
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-29
IN-30
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT 4. [Make]
7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder
Create the storage folder for various data of the equipment.
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable model).
→ The “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
→ Data strage folder is created and the [Success.] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
• Data strage folder:
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPXPRIMA\Printers\Establish
name_Printer name
• The data storage folder contains the following three empty folders:
• “Indv” folder: Location for storing individual data
• “Log” folder: Location for storing log data
• “Operation” folder: Location for storing equipment operation data
2. Enter the FTP site root directory at [Input drive]. 5. [OK]
{MU:2.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
6. Close all windows, and unload the main unit software CD-R.
3. Enter [Establish name] and [Printer host name].
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-30
IN-31
7.1a FTP Server Settings (Only settings- 2. [Set]
changeable models)
Settings required for connecting settings-changeable models (CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR
391V CL/ CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL/CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL) to the printer can
be added using the PC-Utility.
<NOTE>
This setting must be performed using the main unit software CD-R with main
unit software version V2.1 or later.
<REMARKS>
The following settings are added:
• IIS setting (creating virtual directory of FTP server)
• Windows user account: dryprinter (password: fujifilm)
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of the
settings-changeable model.
→ The “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
<REMARKS>
→ [Success.] screen appears.
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it. 3. [OK] → [EXIT]
4. Close all windows, and unload the main unit software CD-R.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-31
IN-31.1
7.2 DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART PC) 2. Click the [Install] button.
Settings (When Connecting CR-IR 391CL/ → [Success] appears.
CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V <REMARKS>
For CD-R containing main unit software version V2.0 or earlier, installing the
CL) DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool also executes the following settings required for
connecting the printer to the CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR
FM-DL 100 does not have a display for showing messages, hence it cannot display
355V CL.
the equipment status. However, if CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, or CR-VW 674/CR-
• IIS setting (creating virtual directory of FTP server)
IR 355V CL is connected, installing the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART-PC) in
CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL will enable film size, • Windows user account: dryprinter (password: fujifilm)
remaining number of films, and messages to be displayed on the CR-IR 391CL/CR-
IR 391V CL, or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL monitor. The power of this equipment can
also be set to go OFF with CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V 3. [OK]
CL when shut down by selecting [Close] from the CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or
CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL study list. 4. Enter the IP address of the equipment.
Install the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool as follows.
<NOTE>
5. Select the language for the languages to be displayed on CR-IR 391CL/
CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL.
If not installed as instructed below, installation will not complete normally.
6. [Set]
<REMARKS> → The [Success] screen appears.
CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL is unable to use the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool.
Consequently, when connecting CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL, there is no need to 7. [OK] → [EXIT]
install the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool.
8. Close all windows, and unload the main unit software CD-R.
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of CR-IR
391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL.
→ The “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-31.1
IN-31.2
n Main Unit Software Version V2.0 or Earlier n Main Unit Software Version V2.1 or Later
<REMARKS>
• After completing installation, reboot CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW
674/CR-IR 355V CL. The following icon will be displayed on the taskbar.
• The DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART-PC) is installed in C: \Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC.
• The ART-PC log folder is created at the following position. (Hidden folder for
V1.3 or later)
• V1.2 or earlier : C: \Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC
• V1.3 or later (Windows XP) : C: \Document and Settings\All Users\
Application Data\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC
• V1.3 or later (Windows Vista) : C: \ProgramData\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-31.2
IN-32
7.3 Setting the Firewall in CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 2. Click on the [Exceptions] tab and click [Add program].
391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL (When
using CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW
674/CR-IR 355V CL)
If the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool has been installed, firewall settings are required.
1. Click [Control Panel] → [Windows Firewall].
2. Click [Change settings].
3. If [ART-PC] appears in the [Programs or port] list, select it and click
[OK]. If not in the list, selected [Browse], specify “C:Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC\ART-PC.exe”, and click [OK].
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-32
IN-33
4. Check that the [ART-PC.exe] checkbox is selected.
5. Click [Add port].
6. Enter the desired name at [Name], and enter [20053] at [Port number].
7. Click [OK].
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-33
IN-34
7.4 Power ON <NOTE>
Normally, leave the main power switch at ON.
Start the equipment.
1. Connect the power plug to the outlet. 3. Press the stand-by switch on the operation panel.
2. Set the main power switch on the equipment to ON position ( I ).
→ “888” appears on the operatoin panel.
→ The pilot lamp on the operation panel lights up. The equipment will not have
started up at this point.
→ When startup completes, the number of films remaining is displayed on the
operatoin panel.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-34
IN-35
7.5 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC- 3. Enter the following username and password, select the language and
click [Login].
Utility)
Login: dryprinter
Connect the communication of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) Password: fujifilm
to the equipment.
<REMARKS>
Operation of the PC-Utility:
{MU:2.2_Flow of PC-Utility Operations}
1. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable
models).
2. Enter the following address in the address bar, and then press the
<ENTER> key on the key board.
→ The PC-Utility starts and the maintenance tree is displayed.
http://172.16.1.30 (default IP address of this equipment):20051/USER/Login.htm
<NOTE>
When entering the address, discriminate between upper and lower cases.
→ The login screen is displayed.
→ When PC-Utility starts, [oFL] is displayed on the operation panel of the
equipment.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-35
IN-36
7.6 System Settings 7.6.1 Setting 1
Using the PC-Utility, perform the following system settings of the equipment. Skip <INSTRUCTIONS>
items which can be left at their default values when operating the equipment. Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network
administrator of the installation site.
*DRYPIX PRIMA
┣ +System information and setup
┃ ┣ Setting1 n AE Title
┃ ┃ ┣ Check Version
┃ ┃ ┣ Input Serial No. Set the name of the printer (fixed at 16 digits) used in the DICOM protocol.
┃ ┃ ┣ Set DICOM <DEFAULT>
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Network
┃ ┃ ┣ Display Mac address “DRYPIX”
┃ ┃ ┣ Registration service pc <REMARKS>
┃ ┣ Setting2
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Rem.Films • If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Tray remaining number of digits.
┃ ┃ ┣ Enable QC • Characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh in
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Target Den. the 1-byte code table.
┃ ┃ ┣ Printing Dmax • The following are not accepted.
┃ ┃ ┣ Auto F.D.C. • All spaces
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Film infomation
• Space for the first digit
┃ ┃ ┣ Display indv. data
┃ ┣ Setting3
┃ ┃ ┣ Set SMPTE (V2.0 or later)
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Date
n Port No.
┃ ┃ ┣ Ele Save Mode Set the port number (decimal/5 digits) used for the network.
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Alarm
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Power Supply Synchronization (V2.0 or later) <DEFAULT>
┃ ┃ ┣ Reboot “17238”
┃ ┃ ┣ Film Characteristic ID
┃ ┃ ┣ Power Supply Voltage <NOTE>
Do not set the following port numbers as they are reserved.
• 23 : Telnet port
• 135, 445, 5000 : OS port
• 20051, 20052 : PC-Utilityport
<REMARKS>
Input range: 0 to 65535
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-36
IN-37
n IP Address n Host Name
Set the IP address (decimal) used for the network. Set the host name (maximum 16 digits) used for the network.
<DEFAULT> <NOTE>
“172.16.1.30” Set the host name entered at “7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder” of the
Installation (IN) section.
<REMARKS>
{IN:7.1_Creating the Data Storage Folder}
• Input range: 000 to 255
• Values cannot be entered in the following way.
<DEFAULT>
• “000.000.000.000”
• “255.255.255.255” “fujiprinter”
• No value is entered. <REMARKS>
• Characters which can be entered for the host name include alphabets (upper and
lower case), numerals, and hyphen “-”.
n Subnet Mask • The following are unaccepted.
Set the subnet mask (decimal) used for the network. • Space
<DEFAULT> • Less than 2 characters
• First character is a number
“255.255.0.0”
<REMARKS>
• Input range: 000 to 255
n Display Mac address
• If no value is entered, it will be unaccepted. The MAC address of the CPU board is displayed.
<DEFAULT>
n Gateway “255.255.0.0”
Set the gateway address (decimal) used for the network. <REMARKS>
<DEFAULT> To connect CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL or CR-IR
346CL/CR-IR 348CL, there is a need to register the Mac address, IP address, and
“0.0.0.0” hostname using the FF-WakeOnLAN Utility of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW
<REMARKS> 674/CR-IR 355V CL or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL.
{ CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL, CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR
• Input range: 000 to 255 348CL Service Manual (MC Appendix)}
• Invalid input: “255.255.255.255”
• If no value is entered or “000.000.000.000” is entered, it will be taken as incomplete
setting.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-37
IN-38
n Registering the PC for Servicing (or Settings-Changeable 7.6.2 Setting 2
Models)
n Set Tray
Register the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) to enable file transfer.
Any unregistered PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) is limited in Set which film size tray is used.
function and does not support “Transfer Indv. Data” and “File Transfer” of PC-Utility. <REMARKS>
<REMARKS>
As all film sizes can be used in the default setting, set the unused film size to “OFF”.
Only one PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) can be registered. Only the
one registered last supports file transfer.
<Parameter>
• [14x17]/[14x14]/[10x14]/[10x12]/[8x10]
1. Select [Registation service pc] in the maintenance tree. • [ON]/[OFF]
2. In [Establish Name], enter the establish name entered in “7.1 Creating <DEFAULT>
the Data Storage Folder”.
All [ON]
<DEFAULT> n Enable QC
“Hospital Name”
Set whether to enable/disable the image QC function. In order to use the image QC
{IN:7.1_Creating the Data Storage Folder} function using U-Utility, this setting must be set to “Enable”.
<NOTE>
<Parameter>
Use one-byte alphanumeric when entering establish name.
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
3. In [Service PC IP Address], enter the IP address of the current PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable models). [ON]
<DEFAULT> n Set Target Den.
“172.16.1.20” Set the density of each step wedge used when recording the image QC pattern of
U-Utility.
<REMARKS>
Default IP address of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL/CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL/ <DEFAULT>
CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL: “172.16.1.20” [Density 1: 48, Density 2: 120, Density 3: 192]
n Printing Dmax
4. [Execute] Set whether to enable/disable the “density 4” step wedge for density measurement in
→ The PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) is registered with the the QC test pattern of U-Utility.
equipment.
<Parameter>
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
[OFF]
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-38
IN-39
n Auto F.D.C. 7.6.3 Setting 3
Select the timing for executing automatic density correction.
■ Set SMPTE (V2.0 or later)
<Parameter>
Command for setting parameters for outputting SMPTE test patterns using U-Utility.
[off]/ [every pack]
<Parameter>
<DEFAULT>
No. : [1] to [5]
[every pack] AE Title
Image Matrix : [1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
n Set Film information LUT Number : [LUT 1] to [LUT 8]
Set the position of the information to be printed on the film. Interpolation type : [SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH]
Interpolation algorithm/method : [NONE]/[CUBIC]
<Parameter>
<DEFAULT>
[Upper Left]/ [Upper Right]/ [Lower Left]/ [Lower Right]
1 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
<DEFAULT> 2 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
3 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
[Upper Left]
4 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
5 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
n Set Date
Set the system date and time.
n Ele Save Mode
Set the timer value when this equipment shifts into the sleep mode.(unit: minute)
<Parameter>
[0]/ [15]/ [30]/ [45]
<DEFAULT>
[15]
n Set Alarm
Set whether to enable/disable the operation panel beep.
<Parameter>
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
[ON]
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-39
IN-39.1
n Set Power Supply Synchronization (V2.0 or later)
Command for setting the power of this equipment to go OFF at the same time the
power of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL is turned OFF.
<REMARKS>
This is a function of the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool. When connecting CR-IR 346CL/
CR-IR 348CL, this setting is not required as the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool is not
installed.
<Parameter>
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
[ON]
n Power Supply Voltage
Set the voltage of the power to which the equipment is connected.
<Parameter>
[ON]/ [110V]/ [120V]/ [200V]/ [220V]/ [230V]/ [240V]
<DEFAULT>
[100V]
<REMARKS>
The default value of the 200V model is “200V”.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-39.1
IN-39.2
7.7 Installing the Modality Connection Software 2. Click the [Copy] button.
(to Support Multi Modalities) → [Success] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
The modality connection software needs to be installed in this equipment (with
software version V2.0 or later) so that it can support multi modalities. The [Input drive] and [Make or delete directory] of the [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool]
screen have the same functions as “Creating data storage folder”.
1. Load the modality connection software CD-ROM into the CD-ROM {IN:7.1_Creating the Data Storage Folder}
drive of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable model).
→ ”DRYPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and the [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool]
screen appears. 3. [OK]
<REMARKS> 4. Remove the modality connection software CD-ROM.
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DRYPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-
ROM. 5. Execute [Upgrading] of the PC-Utility.
*DRYPIX PRIMA
┣ +System information and setup
┣ +Transfer Indv. Data
┣ +Client Configuration
┣ +File Transfer
┣ +Upgrading
┃ ┣ Full Install
┃ ┗ Upgrading
<REMARKS>
There is a need to reboot the equipment after installing the modality connection
software.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-39.2
IN-39.3
7.8 Rebooting the Equipment
Rebooting the equipment enables various system settings changed.
1. Select [Reboot] on the PC-Utility.
*DRYPIX PRIMA
┣ +System information and setup
┃ ┣ Setting1
┃ ┣ Setting2
┃ ┣ Setting3
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Date
┃ ┃ ┣ Ele Save Mode
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Alarm
┃ ┃ ┣ Reboot
┃ ┃ ┣ Film Characteristic ID
┃ ┃ ┣ Power Supply Voltage
2. [Reboot] → [Execute]
→ After “System off. Please close this page” appears in the PC-Utility window,
close the window.
→ [End] is displayed on the operation panel. [End] means termination processing
is currently being carried out.
The equipment will reboot after about 75 seconds.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-39.3
IN-39.4
7.9 Disconnecting the Equipment 2. Close the logout window after the logout screen shows “It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.”
1. After rebooting the equipment, click the [Logout] button of the
maintenance tree.
→ The equipment performs reinitialization and [oFL] disappears.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [Now logging
out from the printer. Please wait.].
<REMARKS>
If the PC-Utility was ended by clicking , the logout screen will not be
displayed unless the pop-up blocked setting of the browser is canceled.
{MU:2.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
3. Reboot the PC-Utility.
4. Check that “DRYPIX PRIMA maintenance tree with Multi-Modality” is
displayed on the menu tree of the PC-Utility if the modality connection
software has been installed.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-39.4
IN-39.5
7.10 Client Settings (Multi Modality Equipment n Protocol
Bold: Default
Only) Item Function Value
Set parameters for the connected client using PC-Utility. Attribute list error Send error message for unexpect- 0: not indicate
Set the items according to the corresponding client settings in “Modality Connection (0107H Warning) ed data received or ignore warn- 1: indicate
List”. ing
N Event Report RQ Send event report or not 0: disable
<NOTE> 1: enable
The default values for client parameters listed below are the values for a newly Attribute Value Out Of Send error message for out-of- 0: not indicate
registered client and differ from the default values set for “default”, “FCR-CSL”, Range (0116H Warning) range data received or ignore 1: indicate
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST”. warning
Image Size Is Larger Than Notify that images have been 0: not indicate
imagebox reduced if too large to fit image 1: indicate
1. Newly register the client according to the installation environment. (B604H Warning) frame, or ignore warning
DRYPIX PRIMA Change Film Size Change film or not
┣ +System information and setup Enables film change. Can set 0: 0116H[W]
┣ +Transfer Indv. Data whether to send details of error
┣ +Client Configuration Details of errors are sent to the 272: 0110H[F]
client, without changing film
┃ ┣ Add Client
Details of errors (unique values 21317: 5345H[F]
┃ ┣ Delete Client for FUJIFILM systems) are sent to
┃ ┣ Change Client Name the client,without changing the
┃ ┣ +Clients film
┃ ┃ ┣ default Use System Timeout Set timeout of reception from cli- 0: No
┃ ┃ ┣ FCR-CSL ent or not 1: Yes
┃ ┃ ┣ WatchDRYPIXLink Presentation LUT Use LUT information sent from cli- 0: No
ent or not 1: Yes
┃ ┃ ┗ QC-TEST
Precede Picking Up Use precedent removal function 0: No
┃ ┣ Common
or not 1: Yes
┃ ┗ ********
Use Max/Min Density Which minimum density/maximum 0: Printer
density value is to be used. 1: Modality
2. Set the various parameters according to the client setting list shown Extension Format ID Select ID for differentiating when CR (XG-1/CR-Console)
below.For details of each feature, refer to “Service Mode (MU) 4.4 PC- extension format is used CR (Synapse)
Utility Command Details [PC3] Client Configration”. EV (Philips Easy Vision)
HM (Hitachi DR2000/Clavis
MU:2.4 [3]_Client Configration} view)
SM (Siemens)
Use Default Annotation Use Annotation or not 0: No
1: Yes
Change Base Color Change base color or not 0: disable
(Disable:110H[F]) 1: enable
Define Film Size of 11x14 Whether to interpret 11x14 size 0: 27.9x35.6
description as 25.7x36.4 cm or as 1: 25.7x36.4
27.9 x 35.6 cm
(The latter size is not used cur-
rently)
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-39.5
IN-39.6
n Magnify n LUT Common
Bold: Default Bold: Default
Item Function Value Item Function Value
Smoothing Type Selection of smoothing type 1: Sharp Default LUT Selection of LUT number used as 1 - 8 (1)
2: Medium default
3: Smooth
Illumination Lighting 0 - 65535 (2000) *1
Default Requested Magnification/reduction setting if 1: DECIMATE
Ambient Light Reflected peripheral light 0 - 65535 (10) *1
Decimate/Crop Behavior client does not send information 2: CROP
when images are reduced 3: FAIL Configuration Information Which LUT number is to be used 0: Printer
(Default LUT#) 1: Modality
Magnification Type Set the image enlargement/reduc- 0: NONE
tion processing type 1: CUBIC Default Illumination Which lighting setting is to be 0: Printer
used 1: Modality
Requested Image Size Specify the length of line to be 0 - 7000 (0)
printed on the image for one Default Ambient Light Which reflected peripheral light is 0: Printer
frame to be used 1: Modality
Default Magnification Type Which enlargement/reduction pro- 0: Printer Procedure Selection of tone correction pro- 0: SAR
cessing type is to be used 1: Modality cessing method 1: BAR
Default Smoothing Type Which smoothing type is to be 0: Printer
used 1: Modality *1: The Illumination and Reflective Ambient Light setting value total must be less than 4000.
Default Requested Image Which Requested Image Size is 0: Printer n LUT1 to LUT8
Size to be used 1: Modality
Bold: Default
Default Decimate/Crop Which Decimate/Crop Behavior is 0: Printer
Behavior to be used 1: Modality Item Function Value
Procedure Selection of enlargement/reduc- 0: A-VR Max Density Maximum density value (x100 for 0 - 300
tion processing method 1: SSM SAR, BAR is % value) (BAR: 0 - 100) *2
Edge Detection Perform enlargement/reduction 0: OFF Min Density Minimum density value (x100 for 0 - 300 *2
processing for edge or not 1: ON SAR, No setting for BAR)
Detection Level Edge detection level setting 1 - 1023 (600/800/600) γTable No Selection of γ table number of 11 - 99 (BAR: 1 - 10)
LUT *2, *3
Sharpness Sharpness adjustment parameter -70 - 300 (130/30/80)
setting Contrast Contrast setting (x100, No setting (BAR: 10 - 400) (100)
for SAR)
Character Color Character color setting 0: White
1: Black Number of Tuning Points No. of fine adjustment points for 0 - 5 (0)
SAR
Density Setting of x100 of density value to 1 - 300 (120)
be finely adjusted
Shift Setting of x100 value of move- -100 - 100 (0)
ment density value
Contrast Setting of x 100 of contrast of 10 - 400 (100)
points to be finely adjusted
*2: The default value differs in LUT1 to LUT8.
*3: Up to 20 can be entered for BAR but enter between 1 and 10.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-39.6
IN-40
n Output Format Item Function Value
Bold: Default Margin between Image Setting of image frame intervals 0 - 50 (20)
Item Function Value (Unit: pixel)
Film Size Setting of default film size 1: 8x10 Image Layout Setting of image layout method
2: 10x14 Positioning to film center 0: concentration
3: 14x14
4: 14x17 Center of remaining segment set 1: spread
5: 10x12 with frame interval value
Medium Type Setting of default film base color 1: Blue Processing Type Setting of density processing cal- 0: Type1
0: Clear culation method 1: Type2
Film Orientation Setting of film orientation 1: PORTRAIT Image Crop UPDWN Area Specifies whether the top or bot- 0: Upper
2: LANDSCAPE for CR Image tom is to be trimmed from a CR 1: Lower
image that is larger than the im- 2: Both
Border Density Background density (x100 of ac- 0 - 300 (300) age box.
tual value)
Image Crop Side Area for Specifies whether the left or right 0: Left
Polarity Reverse the black/white of the im- 1: Normal CR Image is to be trimmed from a CR image 1: Right
age 2: Reverse that is larger than the image box. 2: Both
Trim Whether there is image trim 0: OFF
1: ON n Annotation
Trim Width Width of the trim (pixels) 1 - 9 (1) Bold: Default
Trim Density Image trim density (x100 of actual 0 - 300 (0) Item Function Value
value)
Upper Left/Upper Center/Up- Setting of annotation position, and
Number of Copies Default number of print copies 1 - 99 (1) per Right/Lower Left/Lower entering
Print Priority Setting of print priority 1: HIGH Center/Lower Right
2: MEDIUM
3: LOW n Common
Default Number of Copies Which number of printed film is to 0: Printer Bold: Default
be used 1: Modality Item Function Value
Default Print Priority Which Print Priority is to be used 0: Printer Data Transfer Timeout Standby time setting when data is 30 - 3600 (300)
1: Modality suspended
Default Medium Type Film base color priority 0: Printer (Becomes error when setting time
1: Modality is exceeded)
Default Film Orientation Film orientation priority 0: Printer Association Count Maximum number of accesses to 1 - 10 (10)
1: Modality the equipment at the same time
by DICOM communication
Default Film Size Film size priority 0: Printer
1: Modality Logging DICOM DICOM communication log level 0: none
setting 1: normal
Default Border Density Which background density is to be 0: Printer 2: detail
used 1: Modality
Model Printer manufacture model name DRYPIX
Default Trim Which Trim setting is to be used 0: Printer
1: Modality Manufacturer Printer manufacturer name FUJIFILM Corporation
Defalut Polarity Which Polarity setting is to be 0: Printer Default Client Whether to use or not the [default] 0: Yes
used 1: Modality setting of the [Client:] list for un- 1: No
registered clients
Mirror Setting of film back/front 0: OFF (Normal)
1: ON (Mirror)
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-40
IN-41
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT 7. [F.D.C.] → [AUTO F.D.C.] → [Execute]
OPERATIONS → The 24-steps pattern is printing on film, and automatic density correction is
performed.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction At the same time, check that film conveyance operations are normal.
and Conveyance Operations
Output the 24-steps pattern for each tray, and perform automatic density correction
for each tray according to the density data measured by the density measurement
section.
At the same time, check that there are no problems in film conveyance from each tray.
1. Check that the equipment is in the standby state, and insert the
shutter into the film tray.
2. Press the [ENTER] button on the operation panel and pull out the film
tray.
3. Release the shutter lock and pull out the shutter.
4. Return the film tray back into the equipment.
<NOTE>
Do not push in until the tray locks.
5. Load the film, push in the film tray, and pull out the film pack.
6. Start the PC-Utility.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-41
IN-41.1
8.2 Checking Density
The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is
displayed on the PC-Utility. Check from this data that the density value is within the
specification.
1. [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [Execute]
2. Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown
below.
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
displayed on the PC-Utility.
Step Dmax 3.0
1 fog
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30±0.07
5 0.48±0.07
6 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07
8 1.02±0.07
9 1.20±0.07
10 1.38±0.07
11 1.56±0.07
12 1.74±0.07
13 1.92±0.07
14 2.10±0.09
15 2.40±0.09
16 2.70±0.11
17 3.00±0.11
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-41.1
IN-41.2
BLANK PAGE
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-41.2
IN-42
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for 8.3a Check when Using Multiple Film Trays
Image Unevenness and Scratches If using multiple film trays, check each tray as described below.
Print grid patterns from each tray, and check that the recording image format is 1. Insert the tray shutter.
within the specifications shown in the following figure. Also check that there are no
unevenness and scratches on the output film. 2. Press the [Enter] button to release the tray lock.
1. [Output Film] → [Grid] → [Number of copies]: “1” → [Execute] 3. Replace the tray.
→ The grid pattern is printed.
2. Measure the recording image format of the film. 4. Perform the check procedures of 8.1, 8.2, and 8.3.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE} 5. Perform these checks for all trays.
<REMARKS>
If the recording image format is out of the specifications, perform “Adjusting Main
Scanner”.
{MU:2.4 [8-1]_Adjusting Main Scanner}
3. Check that there are no problems in the output film image.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-42
IN-43
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function 8.4.1 Front Cover, Right Cover Interlock Check
Executing [Inter Lock Check] of the PC-Utility starts MG1 drive and scanner test.
Interlocks are provided at the front cover/right cover (SK1, SK2), and film loading unit Open the front cover during the MG1 drive and scanner test at this point to make sure
(SA2). MG1 and the LD being scanner tested stop, which indicates that the interlock function
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening the cover is working.
while executing the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.4 [10-4]_Interlock Function} 1. [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check]
2. [Execute]
→ MG1 drive and scanner test start.
3. After drive starts, open the front cover within 10 seconds.
l Driving System
Check that the MG1 drive sound stops.
l Scanner System
Check that the following error messages are displayed on the PC-Utility.
Command incompleted.
Error Code : 512
Error Detail : 0
<REMARKS>
• Error code “512” occurs when the front cover is opened while scanner test is
being executed.
It means that when the cover is opened, the interlock operates normally, and
the scanner stops,
• If the front cover is opened more than 10 seconds after MG1 drive starts,
“Command completed.” will be displayed as scanner test has been completed.
4. Close the front cover.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-43
IN-44
8.4.2 Checking the Film Tray Interlock 8.5 Checking Fan Operation
1. Insert the shutter into the film tray. The fans whose operations need to be checked are heat development unit cooling fan
(FANG1) and power supply unit cooling fan.
2. [Check Mechanism] → [Other Actuators] Check that the fan is operating and that the fan direction is appropriate.
3. [ON] → [Execute]
4. Pull the film tray.
5. [OFF] → [Execute]
6. [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check]
7. [Execute]
Check that no operating sound of the MG1 can be heard.
8. Push the film tray.
Check that operating sound of the MG1 can be heard.
9. [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check]
→Check that the MG1 drive sound stops.
<REMARKS>
The interlock check operation stops in 30 seconds.
10. Pull out the shutter.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-44
IN-45
8.6 Image QC Function 8.7 Power OFF
If the image QC function is set to “enable”, and if additional film tray is installed or the Shut down the equipment once.
film tray size is changed, enter the format baseline value of the image QC function.
{“DRYPIX PRIMA Reference Guide”} 1. Select [Reboot] on the PC-Utility.
<REMARKS> 2. [Shutdown] → [Execute]
Format baseline values by film size (Allowable range: 5%) → [End] is displayed on the operation panel. [End] means termination processing
35 x 43 cm: Format A; 304.0 mm, Format B; 406.0 mm is currently being carried out.
26 x 36 cm: Format A; 304.0 mm, Format B; 202.0 mm
→ “System off. Please close this page.” is displayed on the PC Utility.
25 x 30 cm: Format A; 202.0 mm, Format B; 202.0 mm
20 x 25 cm: Format A; 156.0 mm, Format B; 202.0 mm 3. Close the PC-Utility.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-45
IN-46
9. CHECKING CONNECTION 9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
n When Connecting CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL/CR-VW 674/CR-
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment IR 355V CL
1. Turn ON the power of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR- 1. Turn OFF the power of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-
IR 355V CL, or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL. If not set to simultaneous IR 355V CL. If not set to simultaneous power OFF, press the standby
power ON by WakeOnLan, press the standby switch on this switch of this equipment for five seconds.
equipment.
2. Check that the equipment starts termination operations and its power
2. Check that the equipment starts up. goes OFF.
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from n When Connecting CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL
Connected Equipment As the power of this equipment and that of CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL are not linked,
the two systems must be terminated individually.
<NOTE>
1. Output images from a divice on the network connected to this Terminate this equipment first. The logs of this equipment will be saved in CR-
equipment, and check that films are output normally.
IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL.
Check the following. The logs of this equipment will not be saved if CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL is
• Images are output without errors. terminated first.
• Images are normal.
1. Press the standby switch of this equipment for five seconds.
2. Check that the equipment starts termination operations and its power
goes OFF.
3. Shut down the CR-IR346CL/CR-IR348CL system.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-46
IN-47
10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT 10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at
Installation
10.1 Backing Up Individual Data Check if errors have occurred during installation using the PC-Utility, then save the
errors in the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) as necessary, and
Save individual data as backup data immediately after installation in the PC for delete then error logs.
servicing (or settings-changeable models). <REMARKS>
<REMARKS>
• Log data is send to the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) at the
Data strage folder: FTP root directory\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers/Establish name_Printer following conditions.
name\Indv • When CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL is shut
down
*DRYPIX PRIMA • When equipment data is transmitted
┣ +System information and setup • Data strage folder: FTP root directory\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers/Establish name_
┃ ┣ Setting1 Printer name\Log
┃ ┣ Setting2
┃ ┣ Setting3
┃ ┣ +Initialize
┃ ┣ +Log data
┣ +Transfer Indv. Data
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-47
IN-48
10.3 Installing the Equipment 10.3.2 Installing the Equipment on the Table and Securing
with Fixtures
Move the equipment to the place of installation to enable use by the user.
Perform the following installation work.
1. Place the equipment on a table meeting weight-tolerance conditions.
• If placing the equipment without fixing on the floor
{IN:3.4_Specifications of Installation Table}
• If securing the equipment on the table
• If securing the cart on the floor 2. Secure the equipment with fall prevention fixtures and bolts.
10.3.1 Installing the Equipment on the Floor without Using
Fixtures
1. Ensure the required installation space around the equipment.
2. Move the equipment to the desired place of the user.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-48
IN-49
10.3.3 Securing the Cart with Fixtures <REMARKS>
As an anti-earthquake measure, tighten the anti-earthquake measure fixture
1. Move the equipment to the position for embedding the anchor nuts. using the adjustable foot.
2. Rotate the two adjustable foots of the equipment with the hand and
ground to the floor.
3. Rotate the lower nut of the adjustable foot with a spanner and adjust
the height.
Rotate the two nuts equally. Adjust the amount the nut is adjusted so that even
load is applied to the adjustable foot.
<NOTE>
Rotate the nut until the caster distances from the floor.
4. Rotate the upper nut of the adjustable foot and push against the cart
to secure.
5. Secure the power cable and network cable to the cart using the tie
band.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-49
IN-50
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment
1. Clean all covers with a moist cloth.
CAUTION
Ensure cloth is free of residual water and water does not enter the device.
020-201-04E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-50
IN-51
APPENDIX 1. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR
EACH FILM SIZE
(Unit: mm)
Position 35 x 43 cm size 35 x 35 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
B 27.0 ±1.5 27.0 ±1.5 32.3 ±1.5 51.1 ±1.5 25.5 ±1.5
C 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 150.0 ±1.2
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 26.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0
| D–E | ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0 ±1.2 325.2 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-51
IN-52
APPENDIX 2. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE n Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective
Grounding of the Equipment and Clamp Locations
GROUNDING
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. additional protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical
Refer to Medical System Standard, IEC60601-1-1. standard of the country to which the equipment is to be installed.
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and
isolated supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>
for additional protective grounding” on the next page. 1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle connection of additional protective grounding.
electrical facility construction. 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile, move
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used the connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has hospital
room” are given below. grade earth terminal.
l Patient Environment 3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply
from the connected device will be separated from the main power supply.
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l Non-Medically Used Room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-52
IN-53
BLANK PAGE
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-53
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) All pages
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)
(DRYPIX 6000)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
PC-1
INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX 6000 - Checklist
Checklist 3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps preformed and record the 4.3 Checking Components
values determined at the time a DRYPIX 6000 is installed at a site. This document is
not intended to replace the installation checklist located in the DRYPIX 6000 Service 5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND INSTALLING OPTIONS
Manual but to be followed concurrently. 5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures
Before passing over this equipment to the customer, check the system connection and
output image after service as well as at installation. 5.2 Changing the Film Size
5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option)
Installation Information 5.4 Installing the Covers and Inserting the Trays
5.5 Applying the Label (Class 3B Panel Label)
Serial Number : ___________________ Software Ver. : ____________________
6. CONNECTING CABLES
Site Name : ___________________ Installed by : ____________________ 6.1 Connecting the Network Cable
6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network
Site Number : ___________________ Signature : ____________________
6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance
Room Number : ___________________ Date Completed : ____________________ • Record resistance value measured:
Resistance between L and N : ________Ω
Resistance between L and E : ________Ω
Resistance between N and E : ________Ω
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT
7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder
7.2 Power ON
7.3 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)
7.4 System Settings
7.4.1 Setting 1
7.4.2 Setting 2
7.4.3 Setting 3
7.5 Rebooting the Equipment
7.6 Client Settings
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PC-1
PC-2
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
• Check for film jamming Pass Fail
8.2 Checking Density
• Record density value displayed:
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.
When Dmax setting is set to “4.0 enable”,ensure that the density of the 17th step is 4.0 or higher using the external densitometer.
Step Dmax 3.0 Dmax 3.6 Tray1 Tray2 Tray3 Tray4 Tray5
1 fog fog
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30±0.07 0.30±0.07
5 0.48±0.07 0.48±0.07
6 0.66±0.07 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07 0.84±0.07
8 1.02±0.07 1.02±0.07
9 1.20±0.07 1.20±0.07
10 1.38±0.07 1.38±0.07
11 1.56±0.07 1.56±0.07
12 1.74±0.07 1.74±0.07
13 1.92±0.07 1.92±0.07
14 2.10±0.09 2.10±0.09
15 2.40±0.09 2.43±0.10
16 2.70±0.11 2.95±0.11
17 3.00±0.11 3.60±0.25
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PC-2
PC-3
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and Scratches
• Check for image unevenness and scratches: Pass Fail
• Measure recording image format:
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.
35 x 43 cm size 35 x 35 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
Film conveyance direction Film conveyance direction Film conveyance direction Film conveyance direction Film conveyance direction
20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2 20±2
B D C E B D C E B D C E B D C E B D C E
257.5±1.0 252.0±1.0 252.0±1.0
F G F G F G F G F G
354.0±1.0
430.0±1.0
364.5±1.0 303.0±1.0 201.0±1.0
354.0±1.0
354.0±1.0 DRY60_K0001.ai
Specified values Tray1 Tray2 Tray3 Tray4 Tray5
Position 35 x 43 cm size 35 x 35 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
B 27.0 ±1.5 27.0 ±1.5 32.3 ±1.5 51.1 ±1.5 25.5 ±1.5
C 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 150.0 ±1.2
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 26.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0
| D–E | ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0 ±1.2 325.2 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function
8.5 Checking Fan Operations
8.6 Image QC Function
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PC-3
PC-4
9. CHECKING CONNECTION Summary Test: Pass Fail
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment Leave the final film at the customer site.
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
10.1 Backing Up Individual Data Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
10.3 Installing the Equipment
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PC-4
PC-5
BLANK PAGE
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 Service Manual PC-5
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
05.20.2009 01(1) New release for the field (FM5546) All pages
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0
06.30.2009 02 1
DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100
(supports multi modalities), etc) (FM5568)
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 1, 2
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 1-3
12.10.2012 05 Revised (FM6078) Cover
SERVICE MANUAL
PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)
(FM-DL 100)
020-201-05E DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual
PC-1
INSTALLATION OF THE FM-DL 100 - Checklist
Checklist 3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps preformed and record the 4.3 Checking Components
values determined at the time a FM-DL 100 is installed at a site. This document is not
intended to replace the installation checklist located in the FM-DL 100 Service Manual 5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND INSTALLING OPTIONS
but to be followed concurrently. 5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures
Before passing over this equipment to the customer, check the system connection and
output image (from section 8 on) after service as well as at installation. 5.2 Setting Film Tray
5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option)
Installation Information 5.4 Installing the Cart (Option)
6. CONNECTING CABLES
Serial Number : ___________________ Software Ver. : ____________________
6.1 Connecting the Network Cable
Site Name : ___________________ Installed by : ____________________ 6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing (or Settings-Changeable Models) to the
Network
Site Number : ___________________ Signature : ____________________
6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance
Room Number : ___________________ Date Completed : ____________________ • Record resistance value measured:
Resistance between L and N : ________Ω
Resistance between L and E : ________Ω
Resistance between N and E : ________Ω
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT
7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder
7.1a FTP Server Settings (Only settings-changeable models)
7.2 DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART-PC) Settings (When Connecting CR-IR
391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL)
7.3 Setting the Firewall in CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR
355V CL (When using CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR
355V CL)
7.4 Power ON
7.5 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)
7.6 System Settings
7.6.1 Setting 1
7.6.2 Setting 2
7.6.3 Setting 3
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PC-1
PC-2
7.7 Installing the Modality Connection Software (to Support Multi Modalities)
7.8 Rebooting the Equipment
7.9 Disconnecting the Equipment
7.10 Client Settings (Multi Modality Equipment Only)
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
• Check for film jamming Pass Fail
8.2 Checking Density
• Record density value displayed:
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.
Step Dmax 3.0 35x43 tray 35x35 tray 26x36 tray 25x30 tray 20x25 tray
1 fog
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30±0.07
5 0.48±0.07
6 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07
8 1.02±0.07
9 1.20±0.07
10 1.38±0.07
11 1.56±0.07
12 1.74±0.07
13 1.92±0.07
14 2.10±0.09
15 2.40±0.09
16 2.70±0.11
17 3.00±0.11
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PC-2
PC-3
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and Scratches
• Check for image unevenness and scratches: Pass Fail
• Measure recording image format:
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.
Specified values 35x43 tray 35x35 tray 26x36 tray 25x30 tray 20x25 tray
Position 35 x 43 cm size 35 x 35 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
B 27.0 ±1.5 27.0 ±1.5 32.3 ±1.5 51.1 ±1.5 25.5 ±1.5
C 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 150.0 ±1.2
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 26.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0
| D–E | ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0 ±1.2 325.2 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function
8.5 Checking Fan Operations
8.6 Image QC Function
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PC-3
PC-4
9. CHECKING CONNECTION Summary Test: Pass Fail
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment Leave the final film at the customer site.
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
10.1 Backing Up Individual Data Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
10.3 Installing the Equipment
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PC-4
PC-5
BLANK PAGE
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PC-5
You might also like
- Complete Tutorial On Hacking Into Paypal Accounts PDF100% (10)Complete Tutorial On Hacking Into Paypal Accounts PDF3 pages
- REGIUS Sigma II Operation Manual (English) PDF75% (4)REGIUS Sigma II Operation Manual (English) PDF72 pages
- Configuration and Setup Guide For Dicom Image Viewer-Dicom Recording Software On Flash IIP - ENo ratings yetConfiguration and Setup Guide For Dicom Image Viewer-Dicom Recording Software On Flash IIP - E31 pages
- Fuji FM-DPL Film Processor - Maintenance Manual PDFNo ratings yetFuji FM-DPL Film Processor - Maintenance Manual PDF380 pages
- Carestream DirectView Classic CR System - CM - Info0% (1)Carestream DirectView Classic CR System - CM - Info8 pages
- DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual Preventive Maintenance (PM) (DRYPIX 6000)100% (3)DRYPIX 6000 / FM-DL 100 Service Manual Preventive Maintenance (PM) (DRYPIX 6000)24 pages
- MAC™ 2000 ECG Analysis System: Service ManualNo ratings yetMAC™ 2000 ECG Analysis System: Service Manual184 pages
- Imagepilot v193 Operation Manual Eifu en 21-0-0No ratings yetImagepilot v193 Operation Manual Eifu en 21-0-0556 pages
- DRYPRO SIGMA Service Manual With Parts List - A4A9IA01EN03 - 140514 - FixNo ratings yetDRYPRO SIGMA Service Manual With Parts List - A4A9IA01EN03 - 140514 - Fix214 pages
- AGFA Drystar 4500 Film Printer Service Manual - Revision 283% (6)AGFA Drystar 4500 Film Printer Service Manual - Revision 2662 pages
- Powerflex 700H:Internal Password/Backdoor Password Using HimNo ratings yetPowerflex 700H:Internal Password/Backdoor Password Using Him2 pages
- Konica Minolta Drypro Model 793 Service Manual PDFNo ratings yetKonica Minolta Drypro Model 793 Service Manual PDF582 pages
- Fujifilm CR Console Retake Analysis Operation ManualNo ratings yetFujifilm CR Console Retake Analysis Operation Manual22 pages
- Allengers FP4336RW FPD Callibration ProcedureNo ratings yetAllengers FP4336RW FPD Callibration Procedure16 pages
- SS1606-G001 - Implementation of Security Key For RU PC-ToOLNo ratings yetSS1606-G001 - Implementation of Security Key For RU PC-ToOL5 pages
- CR 30-X - Functional Description - Software Hardware Compatibility Chart CR 30-X System 2.0No ratings yetCR 30-X - Functional Description - Software Hardware Compatibility Chart CR 30-X System 2.06 pages
- DLP Grade 10 Assembly-Disassembly LessonNo ratings yetDLP Grade 10 Assembly-Disassembly Lesson10 pages
- Health Ergonomics: Nyoman Adiputra Prof - DR, DR, PFK, Moh, SP - Erg0% (1)Health Ergonomics: Nyoman Adiputra Prof - DR, DR, PFK, Moh, SP - Erg16 pages
- Device Network SDK (Card-Based Access Control) - Developer Guide - V6.1.5.X - 20230330No ratings yetDevice Network SDK (Card-Based Access Control) - Developer Guide - V6.1.5.X - 20230330526 pages
- Vessel: M/V: KENZ Date: .22/02/2022 SO No. KENZ 1/22No ratings yetVessel: M/V: KENZ Date: .22/02/2022 SO No. KENZ 1/221 page
- Bay o Net With Elsp Fuse Vs Drywell Canister Fusing Information Tc202002enNo ratings yetBay o Net With Elsp Fuse Vs Drywell Canister Fusing Information Tc202002en2 pages
- Adithya Institute of Technology CoimbatoreNo ratings yetAdithya Institute of Technology Coimbatore51 pages
- Engineering Change Notice (Field Change Notice) : ECN No. 2013-E-0051No ratings yetEngineering Change Notice (Field Change Notice) : ECN No. 2013-E-00512 pages
- Microsoft Azure Ai Fundamentals Certification Companion Guide To Prepare For The Ai900 Exam 1st Edition Krunal S Trivedi DownloadNo ratings yetMicrosoft Azure Ai Fundamentals Certification Companion Guide To Prepare For The Ai900 Exam 1st Edition Krunal S Trivedi Download82 pages